JP2024071644A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of a game. [Solution] A displacement means is provided that can displace a gaming ball to a first position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the gaming ball has difficulty entering the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in a specific gaming state that occurs based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control. When the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to the player. At least a first mode based on the execution of discrimination, a second mode based on the occurrence of a specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entry into the second ball entry means can occur. This can increase the interest of a game. [Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that they have won a lottery depending on the content of the variable presentation that is being executed.

JP 2006-345901 A

In gaming machines like the one above, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and a specific discrimination means is provided based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The ball-entry device has a means capable of generating a game state, a second ball-entry means that is different from the first ball-entry means and into which the ball-entry means launched by the launch means can enter, a displacement means that can displace the ball to a first position where the ball-entry means can enter the second ball-entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball-entry means than the first position, and a displacement control means that can at least perform a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that a predetermined value is awarded to the player when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the determination being made by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entry into the second ball entry means can occur.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is provided a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and a specific gaming state is determined based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. a means for generating a ball that can enter the ball; a second ball entry means that is different from the first ball entry means and into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter; a displacement means that can displace the ball to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first position; and a displacement control means that can at least perform a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to the player, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the determination made by the determination means can occur.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that at least a second mode can occur based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that at least a third mode can occur based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the regular electricity winning device. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls that have won in the regular electric winning device flowing into the outlet. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a ball that has won in the regular electric winning device flowing into the special electric operating port. A partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and a schematic diagram showing the structure of the V winning device. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow within the V winning device when the storage valve is in the storage state during a game where the reel hits. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve transitions from a storage state to a release state and the first movable valve is located in the guide position during a game where the reel hits the reel. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve transitions from a storage state to a release state during a game where the first movable valve is located in the passing position. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the area division setting and valid line setting of the display screen displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81. 12(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the start of a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) is displayed. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a normal pattern hit during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a gimmick hit during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. 14(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a V win occurs when a gimmick is hit during a V rush, as displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a gimmick is not hit during a V rush, as displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment; (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a) is displayed; and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a jackpot ending during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of a timer addition during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(b) is displayed. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a V rush ends as displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a V rush is extended as displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed. 17(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of a special screen at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during heaven mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed. 18(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of a chance presentation during a winning reel displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a normal pattern stopping during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b) is displayed. 19(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a special symbol stops during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of a lucky time presentation during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first win random number table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second win random number table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving table in the first embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a reel-hitting operation scenario table in the first embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a normal valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal valve operation scenario in the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving normal winning scenario in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13A to 13I are timing charts showing the flow of the game when a normal winning game is executed in the normal state in the first embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when a normal winning game is executed in the time-saving state in the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rear surfaces B to D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during special pattern variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the special electric start port winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a V passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel hit control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart change start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a stop-related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning-related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the reel-hitting related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing the performance update processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. A partially enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, which is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the regular electricity winning device. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a ball that has won in the regular electric winning device can flow down to the second special electric operating port. 90(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which a normal long winning game and a game with a special feature are executed simultaneously during a time-saving state (V rush) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which a normal long variation and a game with a special feature are executed simultaneously during a time-saving state (V rush) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment; (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a) is displayed; and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(b) is displayed. 91(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of an interrupted special pattern change displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than a predetermined period, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of an interrupted special pattern change displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment is longer than a predetermined period, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 91(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 91(b) is displayed. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the end condition of the role-winning game executed during the normal long win in the second embodiment is changed. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the end condition of the per-reel game executed during the normal long fluctuation in the second embodiment is changed. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the regular map hit type selection table in the second embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the regular map fluctuation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the second embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second role-performing operation scenario table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a normal map per operation scenario table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two time-saving normal map per scenarios in the second embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of three scenarios per time-saving normal chart in the second embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing special electric start port winning processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing general map-related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the normal change start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel-related process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the reel start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance update process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart remaining variation suggestion processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the map-related time update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) and (c) are figures showing an example of the display mode when entering danger time during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment, and (b) and (d) are figures showing an example of the display mode when a jackpot is discarded in danger time during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when a jackpot is interrupted by a danger time during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the danger time selection table in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing special line start port winning processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a danger time setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a third embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing counters and the like provided in a RAM of a main control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of a small win random number table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing during the first special pattern variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing a second special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing a second special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 out-of-range variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing processing during execution of a second special pattern variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing a second special pattern variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 off-axis stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a first read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a second read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a V passing process 4 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. This is a partially enlarged view of the game board in a modified example, and is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the regular electricity winning device. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation stop process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing special chart change start processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop-related process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the ending condition selection screen displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the pending status of each pattern when the display screen shown in Figure 145 (a) is displayed. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode after selection of an end condition displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the V Rush start screen displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the pending status of each pattern when the display screen shown in Figure 146 (b) is displayed. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process 6 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the sixth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the special line start port winning process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a switching process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a termination condition setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the termination condition related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode during a V rush displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second modified example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are partial perspective views showing a schematic structure of the right electric role in the seventh embodiment. A plan view showing a schematic diagram of the opening and closing cover of the right electric part in the seventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are partial enlarged views each showing a schematic view of a part of the right region in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a high probability state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when transitioning from a high probability state to a latent probability state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at a point in time when the second special pattern variation has not yet started during the latent state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the second special pattern variation has started during the latent state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of a display mode during a RUSH game executed during a latent state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the special reserved balls are changed during a rush game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the special reserved balls reach a specific number during a rush game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during Super RUSH gameplay displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode suggesting the end of Super RUSH gameplay displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of a display mode suggesting the end of a Super RUSH game, displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. A transition diagram showing a schematic flow of a game in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first win random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the small win random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second win random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table stored in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal table 7 stored in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 7 tables for guaranteed bonuses held in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 7 tables for potential bonuses held in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 7 table held in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the general map variation pattern selection table held in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process 7 executed by an MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 out-of-range variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 off-axis stop processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the small win processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the stop-related processing 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a preparation state setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart discard setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the ceiling effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 for special chart 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the special bonus setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a RUSH setting process 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board 13 of a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. An exploded oblique view showing the structure of a V winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. 13A to 13C are partial cross-sectional views of a V winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are partial cross-sectional views of a V winning device in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are partial cross-sectional views of a V winning device of a pachinko machine in a second modified example of the seventh embodiment. A transition diagram showing a schematic flow of a game in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during a potential winning state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. 13a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a display mode during a potential winning state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the eighth embodiment. This is a transition diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small win random number table 202ga executed by the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table stored in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 8 tables for special bonuses held in the ROM of the main control device in the 8th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 8th table for potential confirmation stored in the ROM of the main control device in the 8th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 8 table stored in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 deviation variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 deviation stop processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the small win process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during a potential winning state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during a potential winning state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during a potential winning state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a display mode during a potential winning state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table stored in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 9 table held in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the general map variation pattern selection 9 table held in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the 9th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the 9th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of an icon display number selection table held in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a continuous performance selection table held in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a preparation state setting process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the RUSH performance setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the ninth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the area division setting and valid line setting of the display screen displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a reach is achieved during normal times displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during normal times when a normal pattern hit is fluctuating and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a normal winning pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a chance zone is set in which a second special pattern lottery (variation) is performed during normal playing displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the third pattern is temporarily stopped during a special fluctuation performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the third pattern is restarted during a special fluctuation performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted in a special variable performance that is executed when the special pattern 2 reservation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 has not been acquired in the tenth embodiment. 10(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a first special pattern variation is executed while a special probability state is set and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment; and FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a second special pattern variation is executed while a special probability state is set and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. 10A is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case of a reach fluctuation pattern in the tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are timing charts showing the flow of presentations executed during the ending period of a big win game in the tenth embodiment. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern jackpot random number 10 table stored in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal jackpot random number 10 table stored in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 10 table in the 10th embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 10 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the 10th embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 10 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the 10th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 10 table in the 10th embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal 10 table in the 10th embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special rate/time-saving 10 table in the 10th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the normal special chart 2 performance selection table held in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 10th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of a special bonus performance selection table held in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. A transition diagram showing a schematic diagram of the flow of the game in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 10 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a tenth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the map-related processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th embodiment.

The following describes an embodiment of the present invention with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 87, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Figs. 3 to 5 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of a normal winning device 640 provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, Figs. 6 to 9 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of a special variable winning device 65 provided in the upper left area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, and Fig. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous ball entry ports 63, 64, 640 through which numerous nails and balls can enter is removably attached from the back side to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that launches balls into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. The details of the numerous ball entry ports provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends out to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 21). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that a reach is being reached just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, a special ball entrance 64, 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal pattern start gate (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the special ball entrance 64, the normal winning device 640, the V winning device 65, the variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 9) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. This first pattern display device 37 is arranged so that it is covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the play area) of the game board 13, which is made of transparent resin (e.g., ABS), and is configured so that the launched ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 (wins). In other words, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for displaying the result of a lottery (special symbol lottery) that is performed when a ball enters the special symbol entrance 64. In this embodiment, since a pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol is used, the first symbol display device 37 displays the result of one type of special symbol lottery. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to each type of special symbol.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, etc.) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot advantageous to the player, a symbol corresponding to a jackpot disadvantageous to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the light emission colors. In this embodiment, the light emitting means (7-segment display device) is configured to indicate various game states by combining light emitting colors, but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice. For example, the light emitting means may be configured to indicate various game states by varying the length of the period when it is lit and the period when it is off (blinking pattern).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is held when a ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 (a prize is won). Then, in the lottery for the special symbol, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery). Here, based on the judgment that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 650a of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by entering the specific winning port 650a. This jackpot game is played (if) after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed (determined display), and the jackpot game period is set to include an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set so that it is difficult for balls to enter the specific winning port 650a of the variable winning device 650), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special pattern indicating a jackpot win is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing when the specific winning port 650a opens during the jackpot game, making it possible to play the jackpot game smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, making it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being held immediately after the last round of play ends, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth switch between games.

The length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol may be set to a different length depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot being won or the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content executed after the jackpot game ends is set to be different from the game content at the time of the jackpot being won, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a performance can be configured to be executed that informs the player in advance of the game content that will be executed after the jackpot game ends during that ending period. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, if a player wins a jackpot where the game content at the time of the jackpot win and the game content executed after the jackpot play end are the same, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be predefined based on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time the jackpot is won, and the ending period of each jackpot game can be predefined according to the predefined content.

A specific explanation will be given later, but the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured so that the games that the player is allowed to play when the game state is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) are different from the games that the player is allowed to play when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and is configured so that games that are allowed to play during the time-saving state are more advantageous to the player (making it easier to play jackpot games) than games that are played during the normal state.

In other words, the content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game can be specified so that the ending period of a jackpot game in which a jackpot is won while the normal state is set and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is completed is longer than the ending period of a jackpot game in which a jackpot is won while the time-saving state is already set and a time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is completed. This makes it possible to set an ending period that is suitable for the player simply by playing the jackpot game according to the predefined content.

It is also possible to predefine periods other than the ending period to differ depending on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and it is also possible to make the opening period and interval period different. Even if the type of jackpot won is the same, it is also possible to configure the length of each period during the jackpot game to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. This makes it possible to make the player interested not only in which type of jackpot was won (the result of the lottery for the special pattern) but also in the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the types of jackpots that are determined include a 4R time-saving jackpot, in which the number of rounds of jackpot play is 4 and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is granted after the jackpot play ends, and jackpot types with different durations of the time-saving state (a time-saving jackpot (time-saving number of times 4) in which the time-saving state continues until four special symbol lotteries are performed without a jackpot win after the time-saving state is set, and a time-saving jackpot (time-saving number of times 15) in which the time-saving state continues until 15 special symbol lotteries are performed without a jackpot win).

In this embodiment, if the special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot, it is determined to be a miss and no special prize is awarded to the player. However, without being limited to this, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize game may be executed in which the player is given fewer special prizes than the jackpot described above (for example, a special prize to open the V winning device 65 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37 not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

In this embodiment, the game state is configured to be set to either a "normal state" or a "time-saving state." The normal state is a game state in which the probability of a jackpot for special symbols is set to a low probability (1/100) and the probability of a hit for normal symbols is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter referred to as the low probability state for special symbols and the low probability state for normal symbols), and the time-saving state is a game state in which the probability of a jackpot for special symbols is set to a low probability (1/100) and the probability of a hit for normal symbols is set to a high probability (300/1000) (hereinafter referred to as the low probability state for special symbols and the high probability state for normal symbols).

Here, a "4R jackpot (4 times time reduction)" refers to a jackpot that can transition to a time reduction state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after a jackpot game with a maximum of 4 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the variable winning device 650 for 4 rounds), and the time reduction state is set to 4 times after the jackpot game ends.

"4R jackpot (15 times time reduction)" refers to a jackpot that can transition to a time reduction state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after a jackpot game with a maximum of 4 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the variable winning device 650 for 4 rounds), and the time reduction state is set to 15 times after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, after the time-saving state is set, if a predetermined end condition (time-saving end condition) is met, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the number of time-saving times described above indicates the time-saving end condition. In other words, the time-saving end condition is met when the special pattern lottery is executed four times (the fourth special pattern variation is stopped) without winning a jackpot after the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving end condition is met when the special pattern lottery is executed 15 times (the 15th special pattern variation is stopped) without winning a jackpot after the time-saving state is set.

In other words, a "4R jackpot (4 times time reduction)" is a jackpot type that has a condition for ending the time reduction that is easier to achieve than a "4R jackpot (15 times time reduction)," so the "4R jackpot (15 times time reduction)" is a jackpot type that is easier for the time reduction state to continue than a "4R jackpot (4 times time reduction)," making it a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set as a condition related to the number of times the special pattern is drawn during the time-saving state (time-saving number of times). However, other configurations may be used as the time-saving end condition. For example, a time-saving end condition may be set that is established when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a jackpot and the number of times a specific lottery result (specific miss) has reached a predetermined number (e.g., three times), that is established when a predetermined time (e.g., 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time-saving state was set, or that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (e.g., general ball entry port 63a) during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., five balls).

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the play area formed on the surface of the playboard 13, there are arranged a plurality of left general ball entry ports 63a, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the port. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the special pattern entry port 64 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a normal pattern (second pattern) triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21), so that, for example, three symbol rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21) is performed by the first symbol display device 37. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle" symbol), a winning game (a normal symbol winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the normal symbol winning device 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time taken for the second symbol to change is configured to be constant (3 seconds) regardless of the result of the normal symbol lottery and the probability state of the normal symbol (low probability state, high probability state). By configuring in this way, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time taken for the normal symbol to change (normal symbol change time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to play a normal symbol winning game during the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol (a winning game of the normal symbol) is difficult to play to the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol is easy to play, it is possible to prevent a transition to the time-saving state during the execution of a long-term normal symbol change (a winning game of the normal symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) that was performed during the normal state, and a long period during which the normal symbol lottery is not performed during the time-saving state being set, even though the time-saving state is set.

In this embodiment, the game content of the normal symbol winning game (opening pattern of the electric device 640a) is different between the normal state and the time-saving state without changing the variation time of the normal symbol. Specifically, the normal symbol winning game executed during the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal symbol winning game executed during the normal state, that is, the ball is more likely to enter the special electric operation port 643. Specifically, when the normal state is set, a normal symbol winning game (normal normal symbol winning game) with a 0.1 second opening period is executed after a 4.1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a), and when the time-saving state is set, a normal symbol winning game (time-saving normal symbol winning game) with a 3 second opening period is executed after a 0.1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a).

In this way, by executing a normal winning game in which the period during which the electric device 640a is open varies depending on the probability state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easier to get the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal winning game in the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) than in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol).

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the ratio of balls that enter the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal winning game entering the special electric operation port 643 is configured to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. Specifically, it is configured so that balls that enter the normal electric winning device 640 during a time-saving normal winning game are more likely to enter the special electric operation port 643 than balls that enter the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal normal winning game executed in the normal state. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, it is difficult to make a ball enter the normal electric winning device 640, and even if a ball enters the normal electric winning device 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operation port 643, and when the time-saving state is set, it is easy to make a ball enter the normal electric winning device 640, and it is easy to make a ball enter the special electric operation port 643 when the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640.

In other words, in this embodiment, the state in which the ball is permitted to enter the special electric operating port 643 and the state in which it is restricted are varied depending on the set game state during the multiple steps until the shot ball enters the special electric operating port 643, so that the ease with which the ball can enter the special electric operating port 643 can be reliably varied depending on the set game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the game method that is advantageous to the player is the same (left-hand play) whether the game state is set in the normal state or in the time-saving state. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the lottery trigger for the normal symbol is established even in the normal state (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning win, the electric device 640a provided in the game area that the ball shot by the left-hand play can reach is controlled to open, so there was a risk that the ball would enter the normal electric winning device 640 during the execution of the normal normal winning game, which is more difficult to get the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 than the time-saving normal winning game.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that even if a ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal winning game that is executed in the normal state, the winning ball is unlikely to enter the special electric operation port 643. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration for executing a game using the same game method in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), even if a ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state, the ball can be prevented from entering the special electric operation port 643.

In this embodiment, the normal pattern variation pattern is configured to have the same variation time (3 seconds) in the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern) and the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern), but this is not limited to this. For example, when the game state is a low probability state of normal pattern (normal state) and a high probability state of normal pattern (time-saving state), the variation time of the normal pattern may be shorter in the high probability state of normal pattern (time-saving state). In addition, in the high probability state of normal pattern (normal pattern high probability), if the high probability state of normal pattern is made easier for the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 by using other methods such as increasing the winning probability of the normal pattern or increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric role 640a for one win, the time required for the variation display of the second pattern may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change and display is set to be shorter than normal during normal high probability, the probability of winning may be set to a constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time and number of openings of the electric device 640a for one win may be set to a constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the area to the left (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow most (approximately 100%) of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the left area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. After this lottery to determine whether the second symbol will win, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp 84 described above. There is one second symbol reserved lamp 84 for each of the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one time, but may be set to two or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right of the variable display device unit 80. In addition, in this embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 when played from the left are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only some of the balls pass through the through gate 67.

Next, the configuration of the normal electric winning device 640, which is in an open state when a normal symbol lottery is won, will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the normal electric winning device 640 is provided below the variable display unit 80, and an electric device 640a that can be changed between an open state that allows a ball to win inside it and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win than the open state is provided at a location where a ball flowing down the left side area (the area to the left of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front) of the play area formed on the game board 13 reaches. In this embodiment, the balls shot by left-handed play reach the normal electric winning device 640 at a rate of about 1 in 3 balls (if the electric device 640a is in an open state, it reaches a position where it can win the normal electric winning device 640).

The electric device 640a is normally kept in a closed state, and when a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric device 640a is variably operated to an open state for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined variable pattern to play a normal symbol winning game. In other words, in this embodiment, a state in which the ball is likely to win the normal symbol winning device 640 can be provided to the player by winning the normal symbol lottery and playing the normal symbol winning game.

As explained above, in this embodiment, by continuously playing left-hand games, it is possible to establish the lottery trigger for the normal symbol (allowing the ball to pass through the through gate 67), and it is also possible to have the ball enter the normal electric winning device 640, which opens when the lottery for the normal symbol is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to establish the lottery trigger for the special symbol by playing left-hand games. In addition, the variable winning device 650, which is variably operated by the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the special symbol, is also arranged in a position where the ball shot by playing left-hand games can enter.

This configuration allows players to always play using the same playing method (left-handed play) regardless of the game status, allowing players to play smoothly without the hassle of having to change playing methods.

Now, with reference to Figures 3 to 5, the configuration of the regular electric winning device 640 and the flow of balls that have won within the regular electric winning device 640 will be described in detail. Figure 3 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the regular electric winning device 640, Figure 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls that have won within the regular electric winning device 640 flowing into the outlet 644, and Figure 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls that have won within the regular electric winning device 640 entering the special electric operation outlet 643.

In this embodiment, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed, and if the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning combination, a normal symbol winning game is executed in which the electric device 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. When the electric device 640a is changed to an open state in this normal symbol winning game, the ball is in a state where it can win inside the normal electric winning device 640.

3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the normal electric winning device 640. This second movable valve 642 is configured to change in a predetermined variable pattern between a first state in which the ball that flows into the normal electric winning device 640 and flows down the first flow path 641a can be guided to the second flow path 641b that communicates with the special electric operating port 643, and a second state in which the ball can be guided to the third flow path 641c that communicates with the outlet 644, when a normal winning game is executed. In addition, the ball that wins the normal electric winning device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640s, and the number of balls that win the normal electric winning device 640 in one normal winning game is countable. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, when the number of balls that win the normal electric winning device 640 in one normal winning game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the normal winning game is ended at that point. In this embodiment, if the ball enters the special electric activation port 643, the prize balls (four balls) are paid out, but if the ball enters the outlet port 644, no prize balls are paid out.

This regular electric winning device 640 has a cover made of transparent acrylic resin so that the player can see the ball flow inside the regular electric winning device 640, and the cover is attached to the game board 13. Therefore, the player can see the ball flow inside the regular electric winning device 640, so the player can enjoy the behavior of the balls that have won the regular electric winning device 640.

The electric device 640a provided in the normal electric winning device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition 640k2 as the base of rotation, and is configured to be variable between a closed state (see FIG. 3) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640, and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which it is easier for the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 than in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 3, the electric device 640a in the closed state is configured to be stored in the normal electric winning device 640, and specifically, the tip of the first partition 640k1 is configured to protrude to the left of the vertical line of the second partition 640k2 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and the electric device 640a in the closed state is configured to be stored below the tip of the first partition 640k1. This configuration makes it difficult for the closed electric device 640a to come into contact with the ball shot by left-handed play, making it difficult for the electric device 640a to be damaged.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, the probability (ease of winning) of a ball that has entered the normal electric winning device 640 winning the special electric operation port 643 is varied depending on the game state set at the time when the normal winning game is executed. Specifically, by varying the period from when the normal winning game is executed until the electric role 640a is controlled to open in a predetermined opening pattern (normal winning opening period), a ball that has entered the normal electric winning device 640 in a normal winning game executed in the normal state is more difficult to win the special electric operation port 643 than a ball that has entered the normal electric winning device 640 in a normal winning game executed in the time-saving state.

In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the same play method (left-handed play) is used during both the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 during the normal state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a normal winning game performed during the normal state is configured to be performed in which the ball is more difficult to enter the normal electric winning device 640 than the normal winning game performed during the time-saving state. This configuration also suppresses the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 during the normal state. In other words, in this embodiment, in addition to the measures to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state than during the time-saving state, there is a measure to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operation port 643 when the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state than when the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during the time-saving state. In this way, by providing a multiple-stage configuration that prevents balls from entering the special electric operation port 643 during normal operation, it is possible to more reliably prevent this.

Next, referring to FIG. 4, the flow of the ball when the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 in a normal winning game that is executed when the normal state is set will be explained. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the ball that enters the normal electric winning device 640 in a normal winning game in the normal state. In this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from having to change the playing method, the game is configured to be always playable by left-handed play. Therefore, even in the normal state, which is a state with a low probability of winning a normal pattern, there is a risk that the lottery trigger for the normal pattern will be established (the ball will pass through the through gate 67) and the ball will enter the normal electric winning device 640 when a normal winning game is executed.

In other words, the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) is a game state in which it is more difficult to get a ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 compared to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) in which it is easier to get a ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640. However, in this embodiment, the same game method (left-hand hit game) is executed in the normal state and the time-saving state, so there is a possibility, albeit a low probability, that a ball may enter the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state.

As mentioned above, the regular electric winning device 640 is provided with a special electric operation port 643 which triggers the execution of a winning game (a game with a winning feature) by opening the V winning device 65. If a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during normal operation and a game with a winning feature is executed, there is a problem that an excessively advantageous game is provided to a player playing in normal operation.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ratio of balls that enter the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state to enter the special electric operation port 643 is configured to be different from the ratio of balls that enter the normal electric winning device 640 during the time-saving state to enter the special electric operation port 643. Specifically, when a normal winning game is played in the normal state, the period from the start of the normal winning game to the time when the electric device 640a is opened (first opened) is set longer than when a normal winning game is played in the time-saving state, and the ball can enter the normal winning device 640 only when the second movable valve 642, which moves based on the start of the normal winning game, maintains the second state (a state in which a ball that has entered the normal winning device 640 can be guided to the outlet 644).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 4, when a ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal winning game executed in the normal state, the ball flows down the first flow path 641a, which is designed to have a ball flow period of about 0.5 seconds, and is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 located in the second state, and enters the outlet 644 (the period from reaching the second movable valve 642 to entering the outlet 644 is designed to be about 0.3 seconds). By configuring in this way, even if a ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player playing in the normal state from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 during the normal state, there is no need to use a special configuration to prevent the ball from entering the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal winning game executed during the normal state, which increases the design freedom of the game board 13.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in a normal winning game executed in the normal state, the timing at which the second movable valve 642 is changed to the second state (at the start of the normal winning game) is earlier than the timing at which the electric device 640a is opened (4.1 seconds after the start of the normal winning game), so that even if the normal winning game is started with the second movable valve 642 in the first state, the ball will not reach the second movable valve 642 while the second movable valve 642 is being changed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the second movable valve 642 being changed and the ball that has won the normal winning device 640 from coming into contact with each other, which would cause balls to get stuck in the normal winning device 640 or cause the second movable valve 642 to break down.

In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 provided in the normal electric winning device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the out port 644, no prize balls are paid out. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a ball enters the out port 644, a larger number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) may be paid out than when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of the normal pattern according to the game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the player is given more prize balls as a privilege than in the time-saving state, and when the time-saving state is set, the player is given fewer prize balls than in the normal state, as well as a bonus game that is not (hard to be) given in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the normal pattern.

It may also be configured to pay out the same number of prize balls (4 balls) when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and when the ball enters the outlet 644. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that it is difficult to tell whether the ball that entered the normal electric winning device 640 entered the special electric operation port 643 or the outlet 644. As a result, since the player cannot tell which ball entry port (special electric operation port 643, outlet 644) the ball entered based on the number of prize balls paid out, it is possible to execute a performance that makes the player think that after the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640, whether or not a winning game (a winning game with a special feature) that opens the V winning device 65 is executed is determined by lottery, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the ball detection sensor 640s to pay out prize balls (four balls) when it detects a ball, so that the prize balls awarded to the player based on the ball's entry into the regular electric winning device 640 can be quickly paid out to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric device 640a is in the open position, the tip of the first partition 640k1 and the electric device 640a are approximately parallel to each other, forming a ball flow path between them. Therefore, when the electric device 640a in the open position receives a ball, the impact can be prevented from causing the ball to bounce out of the electric winning device 640.

Next, referring to FIG. 5, the flow of balls when a ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 in a normal winning game that is executed when the time-saving state is set will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls that enter the normal electric winning device 640 in a normal winning game during the time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when a normal winning game is executed during the time-saving state, the period from the start of the normal winning game to the electric device 640a becoming in the open state (first open state) is set shorter than that of a normal winning game executed during the normal state, so that the electric device 640a becomes in the open state at the timing when the second movable valve 642 maintains the first state (a state in which a ball that has entered the normal winning device 640 can be guided to the special electric operating port 643).

Therefore, when the ball that has entered the normal electric winning device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640), the second movable valve 642 is in the first state, so the ball flows down the second flow path 641b that communicates with the first flow path 641a (the flow period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds) and enters the special electric operating port 643. Then, based on the entry of the ball into the special electric operating port 643 detected by a detection means (proximity sensor) not shown, a role-playing game is started in which the V winning device 65 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is in the first state, the second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable to a position where the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is unlikely to come into contact with the second movable valve 642. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from frequently coming into contact with the second movable valve 642 and causing the second movable valve 642 to break down. In addition, as will be described in detail later, when a normal winning game is executed during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is opened 0.1 seconds after the start of the normal winning game, and the ball is able to win the normal winning device 640. Therefore, the shortest time from when a normal winning game is played until the ball reaches the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (the sum of 0.1 seconds from when a normal winning game starts until the electric device 640a opens, and 0.5 seconds until the ball that has won the normal winning device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642).

The second movable valve 642 is configured to perform variable operation at the same time as the normal winning game starts, and the variable operation period (the period required to change from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state)) is 0.1 seconds. In addition, since the second movable valve 642 is configured to perform variable operation 1 second after the electric role 640a is closed during a normal winning game, the second movable valve 642 is configured to perform variable operation when a period (1 second) twice the period (0.5 seconds) until the ball that entered the normal winning device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642 just before the electric role 640a is changed to the closed state has elapsed. Therefore, even during a normal winning game that is executed during the time-saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the second movable valve 642 to come into contact with the ball during variable operation.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. To the left of the variable display unit 80 (to the left as viewed from FIG. 2), a V winning device 65 is provided so that a ball shot by left-handed play and flowing down the left-hand area can win a prize. Here, referring to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, the specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and the flow of a ball that wins in the V winning device 65 will be explained. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 provided in the normal electric winning device 640, a role-winning game that opens the V winning device 65 is executed. Then, when a ball enters the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65, a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, in addition to the trigger for playing a jackpot game (special jackpot game) that occurs when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, there is also a trigger for playing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that occurs when a ball enters a specific winning hole (V winning hole 165). In this way, by providing multiple triggers for playing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that they will never tire of.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 6. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening/closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which it is easier for a ball to win inside the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a ball to win than in the open state. This opening/closing door 65a is provided in a position (see FIG. 2) that can be reached by a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13, and is changed to the open state when a game involving a winning device is executed.

In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b through which the balls that pass through the open/close door 65a flow down is formed in the space between the first partition 65k1 and the second partition 65k2, and a storage valve 66a is provided at a position where the balls that flow down the first flow path 65b (flow period 0.5 seconds) reach. A storage section capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of this storage valve 66a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 65 during a game per role is temporarily stored in the storage section. In addition, a storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a, and is configured to be able to detect that a ball is stored in the storage section. Furthermore, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting balls that have won the V winning device 65 is provided upstream of the first flow path 65b, and based on the detection of a ball by the ball detection sensor 65s2, the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 during play on a per-unit basis is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at a position where the ball that won the V winning device 65 flows down immediately after it has won, it is possible to prevent a situation in which more than the specified number of balls win the V winning device 65, and to immediately award prize balls to the player during play on a per-unit basis.

In addition, a second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first outlet 163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the second flow path 65c is configured so that the balls that flow down the first flow path 65b do not flow directly into it, but in a state where balls are stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a, the subsequent balls that flow down the first flow path 65b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a and are guided to the second flow path 65c. The first outlet 163a provided downstream of the second flow path 65c is a ball inlet for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the ball that flows down the second flow path 65c (flowing down period 0.1 seconds) and enters the first outlet 163a flows down a ball discharge path not shown and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be variably operated between a storage state in which balls can be stored and a release state in which it is more difficult to store balls than in the storage state, depending on the progress of the game with the per-role feature (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the game with the per-role feature is executed). When the storage valve 66a is in the release state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d are connected, and balls that have flowed down the first flow path 65b or balls that have been stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flow down the third flow path 65d. This third flow path 65d is a flow path formed in a straight line in the vertical direction with a width of about 15 mm, formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 65k1 and the third partition 65k3.

A first movable valve 66b is disposed at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. This first movable valve 66b is configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 between a guide position (protruding position) where it can receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d and a passing position (submerged position) where it cannot receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d. Specifically, it is configured to be movable in response to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and is driven and controlled by the main control device 110. When the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on (when electricity is applied), the first movable valve 66b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) in which it retreats from within the V winning device 65, and when the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b moves to a guide position (a position protruding from the game board 13) in which it protrudes into the V winning device 65.

The first movable valve 66b in the induction position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. 6, the downstream end side of the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b is configured to be inclined downward toward the fourth flow path 65e. Therefore, when the first movable valve 66b is in the induction position (protruding position), a ball that flows down the third flow path 65d (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) flows down the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b toward the fourth flow path 65e. A second outlet 163b is provided downstream of the fourth flow path 65e, and the ball that flows down the fourth flow path 65e (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) enters the second outlet 163b. This second outlet 163b, like the first outlet 163a described above, is a ball inlet for discharging balls that enter the slot to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and balls that enter the second outlet 163b flow down a ball discharge path (not shown) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 66b is in the passing position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f are connected, and the ball that flows down the third flow path 65d (flowing down for 0.2 seconds) flows into the fifth flow path 65f (flowing down for 0.1 seconds). And, the V winning hole 165 is provided downstream of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning hole 165 is a winning hole that can be a trigger for executing a jackpot game, and if a ball enters the V winning hole 165 while a jackpot game is not being executed, the jackpot game is executed.

6, the V winning device 65 is provided with a first outlet 163a and a second outlet 163b. By configuring in this manner, when the storage valve 66a is in a storage state, the ball that has won the V winning device 65 can be reliably prevented from flowing into the flow paths (third flow path 65d, fourth flow path 65e, fifth flow path 65f) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 66a is in a release state. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, for example, the first outlet 163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 65c and the fourth flow path 65e may be connected, and the storage valve 66a may be in a storage state, and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65c may enter the second outlet 163b. In this case, the third partition 65k3, which is provided vertically in a straight line in Fig. 6, can be tilted downward and to the right as viewed from the top to the bottom, that is, the extension line of the partition 65k3 toward the bottom end side is to the right of the fourth partition 65k4 (the right side as viewed from the perspective of Fig. 6). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the balls that flow down the second flow path 65c from flowing into the fifth flow path 65f.

In this way, in this embodiment, there are two triggers for playing a jackpot game: a jackpot game may be triggered by winning a jackpot through a lottery for a special symbol, and a jackpot game may be triggered by a ball entering the V winning port 165 during a game involving a hit on a role. Hereinafter, when describing jackpot games by different triggers, a jackpot game that is triggered by a ball entering the V winning port 165 will also be referred to as a V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 65 of this embodiment is configured to be in an open state where a ball can win a prize when a hit game is played on the reel, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d, and whether or not the ball will win a prize in the V winning port 165 is determined depending on the operating status of the first movable valve 66b when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the first movable valve 66b is constantly moving in a moving pattern in which it is in the induction position for 5 seconds (the time when the ball cannot enter the V entry port 165) and in the passage position for 0.5 seconds (the time when the ball can enter the V entry port 165), so the rate at which balls that flow down the third flow path 65d enter the V entry port 165 is approximately 1/11.

In addition, even if multiple balls enter the V winning device 65 in one play with a feature, the operation of the storage valve 66a is controlled so that only one ball flows down the third flow path 65d, so that the ratio is such that one big win game is played for every 11 plays with a feature.

Next, referring to Figures 7 to 9, the contents of the ball flow that wins the V winning device 65 during the execution of the game with a per-applica hit will be explained. First, referring to Figure 7, the ball flow during the first half of the game with a per-applica hit (the period during which the storage valve 66a is in a storage state) will be explained. Figure 7 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow within the V winning device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in a storage state during the game with a per-applica hit. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the storage valve 66a is configured to be controlled so that it is in a storage state from the time the game with a per-applica hit is executed until the V winning device 65 is closed. If multiple balls enter the V-winning device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage section formed in the storage valve 66a, and the next winning ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the outlet 163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 66a is in a storage state, all winning balls (e.g., ball P2) other than ball P1 stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a are configured to enter the outlet 163a, so multiple balls do not remain inside the V winning device 65. Also, the storage state of the storage valve 66a is released after the V opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after operational control is executed to close the door), so it is possible to ensure that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d during one play of the device is limited to one.

By configuring it in this way, the ease with which a ball can enter the V winning port 165 does not change depending on the timing of the ball entering the V winning device 65 during play with a per-game device, or the number of wins, so fair play can be provided to all players.

Next, referring to FIG. 8, the ball flow (later period of the game with a per-game feature) when the storage valve 66a transitions from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 66a transitions from the storage state to the release state during the game with a per-game feature. As shown in FIG. 8, when the V-opening door 65a is closed and a new ball cannot enter the V-winning device 65, the storage valve 66a transitions to the release state (shown by a dotted line in the figure), and the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, since the first movable valve 66b is located in the induction position, the ball P1 rolls down the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, flows down the fourth flow path 65e, and enters the second outlet 163b.

On the other hand, the ball flow when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, and the first movable valve 66b is in the passing position, will be explained with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 66a transitions from the stored state to the released state during a per-play game. As shown in FIG. 9, if the first movable valve 66b is in the passing position when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b, the ball flows down the fifth flow path 66f and enters the V winning hole 165.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation continues. A special ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this special ball entrance 64, a special ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the special ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37a. In addition, when a ball enters the special ball entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a bonus. In this embodiment, the ball is configured so that about 1 in 15 balls shot by left-handed play can enter the special ball entrance 64.

As shown in FIG. 10, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 21). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, the second pattern display device, and the second pattern hold lamp. In addition, when a jackpot game is executed, a specific winning port solenoid 209a for driving the opening and closing door to change the specific winning port 650a of the variable winning device 650 between an open state and a closed state, a V winning port solenoid 209b for driving the opening and closing door of the V winning device 65, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, a first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the first movable valve 66b provided in the V winning device 65, a second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the normal power winning device 640, and other solenoids 209z for driving various other devices are connected to the solenoids 209, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches not shown (such as switches that detect when a ball has entered each ball entry port and switches that detect when a ball is located at a specific position), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply unit 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 11 to 19. Figs. 11(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (L1 to L3) are displayed, upper, middle, and lower (see Fig. 11(b)). The decorative patterns (which change in response to the changing display of the third pattern (special pattern) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81) are each composed of 10 main patterns each with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes according to the identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using a display mode corresponding to each identification information, the result of the lottery for the special symbols can be visually notified to the player, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 described below is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery for the special symbols by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, center, and right. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling up and down periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the main display area Dm has one active line L1 extending in the left-right direction. When each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, if the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination of the same main symbols in this first embodiment), a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the normal pattern may be displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). In this case, the player may be notified in a manner that is difficult to understand whether the variable display of the third pattern being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special pattern or the variation of the normal pattern. This makes it difficult for the player to understand what kind of benefit will be granted depending on the result of the variable display of the third pattern being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Also, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to execute both the variable display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special pattern and the variable display corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal pattern, it may be configured to switch the target of the third pattern depending on the game content (game state) being executed. For example, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special pattern during the normal state, and execute the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal pattern during the time-saving state. In this case, it is preferable to display the variable third pattern in correspondence with the pattern type in which a lottery advantageous to the player (a lottery in which the player pays more attention to the lottery result) is executed. On the other hand, the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different to correspond to the type of the variable pattern. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, top and bottom, with the bottom 2/3 being the main display area Dm which displays the changing third pattern, and the remaining top 1/3 being the secondary display area Ds which displays preview effects, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, left, center, and right, and three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order in the left pattern column Z1, and the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in ascending order in the center pattern column Z2 and the right pattern column Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols are displayed on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → center symbol row Z2 during each game. This state of display is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbols for a certain period (one second or more), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether or not the combination of third symbols corresponds to a jackpot (whether or not the lottery result of the special symbols is a jackpot). In addition, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbols are stopped, a jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot game starts, and a jackpot video (opening performance) is displayed.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed in a stopped state corresponds to a miss and there is a reserved ball, after one second of stopped display (determined display), a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball will start. Note that if there are multiple reserved balls, the lottery will be performed based on the reserved ball that corresponds to the oldest ball entered.

On the other hand, when there are no reserved balls and the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed display) for one second, the third symbol continues to be displayed as a stopped symbol. This state continues until a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed or a new game ball enters the special symbol entrance 64. If a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was displayed as a stopped symbol, a demo effect is displayed indicating that no game is being played. It is rare for a player to continuously shoot game balls for a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) without any balls entering the special symbol entrance 64, and in most cases where the third symbol continues to be displayed as a stopped symbol for a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds), this is due to the player quitting the game and no game being played on the pachinko machine 10 at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing, and a demo performance is started. This allows a player who is about to select a pachinko machine 10 to start playing to easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on whether or not a demo performance is being displayed. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the special ball entrance 64 before the predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball is executed.

The secondary display area Ds is elongated horizontally above the primary display area Dm, and is further divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, sub-area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have entered the special ball entrance 64 and through gate 67 but have not yet been changed, and sub-areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas that display preview performance images.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a video is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely than usual to transition to a jackpot. In the small area Ds2 in the center, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears, providing a preview performance.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 while the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable display, the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Also, if a ball enters the through gate 67, the number of balls that enter is reserved up to one, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Also, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, there are no reserved balls. The left half of small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on balls entering the special ball entrance 64, and the right half of small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on balls entering the through gate 67. In the example of FIG. 11(b), four reserved ball number patterns are displayed in the left half of small area Ds1, while no reserved ball number patterns are displayed in the right half, indicating that there are four reserved balls with special patterns but zero reserved balls with normal patterns.

In this embodiment, the balls entering the special ball entrance 64 are reserved up to four times, and the balls entering the through gate 67 are reserved up to one time. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or the four divided areas may be displayed in a different manner (e.g., color or lighting pattern) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm, but the display area may be formed in other ways, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be formed below the main display area Dm. In this case, the display area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be variably formed according to the set game state. This allows the player to easily understand that a different game state has been entered just by looking at the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, in a state in which the player is required to pay attention to the display state of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which a variable display of the third pattern is being executed, which indicates that the lottery result of the special pattern indicates a high expectation of winning a jackpot, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be made smaller or the sub-display area Ds may be made invisible.

<About the content of the performance in the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, the contents of the performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 12 to Fig. 19. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. This time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery reaches a specified number of times (until a predetermined end condition of the time-saving state is established), and when the special symbol lottery is executed a specified number of times, the end condition of the time-saving state is established and the normal state is set.

The time-saving state is a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and is configured so that an open state in which a ball can enter the normal electric winning device 640 by hitting a normal symbol is more likely to be set than when the game state is in the normal state.

When a normal symbol win occurs and the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 in the normal electric winning device 640, a role-playing game is executed, and a game is executed to make the ball enter the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65.

In this embodiment, a game ball shot aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a 100% probability. In addition, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed, and if the time-saving state is set, the lottery is designed to have a 3/10 probability of winning. If a normal symbol is won in the lottery, a normal symbol winning game is executed in which the electric role 640a is opened.

The normal winning game that is executed during the time-saving state is executed by continuing to play with the left hand, and the electric device 640a is in an open state for a period (3 seconds) during which the ball can almost always (approximately 100%) enter the normal winning device 640.

Furthermore, in the normal winning game that is executed during the time-saving state, most of the balls that enter the normal winning device 640 are configured to enter the special electric operation port 643, and the winning game of the special device is executed when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643. Then, when the winning game of the special device is executed, the V winning device 65 is opened, and the balls that enter the V winning device 65 enter the V winning port 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the entry of the ball into the V winning port 165 is the trigger for the execution of the jackpot game (V jackpot game).

In other words, during the time-saving state, it is easier to play a game in which the aim is to win a jackpot by having the game ball enter the V winning slot 165 (V entry) (special electric game) than to play a game in which the aim is to win a jackpot by drawing a special symbol (special symbol game), so the player will play the special electric game while hoping for a V entry by hitting the role (V jackpot game).

As described above, in this embodiment, in order for the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 as a special electric game (to pass the ball through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery), it is necessary to shoot the ball aiming at the left side area of the game board 13. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game is being played aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 (left-handed play), the ball will also enter the special symbol ball entry port 64, so during the time-saving state, both the special symbol game (game in which a lottery for special symbols is performed) and the special electric game (game in which a lottery for normal symbols is performed) are being played.

The time-saving state, in which special electric play is more advantageous to the player than special symbol play, is configured to continue until the time it takes for the special symbol lottery executed by special symbol play to reach a specified number of times (i.e., the specified number of times the special symbol changes), has elapsed. Therefore, when the game state transitions to the time-saving state, the basic playing method in this embodiment during the time-saving state is to play while hoping for a V win through special electric play, until the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, which is the trigger for the time-saving state to end and transition to the normal state.

In order to communicate this time-saving game state to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, various effects are executed on the third pattern display device 81. Details will be described later with reference to Figures 12 to 19, but when a jackpot game is executed and the jackpot ends, the game state transitions to V Rush mode to indicate that the game state is in a time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, and a notification is issued that the time-saving state has been set. Next, various effects during V Rush are explained. For ease of explanation, the time-saving state will be referred to as "V Rush" below.

First, referring to FIG. 12(a), the jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot (game) ending screen. When the final round of the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "After the jackpot ends, V-Rush will start!!", clearly indicating to the player that the game will move to V-Rush mode, indicating that a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Then, the main display area Dm displays the comment "Get 40 seconds of V-Rush period", with the remaining time period mode 801 for indicating the duration of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends being "40 seconds".

Here, the display content of the remaining time short period mode 801 will be explained. In this embodiment, as described above, the time-saving state is terminated when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches a specified number (for example, four times). Therefore, the time-saving state continues until the time until the special symbol is drawn the specified number of times (i.e., the total time of the special symbol fluctuation for the specified number of times) has elapsed. The remaining time short period mode 801 is displayed in a display mode indicating the total time of the special symbol fluctuation until the time-saving state termination condition is satisfied.

Next, the reserved status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12(a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 12(c). FIG. 12(c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories of special symbols and a maximum of one reserved memory of normal symbols can be stored. In FIG. 12(c), the status of each symbol is explained using an active special symbol th0 for explaining the status of the active special symbol change, special symbol 1 reserved th1 to special symbol 4 reserved th4 for explaining the winning information of the reserved special symbol, an active normal symbol fh0 for explaining the status of the active normal symbol change, and normal symbol 1 reserved fh1 for explaining the winning information of the reserved normal symbol.

In FIG. 12(c), four reserved special symbols, each with a 10-second fluctuation pattern, are stored in special symbol 1 reserve th1 through special symbol 4 reserve th4. In other words, the duration of this time-saving state is set to 40 seconds, which is the combined value of the fluctuation time for the four special symbol lotteries. Therefore, the remaining time period display mode 801, which indicates the duration of the game state that is advantageous to the player, displays the text "40 seconds," making it possible to clearly notify the player of how long the V Rush period will last.

As described above, in this embodiment, the duration of the V Rush, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed in a specific number of seconds as shown in the remaining time period display mode 801, but any other method that indicates the remaining duration of the duration may be used, and an indicator or the like may be used to notify the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a more thrilling experience.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the remaining time period display 801 is displayed in a display mode that shows all of the "40 seconds" calculated as the duration of the V rush, but this is not limited to this. At the time of notifying that a V rush is about to begin, only a portion (e.g., 30 seconds) of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush (e.g., 40 seconds) may be notified, and a value corresponding to the unnotified portion (e.g., 10 seconds) may be additionally notified while the V rush is being executed.

In this case, for example, if the time-saving count is set to four, the sum of the fluctuation times of the special symbols corresponding to three of the four reserved special symbols (reserved special symbols) that have been acquired, that is, in the case of FIG. 12(c), the sum of special symbol reservation th1 to special symbol reservation th3, "30 seconds", can be displayed when V-Rush begins. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of notifying only a portion of the value calculated as the duration of V-Rush.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in this embodiment, the duration of the V Rush is displayed by adding up the variable times of multiple special pattern lotteries that are executed before the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for players to grasp the current number of reserved special patterns, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to display a display mode showing the number of reserved special patterns. This makes it difficult for players to understand that the value of the remaining time period mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V Rush is the sum of the variable times corresponding to how many reserved special patterns. It also makes it difficult for players to understand the variable times of each individual special pattern lottery.

Therefore, for example, even in a pachinko machine 10 in which different patterns of change in the change time are set depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss, the display mode of the remaining time period mode 801 can prevent the player from knowing in advance the lottery result in the special symbol reservation (whether or not the special symbol reservation contains winning information corresponding to a jackpot win).

In addition, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, and to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, or 30 seconds when the special symbol lottery result is a miss, if the first special symbol reservation th1 is "10 seconds", the second special symbol reservation th2 is "30 seconds", the third special symbol reservation th3 is "20 seconds", and the fourth special symbol reservation th4 is "10 seconds", it is preferable to display "50 seconds" as the display mode of the remaining time short period mode 801 indicating the duration of the V-rush. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the period is shorter than the duration of the V-rush, "90 seconds" (the total value of the variation times for the four reserved special symbols), and that the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state will win the jackpot (the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state has won the jackpot, and the variation time is set to 50 seconds).

In other words, when displaying only a portion of the V Rush period rather than the entire period, in addition to the configuration of displaying a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (50 seconds) set when a jackpot is won as described above, it is also possible to configure the remaining time period mode 801 to be displayed in a "60 seconds" display mode that leads the player to believe that the first time the time reduction is a miss fluctuation (10 second fluctuation) and the second time the time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation (50 second fluctuation). In other words, it is sufficient to display a value that is smaller than the value indicating the actual duration of the V Rush and is calculated by combining at least the fluctuation time that can be selected for a jackpot fluctuation and the fluctuation time that can be selected for a miss fluctuation.

In this embodiment, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to display the number of reserved special symbols that have already been acquired, but this is not limited to this and a display mode for indicating the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed. Even in this case, the number of reserved special symbols that is currently acquired can be made difficult for the player to understand by displaying the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special symbols in a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the content.

Next, referring to FIG. 12(b), the V-rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the ending period of the jackpot ends and the V-rush starts, and FIG. 12(d) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) is displayed. In other words, FIG. 12(b) shows the display screen at the time when the special symbol reservation shown in the special symbol reservation th1 at the time of the ending of the jackpot starts to change, and the special symbol reservation that was the special symbol reservation th1 at the time of the ending of the jackpot shifts to the active special symbol th0, and the special symbol reservation th2 is shifted to the special symbol reservation th1, the special symbol reservation th3 is shifted to the special symbol reservation th2, and the special symbol reservation th4 is shifted to the special symbol reservation th3. Also, since the V-Rush started, no new balls have entered the special ball entry port 64, and the special ball fourth reserve th4 is empty. And, as shown in the regular pattern fh0 during execution, the lottery for the regular pattern has also started to change, and the reserves are being accumulated in the regular pattern first reserve fh1 (see FIG. 12(d)).

When a V Rush starts, the words "V Rush in progress" are displayed in the main display area Dm as a game status notification mode indicating that the current period is a V Rush. Next to the main display area Dm, a rabbit-like character 810 is dynamically displayed as if it is about to take something out of a bag 810a. This indicates that the normal pattern is changing.

In the center of the main display area Dm, a timer 812 is displayed to indicate the remaining time of the V-Rush period that is advantageous to the player. This timer 812 displays a value that is the sum of the fluctuating times of the specified number of times of the special symbol until the trigger for the end of the time-saving state. In FIG. 12(b), the number of times that the special symbol is drawn during the time-saving state is specified as four times, and the timer 812 displays "40.0 seconds", which is the sum of the fluctuating time of the running special symbol th0, which is 10 seconds, and the fluctuating time from the first special symbol reserved th1 to the third special symbol reserved th3. This timer 812 is displayed so that its value is subtracted each time the fluctuating time of the running special symbol th0 is subtracted, allowing the player to easily understand that the V-Rush period is progressing.

Furthermore, the words "V Rush ends when the timer hits 0!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds, informing the player that the V Rush will end when the subtracted value of the timer 812 hits 0. As described above, during the V Rush period, the player plays the game with the aim of getting the ball into the V winning hole 165. Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (remaining period) until the end of the advantageous period by visually checking the change in the value displayed on the timer 812.

Then, the word "1st in a row" is displayed in display area HR1 at the top left of main display area Dm, indicating how many V Rush periods have occurred since a jackpot was won from normal state (the so-called first win) and a V Rush was started without the game state transitioning to normal state. Furthermore, "0pt" is displayed in display area HR2 shown below display area HR1, and the number of prize balls won in jackpots won during the V Rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of times a V Rush has continued in display area HR1 and the number of prize balls won in jackpots during a V Rush in display area HR2, the player can check their game history at their own convenience, improving gameplay convenience.

In addition, a V-rush changing area 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display mode in which the patterns change (dynamic display) is displayed in the left area 811a, middle area 811b, and right area 811c of this V-rush changing area 811. Information is displayed in this V-rush changing area 811 to indicate to the player the game situation during the V-rush. In FIG. 12(b), the special pattern is currently changing to a normal pattern, and the V-rush changing area 811 indicates that the V-rush period has passed.

Next, referring to FIG. 13(a), the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment when a normal symbol win is made during a V-rush will be described. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a normal symbol win is made during a V-rush, and FIG. 13(c) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a normal symbol is won in the lottery, the electric device 640a attached to the electric normal winning device 640 is opened so that a game ball can enter.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), the active regular symbol reserve fh0 displays a "○" indicating that the regular symbol has been selected. Then, in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, an animation is displayed in which the character 810, who was searching for something from the bag 810a at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12(b)), takes out a ticket 810b with the word "lucky" written on it, which is a notification mode to indicate that the character has won the regular symbol lottery and acquired a special privilege. Then, in the display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image showing the regular electric prize-winning device 640 is displayed, and the regular symbol lottery has been won and the electric role 640a is displayed in a state in which it has been opened. Furthermore, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "If it goes into the electric chute, you have a chance to win a V!!". These display contents allow the player to understand that the player should aim for the electric chute to play, so the player can be guided to the correct way to play. In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds described above are notification modes that inform the player of the content of the game to be performed.

The timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm shows a value of 30.9 seconds. In the game situation in FIG. 13(a), the remaining time of the special chart change being performed shown in the running special chart th0 is 0.9 seconds, and the special chart drawing from the special chart 1 reserved th1 to the special chart 3 reserved th3 is the V-rush period. Therefore, the combined value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812. Note that in FIG. 13(a), the special chart 4 reserved th4, which was not stored at the start of the V-rush (see FIG. 12(b)), is reserved, but since this is a special chart drawing that is performed after the period of the specified number of V-rush has elapsed, the change time of this special chart 4 reserved th4 is not added together. Therefore, a "-" is displayed for the special chart 4 reserved th4 (see FIG. 13(c)).

Next, referring to FIG. 13(b), the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment when a role hit occurs during a V rush will be described. FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a role hit game is executed during a V rush, and FIG. 13(d) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the special electric operation port 643 in the normal electric winning device 640, a role hit game is executed in which the V opening and closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened.

Figure 13(b) is a display screen when a game ball enters the special electric operation port 643 in the normal electric winning device 640 due to the normal winning of the normal symbol shown in Figure 13(a). In Figure 13(a), the reserved ball reserved in the special symbol first reservation th1 is shifted to the active special symbol th0 in Figure 13(b). The remaining fluctuation time is 9.9 seconds, and a "?" is displayed indicating that the fluctuation has been temporarily stopped (see Figure 13(d)). In this embodiment, when a game with a special symbol or a big win is being played, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the active special symbol fluctuation is suspended (temporarily stopped) until the end of each winning game.

The main display area Dm displays the subtraction of the timer 812 value, which up until FIG. 13(a) had decreased along with the special symbol's change time, but is now interrupted at the time when the change of the special symbol (subtraction of the change time of the special symbol change) was interrupted (i.e., the time when the special electric operation port 643 was won). Furthermore, the word "STOP!!" is displayed to indicate that the subtraction of the timer 812 has been interrupted. These display contents enable the player to understand that the passage of the V Rush period has been interrupted. The display area HR3 shows a schematic representation of the V winning device 65 with the V opening/closing door 65a open, along with the word "Aim!!".

This allows the player to understand that the V opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is open (the game that hits the reel is being played) by visually checking the third pattern display device 81. In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 in FIG. 13(b) and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds have the function of a game status notification mode for informing the player of the game status during a V rush, and the function of a guidance notification mode for informing the player of the game that should be played during the game that hits the reel.

The V rush variable area 811 is displayed in a so-called reach display mode with the letter "V" displayed stationary in the left area 811a and the right area 811c. Furthermore, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "If it hits V, it's a big win!!" These display contents allow the player to play the game with a sense of hope that he or she will soon be able to land the game ball in the V winning hole 165.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in a typical game on the pachinko machine 10, that is, a game in which a lottery for a special symbol is held in the hope that the result of the lottery will be a jackpot (special symbol game), a plurality of identification information indicating the lottery result (each symbol (third symbol) dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81) is displayed variably (dynamically displayed) in a plurality of rows (e.g., three rows), and when all of the plurality of symbol rows, except for one symbol row, are displayed in a reach display mode (e.g., a combination of the same identification information) that is a combination of identification information indicating a jackpot, a reach performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot is executed.

In the present embodiment, the game (special electric game) executed during the time-saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 is not a lottery for special symbols, but a game in which a ball is finally entered into the V winning hole 165 through various processes based on the lottery for normal symbols to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game), so there was a problem that it was difficult for players to understand the specific game content of the special electric game. In contrast, in this embodiment, the variable display mode of the symbols (characters) that are displayed (dynamically displayed) in the left region 811a, middle region 811b, and right region 811c of the V rush variable region 811 according to the progress of the special electric game having the above-mentioned complex playability (various processes until the jackpot game is executed) is configured to be executed in a performance mode as if a special symbol game was being executed. By configuring it in this way, the player can understand each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 without having to understand the specific game content of the special electric game, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, referring to FIG. 14(a), a V winning screen during a hit game during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 14(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball enters the V winning port 165 during a hit game during a V rush and a jackpot is awarded, and FIG. 14(c) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a) is displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, a hit game is executed during a V rush, and if a ball enters the V winning port 165 during a hit game (if a V wins), a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded.

Figure 14 (a) is the display screen when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the game of hitting the special feature shown in Figure 13 (b). As mentioned above, the change of the special symbol is suspended during the game of hitting the special feature, so the running special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped with 9.9 seconds of change time remaining. The first special symbol reservation th1 and the second special symbol reservation th2 are reservations within the set number of times for this V Rush, and each has a change time set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the remaining time of the V Rush period remains "29.9 seconds" from the point shown in Figure 13 (b) (see Figure 14 (c)).

When the ball enters the V-shaped hole and it is determined that a jackpot game (V jackpot game) will be played, the V-rush period will not be subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period), and the display of "29.9 seconds" displayed by the timer 812 shown in FIG. 13(b) will be displayed in the display area HR4, which is less noticeable than the timer 812. "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

In this embodiment, if a V win (V jackpot game) occurs while the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery, which is executed after the temporarily stopped special symbol variation ends, is executed the number of times of time-saving set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed this time. In other words, the information (time-saving number of times) for establishing the time-saving end condition is not updated (deducted) by the interrupted special symbol variation (resuming special symbol variation) executed after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 14(c), if the number of time-saving times is set to four after the end of the jackpot game, the duration of the next V-Rush is the sum of the remaining period (9.9 seconds) of the interrupted special symbol variation and the special symbol variation time for the four reserved special symbols. By configuring it in this way, the V-Rush duration can be set longer by the variation time (remaining variation time) of the restarted special symbol variation in the time-saving state (V-Rush first entry) that is set by playing the special symbol game in the normal state and winning the jackpot (V-Rush first entry), and the V-Rush duration can be set longer by the variation time (remaining variation time) of the restarted special symbol variation in the time-saving state (V-Rush continuation) that is set again after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is easier to provide a V-Rush that is more advantageous to the player when the V-Rush continues than when the V-Rush first entry. Therefore, the player can play while expecting the V-Rush to continue.

It is also possible to use other methods to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the V Rush continues than when the V Rush first begins. For example, a different variation pattern may be selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol between a case where the conditions for executing a jackpot game are met during the normal state (a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery) and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and a case where the conditions for executing a jackpot game are met in the time-saving state (a V is won in a special electric game) and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the conditions for executing a jackpot game are met in the time-saving state (a V is won in a special electric game) and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, than when the conditions for executing a jackpot game are met during the normal state (a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery) and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to lengthen the duration of the special symbol variation that is executed during the time-saving state when the V Rush continues than when the V Rush first starts, and as a result, the duration of the V Rush can be lengthened. Therefore, added value can be given to players who continue the V Rush, increasing the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to that of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the information (number of time-saving times) for establishing the time-saving end condition may be updated (deducted) by executing the restart special pattern change, or it may be configured so that a special pattern change with a longer change time is more likely to be executed when the V Rush first starts than when the V Rush continues. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the V Rush from continuing excessively, while also preventing a decrease in motivation to play due to the V Rush ending without executing a single jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the special electric game executed during the V Rush.

In addition, as in this embodiment, when a configuration is used in which the timing of interrupting the special chart change during execution has a large effect on the duration of the V rush after the end of a jackpot game (V jackpot game), information indicating the remaining time of the special chart change during execution may be notified to the player in a state in which it is possible to interrupt the special chart change (for example, when a normal jackpot game is won), and the player may be configured to be able to select whether or not to interrupt the special chart change. In other words, when the remaining time of the special chart change during execution is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game for interrupting the special chart change (a game in which a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during a normal jackpot game to execute a role-winning game) may be executed, and a game aiming for a V win may be selected, and when the remaining time of the special chart change during execution is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), a game that does not interrupt the special chart change may be selected.

In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded as a result of a V win, the time during which the temporarily stopped special symbols change and the time during which the special symbols change within the set number of V rushes that were on hold at that time are displayed as the preset period for the next V rush. This time is then displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can check the period stocked for the next V rush by checking the display area HR4.

In the V Rush variable region 811 for indicating the game status during the V Rush in the main display region Dm, a "V" is displayed as a static "V" in the middle region 811b, which was variable in FIG. 13(b). When a hit is achieved, the left region 811a and right region 811c display the letter "V" as a static "V", and the left region 811a, middle region 811b, and right region 811c are combined to display "VVV", indicating that a jackpot has been won. In addition, the words "Congratulations on the jackpot!!" are displayed in the secondary display region Ds. These display contents clearly indicate to the player that a jackpot has been awarded by causing a game ball to enter the V winning hole 165 during a hit.

In this embodiment, the V-rush variable area 811 is configured to stop displaying the left area 811a and the right area 811c when a special feature hit is executed, and to stop displaying the middle area 811b when a V is won during a special feature hit. However, the invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to stop displaying the left area 811a when a normal feature hit is won, the right area 811c when a special feature hit is executed, and the middle area 811b when a V is won. By configuring the display to perform a step-by-step performance in this way, when the game conditions are met, the player can instantly determine which stage of the game is when he or she visually checks the V-variable area 811. Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. In addition, the characters that are stopped may be anything that indicates that a jackpot has been awarded and that the player can win a special prize, and may be displayed as "Hit" or "V Winning". By configuring the display to display multiple characters indicating a jackpot in this way, a more varied performance can be provided to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 14(b), a description will be given of a miss screen during a V Rush reel hit displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 165 during a reel hit during a V Rush. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the variation of the special pattern that was being executed is temporarily stopped when a reel hit is executed, but if a V win does not occur during a reel hit, the variation of the temporarily stopped special pattern is resumed.

Figure 14 (b) is the display screen when a role win is executed in Figure 13 (b) but the game ball does not win the V winning hole 165. In the V variation area 811 of the main display area Dm, which shows the game situation during the V rush, the character "X" is displayed in the middle area 811b, indicating that the V did not win. Therefore, the V rush variation area 811 displays a miss display mode of "V x V". This allows the player to understand that the game ball was not able to win the V winning hole 165 during this role win.

Then, the word "Resume!!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to indicate that the temporarily stopped special chart movement will resume. Then, the display mode showing the remaining period of the V rush shown on the timer 812 starts to decrease again as the movement of the special chart shown on the running special chart th0 resumes (see FIG. 14(d)). This allows the player to easily understand that they must play with the aim of winning a V within the time shown on the timer 812.

Next, referring to FIG. 15(a), the jackpot ending screen during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen for a jackpot ending during a V rush, and FIG. 15(c) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won or a V is awarded during the V rush period, the V rush period (time-saving state) is set again.

Figure 15 (a) is a diagram showing the ending screen of the jackpot awarded from the V winning shown in Figure 14 (a). As mentioned above, when a jackpot is awarded during a V rush, the sum of the temporarily stopped active special chart th0 and the fluctuation time up to the specified number of times in the previous V rush period, special chart second reserve th2, is displayed as the time stock in the display area HR4, and the text "Time Stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed. Then, the fluctuation time of the special chart reserve corresponding to special chart third reserve th3 in Figure 15 (c), that is, the special chart reserve that was not added as a V rush period (time period) during the V rush before the jackpot game was executed, is calculated.

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded during a V-Rush, a V-Rush is set again at the end of the jackpot game. The duration of the V-Rush is set to the sum of the remaining time of the special chart fluctuation that was temporarily stopped during the jackpot and the fluctuation time for the number of times the special chart was drawn that was awarded according to the jackpot type. In FIG. 15(a), the time stock is already displayed as 29.9 seconds, that is, the remaining period of the suspended special chart fluctuation (9.9 seconds) and the sum of the fluctuation time of the special chart reserve corresponding to the first special chart reserve th1 and the second special chart reserve th2 that was already added and displayed on the timer 812 during the previous V-Rush (total of 20 seconds), and the fluctuation time of the special chart reserve corresponding to the third special chart reserve th3 (15 seconds) is added to this time stocked number of seconds as a value that can be newly added to the V-Rush period at the end of the jackpot game.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a), the ending screen of a jackpot game in which four time reductions are granted after the end of the jackpot game is shown, and the reserved special charts held as time stock are up to the second reserved special chart th2 (two reserved special charts), so the fluctuation time of the remaining two reserved special charts can be added and displayed on the timer 812 as the current V-rush period. However, in FIG. 15(a), since there is only one reserved special chart that can be added and displayed on the timer 812 (because no reserved special chart is stored in the fourth reserved special chart th4), only the fluctuation time of the reserved special chart corresponding to the third reserved special chart th3 is added and displayed.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is awarded during a V-Rush and the number of reserved special figures that are time-stocked at that time is insufficient for the specified number of times (time-saving times) of the time-saving (V-Rush) that is awarded this time, the system is configured to execute an effect in which the variable time corresponding to the reserved special figures that have been reserved and stored until the end of the jackpot game is added to the value of the time stock. In FIG. 15(a), the characters "+15 seconds GET" are displayed in the added period display mode 802 in response to the reserved special figures in which the 15-second miss variable pattern shown in the third reserved special figure th3 is executed. This allows the player to enjoy the joy of knowing that the period that is advantageous to the player has been further extended. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the system is configured to execute an effect in which the V-Rush period is added during the ending period of the jackpot game, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that the advantageous period will be extended at the end of the jackpot game, and the effect during the jackpot can attract attention.

In addition, the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm displays the words "2nd in a row," indicating that the V Rush has continued for a second time, and the display area HR2 displays "670P," the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot during the V Rush. In this way, the game results are displayed in a position that is easy for the player to see, and the value increases each time a jackpot is hit and a bonus is obtained, giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction. Then, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "V Rush Continued," indicating that the V Rush has been set again. This allows the player to easily understand that the V Rush, which is advantageous to the player, will continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 15(b), the timer addition screen during a V-Rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during a V-Rush. As described above, in this embodiment, an addition performance is performed for newly won special reserved symbols at the time of the big win ending executed during a V-Rush, and for the variable time of special symbols that were normally outside the period of the specified number of V-Rushes. Then, if the number of reserved balls for the specified number of V-Rushes is not reserved at the end of the big win, an addition performance is performed for the newly increased number of reserved balls during the V-Rush period until the number of reserved special symbols for the specified number of V-Rushes is accumulated.

15(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the game progresses from the ending of the big win shown in FIG. 15(a) and a new game ball enters the special ball entrance 64, and FIG. 15(d) is a diagram showing the state of each pattern when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(b) is displayed. In the main display area Dm, a change display mode is displayed indicating that the V-rush change area has passed the V-rush period. In FIG. 15(b), as shown in FIG. 15(d), the running special pattern th0 resumes change, the remaining change time is 3.2 seconds, and the special pattern 1st reserve th1 and the special pattern 2nd reserve th2 each store a reserve with a change time of 10 seconds. And the special pattern 3rd reserve th3 stores a reserved ball with a change time of 15 seconds. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds, which is the sum of these values.

As described above, the state in FIG. 15(a) is a state in which the variable time for two new reserved special charts can be added as a V-rush period, but only one new reserved special chart has been acquired (only reserved special chart No. 3 th3). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when a new reserved special chart is acquired next, the variable time for the newly acquired reserved special chart is added and displayed.

Specifically, the fourth special reserved th4 indicates that an additional win has been made, and a variable time of 20 seconds is set for this new special reserved. Therefore, an effect is executed in which 20 seconds are added to the current V Rush period. Then, the character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm is shown throwing a ticket 810b, which indicates the extension of the advantageous period to the player, into a timer 812 that indicates the remaining period of the V Rush, as the V Rush period is added. After this effect is executed, the variable time of the additional special reserved th4 is added to the remaining period of the V Rush displayed on the timer 812, and the timer 812 displays the value "58.2 seconds". In addition, the words "Timer Added!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds, clearly informing the player that the V Rush period has been extended (added).

Next, referring to FIG. 16(a), the V Rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen indicating the end of a V Rush, and FIG. 16(c) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, if the game ball is not placed in the V winning hole 165 during the V Rush period, or if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, the V Rush period ends and the game state transitions to the normal state.

As shown in Figure 16 (c), an "X" is displayed, indicating that the running special chart th0f, which is the final change in this V Rush, has stopped on a miss. Reserve balls have been accumulated from special chart 1 reserved th1 to special chart 3 reserved th3, but these reserved balls are outside the set number of V Rush attempts. Note that the running regular chart fh0 is in a changing state, and regular chart 1 reserved fh1 regular chart reserved balls have been accumulated.

Then, the main display area Dm displays the text "VGET x 2" to indicate how many times the V Rush has continued this time, and further displays the text "PGET x 1500" to indicate how many prize balls (bonuses) were won in the jackpot during this V Rush. This allows the player to easily understand the results of this V Rush game. Additionally, the sub-display area Ds displays the text "V Rush Ended" to inform the player that the advantageous period has ended. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the V Rush period has ended.

Next, the V Rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen indicating that the V Rush period has been extended, and FIG. 16(d) is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the V-rush effect is executed. The time-saving state is ended when a predetermined number of special symbol variations have been completed. Specifically, when the time-saving number is set to four, the time-saving state is ended and the normal state is entered when the fourth special symbol variation is stopped (confirmed) after the time-saving state is set. Here, since the selection (variation) of the special symbol and the selection (variation) of the normal symbol are executed independently, if a normal symbol winning game is executed just before the end of the V-rush period (just before the final variation of the special symbol in the time-saving state is stopped), it may be possible to execute a role winning game after the time-saving state has ended (after transition to the normal state).

In this case, if the V Rush effect were to end at the timing when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, a situation would occur in which a special feature hit game would start even though the V Rush effect had ended, which could confuse the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, if a normal feature hit game is being played at the timing when the V Rush period ends (the timing when the special feature's final fluctuation stops in the time-saving state), the V Rush effect is configured to be extended until the normal feature hit game ends, or until the feature hit game that is played as a result of the normal feature hit game ends. This allows the V Rush effect to be executed in accordance with the special electric game period in which a V jackpot game is being played, making it possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(d), when the character "○" is displayed indicating that the active regular symbol tf0 has been hit and won, that is, when the special symbol change, which is the final change in the time-saving state, is displayed as stopped during play when the active regular symbol is hit (displayed as "X" indicating that the active special symbol th0 has stopped as a miss), as shown in FIG. 16(b), the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays a changing state of the left area 811a, middle area 811b, and right area 811c of the V-Rush change area 811, which shows the game status during the V-Rush. In other words, this indicates to the player that the V-Rush is continuing.

Then, the timer 812 displays "00.0 seconds," indicating that all of the special symbol changes for the specified number of times in the time-saving state have ended. However, the words "V Rush Extended" are displayed at the top of the main display area. This lets the player know that the V Rush, which the player thought had ended, has been extended, and gives him or her unexpected joy. Then, the words "Last Chance!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds, and the player can easily understand that unless the game ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and the V winning port 165 on this regular symbol hit, the V Rush will end.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(b), that is, when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during the extended display of the V-rush, the game of winning the special feature is executed in the same way as during the normal V-rush period. In this case, the display screen during the game of winning the special feature shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed, and the words "Last Chance!!" are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. This makes it easy for the player to understand that if the ball does not enter the V-winning port 165 in the current game of winning the special feature, the V-rush period will end. Then, when the ball enters the V-winning port 165 in the game of winning the special feature displayed as "Last Chance!!", the same V-jackpot game as during the normal V-rush period is executed. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the V-winning port 165, the V-rush end screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed after the game of winning the special feature ends.

As described above with reference to FIG. 16(a) and FIG. 16(b), in this embodiment, the period during which the special electric game can be executed is set as the V rush period, not the transition state of the game state, and a series of V rush effects are executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. The timing of displaying the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. 16(a) is not limited to after the final variation of the special pattern of the V rush period is stopped and displayed, but may be configured to start displaying when the remaining period of the final variation of the special pattern reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), and end displaying the end screen when the final variation of the special pattern is stopped and the next special pattern variation is started. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as the period until the end screen of the V rush is displayed.

By configuring in this way, after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, the end screen can be displayed using a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), so that the game results during the V rush period can be easily notified to the player. In addition, when using such a configuration, for example, when the lottery status of the normal pattern is determined in advance at the time when the end screen of the V rush is displayed, if it is determined in advance that a normal pattern winning game will be executed within the period in which the end screen of the V rush can be displayed, the extension screen shown in FIG. 16 (b) may be displayed at the timing when the end screen of the V rush is displayed, or, after the end screen is once displayed, if a normal pattern winning game is executed, the end screen may be switched to the extension screen. In this way, by using a configuration to switch the end screen to the extension screen, it is possible to leave the possibility of aiming for a V jackpot game even after the end screen is displayed, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end. In this embodiment, when the extension screen shown in FIG. 16 (b) is displayed, the normal state is set as the game state. When such a configuration is used, for example, it is preferable to configure the V jackpot game to be executed in a normal state, so that the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state. As a result, the period during which the extended screen is displayed indicates that the V rush period will soon end, and also indicates that it is a period during which an advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is playing during the V rush period play a game with a sense of expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is configured to be managed by dividing it into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and a normal normal state, and a jackpot game advantageous to the player is granted only when the special normal state is set, and when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal normal state, the player can hardly obtain any prize balls as a penalty, and an unfavorable jackpot game in which the normal state is set is executed after the jackpot game ends. Also, without being limited to this, for example, if the display conditions for the extension screen are met at the time when the final variation of the special pattern during the V Rush period is stopped and displayed, the time-saving state may not end, but may end when the conditions for terminating the display of the extension screen are met. This makes the timing at which the time-saving state ends variable, making it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state will end.

Next, referring to FIG. 17(a), a special screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment at the end of a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 17(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a special screen at the end of a jackpot game, and FIG. 17(c) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot game is executed during a V-rush, after the jackpot game ends, the V-rush period is set again based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the change time, but if there is a reserved ball that will be changed to a winning one with a change time of 200 seconds among the reserved balls at the end of the jackpot game, a heaven mode performance is executed to indicate that the jackpot will definitely be won after a predetermined period has elapsed.

Figure 17(a) is a display screen when a winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds is reserved at the end of a jackpot game. As shown in Figure 17(c), the reserved status of each symbol at the end of the jackpot game shown in Figure 17(a) is as follows: for the active special symbol th0, a special symbol variation is not being executed because a jackpot game is in progress. Also, for the active regular symbol fh0, a "↓" is displayed indicating that it is varying, and it is shown that the regular symbol 1 reserved fh1 has been stored. And it is shown that the special symbol 1 reserved th1 and the special symbol 2 reserved th2 each have a reserved ball that will execute a 10-second miss variation pattern stored therein.

And, the third reserved special chart th3 shows reserved balls that execute a winning variation pattern of 200 seconds. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, as a variation pattern of the special pattern during time-saving play (during V-rush), when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a win, a long winning variation (hereinafter referred to as a special win) with a variation time of 200 seconds may be executed. Furthermore, in the case of a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that is won in the lottery of the special pattern, a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, even if the player cannot enter the V winning hole 165 in the special electric game until the variation of this special win stops (during heaven mode), the V-rush period is set again after the jackpot game ends due to the jackpot game won by the special win, so the special electric game can be played with confidence. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the special chart 4th reserved th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball, but since a jackpot game is played in the special chart 3rd reserved th3, the variable time is set as the V-rush period that is set after the end of the jackpot game played by the reserved ball in the special chart 3rd reserved th3, so "-" is displayed for the variable time.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), if there is a special win in the reserve at the end of the big win game, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the text "Enter Heaven Mode" indicating that there is a special win in the reserve. In addition, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed when the game state is normal or during a V-rush when there is no special win in the reserve, are displayed. In addition, the text "Super Lucky!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by displaying the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed in the normal state or during a V-rush when there is no special win in the reserve, the player can have a sense of expectation that the game situation may be a special situation, and can continue playing with excitement. In other words, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b are a special game situation suggesting mode for suggesting to the player that the current game situation is a special game situation.

In addition, in the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 with "220 seconds" written on it is displayed. The value displayed in this special period display mode 803 is the time until the fluctuation that wins the special winning in the special pattern lottery stops, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode is displayed. In other words, it is a special game period notification mode for indicating the special game period that will be executed from now on. Therefore, the value displayed in this special period display mode 803 is the sum of the fluctuation time of the special winning, which is 200 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the number of reserved balls until the special winning is won. In FIG. 17(c), the fluctuation time of the special winning first reserved th1 and the special winning second reserved th2 are each set to 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time of the special winning shown in the special winning third reserved th3 is 200 seconds, the sum of the fluctuation time values from the special winning first reserved th1 to the special winning third reserved th3, "220 seconds", is the period in which the heaven mode is set.

The duration of the time-saving state (V-rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be notified to the player by the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the big win game, but the special symbol fluctuation time in the time-saving game state is configured to execute a fluctuation pattern in which the maximum fluctuation time is set to a maximum of 50 seconds, excluding the 200 seconds for the special win fluctuation (see FIG. 25(c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), if an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed on the special period display mode 803, the player can understand that the time-saving state will definitely be set again, and can play the special electric game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, at the end of a jackpot game, it is determined whether there is a special jackpot variation in the reserved balls, and if there is a special jackpot, the player is notified at the end of the jackpot game, but the notification method is not limited to this. For example, if there is a special jackpot in the reserved balls, the time until the special jackpot variation is executed may be notified at the end of the jackpot, and when the special jackpot variation starts, the player may be notified that the period has been extended by "200 seconds." By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the player the unexpected joy of seeing the period of V Rush, which he thought had ended, suddenly extended for a long period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 17(b), a screen during heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during heaven mode, and FIG. 17(d) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, when there is a special win in the reserved ball at the end of a big win, the time until the fluctuation of the special win stops is called heaven mode, and is configured to be a period during which the player can play the special electric game with peace of mind. FIG. 17(b) is an example of a display screen when the game situation progresses after transitioning to heaven mode shown in FIG. 17(a).

As shown in FIG. 17(b), the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm displays the characters "10th consecutive" indicating that this is the 10th V-Rush period since the game state has shifted from the normal state to the time-saving state (V-Rush). The display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1 displays the characters "6000pt" indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game executed after the transition to the V-Rush. The characters "In Heaven Mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm to allow the player to instantly determine the current game state. Also, as during the V-Rush, the V-Rush variable area 811 is displayed, and the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c show a variable display mode indicating that a lottery for a normal symbol is being executed and that a special electric game is in progress. Also, as during the V-Rush, an animation of a character 810 searching for something in a bag 810a is displayed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that a lottery for a normal symbol is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 17(d), the special pattern in the currently running special pattern th0 is changing with a remaining change time of 30 seconds. In the game situation shown in FIG. 17(c), this currently running special pattern th0 is the reserved ball that will execute the special win shown in the special pattern 3 reserved th3, which has started to change. Therefore, the remaining period of the heaven mode being executed in FIG. 17(b) is 30 seconds, which is the remaining change time of this currently running special pattern th0. In addition, it is shown that there are reserved balls in the special pattern 1 reserved th1 to the special pattern 3 reserved th3, but since the special pattern lottery is executed outside the period of the heaven mode being executed, the change time is shown as "-". In addition, the currently running regular pattern fh0 is shown as "↓", which indicates that the regular pattern lottery is being executed, and the reserved ball is also stored in the regular pattern 1 reserved fh1.

The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so that it is subtracted according to the remaining period of fluctuation of the currently running special chart th0. As shown in FIG. 17(d), since the remaining fluctuation time of the currently running special chart th0 is th0, the text "30.0 seconds" is displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17(b)). In addition, the text "Something good will happen when the timer is 0" is displayed on the secondary display area Ds, suggesting to the player that a jackpot will be won when the remaining period displayed on the timer 812 reaches 0. In other words, the secondary display area Ds displays a suggestive presentation notification mode to suggest to the player the future game situation.

As described above, in this embodiment, some of the display modes during Heaven mode, which is the period from when a special win occurs until the winning symbol stops, are configured to be the same as those in V Rush mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to inform the player that during Heaven mode, just like during V Rush, playing special electric games and having the game ball enter the V winning port 165 is a basic game method that is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

The display mode is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute effects exclusive to Heaven mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a wider variety of effects, further enhancing the effects of the effects.

Next, referring to FIG. 18(a), a chance presentation screen during a winning combination displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a chance presentation during a winning combination, and FIG. 18(c) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a winning combination is won with a normal symbol and a game ball enters the special electric operation port 643, a winning combination is executed, and when a game ball enters the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65 during the winning combination, a big win is awarded. In FIG. 18(a), the timing when the game ball is likely to enter the V winning port 165 during a winning combination based on the game situation shown in FIG. 13(b) is notified to the player as a chance presentation.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), the reserved status of each symbol in FIG. 18(a) is that the currently active special symbol th0 is in the middle of a winning combination, and so a "?" is displayed, indicating that the fluctuation has been temporarily stopped. Each of the reserved balls from the first reserved special symbol th1 to the second reserved special symbol th2 is showing a 10-second miss fluctuation. Also, the third reserved special symbol th3 is a special symbol fluctuation that is executed outside the currently active V-Rush period, so the fluctuation time shows "-". Furthermore, the fourth reserved special symbol th4 shows that it is not on hold. And the currently active regular symbol fh0 shows a "○" indicating that it has won the regular symbol lottery.

And, FIG. 18(a) is a notification screen for notifying the player that the game ball is likely to enter the V winning port 165 during the hit of the role shown in FIG. 13(b). In this embodiment, as described above, the game ball that enters the V winning device 65 during the hit of the role is stored in the storage valve 66a. And, this storage valve 66a is configured to be in an open state so that the game ball can flow down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7) for 1.5 seconds out of a 3-second period. And, the first movable valve 66b arranged above the V winning port 165 is configured to be in an open state so that the game ball can flow down the fifth flow path to the V winning port 165 for 0.5 seconds out of a 5.5-second period regardless of the game state (see FIG. 27(a)).

In other words, in order to make a game ball enter the V winning hole 165, it is necessary to make the game ball that flows down the third flow path 65d after the storage valve 66a is opened enter the V winning hole 165 while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b will be in the open state within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and if it is determined that the first movable valve 66b will be in the open state within 2 seconds, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), an emphasis mode 811z is displayed around the V rush fluctuation region 811 displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, the words "Great chance for V winning!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In other words, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of the timing when it is easy to transition to an advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, the player can understand the timing when it is easy to make a V winning, making it easier to play the game.

In this embodiment, the timing when it is easy to win a V is notified by highlighting mode 811z and comments in the secondary display area Ds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to notify times when it is difficult to win a V. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a more user-friendly gameplay to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 18(b), the normal symbol stop screen during the V-rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the lottery for normal symbols stops during the V-rush period, and FIG. 18(d) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, during the V-rush (time-saving state), the most advantageous game method for a player is to win the lottery for normal symbols, enter the game ball into the special electric operation port 643, and execute the special electric game aiming for a V-entry. Therefore, if the lottery for normal symbols is not being executed during this V-rush, the special electric game cannot be executed, so an effect encouraging the launch of the game ball is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), the reserved status of each pattern during the V-Rush in FIG. 18(a) is that the currently active special pattern th0 is changing, and the remaining change time is 2 seconds. In addition, the first special pattern reserve th1 and the second special pattern reserve th2 each store a reserved ball that will be used for a 10-second miss change. In the third special pattern reserve th3 and the fourth special pattern reserve th4, no reserved balls are stored. Therefore, the remaining period of the V-Rush shown in FIG. 18(b) is 22.2 seconds, which is the sum of the remaining change time of the currently active special pattern th0 and the change time of the first special pattern reserve th1 and the second special pattern reserve th2. In addition, the currently active regular pattern fh0 shows a "-" indicating that the regular pattern lottery is not being executed. In addition, no reserved balls are stored in the first regular pattern reserve fh1 either.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), when the lottery for the normal symbol is not executed during the V-rush and the game is stopped, the electric device 640a associated with the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state, and it is impossible to enter the game ball into the special electric operation port 643. In other words, the special electric game, which is the basic game method during the V-rush, cannot be executed, and further, since the special symbol lottery is executed, the V-rush ends as it is when the special symbol lottery is executed a prescribed number of times. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball into the special symbol ball entry port 64 or the normal winning device 640, it is necessary to execute a left-handed game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the left area of the game board 13, and when the left-handed game is executed, the game ball is configured to pass through the through gate 67, which is the trigger for the lottery for the normal symbol, 100%. In other words, the game situation in which the special symbol lottery is executed but the normal symbol lottery is not executed as shown in FIG. 18(b), is a situation in which the game ball is not launched. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect that encourages the player to launch the game ball.

The main display area Dm displays the words "V Rush in progress", and the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds", which indicates the remaining time of the V Rush, being subtracted as time passes. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the V Rush game is being played and that the remaining time is decreasing. In addition, in the V-variable area 811, where a variable display was performed when a lottery for normal symbols was being performed, the word "Hit" is displayed to the player by animation guided by the character 810, with "Hit" in the left area 811a, "っ" in the middle area 811b, and "て" in the right area. In other words, the V-variable area 811 indicates that a lottery for normal symbols is not being performed, and is a warning display mode to inform the player that the V Rush is ending.

The words "Please start playing" are also displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents can inform the player that the lottery for the normal symbols has not been performed and that the special electric game cannot be performed, and can also warn the player that the V-Rush period, which is an advantageous period for the player, will end if the lottery for the special symbols is performed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending in an unexpected way for the player.

The above-mentioned effect of encouraging the launch of the game ball is not limited to this display mode. In other words, any display that conveys to the player that the lottery for the normal symbol is not being executed will suffice, and characters indicating danger, such as "WARNING," may be displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to more effectively warn the player that he or she may incur a loss.

Next, referring to FIG. 19(a), the special symbol stop screen during a V-rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special symbol is not drawn during a V-rush, and FIG. 19(c) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the time-saving state (V-rush) continues until the special symbol has been drawn the specified number of times, and the sum of the variable times for the specified number of times is notified to the player as the specified period of the V-rush. Therefore, when a special symbol has not been drawn, the specified period has not been determined, and an effect is executed that makes the player anticipate how long the V-rush will last.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), the reserved status of each reserved symbol in the game status shown in FIG. 19(a) is that the currently active special symbol th0 is shown with a "-" indicating that the lottery for the special symbol is not being executed. Also, the first reserved special symbol th1 to the fourth reserved special symbol th4 indicate that no reserved balls are stored. On the other hand, the currently active regular symbol fh0 is shown with a "↓" indicating that the regular symbol lottery is being executed, and the first reserved regular symbol fh1 is also in a stored state.

In this way, if the special symbol lottery is not being performed during the V-Rush, the special electric game can be played until the special symbol lottery is performed a specified number of times. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the timer 812 displays the characters "??? seconds", indicating that the special symbol lottery has not been performed and that the specified period has not been reached. In addition, the V-variable area 811 displays the variable display "↓↓↓", indicating that the normal symbol lottery is being performed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays a notification mode that suggests that the specified period of the V-Rush has not been reached, such as "I'm excited to see how long it will last". These display contents allow the player to understand that the remaining period of the V-Rush has not decreased because the special symbol lottery has not been performed, but that the normal symbol lottery has been performed and the special electric game can be played. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while feeling excited about how long the advantageous game situation for the player, in which the special electric game can be played without the V-Rush period having elapsed, will continue. In other words, the display content shown in FIG. 19(a) is a suggestive notification to inform the player that he or she is in an advantageous position.

As described above, if there are no reserved balls with a special symbol during the V Rush period, a notification may be given as if the V Rush period has ended, and the next time a game ball enters the special symbol ball entrance 64, a revival effect may be executed as if the V Rush period has returned. By configuring it in this way, the player may feel as if the V Rush period that he or she thought had ended has returned, and may experience unexpected joy.

Next, referring to FIG. 19(b), the lucky time screen during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(b) is a diagram showing an example of a lucky time screen during a V rush, and FIG. 19(d) is a diagram showing the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a V jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the interrupted special symbol variation and the special symbol variation time for the number of time-saving times (4 times) set after the V jackpot game ends are configured to be set as the time-saving period (V rush period) after the V jackpot game ends.

Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change at the time the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, although the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 displays the V rush period (subtraction display) using the display mode of the timer 812, it does not display the remaining period of the special pattern change that is being executed. Therefore, each time the special pattern change is interrupted, the player has to play while hoping that the remaining period of the special pattern change that is being executed is long.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the remaining period of the currently executing special pattern change meets a predetermined condition, an effect is executed to notify the player of this fact. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special pattern change is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), or when the remaining period of the currently executing special pattern change is longer than the change time of the next special pattern change, the lucky time effect is executed. By configuring in this way, when a V hit game is executed during lucky time, the next V rush period can be made longer, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play.

When the lucky time effect is executed, the words "Lucky time entered" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851. In the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b), a lucky time effect is executed that indicates that the remaining period of the special pattern change being executed is longer than the change time of the next special pattern change being executed, and as shown in FIG. 19(d), if the remaining period of the special pattern change being executed is 20 seconds and the change time of the next special pattern change being executed is 10 seconds, the difference of 10 seconds is displayed in the period display mode 851. The number of seconds displayed in this period display mode 851 is subtracted in response to the subtraction of the change time of the special pattern change, and when 0 seconds is displayed, the lucky time effect ends.

Then, in the secondary display area Ds, a comment "Winning a special feature during lucky time is a chance" is displayed as a guide display mode to inform the player of the special benefit during lucky time. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play during lucky time. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, when the remaining period of the currently executed special pattern variation is less than a predetermined time (e.g., less than 5 seconds), an unlucky effect can also be executed as an effect that can notify the player of this fact. In other words, if a V jackpot game is executed while this unlucky effect is being executed, the player is made to understand that the next V rush period that is set is likely to be short.

By executing the unlucky effect in this way, the player can choose whether to actively play special electric games during the unlucky effect in order to execute a V jackpot game during the V rush period, or to refrain from playing special electric games until the unlucky effect ends, although the V rush period is subtracted, aiming to set a longer V rush period after the V jackpot game ends, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the lucky time effect and unlucky effect described above are configured to be executed when the time during which the special symbol changes meets a predetermined condition, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined condition is met, the execution of the effect may be determined by lottery, or the execution of the effect may be determined based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. Furthermore, the frequency of execution of the effect may be varied depending on the length of the period during which the lucky time effect or unlucky effect can be displayed, and the lucky time effect may be executed with a high probability when the remaining period of the special symbol change currently being executed exceeds 50 seconds.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the period during which the lucky time presentation is being performed is notified to the player using the period display mode 851, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to display only the display mode indicating that it is a lucky time without displaying the period display mode 851. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, providing the player with the fun of predicting the length of the V rush period that will be set after the V jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, the conditions for executing the lucky time effect or unlucky effect may be set such that the remaining period of the V Rush period, i.e., the total period of special pattern fluctuations until the time-saving state ends, is a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) or more, or the lucky time effect or unlucky effect may be configured not to be executed during the final fluctuation of the special pattern in the V Rush period.

<Regarding transition of game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

In this first embodiment, two game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Regardless of the game state, the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state is set when the time-saving end condition (for example, the condition that is met when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (four times) without winning the jackpot) is met during the time-saving state.

First, the case where the normal state is set as the game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the initial state (the state in which the process is executed when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) has been operated during the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110), the normal state is set as the game state. Since this normal state is a game state in which it is difficult to get the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 (it is more difficult to win than in the high probability state of the normal pattern) because it is a low probability state of the normal pattern, a left-handed play is executed to get the ball to enter the special pattern ball entry hole 64.

In this normal state, if a jackpot is won in the special pattern (special pattern) lottery (special pattern lottery), the jackpot type is set to either jackpot A or jackpot B, and a jackpot game is played. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 24, but in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot A (4R (rounds), 4 time reductions)" in 99% of cases, and the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B (4R (rounds), 15 time reductions)" in 1% of cases.

In other words, if a jackpot is won during the normal state, a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the end conditions of the time-saving state are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot that is set. Specifically, the jackpot type that is easier to set (jackpot A) is configured to have a time-saving end condition that is easier to achieve than the jackpot type that is harder to set (jackpot B). By configuring it in this way, a player playing in the normal state can play while hoping that the jackpot type that is set will be the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (jackpot B), in addition to playing to win a jackpot in the special chart lottery.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, while the normal state is set, a dynamic display (presentation display) to show the result of the special drawing is executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the player can predict the result of the special drawing being executed by grasping the dynamic display mode (presentation mode) executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Also, as described above, during the normal state, a low probability state of normal patterns is set, and it is difficult for a ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640 by the lottery of normal patterns (normal drawing), so the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to execute a presentation display to suggest the result of the normal drawing to the player, or to execute it in a display mode that is less noticeable than the dynamic display mode to suggest the result of the special drawing.

By configuring it in this way, during the period when the normal state is set, the player can focus on the effects that are executed based on the results of the special drawing rather than the effects that are executed based on the results of the regular drawing, so that the player can visually understand that during the normal state, a game that is mainly based on the special drawing (special drawing game) is being played. This makes it possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

When the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, the normal electricity winning device 640 is more likely to be in the open state based on the normal symbol lottery, and the game (special electricity game) aiming for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) by playing a role-winning game executed by putting a ball into the special electricity operating port 643 based on the normal symbol lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the game (special symbol game) aiming for a jackpot game (special symbol jackpot game) based on the special symbol lottery.

In this way, by varying the trigger for the big win that the player should aim for depending on the set game state, the player can be made to play different games depending on the set game state, which prevents the player from getting bored of the game early. In this embodiment, the special game aiming for the special game lottery during the normal state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special electric game aiming for the normal game lottery, and the special electric game aiming for the normal game lottery during the time-saving state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special game aiming for the special game lottery, thereby making the content of the game that the player should play different depending on the game state. However, without being limited to this, multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are provided, and the special symbol lottery that the player should play is determined depending on the set game state. The type of special symbol corresponding to the selection may be different. For example, when the normal state is set, the first special symbol game aiming to win the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol may be more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol game aiming to win the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, and when a game state different from the normal state (for example, a time-saving state) is set, the second special symbol game aiming to win the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol may be more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol game aiming to win the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured to execute the same game method (left-hand hit game) whether a special chart game is being played or a special electric game is being played, thereby preventing the player from having to go through the hassle of changing the game method every time the game state changes. However, without being limited to this, the game method may be configured to differ depending on the game state that is set, and for example, a left-hand hit game (game aiming at the game area (left area) formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) may be executed during the normal state, and a right-hand hit game (game aiming at the game area (right area) formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) may be executed during the time-saving state. In this case, a special ball entrance 64 is provided in the left area as a configuration for executing the special game, and a through gate 67, a regular electric winning device 640, and a V winning device 65 are provided in the right area as a configuration for executing the special electric game, and a variable winning device 650 that opens as a jackpot game is provided in the game area (lower area) that can be reached by the ball that has flowed down the left or right area.

By configuring it in this way, the game method (left-hand play, right-hand play) can be changed depending on the game content (special chart game, special electric game) that the player mainly performs, providing the player with the fun of being able to change the game method.

In addition, in this way, when the game method (left-hand play, right-hand play) is to be varied depending on the game content (special symbol game, special electric game) that the player is primarily to execute, it is advisable to configure the device to execute a guide notification (for example, a display mode of "right-hand play" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) to guide the player as to which game method (left-hand play, right-hand play) he should execute.

Furthermore, when the game method (left-hand play, right-hand play) is changed depending on the game content (special chart game, special electric game) that the player is mainly to play, by providing a variable winning device 650 that opens as a jackpot game in the game area (lower area) that can be reached by the ball that flows down the left or right area, whether the jackpot game is played based on the special chart game or the special electric game, there is no need to change the game method when the jackpot game is played, and the game can be played smoothly.

Returning to Figure 20, we will continue the explanation. In this embodiment, the condition for ending the time-saving state is established based on the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the special symbol is drawn). Also, the drawing of the normal symbol (normal symbol drawing) is configured to be executable independently of the drawing of the special symbol (special symbol drawing). In other words, the trigger for executing the normal symbol drawing is configured to be established regardless of the status of the special symbol drawing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 provided in the special symbol change (special symbol change) normal electric winning device 640 and a special symbol change is played, the special symbol change being played is interrupted, and when the special symbol change ends, the interrupted special symbol change is resumed. Also, when a ball enters the V winning port 165 during a special symbol change and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is played, the interrupted special symbol change is resumed when the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, which is configured as described above, when the time-saving state is set, a special electric game is executed aiming for a large number of V jackpot games until the end condition of the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) that can be established based on the special drawing is established, that is, until a predetermined number of (e.g., four) special drawing are executed. To give a specific example, if four special drawing changes are set as the time-saving end condition, the time-saving state that has been set this time will continue for the period until the fourth special drawing is completed, that is, if a 10-second change time is set for each of the four special drawing, the time-saving state that has been set this time will continue for 40 seconds (the timing when the fourth special drawing is completed).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), if there are four reserved special symbols at the end of the jackpot game, "40 seconds" is displayed as the period until the time-saving mode that is set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, the variation time of the special chart variation being executed is not subtracted while a special feature hit game or a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is being executed during the time-saving state, so the period during which the time-saving state is actually set is the sum of the special chart variation time until the time-saving end condition is met and the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special chart variation time is interrupted. As described above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special chart variation is interrupted corresponds to the period during which a winning game (a special feature hit game, a jackpot game) is being executed, and the length of the execution period of that winning game varies depending on the game content played by the player, so the interruption time cannot be accurately notified to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the remaining time until the time-saving state ends (special chart fluctuation time) is displayed (see FIG. 13(a)), and when the deduction of the special chart fluctuation time is interrupted, a display mode (see FIG. 13(b)) is displayed to indicate that the deduction display of the remaining time until the time-saving state ends (special chart fluctuation time) has been interrupted until the deduction is resumed.

By configuring it in this way, the display content (remaining time period display mode 801 in FIG. 12(a)) indicating the period until the time-saving state ends, which is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, does not differ from the actual period until the time-saving state ends, providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

The normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) executed during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to have a winning probability of approximately 33%, which is configured to make it easier to win a normal symbol win compared to the winning probability (1%) of the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) executed during the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, a 3-second fluctuation time is set as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by continuously executing left-handed play during the time-saving state, a normal symbol win game is executed approximately once every 10 seconds, and the normal electric winning device 640 is configured to be in an open state.

As described above with reference to Figures 3 to 5, when a normal winning game is executed during the time-saving state, the ball that enters the normal power winning device 640 is configured to enter the special power operation port 643 more easily (easier to enter than in a normal winning game executed during the normal state), and the number of games with special features that can be executed is approximately the same as the number of games with normal features that are executed. And, as described above with reference to Figures 6 to 9, the probability that a ball will enter the V winning port 165 in one game of special features and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) will be executed is approximately 1/11.

In other words, in the first embodiment, during the time-saving state, a role-winning game that provides a chance to make the ball enter the V winning port 165 is executed at a rate of about once every 10 seconds. If the result of the role-winning game is that the ball can enter the V winning port 165 (V winning), a jackpot game (jackpot game with a jackpot type of jackpot C (10R (rounds), time-saving 4 times)) is executed after the role-winning game, and the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. In other words, if a V jackpot game (a jackpot game executed by making the ball enter the V winning port 165) is executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state will not end as long as the jackpot game is continued to be executed in the special electric game, so the player can play the special electric game with a sense of expectation.

In addition, as will be explained in detail later, if a jackpot game is executed by special electric play, the interrupted special chart change will be resumed after the jackpot game ends, but the number of special chart draws (special chart changes) required to establish the time-saving end condition is not updated by the resumed special chart change. In other words, after the resumed special chart change ends, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the special chart change is executed four times.

In other words, if a game with a special feature is played when the remaining time for the special feature change is long (e.g., 30 seconds), and a V jackpot game is played by that game with a special feature, the time-saving state set after the jackpot game will be "30 seconds + 4 special feature changes," whereas if a game with a special feature is played when the remaining time for the special feature change is short (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and a V jackpot game is played by that game with a special feature, the time-saving state set after the jackpot game will be "0.5 seconds + 4 special feature changes."

By configuring it in this way, when playing a special electric game aiming for a V jackpot game during a time-saving state in which the end condition is met based on the elapsed time, it is not advantageous for the player to play the V jackpot game earlier, but it is more advantageous for the player to play the V jackpot game when the remaining period of the currently running special chart change is long. Therefore, even if a predetermined period has passed since the time-saving state was set and the V jackpot game has not been played, it is possible to have the player continue playing while keeping a sense of expectation.

In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times (the number of special chart changes updated to establish the time-saving end condition) is not updated (deducted) based on the special chart change that resumes after the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times (the number of special chart changes updated to establish the time-saving end condition) may be updated based on the special chart change that resumes after the end of the jackpot. Even if configured in this way, the longer the special chart change period (remaining change period) after the restart, the more advantageous it is for the player, so that even if a predetermined period has passed since the time-saving state was set and the V jackpot game has not been executed, it is possible to have the player continue playing while keeping a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 20, the explanation will continue. If the result of the game in which the reel is played during the time-saving state is that the ball cannot enter the V winning hole 165 (non-V winning case), the special electric game will be repeatedly played until the time-saving state ends.

In addition, when the special pattern variation (special pattern variation) ends during the time-saving state, it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met, that is, whether the number of special pattern variations set as the time-saving end condition has ended. If the time-saving end condition is met, the game state transitions to the normal state and the special pattern game is executed. On the other hand, if the time-saving end condition is not met, the next special pattern variation is executed. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 25 (c), but in this embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a win (1/100), a variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds or 200 seconds is selected, and if the result of the special pattern lottery is a loss (99/100), a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 to 50 seconds is selected. That is, the system is configured so that it is easier to continue the time-saving state for a longer period if a jackpot is won in the special drawing that is executed before the time-saving end condition is met (if the time-saving end condition is set to four times, four special drawings that are executed after the jackpot play ends). Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot play ends. Therefore, the added value of winning a jackpot in the special drawing within the limited period in which the time-saving state is set can be provided to the player, which can increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, if it is determined that there is jackpot information in the reserved memory of the special symbol acquired at the end of the jackpot game that has a variable time of 200 seconds set, a special effect is executed to notify the player of this (see FIG. 17(a)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving state termination condition set after the end of the jackpot game can be set to either an easy-to-achieve time-saving termination condition (time-saving 4 times) or a difficult-to-achieve time-saving termination condition (time-saving 15 times). Here, if 15 times of time-saving is set, the time-saving state will continue until the end of the 15th special chart lottery performed during the time-saving state, so the time-saving period can be lengthened according to the increase in the number of times the special chart changes, and the probability of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state can be increased, and the time-saving period can be further lengthened by the long-term change pattern set when a jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to allow play to be performed in the same playing method (left-hand play) during normal play, time-saving play, and jackpot play, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special chart lottery is not performed during a time-saving play. Note that in this embodiment, the special chart variation pattern is configured to be selected regardless of the number of reserved special symbols (reserved special chart number), but this is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving play is set, it is preferable to configure the system so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected as the number of reserved special symbols increases.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to encourage players to play with enthusiasm in an attempt to reach the upper limit (four) of the number of reserved special symbols before the time-saving state is set (for example, during a jackpot game). It is also possible to prevent a state in which special symbol changes are not performed during the time-saving state (a state in which the time-saving end condition is not met) from occurring.

Furthermore, although detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, during the period in which the time-saving state is set, that is, during the period until the specified number of special pattern variations (special pattern variations) are completed, a lottery for normal patterns is executed, and ultimately a special electric game is executed in which a ball wins the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65. The V winning device 65 is configured to make it easy for a ball to win during a game in which a role is hit, and is configured so that the variation time of the special pattern variation is not subtracted (is interrupted) during a game in which a role is hit. Furthermore, the game with a special feature has multiple end conditions. Specifically, the game has a first end condition (ball entry end condition) that is met when the number of balls that enter the V entry device 65 during the game with a special feature reaches a predetermined number (3 balls), and a second end condition (time lapse end condition) that is met when the elapsed time since the game with a special feature is executed reaches a predetermined time (3 seconds). The game with a special feature is configured to end when either the first end condition or the second end condition is met. In addition, during the period when the normal symbol changes and during the game with a normal symbol, a lottery for a new normal symbol (a normal symbol lottery) is not executed, but during the period when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during the game with a special feature and the game with a special feature is executed, a new normal symbol lottery can be executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, special electric play is performed with the aim of executing more games with special symbols by executing the games with special symbols during the time-saving state, while suspending the special symbol fluctuation. However, the periods during which the games with special symbols cannot be executed, such as the period during which the normal symbols fluctuate until the lottery results for the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the period during which the ball cannot enter the normal electric winning device 640 during the execution of the normal symbol winning game (the period during which the electric symbol 640a is closed), are periods during which the time for the special symbols to fluctuate during the time-saving state is subtracted unnecessarily, resulting in a short period of disadvantage to the player during the time-saving state.

Therefore, for example, if the normal pattern change pattern set during the time-saving state is configured to be selectable between a normal short pattern change pattern (change time 3 seconds) with a short change time and a normal long pattern change pattern (change time 15 seconds) with a long change time, the player will play in the hope that the normal short pattern change pattern will be selected so that the above-mentioned short disadvantage period will be short. Furthermore, if a configuration is used in which the special pattern change is suspended (the process of subtracting the change time of the special pattern change is suspended) during the execution period of the game per role, as in this embodiment, by lengthening the period during which the short disadvantage period and the interruption period of the special pattern change overlap, it is possible to prevent the change time of the special pattern from being subtracted during the short disadvantage period.

Therefore, in order to shorten the short disadvantage period during the time-saving state, it is advisable to determine the remaining time of the normal game being executed when a game per reel is executed during the time-saving state, and if the remaining time is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), execute a presentation that encourages the player to end the game per reel by the passage of time, rather than by the ball winning. By configuring it in this way, the execution period of the game per reel can be lengthened, thereby shortening the short disadvantage period.

<Electrical Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Note that in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 22, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses a first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, a first winning type counter C2 used to select the type of big win for the special symbols, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the type of stop for a losing special symbol, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 55), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the special symbol entrance 64, which consists of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the special symbol entrance 64.

When the conditions for starting the special symbol (conditions for changing the symbol) are met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol changes based on the various stored values are started.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which there is one type of special pattern, but this is not limited to this, and two or more types of special patterns may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish the lottery conditions for one special pattern type (e.g., the first special pattern) based on the ball entering the special pattern entrance 64 (first entrance), the above-mentioned values may be stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area, and in order to establish the lottery conditions for another special pattern type (e.g., the second special pattern) based on the ball entering an entrance (e.g., the second entrance) different from the special pattern entrance 64 (first entrance), the above-mentioned values may be stored in a second special pattern reserved ball storage area different from the first special pattern reserved ball storage area.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area, second special symbol reserved ball storage area) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery results for the special symbols are configured to be either a big win or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery results in a miss, the player may be able to win a small win that can grant a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, an opportunity to grant a bonus to the player can be provided, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, a small win type counter can be provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the small win type counter obtained can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbols is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of games.

In addition, in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is provided that corresponds to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67, which is made up of one reserved area (first reserved area), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 22. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 399) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special symbol entrance 64. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that a jackpot for the special symbol has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 23(b), the first winning random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, in the first win random number table 202a, the judgment value for judging a jackpot is stipulated within a predetermined range, and the judgment value of the predetermined range is stipulated. As shown in FIG. 23(b), the value of the first win random number counter C1, "0 to 3", is stipulated as the jackpot judgment value, and the other values ("4 to 399") are stipulated as the miss judgment value.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same regardless of the game state, but the invention is not limited to this and the jackpot probability may be different depending on the game state. In this case, the jackpot probability of a special symbol may be two types, a high probability state and a low probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of a special symbol may be different for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

When it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and the small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and the small win lottery are executed in different processes. Also, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 when a special pattern jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the special pattern ball entrance 64.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202c to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first win type selection table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

Figure 24 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the first winning type selection table 202c. As shown in Figure 24 (a), this first winning type selection table 202c has a special jackpot type selection table 202c1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 that is referenced when the ball enters the V winning hole 165 (V winning).

First, the contents of the special jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 24(b). FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, the special jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 98", "Big Win A" is defined, and when it is a value of "99", "Big Win B" is defined.

Here, we will explain the content of the jackpot game that is executed corresponding to each jackpot type, and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) of the jackpot game that is executed according to each jackpot type, that is, the opening operation scenario that specifies the operation content (opening timing, number of openings) of the movable member (variable winning device 650) executed during the jackpot game in chronological order, is stored in advance in various operation scenario tables 202e possessed by ROM 202 of main control device 110.

Then, when a jackpot is won, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read from the various operation scenario tables 202e and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main control unit 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds), and the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in FIG. 56), which executes control during jackpot play, determines the current scenario content and executes processing based on the determination result.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when multiple movable members are moved by one opening operation control, the operation control for the multiple movable members can be centrally managed by using an opening operation scenario that specifies the operation content of each movable member in chronological order. Therefore, compared to when operation control is performed separately for each movable member, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and in the event that a malfunction occurs with one movable member, operation processing for the other movable members can be smoothly executed.

"Jackpot A" is a type of jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times round play is executed) is 4 rounds, and the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds. This round play is a game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until 10 balls enter the variable winning device 650 or until the opening period has elapsed for 30 seconds. In other words, "Jackpot A", in which 4 rounds of round play are executed, is a jackpot game in which a maximum of 40 balls can enter the variable winning device 650.

Furthermore, "Jackpot A" is stipulated to set a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends, and the time-saving state is set to continue for a period of "four time-savings," that is, the short time period until four special symbol lottery draws are performed without a jackpot being won during the time-saving state (until the result of the fourth special symbol lottery is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) display).

"Jackpot B" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds (the number of times round play is executed) is 4 rounds, and the variable winning device 650 is opened during the 4 rounds. It is also specified that a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends, and the time-saving state continues for a period of "15 time-savings," that is, the time-saving period until 15 times are executed during the time-saving state without winning a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (until the result of the 15th special symbol lottery is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) display).

In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the special symbol, four rounds of jackpot play are always played, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. If the set jackpot type is "jackpot A" (99% of the time when a jackpot is won), the number of time-saving times is set to "4 times," and if it is "jackpot B" (1% of the time when a jackpot is won), the number of time-saving times is set to "15 times."

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, during the time-saving state, the special electric game (a game in which the aim is to win a jackpot by having the ball enter the V winning port 165 (V entry) based on the drawing of a normal pattern) is executed, which is easier to execute than the special symbol game during the normal state (a game in which the aim is to win a jackpot by having the ball enter the special symbol entry port 64 and having the aim of winning a jackpot through a special symbol drawing) and is configured so that the time-saving state is a more advantageous game state for the player than the normal state. Therefore, "jackpot B", which is a game state advantageous to the player and is difficult to end (the conditions for ending the time-saving state are difficult to meet), is a more advantageous jackpot type for the player than "jackpot A".

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, the same number of rounds of jackpot play is executed for all jackpots. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to allow a different number of rounds of play to be executed depending on the jackpot type selected. Also, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, a time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends for all jackpots, and the number of time-saving times (time-saving end conditions) is made different depending on the jackpot type. However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to provide a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set at the end of the jackpot play depending on the jackpot type selected, and a jackpot type in which a normal state is set.

Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 24(c). FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. This V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table that defines the game content of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed when the ball enters the V winning port 165 (V winning). Specifically, "jackpot C" is defined for the entire range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 99".

This "Big Win C" is a big win type in which the number of rounds (the number of times round play is executed) is 10 rounds as a big win game, and the variable winning device 650 is opened for the 10 rounds. It is also specified that a time-saving state (a low probability state for special symbols, a high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the big win game ends, and the time-saving state continues for a period of "4 times of time-saving," that is, a short time period until four times are executed during the time-saving state without winning a big win in the lottery for special symbols (until the result of the fourth special symbol lottery is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) display).

In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot game executed based on a V win (jackpot game executed in a special electric game) is configured to have a larger number of rounds than the jackpot game executed based on a special chart lottery (jackpot game executed in a special chart game). In other words, in terms of the amount of bonuses (number of winning balls) awarded during a jackpot game, the time-saving state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the normal state.

In this embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is obtained based on the ball entering the special electric operation port 643, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed based on a V winning during a role winning game is executed based on the jackpot type selected by referring to the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 that triggered the execution of the role winning game that resulted in a V winning.

In this embodiment, since there is only one type of jackpot (jackpot C) defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, the same jackpot game is executed regardless of which role-winning game results in a V win. However, this is not limited to this, and multiple jackpot types may be defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 according to the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2. In addition, multiple special electric operation ports may be provided in the normal electric winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set corresponding to the special electric operation port in which the ball has won among the multiple special electric operation ports. Furthermore, the value of the first winning type counter C2 may be obtained based on the ball winning the V winning port 165 while the role-winning game is being executed, and the jackpot type may be selected based on the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is selected regardless of the game state set at the time when the jackpot is won or the ball enters the V winning port 165. However, without being limited to this, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be changed depending on the game state set at the time when the jackpot is won or the ball enters the V winning port 165. In this case, for example, when a normal symbol winning game is executed just before the time-saving state ends (just before the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time-saving state stops), and a V is won during a role-winning game executed in a state in which the normal state after the time-saving state ends is set, that is, only when a V is won in a special electric game during the normal state, a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is unlikely to be met after the end of the jackpot game (for example, a time-saving state with 20 time-saving times) may be set.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot types are three, but they are not limited to this, and may be two or less, or four or more. Also, the same jackpot type may be set when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery and when a V is won in a special electric game. Furthermore, the selection rate or type of the jackpot type selected this time may be different based on information about the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the jackpot game content or the transition content of the game state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the past game history (jackpot history). Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure it so that a suggestion performance is executed that can suggest to the player the jackpot type that is likely to be set at the next jackpot based on the past jackpot history. This makes it easier for the player to play continuously.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 55) described below is executed once, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will now be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a normal table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time-saving table 202d2 used when the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, different data tables are used to select a variation pattern depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected can be different depending on the game state.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to Figs. 25(b) and 25(c). Fig. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referenced when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result for the special pattern is a jackpot than when it is a miss.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the result of the lottery for the special pattern (toku-zu) is a "jackpot (win)," and various winning normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds are specified in the range of "0 to 50" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and winning super reaches with a fluctuation time of 60 to 120 seconds are specified in the range of "51 to 198." In FIG. 25(b), in order to simplify the explanation of the fluctuation pattern of winning super reaches, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198," but in reality, a predetermined fluctuation time (e.g., a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, a fluctuation time of 100 seconds, a fluctuation time of 120 seconds) is specified in the corresponding range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a "jackpot (win)" and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "51 to 198," a fluctuation pattern is set with a fluctuation time of "60 seconds to 120 seconds" that corresponds to the acquired value.

In addition, when the lottery result is a "miss", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified to correspond to a short miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", a miss normal reach with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "180 to 194", and a miss super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 to 120 seconds in the range of "195 to 198". Note that the content shown when the lottery result is a "miss" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "195 to 198" has the same purpose as when the lottery result is a "jackpot (win)" as described above, and is a simplified explanation.

In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, the types of variable times that can be selected are the same, and only the rate at which each variable time is selected is different. Furthermore, it is configured so that the rate at which a longer variable time is selected is higher when the special pattern lottery result is a jackpot (win) than when it is a miss. Therefore, the longer the special pattern variation that is being executed, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot, so that when a special pattern variation with a long variable time is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game before the variable time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, that is, in this embodiment, the variable time set for the lottery of the special symbol executed in the normal state is configured so that the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the longer the variable time is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of frequent periods in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed. Also, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short variable time is set, so it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special symbol entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of variable time that can be selected is configured to be the same regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery performed during the normal state, which makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing the result of the special pattern lottery in advance by knowing the length of the variable time that is set. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that some of the variable time can be set so that it is selected only when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (win), or so that it is selected only when it is a miss.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), in this embodiment, the variation pattern is selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol (win/lose determination result) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the variation pattern may be selected based on the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won.

Next, the contents of the time-saving table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 25(c). FIG. 25(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 25(c), the time-saving table 202d2 defines the pattern type, lottery result, and value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with the variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(c), if the result of the winning/losing judgment (lottery result) is a "win (jackpot)", a "short win" with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is specified for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 99", and a "long win" with a fluctuation time of 200 seconds is specified for the range of "100 to 198". Also, if the result is a "miss", a "short miss A" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", a "short miss B" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified for the range of "150 to 169", a "short miss C" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the range of "170 to 189", a "long miss A" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified for the range of "190 to 196", and a "long miss B" with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is specified for the value of "197, 198".

As mentioned above, during the time-saving mode, unlike the normal mode, the type of variable time that can be selected differs depending on whether the lottery result for the special symbol is a win or a miss, and the variable time that can be selected when a jackpot is won is longer than the variable time that can be selected when the lottery result is a miss.

As described above, in this embodiment, the period during which the time-saving state is set becomes a game state advantageous to the player, and during that short period, special electric play is executed based on the lottery of normal symbols. In addition, the end condition (time-saving end condition) for the time-saving state is set to an end condition (time-saving number of times) based on the number of times the special symbol changes (number of lotteries).

Therefore, if a longer variation time is selected as the special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state, the period during which the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set can be lengthened. And, in the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, for example, when the time-saving state is set to four times, in the four special pattern lotteries executed after the time-saving state is set, if a jackpot is won (1/100), a variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected as an added value. By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot with a special pattern is won within the limited period of the time-saving state, a more advantageous game can be offered to the player, which can motivate the player to play.

In addition, even if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, the selectable variation time is set to "10 to 50 seconds" with a maximum difference of 5 times, so the player can play while hoping that a longer variation time will be selected as a miss variation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the end screen of the big win game is configured to display a remaining time short period mode 801 to indicate the length of the time-saving state period (V rush period), and this remaining time short period mode 801 is configured to display a value that is within the range until the time-saving end condition is met and is determined in advance based on the winning information included in the reserved special patterns that have already been acquired.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of guessing whether the number of seconds displayed as the remaining time period mode 801 is a display mode that combines the fluctuation times of multiple miss fluctuations, or a display mode that corresponds to the fluctuation time of one jackpot fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 22, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 999 and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 999). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is set by the second winning random number table 202b, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is a winning symbol. In addition, this second winning random number table 202b is divided into two types, one for a low probability of a normal symbol and one for a high probability of a normal symbol winning that is higher than the low probability, and each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a winning symbol is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(c). FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23(c), when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, a normal winning is defined as a value of "0" for the acquired second winning random number counter C4, and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, a normal winning is defined as a value of "0 to 299" for the acquired second winning random number counter C4.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols (1/1000) is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-hand play) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol during the normal state, making it difficult for a normal symbol winning game to be executed during the normal state and for the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols (300/1000) is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a normal symbol winning game based on a winning normal symbol during the time-saving state.

As described above, in this embodiment, in a normal winning game performed during the normal state, the ball is configured to be less likely to enter the normal winning device 640 than in a normal winning game performed during the time-saving state, and even if a ball enters the normal winning device 640 during the normal state, the winning ball is configured to be less likely to enter the special electric operation port 643. In other words, in this embodiment, it is configured to make it difficult to win a normal winning game during the normal state, and even if a normal winning game is won, it is configured to make it difficult for a ball to enter the normal winning device 640 during the normal winning game, and even if a ball enters the normal winning device 640, it is configured to make it difficult for the winning ball to enter the special electric operation port 643.

In this way, by configuring the game to be more difficult to progress during the normal state than during the time-saving state in the multiple processes (three processes) from when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed to when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 as a result of the lottery for the normal symbol executed during the normal state and the execution of a game that hits a special feature.

In addition, in this embodiment, instead of restricting the entry of a ball into the special electric operation port 643 based on the execution of a lottery for a normal symbol during the normal state in the three processes described above, a short change time (the same 3 seconds as during the time-saving state) is set as the change time for the normal symbol even during the normal state. In other words, even if the system is configured to make it easier to draw a lottery for a normal symbol in a short period of time, the restrictions in the three processes described above restrict the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643, so it is possible to reliably prevent a ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 in response to a lottery for a normal symbol executed during the normal state and a game that hits a role.

In this way, by setting the normal pattern variation time during the normal state to be short, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, at the timing when the game state switches, for example, when the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the normal pattern variation with a long variation time executed during the normal state (a state with a low probability of normal patterns) is executed across the timing of the transition of the game state, and the lottery for the normal pattern during the time-saving state cannot be executed even though the special pattern variation during the time-saving state has started. Therefore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the time-saving state is managed for a period as in this embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a game (special electric game) that effectively uses the limited short time period.

In this embodiment, the entry of balls into the special electric operation port 643 during normal operation is restricted in the above-mentioned three processes (the winning probability of a normal symbol, the winning rate of balls into the normal electric winning device 640 in a normal winning game, and the winning rate of balls that have won the normal electric winning device 640 entering the special electric operation port 643) but this is not limited to this and may be restricted in two or less processes. Also, in this embodiment, if a ball that has entered the normal electric winning device 640 does not enter the special electric operation port 643, it enters the out port 644 and the player is not given a privilege (e.g., a prize ball). However, this is not limited to this and, for example, if a ball enters the out port 644, more prize balls may be paid out than if the ball entered the special electric operation port 643.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 during the normal state, while still being able to give the player a different bonus (a bonus different from the bonus for playing a game that hits a special feature) if the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640, providing the player with an element of surprise. Also, when the low probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to provide the player with added value if they win a normal symbol.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 39) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 55).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

The normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is configured to increment by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The value of this normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55), which will be described later, is executed, and is also updated repeatedly within the remaining time in the main process. The normal symbol variation time is then determined by the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the normal symbol variation time is determined using the acquired value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will continue. ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in FIG. 22. Here, the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first win random number table 202a, a second win random number table 202b, a big win type selection table 202c, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and various operation scenario tables 202e. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the second win random number table 202b, the big win type selection table 202c, and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 22, so their explanation will be omitted.

The various operation scenario table 202e is a data table having operation scenarios in which the operation contents of various movable members for which the main control unit 110 manages the operation control are specified in advance in a chronological order, and is read out when the movable members are controlled in the control process of the main control unit 110. In this embodiment, when the movable members are controlled, the operation scenarios that match the current operation control conditions are read out from the various operation scenario table 202e, and the read operation scenarios are temporarily stored in the memory area of the RAM 203. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 55) that is executed at 4 millisecond intervals, the contents of the operation scenarios stored in the memory area are updated periodically (in 4 millisecond units), and if there is an operation scenario that variably operates the movable members in the area corresponding to the updated value, the operation control based on the operation scenario is executed. In addition, each operation scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set for each event (jackpot game, normal game, and bonus game) that controls the operation of the movable members. Therefore, in an action scenario table that corresponds to an event that requires the action control of multiple movable parts within a single event (for example, a normal winning game), the action control content to be executed for the multiple movable parts is specified.

The contents of the various operation scenario table 202e will now be described with reference to Figures 26 to 28. Figure 26(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the various operation scenario table 202e. As shown in Figure 26(a), the various operation scenario table 202e has a big win operation scenario table 202e1, a role win operation scenario table 202e2, a normal win operation scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4.

First, the contents of the role-winning operation scenario table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). FIG. 26(b) is a schematic diagram showing various contents defined in the role-winning operation scenario table 202e2. The role-winning operation scenario table 202e2 is a data table in which role-winning scenarios in which operation contents during a role-winning game are set are defined, and the opening period of the role-winning game (the period from when the role-winning game starts until the V winning device 65 opens (until the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to on)), the round period (the maximum period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), and the ending period (the grace period after the opening period of the V winning device 65 ends and the storage solenoid 209c is set to off) are defined, and operation control corresponding to the value of a scenario counter (not shown) which is set when a role-winning game starts and is periodically (each time the main processing of the main control device 110 is executed) is added to the value is executed.

Specifically, when a game with a per-game feature is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to "1". Since the operation scenario for setting the storage solenoid 209c to "on" is specified as the corresponding operation scenario for the scenario counter "1", the storage solenoid 209c is set to "on" at the same time as the game with a per-game feature is started, and the storage valve 66a is moved to a state in which balls can be stored in the storage section formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a. The value of the scenario counter is then incremented every 4 milliseconds, and the opening period ends when the scenario counter reaches "25", i.e., 0.1 seconds after the game with a per-game feature is started, and then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches "26", the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to "on" and the V opening/closing door 65a (V attacker) is opened. In other words, in this embodiment, the storage valve 66a is configured to be changed to the storage state using the period from the start of the game with a per-game feature to the opening of the V winning device 65. By configuring it in this way, even if a ball enters the V winning device 65 with great force immediately after the V winning device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a has already been changed to the storage state at the time the V winning device 65 is opened, so it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from passing through the storage valve 66a and entering the V winning port 165.

Next, when the scenario counter value reaches "375", i.e., 1.6 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game with a per-game feature, a scenario is defined in which the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to OFF and the V opening/closing door 65a (V attacker) is closed. Then, after the closing control of the V opening/closing door 65a (V attacker) is executed, i.e., when the scenario counter value reaches "376", the ending period of the game with a per-game feature is set and the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF. The closed state (ending period) of the game with a per-game feature is set until the scenario counter value reaches "750".

In other words, in the game where a bonus feature is played in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the V winning device 65 is configured to open after the storage valve 66a is transitioned to the storage state. The scenario is then specified so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to off after the timing at which the V winning device 65 is closed (scenario counter "375"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an unforeseen event from occurring at the start or end of a bonus feature game, which would otherwise cause the bonus feature game to be played at an unintended timing.

Next, the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The first movable valve 66b in this embodiment is controlled to move in a predetermined operation pattern while the power is on to the pachinko machine 10, and the operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110 executed when the power is on to the pachinko machine 10 (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The scenario counter value is updated (incremented by 1) by the process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the first movable valve 66b in this embodiment is configured to be in either a V-entry possible state in which it is possible for the ball to enter the V-entry opening 165, or a V-entry difficult state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V-entry opening 165. The first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 specifies an operation scenario for turning on the first movable valve solenoid 209d (the first movable valve 66b is in a state in which it is possible for the ball to enter the V-entry opening 165) and an operation scenario for turning off the first movable valve solenoid 209d (the first movable valve 66b is in a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V-entry opening 165) for the range of the scenario counter value from "1" to "1500".

Specifically, the operation scenario is specified so that the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF when the scenario counter value is in the range of "1" to "1250", i.e., until 5 seconds have elapsed since the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 was set, and the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON when the scenario counter value is in the range of "1251" to "1500", i.e., 5 to 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. Then, when the scenario counter value reaches the upper limit value "1500", the scenario counter value is switched from "1500" to "1" when the next main process (see FIG. 55) is executed, and thereafter, the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for permitting or prohibiting the entry of a ball into the V winning port 165, is configured to operate variably so as to switch to a state in which the ball can enter the V winning port 165 for only 0.5 seconds during a 5.5 second period. As a result, when a ball reaches the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball will pass through the first movable valve 66b and enter the V winning port 165 is 1/11. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which role-winning play will cause the ball to enter the V winning port 165, and it is possible to motivate the player to play all roles-winning play.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, even if multiple balls enter the V winning device 65 during one play with a special feature, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is configured to be one. This makes the probability of a jackpot in a play with a special feature (the probability that a ball will enter the V winning port 165) approximately 1/11, preventing players from being offered excessive jackpot games.

In this embodiment, the operation of the first movable valve 66b is configured to be always the same while the power is on to the pachinko machine 10, but this is not limited to this and any predetermined operation pattern will do. For example, an operation scenario may be set that sequentially sets a first operation pattern that specifies the off period (5.5 seconds) and on period (0.5) seconds of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, and a second operation pattern that specifies the off period (3 seconds), on period (0.2 seconds), off period (2 seconds), and on period (0.3 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 may be provided, and a different operation scenario may be switched to based on the measurement result by the measuring means. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within one hour after power is turned on, or 3 hours to 3 hours and 10 minutes after power is turned on, etc.), it is preferable to configure the ratio of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on to the ratio of the period during which it is set to off, compared to the normal operation scenario. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) during a time-saving game only for a specific period, and it is possible to have the player play with the aim of playing during that period, thereby improving the operation of the game.

In addition, the control contents of the operation scenario may be changed according to the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 may be configured to start from the initial state (scenario counter value "1") at the timing when a specific jackpot game is executed or ended, or when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss for a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, which is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability of this pachinko machine 10), a special operation scenario may be set in which the proportion of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on is higher than the proportion of the period during which it is set to off than in the normal operation scenario. Once this special operation scenario is set, a time-saving state is set thereafter, and it is preferable to configure it so that it continues to be set for a period until the time-saving state ends. In this way, the special operation scenario can be set so that the player can continue playing. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that a special operation scenario has been set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player that a special operation scenario has been set.

Next, the contents of the normal winning operation scenario table 202e3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal winning operation scenario table 202e3. This normal winning operation scenario table 202e3 is a data table that stores the operation patterns of the normal winning game that is executed when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, and sets the operation scenario corresponding to the game state that is set at the time when the normal winning game is started.

Specifically, the normal winning operation scenario table 202e3 specifies a normal winning scenario 202e31 for normal play, which specifies the operation scenario for normal winning games to be executed during the normal state, and a time-saving normal winning scenario 202e32 for time-saving play, which specifies the operation scenario for normal winning games to be executed during the time-saving state.

Now, referring to FIG. 27(c), the contents of the normal regular symbol winning scenario 202e31 will be explained. FIG. 27(c) is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the normal regular symbol winning scenario 202e31. This normal regular symbol winning scenario 202e31 is an operation scenario that is set when it is determined that the game state at the time when the winning normal symbol fluctuation stops (is confirmed) during the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is a normal state (S1118 in FIG. 48: No).

The normal normal winning scenario 202e31 specifies an operation scenario for setting the normal solenoid that controls the operation of the electric device 640a of the normal winning device 640 and the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that allocates the destination of the winning ball to the normal winning device 640 to on or off, respectively, for the scenario counter value in the range of "1" to "1050".

Specifically, the operation scenario is specified so that the normal power solenoid remains off (electric device 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e remains off (balls flow down to outlet 644) until 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the scenario counter value is in the range of "1" to "1025", i.e., from when the normal normal winning scenario 202e31 is set (from when a normal winning game in normal mode is executed), and then, for 0.1 seconds between 4.1 and 4.2 seconds after the scenario counter value is in the range of "1026" to "1050", i.e., from when the normal normal winning scenario 202e31 is executed, the normal power solenoid remains on (electric device 640a is open) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e remains on (balls flow down to special power operating port 643).

In other words, when a normal winning game is played in the normal state, the normal winning game is played in the closed state (4.1 seconds) and open state (0.1 seconds). Furthermore, even if a ball enters the normal winning device 640 during the 0.1 second open state, the second movable valve 643 is at that point shifted to a position that allows the winning ball to flow down to the outlet 644 (see Figure 4), so it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643.

Next, the contents of the time-saving normal winning scenario 202e32 will be explained with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the time-saving normal winning scenario 202e32. This time-saving normal winning scenario 202e32 is an operation scenario that is set when it is determined that the game state at the time when the winning normal pattern fluctuation stops (is confirmed) in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is a normal state (S1118 in FIG. 48: Yes).

For the time-saving normal winning scenario 202e32, in the range of the scenario counter value "1" to "1025", an operating scenario is defined for setting on/off the normal solenoid that controls the operation of the electric device 640a of the normal winning device 640, and the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that allocates the destination of the winning ball to the normal winning device 640.

Specifically, the normal power solenoid remains off (electric device 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e remains on (the ball flows down to the special power operating port 643) until 0.1 seconds have elapsed since the scenario counter value is in the range of "1" to "25", i.e., from when the normal normal winning scenario 202e31 is set (from when a normal winning game in the normal state is executed), and then, for 3 seconds between 0.1 and 3.1 seconds after the scenario counter value is in the range of "26" to "775", i.e., from when the time-saving normal winning scenario 202e32 is set, the normal power solenoid remains on (electric device 640a is open) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e remains on (the ball flows down to the special power operating port 643). The valve solenoid 209e is set to be continuously on, and the scenario counter value is in the range of "776" to "1024", i.e., until 3.1 to 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the time-saving normal map hit scenario 202e32 was set, the normal power solenoid is set to be off (the electric device 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to be on (the state in which the ball flows down to the special power operating port 643), and when the scenario counter value reaches "1025", i.e., the upper limit value specified in the time-saving normal map hit scenario 202e32, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to be off (the state in which the ball flows down to the outlet 644).

In other words, when a normal winning game is played in the time-saving state, after a short period of closing (0.1 seconds), the opening operation of the electric device 640a in the normal winning game is immediately performed for 3 seconds. This makes it easier to get the ball to win the normal winning device 640 than in a normal winning game in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the time-saving normal winning scenario 202e32, during the period when the ball can enter the normal winning device 640, the second movable valve 643 can be set to a position (see FIG. 5) that allows the ball to enter the special electric operating port 643, making it easier to allow the ball to enter the special electric operating port 643 during normal winning play.

In addition, the above-mentioned normal use normal map hit scenario 202e31 and the time-saving normal map hit scenario 202e32 are specified to have the same operating scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d, so that the operation control content based on the operating scenario can be unified and the process of controlling the variable member can be simplified.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, this normal winning game has a time end condition that is met based on the passage of time (a condition that is met when the normal winning scenario is updated to an upper limit value) and a winning end condition that is met when the number of winning balls in the normal winning device 640 reaches an upper limit value (for example, 5 balls). When playing normally, the winning end condition is set so that the time end condition is met first. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the act of illegally winning a large number of balls in the normal winning device 640 during normal winning games.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 55) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 54) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

As shown in FIG. 29, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a winning number counter 203e, an action counter group 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a big win flag 203i, a time-saving end flag 203j, a role win flag 203k, a special symbol temporary stop flag 203m, a special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n, a V flag 203p, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the special symbol entry port 64 (initial winning), up to the maximum number (four in this embodiment).

The special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory area in which various counter values for starting the display of the special pattern are stored, and when the special pattern stops changing, if various counter values are stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in this memory area.

The special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) when a start winning is detected. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the special pattern ball entry port 64 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the special pattern variation (lottery), it shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each start winning (counter values C1-C2, CS1) stored in the above-mentioned special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a to this special pattern reserved ball execution area in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81. Note that in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area in which the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) are stored in response to the detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning). When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 from the counter buffer and stores them in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b has one reserved area so that data corresponding to one start winning (counter C4, CS2 values) can be stored (reserved) up to one time. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, data on reserved balls is stored in the order in which they passed through the through gate 67 (initial winning), starting with the reserved areas with empty data that are earliest in the order of consumption.

In addition, the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory that stores the values of each counter when it detects that it is time to start executing the normal symbol variable display performance based on the start winning, and stores data (counter C4, CS2 values) to be referenced in processing such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the setting of the display (variable pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display performance, it shifts the data corresponding to one of the start winnings among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b described above (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal symbol variable type counter CS2) to this normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery and the display settings of the second symbol display device 83. In this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the special symbol ball entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the counter up to a maximum value of four. Meanwhile, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a based on a ball entering the special pattern ball entrance 64 (initial winning). The special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a initial winning is detected and the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1-C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special pattern variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), and performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first pattern display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special pattern variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation display performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second pattern display device 83 up to one time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a variable display of a normal pattern is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 during a round of play in a game per role, or the number of balls that have won the specific winning port 650a of the variable winning device 650. Specifically, it is updated by adding one to the number of balls that have passed through a detection port (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) and the number of balls discharged (the cumulative number of detection results of the detection means provided in each winning port that can detect the number of balls passing through) match, and then it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of this winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of the various operation scenarios that have been set, and is composed of scenario counters corresponding to each of the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario table 202e. When any of the operation scenarios in the various operation scenario table 202e is set, a counter value update process is executed as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing of the main control unit 110 (see Figure 55).

In this embodiment, the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario table 202e may be executed in duplicate. For example, a scenario related to a normal winning game and a scenario related to a winning game are configured to be executed simultaneously. Therefore, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario table 202e, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to provide scenario counters for the upper limit number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously. In this case, a type is provided for the scenario counter, and when a new operation scenario is set, an unused scenario counter type is determined, a scenario counter is set based on the determination result, and usage information indicating which operation scenario the set scenario counter is used for is set for the set scenario counter, and the usage information set in the storage means of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is set. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide the storage means in which the usage information is set with a backup function that can hold the stored information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, similar to the various configurations of the RAM 203. By configuring in this way, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power outage or the like during operation control based on the operation scenario, it is possible to continue the operation control after the power is restored from the state before the power outage.

The game status storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game status, and stores the game status corresponding to the game status (setting status of the time-saving counter 203h) that will be set after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0, the normal status is stored, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, the time-saving status is stored.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game or a special feature game is being played, the system is configured to store a game status (jackpot status, special feature game status) indicating that the particular game is being played, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played. In addition, the system is configured to store regular game play information indicating that a regular game is being played.

Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

The information stored in this game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is configured to set a status command corresponding to the information stored in the game status storage area 203g during the start-up process (see FIG. 54) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

This allows the audio and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter for indicating the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and is set to a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set. After the end of a jackpot game, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot that was won is set to this time-saving counter 203j (S1914, 1915 in FIG. 56). When a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state for normal symbols is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203j is subtracted based on the special pattern lottery (variation). When the value of the time-saving counter 203j becomes 0, the time-saving state ends and the normal state is entered. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be configured to continue until the next big win game is executed. In this case, the value of the time-saving counter 203j may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the time-saving state and the condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203j are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203j based on the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, the value of the time-saving counter 203j may be decremented when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control unit 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203j may be decremented when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special normal win), or when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is decremented by one, but it may be configured to decrement the value of the time-saving counter 203j multiple times (for example, 2) in a lump depending on the type of termination condition that has been met, or it may be configured to decrement the value of the time-saving counter 203j so that the value becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time-saving counter 203j. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (jackpot type). This allows players to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot game that has been played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag that is set to ON when the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on a ball entering the special ball entrance 64 is determined to be a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game ends.

The time-saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. This time-saving end flag 203h is set to ON when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1, that is, when it is determined that the current special pattern change is the final change in the time-saving state, in the special pattern change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referenced (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the special pattern change stop process (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that it is ON, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is reset to "0", a process for ending the time-saving state is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45), and it is set to OFF (see S804 in FIG. 45).

In addition, when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 and a V jackpot game is executed during a special pattern change (final change of the time-saving state) that is executed while the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON, the flag is also set to OFF (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

In other words, in this embodiment, the time-saving counter 203h is decremented when the special symbol starts to change, and the end process for determining the end of the time-saving is executed when the special symbol stops changing. If the special symbol change is interrupted by a hit game while the special symbol is changing, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed as a result of the hit game, the time-saving end flag 203h is set to OFF.

Therefore, for example, even if a V jackpot game is executed with the time-saving end flag 203h set to ON and the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving state can be prevented from ending at the timing when the resumed special symbol variation stops. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the time-saving counter 203h is decremented when the special symbol variation starts, so the time-saving end flag 203h is not decremented when the special symbol variation resumes. Therefore, when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, a process is executed to decrement the value of the time-saving counter 203j from the point when the next special symbol variation starts after the special symbol variation ends after the resumed special symbol variation ends.

This configuration allows the player to play for a longer period in the time-saving state that has been set for the player, which increases the player's motivation to play. Note that in this embodiment, the process of updating the time-saving state only occurs when the special symbol stops changing, but this is not limited to this. For example, the process of updating the time-saving state may also occur when the special symbol stops changing if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is a predetermined value (e.g., 2).

The special feature winning flag 203k is a flag for indicating that a special feature winning game is being executed, and is set to ON when a special feature winning game is being executed. This special feature winning flag 203k is set to ON when a ball that entered the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal feature winning game enters the special electric operation port 643, and when a special feature winning game is not being executed at that time (see S1307 in FIG. 50). In various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special feature winning flag 203k is referenced when determining whether a special feature winning game is being executed, and is set to OFF when the special feature winning game ends. In this embodiment, when the special feature winning flag 203k is set to ON, the special feature variation is interrupted.

The special chart temporary stop flag 203m is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special chart is stopped. When it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when it is set from the on state to the off state, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol variation has been temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol variation has been temporarily stopped (interrupted). Note that in this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643, a role-winning game can be executed, and when the role-winning game is executed, the variation of the special symbol being executed is stopped.

The special symbol change time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the change time of the special symbol, and a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special symbol change pattern selection process (see S307 in S6 of FIG. 43) is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the special symbol change in progress process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. In the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether the value is 0 (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol change time counter 203a is 0 (S204 in FIG. 40: No), a special symbol change stop process (see S287 in FIG. 45) is executed to stop the special symbol that is changing.

Furthermore, this special chart fluctuation time counter 203n is configured so that the process for decrementing its value is interrupted when a hit game or a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the value of the special chart fluctuation time counter 203n is not decremented during a hit game or a jackpot game.

The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that a ball has entered a V winning hole during a game in which a special feature has been hit, and is set to ON when a ball has entered a V winning hole during a game in which a special feature has been hit. The setting status of this V flag 203p is referenced (see S2008 in FIG. 58) in the special feature hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58), and if it is set to ON, the start of a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). It is then set to OFF (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for playing the game, counters, flags, etc.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reserve lamp, a specific winning port solenoid 209a for driving the specific winning port 650a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate 650b as an axis, a V winning port solenoid 209b for driving the opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 to open and close, and a storage valve 66a provided within the V winning device 65. Solenoids 209 are connected, including a storage solenoid 209c, a first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, a second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the normal electric winning device 640, and a solenoid for driving the electric role 640a (other solenoid 209z), and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which include a group of switches and sensors (not shown, for example, a storage sensor 65s that detects balls stored in a storage section formed in the storage valve 66a in the V winning device 65), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply unit 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal, a variation effect is executed in which the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a varying manner in response to the special pattern variation being executed. In this variation effect, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/loss determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play the game (special pattern game) while predicting whether the current special pattern variation is a jackpot win or not by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set, the third pattern display device 81 does not execute a variation effect to show the result of the special pattern lottery, but executes an effect (V rush effect) to guide the game content of the special electric game that aims for a V hit game triggered by the lottery of a normal pattern. Therefore, the variation pattern selection table 222a specifies various variation patterns as variation patterns to be referenced when the game state is in the normal state, and does not specify a variation pattern to be referenced when the time-saving state is set. Note that, when the third pattern is displayed small on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in response to the special pattern variation during the time-saving state, it is sufficient to specify only the variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the status of the operation control of various devices being executed on the main control device 110 side, and is formed from the same data table as the various operation scenario tables 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When a command indicating the start of operation control (for example, a command indicating the start of a winning game) is received from the main control device 110 side, this operation scenario table 222b is referenced when setting an operation scenario corresponding to the received command. The operation scenario set here is updated and controlled so as to be synchronized with the update operation on the main control device 110 side.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to easily grasp the operating status of various devices and future operation developments by simply outputting from the main control device 110 a command indicating the start of operation control. In this embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side in order to reduce the processing load on the main control device 110 side, but this is not limited to this, and the progress status of various operation scenarios held in the various operation scenario tables 202e of the main control device 110 may be set as a command and output to the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, referring to FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, a special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a subordinate state setting area 223g, a look-ahead counter 223h, a time period counter 223i, an unannounced period storage area 223j, an unannounced reserved number storage area 223k, an interruption flag 223m, a special winning flag 223n, an extension flag 223p, a V rush flag 223q, a fluctuation time counter 223r, an announced reserved number storage area 223s, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The command memory area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for those commands is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 223a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and executes processing according to that command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (1st area to 4th area) for special symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for reserved balls before the fluctuation begins.

The special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c, like the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display unit 37 (and the third pattern display unit 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the special pattern ball entrance 64, or when the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update the value in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball count pattern. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the reserved ball number equal to the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the secondary display area Ds1 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The special pattern change start flag 223d is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special pattern change pattern command is received that notifies the change pattern of the special pattern output from the main control device 110. On the other hand, it is turned off when the change display setting is made in the third pattern display device 81.

The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop type command is received from the main control device 110 to notify the special symbol variable stop type. On the other hand, it is turned OFF when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used to select a variation pattern and various effects, and is repeatedly updated in the range from 0 to 98. It is updated by adding 1 each time the main process is executed.

In the slave status setting area 223g, data corresponding to the status command output from the master control device 110 is set. The current game status can also be determined by the voice and lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave status setting area 223g. Note that the status setting command is also output from the master control device 110 when the power is turned on, and the backed-up game status can be determined by the voice and lamp control device 113.

The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of reserved special patterns for which the variable time has been read ahead among the number of time-saving times set as the time-saving state, and is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times set when the time-saving state is set, and is subtracted according to the number of reserved special patterns for which the variable time has been read ahead. It is referenced when the value of the time-saving period counter 223i described below becomes 0, and if the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, it means that the special pattern variation is being executed even in the time-saving state, and processing is executed to display a special effect (see FIG. 19(a)).

The short time counter 223i is a counter that indicates the time (special pattern change time) for the special pattern change until the time-saving state ends, and is set to a value that is the cumulative value of multiple special pattern change times until the special pattern change ends when the condition for ending the time-saving state is met. The value of this short time counter 223i is referenced and subtracted (see S5303, S5304 in FIG. 72) in the performance update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) that is executed every millisecond in the main process of the sound lamp control process 113 (see FIG. 60).

The value indicated by the time period counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining time of the V-Rush in the V-Rush effect executed during the time-saving state (see FIG. 12(c)). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the game is played in the same way (left-handed play) during the normal state, the jackpot game, and the time-saving state, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is configured to easily reach the upper limit (4) at the timing when the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends starts.

Therefore, on the ending screen of a jackpot game where the time-saving count is set to four (see FIG. 12(a)), the change time until the time-saving state ends (the cumulative value of the change time for four special pattern changes) is displayed based on the special pattern reserve information (winning information for the special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223b) that has been acquired at that time.

Even if the number of time-saving times is greater than the upper limit (4) of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, or if the number of time-saving times is set to four, if the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols) at the end of the big win game has not reached four, the value of the time-saving period counter 223i is set according to the special symbol reserved information acquired at that time, and the number of reserved special symbols added to the time-saving period counter 223i is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. Then, when new special symbol reserved information is acquired, the special symbol change time is added to the time-saving period counter 223i based on the acquired special symbol reserved information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

The unannounced period storage area 223j is an area that temporarily stores the special symbol variable time corresponding to the special symbol reserved information included in the received winning command when the variable time can be added to the time period counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, and even though a winning command has been received, the special symbol variable time value corresponding to the special symbol reserved information included in the winning command cannot be added to the time period counter 223i (for example, during a jackpot game or a game with a winning combination).

The value (special chart fluctuation time) stored in this unannounced period storage area 223j is read out when the time period can be added, and is referenced when adding to the time period counter 223i. By configuring it in this way, regardless of whether the time period can be added or not, when a winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute the process of reading out the special chart fluctuation time included in the winning command, thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

The unannounced reserved number storage area 223k is a memory area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands whose special pattern variable time is stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j described above, i.e., the number of special pattern reserved balls. It is read out when it becomes possible to add the time period, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented according to the read value.

The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the time period counter 223h is not being subtracted, and is set to ON when the value of the time period counter 223h is not being subtracted, i.e., when a bonus hit game or a jackpot game is being played.

The special win flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when the reserved special pattern contains winning information indicating a special win ("Big Win B"). This special win flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined during the big win end process (see S4914 in FIG. 69) that the reserved memory contains winning information indicating a special win (see S5013 in FIG. 69).

In this embodiment, if there is a special win in the reserved special symbols obtained at the end of the big win game, only the period until the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to that special win is displayed as the short time period during the V Rush, and further, a performance (heaven mode) is executed to inform the player that there is a special win in the reserved special symbols (see FIG. 17(a)).

By configuring in this way, the player can be notified in advance that a jackpot game (a jackpot game won in a special pattern lottery) will be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (after the time period displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 has elapsed), so the player can play with peace of mind. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the time period until the end of the variation time of the special pattern variation corresponding to the special win is notified as the time period, so the remaining time period of the time period at the time of the jackpot game (special win) can be set to 0 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to easily notify the player how many seconds later the jackpot game will be executed, the player can play while having fun wondering how many times the V jackpot game can be executed during the time period in the heaven mode (the period until the jackpot game of the special win is executed).

Furthermore, when Heaven mode is set, the period until the end of the variation time of the special pattern variation corresponding to the special win is notified as the time period, so that the player cannot determine in advance the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern reservation acquired after the special pattern reservation corresponding to the special win. This prevents the player from knowing in advance that the variation time of the next special pattern variation to be executed is 10 seconds, for example, and thus prevents the player from losing motivation to play, when a jackpot game corresponding to a special win is executed with 10 seconds remaining in the time period.

The extension flag 223p is a flag for indicating that a normal winning game is being played when the end condition of the time-saving state is met, and is set to on when a normal winning game is being played when the end condition of the time-saving state is met. In this embodiment, the operation scenarios for the normal winning game include a normal winning scenario 202e31 for normal winning games in the normal state, and a time-saving winning scenario 202e32 for normal winning games in the time-saving state, and the game content of the normal winning game is variably set based on the game state set at the execution timing of the normal winning game.

Therefore, for example, if a normal winning game is executed just before the end of the time-saving state, the normal winning game may be executed during the time-saving state even after the game state transitions to the normal state. When such a situation occurs, the system is configured to execute an effect in which the end timing of the V-rush effect, which indicates the game mode during the time-saving state, is extended to the end timing of the normal winning game (see FIG. 16(c)). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player of the period during which they should aim for a V win (the V-rush period).

The V Rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating that it is a V Rush period, and is set on if a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery (special pattern lottery) during the normal state, and is set off if the conditions for ending the time-saving state are met. This V Rush flag 223q is configured to continue to be set on even if a jackpot game is played during the time-saving period (during a V Rush). This makes it easy to set the period for which various accumulated information during the V Rush period (information indicating the number of V jackpot games won and the number of balls won during the V Rush period) is calculated.

The variation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol. When a variation pattern command for the special symbol is received, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set, and is referenced and subtracted (see S5303, S5304 in FIG. 72) in the performance update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control process 113 (see FIG. 60). The value of this variation time counter 223h is referenced when determining the remaining period of the ongoing special symbol variation at the timing when the special symbol variation may be interrupted, and is used to set different performance modes depending on the remaining period.

The reported reserved number storage area 223s is an area for storing the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the change time already added to the value of the time period counter 223i. When the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is updated, the updated value is stored, and when the special symbol change ends, the value is subtracted. Then, at the end of the jackpot game when a new number of time-saving times is set, the value stored in the reported reserved number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h. When a new time-saving state is set, the number of reserved special symbols that has already been reported as the remaining period of the time-saving state is subtracted, and the number of reserved special symbols that can be newly added to the time period corresponds to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In this embodiment, the device is configured so that the effect that indicates to the player the variable time corresponding to the reserved special chart acquired during the normal state is not executed, but the presenter may be configured to change the presentation mode depending on the reserved special chart contents during the normal state.

For example, the special symbol stop type (the combination of third symbols indicating a jackpot) may be variably set based on the change time corresponding to the acquired reserved special symbols, and when a jackpot is won when the total change time of the reserved special symbols exceeds 100 seconds, a combination of third symbols in which odd numbers are stopped and displayed may be displayed.

In addition, the display mode of the reserved patterns displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the normal state may be variably set based on the length of the change time in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won through the special pattern lottery.

In this embodiment, when entering V Rush, the entire variable time based on the reserved special symbols that have already been acquired is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player may be notified of only a portion of the variable time based on the reserved special symbols that have already been acquired, or the player may be able to select a gameplay in which the variable time of the special symbols that indicates the duration of the V Rush (the period until the time-saving state ends) is not notified by operating the operating means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the change times corresponding to the multiple special chart changes that are executed before the time-saving end condition is met are added up and notified, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that the player can identify the change times corresponding to each special chart reservation. In this case, for example, the display mode of the special chart reservation corresponding to the special chart change that is executed before the time-saving end condition is met may be displayed in a display mode that imitates a character, so that the player can roughly grasp the length of the change time of the special chart change corresponding to the special chart reservation depending on the type of character displayed.

In this embodiment, the system is configured so that the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is always set after a jackpot game is played, and so the system is configured to execute processing to set a V-rush flag when a jackpot game is played. However, for example, if the system is configured so that the time-saving state and the normal state are set at a specific ratio after the jackpot game ends, there is a risk that the time-saving state will not be set after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot game is played. In this case, after the jackpot game ends (during the ending period of the jackpot game), it is determined based on the set jackpot type whether or not the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, and if it is determined that the time-saving state will be set, it can be changed after the special chart that has been acquired at that time is reserved.

Next, the game content executed in response to the normal symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 31 and 32. Figure 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a normal symbol winning game is executed in the normal state, and Figure 32 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a normal symbol winning game is executed in the time-saving state.

Now, referring to FIG. 31, the flow of the game when a normal winning game is executed in the normal state will be explained. In this embodiment, the game (special electric game) can be executed in the following order, triggered by winning the lottery for the normal symbol, the game with the special symbol, and the big win game (V big win game). In other words, the big win game can be executed without drawing a lottery for the special symbol.

First, in the normal state, if a normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game based on the normal symbol winning scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27(c)) is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is controlled to open. In the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 27(c), it takes 4 seconds (t1) for the electric device 640a to open after the normal symbol winning game starts, and then it goes through an open state of 0.1 seconds (t2), and then a closed state of 1 second (t3), and the normal symbol winning game ends. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start of the normal symbol winning game, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operation port 643 through the second movable valve 643, and then the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the outlet 644.

Therefore, in the normal winning game that is executed in the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640, and even if it does enter, the winning ball is guided to the outlet 644. This can reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operation port 643 during the normal state and the game of winning the role can be executed. By configuring in this way, even if the same game method is executed during the normal state in which the special game that aims to execute the jackpot game by drawing a special pattern is executed and during the time-saving state in which the special electric game that aims to execute the jackpot game by drawing a normal pattern is executed, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed by the special electric game during the normal state and to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is configured to end when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) during the time-saving state, so it is necessary to prevent a situation in which the special symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state. In contrast, in this embodiment, the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time-saving state are configured to execute the same game method, so it is possible to prevent a game in which only the normal symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, the operation content of the normal winning game is set so that the special electric game is prohibited from being executed during the normal state, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the same operation scenario as the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state is selected for some of the normal winning games executed during the normal state. This allows the player to play a game that is unexpected.

Returning to FIG. 31, the explanation will be continued. As described above, when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state, the ball that entered the normal winning device 640 does not enter the special electric operation port 643, so the special winning game that is executed when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 is not executed, and the special winning game in which the V winning device 65 is opened and the big winning game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened are not executed, and a new normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) is executed based on the end of the normal winning game. In addition, since the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31(h)) is set with an operation scenario that is constantly driven during the period when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, it is driven with an operation pattern based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27(a)) regardless of whether the special winning game is executed or not.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, we will explain the game flow when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is played among the game flow when a normal jackpot game is played in the time-saving state.

First, in the time-saving state, if a normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game based on the time-saving normal symbol winning scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) is executed, and the normal electric winning device 640 is controlled to open. In the normal symbol winning game executed during the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 28, it takes 0.1 seconds (t1) for the electric device 640a to open after the normal symbol winning game starts, and then it goes through an open state for 3 seconds (t2), and a closed state for 1 second (t3), and the normal symbol winning game ends. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start of the normal symbol winning game, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the ball can enter the special electric operating port 643 through the second movable valve 643, and then the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the outlet 644.

Therefore, in a normal winning game that is executed during the time-saving state, it is configured so that the ball is more likely to enter the normal electric winning device 640 (easier to win than in a normal winning game during the normal state), and the winning ball is more likely to enter the special electric operation port 643 (easier to win than in a normal winning game during the normal state). This makes it easier for the ball to enter the special electric operation port 643 and makes it easier to play a winning game with a special feature during a normal winning game that is executed during the time-saving state.

When a ball enters the special electric operation port 643, the passage (entry) of the ball is detected by the special electric operation port entry switch (not shown in FIG. 32(e)), and the detection result triggers a role-winning game in which the V entry device 65 is opened. When the role-winning game starts, after a waiting period of 0.1 seconds (t5), the V entry port solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) to open the V opening/closing door 65a, and then the role-winning game is executed in which the V entry port solenoid 209b is set to OFF for 1.4 seconds (t7). In addition, the start of the role-winning game triggers the storage solenoid 209c to be set to ON for 1.6 seconds (t8) to position the storage valve 66a in the storage state. In other words, during the period when a ball can enter the V winning device 65 by playing with a pertapplication, the storage valve 66a is maintained in a storage state (see FIG. 7), so that multiple balls cannot reach the V winning port 165 during one play with a pertapplication.

When the storage solenoid 209c is set to off after the period t8 has elapsed, one ball stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down toward the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 so as to alternate between a closed state for 5 seconds (t10) and an open state for 0.5 seconds (t9). When the ball stored in the storage valve 66a reaches the first movable valve 66a, if the first movable valve 66b is in a closed state, the ball flows down toward the second outlet 163b, and if the first movable valve 66b is in an open state, the ball flows down toward the V winning port 165. When the ball enters the V winning port 165, the passage of the ball is detected by a V winning switch (FIG. 32(i)) not shown, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is started based on the detection result.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when a normal winning game is executed during the time-saving state, a normal winning game is executed in which it is easy to get the ball to win the normal winning device 640 (easier to win than in a normal winning game during the normal state), and the winning ball is likely to win the special electric operation port 643, and when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state, a normal winning game is executed in which it is difficult to get the ball to win the normal winning device 640 (more difficult to win than in a normal winning game during the time-saving state), and even if a ball wins the normal winning device 640, it is difficult for the winning ball to win the special electric operation port 643.

By configuring it in this way, in order to continuously execute special symbol variations during the time-saving state, even if the game method of aiming at the special ball entrance 64, which is the lottery trigger for the special symbol, and the game method of aiming at the through gate 67, which is the lottery trigger for the normal symbol, are the same, the probability of the special symbol winning game being executed can be greatly different depending on the game state. Also, even if an act of illegally making a ball win the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal symbol winning game during the normal state (for example, stopping a ball near the electric role 640a with a magnet and making the ball win at the timing of its opening) is performed, it is possible to prevent the winning ball from winning the special electric operation port 643, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, not only can the game be played to trigger the selection of special symbols or the selection of normal symbols, but also the normal symbol winning game, the role winning game, and the big winning game can all be played by left-handed play, so the player can play smoothly without the hassle of having to change the playing method.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 and the preview performance based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to Figures 33 to 38. Figure 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

Below, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory generally has the problem of slow read speed, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. Thus, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 38) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (starting address of the source storage) and the end address (last address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the last address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variable image will be explained with reference to Figure 34. Figure 34 is an explanatory diagram explaining the power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after power is turned on.

Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 34(a) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start the change, the display control device 114 alternately displays a power-on change image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG. 34(b) and a power-on change image with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern as shown in FIG. 34(c) during the change period. Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is determined from the display pattern command and stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "jackpot for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 34(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops, and if it is a "miss for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 34(c) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

In addition, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entrance 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 34 (b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the special ball entrance 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 35, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be explained. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 35(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "town stage" and FIG. 35(b) showing rears B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage", and "sky stage". Also, FIG. 28 shows rear E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 35, the back images corresponding to each of the backs A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are all longer horizontally than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") are all configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on rear side E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... over time. Specifically, on rear side E, an image of a mountain towering over the island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "Island Stage", an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of back E. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually turns from black to white, and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, a repeating back image returning to the back image indicating a morning glow is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 35(a), the entire range of rear image A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "city stage," is displayed, so by keeping all image data of rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, for back side B, which corresponds to the "forest stage", back side C, which corresponds to the "river stage", and back side D, which corresponds to the "sky stage", only a portion of the back side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as shown in FIG. 35(b). Also, image data corresponding to back side E, which corresponds to the island stage, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on, and remains resident.

To instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but doing so would require a very large capacity RAM to be used for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a', and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by lottery at the start of the change, the initial positions of the backs B to D can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be made to scroll or change color over time. Also, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the backs B to D, the increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

The range of positions a to b for the backs B to D is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. This allows the image data from position b' to position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, so that after the range from position a to position b is scrolled using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 to display it on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear surface E, the range of image data is set so that after the image in the initial position is displayed, the image data for the remaining image can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while the image is being displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235. This allows image data corresponding to the remaining image to be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 sequentially over time using image data corresponding to the rear surface image stored in normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, for rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 33) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

In addition, in the rear side B to D, the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear side image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns numbered "0" to "9" as the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after a ball has entered the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to main patterns that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as main patterns consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, and main patterns consisting of a rear pattern and additional patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main pattern without a number from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", an "old man", and a "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. This causes the image controller 237 to read the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfer the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, opening presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is intended to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will soon transition to a special game state and that the large opening, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, while the round effect is intended to inform the player of the number of rounds that will soon begin. The ending effect is intended to inform the player that the special game state has ended.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 36, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 36 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed during that time, corresponding to an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which is specified for each address: one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display one of rears A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "forest stage," "river stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A to E. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A to E is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among back faces A to E as the drawing target, and also determines the range of back face images to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table. Alternatively, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the image to be drawn. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, and this may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of the sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 37 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 37).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data from which transfer should begin, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 34 (a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 73) executed by the MPU 231 after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in Figure 73). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in Figure 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 33) that describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 38) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 38) described below that specifies the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, if the drawing list received from the MPU 231 contains transfer data information, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 75(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see Figure 38) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. In addition, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 38, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. When the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area in character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) in image storage area 236a in normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing and display processing of one frame of image is completed, each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage state, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7714 in FIG. 86) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, information on this specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 75(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If this rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). In addition, this rear image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). This makes it possible to display a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag that indicates the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x that corresponds to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S7002 in FIG. 81(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. This rear image discrimination flag 233x makes it easy to identify the currently set rear image type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag that indicates whether or not a demo is being performed. When the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo is being performed, and when it is off, it means that a demo is not being performed. In the display setting process (see FIG. 82), the demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), and S6905 in FIG. 79). The demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo is currently being performed.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmation display effect is being performed. Here, the confirmation display effect indicates an effect in which the stopped pattern is displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variable pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set on when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is set off when a display data table other than the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 86(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), and S6905 in FIG. 79). This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether or not a confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 39 to 58. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, and 999, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed in response to the entry of a ball into the special symbol entry port 64 (start winning) or the entry of a ball into the normal electric winning device 640 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 40 to 47.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal pattern change process, which is a process for displaying on the second pattern display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal pattern change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 48 and 49. After the through gate passing process is executed, the special electric start port winning process is executed (S108), and then the V entrance passing process (S109) and the V passing process (S110) are executed. Details of the special electric start port winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 50 to 52. After the V passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the control handle 51 and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the special symbol based on each acquired counter value, controls the first symbol display device 37 to be able to display the variable display in the determined variable display mode by a predetermined control, sets various commands to execute the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and controls to stop and display in a display mode that shows the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). The special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), it is first determined whether the player is currently playing a jackpot (during jackpot) or a per-game (during per-game) (S201). Here, it is determined whether the player is currently playing a jackpot (during jackpot) or a per-game (during per-game) based on the information stored in the game status storage area 203g.

If it is determined in the process of S201 that a jackpot or a special feature hit is occurring (S201: Yes), it is then determined whether the special pattern temporary stop flag 203m is set to on (S202), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S202: Yes), the display of the first pattern display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special pattern is updated (S203), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S202 that the special pattern temporary stop flag 203m is not set to on (S202: No), this process ends as it is.

The special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when a hit game of the special symbol is being played. In this embodiment, the change time set in the change display (special symbol change display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (decremented) while the hit game of the special symbol is being played, and during that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode to indicate that the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped.

By configuring in this way, the player can be informed that the special symbol variable display that was being executed with the start of the game of the winning role has been temporarily stopped, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling suspicious that the special symbol variable that was being executed has disappeared. In addition, the display mode for indicating that the special symbol variable display is temporarily stopped may be, for example, the same display mode as the display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is being executed (for example, a flashing display mode that repeatedly turns on and off at 0.2 second intervals), or a display mode with a slower flashing interval than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is being executed (for example, a flashing display mode that repeatedly turns on and off at 0.5 second intervals) may be used. Furthermore, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be capable of displaying multiple color display modes, a flashing display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when the display is temporarily stopped may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the current time is not a jackpot or a winning combination (S201: No), it is determined whether the value of the special symbol change time counter 203n is greater than 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state (S204). If it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state (the value of the special symbol change time counter 203n is greater than 0) (S204: Yes), a special symbol change in progress process is executed (S206).

In this special symbol change in progress process (S206), a process is executed to change (update) the change display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period in which the special symbol is changing. This special symbol change in progress process (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

After completing the process of S206, it is then determined whether the value of the special pattern change time counter 203n updated in the special pattern change in progress process (S206) is 0 (S207). If it is determined in the process of S207 that the special pattern change time counter 203n is 0 (S207: Yes), the special pattern change stop process is executed (S208), and then this process is terminated.

In the special symbol change stop process (S208), when the change time specified for the special symbol being changed has elapsed, a process is executed to stop the change display with the symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol. Details of this special symbol change stop process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. Also, if it is determined in the process of S207 that the special symbol change time counter 203n is not 0 (S207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the special symbol change time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing, then the special symbol change start process is executed (S205). In this special symbol change start process (S205), a process is executed to execute a new drawing (change) of the special symbol, and it is determined whether a new drawing (change) is possible, and if a new drawing (change) is possible, a process to execute a new drawing (change) is executed. This special symbol change start process (S205) will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 41 to 43. After the special symbol change start process (S205) is executed, this process is terminated.

As explained above with reference to FIG. 40, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which a lottery (variation) of a special symbol can be executed, the variation process (S204 to S208) for the special symbol is executed within one special symbol variation process. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (variation) for a special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, providing smooth gameplay.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, we will explain the special symbol change start process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104). FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change start process (S205).

In the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is obtained (S301), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is greater than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S303).

Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction is set (S304), and a process is performed to shift the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side in order (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, etc.

Next, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). Details of this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but a jackpot determination is executed as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the set game state using the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

Next, a special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described in detail later, is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value, based on the result of a win/loss determination based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

After executing the process of S307, it is next determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S309). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S310), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and then this process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, during the time-saving state, a process is executed to update the number of time-saving times at the timing when the special symbol starts to change, and if the current special symbol change is the final change in the time-saving state, a process is executed to set the time-saving end flag 203j to ON without updating the number of times. Details will be described later, but the setting status of this time-saving end flag 203j is referenced when the special symbol stops changing, and if the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON when the special symbol stops changing, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 and the time-saving state is ended. Then, when a special electric game is executed during the change of the special symbol, and a V jackpot game is started, a process is executed to set the time-saving end flag 203j to OFF.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the special pattern change is interrupted based on the execution of a V jackpot game during the final change of the special pattern in the time-saving state, the special pattern change corresponding to the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change will be resumed after the jackpot game ends. However, if the special pattern change after the resumption is displayed as stopped, the time-saving state will not end because the time-saving end flag 203j is set to off. Also, when the special pattern change is resumed, the special pattern change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not decremented.

As a result, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving period for which the time-saving state is set is set to the number of time-saving times (4 times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to that jackpot game plus the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation. Therefore, it is easier to lengthen the duration of the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player by adding the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation when a special electric game is executed during the time-saving state and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by a ball entering the V winning hole 165, compared to the duration of the time-saving state that is set when a special symbol game is executed during the normal state and a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

In other words, it is easier to lengthen the duration of the time-saving state that is set when the time-saving state is re-set based on play during the time-saving state than when the time-saving state is set based on play during the normal state, so players can be motivated to play in the hope that a more advantageous play state will be set.

Furthermore, when a configuration is used in which a process for updating the number of time-saving times and a process for ending the time-saving state are executed at the timing when the special pattern starts to change, the special pattern change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed when the special pattern change is resumed, so the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not decremented. However, since the game state during the period of the last special pattern change in the time-saving state becomes the normal state, there is a problem in that the player cannot be provided with the maximum amount of gameplay during the time-saving state.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the process for updating the number of time-saving times and the process for ending the time-saving state are configured to be executable at different times. Specifically, the process for updating the number of time-saving times is executed when the special pattern starts to change, and the process for ending the time-saving state is executed when the special pattern stops changing. By configuring it in this way, the number of time-saving times is not updated when the special pattern changes again, and the time-saving state can be set as the game state during the change period of the last special pattern change in the time-saving state, so that the player can be provided with the maximum amount of play during the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, the process for terminating the time-saving state is executed when the special symbol fluctuation stops, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the process may be configured to execute the process for terminating the time-saving state when the start condition for the next special symbol fluctuation is met and before the lottery for the next special symbol fluctuation is executed, for example, when the process of S305 is executed in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) and before the process of S306 is executed.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the management of the remaining number of time-saving times during the time-saving state is configured to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. In other words, based on receiving information indicating the game state (information indicating that the time-saving state is being set, information indicating the number of time-saving times) contained in the state command set at the end of a jackpot game, information on the time-saving state to be set this time is stored, and based on receiving a special pattern change pattern command indicating that a special pattern change will begin, the remaining number of time-saving times is updated, thereby managing the game status of the time-saving state on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

By configuring it in this way, the control process of the main control device 110 does not need to set a command to indicate the remaining number of time-saving times or a command to indicate the final change in the time-saving state (the time-saving end flag 203j has been set to on), and the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the game status in the time-saving state and set the presentation mode corresponding to the current game status. This simplifies the control process in the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, we will explain the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41). FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, based on the first jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is determined whether the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S402).

After completing the process of S402, it is next determined whether the result of this lottery is a jackpot (S403), and if it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON to indicate that a jackpot with a special symbol has been won (S404). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won.

Then, the result of the lottery for the special symbol is set as a jackpot (S405), and the jackpot special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the winning type counter C2 (S406), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S403: No), a losing special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 43, the special symbol change pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol change start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change pattern selection process (S307).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), it is determined whether the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot or not, i.e., whether a jackpot for the special symbol is set or not (S501). Here, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is on. This jackpot flag 203i is set on in the process of S404 in the special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 42) described above.

If it is determined in the process of S501 that a jackpot with a special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, high probability state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505 (S506). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S507), the start of the special symbol change is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), a value indicating the change time of the selected change pattern is set to the value of the special symbol change time counter 203n (S509), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S507 includes information indicating the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol change, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (i.e., the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S503.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the special pattern change in progress process (S206), which is one process of the special pattern change process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change in progress process (S206). In this special pattern change in progress process (S206), a process is executed to update the change time of the special pattern change that is being executed.

In the special symbol change in progress process (S206), it is first determined whether the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to on (S701).

If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special pattern temporary stop flag 203m is set to on (S701: Yes), the special pattern change resume command is set (S702), the special pattern temporary stop flag 203m is set to off (S703), the value of the special pattern change time counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S704), the display of the special pattern on the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 40) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) which is executed every 2 milliseconds, and the value of the special pattern change time counter 203n is updated (subtracted by 1) in the special pattern change process (see S205 in FIG. 44). Therefore, for example, if a change time of 30 seconds is set as the change time of the special pattern, the value of the special pattern change time counter 203n is set to "15000", and the value is subtracted by 1 every 2 milliseconds.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special chart temporary stop flag 203m is not set to on (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S704.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the special pattern change stop process (S208), which is one process of the special pattern change process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change stop process (S208). This special pattern change stop process (S208) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special pattern change time counter 203n is "0", that is, when the change time of the special pattern (special pattern) has elapsed.

When the special symbol variation stop process (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), then, the jackpot scenario won by this special symbol variation is set (S806), the jackpot flag 202i and the time-saving counter 203h are reset (S807), information indicating that the current game state is a jackpot (a jackpot game in progress) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. The game state storage area 203g is configured to store the game state (normal state, time-saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state related to the winning game, and by executing the process of S808, the game state (normal state, time-saving state) related to the lottery game at the time of winning the jackpot and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine the game state that was set at the time the jackpot was won at the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the big win flag 203i is set to OFF, that is, if the result of this special symbol lottery is a miss (S801: No), then it is determined whether or not the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802). If it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation that has been stopped this time is the final fluctuation in the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S803), the time-saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S804), information indicating that the current game state is a normal state is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S805), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S802, if it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processes of S803 to S805 are skipped and the process proceeds to S809.

In the process of S809, a special pattern confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop confirming the special pattern (S809), a process is executed to stop the changing display of the special pattern being displayed by the first pattern display device 37 (S810), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the special symbol change stop process (S208), a process (S809, S810) is executed to stop the change display at the symbol that indicates the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery game).

In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and a winning combination is executed, the special symbol variation that is being executed is interrupted. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, based on the result of a predetermined judgment that is executed when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643, the special symbol variation that is being executed may be discarded rather than interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show cases where the special symbol variation that indicates the duration of the time-saving state is interrupted and cases where it is discarded, so that the duration of the time-saving state can be suddenly subtracted (ended), and a tense performance can be executed for the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) is a process that determines whether a ball has entered the special ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores each of the acquired counter values in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of 4 in the special ball entrance 64).

In addition, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved balls is stored in each of the special pattern reserved ball storage areas 203a, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the winning/losing judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the special pattern reserved ball storage areas 203a. The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be explained below.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special ball entry port 64, which is the start port (start winning) (S901). Here, the ball's entry into the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special ball entry port 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has entered the special ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is obtained (S902), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

In other words, it is determined whether the current number of reserved balls for the special ball entry port 64 is less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not been stored to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S903: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c is incremented by one (904), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved number of balls for the start port (the number of reserved lottery rights for special patterns) (S905).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and are respectively reserved (stored) in the memory area for the corresponding number of reserved balls in the special pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM203 (S906).

Next, a look-ahead process is executed (S907), and then this process is terminated. This look-ahead process (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a. Note that in this embodiment, the process is configured to execute a win/losing judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, a process may be executed to execute a win/losing judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the right to draw for a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the right to draw for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the content of the right to draw for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

In addition, if the process of S901 determines that the ball has not entered the special ball entrance 64 (S901: No), or if the process of S903 determines that the number of reserved balls at the current time for the special ball entrance 64 is the upper limit (S903: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c is skipped and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is added, the pre-reading process (S907) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is determined to be the upper limit (4) in the process of S903 (S903: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the special symbol ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process (S907) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball is inserted into the special symbol ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play when a ball enters the special symbol ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, we will explain the look-ahead process (S907), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46). FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S907).

In the pre-read process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, the various counter values, ie, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage areas newly stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area that has the smallest winning order (S1002).

Then, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special symbol is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special symbol) that will be set at the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the win/lose determination is a jackpot or not (S1003). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a winning command is set that indicates the conditions for winning the jackpot (the game state set at the time of the lottery) and the type of jackpot if a win occurs (S1004), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S1003 is that it is not a jackpot (S1003: No), a winning command indicating a miss is set (S1005), and then this process ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S1004 or S1005 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of S1001 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this embodiment, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the special pattern reserved storage area 203a may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on that game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the variation pattern to be selected not depending on the number of reserved balls, but by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the variation can be determined by determining the order of variation until the reserved balls start to vary based on the reserved and stored information.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the special pattern reserved storage area 203a, a pre-reading process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the pre-reading process. However, without being limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the special pattern reserved storage area 203a may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, we will explain the normal symbol change process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S1101). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a win (when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric roler 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S1101: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S1101: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is displaying a changing pattern (S1102). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not displaying a changing pattern, that is, a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), then the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

If it is determined in the process of S1104 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203d is greater than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S1105). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203d is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S1107).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203h is on, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state for normal symbols (S1108). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is set to on (S1108: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202b (see FIG. 23(c)) for high probability, and processing proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is off (S1108: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202b (see FIG. 23(c)) for low probability (S1110), and processing proceeds to S1111.

In the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current normal pattern change (lottery) is a win (S1111), and if it is determined to be a win (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (S1112), and the normal pattern change time is determined based on the normal pattern change pattern using the value of the normal pattern change type counter (S1114). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that the current normal pattern change (lottery) is not a win (a loss) (S1111: No), the display mode of "×", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S1114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time is always set to 3 seconds regardless of the game state that is set. By configuring it in this way, at the timing when the game state switches, specifically at the timing of the end of a jackpot game when the game state switches from a normal state (low probability state of normal patterns) where a long variation time is generally likely to be set to a time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) where a short variation time is likely to be set, a normal pattern variation with a long variation time is executed, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where a normal pattern lottery is not executed during the time-saving state even though the time-saving state has been set.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special electric game (V Rush) is executed during the time-saving state, aiming for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in response to a normal symbol lottery, and during the time-saving state (V Rush), an effect based on the normal symbol lottery is also displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, when executing an effect based on the normal symbol lottery (variation), the amount of effect data can be reduced by standardizing the variation time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a normal winning game is executed during the normal state and a ball enters the normal electric winning device 640, it is configured to make it difficult for the ball to enter the special electric operation port 643, which is the trigger for the execution of the role-winning game. Therefore, even if only the same variable time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the advantage of timing the execution of the normal winning game.

The method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and the fluctuation time may be varied according to the game state, the number of reserved normal symbol balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203d (number of reserved normal symbols). Furthermore, the ease of balls entering the normal electric winning device 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the degree to which the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 to be variable depending on the length of time that the normal pattern is set to change, the ease with which the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 can be easily varied depending on the game state, creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1102 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (S1102: No), it is determined whether the time for changing the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S1115), and if it is determined that the time for changing has not elapsed (S1115: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1115 that the variation time has elapsed (S1115: Yes), the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a stopped display (S1116). In the process of S1116, if the current normal pattern lottery is a winning combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a "○" pattern stopped. On the other hand, if the current normal pattern lottery is a losing combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a "X" pattern stopped. In other words, a setting is made to stop the display mode set in the process of S1112 or S1113 described above.

When the stop display is set by processing S1116, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (illuminated display) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S1112 or processing S1113.

Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result for the normal symbol is a win (S1117). If it is determined that the current lottery result for the normal symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), processing is executed to set the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result for the Konaki normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (S1117: No), this processing is terminated.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is made (the timing when the processing of S1108 to S1111 is performed), and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the processing of S1115).

That is, in this embodiment, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, depending on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol that is executed in parallel while the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of the normal pattern hit/fail judgment, there is a problem that the electric role 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In the process of S1117, if it is determined that the current lottery result for the normal pattern is a win (S1117: Yes), then it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203h is on (S1118) to determine the current probability state of the normal pattern (high probability state, low probability state). If the time-saving counter 203h is not on (off), that is, if it is determined that the current state is a low probability state for the normal pattern (S1118: No), a normal normal pattern win scenario operation is set (S1119).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the time-saving counter 203h is set to on (S1118: Yes), the time-saving normal map winning scenario operation is set (S1120).

Next, the start of opening and closing control of the electric feature 640a is set based on the scenario set in the processing of S1119 or S1120 (S1121), and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, only when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern, the electric role 640a may be configured to open long, or the opening pattern of the electric role 640a may be configured to be set based on the game state set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, various information (result of the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern change time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal pattern change process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is set as a command indicating the content of each information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (FIG. 55).

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the through gate passing process (S107) executed in this first embodiment is executed. This process is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed through, obtaining the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1202), and it is then determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 1 (whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern has reached the upper limit) (S1203).

In the process of S1203, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 1 (it is the upper limit value of 1) (S1203: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 1 (it is 0) (S1203: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d (S1204), a normal reserved ball number command (a command for indicating the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d) is set (S1205), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, the special electric start hole winning process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special electric start hole winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a special electric operation hole 643 in the normal electric winning device 640, and is configured to execute a role-winning game in which a ball enters the special electric operation hole 643 to open the V winning device 65 in a predetermined variable pattern. In this special electric start hole winning process (S108), various processes are executed when a ball enters the special electric operation hole 643.

When the special electric start port winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special electric start winning has occurred, i.e., whether a game ball has won the special electric operating port 643 (S1301). In this S1301 process, it is determined whether a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected has been output (or is being output) from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has won the special electric operating port 643. In the S1301 process, if it is determined that a game ball has not won the special electric operating port 643 (S1301: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the special electric operation port 643 (S1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a normal winning game is currently in progress (S1302). If it is determined that a normal winning game is not currently in progress (S1302: No), since the ball cannot enter the special electric operation port 643, an error command is set (S1309), and then this process is terminated. By performing the process of S1309, it is possible to quickly notify the outside when a game ball has entered the special electric operation port 643 outside of the normal winning game period, that is, when a game is played in which a game ball is illegally entered into the special electric operation port 643, or when a malfunction occurs in a component attached to the special electric operation port 643 (for example, the electric device 640a, the second movable valve 642).

In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the normal symbol is currently being played (S1302: Yes), it is then determined whether the special power is currently in operation (playing a role) (S1303). If it is determined that the special power is currently in operation (playing a role), (S1303: Yes), since a new role cannot be played, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special power is not currently in operation (playing a role), (S1303: Yes), it is then determined whether the special symbol is currently changing (S1304). If it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S1304: Yes), the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to on (S1305), the special symbol temporary stop command is set (S1306), the role hit flag 203k is set to on (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

That is, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is currently changing, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed to interrupt the subtraction of the change time of the ongoing special symbol change. As a result, the ongoing special symbol change is interrupted when a hit game is executed. In addition, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is not currently changing (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1308, a special signal activation command is set (S1308), and then this process is terminated.

As explained above, the special electric start port winning process (S108) includes a process means for determining whether a ball has won in the special electric operation port 643 and that winning is a normal winning process, a process means for determining whether a new special feature winning game can be executed based on that winning process, a process for executing a special symbol change process (a process for interrupting a special symbol change that is currently being executed, and a process for preventing a new special symbol change from being executed during a special feature winning game), and a process for executing a special feature winning game.

Next, the V entrance passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passing process (S109) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V entrance passage process (S109), first, it is determined whether the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401), and if the storage sensor 65s is not on (storage sensor 65s01: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is on (S1401: Yes), it is next determined whether the V winning port is open, that is, whether a hit is being played (S1402). In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the V winning port is open (playing a hit), (S1402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1403), and this process is terminated. If it is not during the V winning port open period (S1402: No), this is a case where a game ball has entered the V winning device 65 even though a hit is not being played, so an error command is set (S1404), and this process is terminated.

The V entrance passage command set in the processing of S1403 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and sends a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on passing through the V entrance. This makes it possible to execute a performance during play based on a ball entering the V winning device 65.

Next, the V passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S110) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

When the V passing process (S110) is executed, it is first determined whether there has been a V passing, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the V winning port 165 (S1501). If it is determined that a game ball has not entered the V winning port 165 (S1501: No), this process ends. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the V winning port 165 (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the current period is a V valid period (S1502). In the process of S1502, the period during which the operation scenario related to the game per reel is set is determined to be a V valid period, and otherwise it is determined that the current period is not a V valid period.

If it is determined in the process of S1502 that the V is in the valid period (S1502: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a per-role game is currently in progress (S1503). If a per-role game is in progress (S1503: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the current per-role game is obtained (S1504), the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON (S1505), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

In other words, in the processes of S1504 to S1506, a process for executing a jackpot game is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the V winning port 165 during a game in which a hit is generated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1503 that a game in which a hit is generated is not being generated (S1503: No), there is no need to execute a new process for executing a jackpot game, so the processes of S1504 to S1506 are skipped and the process moves to S1507.

In the process of S1507, a V pass command is set (S1507), and this process ends. The V pass command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same way as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V pass command, for example, when a V pass command is received during a hit game, the performance during the V rush executed during the hit game is successful, and a performance is executed to indicate that a jackpot game will be executed following the hit game. Also, when a V pass command is received during a jackpot game, the same performance is executed as when a V pass command is received during a hit game.

On the other hand, if the V Pass command is not received at a specified timing during a hit game, a disappointment effect is executed to indicate that the V Challenge has failed, and if the V Pass command is not received at a specified timing during a jackpot game, a revival effect from the disappointment effect is executed to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V pass command) is set to indicate that a game ball has entered the V winning port 165, but a command (for example, a V non-pass command) to indicate that a game ball has not entered the V winning port 165 may be set. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, since the game balls that can enter the V winning port 165 are only the game balls (for example, one ball) retained by the storage valve 66a, a number discrimination means for discriminating the presence or absence (number) of game balls retained in the storage valve 66a and a detection means for detecting the passage of game balls to the 2 out high 163b are provided, and when the number of game balls determined by the number discrimination means is detected by the detection means, the above-mentioned V non-pass command is set. This allows the sound lamp control device 113 to execute an appropriate performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect. In addition, by using the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that game balls are stuck in the V winning device 65.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1502 that the current time is not the V valid period (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508) and this processing is terminated. By performing the processing of S1508, it is possible to quickly notify the outside when a game ball has entered the V winning port 165 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game has been played in which a game ball has entered the V winning port 165 illegally, or when a malfunction has occurred in a component attached to the V winning port 165 (for example, the V opening and closing door 65a, the storage valve 66a, the first movable valve 66b).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the operation scenario is defined so that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning port 165 during a per-game hit is the ending period of the per-game hit, and therefore the processes of S1506 to S1508 are configured to be executed in the V passing process (S110), that is, at the timing when the ball enters the V winning port 165. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, if the operation scenario of the per-game hit is defined so that the ball can always enter the V winning port 165 during a per-game hit, it is preferable to configure the V passing process (S110) to execute only the process of S1505, and the processes of S1506 to S1508 to be executed as processes to be executed when the V flag is set on in the per-game hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58). As a result, even if the ball enters the V winning slot 165 immediately after the winning combination is activated, the time-saving state can be continued until the big win begins, allowing the player to play without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power to the main control device 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 54), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S1712. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on and RAM data is to be initialized, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Similarly, if power failure occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (S1713, S1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization processing (S1713, S1714), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (S1714). After execution of RAM 203 initialization processing, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power outage information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power was cut off (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and an operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process proceeds to the main processing described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 55, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 40) or the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (changing effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process (see FIG. 56) are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processes are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a command is set to execute a jackpot performance in the sound lamp control device 113, and jackpot control processing is executed to open the specific winning port (large opening) 650a of the variable winning device 650 (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 56 and 57. In this jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning hole 650a (hereinafter referred to as the winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 650a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 650a). When either of these conditions is met, the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 650a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 650a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a feature win control process is executed for the feature win game that is executed when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 (S1805). In this feature win control process (S1805), a process is executed for setting the period during which the V opening and closing door 65a is opened and closed for the V winning device 65 that is opened during the feature win game based on a predetermined scenario (feature win operation scenario). The details of the feature win control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the normal electric winning device 640 (S1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S1121 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 48), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the end of the period set by the processes of S1119 and S1120 in the normal pattern change process.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (S1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the special pattern change start process (S205 in FIG. 41), a change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 41) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the special pattern change stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) causes the stopped pattern to be displayed (illuminated) in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set in S507 of the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (S1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S1114 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 48), the second pattern display device starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the process of S1116 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 48), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or S1113 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 48).

After that, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1809), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and each of the processes from S1801 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812) until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), the counter is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as the processing of S1811 (S1812). Note that in this processing of S1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second win random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special and normal patterns, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1809 (S1809: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 53 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1815), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S1809 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (S1701), and the processing can be started from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 55), and is a process for setting information (commands) for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, and for opening or closing the winning port, etc. (specific winning port (large opening port) 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start a jackpot with a special symbol (S1901). Specifically, when the process of S806 of the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) is executed and the start of a jackpot with a special symbol is set, or when the process of S2010 of the role hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58) is executed and the start of a jackpot is set, an operation counter is set corresponding to the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 of the various operation scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the operation counter matches the jackpot start timing specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, it is determined that a jackpot has started. In the process of S1901, when it is determined that it is the timing to start a jackpot with a special symbol (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902) and this process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be sent with a delay (variable) depending on the game state and the type of jackpot. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. When a jackpot or special jackpot with a special pattern starts, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then when the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A or B, and 5000 for jackpot C), the opening command is sent. By doing this, for example, when a left-handed player wins a jackpot in a special drawing, the time until the start of the jackpot (the specific winning port 650a is opened) can be shortened, and when a left-handed player wins a jackpot in a special jackpot game as a result of a special electric game, the time until the start of the jackpot (the specific winning port 650a is opened) can be lengthened. By configuring in this way, a period can be secured for a player who has been closely watching the ball flow during a jackpot game to prepare for a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that it is not the time for the jackpot to start (S1901: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S1903). In the process of S1903, the determination is made by reading the game information related to the winning game stored in the game status storage area 203g.

The period during a jackpot includes the period when the first and third symbol display devices 37 and 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game) and the period during which a specified time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game. It also includes the period when a display is being displayed indicating that a ball has entered the V winning slot 165. If it is determined in the process of S1903 that a jackpot is not occurring (S1903: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot is occurring (S1903: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1904).

If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that it is the timing to start a new round, i.e., if it is determined that the acquired operation counter value is the timing to start a round of play as specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1904: Yes), the specific winning port solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1905), a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1906), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1904 that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the round (S1907). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the round, that is, if it is determined that the acquired value of the operation counter is the timing to end the round of play specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), the specific winning port solenoid 209a is set to off (S1908), and the value of the number of winnings counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1907 that it is not the end timing of the round (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending performance (S1910). The start timing of the ending performance is determined to be when the final round of the jackpot game (the fourth round in the case of jackpot A) ends, the specific winning port 650a is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball discharge time, has elapsed. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending performance (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1910 that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1912). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the jackpot game specified in the jackpot performance scenario table 202e1 by the acquired operation counter value. If it is determined in the process of S1912 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending performance) (S1912: Yes), then it is determined whether the type of the jackpot is jackpot B (S1913). If it is determined that it is jackpot B (S1913: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 15 (S1914), and the process proceeds to S1916. If it is determined in the process of S1913 that the type of the jackpot is not jackpot B (it is jackpot A or jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process proceeds to S1915.

In the process of S1915, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), then a state command corresponding to the game state after the jackpot is set (S1916), a jackpot end is set to set the end of the jackpot (S1917), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1912 that it is not the time for the big win to end (S1912: No), the prize-winning process is executed (S1918), and then the process ends. Here, this prize-winning process (S1918) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of this prize-winning process (S1918).

In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid round period (S2001). The valid round period is the period during which a round game is set, that is, the period during which the specific winning port 650a is open. If it is determined that it is outside the valid round period (S2001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid round period (S2001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific winning port 650a (S2002). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific winning port 650a (S2002: Yes), the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set (S2004). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning port 650a (S2002: No), this process ends as it is.

After executing the process of S2004, it is then determined whether the value of the prize number counter is 10 (S2005). If it is determined that the value of the prize number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to the previous value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and then this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2005 that the value of the prize number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped and this process ends.

By configuring it in this way, even if the end conditions for a round of play are set to be met when time passes (30 seconds pass) and when a ball wins (10 balls win), the operation control for the jackpot game can be executed based on the same operation scenario regardless of which end condition is met. This simplifies the control process of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 58, the role hit control process (S1805) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this role hit control process (S1805). This role hit control process (S1805) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 55), and various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired operation counter value) of the operation scenario (operation scenario specified in the role hit operation scenario table 202e2) that is set when the role hit flag 203k is set to on during the special electric start opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50).

In the reel hit control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether it is the timing for a reel hit to start (S2101). Here, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter corresponding to the reel hit operation scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26(b)) is 1. If it is determined that it is the timing for a reel hit to start (S2101: Yes), a reel hit opening command is set (S2102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a winning combination (S2101: No), then it is determined whether or not the combination is currently in progress (S2103). If it is determined that the combination is not in progress (S2103: No), then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the combination is in progress (S2103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing for the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the combination combination operation scenario table 202e is 26. If it is determined that it is the timing for the opening operation (S2104: Yes), then the opening solenoid (V winning port solenoid 209b) is set to on (S2105), and then this process ends. Although not shown in the figure, depending on the value of the operation counter corresponding to the per-game action scenario table 202e of the V-winning device 65, a process is executed to close (set to OFF) the opening solenoid (V-winning port solenoid 209b) and a process is executed to set to ON the storage solenoid 209c.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing for the end of the winning feature (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter corresponding to the winning feature operation scenario table 202e is 750. If it is determined that it is the timing for the end of the winning feature (S2106: Yes), the winning feature flag 203k is set to OFF (S2107), and then it is determined whether the V flag 203p is ON or not (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is OFF (S2108: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the V flag 203p is ON (S2108: Yes), the start of the big win is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set to OFF (S2111), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2106 that it is not the timing for the perk to end (S2106: No), the V-pass detection processing is executed (S2112), and then this processing is terminated.

<Regarding control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 59 to Fig. 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 59, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 60) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of a power outage from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), it executes the power-off processing of S4117. Before the execution of such a power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S4003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S4117 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No) and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S4117 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, so the process of S4008 will be performed with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and S4008 is reached, the process goes from S4004 to S4006 and reaches S4008 because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or the process was started because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up process is started, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the start of the main processing or since the processing of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). If 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S4101: No), the processing of S4102 to S4111 is not performed and the processing proceeds to S4112. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S4101 is that, while S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4112 and the variable display setting processing of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is a process for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a process for updating the display of the number of reserved balls is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the settings are sent as commands to the display control device 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S4109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the performance update process is executed (S4111). Details of this performance update process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. After executing the process of S4111, the process moves to S4112. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing and output process of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After processing of S4111, a command determination process (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

In the processing of S4113, in order to display a variable display performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

After the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control unit 110. If power failure information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and power failure processing is executed (S4117). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall staff member or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. The command determination process (S4112) will be described in detail below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command among the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command memory area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a first movable valve operation command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4201). If it is determined that a first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), an update of the operation scenario is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202), and then this process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a command (first movable valve operation command) regarding the operation control of the first movable valve 66b that is executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received, a process for determining whether the first movable valve command has been received is set as the highest priority determination order in the command determination process in order to update the operation scenario without delay. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control content on the main control device 110 side with the situation understanding content on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In this embodiment, the operation scenario (operation scenario for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the operation status of the first movable valve 66b) is set only when a command (first movable valve operation command) related to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received. However, without being limited to this, for example, a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b may be output from the main control device 110 at predetermined intervals (every hour), or a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b may be output every time a jackpot game is executed. Then, the content of the received command may be compared with the content of the updated operation scenario, and a process of correcting the updated content of the operation scenario may be executed. This can further improve the accuracy of grasping the operation control content of the main control device 110 side by the voice lamp control device 113 side. Furthermore, the time lag required for receiving the command output from the main control device 110 side may be taken into consideration in advance, and the operation scenario update process on the voice lamp control device 113 side may be executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not a special symbol variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4203). Here, the special symbol variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special symbol variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special symbol variation start process is executed (S4204) and this process is terminated. Details of this special symbol variation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special chart change pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special chart stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that the special chart stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to on (S4206), the stop type is extracted from the received special chart stop type command (S4207), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4205 that the special symbol stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), then it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4208). If it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (S4208: Yes), the pattern type (special symbol, normal symbol) of the received reserved ball number command is analyzed, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated (S4209). Specifically, if a reserved ball number command for a special symbol is received, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110 included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the reserved ball number of the special symbol variable display) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

In addition, when a reserved ball count command for a normal pattern is received, the value of the reserved ball count counter 203d for normal patterns in the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable display of normal patterns) is extracted, and the value of the reserved ball count counter for normal patterns provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated to match the extracted counter value.

The reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the various ball entry ports (special ball entry port 64, through gate 67) (initial entry) and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are incremented, or when various variable start processes are executed and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are decremented. Therefore, at the time of initial entry or each time the variable display is set, the values of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control unit 110 by the processing of S4209.

Therefore, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes misaligned with the values of the various reserved ball count counters 203c, 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., if a reserved ball count command is notified at the time of initial winning or when the variable display is set, i.e., when the various reserved ball counts are changed, the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the various reserved ball count counters 203c, 203d of the main control device 110.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4208 that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4210). If it is determined in the process of S4210 that a winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), a winning command process is executed (S4211) and this process is terminated. This winning command process (S4211) analyzes the pattern type (special pattern, normal pattern) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command, stores (stores) the analysis result in a memory area corresponding to the analysis result (winning information storage area 223b in RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113), and executes a performance (pre-reading performance) based on the received winning information. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

If it is determined in the process of S4210 that a winning command has not been received (S4210: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4212: Yes), a status command reception process is executed (S4213), and this process ends. Details of this status command reception process (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but a process is executed to set the game status (normal state, time-saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 and the winning game status (jackpot, perk) of the bonus item in the slave status setting area 223g based on the status command output from the main control device 110.

Next, if it is determined in the process of S4212 that a status command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4214). If it is determined in the process of S4214 that a stop-related command has been received (S4214: Yes), stop-related processing is executed (S4215) and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of this stop-related processing (S4215) will be given later with reference to FIG. 65, but based on the various stop commands output from the main control unit 110, processing is executed to set the display mode of the variable performance using the third and fourth patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the special pattern variation pattern (variation time) is preset as the period during which the special pattern variation display is executed, but even while the special pattern variation is being executed based on the preset variation pattern, a process may be executed to forcibly stop the special pattern variation depending on the results of other special pattern variations. For this reason, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a stop-related process (S4215) so that the variable display (variation presentation) of the third and fourth patterns can be stopped in accordance with the timing at which the special pattern variation is stopped. This makes it possible to synchronize the variation status of the special pattern with the variation presentation status displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and provide the player with a display mode that is easy to understand.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4214 that a stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether a general map-related command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4216), and if it is determined that a general map-related command has been received (S4216: Yes), general map-related processing is executed (S4217), and this processing is terminated. Details of the general map-related processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

If it is determined in the process of S4216 that a normal symbol-related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether a win-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4218), and if it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S4218: Yes), a win-related process is executed (S4219), and this process ends. Details of the win-related process (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but it is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to a big win game or a small win game that is executed when a big win or a small win is won as a result of the lottery for the special symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S4218 that a win-related command has not been received (S4218: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S4220), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114.

The above describes the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, but in the command determination process (S4112), the order in which it is determined whether various commands have been received may be an order other than that shown in this embodiment. For example, the determination order may be specified so that the process of determining whether a status command has been received is executed before the process of determining whether a special chart variation pattern command has been received.

By configuring in this manner, even if the change pattern command and the status command are output from the main control unit 110 at the same time, that is, in the special pattern change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the main control unit 110, the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed to set the special pattern change pattern command, and then a status command indicating that the game status has changed is set, the game status currently set on the voice lamp control unit 113 side can be determined before the special pattern change pattern command.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, the special pattern change start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start process (S4204). This special pattern change start process (S4204) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and a process is executed to set the display mode (main change pattern, secondary change pattern) corresponding to the special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the set game state.

Then, the display control device 114 sets the display mode to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described below. Details of the special pattern variation start process (S4204) are explained below.

When the special chart change start process is set, first, the special chart change start flag 223d is set to ON (S4301), a change pattern is extracted from the received special chart change pattern command (S4302), and a detailed display mode is selected using the change pattern selection table 222a (S4303).

Next, the information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the secondary state setting area 223g is read out to determine whether the current game state is a time-saving state (S4304). If the process of S4304 determines that the current state is not a time-saving state (normal state) (S4304: No), a display command for the normal state is set (S4305), and this process ends. When a display command is set in the process of S4305, it is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and a presentation mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is set in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 11(b).

On the other hand, if the process of S4304 determines that the current game state is a time-saving state (S4304: Yes), a display command for the time-saving state is set (S4306), the value in the notified pending number storage area 223s is decremented by 1 (S4307), the value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the currently received fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 223r (S4308), and this process is terminated.

Next, the winning command processing (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4211). This winning command processing (S4211) is executed within the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and processing is executed to set the effect (so-called pre-reading effect) to be executed when a winning command is received depending on the type of winning command received (special pattern, normal pattern) and the current game state.

When the winning command process (S4211) is executed, first, the information contained in the received winning command is analyzed to determine which symbol type it corresponds to, and this is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4401). Then, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is set on (S4402), and if it is determined that it is not set on (S4402: No), it proceeds to processing of S4412, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set on (S4402: Yes), the variable time information contained in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or greater (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is less than 1 (is 0) (S4404: No), the variable time (variation time of the special symbol) included in the winning information received this time cannot be additionally notified as the remaining period of the V Rush, so the extracted variable time is stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unannounced pending number storage area 223k is incremented by 1 (S4411), and the process proceeds to S4412.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), the variable time (variation time of the special symbol) included in the currently received winning command can be added and notified as the remaining period of the V Rush, so it is then determined whether the interruption flag 223m is on or not (S4405). In the process of S44405, it is determined whether the current timing is one in which an additional notification can be executed. In this embodiment, during the V Rush, during the game period in which a bonus is won and during the jackpot game period, the remaining period of the V Rush is not added and notified. This configuration allows the player to concentrate on playing various winning games.

If it is determined in the process of S4405 that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the special win flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special win flag 223n is off (S4406: No), since the current state is one in which an additional notification can be executed, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time extracted in the process of S4403 is added to the value of the time period counter 223i (S4407), 1 is added to the value of the notification pending number storage area 223s, and the process proceeds to S4409.

Although not shown, when the variable time is added in the processing of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set and an additional notification effect (see FIG. 15(a)) is executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Note that in this embodiment, the additional notification effect is configured to notify all values added in the processing of S4407, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute the additional notification effect multiple times with the added value as the upper limit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the remaining period (short remaining time period) of the V Rush to be added, so it is possible to execute an effect that the player will not tire of quickly.

In addition, the value added in the process of S4407 may not be notified until the value added in the process of S4407 reaches a predetermined value or the value of the time period counter 223i is subtracted to a predetermined value, and the variable times (variation times of the special symbols) included in multiple winning commands may be added together and notified. This allows the length of the remaining time period added in one additional notification effect to be unexpected. In addition, in this case, for example, when the variable time of the same length (for example, 50 seconds) set when the special symbol jackpot is won is added to the time period counter 223i, it is preferable to configure the additional notification effect to execute an additional notification effect of 50 seconds. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a jackpot with a special symbol, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the interruption flag 223m is on (S4405: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S4406 that the special win flag 223n is on (S4406: Yes), the extracted fluctuation time is stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S4410), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4411.

When processing S4411 is completed, the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), and then other processing is executed (S4412), after which this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the status command receiving process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this status command receiving process (S4212). This status command receiving process (S4212) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. Details of the status command receiving process (S4213) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4213) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set game status will be changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether the game status set in the slave status setting area 223g differs from the game status indicated by the currently received status command. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that there is no change in the game status (S4501: No), the processes of S4502 to S4508 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4509. If it is determined that there is a change in the game status (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the changed game status is normal (S4502).

If it is determined in the process of S4502 that the game state after the change is normal (if the currently received state command is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently winning (S4503). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not currently winning (S4503: No), a display command indicating normal mode is set (S4504), and the information indicated by the currently received state command is stored (set) in the secondary state setting area 223g (S4509), and this process ends.

Here, the command set in the processing of S4504 is notified to the display control device 114, and the variable performance display during the normal state is executed. Thus, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and to output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to, for example, eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable performance display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, when the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by combining multiple commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting to the voice lamp control device 113, and a discrimination means is provided to discriminate whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate. If the discrimination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simplified display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are rewritten to the simplified display data.

By configuring in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set simplified display data showing appropriate information and display a variable performance display based on the simplified display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a variable performance display with content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special pattern) from being executed, which reduces the player's motivation to play. In addition, as the above-mentioned simplified display data, for example, display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any game state (for example, a mode with a black background) or display data that executes a variable display of the fourth pattern, which has a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable performance display, can be used.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will continue. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the currently received state command is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), it is then determined whether the game state after the change is the time-saving state (S4507). If it is determined that the game state is the time-saving state (if the currently received state command is a command indicating the time-saving state) (S4507: Yes), a display command indicating V Rush mode is set (S4508), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4509. If it is determined that the game state is not the time-saving state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4503 that the normal pattern is currently winning (S4503: Yes), a display command indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), the extension flag 223p is set to on (S4506), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4509. When the display command is set in the process of S4505, it is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and the display mode showing the extension screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, the stop-related process (S4215), which is one process within the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related process (S4215). This stop-related process (S4215) executes processing to set the display mode when a stop-related command (a command that is set when a stop display is performed based on the lottery results of another special pattern lottery) is received from the main control device 110.

When the stop-related process (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special chart determination command (S4601). If it is determined to be a special chart determination command (S4601: Yes), a display command for stopping the fluctuation is set (S4602), and processing proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special chart determination command has not been received (S4601: No), processing skips S4602 and proceeds to S4603.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special pattern temporary stop command (S4603). If it is determined that a special pattern temporary stop command has been received (S4603: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to on (S4604), a display command indicating the temporary stop state of the special pattern is set (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4606. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special pattern temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the processes of S4604 and S4605 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4606.

When a display command indicating the temporary stop state of the special symbol is set in the processing of S4605, a display state indicating that the special symbol is temporarily stopped (the word "STOP") is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(b), and the countdown display of timer 812, which indicates the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation, is interrupted.

In the process of S4606, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special symbol variation resume command (S4606). This special symbol variation resume command is a command that is set when the special symbol variation resumes during the special symbol variation execution process of the main control unit 110 (see S206 in FIG. 44) (see S702 in FIG. 44). If it is determined that the special symbol variation resume command has been received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to off (S4607), and a display command indicating the resumption of special symbol variation is set (S4608).

Then, it is determined whether there has been an update to the unannounced information during the period when the interruption flag 223m was set to on (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether information indicating a new change time has been stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j and the unannounced pending number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there has been no update (S4609: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there has been an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the time period counter 223i is added according to the update content (S4610), the information in the unannounced period storage area 223j, the unannounced pending number storage area 223k, and the notified pending number storage area 223s is updated, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart change resume command has not been received (S4606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

The value added by the processing of S4610 is notified all at once when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, i.e., when the special symbol variation is resumed and the value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 starts to decrease. By configuring it in this way, while the decrease in the variation time of the special symbol is stopped, the player is directed to pay attention to the various winning games, and the addition notification performance is executed all at once after the various winning games have ended, so that the player can expect a large amount of the remaining time of the V Rush to be added even after the various winning games have ended.

Next, the general map related processing (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this general map related processing (S4217). This general map related processing (S4217) is executed within the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The general map related processing (S4217) will be described in detail below.

When the normal map related process (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether the normal map related command received this time is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (S4701). If it is determined that the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (S4701: Yes), a display small win start command is set (S4702), and then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not a normal map variation pattern command (S4701: No), it is then determined whether or not the currently received normal map related command is a normal map win start command (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is a normal map win start command (S4703: Yes), a small win command for display is set (S4704), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the received command is not a normal winning start command (S4703: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal winning related command received this time is a special electric activation command (S4705). If it is determined that the received command is a special electric activation command (S4705: Yes), a display V winning winning command is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to on (S4707). If it is determined that it is set to on, that is, if it is determined that the winning game is a role-playing game that was executed by a ball entering the special electric activation port 643 in the normal winning game being executed at the timing of the end of the time-saving state (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4708), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the extension flag 223p is not on in the process of S4707 (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special line activation command (S4705: No), it is then determined whether or not the currently received normal map-related command is a normal map end command (S4709). If it is determined that the received command is not a normal map end command (S4709: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the received command is a normal map end command (S4709: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the extension flag 223p is on (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S4712), the V rush flag 223q is set to off (S4713), and then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4710 that the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of the normal winning is set (S4714), and then this processing is terminated.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when a normal winning game is being played with the final variation of the special symbol stopped in the time-saving state, the extension flag 223p is set to ON to extend the V-rush effect. The end timing of the V-rush effect is varied depending on the progress of the special electric game played based on the normal winning game. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the special electric operation port 643 in the normal winning game, the V-rush effect ends at the end of the normal winning game, and if the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and a special feature winning game is played, the V-rush effect ends at the end of the special feature winning game. Note that if a ball enters the V-winning port 165 in the special feature winning game, the performance based on the jackpot game (V-jackpot game) is executed with priority.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of the period during which they can aim for a V jackpot regardless of their game state, providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

Next, referring to FIG. 67, the winning-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning-related process (S4219). This winning-related process (S4219) performs processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to a jackpot game or a special feature win game that is executed when a jackpot or special feature win is won as a result of the special pattern lottery, and processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 are executed when a jackpot or special feature win is won.

In addition, when a prize ball number command is received to indicate the number of prize balls won during a winning game (jackpot game, special feature game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and a process is executed to set a prize ball number command for display based on the accumulated result.

In the hit-related process (S4219), first, the command determination process (see FIG. 61) determines whether the received command is a big hit-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a big hit-related command (S4801: Yes), the big hit-related process is executed (S4802), and the process ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 68, we will explain the jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one process within the jackpot-related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4802). The jackpot-related process is to perform processing for causing the third pattern display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4802), first, it is determined whether the jackpot-related command received by the jackpot-related process (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). The jackpot start command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a special jackpot (jackpot B) (S4911). If it is determined that the current jackpot is a special jackpot (jackpot B) (S4911: Yes), the special jackpot flag 223n is set to off (S4912) and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current jackpot is not a special jackpot (jackpot B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped and the process ends.

In the process of S4903, if it is determined that the V Rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), the number of time-saving times to be awarded for the current jackpot is extracted (S4904), the special drawing winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S4905), the target is selected with the number of time-saving times extracted from the read special drawing winning information as the upper limit (S4906), the number of selected special drawing winning information is stored in the unannounced pending number storage area 223k (S4907), the fluctuation time included in the selected special drawing winning information is calculated (S4908), the calculated fluctuation time is stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S4909), the V Rush flag 223q is set to on (S4910), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4913). If a round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4914), and this process ends. In this embodiment, since information indicating the round number is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. However, for example, in order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the main control device 110, if the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, a round number accumulation counter that accumulates the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 may be provided, and the voice lamp control device 113 may calculate the current round number based on the value of the round number accumulation counter and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the round count command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S4915). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end processing is executed (S4916), and this processing ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 69, we will explain the jackpot end process (S4919), which is one process in the jackpot related process (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S4919).

In the jackpot end process (S4919), the number of time-saving times to be awarded for the current jackpot is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), the value in the notified reserved number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h (S5002), and then the value stored in the not yet reported reserved number storage area 223k is read (S5003). Next, it is determined whether the value in the not yet reported reserved number storage area 223k is 1 or greater (S5004). If it is determined that the value in the not yet reported reserved number storage area 223k is less than 1 (is 0) (S5004: No), the additional notification performance cannot be executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15(a)) (because there is no variable time information to be added), so a no-addition command for display is set (S5014), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5004 that the value of the unannounced pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, if there is information indicating the variable time for which an additional notification is possible (variable time information for special symbols not used for additional notification), the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted corresponding to the read value (S5005), the value stored in the unannounced pending number storage area 223k that corresponds to the value subtracted in the process of S5005 is cleared (S5006), and the variable time stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

Then, it is determined whether the winning information (special chart reserved information) contained in the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating a special win (jackpot B) (S5008), and if it is determined that it does not (S5008: No), it sets an additional display command corresponding to the read out variable time period (S5009), clears the period corresponding to the variable time used for this current additional performance among the variable times stored in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S5010), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5008, if it is determined that the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating a special win (big win B) (S5008: Yes), a display command corresponding to the change time until the special win change ends is set (S5011). In other words, if the special pattern change executed next after next is a special pattern change corresponding to a special win, even if the change time for the four reserved special patterns can be added together and notified as an additional notification effect, only the combined change time of the next special pattern change, the change time of the next special pattern change, and the change time of the special pattern change (special win change) corresponding to a special win is used in the additional notification effect.

Furthermore, a display command indicating the special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special win flag 223n is set to ON (S5013), and the process proceeds to S5010 described above.

As a result, if there is winning information indicating a special win (jackpot B) in the reserved special symbols at the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 17(a), a presentation announcing a transition to the special mode (heaven mode) and the change time "220 seconds" until the special win change ends will be displayed. Therefore, the player can be easily notified of the period until the special win game (jackpot game in which jackpot B is set) is executed. In addition, since the time-saving state is set again after the special win game ends, the player can play in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the change time of the reserved special symbols after the special win change is not notified to the player, the period of the time-saving state (V rush) that is set after the jackpot game ends can be made difficult for the player to understand until the jackpot game ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will continue. In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4803: Yes), jackpot-related processing (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 70, the role win related process (S4804), which is one process within the win related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the role win related process (S4804). The role win related process is to perform processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to the role win game executed when a role win is executed, and when a role win is executed, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the role-hit related processing (S4804), first, it is determined whether the win-related command received by the win-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) is a role-hit start command (S5101).

If it is determined in the process of S5101 that a role start command has been received (S5101: Yes), a role start command for display is set (S5102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the received command is not a reel start command (S5101: No), it is then determined whether the received command is a V entrance pass command (S5103).

If it is determined in the processing of S5103 that a V entrance passing command has been received (S5103: Yes), a display feature winning command is set (S5104), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the received command is not a V entrance passing command (S5103: No), it is then determined whether the received command is a V passing command (S5105).

If it is determined in the processing of S5105 that a V pass command has been received (S5105: Yes), a V hit command for display is set (S5106), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5105 that the received command is not a V pass command (S5105: No), then it is determined whether the received command is an ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S5107: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5107: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S5108), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will continue. In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the received command is not a role-hit related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806), a prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after the addition is set (S4807), and this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period (advantageous continuation period) when the V Rush flag 223q is set to ON in the prize ball number counter. Then, during a winning game (jackpot game, gimmick winning game) or during a V Rush performance, information indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the accumulated value of the prize ball number counter is displayed (see display area HR2 in FIG. 12(c)).

By configuring it in this way, the total number of balls acquired during the period from when the time-saving state (V Rush) is set to when the V Rush ends (the advantageous continuation period) can be clearly notified to the player.

In this embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but any configuration that can notify the player of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period may be used. For example, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period may be displayed separately from the number of prize balls acquired during jackpot play and the number of prize balls acquired during the handicap play. In this case, it is preferable to provide a means for determining the winning game state (jackpot play, handicap play) at the time the prize ball command is received based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g, and accumulating the number of prize balls for each determination result. This makes it easy to separate the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired during one play period within the favorable continuation period (the combined period of the jackpot play period and the potential state period until the next jackpot play is executed) may be accumulated and displayed. In this case, a storage means may be provided that stores the accumulated number of prize balls acquired during one play period as historical information, and the information stored in the storage means may be displayed as a history.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of V jackpot games executed based on special electric games during the V rush period is cumulatively displayed (see display area HR1 in FIG. 12(c)), but this is not limited to this, and as described above, when using a configuration that cumulatively displays the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period, it may be configured to display the number of times that the lottery result for the special pattern has been an advantageous lottery result (jackpot) for the player, or to display the lottery probability that the lottery result for the special pattern has been an advantageous lottery result (jackpot) for the player.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the results of the lottery for the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, which makes the player more motivated to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) executes a process of setting a variable pattern command for displaying a special pattern based on a variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and sending the command to the display control device 114 in order to display a variable display performance in the third pattern display device 81. Also, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot C), a process of setting a special pattern stop type command for display to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the change display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special chart change start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). Then, if it is determined that the special chart change start flag 223d is OFF (S5201: No), since the special chart change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S5205. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart change start flag 223d is ON (S5201: Yes), the special chart change start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5202).

Then, in the processing of S4302 of the special symbol variation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 61), a variation pattern command for displaying the special symbol is set based on the variation pattern related to the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 (S5203), the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

The display variation pattern command set in the processing of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in a command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game status.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5205: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as is (S5207), a special diagram stop type command for display is set (S5208), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 72, the performance update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this performance update process (S4111). This performance update process (S4111) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period, and executes processing to set the performance mode based on the updated counter values.

In the performance update process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the interruption flag 223m is set to on (S5300), and if the interruption flag 223m is set to on (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309 and ends. On the other hand, if the interruption flag 223m is not set to on, that is, if the special pattern change is not interrupted (S5300: No), it is next determined whether the value of the change time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the change time counter 223r is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5301: No), it proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the change time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the change time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether the value of the time period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the time period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if it is determined that the value of the time period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the time period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then it is determined whether the value of the time period counter 223i after the update is 0 or not (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the time period counter 223i after the update is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the time period counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, image data is created in the display control device 114, and is displayed as the display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13(a)).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter is a value indicating a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r is a value indicating a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining variable time is short is set (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. When the display command is set in the process of S5308, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and a presentation mode (for example, an unlucky presentation) is set to indicate to the player that the remaining time of the special pattern variation being executed is short. This allows the player to play while selecting whether or not to execute a special electric game to execute a V jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the remaining time of the special pattern change being executed is 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining time of the change is short is set. However, this is not limited to this. For example, before executing the processing of S5308, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a display command indicating that the remaining time of the change is short, and a display command indicating that the remaining time of the change is short may be set only if the result of the lottery process determines that a display command is to be set. By configuring in this way, in a state where a performance mode (for example, an unlucky performance) for indicating that the remaining time of the special pattern change being executed is short is not set (an unlucky performance is not being executed by the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining time of the special pattern change being executed is long or short.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S5307 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r does not indicate a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: No), the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation to be executed next) is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5313), and it is determined whether the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of seconds remaining in the special pattern fluctuation being executed) is greater (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the processing of S5313 (S5314).

In the process of S5314, if it is determined that the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of seconds remaining for the special pattern fluctuation being executed) is greater (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the process of S5313 (S5314: Yes), a display command is set to indicate a lucky time to inform the player that the current situation is favorable to the player, that is, if a V jackpot game is executed, the V rush period set after the end of the V jackpot game is likely to be long (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309. On the other hand, in the process of S5314, if it is determined that the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of seconds remaining for the special pattern fluctuation being executed) is not greater (shorter) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the process of S5313 (S5314: No), the process skips S5315 and proceeds to S5309.

When the display command is set in the process of S5315, it is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and the display mode of the lucky time effect shown in FIG. 19(b) is set. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp the period during the V rush period when the player is more advantageous, so that the game during the V rush period can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In this embodiment, the lucky time effect is triggered when the remaining period of the special pattern change being executed is 10 seconds or more longer than the change time of the next special pattern change, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the lucky time effect can notify the player of the period in which the remaining change time will be long if the special pattern change is interrupted. For example, the lucky time effect may be triggered when it is determined that the remaining period of the special pattern change being executed is a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 50 seconds) or more, regardless of the change time of the next special pattern change.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the process of S5314, if the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special pattern fluctuation being executed) is greater (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the process of S5313, the process of S5315 is always executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, before executing the process of S5315, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long, and a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long may be set only if the result of the lottery process determines that a display command is to be set. By configuring in this way, in a state in which a performance mode (for example, a lucky time performance) for indicating that the remaining time of the special pattern fluctuation being executed is long is not set (the lucky time performance is not executed by the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special pattern fluctuation being executed is long or short.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving period counter 223i after the update is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310: Yes), even though the end condition of the time-saving state is not satisfied, the special pattern change is not being executed, so a display command indicating "???" for the continuation of the V rush is set (S5311), and the process proceeds to S5309. The display command set in the process of S5311 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, like other display commands. Then, image data is created in the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19(a)) indicating that the time-saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5310 that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S5312), the V rush flag 223q is set to off, and processing proceeds to S5309. In the processing of S5309, other performance update processing is executed (S5309), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 73, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex performances using the auxiliary performance unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 73. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 85(a)) (see S7502 in FIG. 85(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 75(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 75(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 38 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to cause the power-on image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figs. 76 to 81. First, Fig. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 76, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6402) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, as in this embodiment, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S6502 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 76. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (one of big win A-G, small win A-C, reach miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. The image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that the main control device 110 always judges the start of fluctuations at least a few seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss, as in this embodiment, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for display (S6408: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S6409) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and if there is a round number command for display (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the number of rounds command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing. This number of rounds command processing executes processing corresponding to the number of rounds command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the number of rounds command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6413) and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a fluctuation stop command for display (S6414: Yes), fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This display fluctuation stop command refers to the display stop command (normal stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), i.e., the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special pattern in the main control device 110 (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command), and various display commands set in the fluctuation stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4217 in FIG. 70).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to independently (parallelly) draw (change) the first special symbol and draw (change) the second special symbol, and further, when one special symbol is stopped (determined) as a symbol indicating a specific selection result (e.g., a jackpot), the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a miss, regardless of whether the predetermined change pattern (change time) has ended or not.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command from the main control device 110 to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the special pattern, it executes a fluctuation stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70) to set a display command (forced stop command) for variably displaying the display mode of the third pattern or fourth pattern corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation (variably displaying to correspond to the display mode of the special pattern that is forcibly stopped and displayed).

In this embodiment, even if the normal stop command described above has already been received, if the third or fourth pattern is not displayed in a stopped state on the third pattern display device 81, the stopped display will be executed based on the forced stop command received later. In other words, the forced stop command is processed with priority over the normal stop command. This ensures that the third and fourth patterns are displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display fluctuation stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop that is set in the fluctuation stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4217 in FIG. 70), and when this display command indicating a temporary stop (display temporary stop command) is received, a data table is determined in which display data is set as the fluctuation stop display data, in which the pattern displayed as stopped fluctuates slightly.

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6416: Yes), display notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the additional performance command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command output to the display control device 114 from among the various notification commands that are set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands to indicate various abnormal conditions set by the main control device 110.

In notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to receive related commands other than display commands, such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and role-driving commands, and output the related commands to the corresponding control device with the addition of information indicating the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a background image change command (S6418: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the on state, is set to on (S7001). Then, of the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S7002), after which the rear image change command process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is on, the changed rear image type is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 76. If it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the error command processing (S6421) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag is set to ON, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 76. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the processing returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 84. Figure 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 82, in this display setting process, first it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 to S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Now, with reference to Figure 83, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified based on this expanded warning image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). If the data is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 82, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S7215 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less as the confirmation display performance ends, and therefore, after a certain time has elapsed since the end of the confirmation display performance, processing is performed to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance.

First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed when it is on, is set to on (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 85 and 86. First, Figure 85 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S7501). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, referring to FIG. 85(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In this process of S7602, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Also, if the result of processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If, as a result of the processing of S7603, all of the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)), the command determination processing (see FIG. 76 to FIG. 81) and the display setting processing (see FIG. 82 to FIG. 84) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the processing of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. Then, if it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the processing of S7705 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the processing proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is identified, and this image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated (S7801) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite that should be placed in the back of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed in the front, and the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite are described as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite in the rearranged sprite order, thereby generating a drawing list. Furthermore, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7802). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of the image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of the image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 107. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the game board 13, a part of the configuration of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 3, the special electric operation port 643 and the outlet port 644 are provided as ball entry ports through which a ball that has entered the normal electric winning device 640 can enter. The game is then configured to be played when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643. However, in the first embodiment described above, there is only one operation port for playing the game, and it is not possible to provide variation to the game, so the game becomes monotonous and players quickly tire of the game. In addition, since the game is played with the same operation pattern every time, there is a problem that a game in which a game is played (a ball enters the special electric operation port 643) is easily played by timing it so that it is easy for the ball to enter the V winning port 165.

In contrast, the second embodiment differs in that a second special electric activation port 1643 is newly provided within the regular electric winning device 640, and a ball that enters the regular electric winning device 640 can enter either the special electric activation port 643, the second special electric activation port 1643, or the outlet port 644.

Furthermore, the system is configured so that when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 and when the ball enters the second special electric operation port 1643, different opening patterns of the role-winning game are executed, and the system is configured so that the role-winning game executed when the ball enters the second special electric operation port 1643 makes it easier to get the ball to enter the V winning port 165 (see Figure 6) during the role-winning game than the role-winning game executed when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643.

This configuration allows the player to become more interested in the flow of the ball that entered the normal electric winning device 640 during normal winning play. Also, because a different operation pattern of the role-winning play is executed when the ball enters the special electric operating port 643 and when the ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which a role-winning play is executed (a game in which the ball enters the special electric operating port 643) by timing it to make it easier for the ball to enter the V winning port 165.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, compared to the various effects executed in the first embodiment described above, it is different in that it is newly configured to be able to execute a first game method suggestion effect that is executed based on the remaining variation time of the normal pattern being executed when a game with a perk is executed during the time-saving state, and a second game method suggestion effect that is executed based on the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation (special pattern variation) that has been interrupted when a game with a perk is executed during the time-saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, as described above with reference to Figures 12 to 19, as a presentation for indicating the game content of the game during the time-saving state (special electric game), the remaining duration of the time-saving state, the lottery results for the normal symbols, the execution status of the game with a normal symbol, and the execution status of the game with a special feature are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, thereby informing the player of the game during the time-saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, in the performance content executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, although it is possible to inform the player of the game situation during the time-saving state (during the V-rush) in an easy-to-understand manner, it is not possible to allow the player to select a game method during the V-rush to play better. In other words, when a game is executed that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation, which is the remaining period of the V-rush (the period until the special pattern variation ends when the time-saving end condition is met), it is not possible to suggest (inform) the player whether the current situation is such that it is better to end the game with the per-game as soon as possible while aiming for the ball to enter the V-winning hole 165 by having multiple balls enter the V-winning device 65, or to give up on the ball entering the V-winning hole 165 and continue the game with the per-game for as long as possible.

In contrast to this, in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned first game method suggestion effect and second game method suggestion effect are configured to be executable, so that it is possible to have the player select a game method for playing with a per-game device based on the content of the various suggestion effects executed. Thus, play during a V Rush is executed according to a game method selected at will by the player, and the advantageousness during a V Rush can be varied according to the result of the game method selection, so that the player can be made interested in the various suggestion effects that are executed. Also, because the degree of advantageousness during a V Rush can be varied according to the result of the player's selection, the player can be actively involved in the game, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

First, the configuration of the normal power winning device 640 used in this second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 88 and 89. Figure 88 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the normal power winning device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of this second embodiment, and Figure 89 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a ball that has won in the normal power winning device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of this second embodiment can flow down to the second special power operating port 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration inside the normal power winning device 640 is different, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 88, the normal electric winning device 640 of this second embodiment differs from the normal electric winning device 640 of the first embodiment described above (see Figure 3) in that a notch is provided at the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 (below the position separated by the second movable valve 642), and a fourth partition 640k4 is provided that is connected to the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 to form a fourth flow path 641d through which balls can flow from the opening formed by the notch.

The difference is that a third movable valve 1643 is provided that can be moved between a normal position (see FIG. 88) that blocks the second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path 641d, so that the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 641a does not enter the fourth flow path 641d and flows down the second flow path 641b toward the special electric operating port 643, and an operating position (see FIG. 89) that blocks the flow path through which the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 641a flows down the second flow path 641b and enters the special electric operating port 643, and guides the ball to the fourth flow path 641d.

Although a detailed description will be given later, this third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by the drive of the third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, and is variably operated between the above-mentioned normal position and the operating position in a predetermined variable pattern when the operation control of the normal winning game by the main control device 110 is started. The third movable valve 1643 is configured to be located in the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is set to on (when current is applied), and to be located in the normal position when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off (when current is not applied). Therefore, when the normal winning game is not being executed, it is located in the normal position. In the second embodiment, the game content (operation pattern) of the role-winning game is different when the ball enters the special electric operating port 643 and when the ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643, and the game is configured so that it is easier to make the ball enter the V winning port 165 during the role-winning game when the ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off, the third movable valve 1642 is positioned in the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special electric operating port 1643, thereby suppressing the act of illegally making the ball enter the second special electric operating port 1643.

The movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is designed so that it does not come into contact with the second movable valve 642 in the second state (a state in which the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88)). By configuring it in this way, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642.

When the second movable valve 642 is in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is in the operating position, as shown in FIG. 89, the ball that entered the normal electric winning device 640 is received by the upper surface of the third movable valve 1642 and guided to the second special electric operating port 1643. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the third movable valve 1642 is variable operated in a predetermined variable pattern when a normal winning game is started, and is configured to repeatedly perform a variable operation in which the operating position (see FIG. 89) is maintained for 0.2 seconds and the normal position (see FIG. 88) is maintained for 1.5 seconds. In other words, it is configured so that about 85% of the balls that pass through the second movable valve 642 in the first state enter the special electric operating port 643, and about 15% enter the second special electric operating port 1643. Therefore, during normal play, the special electric operation port 643 is an operation port through which the ball is more likely to enter than the second special electric operation port 1643.

Furthermore, the ball is more likely to enter the V entry port 165 in the winning combination game when the ball enters the second special electric operation port 1643 than when the ball enters the special electric operation port 643. Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, in the special electric game aiming for a V jackpot game triggered by a normal symbol lottery, the ease with which the ball enters the V entry port 165 during the winning combination game differs depending on the game result during the normal symbol winning game (which operation port the ball enters), so that the player pays attention to both the normal symbol winning game and the winning combination game, which can increase the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, in a normal winning game that is executed during the time-saving state, whether the operating port into which the ball enters is the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643 is determined by the variable operation of the third movable valve 1642. Therefore, the operating port into which the ball is more likely to enter does not change depending on the normal winning game that is executed, and the player can be motivated to play a normal winning game while always expecting the ball to enter the second special electric operating port 1643, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the normal winning type set when the normal pattern lottery is won, a normal winning type in which a normal winning game is executed in which about 85% of the balls that pass through the second movable valve 642 in the first state enter the special electric operation port 643 and about 15% enter the second special electric operation port 1643, and an advantageous winning type in which an advantageous winning game is executed in which the rate at which balls enter the second special electric operation port 1643 is higher than in the normal winning game, may be set.

By configuring it in this way, players who are aiming for a V jackpot through special electric play can be made to pay attention to the normal symbol lottery results (the set normal symbol winning type), the normal symbol winning play, and the gimmick winning play, making them more motivated to play the special electric play.

<About the content of the performance executed in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, the characteristic contents of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the remaining time of the normal long winning game is less than a predetermined time (less than 15 seconds) among the states in which the normal long winning game and the role winning game are executed in overlapping fashion during the time-saving state (V rush), and FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the remaining time of the normal long winning game is more than a predetermined time (more than 15 seconds) among the states in which the normal long winning game and the role winning game are executed in overlapping fashion during the time-saving state (V rush). Note that the same display modes as those displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment above are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the time-saving state continues until the special pattern variation that meets the conditions for terminating the time-saving state ends, and if a game involving a perk is played during the time-saving state (during special pattern variation), the special pattern variation being performed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special pattern variation is interrupted). In other words, while a game involving a perk is being played, the remaining time of the time-saving state is not subtracted. Therefore, from the time when the game involving a perk is played until the ball enters the V winning port 165 (V winning), the game can be played without worrying about the remaining time of the time-saving state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time-saving state (V rush), there are two methods: a method of lengthening the period of the time-saving state (period until the time-saving end condition is met) by setting a long fluctuation time as the special pattern fluctuation executed during the time-saving state, and a method of interrupting the subtraction of the remaining period of the time-saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the game per role is executed. The former method is based on the result of the special pattern lottery and is set regardless of the player's skill, so there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will decrease if a short fluctuation time is set as the special pattern fluctuation executed during the time-saving state.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to allow the length of time by which the remaining time of the time-saving state is subtracted to be variable depending on the player's skill, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play in comparison to the latter method described above.

Here, a method for interrupting the subtraction of the remaining time of the time-saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the game for winning the special feature is executed will be described. The game during the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and first, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed, and a game for winning the normal symbol is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. Then, during the game for winning the normal symbol, a ball is made to enter the special electric operation port 643 and the second special electric operation port 1643 in the normal electric winning device 640, and a game for winning the special feature is executed, and during the game for winning the special feature, a ball is made to enter the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65 (V winning), and a game (special electric game) aiming for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed.

The lottery for the normal symbols, which is the trigger for starting the special electric game, is configured not to be newly executed when the lottery for the normal symbols has already been executed or during the normal winning game. In other words, the game with the winning feature and the lottery for the normal symbols can be executed at the same time. Furthermore, multiple end conditions are set for the game with the winning feature, and the game with the winning feature is ended when a predetermined number of balls (3 balls) enter the V winning device 65 during the game with the winning feature, or when a predetermined period of time (the period during which the operation scenario of the game with the winning feature is updated until the end timing of the game with the winning feature) has elapsed.

Therefore, by lengthening the normal symbol lottery period (variation period), i.e., the execution period of the special feature game that is executed overlapping with the period when the normal symbol win game is not being executed, the execution period of the special feature game during the period when the normal symbol win game is not being executed can be shortened. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the special feature game from becoming longer by executing the special feature game during the normal symbol lottery period (variation period).

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple opening operation patterns can be executed as a normal winning game, and advantageous normal winning games in which the open state (the state in which the electric device 640a is open) in which the ball can enter the normal winning device 640 during the normal winning game is set for a relatively long time, and unfavorable normal winning games in which the open state is set for a shorter time than the advantageous normal winning game, can be executed. Furthermore, in unfavorable normal winning games, after the open state in which the ball can enter the normal winning device 640 is set, a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the normal winning device 640 is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

Even in this long-term closure state of the disadvantageous/general winning game, it is practically impossible to execute a new game with a winning feature, just like during the period of normal symbol fluctuation described above. Therefore, when a game with a winning feature and a disadvantageous/general winning game are being executed at the same time, the execution period of the game with a winning feature can be lengthened to shorten the execution period of the special symbol fluctuation during the period when a new game with a winning feature is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the game with a winning feature from becoming longer by executing the special symbol fluctuation during the closure period during a normal winning game.

As described above, during a V-Rush, it is possible to determine unfavorable periods (normal pattern change periods, periods when normal pattern game play is closed) during which new role-winning games are not (or are unlikely to be) played, and if the unfavorable periods overlap with role-winning game periods during which the subtraction of special pattern game play is suspended, it is possible to shorten the period during which special pattern game play occurs during the unfavorable periods by lengthening the period during which the role-winning game is currently being played, and in this embodiment, if an unfavorable period and a role-winning game overlap, it is possible to notify the player of this fact.

In other words, the game status of the normal symbol winning game during the winning game of the special feature is visually recognized by the player by the content of the performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The game status of the normal symbol winning game during the winning game of the special feature is changed according to the game status of the normal symbol winning game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(a), when the game of the special feature is being played (the special symbol variation is suspended) and there is a long (15-second) closed period in the game of the unfavorable normal symbol winning game, the comment "10 seconds until the end of the normal symbol winning game" is displayed in the display area HR10 as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the game of the unfavorable normal symbol winning game (the remaining period until the closed period ends). In addition, the comment "STOP continues with no winning of the special feature winning game" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notification mode to inform the player of the advantage of extending the game period of the game of the special feature winning game. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13(b) of the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by allowing the player to understand the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, it becomes possible to allow the player to select whether to play a first game in which the player aims for a V win by having the ball enter the V winning device 65 during the ongoing role-play game, in other words, the end condition of the role-play game based on the ball entering is likely to be met and the role-play game period is likely to be short, but the player can aim for a jackpot game by a V win (V jackpot game), or to play a second game (a game in which the ball is not fired) in which the player gives up on the execution of a jackpot game by a V win (V jackpot game) and extends the role-play game period by meeting the end condition of the role-play game based on the passage of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 90(b), even when the game with a winning combination and the long-term fluctuation of the normal pattern overlap, information is displayed to allow the player to select a game method (first game, second game) in the same way as in FIG. 90(a). Specifically, when the game with a winning combination is being executed (the special pattern fluctuation is suspended) and the remaining period of the normal pattern fluctuation being executed is a predetermined period (15 seconds) or more, the comment "15 seconds until the normal pattern fluctuation ends" is displayed in the display area HR11 as information indicating the remaining period of the normal pattern fluctuation. In addition, the comment "STOP continues if the winning combination does not win" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notification mode to inform the player of the advantage of extending the play period of the game with a winning combination. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13(b) of the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanations are omitted.

This configuration makes it possible to vary the length of time that the special symbol variation is suspended depending on the player's skill (the game content being performed), which allows the player to be proactive in playing during a V Rush (time-saving state). In addition, no matter which game the player selects, the configuration is such that game results that can be advantageous to the player in different ways can occur, so that the game results that follow can vary greatly depending on the game selected by the player, allowing the player to more proactively select a game method.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the operation patterns of the normal symbol winning game executed during the time-saving state, at least a favorable normal symbol winning game and an unfavorable normal symbol winning game can be executed, and the normal symbol fluctuation time executed during the time-saving state can also be set to a long-term fluctuation or a short-term fluctuation. And, when a role-winning game is executed during a favorable normal symbol winning game and when a role-winning game is executed during a short-time fluctuation of a normal symbol, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute a game (first game) in which the ball enters the V winning device 65 during the role-winning game.

In this way, by varying the timing (presence or absence of an unfavorable period) during the time-saving state (V rush) (a period during which a new game with a winning feature cannot be executed) according to the results of the lottery for the normal symbol, it is possible to prevent the game during the time-saving state (V rush) from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the game with a winning feature, it is possible to execute a favorable game with a winning feature in which a ball that has won the V winning device 65 is likely to win the V winning port 165 (V winning), and an unfavorable game with a winning feature that is less favorable than the favorable game with a winning feature. When a favorable game with a winning feature is executed, it is possible for the ball to win a V winning at a rate of approximately 100% during the game with a winning feature, and when an unfavorable game with a winning feature is executed, the probability of a winning V winning is approximately 1/11.

Therefore, if the game with a winning combination that is executed during the disadvantageous period is a game with a winning combination that is advantageous, the effects shown in Figures 90(a) and (b) are not executed. By configuring in this way, even if a situation occurs in which the player can easily win a V jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a game (second game) that does not aim to execute a V jackpot game from being executed, thereby preventing the player from executing an excessively disadvantageous game.

Next, referring to Figures 91(a) and (b), the presentation that is executed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining change time) of the special pattern change that is interrupted during the game per reel will be explained. Figure 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change is shorter than a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), and Figure 91(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds).

In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time-saving state (during a V rush), the time-saving state period that is set after the jackpot game ends is set to the number of time-saving times (for example, four time-saving times) that is set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed, plus the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern variation. In other words, the subtraction of the number of time-saving times is configured to start after the special pattern variation that is resumed after the jackpot game ends (the special pattern variation that was interrupted when the jackpot game was executed).

Therefore, even when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) with the same jackpot type is executed, the duration of the new time-saving state that is set after the jackpot game ends will differ depending on the remaining period of the special symbol variation during the jackpot game (V jackpot game). In a pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, which has a gameplay that aims for a jackpot by a game other than the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state and uses the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state as an element for ending the time-saving state (an element for setting the duration of the time-saving state), it is desirable to execute the jackpot game (V jackpot game) when the remaining period of the special symbol variation is long. However, similar to the first embodiment described above, the remaining time period aspect 801 (see FIG. 12(a)), which indicates the duration of the time-saving state, does not show the remaining period of each special pattern variation, but displays information corresponding to the total time until the special pattern variation that satisfies the conditions for terminating the time-saving state ends, and the timer 812 (see FIG. 12(b)) is configured to display a countdown of the time until the special pattern variation that satisfies the conditions for terminating the time-saving state ends.

In other words, in the presentation mode described in the first embodiment, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is interrupted by the execution of the game with a hit of the reel. In contrast, in this embodiment, in addition to the presentation mode of the first embodiment described above, a presentation according to the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is configured to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation during the game with a hit of the reel is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(c)), the comment "It's a great chance to get VGET with the next hit of the reel" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and as shown in FIG. 91(b), when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation during the game with a hit of the reel is 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(d)), the comment "It's a great chance to get VGET with this hit of the reel" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

That is, in this embodiment, the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern variation is determined, and if the determination result is shorter than a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), a performance is executed to indicate that if a ball is entered into the V winning hole 165 in the current role-winning game and a V jackpot game is executed, the time-saving period (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be short, and if the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern variation is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), a performance is executed to indicate that if a ball is entered into the V winning hole 165 in the current role-winning game and a V jackpot game is executed, the time-saving period (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be long. Therefore, the player can select the playing method during the V jackpot game based on the content of the performance to be executed (select whether to enter the ball into the V winning hole 165 or not), and the game results during the V rush period can be greatly different based on the playing method selected by the player.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, other conditions for executing the effect shown in FIG. 91(a) are set. Specifically, there is a first condition that is met when winning information is included in the acquired regular symbol reserved memory (winning information of acquired regular symbols), and a second condition that is met when the interrupted special symbol change is not a special symbol change (final change of time-saving) that will meet the time-saving end condition. By setting the effect execution conditions in this way, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after selecting a game that does not allow the ball to enter a V during an active role-winning game in accordance with the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

The conditions for executing the effects in the above-mentioned Figures 91(a) and (b) may be the same as those used in this embodiment. For example, a comparison means is provided to compare the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change with the change time of the next special pattern change. If the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change is longer, an effect that encourages a V win during the current game (see Figure 91(b)) is executed, and if the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change is shorter, an effect that suppresses a V win during the current game (see Figure 91(a)) is executed. This makes it possible to determine the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern change relative to the period of the actual special pattern change (the period of the next special pattern change), so that a highly accurate effect can be executed (set) for the player, and the effect of the performance can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, in this embodiment, the player is configured to have the fun of being able to select a game method by executing a performance that suggests a game method that may be advantageous to the player based on the normal symbol fluctuation status during the game of the special symbol hit during the V-rush (while the special symbol fluctuation is suspended), the game status of the normal symbol hit game, and the remaining period of the suspended special symbol fluctuation. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to execute a performance that suggests each of the normal symbol fluctuation status during the game of the special symbol hit, the game status of the normal symbol hit game, and the remaining period of the suspended special symbol fluctuation, that is, to execute only a situation suggesting performance that suggests various situations during the V-rush period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the fun of having a player who understands the situation suggesting performance analyze the game situation during the V-rush period and predict the most advantageous game method for himself and select a game method.

<Flow of the game during the time-saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 92 and 93, the flow of the game during the time-saving state in the second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, as a normal winning game that is executed when a winning symbol is drawn in the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state, a normal winning game with a short period of the normal winning game and a normal winning game with a long period of the normal winning game are configured to be executable. And, the ratio of the length of the period in which the normal winning device 640 is in an open state to the length of the entire period of the normal winning game is configured to be lower in the normal winning game with a long period of the normal winning game than in the normal winning game with a short period of the normal winning game. In other words, a normal map winning game with a short normal map winning game period is an advantageous normal map winning game in which the ball can be entered into the normal map winning device 640 during the normal map winning game and the normal map winning game ends in a short period of time (approximately 3.5 seconds), while a normal map winning game with a long normal map winning game period is an unfavorable normal map winning game in which the ball can be entered into the normal map winning device 640 during the normal map winning game, but the period until the normal map winning game ends is long (approximately 17.5 seconds).

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, the above-mentioned disadvantageous ordinary winning game is a normal winning game in which the ordinary winning device 640 is opened by the same variable operation as the advantageous ordinary winning game, and then the period during which the ordinary winning device 640 is in a closed state is set to 15 seconds, and during those 15 seconds, the remaining period of the special pattern fluctuation is deducted unnecessarily.

The timing at which the disadvantageous period is set and the game contents of the special feature hit game will be explained with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when an disadvantageous regular feature hit game (regular feature hit B) is played. When a regular feature lottery is won and an disadvantageous regular feature hit game is played, a regular feature hit game is played in which the regular feature winning device 640 opens for 1 second, closes for 0.5 seconds, opens for 1 second, closes for 15 seconds, and opens for 0.1 seconds. Then, when the ball that entered the regular feature winning device 640 during the first 1 second opening period enters the special feature operating port 643, the winning triggers the game of the special feature hit.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 92(a), if the special power operation (play with a winning combination) is ended due to the passage of time without the ball entering the V winning device 65, the play with a winning combination ends 8.1 seconds after the play with a winning combination is started, and the subtraction of the change time of the special pattern change (special pattern change) is suspended for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, part of the disadvantageous period set when an disadvantageous ordinary pattern play (ordinary pattern win B) is executed can be overlapped with a state in which the change time of the special pattern change is not subtracted, so that the change time of the special pattern change subtracted during the disadvantageous period can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(b), if a specified number of balls (3 balls) enter the V winning device 65 during special power operation (play with a special feature), and the play with a special feature is ended based on the balls entering, the period of play with a special feature (the period during which the deduction of the special feature variation time is suspended) will be shorter than when the play with a special feature is ended after the time shown in FIG. 92(a), and the change time of the special feature variation that is subtracted during the disadvantageous period will be longer.

In this situation, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the period until the normal winning game ends is displayed in the display area HR10, and further, the sub-display area Ds displays a guide to a game method that continuously suspends the subtraction of the special symbol variation time, making it easier for the player to select a game method during the game with a winning feature. Note that if a ball enters the V winning slot 165 during a winning feature game and a V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the disadvantageous period that is set when an unfavorable normal winning game (normal winning B) is executed overlap, so the player will not be disadvantaged by the setting of the disadvantageous period.

This allows the player to have the fun of choosing between a game method in which the ongoing feature game ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed, preventing unnecessary deductions in the time required for the special symbol to change, and a game method in which the ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the ongoing feature game (the winning probability is approximately 1/11) and the player aims for a V jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the flow of the game when a long-term fluctuation (15 seconds) that is disadvantageous to the player is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed during the time-saving state will be explained. FIG. 93 is a timing chart that shows a schematic diagram of the flow of the game when a long-term fluctuation (15 seconds) that is disadvantageous to the player is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed during the time-saving state.

Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time executed during the time-saving state is configured to select between a short fluctuation of 1 second and a long fluctuation of 15 seconds. Here, during the normal symbol fluctuation period during the time-saving state, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is executed and the normal symbol winning game is not executed, so it is an unfavorable period that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the normal symbol winning game described above with reference to FIG. 92, it is more efficient to overlap the play period of the game per the role, that is, the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is suspended, with the fluctuation period of the normal symbol fluctuation so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted wastefully during the unfavorable period, so that the game during the time-saving state can be executed efficiently.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 93(a), if a specified number of balls (3 balls) enter the V winning device 65 during special power operation (play with a special feature), and the play with a special feature is ended based on the balls winning, the period of the play with a special feature (the period during which the deduction of the special feature variation time is suspended) will be shorter than when the play with a special feature is ended after the time shown in FIG. 92(a), and therefore the change time of the special feature variation that is subtracted during the disadvantageous period will be longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(b), if the special power operation (play with a special feature) is ended due to the passage of time without the ball entering the V winning device 65, the play with a special feature ends 8.1 seconds after it starts, and the subtraction of the special feature change (special pattern change) change time is suspended for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, the long period of normal pattern change (15 seconds) can be overlapped with a state in which the change time of the special pattern change is not subtracted, so that the change time of the special pattern change subtracted during the disadvantageous period can be reduced.

In this situation, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the period until the normal symbol variation ends is displayed in the display area HR11, and further, the sub-display area Ds displays a guide to a game method that continuously suspends the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, making it easier for the player to select a game method during the game with a perk. Note that if the ball enters the V winning hole 165 during a perk game and a V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the long period of normal symbol variation (15 seconds) variation period overlap, so the player will not be disadvantaged by the setting of an unfavorable period.

This allows the player to have the fun of choosing between a game method in which the ongoing feature game ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed, preventing unnecessary deductions in the time required for the special symbol to change, and a game method in which the ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the ongoing feature game (the winning probability is approximately 1/11) and the player aims for a V jackpot game.

<Electrical Configuration in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 94 to 99. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 are different from those in the first embodiment described above. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 94, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this second embodiment. This second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 21) in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113, and a new solenoid has been added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, but is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to Figures 88 and 89, the third movable valve 1642 is provided in the normal electric winning device 640, and the third movable valve solenoid 209f for driving the third movable valve 1642 is added. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, this third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to switch between the on state and the off state at a predetermined interval when a normal winning game is executed. As a result, during a normal winning game, the third movable valve 1642 is variable between the normal position (see Figure 88) and the operating position (see Figure 89). Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 is operated during a normal winning game and the ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 flows down toward the special electric operating port 643, depending on the state of the third movable valve 1642, the ball will be switched between winning the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643. This allows players to become interested in the flow of the winning ball inside the regular winning device 640.

Next, referring to FIG. 95(a), the contents of ROM 202 of MPU 201 of main control device 110 in this second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of MPU 201 of main control device 110 in this second embodiment. This second embodiment differs from ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23) described above in that a Various Operation Scenario 2 table 202aa is provided instead of Various Operation Scenario table 202e, and a new General Map Hit Type Selection table 202ab and General Map Fluctuation Pattern Selection table 202ac are provided. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the normal winning type selection table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b). FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal winning type selection table 202ab. Unlike the first embodiment described above, the second embodiment is configured to provide multiple types of normal winning games to be executed during the time-saving state, and to be able to execute normal winning games with different operation patterns. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the normal pattern change process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the normal pattern change that won the normal winning stops (S1117: Yes), the normal winning type is selected by referring to the normal winning type selection table 202ab based on the value of the second winning type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the set game state.

To explain in detail the contents stipulated in the normal winning type selection table 202ab, when the set game state is the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and the acquired value of the second winning type counter C9 is in the range of "0 to 89", "normal winning A" is stipulated as the normal winning type, and when it is in the range of "90 to 99", "normal winning B" is stipulated as the normal winning type. The specific operation content of the normal winning game will be described later, but when "normal winning A" is selected (selection rate 90%), the electric role 640a is opened multiple times (twice) throughout the normal winning game period, and a normal winning game that is relatively easy to win the ball into the electric winning device 640 is executed. On the other hand, if "Regular Win B" is selected (selection rate 10%), a regular win game similar to "Regular Win A" is played (in the latter half of the regular win game period), and then a regular win game is played in which the electric device 640a is set to be closed for a long period (15 seconds).

As mentioned above, the normal winning game is played without interruption to the special symbol fluctuation, so in "normal winning A", the ball can enter the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643 throughout the normal winning game, and a game can be played aiming for a role winning game. However, in "normal winning B", a long period is set in the latter half of the normal winning game during which it is difficult to get the ball to enter the normal electric winning device 640, so the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is deducted unnecessarily, resulting in an unfavorable normal winning game for the player.

In this embodiment, when a normal winning game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is playing a game with a special feature, a presentation (see FIG. 90(a)) is executed that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special feature that is subtracted during the execution period of the disadvantageous normal winning game by continuing the game with the special feature for a long time. This makes it possible to vary the period that the time-saving state continues based on the skill of the player, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac will be explained with reference to FIG. 95(c). FIG. 95(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac. This normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting the normal symbol fluctuation pattern that is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and is referenced when selecting the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48).

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 48, the normal symbol fluctuation time was standardized to 3 seconds, so in the process of selecting the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (see S1114 in FIG. 48), only a 3-second fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) was set. In contrast, in the second embodiment, different fluctuation patterns can be selected based on the set game state and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 that is referenced when selecting the normal symbol fluctuation type.

Specifically, when the game state is normal, a normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS2. In other words, in the normal state, the same 3-second normal symbol fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in the time-saving state, a short fluctuation is specified as a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of "0 to 179". A long fluctuation is specified as a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds for the range of "180 to 197".

In this way, in this embodiment, the length of the period during which the normal symbols fluctuate will vary greatly depending on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected during the time-saving state. During this period during which the normal symbols fluctuate during the time-saving state, no normal symbol winning games are executed, and furthermore, since this is the period during which the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, during the time-saving state, this will be a normal symbol fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, when normal symbol variations are executed in such an unfavorable symbol variation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is playing a game that hits a special feature, a presentation (see FIG. 90(c)) is executed that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable symbol variation by continuing the game that hits the special feature for a long time. This makes it possible to vary the period that the time-saving state continues based on the skill of the player, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 96(a), the contents of each operation scenario table 202e that differ from the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in this second embodiment. This second embodiment differs from each operation scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment described above in that a part of the normal winning operation scenario table 202e3 has been changed and a second role winning operation scenario table 202e5 has been added. Otherwise, it is the same, and the same contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of the second role-winning operation scenario table 202e5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 96(b). FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second role-winning operation scenario table 202e5. This second role-winning operation scenario table 202e5 is a data table that defines the operation scenario of the role-winning game that is executed when the ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643 during a normal winning game.

Specifically, the storage solenoid 209c is set to off when the scenario counter value is "1", that is, immediately after the game with the special feature is executed, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to off until the game with the special feature ends. The opening period (the period during which the V opening and closing door 65a is closed) continues until the scenario counter value is "25", that is, 0.1 seconds after the game with the special feature starts, and then the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to on (the round period is set) for the range of the scenario counter value from "26" to "400", that is, for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to on, the V opening and closing door 65a is opened, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65. A ball that enters the V winning device 65 during this round passes through the storage valve 66a, which is moving to a ball non-storage state (evacuation state), and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, since multiple balls can be made to flow into the first movable valve 66b during one play with a feature, the probability of a V winning during play with a feature can be increased.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches "400", the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF, and the operation scenario is stipulated so that the state in which the V opening and closing door 65a is in a closed state continues until the scenario counter value reaches "1650", i.e., for 5 seconds. After that, when the scenario counter value reaches "1650", the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to ON until the scenario counter value reaches "1675", i.e., for 0.1 seconds, and then the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF until the scenario counter value reaches "2025".

In this embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a specified in the above-mentioned per-role operation scenario table 202e2 and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a specified in the second per-role operation scenario table 202e5 are different from each other. However, without being limited to this, the operation of the storage valve 66a may be unified in the per-role game to be executed, while the winning rate of balls into the V winning hole 165 during the per-role game may be different.

Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is specified so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF for 3 seconds after the start of a game with a per-role device, then the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON for 2 seconds, and then the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF again. When a ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643, the operation scenario is specified so that a game with a per-role device is executed with an opening period (period during which the V-shaped opening/closing door 65a is closed) of 0.1 seconds, a round period (period during which the V-shaped opening/closing door 65a is open) of 1.5 seconds, and an ending period (period during which the V-shaped opening/closing door 65a is closed) of 1.5 seconds.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the special electric operating port 643, the operation scenario can be specified so that a per-role game is executed with an opening period (period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is closed) of 3.1 seconds, a round period (period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is open) of 1.5 seconds, and an ending period (period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is closed) of 1.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, in a per-role game executed based on a ball entering the second special electric operating port 1643, the storage valve 66a is in a retracted state (non-ball storage state) in which the ball cannot be stored during the period during which the ball can enter the V winning device 65, so that the multiple balls that have entered the V winning device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, increasing the probability of winning the V winning port 165.

In addition, in a role-play game that is executed based on a ball winning the special electric operation port 643, the storage valve 66a is in a protruding state (ball storage state) in which it can store balls during the period in which it is possible for the ball to win the V winning device 65. Therefore, of the balls that have won the V winning device 65, only the balls stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flow into the first movable valve 66b, thereby lowering the probability of the balls winning the V winning port 165.

By configuring it in this way, when varying the ease with which a ball will enter the V winning hole 165 during a per-game play (V winning rate) depending on the type of per-game play being executed, the V winning rate can be varied simply by varying the length of the period (opening period) until the V opening/closing door 65a is first opened among the opening pattern of the V opening/closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a, simplifying the operation control during the per-game play. In other words, an operation scenario is set for each type of per-game play only during the period from when the per-game play begins until the opening period ends, and thereafter the operation control of various devices can be executed based on a common operation scenario, simplifying the operation control.

In addition, according to the above example, a role-winning game that is advantageous to the player (a role-winning game that is executed when a ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643) is configured to allow the ball to enter the V winning device 65 at an earlier stage after the start of the role-winning game than a role-winning game that is disadvantageous to the player (a role-winning game that is executed when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643). This allows the game that is advantageous to the player to be executed efficiently. In addition, the operation of the storage valve 66a is set to an operation advantageous to the player (an operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) before the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning device 65 through a winning play that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, even if a ball that enters the V winning device 65 during a winning play that is disadvantageous to the player becomes clogged or intentionally remains inside the V winning device 65, the operation advantageous to the player (an operation to turn off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed afterwards, and it is possible to prevent the act of illegally causing a ball to enter the V winning port 165.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, the operation scenario defined in the per-role action scenario table 202e2 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it differs in that it defines a 15-second closed period and a 0.1-second open period in the latter half of the game when a per-role action scenario table is played, similar to the second per-role action scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96(b).

In other words, in this embodiment, when a game involving a per-reel device is executed, the game period of the game involving a per-reel device can be significantly different between ending the game involving a per-reel device based on a winning ball and ending the game involving a per-reel device based on the passage of time. This makes it possible to significantly vary the game results during the time-saving state depending on the result of the play method selected during the game involving a per-reel device, encouraging the player to play with enthusiasm.

Next, referring to FIG. 97(a), the differences between the normal winning operation scenario table 202e3 of this second embodiment and the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal winning operation scenario table 202e3 of this second embodiment. This second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the operation contents of the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in this second embodiment, the operation scenario of the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and has a time-saving normal winning 2 scenario 202e33 and a time-saving normal winning 3 scenario 202e33.

First, the contents of the time-saving normal map win 2 scenario 202e33 will be explained with reference to FIG. 97(b). FIG. 97(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving normal map win 2 scenario 202e33. This time-saving normal map win 2 scenario 202e33 stipulates the operation scenario of the normal map win game that is executed when "normal map win A" is selected as the normal map win type, and a normal map win game is executed in which the overall length of the normal map win game is 3.6 seconds, and the proportion of the period during the entire normal map win game period in which the electric role 640a is in an open state is higher than the operation scenario stipulated in the time-saving normal map win 3 scenario 202e34 described later.

Specifically, when the scenario counter value is "1", an operation scenario is defined in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON, and an operation scenario is defined in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON. The second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON until the normal winning game ends (the scenario counter value becomes "900"). In other words, in the normal winning game executed in response to "normal winning A", the ball that enters the electric device 640a is always configured to enter the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643.

The third movable valve solenoid 209f is configured to repeatedly have an on period of 0.2 seconds (period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned in an operating position that allows a ball to enter the second special electric operating port 1643) and an off period of 1.5 seconds (period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned in a normal position that allows a ball to enter the special electric operating port 643). In other words, the rate at which balls that pass through the second movable valve 642 enter the second special electric operating port 1643 is approximately 11%, and the rate at which balls that pass through the second movable valve 642 enter the special electric operating port 643 is approximately 89%.

Then, the opening period (the period during which the electric role 640a is closed) continues until the scenario counter value is "25", i.e., 0.1 seconds after the start of the normal play, and then the normal solenoid is set to on (the electric role 640a is open) for the scenario counter value range of "26" to "274", i.e., for 1 second, and the normal solenoid is set to off (the electric role 640a is closed) for the scenario counter value range of "275" to "400", i.e., for 0.5 seconds. Then, the normal solenoid is set to on again for the range of "401" to "649", i.e., for 1 second, and then the normal solenoid is set to off for the range of "650" to "900", i.e., for 1 second. In other words, when a normal winning game based on the operation scenario specified in the time-saving normal winning scenario 202e33 is executed, a normal winning game is executed in which the opening operation in which the electric role 640a is opened for one second is executed twice, and the total open state period of the electric role 640a during which the ball can enter the normal winning device 640 is 2 seconds out of the entire period of the normal winning game (3.6 seconds), so that about 40% of the normal winning game period is a period advantageous to the player (a period during which the special electric game can be progressed (the ball can enter the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643)).

Next, the contents of the time-saving normal map hit 3 scenario 202e34 will be explained with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving normal map hit 3 scenario 202e34. This time-saving normal map hit 3 scenario 202e34 stipulates the operation scenario of the normal map hit game that is executed when "normal map hit B" is selected. The contents stipulated in the time-saving normal map hit 3 scenario 202e34 are the same as the time-saving normal map hit 2 scenario 202e33 described above until the scenario counter value reaches "650", so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the scenario counter value is in the range of "650" to "3500", i.e. for 15 seconds, the normal power solenoid is set to off, and then when the scenario counter value is in the range of "3501" to "3524", i.e. for 0.1 seconds, the normal power solenoid is set to on, and then when the scenario counter value becomes "3525", the normal power solenoid is set to off.

In other words, the normal map winning game stipulated in the time-saving normal map winning 3 scenario 202e34 is configured so that the total length of the normal map playing period is 17.7 seconds, and the total period during which the ball can be entered into the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal map playing is 2.1 seconds. Therefore, since the total open state period of the electric role 640a during which the ball can be entered into the normal electric winning device 640 is 2.1 seconds compared to the total period of the normal map playing (17.7 seconds), about 12% of the normal map playing period is a period advantageous to the player (a period during which the special electric game can be progressed (a ball can be entered into the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643)). Furthermore, after the second electric role 640a opening operation is completed, the electric role 640a is closed for 15 seconds.

Therefore, when the time-saving normal winning scenario 202e34 is set during the time-saving state, the period during which the ball cannot enter the normal winning device 640 is set long, resulting in a normal winning game that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (when the fourth special pattern variation ends), the time-saving state is configured to end, and the remaining period of the special pattern variation is configured to be subtracted during the normal winning game. In other words, the remaining period of the special pattern variation is subtracted even during the 15-second closed state, resulting in a normal winning game that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 99, this second embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above in that a normal map fluctuation time counter 223aa, a normal map hit time counter 223ab, a firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac, and a performance setting completion flag 223ad have been added. All other elements are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The normal symbol fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. When a normal symbol fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the counter value set in the performance update process executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60) is subtracted. The counter value is referenced when a hit game is executed, and various performances are executed based on the counter value.

The normal play time counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the play period during which the normal play is executed. When a normal play start command is received, the normal play period corresponding to the received command is set, and the counter value set in the performance update process executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60) is subtracted.

The launch prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON when a puncture suggestion effect is executed to puncture the reel game (end the reel game due to the passage of time), and is set to OFF when the reel game ends while it is set to ON. When the reel game ends, it is referenced when changing the display mode of the ending screen of the reel game based on the setting status of the flag and the end conditions of the reel game that have been established (end of winning, end of time).

The effect setting flag 223ad is used to indicate that a blowout suggestion effect, which suggests that the game with a winning reel will end based on the passage of time, or an effect, which suggests that the ball will enter the V winning device 65 during the game with a winning reel, has been set, and is set to ON when a dedicated effect is set during the game with a winning reel.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is that different role-winning games can be executed according to the operation port (special electric operation port 643, second special electric operation port 1643) into which the ball enters during the normal winning game. In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the difference is that the normal pattern variation time in the normal pattern lottery can be selected by referring to the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac (see FIG. 95(c)) based on the game state and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2, and that normal pattern winning games with different operation contents can be executed as normal pattern winning games executed during the time-saving state. The control process executed by the main control device 110 is the same except for the above-mentioned contents, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 100, the contents of the special electric start port winning process 2 (S108) will be explained. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric start port winning process 2 (S108). This special electric start port winning process 2 (S108) differs from the special electric start port winning process of the first embodiment described above (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that it is configured to be able to set the type of win corresponding to the operating port into which the ball has entered (special electric operating port 643, second special electric operating port 1643), but is otherwise the same. The same control contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 101 to 107, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this second embodiment differs from the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above in that it executes a normal map related process 2 (see S4217 in Figure 101) instead of the normal map related process (see S4217 in Figure 66) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in Figure 61), a role hit related process 2 (see S4851 in Figure 103) instead of the role hit related process (S4804 in Figure 70) executed in the hit related process (S4219 in Figure 67), and a performance update process 2 (see S4151 in Figure 105) instead of the performance update process (see S4111 in Figure 72). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the regular map related process 2 (S4217) will be explained. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the regular map related process 2 (S4217). This regular map related process 2 (S4217) differs from the regular map related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4217 in FIG. 66) in that the process executed when a regular map variation pattern command is received and the process executed when a regular map start command is received have been changed, but otherwise it is the same.

When normal symbol related process 2 (S4217) is executed, first it is determined whether a normal symbol fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that a command has been received (S4701: Yes), normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed (S4751), and then this process is terminated. The normal symbol fluctuation start process (S4751) executed in the process of S4751 is described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102, but a process for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is executed. In this embodiment, multiple fluctuation times can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (see FIG. 95(c)), and the degree of advantage of the game executed during the time-saving state is changed depending on the fluctuation pattern selected.

If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the normal map variation pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is determined whether a normal map win start command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that a normal map win start command has been received (S4703: Yes), the normal map win time (the END time of the corresponding normal map win game operation scenario) is set in the normal map win time counter based on the received command (S4752), the normal map win start command for display is set (S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the normal map win start command has not been received (S4703: No), the same processes as S4705 to S4714 are executed as in the normal map related process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 66), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the normal map change start process (S4751) will be explained with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map change start process (S4751). When the normal map change start process (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is shortened (time-shortened state) (S4771), and if it is determined that the time is not shortened (S4771: No), the normal map change command for display is set (S4771), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is not shortened in the process of S4771 (S4771: Yes), the normal map change time is extracted from the received normal map change pattern command (S4772), the extracted value is set in the normal map change time counter 223aa (S4773), the process of S4774 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the reel-hit related process 2 (S4851) will be explained with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reel-hit related process 2 (S4851). This reel-hit related process 2 (S4851) differs from the reel-hit related process (S4804) described above in that the contents of the process executed when a reel-hit start command is received and when an ending command is received have been changed; all other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the reel-hit related process 2 (S4851) is executed, it is first determined whether a reel-hit start command has been received (S5101), and if it is determined that a reel-hit start command has been received (S5101: Yes), the reel-hit start process is executed (S5151), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that a reel-hit start command has not been received (S5101: No), the same processes of S5103 to S5107 as the reel-hit related process (S4804) described above are executed, and if it is determined in the process of S5107 that an ending command has been received (S5107: Yes), it is then determined whether the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON (S5152).

In other words, the process of S5152 determines whether an effect is being executed to suggest that it would be advantageous for the player to be prohibited from firing the ball. If the process of S5152 determines that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not on (S5152: No), the process executes the processes of S5108 to S5109, which are the same as the above-mentioned reel-related process (S4804), and ends this process. On the other hand, if the process of S5152 determines that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to on (S5152: Yes), the process sets the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac to off (S5153), and determines whether the end condition for this regular winning game is the passage of time (S5154).

If it is determined that the normal winning game has ended based on the passage of time (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating "success" is set (S5155), and if it is determined that the normal winning game has not ended based on the passage of time, that is, that the normal winning game has ended based on the ball winning (S5154: No), a display command indicating "unfortunate" is set (S5156). In this way, based on the game content of the normal winning game during the time-saving state, it is predicted whether it would be advantageous or unfavorable for the player to fire the ball, and when a performance is executed that suggests a game method to the player based on the prediction result, it is determined whether the normal winning game has ended based on the suggested content, and the display mode of the normal winning game ending screen is changed based on the determination result, so that the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the game method he or she chose this time was correct or not.

Unlike this embodiment, for example, if a prediction is made based on the game content of the normal winning game during the time-saving state as to whether it would be advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to fire the ball, and an effect is executed that suggests a game method to the player based on the prediction result, in order to allow the player to predict and select a game method that is truly advantageous, if an effect that suggests a game method different from the actual prediction result (so-called false effect) can also be executed, the process of S5154 may be configured to determine whether the normal winning game ended with a game corresponding to the actual prediction result (elapse of time, winning ball), and to change the display mode of the end screen based on the result of this determination. This makes it possible to execute an effect that is unexpected for the player.

In this case, in addition to the effects that suggest a game method to the player described above, it is advisable to execute a status notification effect (for example, an effect that suggests the type of normal winning game) to allow the player to predict the actual game situation. This can provide the player with the fun of predicting whether the effect that suggests a game method to the player is a false effect or not. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a normal winning game and a gimmick winning game are executed at the same time, the effect that suggests a game method to the player is executed, but without being limited to this, if the player is in a state where he or she can select a game method, the effect that suggests a game method to the player may be executed in the same manner.

Next, the contents of the feature hit start process (S5151) will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the feature hit start process (S5151). In the feature hit start process (S5151), various processes are executed to change the performance mode to be executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the feature hit game.

When the feature win start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of special electric activation port that was won is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether the current feature win game is a feature win game that is executed when the ball enters special electric activation port 643 (special electric activation port 1) (S5302). If it is determined that it is not based on winning in special electric activation port 1 (S5302: No), a display command to indicate a favorable feature win is set (S5303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the winning is based on winning the special electric operation port 1 (S5301: Yes), the value of the normal game time counter is read (S5304) and it is determined whether the read value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the end of the time elapsed per reel (S5306), the launch prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON (S5307), and the process proceeds to S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, a display mode (corresponding to a comment in the secondary display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the launch of the ball is displayed, as shown in the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a).

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), it is next determined whether the value read in the process of S5304 is a value indicating 5 seconds or less (S5308). If it is determined that it is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), it is possible to play the per-game feature again by playing the next normal per-game feature by ending the per-game feature early, so a display command is set to indicate the end of the per-game feature winning (S5309), and the process proceeds to S5310. Here, based on the display command set in the process of S5309, a display mode encouraging the launch of the ball (for example, "If you launch the ball early and end the per-game feature, you will have a chance") is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

If the process of S5308 determines that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, that the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, then a display command to indicate a hit is set (S5310) without setting a dedicated display command, the performance setting flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect described above are configured to be executable, so that it is possible to have the player select the game method for the game per reel based on the content of the various suggestion effects executed. Thus, the game during the V Rush is executed according to the game method selected by the player, and the advantage during the V Rush can be made to differ depending on the result of the game method selection, so that the player can be made interested in the various suggestion effects that are executed. In addition, because the degree of advantage during the V Rush can be made to differ depending on the result of the player's selection, the player can be actively involved in the game, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the second embodiment, the suggestive effects are executed so that the player can select the game method for the game with the winning symbol depending on the normal symbol variation executed during the game with the winning symbol and the status of the game with the winning symbol. However, it may be configured to execute similar suggestive effects when multiple games are executed in an overlapping manner. For example, when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, a suggestive effect may be executed that allows the player to select the timing of the end of the jackpot game based on the remaining period of the normal symbol variation being executed. By configuring in this way, when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the normal symbol variation executed during the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is executed for a long time, and the period during which the normal symbol variation is not executed during the time-saving state is extended, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

Third Embodiment
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 108 to Fig. 113. In the first and second embodiments described above, a game with a special feature is executed based on the ball entering the special feature operation port (the special feature operation port 643 or the second special feature operation port 1643), and the subtraction of the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted. In other words, the more the game with a special feature is executed, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, the game method during the time-saving state (V-rush) becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will get bored with the game.

In contrast, the third embodiment differs from the first and second embodiments described above in that the processing content for the special symbol fluctuation during execution when a game with a winning combination is executed is different. Specifically, depending on the type of game with a winning combination that is executed (set), one of the following is executed: a process to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation during execution, a process to discard it (discard the remaining fluctuation time and force a stop when it is a miss regardless of the lottery result), or a process to end the time-saving state in addition to discarding it.

By configuring it in this way, the game situation during the time-saving state can be greatly changed based on the execution of the game per reel, providing the player with an exciting game experience.

Furthermore, it is configured to execute a performance that allows the player to choose whether or not to execute a game with a winning feature based on the performance executed during the time-saving state (V rush). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the time-saving state ending suddenly when a game with a winning feature is executed that ends the time-saving state, for example. Also, because the player can choose whether or not to execute a game with a winning feature based on the content of the performance executed, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and increase the interest of the game.

<About the content of the performance in the third embodiment>
First, the contents of the characteristic effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 108 and Fig. 109. The effects executed in this embodiment are significantly different from the above-mentioned embodiments in that, in addition to the time-counting subtraction display of the duration of the time-saving state (duration of the V-rush) displayed on the timer 812, a decrease display in which the value displayed on the timer 812 is significantly decreased when a special symbol variation being executed is canceled due to the execution of a hit game of a role, and a disappearance display in which the time-saving state ends due to the execution of a hit game of a role are executable.

Another major difference is that when the currently running special symbol variation results in a jackpot (during jackpot variation), a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the currently running jackpot variation will be discarded by executing a perk game. The rest of the display content is the same, with only changes to the size and position of the display area to indicate the above-mentioned differences. The same display content will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Figure 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content executed when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), and Figure 108(c) is a schematic diagram showing the reserved status of each symbol when the display screen shown in Figure 108(a) is displayed. As shown in Figure 108(a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, the display mode of "Danger Time Entered" is displayed, and "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851 indicating the period until the danger time ends (until the jackpot fluctuation is displayed as stopped). This period display mode 851 is periodically subtracted (countdown displayed) by the performance update process of the audio lamp control device 113, just like the value displayed on the timer 812.

Furthermore, in the V Rush variable area 811, in addition to a symbol resembling a "V" that corresponds to a successful game during a V Rush (execution of a V jackpot game), a symbol resembling a "skull" that indicates a game result that is unfavorable to the player is displayed variably. Also, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "A hit with a special feature during Danger Time is a big pinch."

In other words, when danger time begins, the player is informed that there is a possibility that the jackpot fluctuations will stop (the jackpot game will be played based on the special symbol lottery) after a certain period of time (10 seconds). On the other hand, as will be described in more detail later, this danger time is configured to be executed even in some cases where the special symbol lottery result is a miss.

Therefore, when a player enters danger time, he or she can choose to either not play the special electric game (not fire the ball) aiming for a winning combination until the danger time ends, or play the special electric game even during the danger time and actively try to win a V winning combination.

In this embodiment, the condition for entering Danger Time is when the remaining period of the special variation being executed reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), but this is not limited thereto. For example, the conditions for entering Danger Time may be different depending on whether the lottery result of the special pattern variation being executed is a jackpot or a miss. During a jackpot variation, Danger Time may be entered when the remaining period is "27 seconds," "17 seconds," "10 seconds," or "7 seconds," and during a miss variation, Danger Time may be entered only when the remaining period is "10 seconds." This makes it possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special pattern variation being executed based on the remaining period display of Danger Time that is displayed when Danger Time is entered.

In the above example, a condition for entering Danger Time is set specifically for when the jackpot is fluctuating, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in order to indicate to the player that a bad jackpot is occurring, it is also possible to configure the game so that Danger Time can be entered when the remaining period of the bad jackpot becomes "14 seconds." This makes it possible for a player who understands that a bad jackpot is occurring to be motivated to play the game without having to fire the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 108(b), the display contents when a role-hit game is executed during danger time and the big win variation is discarded will be explained. FIG. 108(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when a role-hit game is executed during danger time and the big win variation is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108(b), when a role-hit game is executed during danger time, the word "End" is displayed in the period display mode 851, and it is notified that the danger time has ended. Then, in order to indicate that the big win variation that was being executed has been discarded, a pattern resembling a "skull" is displayed in a stopped pattern in the V-rush variation area 811. Furthermore, the comment "Too bad...pull it back" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, since a special feature hit game is being played, a display mode for aiming for a V win in the special feature game is displayed.

In addition, because the special symbol variation that was in progress has been discarded, the display area HR4 that indicates the remaining period of the time-saving state (V Rush) only displays "10 seconds", which is the variation time for the next variation. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the jackpot variation has been discarded.

In addition, if a game involving a special feature that interrupts the jackpot fluctuation is executed during danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, the danger time will continue and a presentation will be executed to inform the player that a V jackpot game has been executed.

<Electrical Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 110. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired, and the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed when the ball enters the V winning port 165 is selectable based on the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2, and the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 110(a). FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110(a), the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 specifies three types of jackpot types, and the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed, the game state (number of time-saving times) to be set after the V jackpot game ends, and the effect on the special pattern being executed when the game with the special feature is executed are configured to differ depending on the selected jackpot type.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", a jackpot C is defined, when it is in the range of "80 to 94", a jackpot D is defined, and when it is in the range of "95 to 99", a jackpot E is defined.

"Jackpot C" (selection rate 80%) is the same as the V jackpot game executed in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, and is set to 10 rounds (R) of jackpot game, 4 times of time reduction, and interruption of the special pattern currently in progress. "Jackpot D" (selection rate 15%) is set to 10 rounds (R) of jackpot game, 4 times of time reduction, and discarding the currently in progress special pattern variation. "Jackpot E" (selection rate 5%) is set to 15 rounds (R) of jackpot game, 15 times of time reduction, discarding the currently in progress special pattern variation, and ending the time reduction state.

As mentioned above, if a "jackpot E" is set, which has the most adverse effect on the ongoing special symbol fluctuations for the player, then if a V is won during play with that reel, the most favorable jackpot game for the player and the game state after the jackpot game ends (number of time-saving times) will be set, so the player can be given one last chance. Also, for example, if the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is a miss and the miss fluctuation is about to end, in other words, if the time-saving state will end in a few seconds even if the player does nothing, then this "jackpot E" can be set as the jackpot type that is most favorable to the player.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 110(b). FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(b), this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that a danger time selection table 222ca has been added. As everything else is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The Danger Time selection table 222ca is a data table that is referenced when deciding whether to actually execute a Danger Time performance when the Danger Time entry conditions are met, and is configured to vary the execution probability based on the lottery results of the special pattern change that is currently being performed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 110(c), the contents of the Danger Time selection table 222ca will be explained. FIG. 110(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Danger Time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110(c), the table is configured so that the Danger Time effect is more likely to be executed when the special pattern variation currently in progress is a jackpot variation than when it is a miss variation. This allows the player to play while hoping that a jackpot variation is in progress when the Danger Time effect is executed.

Specifically, if the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol determination result) is a jackpot, then regardless of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f, it is selected to execute Danger Time, and if the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol determination result) is a miss, then if the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", then it is selected not to execute the Danger Time effect, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", then it is selected to execute the Danger Time effect.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the Danger Time performance even if the result of the special drawing currently being performed is a miss, so that the player's game during the Danger Time can be given a game-like element of prediction and selection, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process contents in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 111 to 113. In this embodiment, the control process contents executed by the main control device 110 and the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, but are otherwise the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 111, the special electric start port winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric start port winning process 3 (S158). This special electric start port winning process 3 (S158) differs from the special electric start port winning process of the first embodiment described above (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that it is configured to allow different jackpot types to be selected when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643, and executes a process corresponding to the selected jackpot type, but is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric start winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes as S1301 to S1303 and S1305 to S1309 as the special electric start winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed. Then, in the process of S1303, it is determined that the special electric is in operation (playing with a perk), and if it is determined that the special electric is in operation, it is next determined whether the jackpot type selected this time is "jackpot E" (S1371). If it is determined that it is "jackpot E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), the special symbol variation stop process is executed (S1374), and the process proceeds to S1375. Note that the contents of the special symbol variation stop process (S1374) are the same as the special symbol variation stop process of the first embodiment described above (see S208 in FIG. 45), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1371 that the winning combination is not a "jackpot E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether or not the winning combination is a "jackpot D" (S1372). If it is determined that the winning combination is a "jackpot D" (S1372: Yes), then the process of S1374 is executed and the process moves to S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that the winning combination is not a "jackpot D," i.e., that the winning combination is a "jackpot C" (S1372: No), then the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed and the process moves to S1375.

In the process of S1375, the special feature hit flag is set to ON (S1375), a command corresponding to the current hit type ("Big Hit C" to "Big Hit E") is set (S1376), a special signal activation command is set (S1308), and the process ends.

Next, the performance update process 3 (S4171) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance update process 3 (S4171). This performance update process 3 (S4171) differs from the performance update process 2 (see S4151 in FIG. 105) of the second embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a danger time setting process (S5371) for setting the danger time performance is executed after the processing of S5306, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the Danger Time setting process (S5371) will now be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Danger Time setting process (S5371). In this Danger Time setting process (S5371), when the conditions for executing the Danger Time effect are met, a determination is made as to whether or not to actually execute Danger Time, and a process is executed to set the Danger Time effect based on the determination result.

When the danger time setting process (S5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates a remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601). If it is determined that the value does not indicate a remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: No), this means that the conditions for executing the danger time are not met, and the process is terminated.

In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the value indicates a remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the Danger Time Selection Table 222ca is referenced based on the lottery result of the special pattern change being executed (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f to select whether or not to execute the Danger Time effect (S5602).

In the process of S5603, it is determined whether or not to execute a Danger Time effect based on the process result (selection result) of S5602 (S5603), and if it is determined that it should be executed (S5603: Yes), a display command indicating the Danger Time effect is set (S5604), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the Danger Time effect should not be executed (S5603: No), this process is terminated.

The display command set in the processing of S5604 executes the danger time effect shown in FIG. 90(a).

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 114 to 137. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main control device 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in Fig. 2, in the normal game state, a special game is executed in which a ball is inserted into the special ball entry port 64, and when the game state transitions to the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is more likely to open, so that the special electric game, which aims to insert a game ball into the special electric operation port 643 in the normal electric winning device 640 and the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65, is configured to be a game method that is advantageous to the player. In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special electric operation port 643, a ball entry port (second ball entry port 1645) that serves as a lottery trigger for the second special pattern is provided (see Fig. 114). As a result, the V opening and closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is triggered not by a winning combination caused by the ball entering the special electric operation port 643, but by a winning small prize resulting from a lottery for the second special pattern that is executed when the ball enters the second ball entry port 1645.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous variation). During the time-saving state, the variation time for the drawing of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than that for the drawing of the first special symbol, making it easier to draw the second special symbol.

In addition, as conditions for ending the time-saving state, a cumulative time-saving end condition is set that is met when the total number of times the first special symbol is drawn (number of variations) and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn (number of variations) reaches 100, and a special symbol 1 time-saving end condition is set that is met when the number of times the first special symbol is drawn (number of variations) reaches 4. The time-saving state is configured to end when the cumulative time-saving end condition or the special symbol 1 time-saving end condition is met.

In the fourth embodiment having the above-mentioned configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the time-saving state is configured to be the same as the variation pattern of the special symbol set during the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and the gameplay during the time-saving state (during V rush) differs from the first embodiment described above in that instead of a game in which a ball is inserted into the special electric start port 643 and a role-winning game (a winning game that opens the V winning device 65) is executed, a game in which a ball is inserted into the second ball entry port 1645 and a small winning game (a winning game that opens the V winning device 65) is executed by winning a small winning prize in a lottery for the second special symbol, and a game in which the time-saving state ends even if the cumulative time-saving end condition is met before the number of times the first special symbol changes (number of lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, four times) is used.

In other words, in this fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol (the fluctuation period of the second special symbol) is variably settable. For example, by configuring the fluctuation period of the second special symbol to be set to a short fluctuation period (e.g., a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds) or a long fluctuation period (e.g., a fluctuation time of 10 seconds), the interval between small win games executed during the time-saving state can be made to differ greatly depending on the fluctuation period of the second special symbol that is set. This allows for a greater variety in games during the time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, since the cumulative time-saving end condition can be met based on the execution of a lottery for the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of small win games executed during the time-saving state. This makes it possible to prevent players from being excessively awarded bonuses (V jackpot games) during the time-saving state. Furthermore, by configuring the second special symbol fluctuation period set during the time-saving state to be difficult to set to a short fluctuation period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), it is possible to prevent small win games from being executed frequently during the time-saving state. This makes it possible to prevent players from being excessively awarded bonuses (prize balls) in a short period of time.

The following mainly describes the characteristic configuration and gameplay of the fourth embodiment. First, the timing of updating the number of time-saving times and the timing of the determination process for ending the time-saving state in the fourth embodiment will be described. In a simultaneous variation type gaming machine that can execute the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern in parallel, as in the fourth embodiment, the time-saving number of times update process and the determination process for ending the time-saving state are executed at the timing when each special pattern starts to change so that the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state does not exceed a specified number (for example, 100 times). As a result, the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when the specified number of special pattern changes are executed, so that the 101st special pattern change that exceeds the specified number (for example, 100 times) can be reliably executed in the normal state, and excessive special benefits (special pattern changes in the time-saving state) are prevented from being given to the player. However, because the time-saving state ends before the final change (the 100th special symbol change) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol change begins, there is a problem that depending on the timing of the determination (change) of each special symbol, the period during which the time-saving state is set becomes shorter, causing discomfort to the player.

Specifically, for example, if the second special symbol is determined (changed) immediately after the special symbol change of the 100th spin (the final time of the time-saving cycle) is executed as the first special symbol, that is, the special symbol change of the 101st spin is executed, the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th special symbol change is executed (just before the special symbol change of the 101st spin is executed), so the player will not feel uncomfortable. However, if the special symbol change of the 100th spin (the final time of the time-saving cycle) is executed but the special symbol change of the 101st spin is not executed, for example, if the special symbol change of the 100th spin starts after the special symbol change of the 100th spin ends, the time-saving state ends at the timing when the special symbol change of the 100th spin is executed, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable about the state of the normal symbol during the special symbol change of the 100th spin.

In contrast to this, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of special pattern changes (e.g., 100 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of normal patterns, it is possible to distinguish the end timing of the special pattern change (e.g., the special pattern change on the 100th spin) at which the time-saving end condition is met and the start timing of the special pattern change that is executed first after the time-saving end condition is met (e.g., the special pattern change on the 101st spin), and the time-saving state is ended based on which of the two timings is executed first.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols until the timing when the special symbol fluctuation stops for the specified number of times, or until the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is executed for the number of times exceeding the specified number of times, and it is possible to provide the player with the time-saving state for the maximum period of time, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, the timing at which the special symbol change on the 101st spin is executed is determined by determining when the conditions for executing the special symbol change on the 101st spin are met, and the time-saving state ends before the special symbol on the 101st spin is determined. This reliably prevents the time-saving state from being set beyond the predetermined number of time-saving times, resulting in the lottery for the special symbol being executed during the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is terminated based on the timing of the end of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, or the timing of the special pattern change being executed after the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, whichever occurs first. However, without being limited to this, for example, the time-saving state may be terminated based only on the timing of the special pattern change being executed after the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the variation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Then, if a V entry (a ball enters the V entry port 165) occurs during a small jackpot game and a jackpot is awarded, the temporarily stopped special symbol variation is resumed after the jackpot game ends. And in this fourth embodiment, the trigger for subtracting the number of time-saving times is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol that started to vary during time-saving play is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols is a fluctuation that started before the jackpot game, so if the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols resumes and stops, the number of time-saving times is not subtracted. In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded by winning a V, in addition to the number of time-saving times awarded by the jackpot, the period until the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols is stopped is also set as a time-saving game state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the time-saving state that is most advantageous for the player for as long as possible.

Here, the fourth embodiment is shown as an example of a different method for realizing the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 described in the first to third embodiments (gameplay aiming for a jackpot game by drawing a special symbol and having the ball enter the special electric operation port 643), and the various technical ideas and the contents of the performances executed described in the first to third embodiments may be appropriately diverted. Note that detailed explanations of the various technical ideas and the contents of the performances used in the same way as the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

<Regarding the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 114. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a second ball entrance unit 1640 is provided instead of the normal electric winning device 640, and a second ball entrance 1645 is provided instead of the special electric operation port 643.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, a left-handed play is performed and a lottery for the first special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the special symbol entry port 64, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed and, if the ball is selected, the electric device 640a is configured to be in an open state so that the game ball can enter the normal electric winning device 640. Then, when the game ball enters the special electric operating port 643, a winning combination is executed and the V opening and closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is configured to be in an open state.

In contrast, the fourth embodiment is significantly different in that it has a second ball entry port 1645, which is the trigger for the drawing of the second special pattern, instead of the special electric operation port 643 described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, the trigger for opening the V-shaped opening door 65a is not winning a prize at the special electric operation port 643, but winning a small prize at the drawing of the second special pattern based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 1645, which is the trigger for opening the V-shaped opening door 65a.

When the game state is normal, the player shoots the game ball toward the left area of the game board 13 in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, causing the ball to enter the special ball entrance 64, and plays the game while hoping to win the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game state will transition to a time-saving game state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if a game is played by aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%, and if the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and a normal pattern lottery is won, the second electric device 1640a attached to the second ball entry unit 1640 is set to an open state (a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry unit 1640).

The second ball entry unit 1640 is provided with a second ball entry port 1645, and when a game ball enters the second ball entry port, a lottery for a second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to win a small prize. When a small prize is won, the V opening and closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to an open state, and when the game ball enters the V winning port 165, a big prize is awarded.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the small prize in the lottery for the second special symbol is set to 396/400 (approximately 9/10), as will be described in detail later. The time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1645 is the most advantageous state for the player because it is also the state in which a V prize is likely to occur.

<Electrical Configuration of the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 115 to 118. In the fourth embodiment, the method of drawing special symbols is different from that of the first embodiment, and the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed in response to the above-mentioned difference.

First, referring to FIG. 115, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the drawing of special symbols, the drawing of normal symbols, the display settings on the first symbol display device 37, the display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and the display settings on the third symbol display device 81, etc.

The first win random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses a first win random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, a first win type counter C2 used to select the big win type of the special symbol, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, a small win type counter C5 used to select the small win type of the special symbol, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first win random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 55), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da corresponding to the entry of a ball into the special ball entrance 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db corresponding to the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 1645 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). In the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored according to the timing of the entry of the ball into the special ball entrance 64.

When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values begins.

Similarly, the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645.

When the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values begins.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db) is configured to have its own execution area. This makes it possible to quickly execute the next special symbol variation when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In this embodiment, since only the second special pattern is configured to have a small win as a lottery result, the value of the small win type counter C5 is not stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da. However, for example, it may be configured to have a small win as a lottery result for the first special pattern, and the value of the small win type counter C5 may be stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da.

Also, as in this embodiment, the reserved ball storage area (first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special pattern type (first special pattern) that does not have a small win as a lottery result may be configured to store the value of the small win type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the lottery for the special pattern (presence or absence of a small win), all of the counter values acquired by the ball entering the start hole (special pattern ball entry hole 64, second ball entry hole 1645) that triggers the lottery for the special pattern are stored, and when the start condition (variation condition) of the special pattern is established, only the necessary values of the acquired counter values are used to execute the lottery for the special pattern. This allows the same configuration to be used for multiple gaming machines with different specifications for the lottery for the special pattern (presence or absence of a small win), which allows parts and technology to be standardized and costs to be reduced.

In addition, in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, a normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc is provided that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4) like the special patterns described above, and the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 is reserved and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may not include a function (reserved memory function) to store each counter value acquired for each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern).

By configuring it in this way, in a gaming machine in which a lottery for one special pattern type is switched between an advantageous lottery and an unfavorable lottery for the player depending on the game state that is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a different game state is set in a state in which a large number of reserved memories for one special pattern are acquired in order to execute an advantageous lottery, and an unfavorable lottery is executed for one special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above in that it has a jackpot type selection 4 table 202db instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24(a)), a fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e, and a new small jackpot random number table da. Since the rest of the configuration is the same, the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 117(a), the small win random number table 202da provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the small win random number table 202da. This small win random number table 202da is a table that defines the random number value (determination value) that is determined to be a small win in the drawing of the second special pattern.

Specifically, in the small win random number table 202da, the judgment value for judging a small win is specified for each type of special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern), and a predetermined range of judgment values is specified regardless of the state of the special pattern (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the pattern type is the first special pattern, the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to a small win is not specified, and it is specified so that a small win cannot be won in the lottery for the first special pattern.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the small win is set to a range of "4 to 399." In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small win in a drawing for the first special symbol is set to 0 (no win), and the probability of winning a small win in a drawing for the second special symbol is set to 396/400 (approximately 9/10).

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, the value of the first win random number counter C1 that wins a big win is different from the value of the first win random number counter C1 that wins a small win, and in one process of drawing the special pattern (process of determining whether or not there is a win), the judgment of whether or not there is a big win and the judgment of whether or not there is a small win are performed consecutively (simultaneously).

By configuring it in this way, a lottery for a big win or small win can be executed with a predefined probability for one obtained counter value (first win random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, when a small prize is won, the V opening and closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is configured to be opened for a certain period of time (a state in which the game ball can enter the V winning device 65). A big prize is awarded by having the game ball enter the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65 during the period in which the V opening and closing door 65a is open. Thus, the player plays the game hoping to win many small prizes.

In this embodiment, the V door 65a is configured to be opened for a set period of time when a small prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. A type of small prize may be set, and the period during which the V door 65a is open may be varied based on the type of small prize won. When configured in this way, a small prize type table may be provided and the type of small prize may be determined by referring to the table. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested not only in winning a small prize, but also in the type of small prize that is won, and plays the game while hoping to win a small prize that opens the V door 65a for a longer period of time. This can increase the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize is set differently for the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. This configuration allows the player to receive different benefits for the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be motivated to play in order to draw more special symbols that are more advantageous to the player. As described above, in this embodiment, the game is configured so that the drawing of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not performed frequently unless a specific game state (time-saving state) is set, so that the player can be motivated to play in order to set a specific game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the table referred to when executing the big prize lottery (first prize random number table 202a) and the table referred to when executing the small prize lottery (small prize random number table 202da) are configured separately, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute the big prize lottery and the small prize lottery using one table. In this case, for example, the first prize random number table 202a can be configured to specify the range of counter values that will win a small prize for each type of special pattern. By configuring it in this way, the number of data tables held by the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the determination of whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been won is performed according to a judgment value that is predefined according to the acquired value of the first jackpot random number counter C1, the type of special pattern, and the state of the special pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, the first jackpot random number counter C1 value defined as a jackpot or small jackpot may be changed according to the number of jackpot wins or small jackpot wins within a specific period until a specified condition is met, or a data table in which a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot or a small jackpot is not defined may be provided as a data table for abnormal situations referenced in the jackpot lottery and small jackpot lottery that are executed when a specified abnormal condition is met.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) draw (varies) the first special symbol and draw (varies) the second special symbol, and has a restriction so that both special symbols do not win a jackpot (a jackpot game is not executed) at the same time (in parallel). In a pachinko machine 10 with such a restriction, for example, during the period when a jackpot is won in the drawing of one special symbol and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, the drawing of the special symbol may be executed by referring to a dedicated data table that does not specify a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot, but specifies only a judgment value corresponding to a small jackpot, so that a jackpot cannot be won in the drawing of the other special symbol.

Next, the contents of RAM 203 of MPU 201 of main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 118. Fig. 118 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of RAM 203 of MPU 201 of main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment in that it adds a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, a special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, a small win flag 203dg, a special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, a special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk, a special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and a time reduction end waiting flag 203dm. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on balls entering the special symbol ball entry port 64 (initial winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on game balls entering the second ball entry port 1645 (initial winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment).

The first special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special pattern are stored, and when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, if various counter values are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da, the various counter values are shifted and stored in this memory area. The second special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special pattern are stored, and the details are the same as those of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown).

The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da, the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of the start winning. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special pattern ball entrance 64 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da. On the other hand, when it is detected that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 1645 (initial winning), the values of the counters C1-C2, C5, and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer, just as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, and are similarly stored in the corresponding areas (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the special pattern variation (lottery), in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81, the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each start winning (counter values C1-C2, C5, CS1) stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db described above is shifted to this special pattern reserved ball execution area. Note that in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc is a storage area in which the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) are stored in response to the detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning). When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 from the counter buffer and stores them in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc has four reserve areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (counter C4, CS2 values) can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc, data on reserved balls is stored in the order in which they passed through the through gate 67 (initial winning), starting with the reserved areas with empty data that are earliest in the order of consumption.

In addition, the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory that stores the values of each counter when it detects that it is time to start executing the normal symbol variable display performance based on the start winning, and stores data (counter C4, CS2 values) to be referenced in processing such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the setting of the display (variable pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display performance, it shifts the data corresponding to one of the start winnings among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc described above (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal symbol variable type counter CS2) to this normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery and the display settings of the second symbol display device 83. In this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de are counters that count the number of reserved balls (wait times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the special symbol entrance ball port 64 or the second entrance ball port 1645 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de are set to zero as their initial values by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to each counter up to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de are decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203dd (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a first special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da based on a ball entering the special pattern ball entrance 64 (initial winning). The first special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203dd is incremented by one.

The value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203de (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a second special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 (initial winning). The second special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203de is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1-C2, C5, and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the first special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the first special pattern change start process (see S255 in FIG. 123) or the second special pattern change start process (S260 in FIG. 126), and performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the change pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first pattern display device 37, the change display is performed based on the determined change pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special pattern 2 variation pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation display performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and stop type command.

The special symbol 2 change stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that a jackpot of the first special symbol will be executed while the second special symbol is being changed, and is set to ON when a jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is being changed. This special symbol 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, it is set to OFF in the process of S952 of the second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126).

This makes it possible to prevent a second lottery from being held for the second special symbol, which was forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

The main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to execute processing for the first special symbol and then processing for the second special symbol within one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), thereby executing variation processing for each special symbol without delay.

In special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. In addition, special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is configured to skip variation processes for each special symbol (S254 to S263 in FIG. 119) if the current state is a jackpot or a small jackpot (S251 in FIG. 151: Yes).

In other words, in this embodiment, while a big win game or a small win game is being played based on the lottery result of the special pattern, a new special pattern change (lottery) is not executed, but if the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a big win by the change process for the first special pattern executed first in special pattern change process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), a new change process for the second special pattern is executed within that special pattern change process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

In this embodiment, which is configured in this manner, by using the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203df, when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot, it is possible to prevent a new change process for the second special pattern from being executed within the special pattern change process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

The small win flag 203dg is a flag that indicates that the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a small win, and is set to ON when a small win is won. This small win flag 203dg is set ON when the hit/miss judgment of the second special pattern is a small win (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and is set OFF when a special pattern variation that results in a small win is displayed as a stopped win (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

The special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special chart 1 is stopped. When the flag is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when the flag is set from on to off, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the variation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) whose lottery result is a small win is stopped (S1652 in FIG. 133), and is referred to in the special pattern variation process 4 (see FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). When it is set to ON in the process of S252, a process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1) in the same manner as during variation (S253 in FIG. 119). In other words, while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first pattern display device is in a state in which the variation display is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the variation of the special pattern 1 has not been forcibly stopped by setting the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON. Then, if it is determined that it is set to ON during the first special pattern change execution process (see FIG. 123) (S751 in FIG. 123: Yes), it is set to OFF (S753 in FIG. 123).

In this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is selected as the winning symbol for the small prize, the first special symbol is the only special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning symbol being selected for the small prize. However, if the first special symbol is selected as the winning symbol for the small prize, a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be set to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for one special symbol is a big win, the process forcibly stops the variable display of the other special symbol as a miss based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a big win (based on the fact that a big win game is being played), and if the result of the lottery for one special symbol is a small win, the process forcibly stops the variable display of the other special symbol (based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a small win) based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a small win in this embodiment.

In other words, the system is configured so that the variable display of one special symbol can be processed in various ways depending on the lottery result of the other special symbol. By configuring it in this way, if the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a big win), and the variable display to show that game result is being executed, the other special symbol (the lottery result is a small win) is displayed stationary, which prevents the big win from being erased by the small win.

The special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the change time of the first special pattern, and a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the first special pattern change pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the first special pattern change execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and the special pattern change process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) determines whether the value is 0 (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is 0 (S256 in FIG. 119: Yes), the first special pattern change stop process (see S257 in FIG. 119) is executed to stop the first special pattern that is changing.

Furthermore, the value of this special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (see S1555 in FIG. 132). This prevents the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di from remaining and the variation of the first special symbol from resuming again based on the value remaining in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203dj after the forced stop display when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot.

The special symbol 2 change time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the change time of the second special symbol, and a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the second special symbol change pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129) is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the second special symbol change execution process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and the special symbol change process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) determines whether the value is 0 (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203dj is 0 (S262 in FIG. 119: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 119) is executed to stop the second special symbol that is changing.

Furthermore, the value of this special symbol 2 variation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (see S855 in FIG. 124). This prevents the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203dj from remaining and the variation of the second special symbol from resuming again based on the value remaining in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203dj after the forced stop display when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot.

The special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the first special symbol is stopped from changing. If the first special symbol change start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) determines that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358 in FIG. 120: Yes), the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to on (S359 in FIG. 120), and if the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) determines that the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S2101 in FIG. 125: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102), and the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103).

If a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the flag is set to OFF in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). Similarly, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the flag is set to OFF in the second special symbol change stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132). If a jackpot is won in the lottery for the special symbol, the flag is set to OFF in the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk. If the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the end of the jackpot game, the flag is determined to be OFF when the change is resumed and the change is stopped (S2101 in FIG. 125). If the flag is determined to be OFF (S2101 in FIG. 125: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h (see S2102 in FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the change is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the jackpot game ends and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol resumes, the remaining number of time-saving times is not updated (deducted) when the fluctuation stops. Therefore, in this embodiment, the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game awarded by a V win is in a time-saving game state not only for the number of times the special symbol is drawn as determined by the jackpot, but also for the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the time-saving game state, which is an advantageous period for the player, for a longer period.

The special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the second special symbol is stopped. In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), the special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl determines whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (see S960 in FIG. 126), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (i.e., during time-saving) (S960: Yes), it is set to on (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time-saving update process (S1661) of the special symbol 2 miss stop process (S1564), and if it is on, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted and the special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to off (see S860 in FIG. 124), and if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, the second special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) is set to off (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and if the second special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped due to a miss. As described above, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, the special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off, so that when the fluctuation that was forcibly stopped due to a miss is stopped, the process of updating the value of the time-saving counter 203h can be skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

The time-saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that a special pattern change that satisfies the conditions for ending the time-saving state has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, after the end of a big win game, the special pattern changes four or fifteen times as the specified period of the time-saving state, and the time-saving state ends. This indicates that the final time-saving change has started and that the time-saving state is in a standby state to end.

In the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (i.e., this is the final variation of the specified number of times in the time-saving state) (S360), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), this time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

When the time-saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125), which is the timing for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, is executed, or when a new special symbol is determined (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) or second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)), the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is referenced and set to ON, the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to OFF.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to on (i.e., standby state), if any of the time-saving end timings arrive, the time-saving end processing can be reliably executed according to each timing.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of Fig. 119 to Fig. 136, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this fourth embodiment will be described. This fourth embodiment differs from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment in that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are configured to be executed in a redundant manner (in parallel), and the contents of the control process corresponding to the above-mentioned differences are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 119, the special symbol change process 4 (S151), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process 4 (S151). The special symbol change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, controls the first symbol display device 37 to be able to display the variable display in the determined variable display mode by a predetermined control, sets various commands to execute the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and controls to stop and display in a display mode that shows the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). Below, the special symbol change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), it is first determined whether a big win game is in progress (big win) or a small win game is in progress (small win) (S251). Here, it is determined whether a big win game is in progress (big win) or a small win game is in progress (small win) based on the information stored in the game status storage area 203g.

If it is determined in the process of S251 that a big win or a small win is occurring (S251: Yes), it is then determined whether the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S252), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S252: Yes), the display of the first pattern display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special pattern (in this embodiment, the first special pattern (special pattern 1)) is updated (S253), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S252 that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to on (S252: No), this process ends as it is.

The special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a display mode indicating a small win. In this embodiment, the change time set in the change display (special symbol change display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (deducted) while the small win game is being played, and during that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode to indicate that the change display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

By configuring in this way, the player can be informed that the display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the small win game started has been temporarily stopped, so that the player can be prevented from feeling suspicious that the first special symbol change that was being executed has disappeared. In addition, the display mode for indicating that the display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped may be, for example, the same display mode as the display mode for indicating that the normal display of the change is in progress (for example, a flashing display mode in which the light is turned on and off repeatedly at 0.2 second intervals), or a display mode with a slower flashing interval than the display mode for indicating that the change is in progress (for example, a flashing display mode in which the light is turned on and off repeatedly at 0.5 second intervals) may be used. Furthermore, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be capable of displaying a display mode of multiple colors, a flashing display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when the display is temporarily stopped may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the current status is not a big win or a small win (S251: No), it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is greater than 0, i.e., whether the first special pattern is being displayed changeably (S254). If it is determined that the first special pattern is being displayed changeably (the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), a process for indicating that the first special pattern is being changed is executed (S255).

In this first special symbol change in progress process (S255), a process is executed to change (update) the change display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Then, when the process of S255 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the first change time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol change in progress process (S255) is 0 (S256), and if it is determined in the process of S256 that the special symbol 1 change time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol change stop process is executed (S257), and the process proceeds to the process of S259 described later.

In the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the change time specified for the first special symbol being changed has elapsed, a process is executed to stop the change display with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. In addition, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a process is executed to forcibly stop and display the second special symbol being executed in a display mode showing a miss. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a jackpot, a process is executed to erase information about the jackpot. Details of this first special symbol change stop process (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. In addition, when it is determined in the process of S256 that the special symbol 1 change time counter 203di is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S254 that the special symbol 1 change time counter 203di is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S254: No), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 is not currently changing, then the first special symbol change start process is executed (S258). In this first special symbol change start process (S258), a process is executed to execute a new drawing (change) of the first special symbol, and it is determined whether a new drawing (change) is possible, and if a new drawing (change) is possible, a process is executed to execute the new drawing (change). This first special symbol change start process (S258) will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 120 to 122.

After the first special symbol change start process (S258) is executed, and it is determined in the process of S256 that special symbol 1 is changing (S256: No), or after the first special symbol change stop process (S257) is executed, the change process (S259 to S263) for the second special symbol is then executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S259). In other words, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is currently being changed. If it is determined in the process of S259 that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203dj is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S259: No), this means that the special symbol 2 is not currently being changed, so next, a second special symbol change start process is executed (S260) to execute a new lottery (change) of the second special symbol, and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if reserved data (various counter values) are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203b, a jackpot determination and variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data is executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if the lottery result is a jackpot (or a small jackpot), the jackpot flag 203i (or a small jackpot flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S259, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203dj is greater than 0, i.e., that the special symbol 2 is currently changing (S259: Yes), then the second special symbol change in progress process is executed (S261). The contents of this second special symbol change in progress process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, but it is a process with the same contents as the above-mentioned first special symbol change in progress process (S255), but with the processing target changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution process (S261) is completed, it is determined whether the current value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S262: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process is executed (S263), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S262 that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203dj is not 0 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and this process is terminated.

The second special symbol change stop process (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132, but similar to the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the change time specified for the second special symbol being changed has elapsed, a process is executed to stop the change display with the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. Also, in the second special symbol change stop process (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win, a process is executed to forcibly stop and display the first special symbol change being executed in a display mode showing a miss. Furthermore, when the second special symbol being executed wins a big win, a process is executed to erase information about the big win. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery result of the second special symbol can win a small win, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win, a process corresponding to a small win or a miss is executed.

As explained above with reference to FIG. 119, in this embodiment, the selection (variation) of the first special symbol and the selection (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variation process for the first special symbol (S254-S258) and the variation process for the second special symbol (S259-S263) are executed within one special symbol variation process. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new selection (variation) for each special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, providing smooth gameplay.

In addition, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process for the first special symbol is executed before (given priority to) the variation process for the second special symbol. In this way, by clearly setting the processing priority for each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, the variation stop processing of the first special symbol is executed with priority.

In this embodiment, the variable processing for the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variable processing for the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the variable processing for the second special symbol may be configured to be executed with priority over the variable processing for the first special symbol.

It may also be configured to prioritize variable processing for special symbol types for which a lottery advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state, and if the pachinko machine 10 switches special symbol types for which a lottery advantageous to the player is executed depending on the set game state, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order in which the special symbol types for which variable processing is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent lottery results advantageous to the player from being erased (discarded) due to lottery results that are disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the first special symbol change start process (S258), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process (S258).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is obtained (S351), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is decremented by 1 (S353).

Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special pattern reserved ball number storage area 203a is shifted sequentially to the execution area (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, etc.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is used to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the set game state.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S357), which will be described in detail later, is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value, based on the result of a win/loss determination based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown).

The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current game state is in time-saving mode (S358). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358: Yes), the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S358 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S358: No), the game state is normal, so this process is terminated as it is. In this way, if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., if the time-saving mode is in time-saving mode, by setting the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk to ON, it is possible to determine whether the variation was started during time-saving mode when the variation was stopped, and the end condition of time-saving mode can be updated (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted) when the variation was stopped.

After executing the process of S359 described above, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S360). In other words, it is determined whether it is the final change, which is the end condition of the time-saving state. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to on (S361) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S360 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 1, this is not the final change of the time-saving game state, and this process ends as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S451). Then, in order to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the game is waiting, that is, whether the final time-saving change is being executed by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON (S452). If it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is ON (i.e., the second special symbol is in the final time-saving change) (S452: Yes), the time-saving state set this time has ended, so the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S453), and the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set to OFF (S454). Next, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command is set indicating that the game state has switched to the normal state (S456), and processing proceeds to S457. On the other hand, if it is determined in processing S452 that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), the final change in the time-saving state is not being executed, so processing S453 to S456 is skipped and processing proceeds to S457.

In this way, when waiting for the time-saving state to end (when the final change in the time-saving state has begun with the other special symbol), by setting the game state to the normal state before obtaining the lottery result for the special symbol, it is possible to eliminate the problem of playing a game based on the time-saving game state with the other special symbol until the change in the special symbol for which the final change in the time-saving state is being executed ends, even though the time-saving game state has ended. This makes it possible to provide the player with a proper game.

After completing the process of S452 or S453, next, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is judged whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot judgment value, and the lottery result (judgment result) is obtained (S457). Then, it is judged whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S458), and if it is judged to be a jackpot (S458: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON to indicate the jackpot winning of the first special symbol (S459). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol that won the jackpot, in addition to information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot winning, and specifically, it is configured to be able to set information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot for each type of special symbol. Therefore, in the process of S459, information indicating a jackpot is set for the area of the jackpot flag 203i that corresponds to the first special symbol.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S460), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the winning type counter C2 (S461), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S458 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S458: No), the losing symbol of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the first special symbol change pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change pattern selection process (S357).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), it is determined whether the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot or not, i.e., whether a jackpot for the first special symbol is set or not (S551). Here, the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203i for the first special symbol is on. This jackpot flag 203i is set on in the process of S459 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 121) described above.

If it is determined in the process of S551 that a jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S551: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S553), and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, high probability state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S554).

Then, a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained in the processing of S553 and the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the processing of S554 (S555), and a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S555 (S556).

Next, a special symbol 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S557), the start of the first special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S558), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203di (S559), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S551 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (i.e., the jackpot flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S553.

Next, referring to FIG. 123, the first special pattern change in progress process (S255), which is one process of the special pattern change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change in progress process (S255). In this first special pattern change in progress process (S255), a process for updating the change time of the ongoing special pattern change and a process for resuming the special pattern change that was interrupted due to a small win in the lottery for the second special pattern are executed.

In the first special symbol variation in progress process (S255), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. This special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON if a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol. In this embodiment, if a small win is won with one special symbol and the other special symbol is being displayed in a variation, the variation of the other special symbol is suspended for a predetermined period (the period from the small win win to the end of the small win game), and the variation of the other special symbol is resumed again after the predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small win game).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent one special pattern variation from ending while the other small prize game is being played, resulting in a game that is difficult for the player to understand being played. Furthermore, because the lottery result of one special pattern lottery is not discarded based on winning a small prize game in the other special pattern lottery, it is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which, for example, winning a small prize causes the lottery result for a big prize win (a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than winning a small prize) to be discarded due to the small prize win.

If it is determined in the processing of S751 that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S751: Yes), the special pattern 1 fluctuation resume command is set (S752), the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag is set to off (S753), the value of the special pattern 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is decremented by 1 (S754), the display of the first special pattern on the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S755), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the first special pattern change in progress process (see S255 in FIG. 119) is executed within the special pattern change process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, and the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is updated (decremented by 1) within the first special pattern change in progress process (see S255 in FIG. 123). Therefore, for example, if a change time of 30 seconds is set as the change time of the first special pattern, the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is set to "15000", and the value is decremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S751 that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to on (S751: No), that is, if it is determined that the small jackpot has not been won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the processes of S752 and S753 are skipped and the process proceeds to S754.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the first special pattern change stop process (S257), which is one process of the special pattern change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this first special pattern change stop process (S257). This first special pattern change stop process (S257) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is "0", that is, when the change time of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) has elapsed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is set on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S851). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S851: Yes), then the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set on (S852), and a special symbol 2 variation stop command indicating that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df has been set on is set (S853).

Next, the second special pattern on the first pattern display device 37 is displayed as a missing pattern (S854), and the value of the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). As a result, when the first special pattern is displayed as a missing pattern, the variation display of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) being executed can be displayed as a missing pattern (missing pattern) (confirmed display) when the first special pattern is displayed as a missing pattern.

After completing the process of S855, it is next determined whether the jackpot flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to ON (S856). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S856: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to OFF (S857) in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss in the process of S854 described above, the stored information for the special symbol 2 jackpot is deleted (S858), and the process proceeds to S859. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S856 that the jackpot was not won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the processes of S857 and 808 are skipped and the process proceeds to S859.

In the process of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won by the current special pattern change is set (see 809), and then the jackpot flag 203i, the special pattern 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special pattern 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm corresponding to the first special pattern are set to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current game state is a jackpot (a jackpot game in progress) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S861). The game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to separately store the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, time-saving state) and the game state related to the winning game (a jackpot game in progress, a small win game in progress), and by executing the process of S861, the game state related to the lottery game at the time of winning the jackpot (normal state, time-saving state) and the game state indicating that the jackpot game is in progress are stored.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine the game state that was set at the time the jackpot was won at the end of the jackpot game.

After completing the processing of S861, next, a special pattern 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop confirming the first special pattern (S863), and processing is executed to stop the changing display of the first special pattern being displayed by the first special pattern display device 37 (S864), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time-saving update process (S862) is executed, and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S863. A detailed explanation of the time-saving update process (S862) will be given later with reference to FIG. 125.

In this way, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), a process (S859-S864) is executed to stop the changing display at the symbol that indicates the result of the lottery (first lottery game) for the first special symbol. Also, if the current lottery result is a jackpot (S851: Yes), the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is a miss (S854). In this way, by configuring the process to stop one special symbol at a symbol that indicates a jackpot (determined display) and to execute a process to forcibly stop the other special symbol that is changing, it is possible to execute appropriate processing for multiple special symbol changes that are executed simultaneously.

In other words, in a configuration in which a variable process for a first special symbol and a variable process for a second special symbol are executed in sequence, as in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable process for the second special symbol (forced stop process) that is executed based on the lottery result for the first special symbol is executed within the variable process for the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol can be forced to stop at a timing when the variable process for the second special symbol is not being executed, thereby preventing the processes for the second special symbol from overlapping and enabling the processes to be executed smoothly.

In this embodiment, the process is configured to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a pattern indicating a miss when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a pattern indicating a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) (S458 in FIG. 121: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped with a miss pattern. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly stopped as a miss and to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the jackpot variation of the one special symbol ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the variation of the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when a jackpot is won with one special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the variation of the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped and to prevent a player from knowing whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a jackpot, the lottery result for the other special symbol variation that is being performed is discarded, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to suspend the variation of the other special symbol until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, and then resume the suspended special symbol variation after the jackpot game ends. This makes it possible to prevent the player from distrusting the pachinko machine 10 due to the game result of the lottery game performed by the player being discarded.

In addition, when controlling the variation of one special pattern in progress based on the result of the drawing for the other special pattern, the content of the variation control may be configured to differ depending on the result of the drawing for the other special pattern in progress. For example, if the drawing for the second special pattern is in the midst of a variation indicating a loss (loss variation) at the time when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern, the drawing result may be discarded and a forced stop process may be executed to forcibly stop the loss variation, and if the drawing for the second special pattern is in the midst of a variation indicating a win (jackpot, small win) (win variation), an interrupt process may be executed to allow the variation of the second special pattern to resume after the jackpot game for the first special pattern has ended.

In this case, the player can play while being interested in whether a new second special pattern variation will be executed or whether the interrupted second special pattern variation will be resumed after the jackpot game of the first special pattern ends. Furthermore, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that a suggestive performance is executed to suggest to the player the status of the second special pattern (whether it is interrupted or not) during the jackpot game of the first special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 125, the time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation stop process (first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S151 in FIG. 119), second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132)), will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)), if the game state is in the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and if the end condition is satisfied, a process is executed to transition the game state to the normal state. Note that in the explanation below, the process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped will be described, but the same process is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time-saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, whether the change of the special symbol being executed this time is one that started changing during time-saving play (S2101). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, the change has started during time-saving play (S2101: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2104. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), the change has not stopped, which would trigger an update of the time-saving state, so the processes of S2102 to S2106 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2107.

As described above, if the game state is in the time-saving state when the special symbol starts to change, the subtraction flag for the corresponding symbol type can be set to ON to subtract the value of the time-saving counter 203h when the change stops. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be set until the final change in the time-saving game state stops. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous time-saving game state for the longest possible period.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped and the variation is not resumed until the small win game ends. Then, during the small win game, a V win occurs, a big win is awarded, and the variation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol resumes after the big win game ends. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 137, the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the big win game starts, so when the temporarily stopped variation resumes and stops, the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is OFF, so the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not subtracted. In other words, the remaining number of time-saving times is not subtracted when the variation of the temporarily stopped special symbol stops after the big win game ends due to a V win. By configuring it this way, in addition to the specified time-saving period set by the type of jackpot, the remaining variable time of the temporarily stopped special chart is also set as a time-saving game, so the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player can be set to the longest possible period. This increases the interest of the game.

In the process of S2104, it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (S2104). If it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (S2104: Yes), that is, if the current change of the special symbol is the final change of the time-saving and the next change has not started since the final change of the time-saving in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), it is time to transition the game state to the normal state, so the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to off (S2105) and the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S2106). Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the final variation of the time-saving game has not been executed, that is, the time-saving state is continuing, so the above-mentioned processes of S2105 to S2106 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2107. In this way, in a simultaneous variation type gaming machine, when the variation that will be the final variation of the time-saving game is stopped, it is determined whether or not a variation (the next variation from the final variation) that exceeds the specified number of times in the time-saving game state has been executed with the other special pattern, and if not, the game state is changed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a natural gameplay experience.

When any of the processes S2101, S2104, and S2106 ends, the process proceeds to S2107. In S2107, a command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the game status is set (S2107), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 126, the second special symbol change start process (S260), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change start process (S260).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, it is determined whether or not a jackpot was won in the lottery for the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121)) executed immediately before this process was executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)).

In the process of S951, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), various processes for starting the change of the second special symbol are skipped, the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203df is set to OFF (S952), and this process is terminated. In other words, in this embodiment, by using the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and after the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss symbol, a new second special symbol change is prohibited. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed within the change process related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without any malfunction.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S951 that the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to on (S951: Yes), the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to off, so that by setting the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203df, the second special pattern variation start processing (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

This is because, if the second special pattern change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) executed immediately after the lottery for the first special pattern (first special pattern jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121)) executed immediately before the second special pattern change start process (S260) is executed (within the same special pattern change process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)) is executed and a jackpot game is then started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the first special pattern jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the second special pattern change start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the jackpot game ends due to the processing of S251 of special pattern change process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of one special symbol based on the lottery result of the other special symbol, thereby reducing the processing load of the control process executed by the main control unit 110.

In this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for one special symbol is a predetermined result (a winning jackpot), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (stopped as a losing symbol) and a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol is not performed until a jackpot game based on the result of the lottery for one special symbol is played. In order to prevent this, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set and the variation process of the other special symbol is skipped once, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the result of the lottery for one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot winning), the lottery (variation) for the other special symbol can be configured so that a jackpot cannot be won until the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is completed. For example, when the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 described later, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df can be configured to be set to off.

By configuring it in this way, even if the timing for turning on the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203df is set before the timing when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern, it is possible to prohibit a new change (lottery) of the second special pattern from being executed until a jackpot game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special pattern change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed with the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203df set to on, the change process of the second special pattern is skipped, i.e., a new change is not started (the second special pattern is left stopped), but without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute a change display of the second special pattern exclusively when the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203df is set to on.

In this case, the system may be configured to draw the second special symbol using a special lottery that does not result in a jackpot, and to execute the variable display of the second special symbol for a period corresponding to a variation pattern determined based on the results of the special lottery, or to execute the variable display of the second special symbol for a period until a jackpot game based on a jackpot win of the first special symbol is executed, until a specific timing is reached during the jackpot game, or until the jackpot game ends, without executing a lottery for the second special symbol. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

The contents of the variable processing for each of the above-mentioned special symbols are configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate by setting a command indicating the contents, and the variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol has been forcibly stopped while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is being forcibly stopped, the third or fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be used to execute a variable performance during the forced stop.

In this way, even if the configuration is such that a variable performance is performed while the actual second special pattern is forcibly stopped using each pattern (third pattern, fourth pattern) that is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern on the third pattern display device 81, which is easy for the player to see, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special pattern variation has been forcibly stopped.

In the processing of S951, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203df is not set on, that is, that the first special pattern is not displayed as a jackpot pattern (S951: No in FIG. 126), the processing of S953 to S959 is executed, and then the processing proceeds to S960 described below. The processing of S953 to S959 is the same as each of the processing of S351 to S357 of the first special symbol change start processing (S258 in FIG. 120) described above, except that the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (S355), and the first special symbol change pattern selection processing (S356) are changed to the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (S958), and the second special symbol change pattern selection processing (S959), so a description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. The processes of S960 to S963 are the same as the processes of S358 to S361 of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120) described above, except that the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is changed to the special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl, so the explanation of these processes is omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, the gaming machine changes the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously, so by executing the same process when both special symbols start to change, it is possible to prevent problems such as the remaining number of time-saving periods not being subtracted for the other special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 127, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) described above, except that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and some other processes are added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) described above in the following respects. That is, in the process of S1051, which corresponds to the process of S451, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and in the processes of S1052 to S1061, which correspond to the processes of S452 to S461, the target is changed from special symbol 1 (first special symbol) to special symbol 2 (second special symbol), and the process executed when the special symbol lottery result is a miss has been changed. Since the other points are the same, their explanations will be omitted.

If it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special symbol 2 miss variation process is executed (S1062), and this process is terminated.

This special symbol 2 miss variation process (S1062) is a process that is executed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is other than a big win, i.e., a small win or a miss. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 128, but if the lottery result is a miss, a process similar to the process of S462 of the first special symbol big win determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) described above is executed, and if the lottery result is a small win, a process corresponding to a small win is executed.

Here, the contents of the special chart 2 outlier change processing (S1062) will be explained with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 outlier change processing (S1062).

In the special symbol 2 miss variation process (S1062), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result (lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol big win determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)) is a small win (S1151).

If it is determined in the processing of S1151 that a small win has been won (S1151: Yes), the small win flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is set to a small win (S1153), and then the small win symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1154), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1151 that the current lottery result is not a small win, i.e., a loss (S1151: No), the losing pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S1155), and this process is terminated.

As explained above, by setting the small win flag 203dg on when it is determined that a small win has been won in the special pattern 2 miss change process (S1062 in FIG. 128), which is executed as one process of the second special pattern change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), that is, the process executed at the timing when the special pattern change (lottery) starts, the process corresponding to the small win can be easily executed based on the setting status of the small win flag 203dg at the timing when the change of the second special pattern stops.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following respects. In the process of S1251, which corresponds to the process of S551, the special symbol 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special symbol 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), in the processes of S1252 to S1256 and S1258 to S1260, which correspond to the processes of S552 to S559, the special symbol 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special symbol 2 variation pattern command, and in the process of the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern selection process (S1257) is added. Since the other points are the same, detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 130, the contents of the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) executed in the second special pattern variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special pattern variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be explained.

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S1351). In this S1351 process, the determination is made based on the lottery result obtained in the S1057 process of the second special symbol big win determination process (see S959 in FIG. 127).

In the process of S1351, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S1351: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is then obtained (S1352), and a small win type is selected based on the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 (S1353). Note that in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since there is only one type of small win, a different small win type is not set based on the obtained value of the small win type counter C5. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set multiple small win types, a small win type selection table is provided in which different small win types are specified for the range of the obtained value of the small win type counter C5, and different small win types can be selected by the processes of S1352 and S1353.

As in this embodiment, even though there is only one type of small win, by configuring the processing of S1352 and S1353 to be used, even if the game specifications are changed during the development period of the pachinko machine 10, for example, the change can be easily accommodated.

After the process of S1353 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state is read (S1354), and a variation pattern for a small win (small win variation pattern) is selected based on the read variation pattern selection table and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1355). Then, a special chart 2 variation pattern command indicating the small win variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of S1351 determines that the current lottery result is not a small win (a miss) (S1351: No), the process for when the lottery result is a miss (S1357 to S1359) is executed. In the process of S1357, first, a variation pattern selection table according to the game state is read (S1357), a variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1358), a special chart 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S1359), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, the contents of the second special symbol change in progress process (S261), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change in progress process (S261). In this embodiment, since the first special symbol is configured not to win a small prize in the lottery, this second special symbol change in progress process (S261) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol change in progress process (see S255 in FIG. 123) in that the process of determining whether the flag (special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) that is set when a small prize is won (a small prize game is executed) with the other special symbol is set to on is omitted. Other than that, the process is the same except that the target of the process is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to win a small prize in the drawing of the first special symbol, a flag (for example, a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag) can be provided to indicate that a small prize has been won in the drawing of the first special symbol (that a small prize game will be executed), and in this second special symbol variation execution processing, processing similar to the first special symbol variation execution processing described above (see S255 in FIG. 123) can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the second special pattern change stop process (S263), which is one process of the special pattern change process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the second special pattern change stop process (S263). The second special pattern change stop process (S263) differs from the first special pattern change stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) described above in that the target of the process is changed from the first special pattern to the second special pattern, the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than a jackpot is changed, and the process of setting a flag to stop the change of the other special pattern is omitted.

That is, the differences are that the processing of S852 in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) has been deleted, the processing target of S851 and S853-S864 has been changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553-S1513), and if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S1551: No), the special symbol 2 miss stop processing (S1558) is executed. Since the other points are the same, detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the contents of the special symbol 2 miss stop processing (S1564) executed in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 132) will be explained. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 miss stop processing (S1564). This special symbol 2 miss stop processing (S1564) executes a process to stop the special symbol variation corresponding to the case where the lottery result obtained in the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than a jackpot (a small jackpot or a miss).

When the special pattern 2 miss stop process (S1564) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small win flag 203dg is set on (S1651), and if it is determined that the small win flag 203dg is set on (S1651: Yes), the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set on (S1652), and a special pattern 1 temporary stop command is set to indicate that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set on (S1653). The special pattern 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 1 temporary stop command, a display command is set to display the temporary stop mode to indicate that the first special pattern (special pattern 1) has been temporarily stopped (is being stopped) on the third pattern display device 81, and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process to display the temporary stop mode display of special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. By configuring it in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 133, the explanation will be continued. After the processing of S1653 is completed, a small win scenario (opening operation scenario for small win) corresponding to the small win game is set (S1654), the small win flag 203dg is set to OFF (S1655), win information indicating that a small win game is in progress (small win in progress) is stored in the game status storage area 203g (S1656), a special pattern 2 confirmation command is set to indicate that the second special pattern is stopped (confirmed display) with a pattern indicating a small win (small win pattern) (S1657), and the second special pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is stopped (confirmed display) with the small win pattern (S1658). Then, a time-saving update process (S1661 (S863)) is executed to perform processes such as subtracting the remaining number of time-saving times, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 203dg is set to OFF in the processing of S1651 (S1651: No), a special pattern 2 confirmation command is set to indicate that the second special pattern will be displayed (confirmed display) as a pattern indicating a miss (miss pattern) (S1659), and the second special pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is stopped (confirmed display) as a miss pattern (S1660). Then, the time-saving update processing is executed (S1661 (S863)), and this processing ends.

As for the time-saving update process (S1661 (S863)), the only difference is that the special chart 1 subtraction flag 203dk referenced in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time-saving update process (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG. 125 is changed to the special chart 2 subtraction flag 203dl, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. This makes it possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and increases the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a given time. This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, even if the first and second special symbols are displayed in a changing manner at the same time to play a lottery game, if a jackpot game occurs with either the first or second special symbol, the changing display of the other special symbol is stopped, allowing the player to concentrate on playing the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when a pattern indicating a jackpot (jackpot pattern) is stopped and displayed on either the first or second special pattern, the other special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missing pattern. However, the other special pattern may be temporarily stopped or the measurement of the change time may be interrupted and displayed as a change. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special pattern is stopped in a display or notification manner that lets the player know that it is temporarily stopped, so the player can know that the lottery game that was in the middle of changing display has not disappeared, and can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the start winning process 4 (S152), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this start winning process 4 (S152). Start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) is a process that determines whether a ball has entered either the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1645 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four for each of the special ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1645).

In addition, when the counter values acquired based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db. The start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be explained below.

In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special symbol ball entry port 64, which is the first start port (start winning) (S1751). Here, the ball's entry into the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special symbol ball entry port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the special symbol ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (S1751: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is obtained (S1752), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

In other words, it is determined whether the current number of reserved balls for the special ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not been stored to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S1753: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203dd is incremented by one (S1754), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved number of balls for the special ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special pattern) (S1755).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and are respectively reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area 203a of RAM 203 (S1756).

Next, the first pre-reading process is executed (S1757). This first pre-reading process (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da. In this embodiment, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da, that is, when the right to draw for the first special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the right to draw for the first special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to determine in advance the content of the right to draw for the second special pattern (winning information) when the right to draw for the first special pattern is newly acquired.

After executing the process of S1757, the process of S1758 is executed next. Also, if the process of S1751 determines that the ball has not entered the special ball entrance 64 (S1751: No), or if the process of S1753 determines that the number of reserved balls for the special ball entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit (S1753: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203dd is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1758.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is added, the first pre-reading process (S1757) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is determined to be the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1753 (S1753: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the special symbol ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first pre-reading process (S1757) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, the processes from S1758 to S1764 differ only in that the processes performed for the entry of a ball into the first starting hole (special symbol entry hole 64) in the processes from S1751 to S1757 are the same as those performed for the entry of a ball into the second ball entry hole 1645, and therefore detailed explanations will be omitted. Note that, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that a small prize can be won by drawing the second special symbol, the value of the small prize type counter C5 is also obtained in the process of S1763.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, we will explain the first look-ahead process (S1757), which is one process of the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134). FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this first look-ahead process (S1757).

In the first pre-read process (S1757 in FIG. 135), first, the various counter values, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage areas newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area that has the smallest winning order (S1822).

Then, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-read reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved storage area 203a) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the drawing (variation) of the first special symbol and the drawing (variation) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variation time set in correspondence with the drawing result of each special symbol is set to vary depending on the number of reserved memories (number of reserved symbols) at the time of drawing the special symbol, so that it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the variation (drawing) of each special symbol will begin.

If the result of the determination in the process of S1823 is a jackpot (a jackpot only in the low probability state, a jackpot only in the high probability state, or a jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), a first winning command is set indicating the conditions for winning a jackpot (the game state set at the time of the lottery) and the type of jackpot if won (S1824), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the processing of S1823 is not a jackpot (the special symbol is a miss whether in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S1823: No), a first winning command indicating a miss is set (S1825), and this processing ends.

The first winning command set in the processing of S1824 or S1825 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has different meanings depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of S1821 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S2401) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this embodiment, when the pre-reading process is executed, the winning/losing judgment result in the case of a high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/losing judgment result in the case of a low probability state of the special pattern are distinguished, and a winning command is set based on the result of each judgment. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to specify a judgment value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state, and to set a winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern only when that judgment value is read out.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved storage area 203a may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on that game state. In this case, the determination is possible by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, rather than varying the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the variation can be determined by determining the order of variation until the reserved balls start to vary based on the reserved and stored information.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved storage area 203a, a pre-reading process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the pre-reading process. However, without being limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved storage area 203a may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the second look-ahead process (S1764), which is one process of the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1764). The second look-ahead process (S1764 in FIG. 134) is a process in which the reserved data (winning information) based on the ball entering the first start port (special ball entry port 64) (start winning) is discriminated (read-ahead) in advance and various judgments are made, whereas the first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 133) described above is a process in which the target for judgment is changed from winning information based on the start winning at the first start port to winning information based on the start winning at the second start port (second ball entry port 1645). Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 137, the details of V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of this V passing process 4 (S153). V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment is different from the V passing process in the first embodiment (see S153 in FIG. 52) in that, when a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol and a V win occurs during the small win game, a process of setting the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm and the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk to OFF is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same symbols are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

In V passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and if it is determined that the V is in the valid period (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not a small win is occurring (S1571). If it is determined that a small win is occurring (S1571: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 described above are executed, and processing proceeds to S1572. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win is not occurring (S1571: No), processing of S1504 to S1506 and S1572 to S1575 is skipped, and processing proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1572, it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (S1572). If it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is on (S1572: Yes), a new time-saving state period is set after the end of the jackpot game awarded by this V winning, so the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to off (S1573). In this way, if a small jackpot is won in the final fluctuation of the time-saving game, a V winning occurs, and a jackpot is awarded, a new time-saving period is awarded. Therefore, by setting the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm to off in the event of a V winning, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which a new time-saving period is set and then the game immediately transitions to the normal game state.

After executing the process of S1572 or S1573, the process proceeds to S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574). In other words, it is determined whether the first special symbol is being changed in parallel with the change of the second special symbol, and the change of the first special symbol has not yet stopped and is in a temporary stopped state. If it is determined that the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575) and the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process skips S1575 and proceeds to S1509.

In this embodiment, the small prize is won by drawing the second special symbol. If the drawing of the first special symbol is being executed when the small prize is won, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. The variation of the temporarily stopped special symbol is resumed after the small prize game ends, but in this embodiment, a V may be won during the small prize game and a big prize may be awarded. The drawing of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped during the big prize game. The variation of the temporarily stopped special symbol is resumed after the big prize game ends, but in this embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted when the variation is stopped, so there is a problem that the remaining time reduction is reduced even for the variation that was temporarily stopped.

In this embodiment, if a V win occurs during a small win, the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time period is not subtracted when the temporarily stopped variation stops. Therefore, in addition to the specified period of time reduction, the player can also set the remaining variation time of this temporarily stopped symbol as the time period. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set a longer time period that is advantageous to the player, and to provide a longer period of enjoyment.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the other special symbol, the variation of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) as a miss. Furthermore, if a small jackpot is won, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, but this is not limited to this, and if a small jackpot is won, the variation of the other special symbol may be discarded. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation where a jackpot is won with the temporarily stopped variation after a jackpot game is awarded due to a V winning, and the player is given excessive benefits.

In addition, if a player wins a big jackpot with one special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player, the player can cancel the disadvantageous big jackpot fluctuation by winning a small jackpot with the other special symbol. This makes it possible to provide more diverse gameplay to players.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine changes the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and is configured to temporarily stop the other symbol when a small win is won. Then, if a V win occurs during the small win game and a big win is awarded, the temporarily stopped symbol resumes changing after the big win game ends. Also, in this embodiment, if the game state is in the time-saving state when the change starts, a flag indicating that the value of the time-saving counter is scheduled to be subtracted when the change starts is set to on, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated when the change stops.

Therefore, by setting the subtraction flag off when a V win occurs, the temporarily stopped special symbol resumes its fluctuation and stops, and the time-saving counter is not subtracted. In other words, since the short time period is not updated when the temporarily stopped symbol resumes its fluctuation and stops, the player can set the remaining fluctuation period of the temporarily stopped special symbol in addition to the previously set short time period. Therefore, the short time period that is advantageous to the player can be set to the longest possible value.

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot awarded by a V win is one, but the present invention is not limited to this and multiple types of jackpots may be provided. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide jackpot types that are advantageous to the player and jackpot types that are disadvantageous to the player. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while being interested not only in whether a V win will occur, but also in the type of jackpot that will be awarded.

In addition, in this embodiment, the system is configured so that only one type of small win can be won, but this is not limited to the above, and multiple types of small wins may be provided. Furthermore, the system may be configured so that a small win can also be won by drawing the first special pattern. In this way, by providing multiple types of small wins, the player can play the game while hoping for a small win that is more likely to result in a V win.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to change in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbols may be changed in accordance with the order in which the balls enter the ball entrance (so-called winning order change). When configured in this way, it is preferable to configure the degree of advantage of the type of jackpot to be won to be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, the player can play while hoping to win a jackpot when the lottery for the more advantageous special symbol is being held, thereby providing a tense game.

In this embodiment, if a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. However, by providing multiple types of small wins, it is possible to set small wins in which the variation of the first special symbol is discarded (forced to stop if it is a miss) separately from small wins in which the variation is temporarily stopped. In such a configuration, if the variation of the other special symbol results in a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, it is recommended to execute an effect that encourages the player to discard it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a variety of gameplay features to the player.

In this embodiment, there are two game states that can be set (normal state, time-saving state), but there may be three states (normal state, time-saving state, special probability state) or four states (normal state, time-saving state, special probability state, potential probability state). There may also be less than two states.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game is executed by aiming the game ball to flow down the left area of the game board 13 regardless of the game status, but this is not limited to this, and a game method that aims at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed. The game method may be switched based on the game status. Furthermore, when configured in this way, it is recommended to execute a guide display mode to show the player the current game method. This guide display mode allows the player to understand not only the game method but also the current game status.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of updating the time-saving state, i.e., the timing of subtracting the number of time-saving times, is different from the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is met, and a configuration is used in which the establishment of the end condition of the time-saving state is determined after updating the time-saving state, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to first determine whether the end condition of the time-saving state is met, and if the end condition is not met, the update process of the time-saving state is executed. Also, the process of subtracting the number of time-saving times is executed after the special drawing is executed, but it may also be configured to execute the special drawing after subtracting the number of time-saving times.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small jackpot is won in the final special pattern change during the time-saving state (special pattern change executed when the time-saving end condition is satisfied), the time-saving state is ended at the timing when the special pattern change stops. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when a small jackpot is won in the final special pattern change, the time-saving state may not end until the small jackpot game ends. In other words, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the switching condition (the result of the special pattern lottery is a small jackpot win) is satisfied at the timing of determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied, it is preferable to switch the timing of determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied (delay at the end of the small jackpot game). This makes it possible to change the period during which the time-saving state continues based on the result of the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state, so that the player can play with a sense of expectation until the end.

The above-mentioned switching conditions may be other than the above (winning a small jackpot). For example, when the time-saving end condition is met, a switching condition may be set such that a normal symbol variation is being performed or a normal symbol winning game is being performed at the timing when it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met, or a switching condition may be set such that specific information (winning information) is included in the winning information contained in the reserved special symbol or normal symbol at the timing when it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met. By providing multiple switching conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state will end, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Combination modification of the regular electricity winning device 640>
Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 138. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, a special electric operation port 643 is provided in the normal electric winning device 640, and a special electric operation port 643 is provided to execute a special feature winning game when a ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal winning game enters the special electric operation port 643. In addition, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, in order to solve the problem that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the problem that the motivation to play decreases due to the monotony of the game during the time-saving state, a plurality of special electric operation ports (special electric operation port 643, second special electric operation port 1643) are provided in the normal electric winning device 640, and a special feature winning game in which a V jackpot game is easily executed and a special feature winning game in which a V jackpot game is difficult to execute are executed according to the special electric operation port into which the ball has entered.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments described above, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted) when a game involving a per-unit feature is executed, thereby lengthening the time-saving state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to execute many games involving a per-unit feature during the time-saving state, and the game during the time-saving state becomes monotonous. In contrast, in the third embodiment described above, a V-type jackpot is selected based on the ball entering the special electric operation port 643, and depending on the selected V-type jackpot, one of the following patterns is executed: a pattern in which the special symbol variation being executed during the game involving a per-unit feature is interrupted, a pattern in which the special symbol variation is discarded, or a pattern in which the game is discarded and the time-saving state is terminated. This provides a new gameplay feature in which the player can select whether or not to execute a game involving a per-unit feature during the time-saving state, thereby preventing the game during the time-saving state from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the first to third embodiments described above, a special electric operation port 643 is provided in the regular electric winning device 640, and a role-winning game is executed when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643, whereas in the fourth embodiment, a second ball entry port 1645 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided in the regular electric winning device 640, and the gameplay similar to that of the first to third embodiments described above is realized with a so-called simultaneous variation type specification in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in parallel.

In contrast, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 138, it is based on the configuration of the normal electric winning device 640 (see FIG. 88) possessed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, but instead of the second special electric operating port 1643, a second ball entry port 1645 is provided, and it differs from the other embodiments in that it is configured so that a ball that enters the normal electric winning device 640 can enter the special electric operating port 643 or the second ball entry port 1645.

The V winning device 65 is configured to open in the same way for the small winning game, which is executed when a small winning is won in the second special pattern lottery, which is executed based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 1645, and the role winning game, which is executed based on a ball entering the special electric operation port 643.

By configuring it in this way, when the V winning device 65 is opened by a small win game, the second special pattern lottery is executed, and as in the fourth embodiment described above, the establishment elements of the accumulated time-saving end condition, which is the end condition of the time-saving state, are updated, whereas when the V winning device 65 is opened by a role-winning game, the elements related to the time-saving end condition are not updated. Therefore, since the number of times the V winning device 65 is opened does not match the number of times the establishment elements of the time-saving end condition are updated, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period until the time-saving state ends.

In this modified example, the time-saving state is ended under the same end condition as in the fourth embodiment described above. However, the invention is not limited to this and may be configured such that the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times a game involving a per-appearance device has been played reaches a specific number (e.g., 50 times). By configuring the game in this way, the player can play the game while predicting whether the time-saving end condition will be met first based on the drawing of the second special symbol or the time-saving end condition will be met first based on the game involving a per-appearance device.

In this case, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute a suggestion effect (for example, an effect suggesting the number of times until each time-saving end condition is met) to suggest to the player which of the time-saving end conditions that are met based on the lottery for the second special symbol and the time-saving end condition that is met based on the execution of a game that hits a role device is more likely to be met. By configuring in this way, the player can know the period until one of the time-saving end conditions is met, and can be made to feel happy or sad about the destination of the ball that has won the normal power winning device 640.

As shown in FIG. 138, in this modified example, a special electric operation port 643 and a second ball entry port 1645 are provided in the regular electric winning device 640, but this is not limited to this, and a second special electric operation port 1643 may also be provided, and the ball that enters the regular electric winning device 640 may be configured to enter any of the three mentioned above.

Furthermore, when using the configuration of this modified example, the processing contents for the special pattern change being executed may be different between when a small win game is executed based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 and when a special feature win game is executed based on a ball entering the special electric operation entrance 643. For example, when a small win game is executed, it is preferable to configure it so that it is easier to discard the special pattern change being executed than when a special feature win game is executed, and when a special feature win game is executed, it is easier to interrupt the special pattern change being executed than when a small win game is executed.

In this modified example, a ball may enter the special electric operation port 643 while the first and second special symbol variations are being executed. In this case, both the first and second special symbol variations are suspended. After the game that hits the reel ends, the suspended first and second special symbol variations are resumed. If the second special symbol variation after resumption results in a small jackpot win, the first special symbol variation being executed is suspended or discarded when the small jackpot game is executed based on the small jackpot win.

In this manner, in this modified example, which is configured to allow three types of games to be played simultaneously: the first special symbol change (lottery), the second special symbol change (lottery), and the ball entering the special electric operation port 643, it is possible to interrupt the first special symbol change, which tends to have a longer change time than the second special symbol change, during the time-saving state at multiple triggers. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise regarding the timing and duration at which the first special symbol change is interrupted during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this modified example, the ball that enters the regular electric winning device 640 is configured to enter the special electric operation port 643 or the second ball entry port 1645, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play by aiming for the second ball entry port 1645 or the special electric operation port 643. Specifically, the special electric operation port 643 may be provided in the regular electric winning device 640, and the second ball entry port 1645 may be provided in the right area of the game board 13 (see Figure 2). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of selecting a game method.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 139 to Fig. 143. The fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the method of setting various commands for outputting the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 side is different, and a part of the control processing executed when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives various commands output from the main control device 110 is changed, but otherwise is the same. The same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, in order to variably set the presentation mode of the presentation (V rush) corresponding to the special pattern change during the time-saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) according to the remaining period of the time-saving state (remaining period of the special pattern change executed during the time-saving state), the voice lamp control device 113 stores the period until the time-saving state ends, i.e., the number of time-saving times (number of times the special pattern changes) set as the end condition of the time-saving state, based on information (state command) output from the main control device 110 at the time the time-saving state is set, and when information (change pattern command) indicating the start of the special pattern change is received, a process is executed to update the number of time-saving times, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the remaining period of the time-saving state.

In this manner, in the first embodiment, in which the timing for updating the number of time-saving times (when the special pattern starts to change) is different from the timing for determining whether the time-saving condition has been met (when the special pattern stops changing), the remaining time in the time-saving state can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side without setting a dedicated command on the main control device 110 side, that is, by using only commands that indicate the content of the game using the special pattern lottery, such as a state command that is set when the game state is changed and a change pattern command that is set when the special pattern starts to change, and the like, it is possible to set a presentation according to the passage of time during the time-saving state.

However, in the control content used in the first embodiment described above, the update status of the game status in the time-saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, which does not have a backup function. Therefore, for example, if the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (a power outage occurs) during the period when the time-saving state is set and then the power supply is resumed, the various information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the voice lamp control device 113 side is cleared (initialized), and there is a problem that the voice lamp control device 113 side cannot determine the update status of the game status in the time-saving state.

In contrast to this, in the fifth embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to be able to set a command (time-saving count command) indicating the result of updating the number of times the time-saving count has been performed when executing a process to start the special pattern fluctuation (process to set a fluctuation pattern command), and is configured to set a command (time-saving continuation command) for indicating the result of determining whether the time-saving state has ended when executing a process to stop the special pattern fluctuation that is currently being performed (process to set a confirmation command).

The variation pattern command and the time-saving count command are configured to be output at the same timing, and the confirmation command and the time-saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Furthermore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command, it determines whether a time-saving count command has also been received, and the current time-saving status can be determined based on the determination result. Furthermore, when a confirmation command is received, it determines whether a time-saving continuation command has also been received, and the current time-saving status can be determined based on the determination result.

By configuring it in this manner, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the status of the time-saving state based on the combination of commands set by the main control device 110 and received by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if a power outage occurs while the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the status of the time-saving state based on the commands output from the main control device 110.

In addition, because the time-saving state is determined by a combination of commands received at the same time, the number of types of commands set in the main control unit 110 can be reduced compared to when individual commands are set on the main control unit 110 side to indicate the time-saving state, and the processing load of the control process on the main control unit 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 139 to 141, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth embodiment that are different from the first embodiment described above will be described. This fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that a special symbol start process 5 (see S235 in Figure 139) is provided instead of the special symbol change start process (see S205 in Figure 41), a special symbol change stop process 5 (see S238 in Figure 140) is provided instead of the special symbol change stop process (see S208 in Figure 45), and a normal symbol change process 5 (see S136 in Figure 141) is provided instead of the normal symbol change process (see S106 in Figure 48), but otherwise is the same. The same process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, a process (see S205 in FIG. 139) is executed to update (subtract) the number of time-saving times (value of time-saving counter 203h) when the variation of special symbols starts, and a process (see S208 in FIG. 45) is executed to determine whether the conditions for terminating the time-saving state are met when the variation of special symbols stops.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, in order to manage the status of the time-saving state on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the remaining period of the time-saving state is configured to be able to be determined based on the status command (status command set in the processing of S1916 in FIG. 56) output from the main control device 110 and the fluctuation pattern command (special chart fluctuation pattern command set in S506 in FIG. 43).

In contrast to this, in the fifth embodiment, when the special pattern starts to change or when the special pattern stops changing, in addition to commands indicating the start or stop of the special pattern change, various commands are set to indicate the status of the time-saving state (remaining number of time-saving times, etc.), so that even if the information for managing the status of the time-saving state stored on the voice lamp control device 113 side is erased (if the information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased due to a power outage, etc.), the voice lamp control device 113 side is able to grasp the status of the time-saving state (remaining number of time-saving times) based on the various commands output from the main control device 110 side.

First, the contents of special pattern change start process 5 (S235) will be explained with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of special pattern change start process 5 (S235). This special pattern change start process 5 (S235) is different from the special pattern change start process of the first embodiment described above (see S205 in FIG. 41) in the process for updating the time-saving state at the start of the special pattern change, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the first embodiment described above, since there is no need to output information indicating the processing contents (update result) of the processing for updating the time-saving state executed by the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, processing (updating the value of the time-saving counter 203h and setting the time-saving end flag 203j) is executed to temporarily store whether or not the current special pattern change is the final change in the time-saving state (stored until the currently executed special pattern change is stopped and displayed).

In contrast to this, in the fifth embodiment, a command is set to indicate the number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times) for the special pattern, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113.

The processing contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 139. First, the processing from S301 to S308 is executed, which is the same as the special symbol variation start process of the first embodiment described above (see S205 in FIG. 41). Then, if it is determined in the processing of S308 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, that the time-saving state is currently in progress (S308: Yes), then the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S372).

If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (is 1 or more), the value of the time-saving counter 203h after subtraction, i.e., the time-saving number command indicating the remaining number of time-saving times, is set (S373), and this process ends. The time-saving number command set in the process of S373 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 at the same timing as the special pattern change pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43).

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this fifth embodiment, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether a time-saving count command has also been received when a variation pattern command (special pattern variation pattern command) is received during the time-saving state, and to determine the number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times) corresponding to the current special pattern variation based on the result of this determination.

In addition, in this fifth embodiment, the process of S372 in FIG. 139 is configured to set the time-saving count command only when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h after updating (subtraction) is 1 or more (S372: No). Therefore, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, if a variation pattern command (special pattern variation pattern command) is received during the time-saving state but a time-saving count command is not received at the same time, it can be determined that this is the final variation of the special pattern in the time-saving state.

Returning to FIG. 139, the explanation will continue. In the process of S372, if it is determined that the updated value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, if the special pattern change executed this time is the final change in the time-saving state, the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311) as in the first embodiment described above, and this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, in addition to when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more), the high probability state of the normal pattern is set while the time-saving end flag 203j is set to on, even if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 at the timing when the special pattern starts to change (S308: Yes), a process of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h is always executed, so that the control process can be standardized.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, if the time-saving counter 203h value after subtraction (updating) is greater than 0 (1 or more), a time-saving count command is set, and if the time-saving counter 203h value after subtraction (updating) is 0, a time-saving count command is not set. In addition, the time-saving count command is set in the same process (special symbol fluctuation start process) as the process (see S506 in FIG. 43) for setting the special symbol fluctuation pattern command (special symbol fluctuation pattern command), and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 at the same timing in the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

By configuring it in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command while the time-saving state is set, it can determine whether or not the special pattern variation executed this time is the final variation of the time-saving state by determining whether or not a time-saving count command has also been received. Also, if a time-saving count command has also been received, it can determine the remaining period of the time-saving state (remaining number of time-saving counts) that will be updated by executing the special pattern variation this time.

In addition, if the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the update becomes 0, that is, if the special pattern change executed this time is the final change in the time-saving state, the time-saving count command is not set, so that the voice lamp control device 113 determines that it is the final change in the time-saving state if it receives a change pattern command when the time-saving state is set and does not also receive a time-saving count command, and sets the performance mode corresponding to the final change in the time-saving state. In this way, when the final change of the special pattern in the time-saving state (final time-saving change) is executed, instead of setting a time-saving count command indicating 0 remaining time-saving times as the time-saving count command, by configuring it not to set a time-saving count command, if the time-saving count command set by the main control device 110 cannot be received, for example, if the command cannot be received normally due to noise, etc., the performance at the time of the final time-saving change will be executed.

Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions being 0, which is less than the number of remaining time reductions that is actually set, without using dedicated performance data in the case where the command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 cannot be received normally, and it is possible to execute a performance that does not cause discomfort to the player while reducing the processing load on the pachinko machine 10.

In this embodiment, the only time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is the time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, four times). However, without being limited to this, for example, in addition to an end condition that is met based on the number of times the special pattern changes, an end condition that is met based on the result of the special pattern lottery (an end condition that is met when a specific lottery result (for example, a small win) is won a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the special pattern lottery) may be set.

In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state, which of the multiple termination conditions is met varies depending on the game content of the player, so it is necessary to determine the update status until the termination condition is met for each termination condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the final change in the time-saving state is executed, the time-saving count command is not set. Therefore, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving termination conditions that can be met is met, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily determine that the current special pattern change is the final change in the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of special pattern change stop processing 5 (S238) will be explained with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of special pattern change stop processing 5 (S238) in this fifth embodiment. This special pattern change stop processing 5 (S238) differs from the special pattern change stop processing in the first embodiment described above (see S208 in FIG. 45) in that the update contents of the time-saving state when the special pattern change is stopped are different, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the special symbol variation stop process 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same processes of S801 and S802 as those of the special symbol variation stop process in the first embodiment described above (see S208 in FIG. 45) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S802 that the time-saving end flag 203j is not on (S802: No), it is next determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (S871). If it is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation stopped and displayed this time is not the final variation of the time-saving process (S871: Yes), a time-saving continuation command indicating that the time-saving state will continue is set (S872), and the same processes of S809 and S810 as those of the special symbol variation stop process in the first embodiment described above (see S208 in FIG. 45) are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S871 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S871: No), i.e., if the current game state is normal, the process of S872 is skipped and the process proceeds to S809. Also, if it is determined in the process of S802 that the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON, i.e., if it is determined that the special pattern variation stopped and displayed this time is the final variation of the time-saving (S802: Yes), the processes of S804 and S805 are executed, which are the same as the special pattern variation stop process in the first embodiment described above (see S208 in FIG. 45), and then the processes of S809 and S810 are executed to end this process.

If it is determined in the process of S801 that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processes of S806 to S810 are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol change stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping the special symbol change (confirmed display) is configured to set a special symbol determination command and a time-saving continuation command. The special symbol determination command and the time-saving continuation command set in the special symbol change stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) are output to the voice lamp control device 113 at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special symbol determination command while the time-saving state is set, it determines whether it has also received a time-saving continuation command, and based on the determination result, it determines whether the special symbol change that is currently stopped and displayed is the final change in the time-saving state (final time-saving change) and sets the presentation mode.

Specifically, when the time-saving state is set, if the voice lamp control device 113 receives a special pattern confirmation command and a time-saving continuation command at the same timing, a presentation mode is set to indicate that the time-saving state will continue, and if only the special pattern confirmation command is received, a presentation mode is set to indicate that the time-saving state will end. In this way, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the current status of the time-saving state by a combination of multiple commands output from the main control device 110 at the same timing, the number of types of commands set by the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when individual commands are set by the main control device 110 to indicate the status of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, the special pattern determination command and the time-saving continuation command are set within the special pattern variation stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140), but it is sufficient that each command is output at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55), and it is sufficient that the special pattern determination command and the time-saving continuation command can each be set within the 4 millisecond interval in which the external output process (S1801) is executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55).

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control unit 110, various commands set during the period since the previous external output process was executed (4 milliseconds) are configured to be output all at once (as serial data) to the voice lamp control unit 113, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a special drawing confirmation command is set, the output of the special drawing confirmation command may be put on hold until the external output process (see S1801) has been executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to output the special drawing confirmation command and the time-saving continuation command to the voice lamp control unit 113 at the same timing even if they are not set within the same process.

Next, the contents of normal pattern change process 5 (S136) will be explained with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal pattern change process 5 (S136). This normal pattern change process 5 (S136) differs from the normal pattern change process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) in that the process for determining whether the current game state is a high probability state for normal patterns has been changed, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or greater) and the state in which the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON are managed as information indicating a high probability state of a normal pattern, which differs from the first embodiment in which only the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or greater) is managed as information indicating a high probability state of a normal pattern.

In other words, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented until it becomes 0 in the special pattern variation start process 5 (S235 in FIG. 139), thereby simplifying the update process of the time-saving counter 203h, and the difference is that even if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented to 0, the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON in order to continue the high probability state of the normal pattern for the period until the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when normal symbol change process 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the same processes of S1101 to S1108 as those of the normal symbol change process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1108: No), it is determined whether the time-saving end flag 203j is set to on, that is, whether the final time-saving change of the special symbol is in progress (S1171). If it is determined that it is set to on (S1171: Yes), since the normal symbol is in a high probability state, the same process of S1109 as those of the normal symbol change process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) is executed, and then the processes of S1111 to S1114 are executed, and this process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S1171 that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to on (S1171: No), since the current state is a low probability state of a normal pattern (normal state), the process of S1110 to S1114 is executed, which is the same as the normal pattern change process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1102 that the normal symbol is changing (S1102: Yes), the process of S1115 to S1118 is executed, which is the same as the normal symbol change process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48), and if it is determined in the process of S1118 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (S1118: Yes), the operation of the time-saving normal symbol winning scenario is set (S1120), the start of the opening and closing control of the electric role is set (S1121), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1118, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1118: No), it is next determined whether the time-saving end flag 203j is set to on (S1172). If it is determined that it is set to on (S1172: Yes), since the current state is in a high probability state of normal symbols, the same processes of S1120 and S1121 as those of the normal symbol fluctuation process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed, and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S1172, if it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to on (S1172: No), since the current state is in a low probability state of normal symbols, the same processes of S1119 and S1121 as those of the normal symbol fluctuation process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In other words, in this fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for statically displaying the lottery result for the normal symbol, or the content of the normal symbol winning game (opening pattern of the electric device 640a) executed when a win occurs in the lottery for the normal symbol (normal symbol lottery) is configured to be set differently according to the probability state of the normal symbol, and in order to determine the probability state of the normal symbol, the setting status of the time-saving end flag 203j is referenced in addition to the value of the time-saving counter 203h. By configuring in this way, the probability state of the normal symbol can be appropriately determined.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 142 and Fig. 143, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment differs from the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that the special chart change start process 5 (see S4254 in Fig. 142) is executed instead of the special chart change start process (see S4204 in Fig. 62), and the stop related process 5 (see S4265 in Fig. 143) is executed instead of the stop related process (see S4215 in Fig. 65), and is otherwise the same. Detailed description of the same processing contents will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, a type of command output from the main control device 110 is added to the first embodiment described above, and the situation during the time-saving state (remaining number of time-saving times) can be determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110. By configuring in this way, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like during the time-saving state and data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased, an appropriate presentation mode can be set according to the actual situation of the time-saving state (remaining number of time-saving times) after the power supply is restored.

First, the contents of special chart change start process 5 (S4254) will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of special chart change start process 5 (S4254). This special chart change start process 5 (S4254) is a process that is executed when a special chart change pattern command is received in the command discrimination process (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and differs from the special chart change start process of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62) in that the processing contents during the time-saving state have been changed, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When special chart change start process 5 (S4254) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as those of the special chart change start process of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62) are executed, and this process ends. Note that in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state, that is, if a special chart change pattern command is received while the time-saving state is set (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether the currently received commands include a time-saving count command (S4351).

In this embodiment, the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 60) is configured to output commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 using serial data capable of storing multiple commands. Therefore, when a special pattern change pattern command and a time-saving count command are set in the same process in the special pattern change start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main control unit 110, at least the special pattern change pattern command and the time-saving count command are stored in the same serial data and output to the voice lamp control unit 113.

In the process of S4351, it is determined whether the currently received command includes a time-saving count command, i.e., whether the time-saving count command was also included in the serial data in which the special pattern change pattern command was stored (S4351). If it is determined that the time-saving count command is included (S4351: Yes), the time-saving state is set and the special pattern change corresponding to the currently received special pattern change pattern command is not the final change in the time-saving state (final time-saving change), so a display command is set to indicate that the time-saving state is in progress (S4306), and the same processes of S4306 to S4308 as the special pattern change start process of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4351 that the received command does not include a time-saving count command (S4351: No), the special pattern change corresponding to this special pattern change pattern command is the final change in the time-saving mode, so a display command indicating the final change in the time-saving mode is set (S4352), and the process proceeds to the process of S4307 described above, after which the process of S4308 is executed and this process ends.

By configuring it in this way, when a special chart variation pattern command is received during the time-saving state, the status of the time-saving state (remaining number of time-saving times) can be easily determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side by determining the type of command received simultaneously with the received special chart variation pattern command.

Next, the contents of stop-related process 5 (S4265) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop-related process 5 (S4265). This stop-related process 5 (S4265) differs from the stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65) in that the processing contents executed when a special drawing confirmation command is received have been changed. All other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted with the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When stop-related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first it is determined whether a special drawing confirmation command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that a special drawing confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), the same processes as S4602 to S4611 in the stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that a special chart determination command has been received (S4601: Yes), it is then determined whether a time-saving continuation command has been received (S4631), and if it is determined that a time-saving continuation command has been received (S4631: Yes), a display command for stopping the fluctuation indicating that the time-saving continuation is continuing is set (S4632), and processing proceeds to S4602.

If it is determined in the processing of S4631 that the time-saving continuation command has not been received, it is then determined whether the time-saving end command has been received (S4633), and if it is determined that the time-saving end command has been received (S4633: yes), a display command for stopping the fluctuation, indicating the end of the time-saving state, is set.

In this way, when a special pattern confirmation command is received, a time-saving continuation command or a time-saving end command can be received at the same time. Therefore, by executing stop-related process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), the display mode (presentation mode) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed and set depending on whether a time-saving continuation command is received, a time-saving end command is received, or neither command is received. Therefore, the process for setting the display mode for stopping the variation that is executed when a special pattern confirmation command is received, and the process for setting the display mode for showing the time-saving state (remaining number of time-savings) can be executed within the same process, thereby reducing the processing load of the control process.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 144 to Fig. 155. In the first embodiment described above, the player is made to play a special game (aim for a ball to enter the special electric operation port 643 provided in the normal electric winning device 640 opened in the normal winning game) in response to the normal winning game executed when the normal pattern is selected by lottery, and during the special game (within the period when the V winning device 65 is opened), the player is made to play a special game (special electric game) aiming to play a big win game (V big win game) by making the ball enter the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65.

The time-saving state in which the special electric game is played is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is played a predetermined number of times (4 or 15 times) (until the special symbol fluctuation stops for the predetermined number of times), or until a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery before the predetermined number of times is reached (until the special symbol stops to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot). The longer the time for which the special symbol fluctuates during the time-saving state, the longer the period during which the time-saving state is set (short time period), and the more times the regular symbol lotteries are played during the short time period can be increased.

Furthermore, when a special symbol win game is executed as a result of a ball entering the special electric operation port 643 during a normal symbol win game, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol change (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change) is configured to be resumed after the special symbol win game or the jackpot game (V jackpot game) ends, that is, when the conditions for executing a new special symbol change are met.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the length of the execution period (time period) of the special electric game varies depending on the change time of the special symbol change and the interruption period due to the game with the perk, so that the player playing the special electric game can play with enthusiasm while hoping to select the longest possible change time for the special symbol change and to play many games with the perk.

However, during special electric play, for example, during the period when the normal symbols are changing or during a normal winning game when the ball cannot (is difficult to) enter the normal electric winning device 640, the game cannot be played with the winning device and the time for the special symbol change is subtracted during this period (closed period of the electric device 640a), so although this is the period during which the electric device 640a is open during a normal winning game when the ball can be played with the winning device and the time for the special symbol change is subtracted, this is a disadvantageous period for the player compared to the period during which the game can be played with the winning device.

The game with the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted when either of the following end conditions is met: a winning end condition is met when the number of winning balls in the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (three balls), or a time end condition is met when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game with the special symbol. The game with the special symbol ends when either of the end conditions is met depending on the game content (whether or not a ball is fired) by the player during the game with the special symbol.

In other words, in the first embodiment described above, the game has a feature in which the player can select which end condition to establish for the ongoing game with a winning feature during the special electric game, taking into account the fluctuation status of the normal symbols and the game status of the normal winning game. By configuring it in this way, the length of the period during which the disadvantageous period (the period during which the normal symbols fluctuate and the period during which the electric feature 640a in the normal winning game is closed) during the special electric game described above overlaps with the execution period of the game with a winning feature can be changed depending on the player's skill, making it possible to motivate the player to play.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, since multiple end conditions are set, for example, even when a game is played to achieve the winning end condition, the ball may not enter the V winning device 65 as expected and the time end condition may be achieved, or even when a game is played to achieve the time end condition, a ball that was previously fired may enter the V winning device 65 and the winning end condition may be achieved, resulting in a problem in which the player is unable to achieve the end condition he or she desires.

In contrast to this, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition for the game with a special feature. In other words, if the winning end condition is selected, the time end condition will not be met even if the period during which the time end condition can be met has elapsed, and if the time end condition is selected, the winning end condition will not be met even if the number of wins in the V winning device 65 reaches the number during which the winning end condition can be met. With this configuration, the game with a special feature can be ended when the end condition desired by the player is met, so that the player can play the special electric game more proactively.

In the sixth embodiment, when the winning end condition is selected, the game is not ended based on the time elapsed during the game, and when the time end condition is selected, the game is not ended based on the number of balls entering the V winning device 65 during the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the winning end condition is selected, a forced time end condition may be set to be established when a time (e.g., 10 seconds) longer than the elapsed time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) set as the normal time end condition has elapsed, or when the time end condition is selected, a forced winning end condition may be set to be established when a number of winnings (e.g., 10) greater than the number of winnings (e.g., 3) set as the normal winning end condition has been reached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being played for a long time.

First, referring to FIG. 144, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this sixth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 in this sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2) in that it is provided with new operating means (switch button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) that can be operated by the player, but is otherwise the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided to the right of the return button 43 provided on the ball loan operation unit 40 (the right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144), and a first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided to the right of the upper tray 17 (the right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). When the player presses the switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, or the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter also referred to as the end condition switching button group 22z), a detection switch (not shown) detects the press and outputs the detection result to the input/output port 205 (see FIG. 21) of the main control device 110.

Specifically, when the switching button 22za is pressed, a detection switch for the switching button (not shown) detects the pressing of the switching button 22za, when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, a detection switch for the first selection button (not shown) detects the pressing of the first selection button 22zb, and when the second selection button 22zc is pressed, a detection switch for the second selection button (not shown) detects the pressing of the second selection button 22zc, and each detection switch is configured to output the detection result to the main control device 110.

In other words, the detection switch for the switching button, the detection switch for the first selection button, and the detection switch for the second selection button are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG. 21.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the above-mentioned end condition switching button group 22z is provided approximately 10 cm away from the frame button 22. By configuring it in this manner, in order to make the player interested in the various effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, an operation effect is executed using the frame button 22, and when the player is asked to operate the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the end condition switching button group 22z.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operation means for presentation (frame button 22) and an operation means that affects game performance (end condition switching button group 22z), and is configured so that the player can freely select the content in terms of both presentation and game performance. This makes it possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

<About the content of the performance in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 145 and 146, the characteristic effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, a selection effect for making the player operate the end condition switching button group, and a switching effect for showing the result of the player's operation of the end condition switching button group can be executed.

First, the display contents of the ending screen in a jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 145(a). FIG. 145(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the jackpot ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145(a) differs from the jackpot ending screen in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 12(a)) in that a display mode for encouraging the player to operate the switch button 22za has been added, but is otherwise the same. The same display contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 displays the text "After the big win, the V-rush will start!!", clearly indicating to the player that the game will transition to the V-rush mode, which indicates that the time-saving state will be set after the big win game ends. The main display area Dm displays the comment "Get 40 seconds of V-rush period" with the remaining time period mode 801 for indicating the period during which the time-saving state set after the big win game ends is "40 seconds". Note that the reserved memory status of the special symbol when the display screen of FIG. 145(a) is displayed (see FIG. 145(c)) is the same as the reserved memory status of the special symbol when the display screen of FIG. 12(a) of the first embodiment described above is displayed (see FIG. 12(c)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, a display area HR20 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (the lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 145), and a comment "Press button to select end condition" and an icon resembling the switch button 22za are displayed as a display mode to encourage the user to operate the switch button 22za.

In the sixth embodiment, the player can select the end condition of the game with a per-game bonus by operating (pressing) the switch button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game with a per-game bonus is selectable when a jackpot game is executed, and the end condition of the game with a per-game bonus cannot be switched during the time-saving state (V rush) that is set after the jackpot game ends.

This configuration prevents the frequent switching of the end conditions of the game with a special feature depending on the game situation during the V-Rush, i.e., the changing status of the special symbols and the changing status of the normal symbols, which can prevent the player from being presented with an overly advantageous game situation. In addition, since the end conditions of the game with a special feature can be selected at the timing when the game of making the ball enter the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game ends and before the special electric game is executed, the game of shooting the ball and the act of selecting the end conditions do not overlap, providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the end condition of the game per reel can be selected while the time-saving state period (40 seconds) set after the end of the jackpot game is notified, so that the player can select the end condition of the game per reel while grasping the remaining time period mode 801 displayed on the jackpot ending screen. Specifically, when the display mode of the remaining time period mode 801 indicates that the time-saving state period is short (for example, 40 seconds), the winning end condition is selected as the end condition of the game per reel, and the game period of the game per reel is arbitrarily adjusted to aim for a special electric game in which the period for interrupting the special pattern variation is efficiently set, and when the display mode of the remaining time period mode 801 indicates that the time-saving state period is long (for example, 200 seconds), the time end condition is selected, and the number of balls that enter the V winning device 65 in one game per reel is increased, so that a special electric game in which the amount of benefits (number of winning balls) per unit time is increased can be aimed for.

In the sixth embodiment, the player is allowed to select the end conditions of the game with a special feature while the ending screen of the big win game is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player may be allowed to select the end conditions of the game with a special feature at any time during the big win game.

The game may be configured so that the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature can be selected even when the standby screen (demo screen), which is displayed when the time-saving state is in effect and no special symbol variation is being performed, is displayed, or the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature can be selected while the game with a per-unit feature is being performed. Even in such cases, the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature can be selected at a timing when the remaining time (time period) of the time-saving state is not being subtracted, allowing the player to select the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature while having ample time to spare.

On the other hand, it may be possible to configure the game so that the end conditions for the game per feature can be selected only during the period in which the remaining time (time period) of the time-saving state is being subtracted, which differs from the technical concept of the sixth embodiment. By configuring it in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time (time period) of the time-saving state is being subtracted, the player can choose whether to focus on playing the special electric game or to perform an operation to select the end conditions for the game per feature. This allows the player to play while predicting the future game content, which increases the interest of the game.

When the player presses the switch button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the selection screen that allows the player to select the end condition of the game per reel will be explained. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed as the end condition selection screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the detection switch for the switching button (not shown) detects that the switching button 22za has been pressed, the detection result is output to the main control device 110. The main control device 110 sets a command (switching command) indicating that the switching button 22za has been pressed, and the set command (switching command) is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55). Then, based on receiving the switching command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b).

The display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the game with a per-reel hit will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 145(b). A comment "Please select the end condition of the game with a per-reel hit" is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm. By visually checking this comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is the screen for selecting the end condition of the game with a per-reel hit.

In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to multiple end conditions selectable by the player are partitioned and formed, and the contents (contents for achieving the end conditions) of the multiple end conditions (winning end condition, time end condition) are displayed. Specifically, the display area HR21 displays the winning end condition associated with the end condition of the game where a reel hits, and the display area HR22 displays the time end condition associated with the end condition of the game where a reel hits.

In the display area HR21, the comment "The game ends when three balls enter the V attacker" is displayed as a requirement for achieving the winning end condition, and "Winning end" is displayed in the display area HR21a to indicate the target end condition. In addition, an icon imitating the first selection button 22zb (a circle with the number 1) is displayed as a guide display mode 871 to guide the player to the selection button to be operated when selecting the winning end condition.

On the other hand, the display area HR22 displays the comment "It will end 1.6 seconds after the start of the perk" as a requirement for the time end condition to be met, and "Time End" is displayed in the display area HR22a to indicate the target end condition. In addition, an icon imitating the second selection button 22zc (a circle with the number 2) is displayed as a guide display mode 872 to guide the player to the selection button to be operated when selecting the time end condition.

Furthermore, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and displays the word "time" to indicate the type of end condition currently set as the end condition for the game with a per-game bonus. That is, FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which a time end condition is set as the end condition for the game with a per-game bonus. Note that if a winning end condition is set as the end condition for the game with a per-game bonus, the word "win" is set in the display area HR23. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays a comment "Select with the button" as a guide display mode to guide the player to the operation to be performed to select the end condition for the game with a per-game bonus, and an icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is to be operated (pressed).

By displaying such a selection screen, the player can easily select while understanding the contents of the termination conditions of the game per reel. Note that, in the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b), when a selection screen that allows the selection of the termination conditions of the game per reel is displayed, information suggesting the length of the period of the time-saving state (time-saving period) that is set after the end of the big win game (for example, the remaining time-saving period mode 801 shown in FIG. 145(a)) is not displayed. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured so that the remaining time-saving period mode 801 is displayed while the selection screen is displayed. This makes it easier to select the termination conditions of the game per reel while referring to the length of the period of the time-saving state that is set immediately after.

When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the termination condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed, the first selection button detection switch detects that the first selection button 22zb has been operated (pressed), and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110. Then, in the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, a process based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb (a process for storing the selected termination condition) is executed, and a command (operation command) is set to indicate that the first selection button 22zb has been validly operated.

When an operation command is set in the control processing of the main control device 110, the operation command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55), and the voice lamp control device 113 sets the display mode after the end condition is selected based on the information contained in the received operation command (information indicating the type of selection button that was operated). Here, an example of a display screen displayed after the end condition is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed after the winning end condition is selected as the end condition for the game with a per-game bonus.

When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning end condition is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146(a), a display area corresponding to the selected end condition (winning end condition) is formed over the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the word "Confirm" is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm to indicate that the end condition selection has been completed. Then, the comment "The winning end will occur from the next winning combination" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide to inform the player of the timing at which the current selection result will be reflected, and the word "Win" is displayed in the display area HR23 to indicate that the currently set end condition is the winning end condition.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, the end condition of the game per reel can be selected multiple times within the period in which the end condition of the game per reel can be selected, and the end condition selected at the time when the period in which the end condition of the game per reel can be selected has elapsed is set as the end condition of the game per reel. Therefore, even if the player selects the wrong end condition, the end condition can be selected again as long as it is within the period in which the end condition of the game per reel can be selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state in which the end condition of the game with a per-game feature can be selected, an operation command is set to indicate that a selection button has been operated and the type of selection button that was operated, and when the ending period of the big win game ends, i.e., when the period in which the end condition of the game with a per-game feature can be selected ends, a command (end condition command) indicating the end condition of the game with a per-game feature that was finally selected is set.

In other words, since a player may select an end condition multiple times during the period when the end condition for the game per reel can be selected, only the operation of each selection button is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display mode according to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and only the end condition finally selected is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary commands from being output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

When the big win game ends and the time-saving state is set, as shown in FIG. 146(b), a display mode indicating that a V-rush has started is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during a V-rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is a display screen displayed in the same situation (see FIG. 146(c)) as the situation in which the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) of the first embodiment described above is displayed (see FIG. 12(c)), and is the same as the first embodiment described above except that a display area HR23 is formed to show the currently set end condition of the game per reel. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), the display screen during the V rush displays the word "Winning" to indicate that the winning end condition is set as the end condition of the game with the per-game feature. This configuration makes it possible to inform the player of the end condition of the game with the per-game feature executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown in the figure, this display area HR23 is configured to be displayed at all times during the V rush period, so that the player can easily understand the end condition of the game with the per-game feature even during the game with the per-game feature. When the end condition is displayed during the game with the per-game feature in this manner, it is preferable to display the update status of the elements for establishing the end condition (the number of winning balls into the V attacker (V winning device 65) when the winning end condition is set, and the elapsed time since the game with the per-game feature started when the time end condition is set) and the value at which the end condition is established on the display surface. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the game with the per-game feature from suddenly ending, confusing the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 147. Fig. 147 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 147, the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see Fig. 29) in that a termination condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The end condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the game that hits the special feature selected by the player. When it is determined in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) that a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated, the end condition corresponding to the operation is stored. When the big win game ends, the stored end condition is read out and is referred to when setting the end condition command that corresponds to the read out end condition. It is also read out when a special feature game is executed, and the special feature game is executed based on the read out end condition.

In the sixth embodiment, the end condition storage area 203ea is configured to store information indicating the winning end condition as initial data. Specifically, during the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54), if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) has been operated (S1704 in FIG. 54: Yes), information indicating the winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea as part of the process of S1714.

In this way, by configuring at least one of the end conditions as the end conditions of the game per reel to be stored as initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which no end condition is set for the game per reel in a pachinko machine 10 that has a function for selecting the end condition for the game per reel. Note that in this embodiment, the end condition storage area 203ea is configured to store (store) information corresponding to the winning end condition as the initial data for the end condition for the game per reel, but this is not limited to this, and for example, at least the winning end condition and the time end condition may be configured to be set as the initial data for the end condition for the game per reel.

The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that the period during which the ending condition of the game with the winning combination can be selected, and is set to ON when the ending period of the jackpot game starts, and is set to OFF when the ending period of the jackpot game ends.

In the sixth embodiment, if the switching button 22za is operated while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to on, the operation of the switching button 22za is invalidated. By configuring in this way, even if the player mistakenly operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to on, it is possible to prevent a process based on the operation from being executed.

The switching flag 203ec is a flag to indicate that during the period during which the end condition of the game per reel can be selected (the period during which the switchable flag 20eb is set to ON), the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) and the end condition can be selected by operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc, and is set to ON when the period during which the end condition can be selected by operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is set.

This switching flag 203ec is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 151) when the switching button 22za is operated during the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) while the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 151), i.e., when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2203: Yes in FIG. 151).

The setting status of the switching flag 203ec is referenced in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) when determining whether it is a period in which operations on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively distinguished (S2202 in FIG. 151), and is set to OFF (see S2209 in FIG. 151) when an end condition is selected based on operations on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc (see S2206 in FIG. 151). Also, if the switching flag 203ec is set to ON and the player does not perform a selection operation, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 148. Fig. 148 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 148, the sixth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above in that an end storage area 223ea is added (see Fig. 30(b)), and the rest is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected role-winning game. In the end condition related process (see S4272 in FIG. 156), when an operation command is received, the corresponding end condition is stored based on the operation information included in the operation command (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc was operated) (see S5706 and S5707 in FIG. 155). Then, when an end condition command output at the end of the big win game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the contents of the received end condition command (type of the set end condition) are compared with the information stored in the end storage area 223ea (type of the end condition previously stored based on the operation command) (S5710 in FIG. 155), and if the comparison results are different, the end condition corresponding to the contents of the end condition command is stored.

In other words, when an operation command is received indicating that a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated by the player, the end storage area 223ea stores an end condition based on the received operation command, and makes it possible to set the display mode of the switching performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. Then, when an end condition command is received to indicate the final selected end condition, the end condition set on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command is compared with the actually set end condition, and if the comparison results are not identical, the end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored.

In this configuration, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which a command (end condition command) for indicating the finally selected end condition is set at the end of a jackpot game, the end condition selected by the player can be predicted based on the operation command before the end condition command is received, and a presentation mode based on the prediction result can be set, so that a presentation that does not feel strange to the player can be executed. In this embodiment, the timing for setting the end condition command is the timing for the end of a jackpot game, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a player operates a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc), the end condition command may be set in addition to the operation command. In this configuration, the display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be selected based on the received end condition command, i.e., based on the actually set end condition.

<Regarding control process of main control device in the sixth embodiment>
With reference to Figures 149 to 153, the control process of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The sixth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the timer interrupt process (see Figure 39) is replaced by the timer interrupt process 6 (see Figure 149), the special line start port winning process (see S108 in Figure 50) is replaced by the special line start port winning process 6 (see S178 in Figure 150), and the big win control process (see S1804 in Figure 56) is replaced by the big win control process 6 (see S1854 in Figure 152), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of timer interrupt process 6 will be explained with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt process 6. This timer interrupt process 6 differs from the timer interrupt process described above (see FIG. 39) in that it executes special line start port winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) instead of special line start port winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) and adds switching process (see S171). The other processes (S101 to S107, S109 to S112) are the same as the timer interrupt process described above (see FIG. 39), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of Special Line Start Gate Winning Process 6 (S178) will be explained with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of Special Line Start Gate Winning Process 6 (S178). This Special Line Start Gate Winning Process 6 (S178) differs from the above-mentioned Special Line Start Gate Winning Process (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that the processing contents executed when the conditions for executing the game per reel are met have been changed, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When special line start gate winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the same processes of S1301 to S1307 as those of the special line start gate winning process of the first embodiment described above (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed, and then the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, the special line operation command is set (S1308), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the normal winning is not in progress (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this process ends.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the execution condition of the game with a winning combination is established, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read out, and the end condition corresponding to the read out information is set, thereby changing the end condition of the game with a winning combination. This allows the game with a winning combination to be ended when the end condition selected by the player is established, so that the player can select the size of the bonus to be given during the special electric game, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. In this embodiment, the end condition of the game with a winning combination is set each time the execution condition of the game with a winning combination is established. However, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 in which the end condition of the game with a winning combination is selectable only during a jackpot game as in this embodiment, the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read out when the jackpot game ends, or when the execution condition of the game with a winning combination is established for the first time after the jackpot game ends, and the game with a winning combination corresponding to the end condition is set. Until the next jackpot game is executed, the game with a winning combination based on the set operation scenario of the winning combination may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a game with a winning combination that corresponds to the ending condition selected by the player, without having to execute a process to read information from the ending condition storage area 203ea every time the execution condition for the game with a winning combination is met.

Also, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select the end condition of the game with a per-unit feature during the special electric game (time-saving state), for example, a flag (end condition switching flag) indicating that the end condition of the game with a per-unit feature has been switched may be provided, and the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea may be read out and the end condition of the game with a per-unit feature switched only when the end condition switching flag is set to on. This allows the process of reading out the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea to be skipped when a new game with a per-unit feature is executed under the same end condition as the previous game with a per-unit feature, simplifying the control process when executing the game with a per-unit feature.

Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and is based on the player's operation of the end condition switching button group 22z.

When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201). If it is determined that it is not set to ON, i.e., if it is determined that the current period is not the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: No), this process is terminated since operation of the end condition switching button group 22z is invalid. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, i.e., if it is determined that the current period is the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), it is next determined whether the switching in progress flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

In the process of S2202, if the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, i.e., during the ending period of the big win game and the switching button 22za is not being operated (the display screen of FIG. 145(a) is being displayed) (S2202: No), it is determined whether the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203), and if it is determined that the switching button has not been operated (S2203: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), next, the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2204), a switching command is set (S2205), and this process is terminated.

Here, the discrimination process of S2203 will be explained. In this embodiment, when a player operates (presses) the switching button 22za, the detection switch for the switching button detects the pressed switching button 22za, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110. Then, in the discrimination process of S2203, it is determined whether a detection signal is being output from the detection switch for the switching button described above.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the big win game and the switching button 22za has already been operated (the display screen of FIG. 145(b) is displayed) (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated (S2206). In the determination process of S2206, if the first selection button 22zb has been operated (pressed), the detection switch for the first selection button detects the pressed first selection button 22zb, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, so it is determined whether or not a detection signal is being output from the detection switch for the first selection button. Furthermore, when the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the detection switch for the second selection button detects the pressed second selection button 22zc, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, so that it is determined whether or not a detection signal is being output from the detection switch for the second selection button.

If it is determined in the process of S2206 that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc has been operated (S2206: Yes), an operation command including information indicating that a selection button has been operated and information indicating the type of selection button that has been operated is set (S2207), the termination condition selected in the process of S2206 is stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea (S2208), the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF (S2209), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S2206 that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc has been operated, i.e., if it is determined that no detection signal is being output from either the detection switch for the first selection button or the detection switch for the second selection button (S2206: Yes), this processing is terminated.

As explained above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), when any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated at the timing when the operation of the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is determined to be valid, information indicating the selected termination condition is stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea. However, without setting a command indicating the selected termination condition, an operation command including information indicating that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated and information indicating the type of the selection button operated is set. In addition, since the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF in the processing of S2209, it is possible to operate the termination condition switching button group 22z and select the termination condition again during the ending period of the jackpot game.

In other words, because the end condition is not determined until the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured not to output a command (end condition command) indicating the selected end condition. By configuring it in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an end condition command, it can set a presentation according to the information (end condition type) contained in the received end condition command until the next jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the control process on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be simplified compared to when the end condition command is set every time the player operates the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc).

In addition, since an operation command indicating that a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated while the switching flag 203ec is set to on can be set, during the ending period of the big win game, it is possible to execute an effect based on the received operation command. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player who operated the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc).

Next, the contents of jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control process 6 (S1854). This jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) in the process executed at the start of the ending period and the process executed at the end of the jackpot game, but is otherwise the same. The same process contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the processes of S1901 to S1911, which are the same as those of the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56), are executed, and after S1911 is completed, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and this process ends. In other words, in this embodiment, when an ending period is set that is set after the last round of play is completed in a jackpot game, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, thereby effectively determining the player's operation of the switch button 22za.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1910 that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, i.e., the end timing of the ending period (S1912). If it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the same processes of S1913 to S1917 as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed, and then the end condition setting process is executed (S1952), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1912 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1912: No), the same process of S1918 as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting process (S1952) is executed in the big win control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and executes processing based on the selection result of the end condition selection of the role-play game executed during the ending period of the big win game.

When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first the switchable flag 203eb is set to OFF (S2301), then it is determined whether the switching in progress flag 203ec is set to ON (S2302), and if it is determined that it is set to ON, i.e., if the timing for the jackpot to end has arrived while the selection screen for selecting the end condition (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed (S2302: Yes), the switching in progress flag 203ec is set to OFF (S2303), the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (the type of end condition finally selected) is read (S2304), an end condition command is set based on the information read from the end condition storage area 203ea (S2305), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, if the switching button 22za is not operated on the big win ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)), or if the desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the ending condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2304.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the termination condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end of a jackpot game is configured to set a termination condition command only for the final selected termination condition. Furthermore, the period during which the termination condition for the game per feature can be selected is only during the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the number of termination condition commands output to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to one jackpot game can be reduced to one, and the termination condition corresponding to the termination condition included in that termination condition command will be applied at least until the next jackpot game is played.

Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can continue to execute the presentation based on the received end condition command at least until the next big win game is executed, so that when the presentation mode is changed according to the end condition of the game with a winning reel, the processing for changing the presentation mode can be prevented from becoming complicated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 154 and Fig. 155. The sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the command determination process 6 (S4172 in Fig. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in Fig. 61), but is otherwise the same. The same process contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination process 6 (S4172) will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 6 (S4172). This command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) differs from the command determination process in the first embodiment described above (S4102 in FIG. 61) in that it adds a process for determining whether a command related to the end condition of the game per reel has been received, and a process that is executed based on the result of that determination process, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed, first, the processes of S4201 to S4219 are executed, which are the same as those of the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see S4102 in FIG. 61). Then, if it is determined in the process of S4218 that a hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), it is then determined whether an end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, the end condition-related commands correspond to the switching command and operation command set in the switching process of the main control device 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151), and the end condition command set in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153).

If it is determined in the process of S4271 that an end condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the end condition related process is executed (S4272) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4271 that an end condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), then the process is executed according to the other command (S4220) and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the end condition related process (S4272) will be explained with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end condition related process (S4272). In this end condition related process (S4272), when a player performs a selection operation to select the end condition of the game with a per-game bonus, various processes are performed to set the presentation mode corresponding to the selection operation.

When the end condition related process (S4272) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played (S5701), and if it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently being played (S5701: No), this process is terminated as is. In other words, in this embodiment, since the end condition for the game with a per-gimmick device can be selected only during a jackpot game, if an end condition related command is received other than during a jackpot game, the effect corresponding to the received command is not set. This makes it possible to prevent an effect that is not intended by the player from being executed when an incorrect command is received due to noise, etc.

If it is determined in the process of S5701 that the player is currently playing a jackpot (S5701: Yes), it is then determined whether a switching command has been received, i.e., whether the player has operated (pressed) the switching button 22za during the ending period of the jackpot (S5702). If it is determined in the process of S5702 that a switching command has been received (S5702: Yes), a display command that shows a selection screen is set (S5703), and this process ends.

When the processing of S5703 is executed, a display command is set to switch the ending screen of the big win (see FIG. 145(a)) to a selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) for selecting the end condition of the game when a reel hits. The display command set here, like other display commands, is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the processing of S5703, it creates image data for displaying the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)), and the selection screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5702 that a switching command has not been received (S5702: No), then it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is a command that is set when it is determined that the player has operated (pressed) a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) - that is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the big win, and a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated while the selection screen for the ending condition is displayed, and is a command that includes information indicating the type of selection button operated by the player.

In the process of S5704, if it is determined that an operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), it is determined whether the currently received operation command corresponds to the first selection button 22zb, i.e., whether the information included in the operation command includes information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated (S5705). If it is determined that the currently received operation command is the first selection button 22zb (S5705: Yes), a display command indicating the winning end (condition), which is the end condition corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the process of S5706, a termination condition determination screen (see FIG. 146(a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition is displayed from the termination condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). After that, the set termination condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), since the operation command received this time is the operation of the second selection button 22zc, a display command indicating the time end (condition) is set (S5707), and this process is terminated. When the display command is set in the process of S5707, an end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). Specifically, with reference to FIG. 146(a), the display area HR22 (see FIG. 145(b)) is enlarged in place of the display area HR21 on the display screen described above, "time end" is displayed in the display area HR22a, and the word "time" is displayed in the display area HR23. After that, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S5704 that an operation command has not been received (S5704: No), then it is determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and if it is determined that an end condition command has not been received (S5709: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an end condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea is compared with the information contained in the currently received end condition command, and it is determined whether they indicate the same end condition (S5710).

In the process of S5710, if it is determined that the end conditions are the same, that is, if the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition (S5710: Yes), this process is terminated. Also, if the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command do not indicate the same end condition (S5710: No), this means that the actually set end condition and the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are different, so a display command is set to switch the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to the display mode corresponding to the end condition indicated by the end condition command (S5711), and this process is terminated.

When a display command is set in the processing of S5711, the comment "Termination condition switching" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, while the display mode corresponding to the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command is displayed in the display area HR23.

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition for the game with a special feature. In other words, if the winning end condition is selected, the time end condition will not be met even if the period during which the time end condition can be met has elapsed, and if the time end condition is selected, the winning end condition will not be met even if the number of wins in the V winning device 65 reaches the number during which the winning end condition can be met. With this configuration, the game with a special feature can be ended when the end condition desired by the player is met, so that the player can play the special electric game more proactively.

In the sixth embodiment, when the winning end condition is selected, the game is not ended based on the time elapsed during the game, and when the time end condition is selected, the game is not ended based on the number of balls entering the V winning device 65 during the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the winning end condition is selected, a forced time end condition may be set to be established when a time (e.g., 10 seconds) longer than the elapsed time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) set as the normal time end condition has elapsed, or when the time end condition is selected, a forced winning end condition may be set to be established when a number of winnings (e.g., 10) greater than the number of winnings (e.g., 3) set as the normal winning end condition has been reached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being played for a long time.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select the end condition of the game with a per-applica bonus by operating (pressing) the switch button 22za while the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game with a per-applica bonus is selectable when a jackpot game is executed, and the end condition of the game with a per-applica bonus cannot be switched during the time-saving state (V rush) that is set after the jackpot game ends.

This configuration prevents the frequent switching of the end conditions of the game with a special feature depending on the game situation during the V-Rush, i.e., the changing status of the special symbols and the changing status of the normal symbols, which would result in the player being presented with an overly advantageous game situation. In addition, since the end conditions of the game with a special feature can be selected at the timing when the game of making the ball enter the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game ends and before the special electric game is executed, the game of shooting the ball and the act of selecting the end conditions do not overlap, providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Furthermore, since the end condition of the game per reel can be selected while the time-saving state period (40 seconds) set after the end of the jackpot game is notified, the player can select the end condition of the game per reel while grasping the remaining time period mode 801 displayed on the jackpot ending screen. Specifically, when the display mode of the remaining time period mode 801 indicates that the time-saving state period is short (for example, 40 seconds), the winning end condition is selected as the end condition of the game per reel, and the game period of the game per reel is arbitrarily adjusted to aim for a special electric game in which the period for interrupting the special pattern variation is efficiently set, and when the display mode of the remaining time period mode 801 indicates that the time-saving state period is long (for example, 200 seconds), the time end condition is selected, and the number of balls that enter the V winning device 65 in one game per reel is increased, thereby aiming for a special electric game in which the amount of benefits (number of winning balls) per unit time is large.

In the sixth embodiment, the player is allowed to select the end conditions of the game with a special feature while the ending screen of the big win game is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player may be allowed to select the end conditions of the game with a special feature at any time during the big win game.

In addition, the game may be configured so that the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature can be selected even when the standby screen (demo screen), which is displayed when the time-saving state is in effect and no special symbol variation is being performed, is displayed, or the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature can be selected while the game with a per-unit feature is being performed. Even in such cases, the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature can be selected at a timing when the remaining time (time period) of the time-saving state is not being subtracted, allowing the player to select the end conditions for the game with a per-unit feature while having ample time to spare.

On the other hand, it is also possible to configure it so that, deviating from the technical concept of the sixth embodiment, the end conditions for the game per feature can be selected only during the period in which the remaining time (time period) of the time-saving state is being subtracted. By configuring it in this way, during the special electric game in which the remaining time (time period) of the time-saving state is being subtracted, the player can choose whether to focus on playing the special electric game alone or to perform an operation to select the end conditions for the game per feature. This allows the player to play while predicting the future game content, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Second Modification>
Next, a second modified example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Fig. 156. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time-saving state is set, and in all games such as winning games (games with winning combinations, small winning games, and big winning games), a game (left-handed game) in which the ball is shot so as to flow down the left side area (the left side of the variable display unit 80) among the game areas formed on the game board 13 is executed.

As a result, the game area into which the ball is launched is not changed, and therefore a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. Also, in each embodiment, as described above, since there is no need to change the game method during play (for example, when a winning game is executed), even when a normal winning game is executed (see FIG. 13(a)) or when a role-play winning game is executed (see FIG. 18(a)), no notification is given for changing the game method (for example, a comment display of "hit to the right"), and the display area HR3 is configured to notify the player of the device that will be opened during the winning game (for example, the normal winning device 640, the V winning device 65, etc.).

However, in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)) in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, an image display that simply shows the winning device (normal power winning device 640) corresponding to the winning game being executed is displayed, and there is a problem that the display is unnecessary for a player who understands the content of the winning game being executed. In addition, since the area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, if an unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)), the area for executing other performance displays becomes narrow, and the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. On the other hand, if each display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set with the aim of widening the area for executing other performance displays and enhancing the performance effect, the display area of the display area HR3 becomes narrow, and there is a problem that a game that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

In contrast, this second variant differs from each of the above-mentioned embodiments in that the guide display mode (display mode of the display image displayed in the display area HR3) indicating the winning device (normal winning device 640, V winning device 65, variable winning device 650) that the player should aim for during a winning game can be variably set based on various conditions. The rest of the content is the same as each of the above-mentioned embodiments, and the same content will be given the same reference numerals and detailed description will be omitted.

Here, an example of a display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when a normal winning game is executed during a V-rush period, and FIG. 156(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when a player executes a predetermined operation on the operating means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is being displayed.

In this second modified example, as in each of the first embodiments described above, when a normal winning game is executed, the ball is allowed to enter the normal winning device 640. A special electric operation port 643 is provided inside the normal winning device 640, and when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643, a role winning game is executed in which the ball can enter the V winning device 65. Furthermore, a V winning port 165 is provided inside the V winning device 65, and when a ball enters the V winning port 165, a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed in which the ball can enter the variable winning device 650. In other words, it is configured so that multiple possible winning games can be executed based on one winning game (normal winning game).

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, for example, if a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during a normal winning game, a special feature winning game will be played consecutively with the normal winning game. In this case, if the guide display mode is displayed in accordance with the type of winning game being played, the guide display mode displayed in the display area HR3 will change in accordance with the timing of the switch from the normal winning game to the special feature winning game, resulting in a problem that the timing of displaying the guide display mode to guide the player to the winning device (V winning device 65) corresponding to the special feature winning game will be delayed. Also, in consideration of the delay in the timing at which the guide display mode is displayed, for example, when the winning game switches from the normal winning game to the special winning game, it is possible to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) from the end of the normal winning game (from the time the ball enters the special winning game port 643) until the special winning game is executed, but by setting a waiting period, the sense of speed of the special winning game that aims for the big winning game (V big winning game) in a series of steps is reduced, and there is a problem that it is not possible to increase the interest of the game.

In contrast to this, in this second modified example, as shown in FIG. 156(a), during a normal winning game, when an image display simulating a normal electric winning device 640 is being executed as a guide display mode in the display area HR3, a second guide display mode is displayed in the display area HR30 to guide the player in advance of the winning device (V winning device 65) that the player should aim for in the next winning game that may be executed, that is, the winning game (playable device winning game) that will be executed when the ball enters the special electric operating port 643 in the normal winning game currently being executed.

By configuring it in this way, if the game result of the current normal winning game is a specific game result (a game result in which the ball enters the special electric operation port 643), the winning device to be aimed at in the next winning game can be clearly notified to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Also, by notifying the game content of the next feature game that can be executed during the normal winning game in advance, it is possible to eliminate the need to set a waiting period for the player to understand the game content of the feature game (the winning device to be aimed at) during the period from the end of the normal winning game to the execution of the feature game (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by smoothly playing the special electric game aiming for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of flows.

As described above, the game is configured so that the game of winning the special feature is executed when the game result of the normal winning game being executed is a specific game result, so the comment "Aim" is not displayed in the second guide display mode displayed in the display area HR30 during the normal winning game. Also, when the execution of the game of winning the special feature is not confirmed, that is, when the game is in the normal winning game and the ball has not entered the special electric operation port 643, only a part of the display image imitating the V winning device 65 (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 of FIG. 18(a)) is displayed. By configuring in this way, the first guide display mode showing the game content of the winning game being executed and the second guide display mode showing the game content of the winning game that may be executed next can be easily distinguished by the player, so that, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game aiming at the V winning device 65 during the normal winning game.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a), the first and second information display modes use image displays that mimic winning devices that are opened upon a corresponding winning game, but this is not limited thereto, and the first and second information display modes may be set using only text display, or may be set using both text and images.

In addition, as the image display simulating the winning device displayed as the first information display mode and the second information display mode, photographed data of each winning device actually installed in the pachinko machine 10 may be used. This allows an image of the actual winning device to be used as the image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, making it possible to implement a presentation that is easier for players to understand.

Conversely, a simplified display that displays only the minimum necessary display information may be used among the winning devices that correspond to winning games. In this case, the simplified display can be used for multiple pachinko machines 10, which reduces the cost of developing the gaming machine.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this second modified example, when the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, a past history information mode is also displayed to enable notification of the type of winning game that triggered the execution of the currently executing winning game (e.g., a jackpot game).

By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is played, it is possible to review the previous game content, so the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the jackpot game played this time was played based on winning a jackpot in a lottery for a special pattern, or based on the ball entering the V winning port 165 during a game with a winning feature.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, the second guide display mode displayed during a normal winning game is configured to be variably set according to the progress of the normal winning game, that is, according to changes in the expectation of the ball entering the special electric operation port 643 during the normal winning game being played. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of a normal winning game from the main control device 110, it sets a display command indicating the first image data (image data that typically shows the normal winning device 640) to be displayed as the first guide display mode, and a display command indicating the second image data (image data that typically shows the V winning device 65) to be displayed as the second guide display mode, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

Based on receiving the above-mentioned display command, the display control device 114 creates image display data for the first guide display mode shown in FIG. 156(a) and image display data for the second guide display mode, and displays them on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, immediately after the start of a normal symbol winning game, the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed. Then, when a winning command indicating that the winning sensor 640s has detected that the ball has won the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal symbol winning game is output from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a command to the display control device 114 indicating the progress of the normal symbol winning game.

As a result, image display data in which the image simulating the V winning device 65 is more exposed than in the display mode shown in FIG. 156(a) (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image simulating the V winning device 65 is displayed) is created as a second guidance display mode to indicate that the expectation of the ball entering the special electric operation port 643 in the ongoing normal winning game has increased, and is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, when a command is output from the main control device 110 indicating that a state in which the ball is confirmed to enter the special electric operation port 643 has been detected, for example, a state in which the ball has passed through the second movable valve 642 and is flowing down toward the special electric operation port 643, the entire image simulating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a second guidance display mode.

By configuring it in this way, the display mode of the guide display for the next possible winning game can be changed (second guide display mode) depending on the progress of the winning game currently being played. In other words, the higher the expectation of the ball entering the special electric operation port 643 in the regular winning game currently being played, the clearer the guide display for the next possible winning game can be displayed.

Note that the example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a) is merely one example, and in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple winning games in a series, it is sufficient to be able to guide the playing method of the next winning game that can be executed during the period when one winning game is being executed. For example, when using a configuration in which the probability of the next winning game (e.g., a game with a special feature) being executed varies depending on the type of the one winning game being executed (e.g., a game with a special feature), the first guidance display mode or the second guidance display mode displayed during the normal winning game may be changed depending on the type of the normal winning game being executed. Specifically, it is preferable to change the display color or size of the first guidance display mode to a mode that is more noticeable to the player the higher the probability of the next winning game (e.g., a game with a special feature) being executed. In addition, the display mode of the second information display mode displayed at the start of a normal winning game may be changed. For example, when an unfavorable normal winning game is played, which has a low probability of the next winning game (e.g., a game with a special feature), the second information display mode may be configured to display approximately half of the image of the V winning device 65, and when an advantageous normal winning game, which is more likely to result in a special feature game than an unfavorable normal winning game, is played, the second information display mode may be configured to display 3/4 of the image of the V winning device 65.

By configuring in this way, not only can the player easily grasp the playing method of the winning game being executed by visually checking the first and second information display modes, but the player can also predict whether the winning game being executed is a winning game that is advantageous to the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the first and second information display modes. Also, as described above, by configuring the display mode to be changed in stages according to the game results and expectation levels that are advantageous to the player, and by configuring the stage of the display mode that is initially set to be different according to the advantageous level of the winning game being executed (normal winning game), that is, by changing the timing of displaying the display mode that indicates high expectation levels, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous level of the winning game being executed while using common image data, thereby reducing the capacity of image data.

In the above, an example was given in which a normal winning game and a special feature winning game were executed as one winning game, but this is not limited to this, and it may of course be used in all cases in which multiple winning games are executed as a series of winning games.

Next, referring to FIG. 156(b), the display contents that are displayed when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during a normal winning game will be explained. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed, the display area HR3 that provides instructions on how to play the normal winning game in progress is enlarged. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for players who want to know how to play the winning game in progress. In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is displayed in a reduced size compared to the size shown in FIG. 156(a), when the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is removed from the display screen, and when the frame button 22 is operated four times, the display screen returns to that shown in FIG. 156(a).

In this way, the size of the guidance display mode (first guidance display mode) for providing guidance on how to play the winning game currently being played can be varied based on the player's operation, so that the guidance display mode can be displayed at the size desired by the player. Furthermore, when the guidance display mode is reduced in size or deleted, the display area of other effect displays (effect displays such as symbols 811 and 812) that are displayed on the display screen overlapping with the display timing of the guidance display mode is configured to become larger. Furthermore, it has an effect display that is executed only when the display area of the other effect displays becomes larger. This allows the player to actively operate the frame button 22.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging the first information display mode, the detailed display location of the first information display mode, for example, a display mode imitating the second movable valve 642 in the normal power winning device 640, can be configured so that the player can visually recognize that it is a specific display mode that is different from the normal display mode, and this specific display mode can be configured to be easily displayed when a winning game that is advantageous to the player is being executed. In this way, even players who already understand how to play can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In the above-described example, the guide display mode can be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22), but it is sufficient that the guide display mode can be changed based on the operation of the operation means. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a direction operation means (cross switch) that can perform operations indicating at least the left and right directions or the up and down directions as the operation means, the guide display mode can be changed by operating the direction operation means so that an area other than the winning device that is the target of the guide display mode (near the area where the winning device is located on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10) is displayed, or the guide display mode can be changed so that the winning device that is the target of the guide display mode is rotated (horizontally or vertically). In this case, the display control device 114 is previously stored with image data showing the entire play area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device, and when a command corresponding to an operation signal indicating the operation content of the direction operation means is received, image data corresponding to the command is created and displayed. Furthermore, in this case, it is advisable to configure the information that is advantageous to the player to be displayed in the area that can be displayed only when the directional operation means is operated. This can motivate the player to operate the operation means.

In the second modified example described above, as in the first embodiment, all games are configured to be playable by left-handed play. However, for example, in a gaming machine capable of playing multiple winning games as a series of games, in which one winning game is played by left-handed play and the next winning game is played by right-handed play, it is preferable to form the display area HR3 in which the first guide display mode is displayed on the left side of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the display area HR30 in which the second guide display mode is displayed on the right side of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest a game method to the player depending on the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, in this case, the position in which the display area HR3 or the display area HR30 is displayed may be operated by the player by operating the above-mentioned directional operation means.

In the second modified example described above, the case where multiple winning games are executed as a series of games has been described, but the above-mentioned effects can be applied even when a specific winning game is executed alone. For example, the special symbol variation period and the big win game can be set as a series of games, and during the special symbol variation period, an image aiming at the special symbol entrance 64 can be displayed as the first guide display mode, and an image showing the variable winning device 650 can be displayed as the second guide display mode. In this case, the first guide display mode, which is less necessary to guide the player on how to play, can be deleted, and only the second guide display mode can be displayed. Also, if the gaming machine is provided with multiple variable winning devices 650 that are opened when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, the second guide display mode can be configured to be executable to induce the player to guess which variable winning device 650 will be displayed in the end.

In the second modified example described above, the guide display mode when a normal winning game is being played is explained, but for example, it is sufficient to configure the display to display only the first guide display mode during the period from when a normal pattern is selected in a lottery until the normal winning game is played. Also, at that timing, the guide display mode may be switched in order to show the game flow when all the example games are successful, that is, the flow of the normal winning game, the role winning game, and the big winning game.

Furthermore, the variable content of the guide display mode displayed during a winning game may be set appropriately. For example, in addition to enlarging, reducing, and rotating, the guide display mode may be changed by blinking or changing color, or the guide display mode may be changed by making a character appear near the guide display mode. Also, a decorative structure that imitates an actual winning device may be combined with the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to provide guidance on how to play.

Furthermore, in each of the second modified examples described above, an image display using an image simulating the real thing is executed to guide the player in an easy-to-understand manner on how to play during a winning game, but this is not limited to this. For example, a simplified display image may be used to enable the player to grasp at least one of the following: where the target winning device is located in the game area; the location of the winning device where the ball can enter; and, if the winning device has advantageous and disadvantageous areas as areas through which the ball can pass, the location of the advantageous area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the minimum necessary information, and it is also possible to use common image data for different pachinko machines 10, thereby reducing the development and manufacturing costs of the pachinko machines 10.

In the first embodiment described above, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot, or if the ball enters (wins) a specific area (V winning port 165) during a game with a winning combination, a jackpot game is made executable, and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as an end condition for the time-saving state, a time-saving end condition (time-saving count) is set based on a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times) of special symbol lotteries being executed without winning a jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol. Furthermore, if a game with a winning combination is executed during the dynamic display period (period of change of the special symbol) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result, the process for subtracting the dynamic display period is interrupted, and the process for subtracting the suspended dynamic display period is resumed based on the end of the game with a winning combination, or the end of the jackpot game executed based on the ball passing (entering) a specific area during a game with a winning combination.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the process of updating the number of special pattern lotteries executed during the time-saving state (the process of subtracting the remaining number of time-saving states) is executed based on the execution of a special pattern lottery, specifically, it is executed during the period from the execution of a special pattern lottery to the execution of a special pattern variation, and is configured to determine whether the time-saving end condition has been met after the special pattern variation has stopped being displayed.

By configuring it in this way, if the process for subtracting the dynamic display period is interrupted based on the execution of a game that hits a special symbol during the execution of the special symbol variation, and then the process for subtracting the interrupted dynamic display period is resumed, when the dynamic display period after the restart has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of time-saving times from being updated. Therefore, for example, when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the remaining dynamic display period of the interrupted dynamic display from being extremely short, and the number of time-saving times set after the end of the jackpot game from being immediately subtracted due to the stopped display of the special symbol variation after the restart.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the timing for determining whether the conditions for terminating the time-saving state are met is the timing when the dynamic display period of the special pattern has elapsed. Therefore, the time-saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, which will result in the conditions for terminating the time-saving state being met, is stopped and displayed, so that a gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be continued for as long as possible. Furthermore, because the determination of whether the conditions for terminating the time-saving state are met is not made during the dynamic display period of the special pattern, the gaming state does not transition from the time-saving state to the normal state during the dynamic display period of the special pattern. Therefore, a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The above content may be used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured to provide multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and to allow the drawing (variation) of the first special symbol and the drawing (variation) of the second special symbol to be executed in an overlapping manner. If the result of one special symbol drawing is a predetermined drawing result (small win, big win), when that drawing result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation (processing for subtracting the dynamic display period of the special symbol) that is being executed is interrupted or canceled. Specifically, if a big win is won in one special symbol drawing, the other special symbol variation that is being executed is canceled, and if a small win is won, the other special symbol variation that is being executed is interrupted.

The fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition is met when the cumulative number of draws, which is the sum of the number of draws for the first special symbol and the number of draws for the second special symbol, reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100), or when the number of draws for the first special symbol reaches a specific number (e.g., 4).

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above executes a process for updating the number of special pattern lotteries executed during the time-saving state (a process for subtracting the remaining number of time-saving times) based on the execution of a special pattern lottery, and determines whether or not the time-saving end condition is met when the dynamic display period of the special pattern has elapsed, or when, as a result of the process for subtracting the remaining number of time-saving times executed during one special pattern change, a special pattern change that may satisfy the time-saving end condition (a special pattern change that results in the number of time-saving times after subtraction being 0) is being executed, and the execution condition for the other special pattern lottery is met, and before that special pattern lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, even with the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the special pattern lottery (variation) is not performed more than the specified number of times during the time-saving state, and the game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player can be continued for as long as possible.

In the first and fourth embodiments described above, the process of determining whether the time-saving state termination condition is satisfied and the process of terminating the time-saving state (transitioning to the normal state) based on the result of the process are performed at the timing when the special symbol is displayed (the timing when the special symbol is displayed). However, other timings are also acceptable, for example, the timing when the special symbol is displayed after a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed (the timing when it is displayed as confirmed). If the special symbol variation (the final variation of the time-saving state) that satisfies the time-saving termination condition is a win (small win or big win), the timing may be the timing when the winning game is executed, a predetermined timing during the winning game (e.g., 1 second after the winning game starts), or the timing when the winning game ends. In other words, the process of updating the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state (the process of subtracting the remaining number of time-saving times) is executed, and it may be the period from when the special symbol variation that was the subject of the execution is displayed to when the next special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, a time-saving end condition is set as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches a specific number (for example, four times). However, without being limited to this, a time-saving end condition may be set when the number of times the special symbol draw results in a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result other than a big win, which is a part of the lottery result in the case of a miss win) reaches a predetermined number (for example, five times), when the number of balls passing through a specific end area during the time-saving state reaches a specific number (for example, 10 balls), or when the elapsed time since the time-saving state was set exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds). Also, as in the fourth embodiment described above, if the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a win game (small win game) different from the big win game, a time-saving end condition may be set when the number of times the small win game is executed reaches a specific number.

In addition, when the time-saving state end conditions that are established under various conditions can be set, it is preferable to configure the system so that different time-saving end conditions are set depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state. Specifically, when the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving end conditions may be set based on the game state when the jackpot is won or the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won, or the time-saving end conditions may be set based on the number of special pattern lotteries that have been executed until the jackpot is won. Furthermore, the time-saving end conditions may be set based on the number of times that a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player has been set consecutively across jackpot games. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the time-saving end conditions that will be set.

In addition, the system may be configured so that the player can select the time-saving end condition to be set for the current time-saving state from among multiple time-saving end conditions that can be set as the time-saving end condition. By configuring the system in this way, the player can play the game while predicting which time-saving end condition will allow the most advantageous gameplay to be executed if the player selects it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the special symbol variation is interrupted during the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is not subtracted when the resumed special symbol variation is stopped. However, without being limited to this, the number of time-saving times may be subtracted when the resumed special symbol variation is stopped. Specifically, the number of time-saving times may be updated (deducted) at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. Even when such a configuration is used, the length of the short time period after resumption differs depending on the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation at the time of interruption, so that the player can be interested in when the special symbol variation was interrupted (whether a jackpot game was executed).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the process of updating (decrementing) the number of time-saving times is configured to be executed during the period from when the special pattern lottery is executed to when the special pattern variation starts, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, it may be configured to be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (5 seconds) after the special pattern variation starts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide cases where the number of time-saving times is updated (decremented) based on the special pattern variation after resumption, and cases where it is not, depending on the timing when the special pattern variation is interrupted. Specifically, if the special pattern variation is interrupted 2 seconds after the special pattern variation starts, the process of updating the number of time-saving times is executed 3 seconds after the special pattern variation is resumed. On the other hand, if the special pattern variation is interrupted 10 seconds after the special pattern variation starts, the process of updating the number of time-saving times is not executed after the special pattern variation is resumed. Therefore, even if the special pattern variation is interrupted immediately after the special pattern variation starts, that is, when the remaining variation time is long, a disadvantageous state may occur for the player, so that the player can be interested in the game after the resumption (the game during the time-saving state). In addition, when the system is configured to execute the process of updating (subtracting) the number of time-saving times during the period when the special symbol is changing, it is preferable to configure the timing of executing the process of updating (subtracting) the number of time-saving times to be different depending on the change pattern of the selected special symbol (change time, big win lottery result, or stop type). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of interruption of the special symbol change, which is advantageous for the player (the number of time-saving times is not updated due to the change of the special symbol after resumption, or the time-saving state set at the time of resumption can be continued for a long period of time), and the player can play while predicting the content of the game to be executed later, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the remaining period of the currently executing special pattern variation meets a predetermined condition, an effect is executed to notify the player of this. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special pattern variation is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), or when the remaining period of the currently executing special pattern variation is longer than the variation time of the next special pattern variation, the lucky time effect is executed. By configuring in this way, when a V hit game is executed during lucky time, the next V rush period can be made longer, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play.

In addition, when determining the remaining period of a currently running special pattern change, the system is configured to be able to execute a method of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (e.g., 30 seconds) (absolute determination), and a method of determining whether it is longer than the change time of the next special pattern change to be executed (relative determination). This allows the player to know the timing to advantageously interrupt the special pattern change.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the device is configured to be able to execute an effect that can notify the player of the remaining period of the special pattern change that is being executed, but it is sufficient that the effect allows the player to predict the timing of interruption of the special pattern change that is advantageous to the player, and the device may be configured to execute an effect with an execution condition other than the length of the remaining period of the special pattern change. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the update process of the number of time-saving times for the special pattern change while the special pattern is changing, the device may be configured to execute an effect indicating that the update process of the number of time-saving times has been executed.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, if a specific winning game (a role winning game, a small winning game, or a big winning game) is executed while the special pattern variation is being executed, the special pattern variation being executed is interrupted or discarded. However, without being limited to this, the configuration may be such that the special pattern variation being executed is interrupted or discarded when a condition other than a winning game is met.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a normal electric winning device 640 is provided that makes it easier for a ball to win when a normal symbol is selected and a normal winning game is executed, and when a ball that wins in the normal electric winning device 640 passes through (enters) a specific area (special electric operation port 643, special electric operation port 1643, second ball entry port 1645), a game that is advantageous to the player (a game that wins a role, a small winning game), that is, a game that may result in a big winning game, can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to set a game state (time-saving state) in which a ball that wins in the normal electric winning device 640 easily passes through the above-mentioned specific area, and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to pass through.

By configuring it in this way, even if a ball enters the normal winning device 640 during a normal winning game that is executed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering a specific area, thereby preventing the player playing in the normal state from being given an excessively advantageous game.

In addition, in order to prevent balls from entering the specific area during the normal state, there is no need to provide the game board 13 with a special configuration to prevent balls from entering the normal winning device 640 due to a normal winning game executed during the normal state, so the design freedom of the game board 13 can be increased. Note that in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, among the balls that enter the normal winning device 640, balls that do not pass through (enter) the specific area are configured to enter the out hole, and a bonus (prize ball) is not awarded to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to award a second bonus (prize ball) different from the first bonus (provision of a game that may be an opportunity for a jackpot game) that is awarded when the ball passes through (enters) the specific area.

By configuring it in this way, the type of bonus given to the player by the ball that enters the normal power winning device 640 can be varied depending on the set game state, providing the player with an element of surprise.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, a game state (time-saving state) in which a ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 is likely to pass through the above-mentioned specific area and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to pass through are configurable, and a switching means (third movable valve 1642) is provided for switching the specific area into which a ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 enters during the time-saving state between a first specific area (second special electric operating port 1643) for executing a game in which a jackpot game is more likely to be triggered, and a second specific area (special electric operating port 643) for executing a game in which a jackpot game is more unlikely to be triggered than in the first specific area.

By configuring it in this way, the rate at which a ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 passes through a specific area (ease of passing) is made to differ depending on the set game state, and in a game state (time-saving state) in which it is easy to pass through a specific area, a ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 can pass through either a first specific area that is advantageous to the player, or a second specific area that is less advantageous than the first specific area. Therefore, even in a state in which it is confirmed that the first benefit will be awarded by a ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 (a state in which it is easy to award), it is possible to make the player interested in which specific area the ball will enter (pass through). Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the normal winning game that is executed during the time-saving state until the end.

In the second embodiment described above, the ease with which a ball can enter the V winning hole 165 in a game that hits a special feature is varied depending on the type of the specific area (special electric operation hole) into which the ball enters. In other words, the probability of a V jackpot game that is executed via a game that hits a special feature is varied, but this is not limited to this. For example, the content of a V jackpot game that is executed when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 (number of rounds, game state (number of time-saving times) set after the jackpot game ends) may be varied depending on the type of specific area (special electric operation hole) into which the ball enters.

In addition, in the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments described above, when a ball enters the special electric activation port 643, the special pattern variation currently in progress is interrupted (the subtraction process of the variation time is interrupted), but as in the third embodiment described above, depending on the condition that is established when a ball enters the special electric activation port 643, the special pattern variation currently in progress may be canceled (the special pattern variation is forcibly stopped with a miss) or the time-saving state may be ended after the special pattern variation is canceled.

Furthermore, the technical idea of the second embodiment described above may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 configured to execute the drawing of multiple types of special symbols (drawing of the first special symbol, drawing of the second special symbol) in a redundant manner, as in the fourth embodiment described above. In the fourth embodiment described above, the second ball entry port 1645 that triggers the drawing of the second special symbol is provided in the normal electric winning device 640, and the winning ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 1645 when the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during the time-saving state than when the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state. In addition to this, the right first ball entry port that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol may be provided in the normal electric winning device 640, and a switching means may be provided so that the ball that enters the normal electric winning device 640 during the time-saving state enters either the second ball entry port 1645 or the right first ball entry port. In this case, it is better to configure the game so that a lottery that is more advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the second ball entry port 1645, rather than the first right ball entry port, which is the trigger for the lottery for the first special symbol that can also be executed during normal operation.

By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the results of the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state until the end. In addition, when using a configuration such as each of the above-mentioned embodiments in which the number of times the first special symbol is drawn (the number of times it changes) is specified as the end condition of the time-saving state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the drawing (changing) of the first special symbol is not executed during the time-saving state. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the operation of the switching means provided in the normal electric winning device 640 to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol drawing and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. For example, when the time-saving state is set and the first special symbol drawing is not being executed, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small (for example, one), it is preferable to configure the switching means to be operated and controlled so that the ball that has won the normal electric winning device 640 is easily able to enter the right first ball entrance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably execute the first special symbol drawing during the time-saving state.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the normal power winning device 640 is configured to be executed when the normal winning game starts, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executed based on, for example, the timing when the normal pattern indicating a normal winning game is displayed in a stopped state, or the timing when the stopped display period has elapsed, or it may be configured to be executed when a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the normal winning game, or it may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to predetermined rules.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a pachinko machine 10 has been described that has a gameplay characteristic in which, when a time-saving state is set, the player aims for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) via a specific game (a game with a special feature or a small jackpot game) before the time-saving state ends (by the end of the special pattern variation that establishes the conditions for ending the time-saving state).

In a pachinko machine 10 with this type of playability, the longer the time for which the special symbols change during the time-saving state, the longer the period during which the time-saving state is set (time-saving period), and the more times a specific game can be played during the time-saving period.

Furthermore, when a specific game is played, the special pattern change being played is interrupted (the process for subtracting the change time of the special pattern change is interrupted), and the interrupted special pattern change (the process for subtracting the change time of the special pattern change) is configured to be resumed after the specific game or the jackpot game (V jackpot game) ends, that is, when the conditions for executing a new special pattern change are met.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the length of the time period varies depending on the time for the special symbol fluctuation and the interruption period for the specific game, so that the player can be motivated to play while hoping to select the longest possible fluctuation time for the special symbol fluctuation and to play as many specific games as possible.

However, for example, a game period for executing a specific game (a period during which the normal symbol changes or a period during which the ball cannot (difficult to) enter the normal electric winning device 640 during a normal symbol winning game (a period during which the electric device 640a is closed)) is a period during which the specific game cannot be executed and the change time of the special symbol change is subtracted, and therefore is a disadvantageous period for the player compared to a game period during which the specific game can be executed (a period during which the electric device 640a is open during a normal symbol winning game during which the ball can enter the electric device 640a, i.e., a period during which the change time of the special symbol change is subtracted but during which a game during a device win can be executed).

The specific game in which the special pattern variation is interrupted is configured to end when either of the following end conditions is met: an end condition (winning end condition) that is met when the number of winning balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3 balls) into the variable ball entry means (V winning device 65) that is opened during the specific game, or an end condition (time end condition) that is met when a predetermined period (e.g., 1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game with the pertiplier. The game with the pertiplier ends when either of the end conditions is met depending on the game content by the player during the game with the pertiplier (whether or not a ball is fired).

In response to this, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the state in which a specific game is being played overlaps with the above-mentioned disadvantageous period, the presentation mode of the specific game is made variable based on the length of the disadvantageous period. This makes it possible for the player to select the content of the game during the specific game (the end condition to be achieved), which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, a special electric operation port 643 is provided in the normal electric winning device 640, which is a trigger for interrupting the ongoing special pattern variation. Also, in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, a second ball entry port 1645 is provided in the normal electric winning device 640, which is a trigger for interrupting the ongoing special pattern variation. In a gaming machine having such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a delay means for randomizing (delaying) the period (ball flow period) until the ball that has entered the normal electric winning device 640 enters the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port.

In other words, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time period until the multiple special pattern variations are completed is configured to be the short time period, and when a new time-saving state (time-saving number of times) is set by the execution of a jackpot game, the remaining period of the interrupted special pattern variation is added without subtracting the time-saving number of times. Therefore, it is configured so that there are cases where it is more advantageous for the player to execute a jackpot game after the remaining number of times has decreased and the remaining period of the special pattern variation being executed is long (executing a jackpot game after the time-saving number has become short), than when there are remaining time-saving numbers remaining and the remaining period of the special pattern variation being executed is short.

This may provide an advantage to the player by providing a delay means within the regular electric winning device 640 to delay the timing at which the ball enters the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port. This allows the player to enjoy the timing at which the ball that entered the regular electric winning device 640 will enter the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port. It also makes it possible to prevent intentional play in which the ball enters the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port when there is a long remaining period of special chart fluctuation.

In this case, a delay means may be provided in the form of a cranes member on which the balls can roll, and when multiple balls flow into the cranes member, the balls may be configured to flow more easily into a passage hole provided in the center of the cranes member, and the balls that pass through the passage hole may flow into the special electric operation hole or the second ball entry hole. By configuring in this way, it is possible to operate the timing at which the balls enter the special electric operation hole or the second ball entry hole depending on the game content during a normal winning game (the degree to which the balls enter the normal electric winning device 640) while providing a delay means. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play so that the balls enter the special electric operation hole or the second ball entry hole at any timing.

In addition, when the ball flows into the delay means (Kroon member), a suggestion effect may be performed to suggest to the player a period advantageous to the player (period with a long remaining period for the special chart change), or a result notification means may be provided to notify the player that the timing at which the ball entered the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port is a period advantageous to the player (period with a long remaining period for the special chart change). Furthermore, in the above example, an example was described in which a Kroon member was used as a delay means, but it is sufficient that the flow period of the ball that entered the normal electric winning device 640 can be changed. For example, multiple flow paths with different periods (flow periods) from when the ball enters the normal electric winning device 640 until it enters the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port may be provided, and a distribution means may be provided to distribute the ball to one of the multiple flow paths.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 157 to Fig. 192. As in the pachinko machine 10 used in the fourth embodiment described above, the drawing of the first special symbol (drawing of special symbol 1) and the drawing of the second special symbol (drawing of special symbol 2) are configured to be executed in an overlapping manner (so-called simultaneous variation specification), and the length of the variation time of the first special symbol and the length of the variation time of the second special symbol selected according to the set game state are varied, so that the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn among the two types of special symbol drawings that can be executed in an overlapping manner can be varied according to the game state. Specifically, when one game state (e.g., normal state) is set, a short change time (e.g., 5 to 60 seconds) is selected as the change time of the first special pattern, and a long change time (e.g., 10 minutes) is selected as the change time of the second special pattern; when a specific game state different from the normal state (e.g., potential state) is set, a long change time (e.g., 10 minutes) is selected as the change time of the first special pattern, and a short change time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is selected as the change time of the second special pattern, so that the first special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed during the normal state, and the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed during the potential state.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, there is a configuration in which the second special symbol lottery has a high probability (for example, about 1/1) of winning a small prize, and the potential state in which a small prize game that is executed based on the small prize win is frequently executed is made a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine described above, a game that frequently produces small wins (advantageous game) can only be executed in a specific gaming state (latent state), so the player can play while hoping that the gaming state will change. However, since a fixed change time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the change time for the second special symbol change executed during the latent state, it is not possible to provide a large difference in the frequency of small win games executed during the latent state. In other words, in the gaming machine described above, since a small win is almost always won when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a risk that the game during the latent state will become monotonous, since the difference in the frequency of small win games executed is only provided by the frequency of execution of the second special symbol lottery.

In contrast to this, in the seventh embodiment, the range that can be selected as the change time of the second special pattern is varied according to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern. Specifically, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, the more likely it is that a shorter change time will be selected as the change time of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, by playing during the latent state (right-hand play), it is possible to win both the first special symbol's initial winning (reserved memory) and the second special symbol's initial winning, and depending on the type of small win that is set when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to interrupt the first special symbol variation that is in progress, or to forcibly stop (discard) it if the lottery result indicates a miss. And, by forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation that is in progress, it is possible to actively reduce the number of reserved first special symbols. This makes it possible to reduce the number of reserved first special symbols based on the lottery result of the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the latent state.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, a brief description of the game states in the seventh embodiment will be given. In the seventh embodiment, the game states can be set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). A detailed description will be given later, but the potential state is configured as the most advantageous game state for the player, and the normal state is configured as the least advantageous game state for the player. The probability state is configured as a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state. In the following description, the game states may be indicated using the names of the presentation modes executed during each game state. For example, the normal state may be called the normal mode, the probability state the probability mode, and the potential state the rush mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 2) in that the V winning device 65 and the electric device 640 are omitted, and instead a right variable winning device 1650, a right electric device 164, and a right second ball entrance 645 are provided. Also, it differs in that the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are disposed in different positions. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, winning holes (ball entry holes) through which balls can enter (enter) are provided in the area to the left (left area) and the area to the right (right area) of the variable display unit 80 among the game areas formed on the game board 13. Therefore, unlike the board configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above, it is configured to allow the player to play a game in which the ball flows down the left area (left-hand play) and a game in which the ball flows down the right area (right-hand play).

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this seventh embodiment, the player is configured to play different games depending on the game state that is set. When the normal state is set, a left-hand hit game is performed to cause the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, when a probability-variant state is set, a right-hand hit game is performed to cause the ball to enter the right electric device 164, and when a potential probability-variant state is set, a right-hand hit game is performed to cause the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 645. In addition, when a winning game (big win game, small win game) is executed, a right-hand hit game is also executed.

In other words, when a game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the player is made to play right-hand. This allows the player to understand whether the current situation is advantageous or not by the game method, and makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Although details will be described later, during game states that allow right-hand play to be executed (probable win state, potential win state, and various winning states), a guide display mode for encouraging the player to play right-hand is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entrance 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80, but the ratio of balls flowing down the left side area by left-handed play that enter the first ball entrance 64 and the ratio of balls flowing down the right side area by right-handed play that enter the first ball entrance 64 are configured to differ by nails planted on the surface of the game board 13 and various structures. Specifically, it is configured so that about 1 out of 15 balls flowing down the left side area by left-handed play enters the first ball entrance 64, and about 1 out of 250 balls flowing down the right side area by right-handed play enters the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, in the normal state where the lottery for the first special pattern is executed by making the ball enter the first ball entrance 64, playing left-handed play is the most advantageous game method for the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 157, in the right area of the game board 13 (the area to the right of the variable display unit 80), there are provided a right variable winning device 1650, a through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650, a right first ball entry port 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67, a right electric device 164 having an opening and closing door 164r1 that can open and close the top surface of the right first ball entry port 164r, a right second ball entry port 645 through which a ball that flows down (passes) the top surface of the opening and closing door 164r1 can enter when the opening and closing door 164r1 is closed, and a variable winning device 650 in the downstream area where a ball that flows down the right area without entering any of the above-mentioned ball entry ports reaches.

As shown in FIG. 157, the flow path of the game balls is set so that only game balls that pass through the through gate 67 when the right electric device 164 is closed (when the opening and closing door 164r1 is closed) can reach the right second ball entrance 645. In other words, even if right-handed play is performed in a high probability state (probability change state) of a normal pattern in which the right electric device 164 is likely to be open, almost all game balls that pass through the through gate 67 will enter the right first ball entrance 164r, so it is not possible to enter the right second ball entrance 645. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the game to be able to proceed by right-handed play even in a probability change state (probability change mode).

In the seventh embodiment, the variable member (opening/closing door) 1650a is configured to be variable so that almost all balls flowing down the right area during right-hitting play can win in the open right variable winning device 1650. This right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable ball entry means) that opens during a small prize game that is executed when a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery.

When the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (when a small win game is not being played), about half of the balls that flow down the right area flow down the area where the through gate 67 is located (the right area (first path) of the left and right areas defined by the nails planted to the left of the right variable winning device 1650), and about half of the remaining balls flow down the left area (second path). Balls that flow down this left area (second path) flow down toward the variable winning device 650 without entering the right electric device 164 or the right second ball entry port 1645.

On the other hand, all of the balls that flow down the right area (first route) where the through gate 67 is located flow toward the upstream side of the right electric device 164 (the upstream end side of the opening and closing door 164r1) and flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 164r1 from the upstream side to the downstream side. Then, about 2/3 of the balls discharged from the upper surface of the right electric device 164 enter the right second ball entrance 645, and the remaining approximately 1/3 pass through the gap formed between the right electric device 164 and the right second ball entrance 645 and flow down toward the variable winning device 650.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of paths are provided for the balls shot to the right area by right-hand play to reach the variable winning device 650, and each path is formed so that the time required for the balls to flow down is different. Specifically, the balls in the right area (first path) flow down for about 2 seconds, and the balls in the left area (second path) flow down for about 1 second. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make balls shot at different times (balls shot by right-hand play), specifically, multiple balls shot at 0.6 second intervals, reach the variable winning device 650 at the same time. Therefore, during the period when the variable winning device 650 is in an open state (during a jackpot game), it is possible to make multiple balls win the variable winning device 650 at the same time, and therefore it is possible to make the player interested in the behavior of the flowing balls during a jackpot game.

The right electric device 164 is a variable ball entry means that opens when a winning ball is drawn (when a normal symbol winning game is executed) in a normal symbol drawing (normal symbol drawing) in which the lottery conditions can be met when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Here, we will briefly explain the details of the normal symbol drawing (normal symbol drawing) and the normal symbol winning game in this seventh embodiment.

In the seventh embodiment, even when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the ball can enter the right electric device 164 by playing from the right, although it is a low probability. For example, when playing from the right during the normal state, the ball can enter the right electric device 164 at a rate of about 1 in 50 balls. This ball entry rate is set lower than the rate of balls entering the first ball entry port 64 when playing from the left during the normal state (a rate of about 1 in 20 balls). The ball that enters the right electric device 164 is always configured to enter the right first ball entry port 164r. And, when the ball enters the right electric device 164, the right to select the first special pattern is acquired (the selection condition is established) in the same way as when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64.

Furthermore, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, a prize ball (4 balls) is awarded in addition to the right to draw for the first special symbol as a special privilege for inserting the ball. On the other hand, when a ball is inserted into the right electric device 164, a prize ball (1 ball) is awarded in addition to the right to draw for the first special symbol as a special privilege for inserting the ball. In other words, when the normal state (low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, it is easier to obtain the right to draw for the first special symbol by playing left-handed than by playing right-handed, and the number of prize balls awarded when the ball is inserted into the ball entrance to obtain the right to draw for the first special symbol is greater. Therefore, left-handed play is more advantageous to the player than right-handed play during the normal state.

When playing right-hand during normal play, approximately 1/3 of the balls flowing down the right area will enter the right second ball entrance 645. When a ball enters this right second ball entrance 645, the right to draw the second special symbol is granted, and one prize ball is awarded. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the second special symbol drawing performed during normal play is configured to have a long fluctuation time (10 minutes). Also, in this embodiment, the right to draw the second special symbol is configured not to be stored (reserved). Therefore, even if right-hand play is performed during normal play, the second special symbol drawing will not be performed smoothly.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, when a jackpot game is played, a right-hand shot game is played, and a game in which the ball enters the variable winning device 650 is executed. During the jackpot game, the normal state of the normal pattern is set, so that during the jackpot game, the ball enters the right first ball entrance 164r in the right electric device 164, and after the jackpot game ends, the reserved memory number (reserved ball number) of the first special pattern becomes the upper limit value.

As a result, if a potential state is set after the end of a big win game, the game will start with the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol at the maximum. In this embodiment, when a potential state is set, a short change (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) is selected as the change time for the second special symbol, and a long change (10 minutes) is selected as the change time for the first special symbol. Then, a game (small win RUSH) is executed in which many prize balls are acquired while frequent small wins are generated in the second special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern during the latent state reaches a predetermined number (1 or 2), a short change time is more likely to be selected as the change time for the second special pattern than when the number is other than the predetermined number (0, 3, 4). In other words, the period during which the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern reaches the predetermined number during the latent state is the period during which the number of small win games executed per unit time is most likely to be the greatest, and is a game period that is advantageous to the player.

As described above, this embodiment does not have a reserved memory function that stores the right to select the second special symbol, so it is necessary to continue playing right-hand during the potential state. The change time of the first special symbol during the potential state is configured to be long (10 minutes). Therefore, during the potential state, it is difficult to make the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reach a predetermined number (1 or 2) with the passage of the change time of the first special symbol. Therefore, in this embodiment, in some cases where a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded) due to a miss. This allows the player to play a game of reducing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while playing a game of aiming to win a small jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol during the potential state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the system is configured to set an advantageous period for the second special pattern lottery (variable) during the potential state based on the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern, and further configured so that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern can increase when a game (right-hand play) is played that attempts to execute the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, when an advantageous period for the second special pattern lottery (variable) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long that advantageous period will last.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have a reserved memory function for storing the lottery right for the second special pattern, it is configured to select the change time of the second special pattern based on the reserved memory number of the first special pattern, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to select the change time of the second special pattern based on the value obtained by adding up the reserved memory number of the first special pattern and the reserved memory number of the second special pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol selected during the latent state is always configured to be a long variation time, but without being limited to this, for example, a short variation time (e.g., 20 seconds) may be selected with a probability of about 1/10 as the variation time of the first special symbol during the latent state. By configuring in this way, the passage of time for the variation of the first special symbol can be included in a realistic method of reducing the reserved memory of the first special symbol during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to have multiple opportunities to reduce the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol during the latent state.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, when the discard condition is met in some cases where a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded. However, a discard condition that can be met regardless of the lottery result for the second special symbol may be used. For example, a discard condition that is met when the number of balls entering the right variable winning device 1650 during the execution of the small jackpot game exceeds a predetermined winning condition (for example, 11 winning balls), or a discard condition that can be met when a ball enters a ball entry hole located in one of the game areas (right side area) of the game board 13 may be set. In this way, by having the discard state for the first special symbol be met due to various factors, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the advantageous period will be set.

Next, the configuration of the right electric role 164 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 158 and 159. Figure 158(a) is a front perspective view showing the right electric role 164 in a closed state (when the opening and closing door 164r1 is closed), and Figure 158(b) is a front perspective view showing the right electric role 164 in an open state (when the opening and closing door 164r1 is open).

As shown in FIG. 158(a), the upper surface of the opening and closing door 164r1 is provided with convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c that are provided to prevent the game ball from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 164r1 is prevented from flowing down by each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, so it flows down the opening and closing door 164r1 from the left side to the right side in the figure along the outer periphery of each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. In other words, a zigzag-shaped flow path is formed on the opening and closing door 164r1 by each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. Therefore, compared to when each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c is not provided (i.e., when the game ball flows linearly down the opening and closing door 164r1 from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front), the period required for the game ball to completely flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 164r1 can be made longer. This makes it easier for multiple balls (subsequent balls) to reach the top of the opening and closing door 164r1 while one ball is flowing down the top of the opening and closing door 164r1. This makes it possible to lengthen the period during which a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down the top of the opening and closing door 164r1, making it easier for the ball to enter the right electric device 164 when a normal winning game is executed.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, but in this embodiment, when a high probability state (high probability state) of a normal symbol is set as the game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time, the operation content of the normal symbol winning game, and the path of the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 are designed so that most of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right electric device 164. By configuring in this way, the high probability state increases the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery more than in the normal state, and by playing right-hand, it is possible to make it easier to draw the first special symbol than in the normal state. In addition, since it is difficult to draw the second special symbol during the high probability state, it is possible to prevent a game that is excessively advantageous to a player playing during the high probability state from being played. Note that in this embodiment, in the unlikely event that a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the high probability state and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a fluctuation time (60 seconds) shorter than in the normal state is selected.

This configuration prevents a situation in which the probability of a game changing to a potential probability of a game changing state occurs while the second special symbol variation is being carried out for a long period of time (e.g., 10 minutes), and the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be carried out for a long period of time despite the change to the potential probability of a game changing state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as transition conditions for transitioning the game state from the high probability state to the latent probability state, a first transition condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern lottery (variation) executed during the high probability state reaches a predetermined number (50 times), and a second transition condition that is established when a specific small prize (small prize C) is won in the lottery for the second special pattern executed during the high probability state are set. In other words, in a high probability state in which the lottery for the second special pattern is difficult to execute, if a specific small prize (small prize C) is won in the lottery for the second special pattern (if the second transition condition is established), it is possible to transition to the latent probability state even if the number of times the special pattern lottery (variation) executed during the high probability state has not reached the predetermined number (50 times).

Figure 158 (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening and closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in Figure 158 (b), the opening and closing door 164r1 slides from the front side as viewed from the front to the back side as viewed from the front, and is stored inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. This causes the right first ball entrance 164r to be in an open state. Although detailed explanations are omitted, this opening and closing door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can be switched between an on state and an off state based on an instruction from the main control device 110, and is configured so that when a current is passed through this solenoid, the solenoid is turned on and the opening and closing door 164r1 is opened. In other words, it is configured so that a current flows through the solenoid only when a winning lottery for a normal pattern is won and a normal pattern winning game is executed. This allows the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced because there is no need to use electricity during the period when the opening and closing door 164r1 is closed, which accounts for a large proportion of the time that the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10.

When the first ball entrance 164r is opened (the opening door 164r1 is in an open state), a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the right electric device 164. In addition, the heightwise distance of the opening for storing the opening door 164r1 is sufficiently low compared to the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball that was flowing down the top surface of the opening door 164r1 at the time the sliding movement of the opening door 164r1 begins is not stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening door 164r1, and when the opening door 164r1 slides into the inside of the game board 13, the ball located on the top surface of the opening door 164r1 can be dropped from above the opening door 164r1 toward the first ball entrance 164r.

In the seventh embodiment, the three protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1, so that the game ball detours around the protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c and the time period during which the game ball passes through the opening/closing door 164r1 is lengthened, but this is not limited to the above. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the protrusions 164r1a to 164r1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 may be made of a material with a higher friction coefficient (e.g., an elastic body) than other parts (such as the surface of the game board 13 or the inner surface of the variable winning device 65), or the material may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, by providing an uneven surface).

Figure 159 is a plan view of the opening and closing door 164r1 as seen from the vertical top side. As shown in Figure 159, in the upper surface of the opening and closing door 164r1, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of a ball are embedded in a meandering path along which the ball can (easily) roll. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged at a distance that is at least greater than the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 164r1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are composed of known optical sensors that output H (high) when a game ball is placed above them and output L (low) when there is nothing obstructing them above. In this seventh embodiment, the combination of outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored by the voice lamp control device 113. The system is then configured to calculate the ball's passing status on the opening and closing door 164r1 by combining the outputs of the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and to issue a ball passing status notification based on the calculation results.

This configuration allows the player to know how close the ball shot by right-hand play during the probability variable state is to the right second ball entrance 645. Therefore, by shifting the timing of right-hand play during the probability variable state based on the contents of the ball passing status notification that is executed, the interest of the game during the probability variable state can be improved. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged only on the opening and closing door 164r1, but this is not limited to this. For example, the passing detection sensors may be provided in the area from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 to when it reaches the opening and closing door 164r1, or in the area after it passes through the top surface of the opening and closing door 164r1, so that the number of balls that reach the opening and closing door 164r1 or the number of balls that pass through the top surface of the opening and closing door 164r1 can be detected.

Next, referring to Figure 160, the flow state of the ball released by right-handed play as it flows down the right-side area will be explained. Figure 160(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow state of the ball when it enters the right second ball entrance 645 in a potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and Figure 160(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow state of the ball when it is in a potential state and a small win game is being played.

In the seventh embodiment, when a potential winning state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the most advantageous play for the player is to play right to make the ball enter the right second ball entrance 645. When right-handed play is performed during a potential winning state, as shown in FIG. 160(a), the ball passes through the through gate 67, flows down the top of the opening and closing door 164r1 of the right electric role 164, which is in the closed state, and enters the right second ball entrance 645.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the potential state, which is a state of low probability of winning a normal symbol, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is set to 1/2, and the period (variable time) from when the normal symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed) is set to 30 seconds. In other words, if right-handed play is performed during a game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state, potential state, jackpot game state), the ball will pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 1 in 2 balls, so a normal symbol winning will be won at a rate of 1 in 4 balls, and a normal symbol winning game will be executed at a rate of 1 in 60 seconds.

Furthermore, in this seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a serpentine ball flow path (passing period 1.3 seconds) is formed on the opening and closing door 164r1 of the right electric device 164, which is opened as a normal winning game, so that by continuously playing right-handed games, it is possible with a high probability to have multiple balls stay on the opening and closing door 164r1 of the right electric device 164, which is in a closed state.

Therefore, even when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to have one or two balls enter the right electric device 164 per minute. In addition, because the right electric device 164 is configured to make it easy for balls to stay on the opening and closing door 164r1, even if the play period for a normal symbol hit game is set to a short period (for example, 0.2 seconds open), it is easy for balls to enter the right electric device 164 during that normal symbol hit game.

By setting the play period for the normal winning game to be short in this way, if a right-hit game is executed after it is determined that a normal winning game will be executed based on the normal symbol stop display mode, it is possible to end the normal winning game before the ball reaches the right electric device 164. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right-hit game from being executed after it is determined that the lottery result for the normal symbol is a winning one, and to efficiently prevent the ball from entering the right electric device 164.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable winning device (second attacker) that opens during a small win game is provided above (upstream from) the through gate 67. Therefore, even if a low probability state for a normal symbol is set, if the game state (latent state) allows the second special symbol lottery to be smoothly executed, the small win game is executed, and the ball can be prevented from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric device 164.

By configuring it in this way, even if a low probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to make it more difficult for a ball to enter the right electric device 164 in the potential state than in the normal state or during a jackpot game. Therefore, by making a ball enter the right electric device 164 in a right-hit game performed during a jackpot game, it is possible to obtain the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) up to the upper limit, while preventing an excessive increase in the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 due to a right-hit game performed during the potential state.

<About the content of the performance in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 161 to 165, characteristic performance contents among various performance contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the flow of performance from when the probability variable state is set as the game state until the potential probability state is set, and the flow of performance executed during the potential probability state will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, the flow of the presentation from when the probability variable state is set as the game state until the potential probability state is set will be described. In this embodiment, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is established in the probability variable state, the game state is transitioned from the probability variable state to the potential probability state. Specifically, as the probability variable state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, and the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until 50 special symbol lotteries are executed. In other words, when the probability variable state is set and 50 special symbol lotteries are executed without winning a jackpot, the game state is transitioned from the probability variable state to the potential probability state. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the probability variable state is set, a presentation is executed to suggest the period until the potential probability state that is most advantageous to the player is set. This allows players to easily understand the conditions that must be met before the potential state is set.

Figure 161 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when the probability change state (probability change mode) is set, and Figure 161 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when the conditions for transitioning to the potential probability change state are met during the probability change mode.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the time-saving count is passed (added) in the high probability state, and the game directly transitions to the most favorable potential mode (potential state). For this reason, in the high probability state (high probability mode), an effect is executed that aims for the potential state. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161(a), an effect is executed in which a rabbit-like character 811 climbs a rocky mountain. In addition, the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain displays the text "Aim for the top!!", and the display area HR2 formed to the right of the character 811 displays a display content that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations (number of lottery draws) until the high probability mode ends (when the time-saving count has passed a predetermined number (for example, 50 times)). The example in FIG. 161(a) illustrates a case in which the text "50m remaining" is displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display to the top is decremented by 1m each time the change display (change display of the third symbol) is executed, so the player can easily understand that the remaining meter (distance) to the top is the remaining number of changes before switching to the potential mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 described above is changed (subtracted) each time the variable display of the third pattern is executed, and when the display mode of the meter display after the change (subtraction) becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "0m remaining"), the game state transitions from the certain variable state to the potential variable state; however, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be added each time the variable display of the third pattern is executed, and when the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is added up to a specific numerical value, the potential variable mode is set. Also, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the meter display each time the variable display of the third pattern is executed, and for example, it may be configured to change the display mode of the meter display when the variable display of the third pattern is executed multiple times. By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the display mode of the meter display changes can be made different from the timing of the variable display of the third symbol, so that the player can be made aware of the approximate period until the potential mode (potential state) is set, while still being able to provide an unexpected effect by executing an effect that causes the display mode (number) of the meter display to decrease significantly all at once.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in display area HR2 is configured to only execute an effect of subtracting the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display in order to inform the player that the period until the potential mode is set is shortening (the timing for the transition condition to be met is approaching), but it is sufficient that a specific transition display mode (e.g., "0m remaining") is displayed when the potential mode is set, and for example, an effect may be executed in which the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is temporarily increased while the potential mode is set. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the potential mode will be set, allowing the player to play while constantly hoping that the potential mode will be set.

In this case, at least a plurality of transition conditions are set as transition conditions for transitioning from the high probability state to the low probability state, specifically, depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the high probability state to be set and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, as a time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state, from among a first transition condition that is easier to achieve (e.g., 20 time-saving times) and a second transition condition that is harder to achieve than the first transition condition (e.g., 50 time-saving times), and when the high probability state is set, a display mode (e.g., "20m remaining") indicating the period until the first transition condition that is easier to achieve is achieved is displayed in the display area HR2, and if the actually set time-saving end condition is the first transition condition, an effect is executed in which the display mode of the meter display is decreased as it is, and if the actually set time-saving end condition is the second transition condition, a specific transition display mode is displayed at the timing when the second transition condition is achieved while increasing the display mode of the meter display based on the remaining number of time-saving times. By configuring it in this way, when a special state is set after a big win game ends, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time-saving end conditions are that are set for this special state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, multiple time-saving end conditions are set in the probability variable state that is set after a specific jackpot game is played. More specifically, a first time-saving end condition is set when the number of times that the special symbol variation (lottery) performed during the probability variable state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), and a second time-saving end condition is set when the result of the special symbol variation (lottery) performed during the probability variable state is a specific result (e.g., winning a small jackpot C). Then, the display area HR2 is configured to display a meter display based on the first time-saving end condition that can calculate the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied in advance. In other words, during the probability variable state, the meter display is subtracted each time a special symbol variation is executed, and when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (e.g., "0m remaining"), a performance is executed to notify that a potential probability state is set. On the other hand, if the second time-saving end condition is met before the first time-saving end condition described above is met (before the display state of the meter display becomes a specific transition display state), a shortened effect in which the display state (number) of the meter display suddenly decreases is executed, in which the character 811 climbs a mountain with vigor, followed by an effect in which the meter display becomes a specific transition display state (for example, "0m remaining").

In this way, by configuring the meter display displayed in display area HR2 to be variable in various ways, it is possible to make it difficult to understand when the transition to the potential state will occur, so that a player playing in the potential state can play while constantly anticipating the transition to the potential state. Furthermore, regardless of which of the time-saving end conditions is met, a specific transition display mode is displayed as the display mode of the meter display, thereby notifying the player of the transition to the potential state, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand presentation.

Next, referring to FIG. 161(b), the effects that are executed when the time-saving end condition is met during the high probability state will be described. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the time-saving number of times has elapsed (the time-saving end condition is met) in the high probability mode (high probability state). As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the time-saving end condition (for example, a predetermined number of special pattern changes) is met, an effect is executed in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rock mountain, and the words "Reached the top!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the words "0m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has transitioned to a potential probability state (potential probability mode).

In this embodiment, when the potential state is set, by executing a right-hit game, the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than when a game state other than the potential state is set, and the lottery for the second special symbol has a high probability of winning a small prize (a higher probability than the lottery for the first special symbol). By executing the lottery for the second special symbol frequently, the small prize game is executed frequently, and the player is allowed to execute a game in which he or she can win many benefits (prize balls). Hereinafter, the game in which the small prize game is executed frequently by the lottery for the second special symbol in the potential state is referred to as "RUSH", and the effect executed during the RUSH game is referred to as "RUSH effect" in the following explanation.

Figure 162(a) is a diagram showing the display state in the preparation state between the transition to the potential state (potential mode) and the state in which prize balls can actually be won (until a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol). As shown in Figure 162(a), in the preparation state, the words "Right hit" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and the words "Right hit to start the RUSH!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, the words "RUSH preparation in progress" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that by playing with a right hit, the player will enter a RUSH state in which prize balls can be won.

In other words, in this embodiment, the potential state is set when the time-saving end condition is met in the potential state, but there are cases where the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed immediately after the potential state is set. Specifically, if the second special symbol change is executed during the potential state, and the time-saving end condition is met based on the execution of the first special symbol change while the second special symbol change is being executed, the game state will transition from the potential state to the potential state while the second special symbol change is being executed. In this case, a situation will occur in which the second special symbol change in the potential state is not executed until the second special symbol change being executed (the second special symbol change that started to change during the potential state) is stopped and displayed.

In this way, if there is a specified period of time during which a new second special pattern lottery cannot be performed after the potential state is set, the display screen (RUSH preparation screen) shown in FIG. 162(a) can be displayed to inform the player that a RUSH game will be performed later, thereby preventing the player from feeling distrustful of the period during which a RUSH game is not performed despite the potential state being set.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the game state transitions from the high probability state to the potential probability state, if the remaining time of the second special symbol change being executed is a predetermined period or more (e.g., 10 seconds or more), the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162(a) is executed. However, if the length of the period from when a game state in which an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed is set to when the execution conditions of the advantageous game are actually established is a predetermined period, it is sufficient to configure the device to notify the player that the advantageous game will be executed later. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game method (e.g., left-hand play) executed by the player during an unfavorable game (high probability state) is different from the game method (e.g., right-hand play) executed by the player during an advantageous game (potential state), the RUSH preparation display shown in FIG. 162(a) may be executed using the period from when the potential probability state is set to when the second special symbol change is actually executed by right-hand play.

Furthermore, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which an unfavorable game state that is disadvantageous to the player is more likely to result in a loss in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the selected variation time is more likely to be longer than in a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player, and in which a second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed during a normal winning game that is executed when a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162(a) may be executed during the period until the normal symbol variation executed during the unfavorable game state is stopped and displayed at the time when the favorable game state is set. In this case, it is preferable to make the display mode of "Right hit" displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 invisible (displayed in a hard-to-see manner) on the display screen shown in FIG. 162(a), or to display the text "Preparing, please wait a moment" in the display area HR1. In other words, it is better to display the RUSH preparation period display to inform the player that although the potential state is set, the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (is difficult to execute) even if the player plays a right-hand hit. This prevents the RUSH game from being executed despite the right-hand hit being executed, which can cause the player to feel distrustful.

When the second special symbol variation (lottery) is executed during the potential winning state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162(b) is displayed and the RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162(b), when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the potential winning state and the second special symbol variation that has won the small win is executed, the words "RUSH Start" are displayed in the display area HR1, and the words "RUSH Enter!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Furthermore, an icon resembling a treasure chest (treasure chest 812) is displayed in the main display area Dm. This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the effect (RUSH effect) using the icon resembling a treasure chest (treasure chest 812) is executed during the RUSH game.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the display contents of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, an effect is executed in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812. Then, an effect is executed in which a lottery result display mode showing the lottery result of this second special pattern lottery is displayed from the opened treasure box 812. As the lottery result display mode, for example, if the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is a small win, a display mode imitating the character "win" is displayed, if it is a big win, a display mode imitating the character "win" is displayed, and if it is a miss, a display mode imitating a "cross mark" is displayed. In this way, the lottery results for the second special symbol can be displayed simply by executing an effect to open the treasure chest 812 and an effect to display the contents of the treasure chest 812, which is always displayed. Therefore, compared to executing an effect to display the treasure chest 812, an effect to open the treasure chest 812, and an effect to display the contents of the treasure chest 812, the number of effects executed can be reduced even if the change time of the second special symbol is set short, and an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 164 and FIG. 165, the effects executed during a Super RUSH game that are more advantageous to the player than other RUSH games will be described. In this embodiment, the change time of the second special symbol executed during the potential state is configured to be variable based on the number of reserved special symbols (the number of reserved first special symbols), and specifically, the second special symbol change executed when the number of reserved special symbols is a specific number (e.g., 1) is configured to be more likely to select a shorter change time than the second special symbol change executed when the number of reserved special symbols is other than the specific number. As described above, while the potential state is set, an effect is executed that grants a bonus (prize balls) to the player by frequently playing small jackpot games based on the small jackpot win of the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the shorter the time for the second special symbol to change during the potential win state, the greater the proportion of the small win game period in the unit time, allowing the player to enjoy a more comfortable game state. In the following, the RUSH game during the period when the number of reserved special symbols reaches a specific number and the time for the second special symbol to change becomes shorter will be referred to as a Super RUSH game and explained.

First, the contents of the performance executed when the RUSH game is switched to the SUPER RUSH game will be explained. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the performance executed in a state in which the number of reserved special symbols is likely to be subtracted during the RUSH game. In this embodiment, when a specific small win (e.g., small win B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the potential state, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss. In addition, a long variation time (e.g., 10 minutes) is likely to be selected for the first special symbol variation executed during the potential state. Furthermore, a reserved ball of the first special symbol (reserved ball of special symbol 1) can be acquired by right-hitting play executed during the potential state. In other words, the system is configured so that it is difficult to reduce the reserved ball of special symbol 1 based on the passage of variation time while executing the RUSH game during the potential state.

Therefore, in order to reduce the number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 until the conditions for executing the Super RUSH game are met, it is necessary to win a specific small win in the second special pattern lottery. Then, when the second special pattern variation that wins the specific small win is executed, as shown in FIG. 164(a), the words "Aim for a higher peak" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and an effect is executed in the main display area Dm to have the character 811 aim for a higher position.

Specifically, a display mode is displayed that indicates the stage corresponding to the difference between the currently acquired number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 and the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 that is the condition for playing the Super RUSH game, and a guidance suggestion display that indicates to the player the situation until the Super RUSH game is played is displayed in the display area HR71 formed to the right of the main display area Dm.

When a specific small win is won multiple times during RUSH play and the number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 reaches a specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164(b) is displayed. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the conditions for playing Super RUSH play are met. When the conditions for playing Super RUSH play are met (for example, the number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 becomes 2), the character 811 reaches the top, and a display mode of holding the ball in hand is displayed to notify that the conditions for playing Super RUSH play have been met. Then, the display mode "2" is displayed in the display area HR71, indicating that the current number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 meets the conditions for playing Super RUSH play.

In addition, when Fig. 164(a) and (b) are displayed, that is, after the performance mode suggesting the Super RUSH entry is set in the special symbol discard setting process (see S4643 in Fig. 186) described later, if a new special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, the Super RUSH game may not be executed if the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded. Therefore, when Fig. 164(a) and (b) are displayed, a process is executed to determine whether a new special symbol 1 reservation has been acquired, and if so, a process is executed to switch the performance mode. For example, when a new special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, a performance is executed in which the peak shown in Fig. 164(a) moves away in accordance with the number of newly acquired special symbol 1 reservations. This makes it possible to execute a performance that does not give the player a sense of incongruity even if the Super RUSH entry trigger disappears during the execution of a performance suggesting the Super RUSH entry.

In addition, in Fig. 164 (a) and (b), the contents of the performance when the Super RUSH game is executed by decreasing the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 1 are explained, but in addition to this, when the Super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 1, a performance suggesting the entry into the Super RUSH is executed. In this case, a process is executed to determine whether the current state is a state in which an advantageous period (period in which the Super RUSH game is executed) is set by increasing the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 1 by one (increased advantageous state), and if it is determined that the increased advantageous state is present, it is determined whether or not a normal pattern winning game is executed. In this determination, it is determined whether or not a normal pattern winning game is executed based on the lottery result of the normal pattern variation being executed and the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) of whether information that wins a normal pattern is included in the pre-reading process based on the information reserved for the normal pattern (corresponding to the process of executing the same process for the pre-reading process for the special pattern executed in each of the above-mentioned embodiments for the normal pattern) is executed. Then, if it is determined that a normal winning game will be played, a Super RUSH entry effect will be executed to indicate that an opportunity to increase the reserved number of special number 1 will soon arrive.

As the presentation mode of this Super RUSH entry presentation, a notification mode is set in which the player is notified that the Super RUSH game will be executed by increasing the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (by having a ball enter the right electric role 164). This makes it easier for the player to establish the conditions for executing the Super RUSH game. In this embodiment, the presentation is configured to enable the player to grasp the conditions for executing the Super RUSH game, that is, to distinguish between a case in which the Super RUSH game is executed by decreasing the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 and a case in which the Super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1. However, without being limited to this, for example, the presentation may be configured to notify the player only that the conditions for executing the Super RUSH game are likely to be established, and to allow the player to select whether to execute a game that increases the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 or to execute a game that decreases the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1.

Next, the contents of the effects executed during Super RUSH will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during Super RUSH. When Super RUSH play is executed, the second special pattern variation with a shorter variation time than normal RUSH play is more likely to be executed, and as a result, the interval between small win games is shorter and the number of small win games executed per unit time can be greater than normal RUSH play. Therefore, during Super RUSH play, the game period is more advantageous to the player than during normal RUSH play. During Super RUSH play, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the word "Super RUSH" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and multiple treasure chests 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the word "Speed Up" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In other words, during Super RUSH play, the time for the second special symbol to change is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and it would be difficult to use the period during which the second special symbol changes to execute an effect suggesting the result of the second special symbol lottery (an effect that displays a treasure chest) and an effect that notifies the player of the lottery result (an effect that opens a treasure chest and displays its contents) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Therefore, multiple treasure chests 812a to 812c are displayed in advance, and an effect that opens the treasure chest appropriately based on the lottery result is executed.

Specifically, a plurality of treasure chests with different display modes (e.g., colors and designs) are displayed in advance, and an effect is executed in which a treasure chest is opened according to the result of the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed. In this case, if the lottery result for the second special symbol is favorable to the player, for example, a jackpot that sets a latent state again after the jackpot game ends, a gorgeous rainbow or gold treasure chest is opened, and if the lottery result is unfavorable to the player, for example, a jackpot that sets a normal state after the jackpot game ends, that is, a jackpot that ends the RUSH game, an effect is executed in which a tattered treasure chest is opened.

In this way, by displaying multiple treasure chests with different display modes in advance, it is possible to easily execute a performance that suggests the lottery results (a performance that changes the display mode of the treasure chest to be opened) without executing a performance that changes the display mode of the displayed treasure chest according to the result of the second special pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol that is mainly executed during RUSH play (Super RUSH play) does not have a reserved memory function, it is configured such that, for example, it is not possible to determine the winning information of the reserved and stored second special symbol in advance and, based on the result of this advance determination, execute an effect suggesting the lottery result from the period before the second special symbol variation based on the winning information is executed (so-called pre-reading effect). Therefore, since it is difficult to set a long period for executing the effect suggesting the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, the effect of displaying multiple treasure chests with different display modes in advance as described above can be further enhanced.

When using a configuration in which multiple treasure chests with different display modes are displayed in advance as in this embodiment, the number of treasure chests displayed simultaneously and the display mode may be set randomly, or the display mode may be changed depending on the number of times the game is played during the potential winning state (the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed). In addition, the current number of reserved balls for the special pattern (the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern) may be read out, and based on the readout result, it may be determined whether or not the Super RUSH game is in a state where it is likely to end, and the display mode and number of treasure chests may be changed based on the result of the determination. By configuring in this way, the display mode and number of treasure chests can be used to allow the player to grasp not only the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery, but also the playing status of the Super RUSH game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 165(b), the contents of the effect suggesting the end of the Super RUSH game during the Super RUSH game will be described. FIG. 165(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the Super RUSH game. As described above, in this embodiment, the Super RUSH game is configured to be executed when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol (the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol) is a specific number (1 or 2), and the right side area of the game board 13 is configured so that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) can be increased by a game (right-hand play) executed during the Super RUSH game (see FIG. 157).

Therefore, during Super RUSH play, the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 may increase, i.e., the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 may increase from two to three, causing the Super RUSH game to end. In such a case, an end suggestion effect such as that shown in FIG. 165(b) is executed. The state shown in FIG. 165(b) is an end suggestion effect that is executed when there are two reserved balls for Special Chart 1, a normal pattern is won during Super RUSH play (winning probability 1/30), and the right electric role 164 is opened, and the main display area Dm displays a display mode in which the character 811 crouches down, suggesting that the Super RUSH game is ending. Then, the words "End in Situation" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

By executing the end suggestion performance in this way, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable when a ball enters the right electric device 164 during a Super RUSH game and the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 increases, causing the Super RUSH game to transition to a normal RUSH game. In the example shown in FIG. 165(b), the cause of the Super RUSH game ending, that is, the state in which the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is likely to increase (a state in which a normal winning game is executed), is not notified to the player, but it is possible to execute a guide announcement that makes it difficult for a ball to enter the right electric device 164 during a normal winning game by displaying a comment such as "Stop hitting the right side and let the rabbit rest." This prevents the Super RUSH game from ending due to an increase in the number of reserved balls for Special Pattern 1, and also allows the player to focus on the display content displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the Super RUSH game, enhancing the presentation effect.

The timing of the execution of the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 165(b) may be the start of a game in which a normal symbol wins, the start of a normal symbol change (change time 10 to 30 seconds) that has been won in a normal symbol win, the timing when the remaining change time of the normal symbol change reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), or a predetermined timing that is set based on the results of a pre-determined determination of information contained in the normal symbol reserved ball (e.g., 30 seconds before a game in which a normal symbol wins is executed).

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned guidance notification (a guidance notification that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the right electric device 164 during a normal winning game by interrupting the right-hand play) is executed, it is preferable to execute the guidance notification after securing a period of time in which the ball shot by the right-hand play executed before the interruption cannot enter the right electric device 164 when the right-hand play is interrupted after grasping the contents of the guidance notification, and for example, it is preferable to configure it to execute the guidance notification 10 seconds before the normal winning game is executed. This allows the player who grasped the guidance notification to reliably execute a game that does not increase the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1. In addition, when a normal winning game is not actually executed, or, for example, when it is determined in advance that the information contained in the normal pattern reserved balls will be executed in 60 seconds, that is, when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 cannot increase even if the right-hand play is not interrupted, the above-mentioned end suggestion performance (so-called false performance) may be executed.

In the above-mentioned FIG. 165(b), an end indication effect is explained which is executed when the number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 increases, causing the number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 to no longer be a specific number (1 or 2), and the Super RUSH game may end. However, conversely, there are also cases where the number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 decreases, causing the number of reserved balls on Special Chart 1 to no longer be a specific number (1 or 2), and the Super RUSH game may end.

Now, referring to FIG. 166, we will explain the end suggestion effect that is executed when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 decreases, resulting in the end of the Super RUSH game. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen for the end suggestion effect that is executed when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 decreases, resulting in the end of the Super RUSH game. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state in which the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 is 1, and the remaining change time of the first special pattern change that is being executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, the end suggestion effect is being executed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 165(b) described above.

In this case, the first special symbol change will stop after 1.5 seconds, and the next first special symbol change will start, causing the number of reserved balls in Special Symbol 1 to become 0, and the Super RUSH game will end. Therefore, the words "End in danger!! Save your reserved balls" will be displayed in the secondary display area Ds. By executing the end suggestion performance in this way, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the Super RUSH game will end unless the number of reserved balls in Special Symbol 1 is increased.

In this embodiment, multiple triggers are provided to reduce the number of reserved balls on special chart 1. As shown in FIG. 166, in addition to the case where the first special symbol change that is in progress stops when the change time has elapsed, there is also the case where a specific small jackpot (small jackpot B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol change that is in progress is forcibly stopped (discarded). Regardless of the state in which any of the triggers is established (can be established), the end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 166 is executed, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the Super RUSH game transitions to a normal RUSH game.

The timing for executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166 may be configured to determine the remaining time of the first special pattern change being executed or the remaining time of the second special pattern change that has won the small prize B, calculate the remaining time until the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 becomes 0 based on the determination result, and execute the effect when the calculation result reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds), or to execute the effect at a predetermined interval (e.g., 30 seconds) from the time when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 becomes 1 from 2. In other words, since the state in which the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 is 1 means that the Super RUSH game will continue even if the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 increases by 1, the end suggestion effect may be executed to make the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 2 without determining the timing when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 may become 0.

As described above, in this embodiment, the Super RUSH game can end whether the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 1 increases or decreases, so a player playing Super RUSH can be offered a new and innovative gameplay that has never been seen before, in that the player can continue playing the Super RUSH game by increasing the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 1, or continue playing the Super RUSH game by not increasing the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 1.

It is also possible to configure the device to be different from the content of the present embodiment, for example, to make the presentation mode of the end suggestion presentation (see FIG. 165(b)) executed in a state where the end condition for ending the Super RUSH game is likely to be met by increasing the number of reserved balls of the special chart 1 and the end suggestion presentation (see FIG. 166) executed in a state where the end condition for ending the Super RUSH game is likely to be met by decreasing the number of reserved balls of the special chart 1 the same, and to execute a presentation in which the player can select whether or not to continue the right-hand hit game in the sub-display area Ds. This allows the duration of the Super RUSH game to be different depending on the play method selected by the player, that is, the play method of continuing the Super RUSH game by performing a right-hand hit game to increase the number of reserved balls of the special chart 1, and the play method of continuing the Super RUSH game by interrupting the right-hand hit game to prevent the number of reserved balls of the special chart 1 from increasing, so that the player can be motivated to play. Furthermore, if a player selects an incorrect gameplay method, that gameplay method will be one that makes it easier to achieve the conditions for ending the Super RUSH game, so the gameplay method selected by the player can have a greater impact on the game results later on.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the period during which the Super RUSH game is executed is configured so that the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is a specific range (1, 2) in which the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is continuous, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 during which the Super RUSH game is executed may be set to a non-continuous range, and for example, the Super RUSH game may be executed when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is 1 and 3. In this case, as an end suggestion performance, when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 can be 1 to 0 or 3 to 4, an end suggestion performance similar to that shown in FIG. 165(b) and FIG. 166 described above is executed, and when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 can be 1 to 2 or 3 to 2, a standby performance is executed as a performance suggesting a transition to a standby state for the Super RUSH game, rather than suggesting the end of the Super RUSH. In other words, according to the above example, when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is two, the Super RUSH game will be executed whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is decreased or increased, so compared to when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is zero or four, the Super RUSH game is more likely to be executed (standby state), and the standby effect can be executed to inform the player of this in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in this case, the change time selected in the first special pattern change executed when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is two (the first special pattern change when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is two after subtracting the reserved balls in the first special pattern lottery used this time) may be configured to be shorter than when the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is zero or four. This makes it easier to transition from the standby state to the Super RUSH game, and makes the player who has transitioned to the standby state eager to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 167, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram that shows the transition of game states in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in this embodiment, the game states can be set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). The amount of the bonus given to the player playing the game is configured to differ depending on the game state that is set. Specifically, the game is configured so that the player is given the most bonus when the potential state is set, followed by the probability state and the normal state, in which the amount of the bonus given to the player decreases.

In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the normal state is set as the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). During the normal state, a left-handed play is performed rather than a right-handed play, so a left-handed play is performed to aim for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during the normal state, a first special pattern lottery is performed with a probability of 1/200 to win a jackpot. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends is set with a probability of 35%, a jackpot type (jackpot B7) in which a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set with a probability of 45%, and a jackpot type (jackpot C7) in which a potential probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is set with a probability of 20%.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery during the normal state, the game is configured so that it is most likely to transition to the high probability state, then to the normal state, and least likely to transition to the potential probability state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which the most advantageous potential probability state is set for the player by going through multiple game states.

Next, when the probability of winning is set, the normal pattern is in a high probability state, so the right electric device 164 is more likely to open than the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and the ball is more likely to enter the right first ball entrance 164r by playing right than by playing left, so a game in which the first special pattern lottery is executed by playing right. Furthermore, during the probability of winning, the special pattern is in a high probability state, and a first special pattern lottery is executed with a probability of winning a jackpot at 1/60. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the probability of winning, a jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends is set with a probability of 35%, a jackpot type (jackpot B7) in which a potential state is set after the jackpot game ends is set with a probability of 45%, and a jackpot type (jackpot C7) in which a probability of winning a jackpot game again is set with a probability of 20%.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the probability variable state is configured to be more likely to transition to the potential variable state when a jackpot is won than the normal state, which is the initial state. This makes it easier for the probability variable state to transition to the potential variable state when a jackpot is won during the normal state, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In addition, when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot while the high probability state is set, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the normal symbol (time-saving end condition) is established, and the game is configured to transition to the potential state. In other words, when the potential state is set, the potential state is set when either of the following transition conditions is established: the first transition condition (probability of establishment is about 35%), which is established when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot (probability of winning 1/60), or the second transition condition (probability of establishment is about 30%), which is established when the jackpot is won during the potential state and the jackpot B7 is set. In addition, the probability of establishment of the first transition condition described above varies depending on the remaining period of the potential state. For example, in a state where the special symbol variation has been executed 49 times during the potential state, the first transition condition is established (probability of establishment is about 90%) when the next special symbol variation executed 50 times results in a miss (probability of winning 59/60).

In this way, when multiple transition conditions are provided for transitioning the game state from the high probability state to the latent probability state, by providing a transition condition (first transition condition) whose probability of establishment varies depending on the number of times the special symbol variation is performed, and a transition condition (second transition condition) whose probability of establishment does not vary depending on the number of times the special symbol variation is performed, it is possible to vary the desired game result for a player playing in the high probability state depending on the progress of the game. Therefore, immediately after the high probability state is set, that is, during the period when the probability of the latent state being set based on the establishment of the second transition condition is higher than the probability of the latent state being set based on the establishment of the first transition condition, a performance is executed to provoke the player as to whether or not the second transition condition is established, and when a predetermined period has passed since the high probability state was set, that is, during the period when the probability of the latent information being set based on the establishment of the first transition condition is higher than the probability of the latent state being set based on the establishment of the second transition condition, it is possible to execute a performance to provoke the player as to whether or not the first transition condition is established.

Next, the flow of the game during the potential winning state will be explained. When the potential winning state is set, as described above, a RUSH game is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1). Specifically, when the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is 0, 3, or 4, a RUSH game is executed in which the normal length is likely to be selected as the time for the second special symbol to change during the potential winning state, and when the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is 1 or 2, a SUPER RUSH game is executed in which a shorter length than normal is likely to be selected as the time for the second special symbol to change during the potential winning state. In this way, by varying the time for the second special symbol to change according to the game situation (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1), it is possible to vary the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed per unit time, and therefore the number of times the small winning game is executed, so that the player can play during the potential winning state while expecting a more advantageous RUSH game to be executed.

The above-mentioned RUSH game and Super RUSH game are both games that are executed during the potential state, and the probability of winning the special symbol (winning with the second special symbol) is set to the same (1/60). In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol is set to be a high probability (59/60). If a jackpot is won during the potential state, there is a 35% chance that a jackpot type (jackpot D7) in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and there is a 65% chance that the potential state is set again after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if a small jackpot is won during the potential state, the game state does not change. In other words, once the potential state is set, the RUSH game (game during the potential state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% chance of winning a jackpot) is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 168 to 174. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202 and a part of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110, and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 168 to Fig. 172. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 168(a). Fig. 168(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of this embodiment differs from the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116) in that a first win random number 7 table 202fa is provided instead of the first win random number table 202a, a small win random number 7 table is provided instead of the small win random number table 202de, a second win random number 7 table 202fc is provided instead of the second win random number table 202b, a big win type selection 7 table 202fd is provided instead of the big win type selection 4 table 202db, and a fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202fe is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and in that a small win type selection 7 table 202ff and a normal fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202fg are newly provided. Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the seventh embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that the range in which the value of the first win random number counter C1 can be updated has been changed from "0-399" to "0-599", and the range in which the value of the second win random number counter C2 can be updated has been changed from "0-999" to "0-299". As the rest of the configuration is the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the first win random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 168(b). FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first win random number 7 table 202fa. This first win random number 7 table 202fa differs from the above-mentioned first win random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)) in that it defines the value of the first win random number counter C1 that is determined to be a win depending on the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which the special symbol lottery is executed, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the range of the value of the first win random number counter C1 "0 to 2" is specified as the jackpot determination value (the value that is determined as a jackpot in the special symbol lottery), and when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the range of the value of the first win random number counter C1 "0 to 9" is specified as the jackpot determination value. That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set and any type of special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/200, and when the high probability state of the special symbol is set and any type of special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/60. In this embodiment, the value of the first win random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot for each special symbol type is set to the same value, but this is not limited to this, and a different first win random number counter C1 value may be set to be the jackpot determination value for each special symbol type, or the number of values of the first win random number counter C1 that are the jackpot determination value for each special symbol type may be different.

As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ("0 to 2") that is determined to be a jackpot when a low probability state of the special symbol is set is configured to be the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot even when a high probability state of the special symbol is set. By configuring in this way, in the first pre-reading process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) or the second pre-reading process (see S1764 in FIG. 136) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot in a low probability state of the special symbol is obtained, it is possible to predict in advance that the winning information contains information that will win a jackpot, without executing a process that determines (predicts) the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. However, without being limited to this, the contents of the first win random number table 202fa may be specified so that at least some or all of the values of the first win random number counter C1 that are determined to be a jackpot in a low probability state of a special pattern are not determined to be a jackpot in a high probability state of a special pattern. By configuring it in this way, when the same value of the first win random number counter C1 is obtained, the judgment result can be made different depending on the game state that is set when the jackpot judgment is performed using the obtained value of the first win random number counter C1. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts of obtaining a specific value of the first win random number counter C1.

Next, the contents of the small win random number 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG. 168(c). FIG. 168(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the small win random number 7 table 202fb. This small win random number 7 table 202fb differs from the small win random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the range of the small win judgment value for the second special pattern has been changed to "10 to 599" in accordance with the change in the range of values that the first win random number counter C1 can take, and other than that, detailed description is omitted since they are the same. In other words, this seventh embodiment is configured so that the small win is not won in the drawing of the first special pattern, but is won with a high probability (590/600) in the drawing of the second special pattern.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number 7 table 202fc will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(d). FIG. 168(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 168(d), in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, a normal winning is defined as a value of "0" for the acquired second winning random number counter C4, and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, a normal winning is defined as a value of "0 to 299" for the acquired second winning random number counter C4.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in a lottery for normal symbols (1/299) is set to a low probability. This makes it possible to make the probability of playing a normal symbol winning game different between the normal state and potential state, which are low probability states for normal symbols, and the probability state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols.

As described above, in this embodiment, the same game method (right-hand play) is performed in the probability state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the potential state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set. Right-hand play performed during the potential state is performed in which a ball is inserted into the right second ball entrance 645 (see FIG. 157) to execute a second special symbol lottery, and right-hand play performed during the probability state is performed in which a ball is inserted into the right electric device 164 to execute a first special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 169, the details of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd. This jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special pattern, similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 169, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in this seventh embodiment specifies three jackpot types for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), namely "jackpot A7" to "jackpot C7". On the other hand, two jackpot types for the second special symbol, namely "jackpot D7" to "jackpot E7", are specified.

As shown in FIG. 169, for the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is set in the range of "0 to 34" to correspond to "jackpot A7". This "jackpot A7" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds is 8 and the normal state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot has ended (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot). Depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (time-saving state) of the normal symbol is set varies. More specifically, if "jackpot A7" is won in the normal state, the high probability state, and the potential state, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 0). In other words, if "jackpot A7" is won in the normal state, the high probability state, and the potential state, the most unfavorable normal state is set again.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A7", so if a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A7" will be determined is 35% (35/100).

As shown in FIG. 169, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot B7". This "jackpot B7" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds is 8 and the special symbol probability state is set after the jackpot has ended (8-round probability jackpot). When "jackpot B7" is won in the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 50, whereas when "jackpot B7" is won in the probability state or potential state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0.

In other words, if "Jackpot B7" is won in the normal state, the player will transition to a relatively advantageous high probability state (50 times). In contrast, if "Jackpot B7" is won in the high probability state or potential probability state, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 0, and the game state after the jackpot ends will be the most advantageous potential probability state. Therefore, if "Jackpot B7" is won in the normal state, it will be a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. On the other hand, if it is won in a game state other than the normal state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 45 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B7", so if a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B7" will be determined is 45% (45/100).

As shown in FIG. 169, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", and "jackpot C7" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot C7" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds is 8, and the end of the jackpot is set to a special pattern probability state (8-round probability jackpot). If "jackpot C7" is won in a probability state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 50, whereas if "jackpot C7" is won in a normal state or a potential state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0.

In other words, during the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to win "jackpot C7" than to win "jackpot B7", and during the high probability state, it is more advantageous for the player to win "jackpot B7" than to win "jackpot C7". Also, during the potential state, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between winning "jackpot B7" and winning "jackpot C7".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 20 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C7", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C11" will be determined is 20% (20/100).

As explained above, in this embodiment, the probability of transitioning to the most advantageous game state for the player (latent state) varies depending on the game state when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, and the latent state is set after the jackpot play ends at a rate of 20% during the normal state, 45% during the high probability state, and 65% during the latent state. By configuring in this way, when the game state transitions, for example, if a jackpot is won during the normal state and the high probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, it is possible to provide an advantageous state that makes it easier to transition to the latent state than the normal state, and this can motivate players who have not been set to the latent state to continue playing.

As shown in FIG. 169, the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is specified as "jackpot D7" in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 34". This "jackpot D7" is a jackpot type that is specified with the same content as the above-mentioned "jackpot A7", and is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the normal state after the jackpot ends (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot). Depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is variable whether or not the high probability state (time-saving state) of the normal symbol is set. More specifically, if "jackpot D7" is won in the normal state, the high probability state, and the potential state, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time-saving counter 203f is set to 0). In other words, if "jackpot D7" is won in the normal state, the high probability state, and the potential state, the most unfavorable normal state is set again.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D7", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that the "jackpot D7" will be determined is 35% (35/100). Note that in this embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be easily executed when the most advantageous game state (latent state) for the player is set, so this "jackpot D7" becomes the termination trigger that ends the most advantageous game state (latent state) for the player.

As shown in FIG. 169, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "35 to 99" and is associated with the "jackpot E7" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E7" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds is 8 and the special symbol probability state is set after the jackpot has ended (8-round probability jackpot). When the "jackpot E7" is won in the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, whereas when the "jackpot E7" is won in the probability state or the potential state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0.

In other words, if "jackpot E7" is won in the normal state, the player will transition to a relatively advantageous high probability state (100 times). In contrast, if "jackpot E7" is won in a high probability state or a potential high probability state, the number of time-saving rounds is set to 0, and the game state after the jackpot ends will be the most advantageous potential high probability state. Therefore, if "jackpot E7" is won in the normal state, it will be a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. On the other hand, if it is won in a game state other than the normal state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 65 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E7", so if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that the "jackpot E7" will be determined is 65% (65/100).

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery), which is mainly executed in the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player, the latent state is configured to loop 65% of the time, and end (normal state is set) 35% of the time. Therefore, when the latent state is set, the player will win prize balls through the small jackpot game, which is executed with a high probability (59/60), while hoping not to win the "jackpot E7".

Next, referring to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202fe is a data table for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 25). In the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 202fe differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the data table referenced when the game state is in the normal state have been partially changed, and in that the probability 7 table 202fe2 referenced when the game state is in the probability 7 table 202fe3 referenced when the game state is in the potential 7 table 202fe3 has been added.

First, the contents of the normal 7 table 202fe1, which is referenced when the game state is normal, will be explained with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal 7 table 202fe1. This normal 7 table 202fe1 is significantly different from the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above in that a variation pattern corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and a variation pattern corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2) are defined as pattern types.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern that is determined when the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot is as follows: when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", a normal fluctuation (10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds)) is associated with it; when it is in the range of "100 to 179", a super fluctuation (15,000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) is associated with it; and when it is in the range of "180 to 198", a special fluctuation (20,000 milliseconds (20 seconds)) is associated with it.

Note that in Figure 170, the length of the fluctuation time specified for each fluctuation pattern is shown in milliseconds (1/1000 seconds), but for ease of explanation, the following explanation uses seconds to describe the length of the fluctuation time.

As for the fluctuation pattern that is determined when the first special symbol is drawn without a win, the fluctuation pattern of a miss short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 180", a miss middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with a value of "181 to 197", and a miss super fluctuation (15 seconds) is associated with a value of "197, 198".

On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, regardless of the lottery result, the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1, "0 to 198," is associated with long fluctuations (long winning fluctuations, long losing fluctuations) (600 seconds).

In this embodiment, when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the total number of reserved memories of all special symbols. In this embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have a reserved memory function, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol are essentially selected based on the reserved memory number (reserved ball number) of the first special symbol. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 in FIG. 139) is executed later than the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, a variation pattern is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is four. On the other hand, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery, as in the fourth embodiment described above, so that a variation pattern may be selected when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (reserved ball number of special symbol 1) is four.

Next, referring to FIG. 171(a), the contents of the probability change 7 table 202fe2, which is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the probability change state, will be explained. FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing the contents prescribed in the probability change 7 table 202fe2. In this embodiment, as described above, when the probability change state is set, a game is played in which a ball enters the right electric role 164 by right-handed play, and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. Then, for the first special symbol variation during the probability change state, a variation pattern with the same contents as the normal use 7 table 202fe1 described above is prescribed. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern in which a variation time (60 seconds) shorter than that of the variation pattern prescribed in the normal use 7 table 202fe1 is set is prescribed. Other elements are the same as the normal use 7 table 202fe1 described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In other words, in this embodiment, in the high probability state where a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the right electric device 164 is opened with a high probability, making it difficult for the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 645. In other words, it is configured so that it is more difficult to cause the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 645 when playing right-handed in the high probability state than when playing right-handed in the normal state. Furthermore, when the normal state is set, the appropriate game method is to play a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by playing left-handed, and when the high probability state is set, the appropriate game method is to play a game in which the ball enters the right electric device 164 by playing right-handed.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when right-hand play is performed during normal mode, the ball can easily enter the right second ball entrance 645. Therefore, by setting a variation pattern in which a long variation time (10 minutes) is specified as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation performed during normal mode, right-hand play is performed during normal mode, and the act of executing the second special symbol lottery is suppressed.

On the other hand, when right-hand play, which is the proper playing method, is performed during the probability bonus state, as described above with reference to Figures 157 to 160, most balls shot by right-hand play will enter the right electric device 164, but if the balls flowing down the right side area behave irregularly, for example, if the balls flowing down the right side area collide with each other and fly over the open opening and closing door 164r1, they may enter the right second ball entrance 645.

In this embodiment, when the proper game method is being performed in this way, if the ball flows down in an unpredictable manner and enters the right second ball entrance 645, that is, if the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the high probability state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, a shorter fluctuation time (60 seconds) is set compared to when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, if a specific small jackpot (small jackpot C) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state can be transitioned to a potential high probability state regardless of the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the high probability state.

This allows players playing during the special probability state to pay close attention to the behavior of the ball as it flows down the right-hand area, and makes them eager to play while hoping that the second special symbol lottery will be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 171(b), the contents of the 7-table 202fe3 for potential winning, which is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the potential winning state, will be described. FIG. 171(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 7-table 202fe3 for potential winning. In this embodiment, as described above, when the potential winning state is set, a ball is put into the second ball entrance 645 by right-hand play, and a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. And, by executing a long variation (10 minutes) for the first special symbol variation executed during the potential winning state, the reserved memory number (reserved ball number of special symbol 1) of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the potential winning state is configured to be the upper limit number. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the potential winning state is configured to be different depending on the reserved memory number (reserved ball number of special symbol 1) of the special symbol (first special symbol).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171(b), the variation pattern determined in response to the first special symbol drawing is associated with a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (extra long win variation, extra long miss variation) regardless of the result of the first special symbol drawing or the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. In other words, the first special symbol variation executed during the potential state is configured to always have a variation time of 600 seconds.

On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern that is determined when the second special symbol is selected as a winning symbol (jackpot) is as follows: if the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1) is "0-3", it corresponds to the full range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0-198", which is a long fluctuation (10 seconds); if the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1) is "4", it corresponds to the full range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0-198", which is a short fluctuation (1 second).

In addition, the fluctuation pattern that is determined when the second special symbol is drawn as a miss (including small wins A and C), is that when the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1) is "1, 2", a miss short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198", and when the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1) is "0, 3, 4", a miss middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198".

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern that is determined when the second special pattern is drawn and a small win B is obtained is that when the number of reserved special patterns (number of reserved special patterns 1) is "0, 1, 2", a small win middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198", and when the number of reserved special patterns (number of reserved special patterns 1) is "3, 4", a small win short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198".

In other words, in this embodiment, the change pattern (change time) set for the second special symbol change that is executed during the potential state is a short change of 0.5 seconds and a long change of 10 seconds as the change pattern set when a small jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. If small jackpot A or B, which is set in about 95% of cases when a small jackpot is won, is won, if the number of reserved special symbols is a specific number (1, 2), a game in which a short change (0.5 seconds) is set (Super RUSH game) is executed, and if the number is other than the specific number (0, 3, 4), a game in which a long change (10 seconds) is set (RUSH game) is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the number of small wins per unit time can be varied according to the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved balls for one special symbol) during the potential win state, and as a result, the amount of bonuses (number of prize balls) that a player can obtain per unit time can be varied. Therefore, a player who is performing a RUSH game during the potential win state can be motivated to play in order to aim for a Super RUSH game that is more advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if small prize B is won, that is, if a small prize type in which a process to cancel (force stop) the first special symbol change in progress is won is executed, a short change (0.5 seconds) is set when the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is more than a specific number (1, 2) (3, 4), and a long change (10 seconds) is set when the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is equal to or less than a specific number (1, 2) (0, 1, 2). In other words, if a small prize that allows the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 to be reduced is won, a shorter change time is determined when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (number of reserved special symbols) is more than a specific number than when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (number of reserved special symbols) is less than the specific number.

By configuring it in this way, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (reserved number of special charts) is greater than the specific number and small prize B is won, the first special pattern change being executed can be quickly discarded, making it easier to set the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (reserved number of special charts) to the specific number. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (reserved number of special charts) is less than the specific number and small prize B is won, a long change time is set as the small prize change, so the period required to discard the first special pattern change being executed can be lengthened, thereby preventing the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (reserved number of special charts) from decreasing below the specific number.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is the lower limit "0", it is easier to set a long-term change (10-second change) as the change pattern (change time) of the second special symbol change than when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is other than the lower limit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171(b), when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is the lower limit "0", a long-term change (10-second change) is set regardless of which small win is won.

In this way, by imposing a penalty that makes it easier for long-term fluctuations to occur when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is at the lower limit of "0," it is possible to suspend play until the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (reserved number of special symbols) becomes "0" after the potential state is set, specifically, to suspend play until the first special symbol fluctuation has been executed four times during the potential state, for which a fluctuation time of 10 minutes is set, and then inhibit play from being executed during the potential state.

In this embodiment, the degree of advantage during the potential state is divided into two stages according to the number of reserved special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage during the potential state may be divided into three or more stages according to the number of reserved special symbols. In this case, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set when the number of reserved special symbol balls is the lower limit "0" may be configured to be able to set a variation time (e.g., 30 seconds) longer than the long-term variation (10-second variation) described above, and the penalty of being more likely to be executed when the number of reserved special symbol balls is the lower limit "0" may be made larger, or the number of reserved special symbols may be configured to be able to set a variation time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) shorter for one (e.g., 1) than for the other (e.g., 2) when the number of reserved special symbols is a specific number (1, 2), and advantageous play that is more advantageous to the player may be executed.

In addition, different variation pattern tables may be referenced for the trigger for setting the potential state, i.e., when a jackpot is won that sets the potential state after the end of a jackpot game, and when the potential state is set via a high probability state, and a configuration may be made in which advantageous play that is advantageous to the player during the potential state (play in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern for the second special symbol variation) is more likely to be performed when the potential state is set due to the establishment of one trigger (e.g., a trigger for setting the potential state after the end of a jackpot game) than when the potential state is set due to the establishment of the other trigger (e.g., a trigger for setting the potential state via a high probability state).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special pattern variation pattern is selected (determined) with the same prescribed content regardless of the number of times the special pattern variation is executed during the potential state, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to change the prescribed content of the variation pattern selected in the first period (first half period) after the potential state is set and the second period (second half period) after the first period has elapsed. In this case, for example, for the potential state 7 table 202fe3 shown in FIG. 171(b), different variation patterns may be prescribed according to the number of special pattern variations (the combined number of first and second special pattern variations) after the potential state is set, so that advantageous play that is advantageous to the player (play in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special pattern variation) is more easily executed in the second period than in the first period. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the longer the potential state continues, that is, the longer the period during which the player does not win the jackpot (the so-called stuck period) during the potential state, the more advantageous the player becomes.

In addition, when the probability variable state is set, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and based on winning the small win C, if the game transitions to the potential probability state without executing the special symbol fluctuation a specified number of times (50 times), the advantageous game that is most advantageous to the player (a game in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation) may be executed. In this case, for example, for the probability variable 7 table 202fe2 that is referenced when the probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game, the fluctuation pattern data referenced during the probability variable state may be specified so as to correspond to the period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed a specified number of times (50 times), and the special fluctuation pattern data referenced when the game transitions to the potential probability state within the specified number of times may be specified so as to correspond to the special fluctuation pattern data. In other words, in the probability variable 7 table 202fe2, which specifies the variation pattern data for the number of times the special symbol changes within a specified range (50 times), the variation pattern data for the special symbol change that is executed during the probability variable state within that specified number of times, and the variation pattern data for the special symbol change that is executed during the potential variable state, can be specified in advance.

By configuring it in this way, the player can play while being more hopeful that the second special symbol variation (lottery) will be executed during the high probability state. In this case, after the number of times that the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game has been executed reaches a specified number (50 times), the variation pattern may be set by referring to the 7th table 202fe3 for potential probability shown in FIG. 171(b), or the special variation pattern data that is referenced when the game transitions to the potential probability state within the specified number of times may be continuously set even after the number of times that the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game has been executed reaches a specified number (50 times).

The above describes the variation patterns (variation times) set in accordance with each game state with reference to Figures 170 and 171, but is not limited to the examples described in this embodiment, and it is sufficient that the variation times of each variation pattern set based on the set game state, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the win/loss judgment result are specified so as to be within a range that does not deviate from the technical concept of this embodiment (a range that does not deviate from the technical concept relatively compared to other variation patterns). In addition, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, an example is shown in which a specific variation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions, but a different variation pattern (variation time) may be selected according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 under each specific condition. In this case, it is sufficient to specify the selection ratio of each possible fluctuation pattern and the average value calculated based on the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern within a range that does not deviate from the technical concept of this embodiment. For example, the fluctuation pattern for special symbol 1 specified in the potential confirmation 7 table 202fe3 may be configured to have a shorter fluctuation time (e.g., 1 second) than the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that can be set to the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the potential confirmation state with a small probability (e.g., when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "1").

By configuring it in this way, the main flow of the game that is executed during the potential winning state is not changed, and it is possible to occasionally provide the player with an unexpected game, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Note that the above example shows a variation pattern that is selected for the potential winning state, but based on the same technical concept, it is of course also possible to apply the same technical concept to the variation pattern that is selected when other game states are set.

Next, the contents of the small win type selection 7 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 172(a). This small win type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table that is referenced when selecting a small win type after winning a small win in a special pattern lottery, and is specified to select three types of small win types, "small win A7", "small win B7", and "small win C7", according to the value of the acquired small win type counter C5.

When a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery, the small prize operation content, the symbol determination time (the period required to determine the stop display of the special symbol), and the processing content for the ongoing special symbol variation can be made different depending on the small prize type selected. Note that in this embodiment, as explained using the small prize random number 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 168(c)), the small prize is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol, so in the special symbol 2 missed variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) executed by the main control device 110, the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff is referenced when it is determined that a small prize has been won.

To explain in detail the contents stipulated in the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff, the value of the small prize type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 74" corresponds to "small prize A", the value in the range of "75 to 79" corresponds to "small prize B7", and the value in the range of "80 to 99" corresponds to "small prize C". Since the range of possible values of the small prize type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of "small prize A" being selected when a small prize is won is 75% (75/100), the ratio of "small prize B" being selected is 5% (5/100), and the ratio of "small prize C" being selected is 20% (20/100).

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.2 seconds" is selected as the pattern determination time of the special pattern, and a process to interrupt the first special pattern (special pattern 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process to interrupt the first special pattern (special pattern 1) being executed is executed, a process to interrupt the process for measuring the variation time lapse of the first special pattern variation being executed is executed. Specifically, when a small win game is executed, the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on, and while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to on, a process to skip the process of updating the value of the special pattern 1 variation time counter 203di indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is executed. Then, the end of the small win game triggers the establishment of the restart condition (the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to OFF), and the process of updating the value of the special symbol 1 change time counter 203di that was interrupted is resumed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prohibit the remaining change time of the first special symbol change being executed from decreasing while the small win game is being executed (while the interruption condition is established), so that, for example, while the small win game is being executed, it is possible to prohibit the first special symbol change that has won from being stopped and the winning game (big win game, small win game) from being executed in duplicate. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In addition, since the process of measuring the time lapse of the special pattern variation being executed is merely interrupted (skipped), the first special pattern variation that was being executed before the small win game can be resumed after the resumption condition is established. Therefore, the result of the special pattern lottery that has already been executed can be reliably notified to the player. In this embodiment, when the interruption condition is established due to the winning of a small win, the process of interrupting the special pattern variation being executed is executed, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the special pattern variation being executed may be continued, and the stop display of the first special pattern variation may be interrupted when the change time of the special pattern variation has elapsed. In other words, even if the interruption condition is established, the update process of updating the change time of the special pattern variation may be continued, and when the update process is executed until the preset change time has elapsed, it may be determined whether the interruption condition is established, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is established, the stop display of the special pattern variation may not be executed until the resumption condition is established. As a result, it is not necessary to interrupt the update process of updating the change time of the special pattern variation midway, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, when the interruption condition is met and the special pattern change is interrupted, that is, when the process of updating the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is skipped, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display an interruption effect that interrupts the display of the special pattern change (first special pattern change), a notification display to inform the player that the first special pattern change is interrupted as the current game status, and a guide display to indicate that the interrupted special pattern change will resume after a specified period has elapsed (after the end of the small win game). This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner when the special pattern change is interrupted.

In addition, the above-mentioned interruption effect may be configured to be able to execute different interruption effects depending on the presentation mode of the variable display effect (variable display effect using the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern) being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. For example, if the third pattern is rapidly changing on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 at the time when the interruption condition is met and the special pattern variation is interrupted, that is, the third pattern is varying at a speed at which the player has difficulty visually recognizing the third pattern while it is varying, the interruption effect may be configured to execute an effect in which the third pattern continues to vary at a high speed until the resume condition is met, and if the third pattern is slowly changing on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, that is, the third pattern is varying at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the third pattern while it is varying, the interruption effect may be configured to execute an effect in which the third pattern continues to vary at a low speed until the resume condition is met. In this way, by varying the variable presentation mode (interruption presentation mode) during the period when the interruption condition is met depending on the variable presentation mode of the third symbol at the time the interruption condition is met, it is possible to execute the interruption presentation without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, if the interruption condition is satisfied immediately before the third symbol stops changing, for example, when the symbols other than one symbol are displayed in a combination indicating a big win (a combination of symbols showing the same number) among the multiple symbols, and the interruption condition is satisfied during a changing performance (so-called reach performance) that incites whether the remaining one symbol will stop in a combination indicating a big win (whether all symbols will stop with the same number), an interruption performance that continues the changing display of the remaining one symbol described above may be executed, or the one symbol being displayed in a display mode indicating that the interruption condition has been satisfied (for example, "Take a break for now!!") may be displayed to end the reach performance. Then, after the resumption condition is satisfied, the text "End of break!!" may be displayed, and the reach performance executed before the interruption may be stopped and displayed without executing the reach performance. As a result, various performances can be executed depending on the timing at which the interruption condition is satisfied, making it possible to diversify the performance executed based on the satisfaction of the interruption condition, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Returning to FIG. 172(a), the explanation will be continued. When "small win B" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the pattern determination time of the special pattern, and a process is executed to discard the first special pattern (special pattern 1) being executed. Here, when the process to discard the first special pattern (special pattern 1) being executed is executed, a process is executed to stop and display the lottery result of the first special pattern change being executed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, regardless of the lottery result and remaining change time of the first special pattern change being executed. Specifically, when a small win game is executed, a process is executed to clear the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di, which indicates the change time (remaining change time) of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), to 0, and a forced stop command is set to indicate that the first special pattern change has been stopped and displayed. Furthermore, if the first special symbol variation that is the subject of the forced stop is a jackpot winning, the information indicating the jackpot winning that is set at the start timing of the first special symbol variation is cleared (special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to off).

When a forced stop command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the forced stop command (when the forced stop display condition is met), a forced stop effect is executed to switch the display mode of the ongoing third pattern change (the third pattern change displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in response to the first special pattern change).

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, when the forced stop condition is met based on winning "small win B" and the special pattern change is forced to stop, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 displays the special pattern change (first special pattern change) stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result was a miss and that the change has been forced to stop. In addition, the display mode of the forced stop effect for forcibly displaying the ongoing third pattern change is configured to differ depending on the timing when the forced stop condition is met.

Specifically, when the third pattern is fluctuating rapidly on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, that is, when the third pattern is fluctuating at a speed at which the player has difficulty visually recognizing the fluctuating third pattern, the forced stop display is executed in a short period (first period) as a forced stop display effect, and when the third pattern is fluctuating slowly on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, that is, when the third pattern is fluctuating at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third pattern, the forced stop display is executed in a second period longer than the above-mentioned first period as a forced stop display effect.

In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, the player has difficulty identifying the third symbol being displayed, so even if the third symbol is suddenly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating a miss, the player will not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the third symbol is forced to be displayed as stopped in a short period (first period) in order to immediately inform the player that the forced stop condition has been met. On the other hand, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, the player can identify the third symbol being displayed as stopped, so if a forced stop effect is suddenly performed in that state, the player will feel uncomfortable as the performance mode of the third symbol change being performed has suddenly changed. In addition, since the forced stop effect is intended to ultimately stop the third symbol in a display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the third symbol will be displayed as a miss after the performance mode of the third symbol change being performed suddenly changes, which is a problem in that it reduces the player's motivation to play.

In contrast, when the third pattern is fluctuating slowly on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, that is, when the third pattern is fluctuating at a speed at which the player can see the fluctuating third pattern, a forced stop display is executed using a second period longer than the first period described above as a forced stop effect, and the performance mode of the forced stop effect executed during the second period is set according to the content of the currently executing third pattern fluctuating display, and finally a miss display is executed. Therefore, by varying the performance mode and performance period from when the forced stop condition is established until the third pattern is displayed stopped on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the performance mode of the third pattern at the time the forced stop condition is established, the forced stop effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When "Small Win C" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the pattern determination time for the special pattern, and a process is executed to discard the first special pattern (special pattern 1) that is being executed, just like the above-mentioned "Small Win A". Furthermore, when "Small Win C" is selected during a high probability state (high probability state) of a normal pattern, a process is executed to transition the high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state. In other words, "Small Win C" is set as the time-saving end condition that transitions the high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the processing executed for the first special pattern variation being executed varies depending on the type of small win selected when a small win is won in the second special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which type of small win will be selected when a small win is won. Furthermore, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later depending on the content of the processing (interruption, discard) executed for the first special pattern variation.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, when a small win is won in the second special pattern lottery, the time for the special pattern to be determined is made different depending on the type of small win selected. This makes it possible to make the period from when the special pattern indicating a small win is stopped and displayed until the small win game is executed different depending on the type of small win selected. This makes it difficult to predict the timing when the small win game will be executed and to execute a game in which a ball is fired.

In this embodiment, the small win game is configured to be executed with the same opening contents regardless of which small win type is selected, but this is not limited to this. For example, the type of attacker that opens in the small win game may be different depending on the small win type selected, or the opening operation contents (opening time, number of times opened) may be different.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202fg will be explained with reference to FIG. 172(b). FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202fg. This normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery, and each data is defined so that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected depending on the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 and the set game state.

Specifically, when the game state is normal, the value of the second variation type counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 198", and each variation pattern (long variation) is set in a range of 10 to 30 seconds for the variation time. More specifically, the range of "0 to 99" is associated with a "10 second" variation pattern, the range of "100 to 149" is associated with a "20 second" variation pattern, and the range of "150 to 198" is associated with a "30 second" variation pattern. In this way, by configuring the variation pattern with different variation times to be selectable according to the value of the second variation type counter CS3 obtained when the same game state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing of the stop display of the normal pattern variation, and therefore the timing when the normal pattern variation is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a normal pattern win and a normal pattern win game is executed.

In addition, during the high probability state, the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "0.8 seconds" (short fluctuation) for the entire range of "0 to 198". By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it possible for a ball that passes through the through gate 67, which is the trigger for the execution of the normal pattern lottery, to enter the right electric device 164 with a high probability during right-handed play executed during the high probability state.

On the other hand, when the potential win state is set, the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is associated with a variation pattern of "0.1 seconds" in the range of "0 to 169", and a variation pattern of "10 seconds" in the range of "170 to 198". By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the right electric device 164 during the potential win state than during the potential win state, and it is also possible to make the ball enter the right electric device 164 appropriately during the potential win state.

Next, referring to FIG. 173, the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment except that a high probability flag 203fa for storing a high probability state of a special symbol has been added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and numbers of game states that can be set are different from those in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, so that, for example, the types and numbers of information that can be stored in the game state storage area 203g are different, but the role of the game state storage area 203g and the processing contents for updating the stored information are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the game state has become a probability change state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the probability change state is set. It is set to OFF when the conditions for ending the probability change state are met.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment described above in that it adds a special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, a special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, a fluctuation count counter 223fc, a preparation state flag 223fd, a special chart 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, a special chart 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, a RUSH flag 223fg, a ceiling performance execution flag 223fh, and a super RUSH flag 223fi, but is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the special pattern 2 change start flag 223fa and the special pattern 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be explained. The special pattern 2 change start flag 223fa and the special pattern 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are different from the above-mentioned special pattern change start flag 223d and the stop type selection flag 223e in that the target has been changed to the second special pattern. Therefore, while the special pattern 2 change start flag 223fa and the special pattern 2 stop type selection flag 223fb perform a process to determine whether or not to set the flag on and a process to determine the setting status of the flag based on the first special pattern change, the special pattern 2 change start flag 223fa and the special pattern 2 stop type selection flag 223fb perform a process to determine whether or not to set the flag on and a process to determine the setting status of the flag in a process performed based on the second special pattern change. Other elements are the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The variation count counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of times a special pattern variation occurs, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of a special pattern variation.

The preparation state flag 223fd is a flag to indicate whether or not the game is in the preparation state; if it is on, it means that the game is in the preparation state (see FIG. 162(a)), and if it is off, it means that the game is not in the preparation state. In the potential state, the preparation state flag 223fd is referenced to determine whether or not the preparation state has already ended (the display has switched to RUSH), and to determine whether to execute the preparation state presentation or the RUSH state presentation.

The RUSH flag 223fg is a flag that indicates whether or not RUSH play is in progress (consecutive win mode). If it is on, it means that RUSH play is in progress (consecutive win mode), and if it is off, it means that RUSH play is not in progress (consecutive win mode). During the potential win state, the preparation state flag 223fd and this RUSH flag 223fg are referenced to determine which state the presentation mode should be set for.

The ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is a flag indicating whether or not the effect (peak reach effect) of the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is being executed when the number of chance changes or the number of time reductions is one remaining. If the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, it means that the peak reach effect (see FIG. 161 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the peak reach effect is not being executed. When the pattern stop timing occurs with the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh on, it transitions to consecutive win mode and becomes a preparation state. In this embodiment, even if the number of chance changes (time reductions) remaining in the chance change state is not one, the time reduction end condition is established when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C), and the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set on. In this case, the presentation mode is gradually changed according to the subtraction status of the probability change count, and compared to when the peak-reaching presentation is executed, the peak-reaching presentation is executed suddenly, so for example, it is preferable to configure it so that a warp presentation is executed as a dedicated peak-reaching presentation based on the information indicating that the small win C has been won and the setting status of the ceiling presentation execution flag 223fh. This allows the presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 to be executed without any sense of incongruity, and also makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the peak has been reached (the potential state has been set) earlier than expected.

The Super RUSH flag 223fi is a flag that indicates that a RUSH game that is advantageous to the player is being played when the number of reserved balls on the special chart reaches a specific number while the RUSH game is being played; if it is on, it means that the Super RUSH game is being played, and if it is off, it means that the Super RUSH game is not being played. When the Super RUSH flag 223fi is set to on, the Super RUSH performance (see FIG. 165) is executed.

<Regarding main control processing in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 175 to Fig. 182, the control process contents executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and the lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) in an overlapping manner, as in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, and is different from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that the function (reserved memory function) for temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special pattern is deleted, the high probability state of the special pattern is set, when a small prize is won in the special pattern 2 lottery, the number of types of small prize types to be set is increased, and the process to be executed for the first special pattern variation (special pattern 1 variation) being executed is made different according to the set small prize type, and the game state is shifted (the high probability state of the normal pattern is shifted to a low probability state) when the set small prize type is a specific small prize type. 168 to 172, the difference is that the contents defined in the various data tables referenced in the control processing executed by the main control device 110 are different. Other than that, the fourth embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to Figure 175, we will explain the contents of the first special pattern change stop processing 7 (see S278 in Figure 175). This first special symbol variation stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) differs from the first special symbol variation stop process (see S258 in FIG. 124) of the fourth embodiment described above in that when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a miss variation, the time-saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 124) is changed to the time-saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175), and when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S581: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a jackpot variation, among the processes to be executed, a process (S870 in FIG. 175) that adds a certain variable flag 203fa to the process (S860 in FIG. 124) that clears various flags and various counters based on the stop of the jackpot variation (start of the jackpot game) is executed, and otherwise it is the same. The same contents will be given the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol change stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176). This time-saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) differs from the time-saving update process in the fourth embodiment described above (see S862 in FIG. 125) in that the game state that is set when it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to on (S2104: Yes in FIG. 125) has been changed, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, three types of game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). When the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to on, the high probability state for normal symbols transitions to a low probability state. A transition occurs from a state in which the probability mode is set to a state in which the potential mode (RUSH game) is executed.

Next, the contents of second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). This seventh embodiment differs from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that it does not have a reserved memory function for the second special symbol, and therefore the contents of the information referenced when starting the variation of the second special symbol (determining whether the start condition for starting the second special symbol variation is met) have been changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to on (S951), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S951: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S951 that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to on (S951: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entrance (right second ball entrance 645) (S974). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have a reserved memory function (since it does not have a second special symbol reserved ball count counter and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area), when the second special symbol change start process 7 (S280) is being executed, it is determined whether a ball has entered the right second ball entrance 645 and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery has been acquired.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that a ball has entered the right second ball entrance 645, a detection signal is output for a period during which the second special symbol change start process 7 (S280) is executed multiple times in the control process of the main control device 110, and the period is shorter than the shortest change time set for the second special symbol change, so that the detection signal indicating that the ball has entered the right second ball entrance 645 is not missed due to the processing timing of various control processes executed by the main control device 110. Here, in the process of S974, if a ball has entered once, a process for starting the second special symbol change is executed, and the second special symbol change is executed for a predetermined change time. Therefore, even if a detection signal is output for the length of the period during which the second special symbol change start process 7 (S280) is executed multiple times in the control process of the main control device 110, it is possible to suppress the second special symbol change from being executed multiple times based on the output of a single detection signal. However, without being limited to this, a process may be added to set a flag so that the currently output detection signal is invalidated when a process for starting the second special pattern variation based on the reception of a detection signal is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably prevent the second special pattern variation from being executed multiple times based on the output of a single detection signal.

If it is determined in the process of S974 that the ball has entered the second ball entrance (second right ball entrance 645) (S974: Yes), then the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed (S978), and then the same processes of S959 to S963 as the second special symbol variation start process described above (see S260 in FIG. 126) are executed, and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S974 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (second right ball entrance 645) (S974: No), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 178, the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). This second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) differs from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the fourth embodiment described above in that it executes a jackpot determination corresponding to the probability state of the set special symbol, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S1051 and S1052 as those of the second special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S955 in FIG. 127) are executed, and if it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to on (S1052: Yes), the processes of S1053 to S1056 are executed and the process proceeds to S1071. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is not set to on (S1052: No), the process proceeds directly to S1071.

In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability flag 203fa is set to on, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state of the special pattern (S1071), and if it is determined that the probability flag 203fa is set to on (S1071: Yes), the lottery result (win/lose determination result) is obtained by referring to the data specified for the high probability state of the first winning random number table (first winning random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168(b)). On the other hand, in the process of S1071, if it is determined that the probability flag 203fa is not set to on, i.e., the current state is a low probability state of the special pattern (S1071: No), the lottery result (win/lose determination result) is obtained by referring to the data specified for the low probability state of the first winning random number table (first winning random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168(b)).

After obtaining the lottery result in processing S1073 or processing S1072, the same processing as the second special symbol jackpot determination processing described above (see S955 in FIG. 127) is executed from S1058 to S1062, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 179, the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) will be explained. This special symbol 2 miss variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation, and is a process executed when selecting a variation pattern when the result of the target second special symbol lottery is not a big win (it is a miss, including a small win).

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 miss fluctuation pattern selection process 7 (S1277). As shown in Figure 179, compared to the above-mentioned special chart 2 miss fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1257 in Figure 130), this differs in that when selecting a fluctuation pattern, the processing contents when selecting (determining) the small win type for the small win that has been won this time are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When the special pattern 2 failure variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the same process of S1371 as the special pattern 2 failure variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and if it is determined that the lottery result of this second special pattern (special pattern 2 lottery result) is not a small win (S1371: No), the same processes of S1377 to S1379 as the special pattern 2 failure variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130) are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a small win in the process of S1371 (S1371: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is obtained (S1372), and the small win type is selected by referring to the small win type selection 7 table 202ff based on the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 (S1391). Next, the same processes of S1374 to S1376 as the special pattern 2 failure variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol executes a process of selecting the small win type, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the process of determining the lottery result of the second special symbol (second special symbol big win determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178)) determines that the current lottery result is a small win, a process of selecting the small win type may be executed at the same time, or a different small win determination value may be defined for each small win type, and the small win type may be determined according to the small win determination value (value of first win random number counter C1) used when it is determined that a small win has been won. This allows the number of counter types to be reduced, leading to reduced manufacturing costs.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283) will be explained with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283). This second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283) is a process executed when the change time of the second special symbol change has elapsed and the second special symbol change that is currently changing is to be stopped, and differs from the above-mentioned second special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) in that some of the contents of the process executed when the second special symbol change to be processed is a jackpot change have been changed, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (S283) is executed, first, the same processes of S1551 to S1559 as the second special symbol variation stop process described above (see S263 in FIG. 132) are executed, then the special symbol 2 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol selection among the jackpot flags 203i), the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm, and the special bonus flag 203fa are set to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

In other words, when one of the special symbol variations is displayed in a stopped state indicating a jackpot win, the lottery results and remaining variation time for the other special symbol variation that is currently in progress are completely discarded and the display is stopped, and all information regarding the set game state (probability change flag 203fa, time-saving counter 203h, time-saving end waiting flag 203dm) is also reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during a jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to obtain special benefits other than the special benefit (prize ball) obtained by having a ball enter the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) that is opened by a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which excessive special benefits are given to a player.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 with simultaneous variation specifications, the special symbol variation that was being performed before the jackpot game is not resumed after the jackpot game ends, and the number of time-saving periods is not subtracted based on information based on the special symbol variation that was being performed before the jackpot game, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. After the processing of S1580 is completed, the processing of S1561 to S1563, which is the same as the second special symbol variation stop processing described above (see S263 in FIG. 132), is then executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 miss stop processing 7 (S1584) will be explained with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 miss stop processing 7 (S1584). This special chart 2 miss stop processing 7 (S1584) differs from the above-mentioned special chart 2 miss stop processing (see S1564 in FIG. 133) in that it executes the small win processing (S1671) when it is determined that the small win flag 203dg is set to on (S1651: Yes). Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed explanations will be omitted. Here, the contents of the small win processing (S1671) executed in the special chart 2 miss stop processing 7 (S1584) will be explained with reference to FIG. 182.

Figure 182 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win process (S1671). This small win process (S1671) is executed when the second special symbol that has won the small win is stopped and displayed, and is intended to execute processing according to the selected small win type (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) on the first special symbol variation that is being executed.

When the small win process (S1671) is executed, first, the small win type set for this second special pattern change (the small win type selected in the special pattern 2 miss change pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179)) is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small win type is "small win A" (S1683). If it is determined that it is "small win A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the current special pattern 1 change (first special pattern change) is in progress (S1684), and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 change is in progress (S1684: Yes), the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S1685), and a special pattern 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is on is set (S1686), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1684 that Special Chart 1 is not changing (S1684: No), the process of S1685 and S1686 is skipped and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1683, if it is determined that the type of small win is not "small win A" (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the type of small win that was read is "small win C" (S1687), and if it is determined that it is "small win C" (S1687: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the player is currently in a special state (high probability state of normal pattern) (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is a special probability state (S1688: Yes), that is, if the second special pattern change that won the "small win B" in the second special pattern lottery executed during the special probability state is the target of processing this time, then it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set on (S1689), and if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S1689: No), that is, if it is determined that the current state is not the final change, the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set on (S1690), and the process proceeds to S1684 described above. Furthermore, if the processing of S1688 determines that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0, i.e., that the game is not currently in a high probability state (S1688: No), or if the processing of S1689 determines that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to on, i.e., that the game is in the final change of the high probability state (S1689: Yes), the processing of S1690 is skipped and the program moves to the processing of S1684 described above.

In other words, if a "small win C" is won during the probability change state, even if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not reduced to 0, the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON, so that it is possible to transition the game state from the probability change state to the potential state before the special symbol variation (lottery) during the probability change state is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Therefore, the winning of the "small win C" is set as an end condition for terminating the probability change state (high probability state of normal symbols). In this embodiment, since the potential state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state, the end condition established by the winning of the "small win C" is more advantageous to the player than the end condition of transitioning to the potential state by setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h to 0, since the potential state can be transitioned to the potential state in a state in which the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probability change state is small, that is, in a state in which the possibility of winning a jackpot during the probability change state and transitioning to the normal state without transitioning to the potential state is low. In addition, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (when the normal pattern is in a low probability state), that is, when the normal state or the potential state is in, the process to end the time-saving state is not executed, so the same process is executed when "small win C" is won and when "small win A" is won.

In the process of S1687, if it is determined that it is not a "small win C", that is, if it is determined that the read small win type is a "small win B" (S1687: No), it is determined whether the special pattern 1 is currently changing (first special pattern changing) (S1691), and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 is changing (S1691: Yes), a special pattern 1 change stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern 1 change is set (S1692), the first special pattern on the first pattern display device is displayed as a stopped pattern (S1693), and the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

Then, it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is set to on, i.e., whether the first special symbol change being performed is a jackpot change (S1695). If it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is set to on (S1695: Yes), the special chart 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is set to off (S1696), the stored information for the special chart 1 jackpot is deleted (S1697), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1691 that the special chart 1 change is not in progress (S1691: No), this process is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of S1695, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is not set to on, that is, the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is a miss fluctuation (S1695: No), the processes of S1696 and S1697 are skipped and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 183 to Fig. 192. First, the contents of the command determination process 7 (S4192) will be described with reference to Fig. 183. Fig. 183 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in Fig. 61), and executes processes corresponding to various commands received from the main control device 110, similar to the above-mentioned command determination process 7 (S4192).

When the command determination process 7 (S4192) is executed, it is first determined whether a status command has been received (S4231), and if it is determined that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), a status command reception process is executed (S4232), and this process is terminated. This reception command process (S4232) executes the same process as the reception command process (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) described above. Although detailed explanations are omitted, a display command is set to receive a status command indicating the current game state, set a mode presentation mode according to the game state, and display a corresponding presentation mode (for example, a back image) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when a status command indicating a probability state is received, a display command corresponding to the presentation mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 climbs a mountain is set, and when a status command indicating a potential state is received, a display command corresponding to the preparation state shown in FIG. 162 or the presentation mode for indicating the RUSH game state shown in FIG. 163 is set. Details of the control over switching presentation modes during the potential win state will be explained later.

In command determination process 7 (S4192), the order of determining whether or not a status command has been received is different from that of the command determination process described above (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not a status command has been received before determining whether or not a special chart variation pattern command has been received. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reliably execute processing based on the special chart variation pattern command after determining the current game state. However, without being limited to this, various command determinations may be executed in the same order as the command determination process described above (S4112 in FIG. 61).

If it is determined in the processing of S4231 that a status command has not been received (S4231: No), it is then determined whether a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203). If it is determined that a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the fluctuation start flag (special chart fluctuation start flag 223d, special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special chart fluctuation pattern command is set to on (S4233), and the fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4234). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special chart change pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is then determined whether a special chart stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that a special chart stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special chart stop type command is set to on (S4235), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4236). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4205 that a special chart stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), the process of S4208 to S4214 is executed, which is the same as the command determination process described above (S4112 in FIG. 61), and if it is determined in the process of S4214 that a stop-related command has been received, stop-related process 7 is executed (S4236) and this process ends. The details of this stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

If it is determined in the process of S4214 that a stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the process of S4216 to S4218, which is the same as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) described above, is executed. If it is determined in the process of S4214 that a stop-related command has been received, the win-related process 7 is executed (S4237) and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of this win-related process 7 (S4237) is omitted, but instead of the role-related command, a process based on the reception of a small win-related command is executed for the above-mentioned win-related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67). This small win-related command, like the role-related command described above, includes at least a small win start command indicating the start of a small win game, a round command indicating the start of a round game in which the winning device that is the target of operation during a small win game opens, and an ending command indicating the end of a small win game, and a process for setting a display command corresponding to each received command is executed. This allows a presentation mode corresponding to the small win game executed by the main control device 110 to be executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the processing of S4218 that a win-related command has not been received (S4220: No), this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) executed in the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related process 7 (S4236). This stop-related process 7 (S4236) differs from the above-mentioned stop-related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65) in that a process for executing a preparation state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 184) is added when a special drawing confirmation command is received (S4601: Yes), and a process for executing a process for determining whether a special drawing discard command has been received (S4642), and when it is determined in the process of S4642 that a special drawing discard command has been received (S4642: Yes), a process for executing a special drawing discard setting process (S4643) is added, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Here, the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641) will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641). As described above, this preparation state setting process (S4641) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162(a)). In this preparation state setting process (S4641), first, it is determined whether the ceiling performance execution flag 223fh is on or not (S8001). If it is determined that it is off (S8001: No), there is no possibility of transitioning to the preparation state, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the ceiling performance execution flag 223fh is on (S8001: Yes), the ceiling performance execution flag 223fh is set to off (S8002), and the display mode during RUSH preparation (see FIG. 162(a)) is set (S8003). Next, the RUSH flag 223fg and the preparation state flag 223fd are both set to ON (S8004), and this process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 185), the display mode of the preparation state can be set from the point of transition to consecutive win mode (RUSH game).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the potential state is configured as an advantageous game state (consecutive mode) in which the drawing of the second special symbol is likely to be performed and small win games are frequently performed, and the normal state is configured as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by ending the number of chances (50 times) in the chance state, the game transitions to the most advantageous consecutive mode. In other words, the game is configured so that it is possible to transition directly from the chance state to the most advantageous game state without going through a big win. By configuring it in this way, the game can be played in the chance state with one goal being to pass the number of chances.

Here, conventionally, gaming machines are known that set the potential state to the most advantageous gaming state, and make it possible to set the potential state after winning a jackpot. However, in such conventional gaming machines, the potential state is not set unless a jackpot is won, and therefore while remaining in the normal state (i.e., until a jackpot is won), a disadvantageous state is created in which the player's balls are likely to decrease, which does not satisfy the player and makes it difficult to increase the player's interest.

In contrast to this, in the seventh embodiment, the number of chances of winning is ended (passed) in a chance state that is less favorable than the potential state, and the player directly transitions to the most favorable consecutive win mode (potential state) without winning a jackpot. In other words, even if the player does not win a jackpot, the player transitions to a favorable state where the player can easily continue to win prize balls intermittently just by continuing to play with the right hand. By configuring it in this way, when the number of chances of winning is ended, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and accomplishment, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability variable state is set, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C), the system is configured to transition to the most advantageous consecutive win mode (latent probability state) without allowing the number of probability variable times to elapse. This allows the player to have hope for lottery results other than winning the big win during the probability variable state.

In addition, the above-mentioned lottery result (small win C) is configured to be won only by drawing a special symbol (second special symbol) that is unlikely to be executed during the high probability state. Therefore, when a game ball shot by right-handed play during the high probability state enters the right second ball entrance 645 in an irregular manner and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the player can feel a sense of expectation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since there is no reserved memory of the second special symbol, it is configured so that the small prize C cannot be won unless the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 645 during the high probability state. Therefore, the player can pay close attention to the behavior of the ball during the high probability state. Note that only a part of the configuration of the above-mentioned embodiment may be adopted, for example, it may be configured to have a reserved memory function for the second special symbol, for example, to execute a second special symbol lottery based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol acquired during the big win game in which the high probability state is set during the high probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute multiple second special symbol fluctuations immediately after the high probability state is set. In this case, as an effect during the period in which the second special pattern variation is being executed, for example, as a preliminary step to the effect in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161(a) aims for the summit, an effect encouraging the player to decide whether or not to board a helicopter (warp prompting effect) can be executed, and if the result of the lottery for the second special pattern is "small win C," an effect can be executed in which the character 811 boards a helicopter and reaches the summit as shown in FIG. 161(b).

This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a period of time has been set during which it is easy to transition to the potential probability state immediately after the potential probability state is set. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the pattern of the second special symbol change executed during the potential probability state so that a short change (change time of 5 seconds) is more likely to be selected if the number of special symbol changes executed since the potential probability state was set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times). This allows for a smooth selection of the second special symbol based on the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right electric device 164 is frequently opened during the high probability state, making it difficult for the ball shot by right-handed play to enter the right second ball entrance 645. However, for example, a normal pattern variation pattern with a long variation time (e.g., 10 seconds) may be selected with a small probability (e.g., 1/100 probability) to temporarily create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the right second ball entrance 645. This makes it easier to temporarily execute the second special pattern lottery during the high probability state. Therefore, when the high probability state is set, the result of the special pattern lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small win C), increasing the opportunities to transition to the potential high probability state, and improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "small win C", which is the trigger for transitioning from the high probability state to the low probability state, can only be won in the second special symbol lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the first special symbol lottery may also be configured to have a low probability of being won (for example, 1/200) that is lower than the second special symbol lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is configured to notify the player of the preparation state from the transition to consecutive win mode (latent state) until the first small win is won in the lottery for the second special pattern, and is configured to notify the player that a favorable state (RUSH state) has been entered when a situation in which prize balls can actually be won (i.e., when small win fluctuation has begun) has occurred. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which prize balls cannot be won from continuing for a long time despite the RUSH state being notified, causing the player to feel dissatisfied.

In the seventh embodiment, the probability of a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is set to approximately 1/1 (59/60), but this is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. For example, the small win probability may be lowered.

Next, the contents of the special symbol discard setting process (S4643) will be explained with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol discard setting process (S4643). This special symbol discard setting process (S4643) is executed when a special symbol discard command is received in stop-related process 7 (see S4236 in FIG. 184). In this embodiment, by executing a right-hit game during the potential win state, a lottery is mainly executed for the second special symbol while the reserved ball for the first special symbol (reserved ball for special symbol 1) is secured, and a RUSH game in which small win games are frequently executed is executed.

During the potential winning state, the time period set for the first special symbol change is configured to be long (600 seconds). Furthermore, the time period for the second special symbol change executed during the potential winning state is configured to vary depending on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1. Specifically, the fewer the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 1 or 2), the shorter the time period for the second special symbol change is selected. In addition, if a specific lottery result ("small win B") is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol change being executed is discarded (forced to stop).

In other words, in this embodiment, during the potential state, small win games are frequently executed in the second special pattern lottery, and the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is reduced by winning a specific small win, resulting in a more efficient game (a game that increases the number of small win games executed within a unit time).

In this embodiment, therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that notifies the player of the RUSH game executed during the potential winning state, which is either a normal RUSH game or a Super RUSH game in which the number of small win games executed per unit time is greater than that of a normal RUSH game, and if a specific lottery result ("Small Win B") is won in the second special pattern lottery, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (see FIG. 164) that suggests a transition to the Super RUSH game. This makes it possible to clearly notify a player who is playing during the potential winning state that a more advantageous state (Super RUSH game) exists, and the situation leading up to the execution of the Super RUSH game, further increasing the player's motivation to play.

When the special chart discard setting process (S4643) is executed, first it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101). If it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No), since the current state is not a potential win state (RUSH play), the process skips S8102 to S8107 described below and moves to S8108.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the RUSH in progress flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read to determine whether the current number of special symbol reserved balls is 3. In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 and has been forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 3 (S8103: Yes), the performance mode indicating the start of the Super RUSH (see FIG. 164 (b)) is determined, the Super RUSH in progress flag is set to ON (S8105), the forced stop mode of the first special symbol is determined (S8108), display commands are set to show the various modes determined (S8109), and this process ends.

Here, the process of S8108 will be explained. In this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapped), so the timing at which the second special symbol variation that has won a specific small win (small win B7) in the second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed is determined regardless of the timing of the first special symbol variation. Therefore, the first special symbol variation may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the start of the first special symbol variation, or may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately before the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. And, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 in which the variation mode of the third symbol (the decorative symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that is displayed in response to the first special symbol variation is changed based on the passage of the variation time, for example, a high-speed variation display is executed so that the player has difficulty identifying the third symbol immediately after the variation starts, and a low-speed variation display is executed so that the player can identify the third symbol just before the end of the variation time (just before the variation stops).

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the third pattern change that was in progress was stopped based on the forced stopping of the first special pattern change and was stopped in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 at the time the command indicating the forced stop was received, for example, when the third pattern was being displayed as a slow-changing pattern, there was a risk that the third pattern would be stopped in the display mode indicating a jackpot.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the process of S8108 determines whether the stop mode is to be set during high-speed fluctuation or low-speed fluctuation based on the remaining period of the first special pattern fluctuation being executed as the forced stop mode of the special pattern (first special pattern). Then, the display command set in the process of S8109 is output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 determines the forced stop display mode of the third pattern being displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 based on the type of forced stop mode included in the received display command, and executes display control based on the determined forced stop display mode.

Specifically, when a display command indicating a stop mode during rapid fluctuation is received, image data of a display mode indicating a forced stop is inserted into image data prepared for executing the high-speed fluctuation display, and display control is executed so that the high-speed fluctuation display suddenly switches to a display mode indicating a forced stop. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player without delay that the first special symbol has been forced to stop. Also, since it is difficult for the player to distinguish the fluctuating third symbol during high-speed fluctuation, even if the display mode indicating a forced stop is suddenly displayed as a stopped state, the player will not feel uncomfortable about the image being replaced.

On the other hand, when a display command indicating a slow-speed fluctuation stop mode is received, the image displayed (or to be displayed) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is read, and it is determined whether or not it is in a reach state (a state in which the third symbols can be displayed in a stopped state in a combination indicating a big win). If it is determined that it is not currently in a reach state, an image corresponding to the display data in which each third symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (establishment line) among the display data used for slow-speed fluctuation display is determined as a forced stop image, and the slow fluctuation is continued until the forced stop image is displayed, and then the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. Also, if it is in a reach state, image data is created in which one symbol included in the remaining third symbol row that is currently fluctuating is replaced with a forced stop symbol indicating a forced stop, fluctuation display data for forced stop is generated so that the forced stop symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, and display control is executed based on the fluctuation display data for forced stop.

In this way, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, the process for forcibly stopping the third symbol is made different depending on the variable display mode of the third symbol being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol can be displayed as a stopped symbol without giving the player a sense of discomfort, regardless of when the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In addition, when the above-mentioned display control is executed, the period from when the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped until the third symbol variation display is stopped differs depending on the display mode of the third symbol variation being executed. In this case, for example, when the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped, the period from when the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped until the forced stop is confirmed, or the pattern confirmation period from when the special symbol indicating the small win B win in the second special symbol variation in which the forced stop condition for forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation is established is stopped until it is confirmed, can be set to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), and various forced stop display controls that stop and display the third symbol variation can be executed within that predetermined period. Then, based on the command (confirmation command) indicating that the confirmation period has elapsed being output from the main control device 110, the third symbol display mode (for example, "123") for the forced stop confirmation can be displayed. By configuring it in this way, when the third pattern change display is forcibly stopped, even if the period until the third pattern change display is forcibly stopped is made different depending on the display mode of the third pattern change being executed, the third pattern change display can be forcibly stopped within the fixed period, and further, when the fixed period has elapsed, the third pattern can be displayed in the same display mode for confirming the forced stop.

Returning to FIG. 186, the explanation will continue. In the process of S8103, if it is determined that the number of balls reserved for the special chart is not 3 (S8103: No), it is then determined whether the number of balls reserved for the special chart is 4 (S8106). If it is determined that the number is 4 (S8106: Yes), a presentation mode that aims for the top (for example, a presentation mode in which the character 811 rises one step up from the presentation screen shown in FIG. 164(a)) is decided (S8107), and the process moves to S8108. Also, if it is determined that the number is not 4 in the process of S8106, the process skips S8107 and moves to S8108.

Next, the contents of variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be explained with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting process 7 (S4153). This variable display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed within the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variable display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether the special chart variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). Then, if it is determined that the special chart variable start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S5201: No), since the variable pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S5234. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart variable start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable number counter 223fc (S5231), the special chart variable start flag 223d is set to off (S5202), and then, a performance mode setting process is executed to generate a display variable pattern command based on the acquired variable pattern type to notify the display control device 114 (S5232), the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5233), and the process proceeds to S5234.

In the process of S5234, it is determined whether the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5234). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is not on (i.e., it is off) (S5234: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S5238. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is on (S5234: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223fc is incremented by 1 (S5235), the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is set to off (S5236), and then the special chart 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 is executed (S5237). Details of this special chart 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 (S5237) will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. When the process of S5237 is completed, the process proceeds to S5238.

In the process of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5238). Then, if it is determined that the special chart fluctuation start flag 223e or the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is not on (i.e., it is off) (S5238: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart fluctuation start flag 223e or the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is on (S5238: Yes), the special chart fluctuation start flag 223e or the special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is set to off (S5239), and then the display special chart 1 or special chart 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned performance mode setting process (S5232) will be described. As described above, this performance mode setting process (S5232) is a process for setting the performance mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this performance mode setting process (S5232), first, it is determined whether the current state is normal (S8201), and if it is determined that the current state is not normal (S8201: No), it is then determined whether the current state is a probability variation state (S8202). In the process of S8202, if it is determined that the current state is not a probability variation state (S8202: No), it means that the current state is a potential probability variation state (consecutive win mode), and the ceiling performance setting process is executed (S8203), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S8208), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8202 that the game is in a high probability state (S8202: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation counter 223fc is 1 (S8204) in order to determine whether the first special symbol this time is the final fluctuation of the high probability state. If it is determined in the process of S8204 that the value of the fluctuation counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), a ceiling effect setting process is executed to select the effect mode of the last fluctuation display effect before transitioning to RUSH play (S8206), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8204 that the remaining time reduction count is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, there is no possibility of transitioning to a potential state (consecutive win mode), so the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8201 that the current game state is a normal state (S8201: Yes), then the presentation mode for normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S8207), and the processing proceeds to S8208.

Next, the above-mentioned ceiling effect setting process (S8202, S8206) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 188. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read out from the winning information storage area 223b (S8301), and it is determined whether or not the data of the execution area read out is data corresponding to a jackpot (S8302). If it is determined that it is a jackpot (S8302: Yes), that is, if it is determined that this special symbol 1 fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (the effect mode for notifying a jackpot is determined (S8303) and this process is terminated. That is, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed without transitioning to the potential state, so the presentation mode for notifying the jackpot (for example, a presentation mode that displays a display mode indicating a jackpot win while climbing a cliff) is determined without determining the presentation mode for the presentation that notifies the player of the reaching of the summit (see FIG. 161(b)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed despite the presentation that has reached the summit being executed, and then the game state other than the potential state being set, causing discomfort to the player.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S8302 that the special pattern change is a jackpot winning event, the top reaching effect is not executed regardless of the selected jackpot type. However, without being limited to this, if a jackpot that sets a potential state after the jackpot game ends is won, the top reaching effect is executed and a display mode indicating a jackpot winning event is further executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the process is configured to execute a determination as to whether or not to execute the top reaching effect at the final change of the probability state. However, without being limited to this, if a jackpot that sets a potential state after the jackpot game ends during the probability state is won (during the jackpot change), the top reaching effect is executed and a display mode indicating a jackpot winning event is further executed. This allows the performance mode of the performance executed during the probability state (the performance in which the character 811 aims for the top) to be changed based on the remaining period of the probability state and the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery, and the performance effect can be enhanced by configuring it so that the potential state is reliably set when the top reaching effect is executed.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S8302 that the data read from the execution area is not data indicating a jackpot (S8302: No), a presentation mode (see FIG. 169(b)) in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is determined (S8304), the ceiling presentation execution flag 223fh is set to ON (S8305), and this processing ends.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), it is possible to suitably set whether or not to execute the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 169(b)) depending on the results of the advance reading of the lottery results for the first special symbol at the time of transition to the potential state.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 190, the details of the special symbol 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) executed in the above-mentioned variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) will be described. This special symbol 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) is a process for setting a variable presentation corresponding to the variable pattern of the second special symbol variable. When this special symbol 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401), and if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is off (S8401: No), that is, if it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the potential state, it is then determined whether or not the probability state is set (S8402).

If it is determined in the process of S8402 that the special probability state is not set, i.e., that the current game state is normal (S8402: No), the display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the type of change indicated by the change pattern command is determined (S8403), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8402 that the current game state is a high probability state (S8402: Yes), a high probability state setting process (S8404) is executed to set the variable display mode of the second special symbol variable during the high probability state, and this process is terminated. The details of this high probability state setting process (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG. 191.

If it is determined in the process of S8401 that the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the preparation state flag 223fd is on (S8405). If it is determined that the preparation state flag 223fd is off (S8405: No), this means that the RUSH game is in progress (the preparation state has ended), so a RUSH setting process (S8410) is executed to set the variable display mode of the second special symbol variation during the potential state (RUSH game), and this process is terminated. The details of this RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8405 that the preparation state flag 223fd is on (i.e., in the preparation state) (S8405: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the small win fluctuation type has been notified by the fluctuation pattern command (S8406), and if it is determined that the small win fluctuation type has been notified (S8406: Yes), the preparation state flag 223fd is set to off (S8407), and the presentation mode of the RUSH entry presentation that notifies of the entry into the RUSH (see FIG. 162(b)) is determined as the presentation mode of the current fluctuation display presentation (S8408), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the process during the probability change setting process (S8404) will be explained with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process during the probability change setting process (S8404). In this process during the probability change setting process (S8404), a process is executed to set the performance mode when the second special symbol variation is executed during the probability change state, and a process is executed to set the performance mode (shortcut performance mode) when the small win C is won during the probability change state and the potential probability state is set without passing the probability change number (50 times). As described above, in this embodiment, when a right-hand hit game is executed during the probability change state, most of the balls flowing down the right side area enter the right electric role 164, and the first special symbol variation is executed. However, when the balls flowing down the right side area collide with each other, and irregular behavior is observed, the ball may enter the right second ball entrance 645, and the second special symbol lottery may be executed. If the player wins small prize C by the second special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state, the high probability state can be transitioned to the latent high probability state without executing the special symbol variation for the number of high probability states (50 times), which is the condition for terminating the high probability state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the high probability state, a special presentation is executed to inform the player that the chance to transition to the latent high probability state has arrived.

When the special chance setting process (S8404) is executed, it is first determined whether the current second special symbol change is a change that has won a small win C (S8501). If it is determined that it is a small win C (S8501: Yes), then the value of the change count counter 223fc is read (S8502), and based on the value of the change count counter 223fc read in the process of S8502, it is determined whether the number of times remaining in the special chance is 5 or less (S8503). If it is determined that it is 5 or less (S8503: Yes), a presentation mode that indicates entry into a small win RUSH (RUSH game) is determined, and the process proceeds to S8506 described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8503 that the number of times of the probability change calculation is not 5 or less (it is 6 or more) (S8503: No), a presentation mode (for example, a warp presentation) indicating a shortcut to a small prize RUSH (RUSH game) is determined (S8504), and the process proceeds to S8506. Also, if it is determined in the process of S8501 that the current change has not resulted in a small prize C (S8501: No), the process proceeds directly to S8506.

In the process of S8506, a presentation mode indicating that a special 2 variation (second special symbol variation) has been executed during the special variation is determined (for example, a presentation mode in which the character 811 is surrounded by flames (changing the display mode of the character 811) from the display mode shown in FIG. 161(a) and vigorously climbs the mountain) (S8506), a display pattern command indicating the various presentation modes determined is set (S8507), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be explained with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410). In this RUSH setting process (S8410), processing is executed to set various effects for the second special symbol variation executed during RUSH play.

When the RUSH setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether the Super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S8601: Yes), it is then determined whether the current fluctuation has resulted in a small win B (S8602). If it is determined that the current fluctuation has resulted in a small win B (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation that was being executed when the fluctuation was stopped is forcibly stopped, so the presentation mode of the end suggestion presentation indicating the end of the Super RUSH is set (S8603), and the presentation mode for the RUSH that corresponds to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S8604), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if in the process of S8602, the current fluctuation does not result in a small win B (S8602: No), or if in the process of S8601, it is determined that the Super RUSH flag 223fi is not set to ON (S8601: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S8604, and then ends this process.

<Another example using the game board configuration of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in Figure 157, a flow path is formed in the right area of the game board 13 through which a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down, and a right electric device 164 is arranged within that flow path.Furthermore, while the right electric device 164 is in a closed state (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the right electric device 164), a flow path (see Figure 158) is formed so that the ball can flow down over the opening and closing lid 164r1 of the right electric device 164, and a right second ball entry port 645 is arranged at a position where the ball that has flowed down over the opening and closing lid 164r1 can enter the game. Depending on the opening pattern of the right electric device 164 (the opening operation pattern for normal winning games), the proportion of balls flowing down the right area, and in particular the proportion of balls flowing down the flow path through which balls that have passed through the through gate 67 can flow (hereinafter referred to as the specific flow path) that enter the right electric device 164 (the proportion that enters the right first ball entry port 164r (the starting port that triggers the drawing of the first special pattern) provided in the right electric device 164) and the proportion that enters the right second ball entry port 645 (the proportion that enters the starting port that triggers the drawing of the second special pattern).

Specifically, when the probability variable state is set as the game state, the variation time of the normal pattern variation and the opening pattern of the right electric device 164 are regulated so that most of the balls flowing down the specific flow path will win the right electric device 164, and when the potential probability state is set, the variation time of the normal pattern variation and the opening pattern of the right electric device 164 are regulated so that the rate at which balls flowing down the specific flow path will win the right electric device 164 is lower than when the potential probability state is set. In addition, when the normal state is set, the variation time of the normal pattern variation is regulated so that the rate at which balls flow down the specific flow path will win the right electric device 164 is even lower than when the potential probability state is set. In addition, in both the potential state and the normal state, a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, and the opening operation pattern executed for the normal symbol winning game (the opening pattern of the right electric device 164) is the same, but by varying the normal symbol fluctuation time, the interval at which the normal symbol winning game is executed is made different, and as a result, the rate at which the ball that flows down a specific flow path wins the right electric device 164 is made different.

According to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, by varying the starting hole (right first ball entry hole 164r, right second ball entry hole 645) through which the ball is more likely to enter depending on the set game state, the type of special pattern that is mainly used to draw special patterns can be easily varied by playing from the right. Therefore, when different game states are set for the player, the player can play games with different playability, which increases the interest of the game.

However, in the seventh embodiment described above, the special symbol type for which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed is specified for the set game state (for example, the high probability state), and specifically, the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed during the high probability state, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed during the potential probability state. Therefore, unless the set game state is variably set, it is not possible to change the special symbol type corresponding to the mainly executed special symbol lottery, and there is a problem that players who play in the same game state for a long period of time quickly become bored with the game.

To solve the above problems, the following configurations or combinations of configurations may be used instead of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Configuration Example 1: Configuration of normal map fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 172(b), the variation pattern is defined in correspondence with the set game state and the value of the second variation type counter CS3, and when the process of selecting the variation pattern is executed, the variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is selected. In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the same game state is set, regardless of the number of special pattern variations executed during the game state, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the second variation type counter CS3 acquired from the data table in which the same variation pattern is defined. In contrast, in this configuration example 1, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected variation time and the length of the selected variation time can be made different depending on the number of special pattern variations (the number of special pattern lotteries executed after the end of the special pattern lottery) executed in a state in which a specific game state (probability variable state) is set.

In other words, it differs from the configuration of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172(b)) of the seventh embodiment described above in that different fluctuation patterns are defined according to the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated since the game state was set. Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated since the probability variable state was set is in the range of 1 to 2, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined, and when the number of times is in the range of 3 to 50, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.8 seconds is defined, similar to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above.

By configuring it in this way, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as the normal pattern variation from when the high probability state is set until the special pattern variation is executed twice. Therefore, during the specified period after the high probability state is set (the period until the special pattern variation is executed twice), it is easier to make the ball enter the right second ball entrance 645 than outside the specified period (the period after the special pattern variation is executed twice). This makes it easier to execute the second special pattern lottery only during a part of the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to win a specific small prize (small prize C) in the second special pattern lottery only during a part of the high probability state, and to easily transition from the high probability state to a latent state that is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state without waiting for the passage of a predetermined period (50 high probability times).

In the above-mentioned configuration example 1, the normal symbol variation pattern that can be selected to be more advantageous to the player during a specified period after the high probability state is set is specified than during periods other than the specified period. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that when a specific period has passed since the high probability state is set, a normal symbol variation pattern that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, if the specific period has passed without ending the high probability state, the player can be allowed to play in a more advantageous manner than during the specific period. Therefore, a player who has been playing for a long time without the game state being changed can be motivated to play.

In addition, in the above-mentioned configuration example 1, a different change time (change pattern) is selected depending on the number of times the special pattern changes after the probability change state is set, but this is not limited to this. For example, a change pattern with a change time of 2 seconds and a change pattern with a change time of 0.8 seconds can be selected regardless of the number of times the special pattern changes, and the probability of each change pattern being selected can be made different depending on the number of times the special pattern changes. Specifically, if the number of times the special pattern changes after the probability change state is set meets a predetermined condition (for example, if the number of times the special pattern changes after the probability change state is set is 2 or less, or if the number of times the special pattern changes after the probability change state is set is an even number), a change pattern that is advantageous to the player (a 2-second change pattern) can be more likely to be selected than if the predetermined condition is not met. By configuring in this way, the period during which a game advantageous to the player is executed can be easily set simply by variably setting the selection ratio of each change pattern depending on the number of times the special pattern changes.

In the above-mentioned configuration example 1, one type of normal pattern variation selection table is referenced when the high probability state is set, but it is not limited to this, and a configuration may be made in which a normal pattern variation pattern is selected by referring to a different data table depending on the type of jackpot that triggers the high probability state to be set. In this case, even if the same high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a different data table (normal pattern variation pattern table) can be referenced to select the normal pattern variation pattern (variation time) depending on the type of jackpot that was won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the length of the advantageous period (a period during which a game that is more advantageous to the player (e.g., the second special pattern lottery) is more likely to be performed than in other periods) and the timing at which the advantageous period is set to be different depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, when a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the high probability state is an advantageous period, and when a specific unfavorable jackpot type is set, the advantageous period may not be set for the entire period of the high probability state.

As described above, when a certain period during which a specific game state (high probability state) is set is configured to allow a game to be played that is more advantageous to the player than in other periods, a period suggestion effect may be executed to suggest (inform) the player that the current game state is favorable (a period during which a game that is more advantageous to the player (e.g., the second special pattern lottery) is more likely to be played than in other periods). For example, during the mountain climbing effect (see FIG. 161(a)) executed during the high probability state in the seventh embodiment described above, the rabbit-like character 811 may be changed to a more powerful display mode, the words "Entering the Powerful Zone" may be displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect that may shorten the time it takes to reach the top may be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the current period is advantageous in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, for example, even if a plurality of normal map fluctuation pattern tables with different advantageous periods are prepared as normal map fluctuation pattern tables to be referenced during the probability variable state, and one normal map fluctuation pattern table is selectable based on the jackpot type set when the probability variable jackpot is won, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous period in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that the above-mentioned period suggestion effect applies to all effects that are configured to be more easily executed during an advantageous period than outside of an advantageous period, and even effects other than effects that directly explain to the player that the current period is advantageous are included in the period suggestion effect because the possibility that the current period is advantageous is higher than the possibility that the current period is outside of the advantageous period at the time the effect is executed. Therefore, the period suggestion effect may be executed in a period outside of the advantageous period (unfavorable period) as long as its execution frequency is lower than that of the advantageous period.

In addition to the period suggestion effect described above, that is, an effect to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the current period is favorable, the system may be configured to execute a state suggestion effect that suggests that the normal map fluctuation pattern table referenced in the current special probability state is one that is likely to set an advantageous period among multiple normal map fluctuation pattern tables that can be referenced during the special probability state.

Furthermore, when a special probability state is set, if a ball enters the right second ball entry port 645, the presentation mode of the notification effect for notifying the player that the ball has entered the right second ball entry port 645 may be configured to differ based on the result of determining whether or not the current period is favorable. For example, if a ball enters the right second ball entry port 645 during a favorable period, the notification effect is executed without setting a presentation mode that excessively congratulates the player, because the ball entered during a state in which the ball entry frequency is high (favorable period), and if a ball enters the right second ball entry port 645 during a state in which the ball entry frequency is low (unfavorable period), a presentation mode that congratulates the player may be set, rather than the presentation mode of the notification effect that would be set if a ball entered the right second ball entry port 645 during a favorable period. In this way, if multiple periods can be set that vary the ease of scoring a ball into a specific entry hole, the presentation style of the notification display can be changed according to the set period, making it possible to execute a notification display with a special presentation style if the ball is successfully scored into a specific entry hole during a period when it is difficult to score.

In the above-mentioned configuration example 1, the rate at which the balls that flow down a specific flow path (the flow path through which the balls that pass through the through gate 67 flow) reach the right second ball entrance 645 is changed by varying the normal pattern change time according to the predetermined conditions (jackpot type, game state, number of special pattern changes, value of the change type counter CS3), but this is not limited to this. For example, when a normal pattern lottery is won, the length of the period from when the winning normal pattern change is stopped and displayed until the normal pattern win game is executed (normal pattern confirmation period) may be made different depending on the type of normal pattern win that was won or the type of normal pattern change pattern selected. In other words, the period from when the normal pattern change starts until the normal pattern win game is executed may be made variable depending on the predetermined conditions (jackpot type, game state, number of special pattern changes, value of the change type counter CS3, normal pattern lottery result, etc.).

<Configuration Example 2: Right Electric Role Opening Operation Configuration>
In the seventh embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the right electric device 164 has one type of opening operation pattern in a normal winning game executed during a high probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the right electric device 164 may be configured to be able to set multiple types of opening operation patterns in a normal winning game executed during a high probability state, and the length of the period during which the right electric device 164 is in a closed state (the ball flows down the opening and closing lid 164r1 to the right second ball entrance 645) during a normal winning game may be configured to be different depending on the set opening operation pattern. By configuring in this way, the rate at which the ball that flows down a specific flow path (the flow path through which the ball that passed through the through gate 67 flows down) reaches the right second ball entrance 645 can be changed depending on the winning type of the normal winning game executed during the high probability state.

Furthermore, for example, an opening operation pattern for a normal winning game may be set in which the first open state (a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the right electric device 164) is set for 2 seconds, the first closed state (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the right electric device 164) is set for 5 seconds, and the second open state is set for 0.5 seconds, and the normal winning game may be configured to end when one ball enters the right electric device 164 during a normal winning game.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the ball enters the right electric device 164 during the first opening state, the normal winning game ends at that point, but by playing in a way that prevents the ball from entering the right electric device 164 during the first opening state, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the right second ball entrance 645 during the normal winning game. In this case, it is also preferable to configure it so that an opening operation pattern can be set in which the normal winning game ends when the period of the first opening state has elapsed. This allows the player to enjoy the fun of choosing whether or not to fire the ball (perform right-hitting game) during the normal winning game.

In the seventh embodiment and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in Figure 157, a flow path is formed in the right area of the game board 13 through which a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down, and the right electric device 164 is arranged within that flow path, and further, while the right electric device 164 is in a closed state (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the right electric device 164), a flow path (see Figure 158) is formed so that the ball can flow down over the opening and closing lid 164r1 of the right electric device 164, and the right second ball entry port 645 is arranged at a position where the ball that has flowed down over the opening and closing lid 164r1 can enter. Depending on the opening pattern of the right electric device 164 (the opening operation pattern of a normal winning game), the ratio of balls flowing down the right area, and in particular the ratio of balls flowing down the flow path through which balls that have passed through the through gate 67 can flow (hereinafter referred to as the specific flow path) that enter the right electric device 164 (the ratio of balls entering the right first ball entry port 164r (the starting port that triggers the drawing of the first special pattern) provided in the right electric device 164) and the ratio of balls entering the right second ball entry port 645 (the ratio of balls entering the starting port that triggers the drawing of the second special pattern) can be changed, so that the second special pattern drawing is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern drawing during the special probability state. In other words, the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific flow path is configured to execute a lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than a starting port provided on the downstream side, and the winning rate of balls entering the starting port provided on the upstream side is changed to change the winning rate of balls entering the starting port provided on the downstream side, where a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that a lottery that is more advantageous to the player is executed when a ball enters a starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific area than when a ball enters a starting port provided on the downstream side.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, no matter what trigger sets the most favorable potential state for the player, specifically, when a jackpot that sets the potential state after the end of a jackpot game is won and the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or when a predetermined transition condition (for example, 50 times of potential change) is met during the potential change state and the potential state is set, the potential state is configured to be able to acquire the potential state 1 reserve in the right-hand play executed during the jackpot game or the potential change state in order to make it easier for the reserved memory of the first special pattern (the potential state 1 reserve) to be secured in a predetermined number (for example, 4) at the time the potential state is set. Specifically, the first special pattern change is executed during the potential change state, and the first special pattern change is not executed during the jackpot game, so that when the potential state is set as a result of winning a potential jackpot, the potential state is more likely to be executed when the potential state is set with the number of reserved special patterns 1 at the upper limit (4) than when the potential state is set via the potential change state.

In addition, when the potential state is set, a game (second special pattern lottery) with a different degree of advantage (different fluctuation time) is executed according to the number of reserved special patterns 1, and a game that is more advantageous to the player is executed when there are fewer reserved special patterns 1 than when there are many reserved special patterns 1.

In other words, when the number of times of probability change (the number of times of special pattern changes executed during the probability change state) reaches 50 times during the probability change state, the number of reserved special patterns 1 is configured to be the upper limit (4 pieces) with a high probability by the right-hand play executed before the number of times of probability change reaches 50 times. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, when a small prize C is won in the second special pattern lottery during the probability change state, the probability change state is configured to be transitioned to a potential probability state before the number of times of probability change reaches 50 times. Therefore, for example, when a small prize C is won immediately after the probability change state is set and the potential probability state is transitioned to, compared to when the potential probability state is set based on the establishment of other transition conditions, the execution period of the right-hand play before the potential probability state is set is shorter, so that it is easier to reduce the number of reserved special patterns 1 at the time the potential probability state is set. Therefore, it can be a transition condition that is more advantageous to the player than the other transition conditions described above (transition conditions that are established when the number of times of probability change reaches 50 times).

In this way, by setting a plurality of transition conditions (jackpot, 50 chances of chance, small win C win) in advance to set a specific game state (for example, a potential state), and configuring the degree of advantage after a specific game state is set to be variable according to the type of transition condition that is established, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the game state that is set for the player, but also in the transition conditions that are established. Furthermore, by setting a plurality of transition conditions (50 chances of chance, small win C win) in advance to set a specific game state (for example, a potential state) in a state where the same game state (for example, a potential state) is set, which can be established without going through a jackpot, and configuring the degree of advantage after a specific game state is set to be variable according to the type of transition condition that is established, it is possible to have the player play a game aiming to win a jackpot and a game aiming to establish a favorable transition condition in parallel. Furthermore, the specific transition condition (small win C win) that is set in advance is configured so that the degree of advantage after the potential state is set is easily variable depending on the timing of its establishment. Specifically, if the transition condition is established when the number of reserved special charts 1 is small, it is configured so that an advantageous game (Super RUSH) is easily executed after the potential state is set, so that the player can play while keeping in anticipation of when the transition condition will be established. Also, since the specific transition condition (small win C win) can be established regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1, the player can always be expected to establish the specific transition condition.

In the seventh embodiment described above, of the multiple transition conditions for transitioning to the potential state, the transition condition established by winning the small win C is configured to be the most advantageous to the player, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be more advantageous to the player when the number of potential changes reaches 50. In this case, for example, it may be configured so that the potential state is more advantageous to the player than the potential state, or so that a game is executed that is more advantageous to the player when the potential state is set with a large number of reserved balls for special chart 1 than when the potential state is set with a small number of reserved balls.

In addition, as the performance (mountain climbing performance) executed during the probability change state shown with reference to Fig. 161 (a) and (b), the performance mode of the performance executed when the transition condition is established may be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special chart 1 at that time. For example, when the execution condition for executing an advantageous game after the potential state is set is established (for example, when the transition condition is established when the number of reserved balls of the special chart 1 is one), a performance that reaches a luxurious summit (for example, a performance mode in which the summit is a flower field) is executed compared to when the execution condition is not established, and the player may be configured to be notified that the transition condition is established in an advantageous state. In addition, when the small prize C is won (when the second special pattern variation in which the small prize C is won is started) or when it is confirmed that the number of probability changes will reach 50 times (when the reserved special chart 1 is predicted and it is confirmed that the big prize will not be won before the number of probability changes reaches 50 times), a performance that encourages the player to interrupt the right-hand hit game may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the reserved special chart 1 from increasing unnecessarily.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, by suspending play until the first special symbol variation (10-minute variation) with long-term variation is performed multiple times while the potential probability state is set, it is possible to forcibly play in a favorable game state. However, it is preferable to provide a penalty so that the most disadvantageous game to the player is played by suspending play for a long time during the potential probability state. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern to be different depending on the number of reserved memories of ordinary symbols (number of reserved ordinary symbols), and to configure the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected when the number of reserved memories of ordinary symbols is 0 to be more disadvantageous to the player than the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected when the number of reserved memories of ordinary symbols is greater than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, it is preferable to configure it so that an ordinary symbol variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected.

By configuring in this way, if the number of reserved normal symbols is set to 0 due to a long pause in play during the potential state, the player can be forced to play in an unfavorable situation where it is difficult to increase the reserved special symbol 1 from 0. In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to configure the normal symbol fluctuation pattern to be selectable based on the number of reserved normal symbols and the number of reserved special symbol 1 balls. For example, when the number of reserved normal symbols is 0 and the number of reserved special symbols is 1 or 2, a short fluctuation time is likely to be set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbols so that the number of reserved special symbol 1 balls is likely to become 3 or more, and when the number of reserved normal symbols is 0 and the number of reserved special symbols is 0, a long fluctuation time is likely to be set to make it difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 1.

Furthermore, the configuration of changing the normal pattern variation pattern according to the number of reserved memories of normal patterns may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration. Specifically, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 157 in that a through gate 67 is also provided in the left side area, and a variable winning device 650 that is opened during a jackpot game is arranged in a position (for example, a position below the first ball entrance 64) where the ball can win whether a left-handed game (a game in which the ball flows down to the left side area) or a right-handed game (a game in which the ball flows down to the right side area) is played, and the game board 13 is configured so that the player can select between a left-handed game and a right-handed game during a jackpot game. Then, the ratio of the shot ball passing through the through gate 67 is made different between a right-handed game and a left-handed game. This allows the number of reserved normal symbols (number of reserved normal symbols) acquired at the end of the jackpot game to differ depending on which game is played during the jackpot game.Then, as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, a first game state in which a large number of reserved normal symbols is more advantageous than a small number, and a second game state in which a large number of reserved normal symbols is more disadvantageous than a small number, can be set.

This configuration allows the player to enjoy the fun of choosing a game mode during a jackpot game while predicting the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends.

<Modification of the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the seventh embodiment described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 193 to Fig. 200. In the seventh embodiment described above, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery of special symbol 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of special symbol 2) can be executed in a overlapping manner, when a specific gaming state (for example, a potential state) is set, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the first special symbol variation, and a short-term (for example, 1 second) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation, and further, a small prize can be won in the lottery of special symbol 2.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to execute the Special Chart 2 lottery more times than the Special Chart 1 lottery during the potential winning state, and by making small win games that are executed based on the results of the Special Chart 2 lottery occur more frequently, it becomes possible to provide advantageous play to the player.

In contrast to this, in a modified version of the seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) in which the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed in the same way as in the seventh embodiment described above, when a specific gaming state (e.g., a sure-change state) is set, the variation time of one special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) is configured to be long (e.g., 10 minutes) and the variation time of the other special symbol (e.g., the second special symbol) is configured to be short (e.g., 1 second), so that the drawing of the other special symbol is executed with priority.

Then, the lottery for the other special symbol (e.g., the second special symbol) is configured to be more advantageous than the lottery for one special symbol (e.g., the first special symbol) (e.g., the second special symbol lottery is more likely to result in a small win than the first special symbol lottery, or the content of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won), making it easier for the player to play advantageously during a specific game state (e.g., a special probability state).

In the gaming machine described above, at least during the period when the probability variable state is set, the first special symbol lottery becomes an unfavorable lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery becomes an advantageous lottery that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, an ending condition that is established when the lottery result of one of the special symbol lotteries (e.g., the first special symbol lottery) becomes a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a losing win or a jackpot win) is set as at least one of the ending conditions for ending a specific gaming state (e.g., the probability variable state), and the interest in the game is improved by providing a gameplay that allows many advantageous special symbol lotteries to be executed before the ending condition is established by the disadvantageous special symbol lottery.

However, in the gaming machine described above, when a specific game state (e.g., a sure-win state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the period during which the advantageous game state continues is set only by the result of the first special symbol lottery, so there is a problem in that the player cannot play with enthusiasm while hoping that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a lottery result that ends the advantageous game state (e.g., a jackpot win that sets a normal state after the jackpot game ends), the period until the special symbol that indicates the lottery result is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result starts) becomes the period during which the advantageous game state continues, and once the period during which the advantageous game state continues is set, there is a problem in that it cannot be changed (cancelled).

In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, when a small jackpot is won in the advantageous special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) that is mainly executed during the advantageous game state, the disadvantageous special pattern change (first special pattern change) that is being executed can be discarded. That is, when the result of the disadvantageous special pattern change that is being executed is a result that ends the advantageous game state (for example, a result that indicates a big jackpot win that sets the normal state after the end of the big jackpot game), the lottery result is discarded, so that the advantageous game state can be extended (continued). In addition, when the disadvantageous special pattern change that is being executed (first special pattern change) is discarded, the number of disadvantageous special pattern changes is not updated (added) by the discarded disadvantageous special pattern change. Therefore, even if a change number end condition that is established when the number of disadvantageous special pattern changes during the advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times) is set as the end condition for ending the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued).

By configuring it in this way, the duration of the advantageous gaming state can be varied based on the results of the lottery for the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), making it possible to motivate players who are playing during the advantageous gaming state to continue playing.

Furthermore, in this modified example, when a small jackpot is won in the advantageous special pattern lottery during an advantageous game state (probable bonus state), at least a small jackpot type (small jackpot B) that discards the ongoing disadvantageous special pattern change (first special pattern change) as described above, and a small jackpot type (small jackpot C) that discards the ongoing disadvantageous special pattern change (first special pattern change) and ends the advantageous game state can be set.

In other words, in this modified example, the termination condition for ending the advantageous gaming state is set to be established based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol). By setting multiple termination conditions for ending the advantageous gaming state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of time that the advantageous gaming state will continue.

In addition, because the end conditions that can be met are set based on the results of the drawing of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) during the advantageous game state, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise. In addition, as described above, when a small jackpot is won in the drawing of the advantageous special symbol, the period during which the advantageous game state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the type of small jackpot that is set, so that when a small jackpot is won in the drawing of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), the player can be made to pay attention to the game content that follows.

Furthermore, in this modified example, like the seventh embodiment described above, the change time of the advantageous special pattern (second special pattern) change can be variably set according to the number of reserved balls of the disadvantageous special pattern (first special pattern) (the combined number of reserved balls of the special pattern and the combined number of reserved balls of the advantageous special pattern); specifically, the fewer the number of reserved balls of the disadvantageous special pattern (first special pattern) (the combined number of reserved balls of the disadvantageous special pattern and the combined number of reserved balls of the advantageous special pattern), the easier it is to set a short change time as the change time of the second special pattern change executed during the advantageous game state (during the special pattern state).

As a result, by winning a small jackpot in the drawing of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) and discarding the ongoing variation of the unfavorable special symbol, it is possible to increase the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the advantageous game state.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, when a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, and the probability state of the normal symbol is configured to transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (a specific small jackpot is won, or a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries are executed) is met. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, once the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery can be increased until the next jackpot is won, so the player can play with peace of mind. On the other hand, once the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not end until the jackpot is won, so there is a problem that the player's motivation to play decreases during the high probability state of the special symbol.

In response to this, in this modified example, a condition is added for the high probability state of the special symbol to transition to a low probability state, so that the high probability state of the special symbol can transition to a low probability state even if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery. As a result, even if a high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol may end without winning a jackpot, so that players playing during the high probability state of the special symbol can play with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this modified example, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, if the first transition condition is met, a low probability state for special symbols is set, and if the second transition condition is met, a low probability state for normal symbols is set. If the first transition condition is met before the second transition condition, a transition occurs from the high probability state to a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and if the second transition condition is met before the first transition condition, a transition occurs from the high probability state to a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). Then, if both transition conditions are met, a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set.

In other words, the game is structured so that the game will eventually transition to the normal state through different processes depending on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition that can be met during the special probability state are met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make a player who is playing during the special probability state interested not only in when the special probability state will end, but also in which game state the game will transition to from the special probability state.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above is configured such that while the potential state is set, a long period (e.g., 10 minutes) of change is set as the change time of the first special symbol change, and while the normal state is set, a long period (e.g., 10 minutes) of change is set as the change time of the second special symbol change. If a first transition condition (e.g., the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed is 50) is set, which can be satisfied even if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery as in this modified example, there is a risk that both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change will change for a long period (e.g., 10 minutes) during the normal state that is set based on the first transition condition being satisfied, and there is a problem that the player cannot play smoothly.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, a game state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) in which a long-term change is set as the change pattern of one special pattern change (e.g., a first special pattern change) is configured not to transition directly to a game state (e.g., a normal state) in which a long-term change is set as the change pattern of the other special pattern change (e.g., a second special pattern change) without going through a jackpot win for the special pattern, making it less likely that both the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change will change for a long period of time (e.g., 10 minutes). This allows the player to play smoothly.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 193. Figure 193 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 in this modified example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above (see Figure 157) in that part of the configuration of the right side area (the area formed to the right of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 is different, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 193, in this modified example, a distribution member 700 is provided upstream of the right-hand region, and balls shot by right-hand play are alternately distributed to a left-hand flow path 701 formed to the left of the distribution member 700 and a right-hand flow path 702.

A movable lid 1500 is provided upstream of the left side flow path 701, forming the flow down surface of the left side flow path 701. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a certain opening and closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown), and the opening and closing operation is performed so that the first right side ball entrance 64b, located below the movable lid 1500, is positioned between an open state where a ball can enter, and a closed state where it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter.

Specifically, a movable lid opening/closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55), and the movable lid opening/closing process executes an opening/closing operation that repeats an opening period of 0.1 seconds and a closing period of an average of 0.8 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entry port 64b, which is controlled to open and close in this way, is configured to make it more difficult for balls to enter than the first ball entry port 64.

Then, the ball that flows down the left side flow path 701 and over the movable cover 1500 (the ball that flows down the flow path formed on the movable cover 1500 in the closed state) flows down the bent part of the left side flow path 701 and flows down toward the electric device 640a by a nail planted at a position facing the flow-down end of the left side flow path 701.

On the other hand, a bend is formed in the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700, and a small win attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is arranged so as to be part of the flow down surface of the bend. This small win attacker 3650 is composed of an opening and closing lid 3650a that is controlled to open and close during a small win game that is executed based on winning a small win in the second special pattern lottery, a flow path through which the balls that flow in when the opening and closing lid 3650a is in the open state, and a small win winning port 3653 through which the balls that flow down the flow path enter. Note that the opening and closing control content of the opening and closing lid 3650a during a small win game is the same as the content of the role hit control process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. This constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being applied to the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the operation is controlled based on a moving scenario stored in ROM 203 in a moving member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). This moving scenario repeatedly executes an operation of opening the constantly movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds.

In other words, in the game board 13 of this modified example, a ball shot in a right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals and flows downstream while rolling on the rolling surface on which the constantly movable member 1500 is arranged. If the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls onto the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 becomes open, the ball passes through the open constantly movable member 1500 and enters the right first ball entrance 64b.

The timing of the ball rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of the constantly movable valve 1500 opening is 0.1 seconds out of 0.9 seconds, so the timing when the two coincide is approximately once every 15.6 seconds. In other words, when right-hand play is performed continuously, approximately four balls will enter the right first ball entrance 64b per minute.

In other words, in a game state where right-hand play is continuously performed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, balls periodically enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so when a jackpot game ends and a probability-changing state is set, it is possible to prevent a state in which there is no reserved first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1). Also, since the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened once is set to a period (0.1 seconds) during which it is difficult for a player to aim and hit, right-hand play can be more disadvantageous to a player than left-hand play that aims at the first ball entrance 64 in a normal game state.

To explain more specifically, when the game is in the normal state and left-handed play is performed, the machine is designed so that of the 250 balls shot, approximately 15 will enter the first ball entrance 64, and five prize balls will be paid out if a ball enters. The machine is also designed so that approximately five balls will enter the general ball entrance 63, and five prize balls will be paid out if a ball enters. Therefore, when 250 balls are shot in left-handed play, taking into account the possibility of re-firing the paid-out prize balls, it is possible to have approximately 20 balls enter the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, when the game is in a normal state and right-handed play is performed, it is designed so that of the 250 balls shot, approximately 9 will enter the right first ball entrance 64b, and two prize balls will be paid out if a ball enters. Also, the right-side area does not have a general ball entrance 63. Therefore, when 250 balls are shot in a right-handed game, even if the paid-out prize balls are taken into account and shot again, only approximately 10 balls can enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Therefore, when the game is in a normal state, it is possible to inhibit players from playing right-handed games.

In this embodiment, the general winning port 63 is not provided in the game area (right side area) through which the balls shot by right-handed play pass, but the general winning port 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not give the player an advantage in right-handed play over left-handed play when the game is in the normal state. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in right-handed play during time-saving or jackpot states.

Furthermore, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball on the path until the ball shot by right-hand play reaches the movable lid 1500, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the ball shot by right-hand play will reach the movable lid 1500. In this modified example, the distribution member 700 is provided for the purpose of both delaying the flow of the ball (making the flow behavior of the ball different) and distributing the ball shot by right-hand play to multiple flow paths, but this is not limited to this, and a different configuration may be used for each purpose, or a delay means for differentiating the flow period of the ball (the flow period until it reaches the movable lid 1500) of the ball distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 (for example, a flow path with a different friction coefficient of the flow surface from other flow surfaces, or a flow path in which the flow direction of the ball branches along the way and finally reaches the movable lid 1500 regardless of which way it branches) may be provided.

Next, the electric device 640a, which is reached by the balls that flow down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, will be described. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric device 640a is provided in an area where both the balls that flow down the first flow path 701 and the balls that flow down the second flow path 702 can reach, and is variable between an induction state (protruding state) in which the balls that reach the electric device 640a can be made to flow down toward the second ball entrance 640 and a release state (buried state) in which the balls that reach the electric device 640a cannot be accepted, depending on the normal winning game that is executed when a normal pattern lottery is won.

Furthermore, the variable state (opening/closing control contents) of the electric device 640a executed as the normal winning game described above is made different according to the probability state of the normal pattern that is set. In a game state where a high probability state of the normal pattern is set (high probability state, time-saving state), the electric device 640a is controlled to open and close so that it is in an guiding state for a sufficient time (e.g., 3 seconds) for the ball that has reached the electric device 640a to reach the second ball entrance 640, and in a game state where a low probability state of the normal pattern is set (normal state, potential state), the electric device 640a is controlled to open and close so that it is in an guiding state for a time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) when the ball that has reached the electric device 640a cannot reach the second ball entrance 640.

By configuring it in this way, during a game state in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set (e.g., normal state, potential state), left-hand play is more advantageous to the player than right-hand play, and during a game state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set (e.g., probability state, time-saving state), right-hand play is more advantageous to the player than left-hand play.

Finally, the balls that have passed through the electric device 640a (the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 701 and the balls that have flowed down the second flow path 702) reach the V winning device 2650. This V winning device 2650 is controlled to open and close by the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is configured so that a high probability state for the special symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends by having the ball that has entered the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game pass through a specific gate.

Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be explained with reference to Figures 194 to 196. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 194. Figure 194 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 2650.

As shown in FIG. 194, the V winning device 2650 comprises an opening forming member 2650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 2650c which is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 2650b to screw the V winning device 2650 to the game board 13, an LED board 2650d arranged on the rear side of the base member 2650c and on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged to light up the LEDs from the rear side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 2650e which holds the LED board 2650d between the base member 2650c, and an opening/closing door 2650f1 for opening and closing the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a formed in the opening forming member 2650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 2650f having the opening and closing unit 2650f, a flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, a switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that engages with the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, a flow path solenoid 2650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j and operates the link member 2650i, and a fixing cover body 2650m that covers the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 2650j with a screw.

Figure 195 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650. Figure 195 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and Figure 195 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650. As shown in Figure 195 (b), the V winning device 2650 is formed with a jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 195 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection opening 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting the entry of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 2650e shown in Figure 195 (b).

As shown in FIG. 195(b), the opening of the jackpot winning hole (jackpot winning hole) 2650a can be changed between an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the ball cannot (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 2650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 2650f1, and the ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is retracted to the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13) and is therefore retracted from the jackpot winning hole (jackpot winning hole) 2650a.

In addition, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently entered into the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a. Therefore, the ball can be reliably entered into the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Figure 195(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 195(b). As shown in Figure 195(a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 2650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 196, we will explain the configuration in which the balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 2650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and the special discharge flow path 2650e2 described below.

Figure 196 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 2650e showing the state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is sorted to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in Figure 196 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 that guides the ball, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 2650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 2650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 2650g.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), the ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2. The special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V-route in which the flowing ball passes through a specific area (detection switch) 2650e3, and is detected by the detection switch 2650e3 that can detect the passage of the ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2, and is then discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, when the above-mentioned detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes through the V route, a high probability state of the special pattern is set. In other words, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting a high probability state of the special pattern. In addition, the switching member 2650h is configured to set a flow path for the ball that has won the V winning device 2650 during a jackpot game, either a flow path that can pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) or a flow path that cannot (is difficult to pass through) the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 (normal discharge flow path 2650e1), and is configured to switch the flow path so that the ball that has won the V winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to on (see FIG. 196(a)).

Next, referring to FIG. 198, the transition of the game state in this modified example will be described. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram that shows the transition of the game state in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. In this modified example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the normal state, a game is played in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by putting a ball into the first ball entrance 64 by left-handed play. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery), the jackpot type is set to jackpot A with a probability of 40%, and jackpot B with a probability of 60%. And, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery), the jackpot type is set to jackpot C with a probability of 100%.

When jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as jackpot A7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When jackpot B is set, the same jackpot game as jackpot B7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this modified example, when the probability variable state is set, the end condition (first transition condition) of the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability of special symbol) is set to 50 times the number of special symbol lotteries (ST number) executed during the high probability state of the special symbol, and the end condition (second transition condition) of the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of normal symbol) is set to 70 times the number of special symbol lotteries (time reduction number) executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol (second transition condition A), or the number of special symbol 1 lotteries is set to 2 times (second transition condition B).

When a jackpot game is executed, a right-hand play is performed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing a right-hand play during a jackpot game, it is possible to make it easier for the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern (number of reserved balls for special pattern 1) to reach the upper limit (4) after the jackpot game ends. During the probability bonus state, a game in which the special pattern 2 lottery is executed is executed by right-hand play. This modified example differs from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment in that it is configured to execute a lottery in which the special pattern 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special pattern 1 lottery so that the game state that is most advantageous to the player becomes the probability bonus state, and is configured to make it easier to execute the special pattern 2 lottery when a high probability state for normal patterns is set.

Specifically, the system is configured so that it is easier to win a small prize in the special drawing 2 than in the special drawing 1, and the probability of winning a small prize in the special drawing 2 is set to 1/20. Furthermore, the system is configured so that it is easier to set a game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 than when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1. In addition, the 7th table for potential probability 203fe3, which was referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the potential probability state in the above-mentioned 7th embodiment, is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during a high probability state of normal patterns, and the 7th table for potential probability 202fe2, which was referenced when selecting a variation pattern during a high probability state of normal patterns in the 7th embodiment, is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during a potential probability state.

In this embodiment, which is configured in this way, right-hand play is performed in which the special drawing 2 is mainly performed in the probability-change state, in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and in the time-saving state, and left-hand play is performed in which the special drawing 1 is mainly performed in the normal state, in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and in the potential probability state.

Next, the relationship between the game result during the high probability state and the transition of the game state will be explained. As described above, in this modified example, a first transition condition that, when established, transitions from the high probability state to the time-saving state, and a second transition condition that, when established, transitions from the high probability state to the potential state are set. Specifically, the first transition condition is set to 50 special symbol selections (ST number of times) performed during the high probability state of the special symbol, and the second transition condition is set to 70 special symbol selections (time-saving number of times) performed during the high probability state of the normal symbol (second transition condition A), or 2 special symbol 1 selections (second transition condition B).

In other words, after the probability of a special symbol being selected, 50 times without a jackpot being won, the game will transition to a time-saving state, and after 20 times of special symbol selection during the time-saving state, the game will transition to a normal state. Here, in this modified example, during the probability of a special symbol being selected, different change times are set as the change time for the second special symbol depending on the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1). Specifically, as with the 7th table 203fe3 for potential probability in the above-mentioned 7th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is equal to or less than a predetermined number (e.g. 1, 2), a shorter change time is more likely to be selected than when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number (e.g. 4).

By configuring it in this way, in a probability variation state where a set period (ST number of 50 times) is specified, in order to increase the number of times that the special chart 2 lottery, which is more likely to be advantageous to the player, is executed, the player can play a novel game in which he or she wins small prize B in the special chart 2 lottery and discards the special chart 1 variation, thereby decreasing the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1.

In addition, in this modified example, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, when the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, if the game is interrupted and the action of reducing the number of reserved balls in the high probability state by executing the special chart 1 variation multiple times is performed, the second transition condition B is established and the game transitions from the high probability state to the latent probability state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game decreases due to interruption of the game during the period when the special chart 1 variation is being executed during the high probability state, when a long variation time is likely to be selected.

Next, the change status of each special symbol when the game state transitions will be explained. First, the flow when the second transition condition B is established and the potential state is set while the potential state is set will be explained. As described above, the second transition condition B can be established when the special symbol 1 change is stopped and displayed, so a new special symbol 1 change is executed immediately after the potential state is set. For this newly executed special symbol 1 change, a change pattern (change time) is selected using the change pattern table referenced during the potential state, so a change pattern that can be selected during the normal state is selected as the change pattern for the special symbol 1 change. This makes it possible to prevent a long-term special symbol 2 change from being executed during the execution of a long-term special symbol 1 change.

On the other hand, the case where the first transition condition is met during the probability change state and the time-saving state is set will be explained. As described above, the first transition condition can be met either when the special chart 1 variation is stopped or when the special chart 2 variation is stopped, so that the special chart 1 variation may be executed for a long time at the timing when the time-saving state is set. However, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the special chart lottery is held 20 times or until a jackpot is won in the special chart lottery, and the total value of the variation time of the 20 special chart 2 variations executed during the time-saving state is configured to be at least longer than the variation time of the special chart 1 variation set during the potential state. The contents of the variation pattern table are specified so that the special chart 1 variation executed during the time-saving state is more likely to have a variation time shorter than the special chart 1 variation executed during the potential state.

By configuring it in this way, when transitioning from a probability variable state to a time-saving state and then to a normal state, it is possible to prevent the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change from both fluctuating for a long period of time (for example, 10 minutes). If a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state or the potential probability state, the special pattern change being executed is discarded, and after the jackpot game ends, a new special pattern lottery is executed according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, when a new game state is set in response to a jackpot win, the long-term special pattern change that was being executed before the jackpot win continues to be executed even after the jackpot game ends, which prevents the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change from both fluctuating for a long period of time (for example, 10 minutes).

As explained above, in this modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed in overlapping fashion, and the probability of a special state being set after the end of a jackpot game is greater if the player wins a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery than if the player wins a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, the second special symbol lottery is a more advantageous lottery (game) for the player in terms of the game state that is set after the end of a jackpot game.

The same technical concept as this modified example may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a different gameplay from this modified example. For example, the above-described first to third embodiments may be used to apply to a pachinko machine 10 in which, like the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined game (a game with a special feature hit, a small win game) can be executed when a predetermined execution condition (for example, a ball entering a special electric start port or a small win in a special pattern lottery) is met, even if a big win is not won in the special pattern lottery, and a big win game is executed when a ball that has entered a variable ball entry means that is opened during the predetermined game enters a specific area (for example, a V winning port).

In this case, as shown in Figs. 197(a) and (b), the internal structure of the small prize attacker 3650 is modified, and the movable valve 3651 is configured to move so that a ball that enters the small prize attacker 3650 enters either the normal prize opening 3652 or the V prize opening 3653, and a big prize game is executed when the ball enters the V prize opening 3653 (see Fig. 197(b)). Also, even if a ball that enters the small prize attacker 3650 enters the normal prize opening 3652 (see Fig. 197(a)), it is preferable to configure it so that the same prize balls are awarded as if the ball entered the V prize opening 3653.

Next, referring to Figures 199 and 200, the effects executed in this modified example will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, various transition conditions are set for ending the high probability state, and the high probability state is configured to transition to a different game state depending on the transition condition that is met. Among these, the effects related to the second transition condition B that is met when special chart 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the high probability state will be described.

In this modified example, when a small prize is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, similar to the seventh embodiment described above, it is possible to set a small prize type (small prize A, small prize C) that interrupts the special drawing 1 change in progress, and a small prize type (small prize B) that discards the special drawing 1 change in progress. And, when the special drawing 1 change is stopped and not discarded, the number of times the special drawing 1 has changed is updated.

In other words, if a small prize is won in the special prize drawing of the special prize 2 and the small prize B is set, the special prize 1 variation being executed is discarded, and a new special prize 1 variation is executed without updating the number of special prize 1 variations. Therefore, if the special prize 1 variation being executed continues to be discarded during the probability variation state, the second transition condition B described above is configured to be difficult to be established. On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the special prize 1 variation during the probability variation state is configured to be selectable between a long special prize 1 variation in which a long time (e.g., 10 minutes) is set and a short special prize 1 variation in which a short time (e.g., 1 minute) is set, when the long special prize 1 variation is being executed and the remaining variation time is, for example, 8 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to win the small prize A and interrupt the long special prize 1 variation than to win the small prize B and discard the long special prize 1 variation. In other words, there were cases where the second transition condition B could be made difficult to be established.

Specifically, if a long special chart 1 change currently in progress is discarded and a short special chart 1 change is executed anew, there is a higher possibility that the number of special chart 1 changes will be updated as the change time of the short special chart 1 change passes, compared to when the long special chart 1 change is not discarded.

Therefore, in this modified example, when the special probability state is set, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the current game state is favorable to the player (whether the state is favorable to continue the special probability state) based on the status of the ongoing special chart 1 change (length of remaining change time), the change pattern (change time) set for the next special chart 1 change, and the result of the special chart 2 lottery that is mainly executed. This makes it possible to inform the player of the game content during the special probability state in an easy-to-understand manner.

Figure 199(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content when a RUSH period variable performance is executed when a small jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 during the probability change state (RUSH), and Figure 199(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an extension display indicating that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the RUSH period variable performance. Also, Figure 200(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an extension display indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened as a result of the RUSH period variable performance, and Figure 200(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an extension display indicating that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the RUSH period variable performance. In addition, among the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in this modified example, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment described above are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery during the RUSH period is a predetermined lottery result (a big win, a small win, or part of a miss), an effect (period-variable effect) is executed in the main display area Dm in which a rabbit-like character 811 discovers a treasure chest 812 with a bonus bag 812h attached. Then, the words "What's in the bonus?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. The treasure chest 812 is a display mode that primarily shows the result of the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed, and the bag 812h is a display mode that notifies the player how the RUSH period (probable bonus period) will change based on the result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

After the period variable performance shown in FIG. 199(a) is started, when the special pattern 2 variation is stopped and displayed, a performance is executed in which a result display mode 812a showing the result of this second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) is displayed from within an open treasure chest 812 as shown in FIG. 199(b). In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), a display mode of "V" indicating that a small prize has been won in the special pattern 2 lottery is displayed as the result display mode 812a. Note that, as the result display mode 812a, if the result of the second special pattern lottery is a small prize, a display mode imitating the character "Otsu" is displayed if it is a big prize, and a display mode imitating a "X mark" is displayed if it is a miss.

Then, from the opened bag 812h, a performance is executed in which a status display mode 812j is displayed to indicate whether the RUSH period (period of the probability change state) will be variable (whether it has transitioned to a state where it is easy to change) based on the lottery result of this special drawing 2. In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), the status display mode 812j is displayed as "extended", indicating that the RUSH period has been extended. In addition to the "extended" display mode indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, the status display mode 812j may also display other display modes such as "unfortunate" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened, "end" indicating that a small win C has been set and the RUSH period has ended, "?" indicating that the result of the special drawing 2 that is the subject of the period variable performance is a miss and does not affect the RUSH period, and "congratulations" congratulating the result of the special drawing 2 that is the subject of the period variable performance is a big win.

Here, the method of setting the various display modes displayed when the period-variable performance is executed will be explained using the control process (see Figs. 183 to 192) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above. First, in the state command receiving process (see S4232 in Fig. 183) executed in the command determination process 7 (S4192 in Fig. 183), it is determined whether the current game state is in a high probability state, and if it is determined that the game is in a high probability state, a process is executed to set a display command for displaying "RUSH in progress" shown in Fig. 199(a) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, instead of the special chart 2 variable display setting process 7 (see S5237 in FIG. 190) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), a selection process is executed to determine whether the current special chart 2 variable is a big win variable, a small win variable, or a miss variable, and to select whether to execute a period variable performance based on the determination result. In this selection process, whether to execute a period variable performance is selected based on the contents specified in a dedicated data table (period variable performance selection table). Specifically, the contents of the period variable performance selection table are specified so that if the current special chart 2 variable is a big win variable, the period variable performance is selected to be executed approximately 20% of the time, if it is a small win variable, the period variable performance is selected to be executed 100% of the time, and if it is a miss variable, the period variable performance is selected to be executed 10% of the time.

Here, if it is selected to execute a period-variable performance in a jackpot variation, a display command is set to display the display mode of "Win" as the result display mode 812a and the display mode of "Congratulations" as the status display mode 812j on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the timing of the stop of the special chart 2 variation. Also, if it is selected to execute a period-variable performance in a loss variation, a display command is set to display the display mode of "X mark" as the result display mode 812a and the display mode of "?" as the status display mode 812j on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the timing of the stop of the special chart 2 variation.

On the other hand, if it is selected to execute a period-variable performance in the small win variation, the small win type set in this small win variation is then read, and a type determination process is executed to determine whether the small win type is a small win type that will interrupt the currently executing special win 1 variation at the timing when the special win 2 variation is stopped, or a small win type that will be discarded. Next, the remaining time of the currently executing special win 1 variation is calculated based on the value of the special win 1 variation time counter 223fe, and the variation time of the next special win 1 variation (variation pattern command included in the winning information stored in the reserved first area) is predicted based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

If the type determination process determines that the type of small win causes the special chart 1 change to be interrupted, a display command is set to display the status display mode 812j of "extension" if the remaining time of the special chart 1 change at the time of interruption is longer than the change time of the special chart 1 change to be executed next, and the display mode of "unfortunate" if the remaining time of the special chart 1 change at the time of interruption is shorter than the change time of the special chart 1 change to be executed next on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Also, if the type determination process determines that the type of small win causes the special chart 1 change to be discarded, a display command is set to display the status display mode 812j of "unfortunate" if the remaining time of the special chart 1 change at the time of discarding is longer than the change time of the special chart 1 change to be executed next, and the display mode of "extension" if the remaining time of the special chart 1 change at the time of discarding is shorter than the change time of the special chart 1 change to be executed next on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, if the small win type currently set is small win C, the high probability state of the normal pattern will transition to a low probability state at the timing when the special pattern 2 change stops, so a display command is set to display the "End" display mode as the status display mode 812j on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

As explained above, in this modified example, even if the same small win type is set, the result of the period variable performance is variable depending on the timing at which the small win variation is stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern set for the next special chart 1 variation. In other words, as a result of the period variable performance, at the timing at which the current small win variation is stopped and displayed, a relative judgment is made as to which is more advantageous to the player between a small win type that interrupts the ongoing special chart 1 variation at the timing at which the special chart 2 variation is stopped, and a small win type that discards it, and the performance mode (display mode) of the period variable performance is set based on the judgment result. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the small win variation occurs, the player can be easily informed of whether or not a small win type that is advantageous to the player at that time has been set.

In this modified example, as described above, the presentation mode of the period-variable presentation is configured to be set relatively, but without being limited to this, for example, the presentation mode of the period-variable presentation may be determined based on whether the remaining change time when the special chart 1 change is interrupted is longer than a specific time (e.g., 1 minute), or the presentation mode of the period-variable presentation may be determined based on whether the remaining change time when the special chart 1 change is discarded is longer than a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds).

The technical concept of the seventh embodiment described above may be combined with the technical concept of the modified seventh embodiment. For example, during the potential state of the seventh embodiment, an end condition other than winning the jackpot may be set, and the potential state may be ended when that end condition is met.

Specifically, it is possible to set a first end condition that can be met when the total number of times the first special symbol has been drawn and the number of times the second special symbol has been drawn reaches 100, a second end condition that can be met when the number of times the first special symbol has been drawn reaches 5, and a third end condition that can be met when the result of the drawing of the second special symbol is a specific small win (small win C).

By configuring in this way, when a potential winning state advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the potential winning state will continue. In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, once a potential winning state is set, the potential winning state continues at least until the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won), which causes the problem that play during the potential winning state becomes monotonous. However, in this modified example, the player can play while hoping that the potential winning state will continue for a long time or until a jackpot is won, which prevents the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

Furthermore, when a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery, multiple small prize types can be set, including at least a small prize type (small prize A) that interrupts the first special symbol variation in progress, and a small prize type (small prize B) that discards the second special symbol variation in progress (forced stop when it misses). And, when small prize B is set as the small prize type and the first special symbol variation is discarded, the number of times the first special symbol is drawn during the potential state is not updated by the discarded first special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the ease of achieving the second end condition described above during the potential state can be varied based on the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. Also, the degree of advantage of the lottery result for the second special symbol can be varied depending on the execution status of the first special symbol.

For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set at least change time A (2 minutes) and change time B (10 minutes) as the change time of the first special symbol during the latent state, when a first special symbol change is executed with change time B (10 minutes) set, if the remaining time of the first special symbol change being executed is longer than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to interrupt the first special symbol being executed rather than discard it, and if the remaining time of the first special symbol change being executed is shorter than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol being executed rather than interrupt it.

This makes it possible for the player to be interested in both the results of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation status of the first special symbol, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In addition, the degree of advantage given to the player can be varied depending on the combination of multiple events (special symbol lottery, fluctuation status of the first special symbol), providing the player with a game that is difficult to predict.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned technical concept may be used in a gaming machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, the processing for the ongoing special chart change can be made different depending on the type of winning obtained when the special electric activation port is won.

In addition, the seventh embodiment is configured to vary the length of the period during which the advantageous game state is set by discarding or interrupting the first special pattern variation in progress according to the result of the second special pattern drawing in a gaming machine that can simultaneously draw the first special pattern and the second special pattern (so-called simultaneous variation specifications). In other words, by discarding the first special pattern variation, it is made more difficult to achieve the end condition that can be achieved based on the number of times the first special pattern drawing is performed, aiming for a long-term advantageous game state. However, instead of this, a specific area may be provided in the small win attacker that is opened in the small win game that is executed when a small win is won in the lottery for the second special pattern, and the big win game may be executed even if the ball passes through the specific area.

In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which only the first special symbol has a reserved memory function, but this is not limited to this, and the reserved memory function may be provided for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, in a game state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol may be referred to as the number of reserved balls referenced when selecting the change time of the second special symbol to be executed, or the cumulative number of reserved balls obtained by adding up the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol may be referred to. Furthermore, the change time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. In this case, for example, the greater the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol from the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, the more likely it is that a change pattern advantageous to the player (a change pattern with a short change time) will be selected as the change pattern of the second special symbol.

By configuring in this way, the player needs to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern while acquiring reserved balls of the second special pattern, so that the act of interrupting the game to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern can be suppressed. In addition, it is preferable to configure the system so that the change time of the second special pattern is selected based on both the cumulative number of reserved balls, which is the sum of the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and when the cumulative number of reserved balls is a specific number (e.g., 5 balls) or more and the difference is 3 balls or more, a change pattern advantageous to the player (a change pattern with a short change time) is likely to be selected as the change pattern of the second special pattern. This allows the player to play actively, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment described above, when a game state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, if the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is a specific number (1 or 2), a change pattern (short-time change pattern) advantageous to the player is selected as the second special pattern change compared to cases other than the specific number, and a value with a small number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is set as the specific number, but this is not limited to this. For example, the specific number may be a plurality of values (e.g., 3 or 4) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, or may be a value far from the first special pattern (e.g., 1 or 3). In this case, when a small prize is won in the second special pattern lottery and a small prize type that cancels the first special pattern change being executed is set, it is possible to vary whether the small prize win is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, it is possible to provide cases where it is more advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol variation and cases where it is more advantageous for the player not to discard (interrupt) it. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the relationship between the lottery result for the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol.

In the seventh embodiment described above, only one type of variation pattern table is provided to be referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when a game state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, but this is not limited to this. For example, multiple jackpot types in which a probability variable state or a latent state is set after the jackpot is ended may be provided, and multiple variation pattern tables may be provided to be referenced during the latent state so that the variation pattern table referenced during the latent state can be made different based on the set jackpot type. In this case, it is preferable to vary the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, which is likely to select a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) advantageous to the player as the second special symbol variation, depending on the variation pattern table to be referenced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol that the player aims for during the latent state, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to predict. Furthermore, if multiple fluctuation pattern tables are provided to be referenced during the potential state, it is preferable to provide, among some of them, an advantageous fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern (short-time fluctuation pattern) advantageous to the player is likely to be selected (always selected) as the second special pattern fluctuation, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern, and an unfavorable fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern (short-time fluctuation pattern) advantageous to the player is unlikely to be selected (never selected) as the second special pattern fluctuation, regardless of the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern.

In addition, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above, the number of time-saving times is not subtracted when the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times may be subtracted when the first special symbol variation is discarded. In this configuration, when a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player is set, a variation pattern in which a short time (e.g., 5 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation is easily selected, and a variation pattern in which a long time (e.g., 10 minutes) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is easily selected. Then, with the second special symbol variation that is efficiently executed for the first special symbol variation, a novel gameplay can be provided to the player in which the game can be executed during the probable change state until a small win that discards the first special symbol variation being executed is won a predetermined number of times (e.g., twice).

In the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol during the potential probability state becomes one or two, the time for the second special symbol change is shortened. Furthermore, when a specific small prize (small prize B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is reduced by discarding (forcibly stopping) the first special symbol change that is being executed. Furthermore, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the reserved memory of the first special symbol can be acquired in a game (right-hand play) executed during the potential probability state. In addition, the time for the change of the first special symbol executed during the potential probability state is configured to be long (for example, 10 minutes). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a new type of game that can be played simultaneously during the potential state: a game in which the player wins a large prize or small prize in the second special pattern lottery, which is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, and the player can win many prize balls; and a game in which the reserved memory of the first special pattern is reduced, increasing the frequency with which the second special pattern lottery is played.

In contrast to this, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is four (the upper limit), the frequency of the second special symbol lottery may be increased. In this case, in contrast to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration may be such that it is more difficult to obtain reserved memories of the first special symbol during play in the potential state (right-hand play). In this case, unlike each of the embodiments described above, winning a specific small prize (small prize B) in the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player.

Even with this configuration, it is possible to vary the ease of drawing a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player depending on the number of reserved memories of a special symbol (first special symbol) disadvantageous to the player. Also, in this case, for example, by acquiring the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol during a jackpot game in which a potential state is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make it easier to set a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is advantageously executed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to play eagerly in order to acquire the upper limit of the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol during a jackpot game.

In addition, even if the reserved memory number of the first special pattern is acquired up to the upper limit during jackpot play, the process of starting the first special pattern variation after the potential state is set is executed before the process of starting the second special pattern variation, so it is possible to prevent the second special pattern variation from being executed in an advantageous state after the potential state is set. Note that the control process of the main control device 110 may be configured so that the process of starting the second special pattern variation is executed before the process of starting the first special pattern variation. By configuring in this way, for example, when the potential state is set after the end of a jackpot play, the second special pattern variation can be executed without changing (reducing) the reserved memory number of the first special pattern from the reserved memory number acquired during the jackpot play.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, when the reserved memory number of special symbols (number of special reserved balls) is a specific number (e.g., 1), a game advantageous to the player (e.g., a second special symbol change) is easily executed, and further, a first game (e.g., a game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped) that makes it easier to set the reserved memory number of special symbols (number of special reserved balls) to a specific number, and a second game (e.g., a game in which the special symbol change is stopped after a change time has elapsed) that makes it difficult to set the reserved memory number of special symbols to a specific number are executable. In addition, the specific number of special reserved balls (e.g., 1) that makes it easier to execute a game advantageous to the player is designed to be a number less than the upper limit of the number of special reserved balls (e.g., 4), and when the current number of special reserved balls is more than the specific number, the first game is easier to execute than when it is less than the specific number. In addition, if the current number of reserved balls for the special chart is a specific number, or if it is less than the specific number, it is configured so that it is more difficult to execute the first game than if it is more than the specific number.

By configuring it in this way, the number of reserved balls on the special chart can be brought closer to a specific number simply by having the player play with the aim of executing the first game, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of special reserved balls that allows the player to easily execute a game advantageous to the player is set to a number less than the upper limit of the special reserved balls, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the upper limit of the special reserved balls may be set to a number of special reserved balls (specific number) that allows the player to easily execute a game advantageous to the player. In this case, when a game that forcibly stops the special pattern variation is executed, the number of special reserved balls is likely to decrease, resulting in a game that is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay that allows the player to play with the aim of not executing a game that forcibly stops the special pattern variation.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 201 to Fig. 215. In the seventh embodiment described above, the processing contents for the first special symbol variation being executed were configured to be different depending on the small win type set when the small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the small win type is set to small win A or small win C, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, and when the small win B is set, the special symbol variation being executed is discarded.

In a pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol variation currently in progress, processing is executed according to the set small win type, so for example, even during a big win variation, which is a lottery result that is more favorable to the player than winning a small win, there was a problem that the big win variation would be discarded based on the small win. Also, when using such a configuration, if a high expectation presentation in which the currently in progress first special symbol variation has a high expectation of a big win is executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the player will notice that the big win variation has been discarded (the big win has been invalidated), making it difficult to execute the high expectation presentation.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, when a game state (latent state) favorable to the player is set, the change time of the second special pattern is shorter than the change time of the first special pattern, and the second special pattern is not reserved and stored. Therefore, even if a means is provided to determine in advance whether the second special pattern that has won a small win will be displayed before the first special pattern that has won a big win is displayed, the timing at which it is determined that it will not be displayed will be just before the big win is displayed, making it difficult to execute high expectancy presentations for a long period of time (a time corresponding to the change time of the big win).

In contrast, the eighth embodiment is significantly different from the seventh embodiment described above in that, when a small win game is executed (when a special process is executed for a special pattern change being executed), the process content is determined according to the content of the special pattern change being executed. More specifically, at the time when a small win game is executed based on one special pattern lottery (the time when a special pattern indicating a small win is stopped and displayed), the change pattern of the other special pattern change being executed is determined, and if the determination result is a specific change pattern (for example, a change pattern with a change time of 30 seconds or more set), the other special pattern change being executed is discarded, and if the change pattern is other than the specific change pattern, the other special pattern change being executed can be interrupted.

Furthermore, in this eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) resulting from a jackpot win, different variation patterns are selected for an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (e.g., a sure-variant jackpot) is executed, and an unfavorable jackpot type in which a jackpot game unfavorable to the player (e.g., a normal jackpot) is executed, and further, the variation pattern selected is configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls for the special symbol.

More specifically, when there are many reserved balls with special patterns, a variation pattern with a variation time of less than 30 seconds is more likely to be selected as a variation pattern corresponding to a favorable jackpot type than when there are few reserved balls with special patterns, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more is more likely to be selected as a variation pattern corresponding to an unfavorable jackpot type.

By configuring it in this way, when there are many reserved balls with special patterns, it is easier for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a guaranteed jackpot) to be executed (and less likely to be discarded due to a small jackpot win) and it is also harder for a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player (e.g., a normal jackpot) to be executed (and more likely to be discarded due to a small jackpot win) when there are many reserved balls with special patterns. In other words, the proportion of guaranteed jackpots when a jackpot is won can be made to differ depending on the number of reserved balls with special patterns. This makes it possible for players to eagerly save up reserved balls with special patterns in the hope of executing an advantageous jackpot game, and as a result, game operation can be improved.

The eighth embodiment also differs from the seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small prize can be won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, even if a big prize is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the big prize can be canceled by winning a small prize in the other lottery, so the proportion of guaranteed big prizes when a big prize is won can be reliably made different depending on the number of reserved balls for the special symbol.

First, referring to FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 201 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in this embodiment differs from the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193) in that part of the configuration of the right side area and part of the configuration of the lower area (the area below the variable display unit 80) are different. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in this eighth embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193) in that the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 through which the balls sorted by the sorting member 700 can flow are extended to the lower side of the right side area, the configuration and arrangement position of the through gate 67 and the electric device 640a have been changed, and a small win attacker (second attacker) 5650 that is opened during a part of a small win game that is opened during a small win game is arranged at the lower center position of the game board 13 instead of the small win attacker 3650. Other than that, the same components are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be described, focusing on the differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193). The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 pass through the bent path 701a, pass through the through gate 67, and flow out to the lower right side area. The balls distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a provided downstream of the first flow path 701, flow into the inlet 704a, flow down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 201), pass through the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and flow out from the outlet to the lower right side area on the game board 13. The balls that are sorted by the sorting member 700 into two paths (first path 701, second path 702) join together at the bottom of the right-hand area, flow down over the variable winning device (first attacker) 2650, and enter the outlet 66.

Next, the through gate 67 and the second ball inlet 640, which are among the components arranged in the right area of the game board 13, will be described. In this embodiment, the through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream part of the first flow path 701 having the bent path 701a, and the second ball inlet 640 is arranged in the downstream part of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). By configuring in this way, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals can be made to flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 without reducing the flow speed. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, it is possible to prevent the balls from being connected together in the second flow path 702 and multiple balls from entering the second ball inlet 640 at the same time. In addition, if the player does not realize that the electric role 640a has been opened and is informed by the third pattern display device 81 that the electric role 640a has been opened, the ball can be quickly placed into the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, the through gate 67, which triggers the drawing of the normal pattern, and the electric device 640a, which is controlled by the winning of the normal pattern, are arranged in different flow paths (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) that are distributed by the distribution member 700. Therefore, if the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow only in one of the flow paths (if the distribution function is disabled), it is difficult to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640. In other words, if the through gate 67 and the electric device 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths that are distributed by the distribution member 700, it is possible to create a state in which the balls can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by destroying the distribution member 700 and creating a state in which the balls flow only in one of the flow paths, but by using the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to suppress the creation of a state in which it is easy to make the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 illegally.

Next, the case where the ball flows down the second flow path 702 will be explained. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the ball flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured so that the time required for the ball that flows into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outlet is about 1.5 seconds. By configuring it in this way, when 100 balls are shot toward the right area in one minute, the ball that flows into the first flow path 701 and the ball that is shot next to that ball and flows into the second flow path 702 will flow down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 2650 is arranged) almost simultaneously (about 0.1 seconds difference). Therefore, in the game state (big win state or small win state) in which the first variable winning device 2650 is opened, it is possible to easily win multiple balls at once.

In addition, a portion of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided behind the first flow path 701, and is configured so that multiple flow paths overlap when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming multiple ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball flow paths (the area of the game board 13 that the ball flow paths occupy) can be reduced.

Furthermore, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located lower than the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and is configured so that the balls flow out downstream of the balls flowing out of the first flow path 701 in the lower right area of the game board 13. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball flowing out with force from the outlet 704c (a ball flowing out at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the first flow path 701) directly collides with a ball flowing out of the first flow path 701, causing an irregular ball flow.

In this embodiment, the distribution member 700 distributes the balls shot by right-handed play alternately to two flow paths, but other configurations may be used. For example, the balls may be distributed to the two flow paths in different ratios rather than alternately (1:1), or the balls may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Furthermore, the balls may be randomly distributed to multiple flow paths depending on the weight of the balls and the timing of their flow. In this embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used, in which the distribution destination of the next ball that passes through changes depending on the weight of the ball that has passed through, but for example, a distribution member that is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule may be used.

Next, the lower area of the game board 13 where the small prize attacker 5650 is arranged will be described. This small prize attacker 5650 is a variable ball entry means that opens in a small prize game that is executed when a small prize is won in the first special pattern lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small prize attacker 5650 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64, and is configured so that balls flowing down the game board 13 have difficulty reaching it due to nails planted in the game board 13. Therefore, if a small prize is won in the first special pattern lottery, a small prize game in which it is difficult for the player to win prize balls will be executed.

In this embodiment, when a small jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the system is configured to be able to execute control to interrupt or forcibly stop the other special symbol variation that is in progress, and is further configured to switch the content of the control to be executed based on the content of the variation of the other special symbol variation that is in progress. In other words, when a small jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to win a prize ball, but this becomes an opportunity to execute a predetermined control (interruption or forcibly stopping) on the second special symbol variation that is in progress.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 202 to Fig. 208. The eighth embodiment is the same as the seventh embodiment described above except that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are different. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 202, the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of this eighth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 168(a)) in that it has a small win random number 8 table 202gb instead of the small win random number 7 table 202fb, a big win type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the big win type selection 7 table 202fd, a fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202ge instead of the fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, and a small win type selection 8 table 202gf instead of the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, and is otherwise the same.

Now, referring to FIG. 203, the contents of the small win random number 8 table 202gb will be explained. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the small win random number 8 table 202gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small win random number 8 table 202gb also defines a small win determination value for the first special symbol. Specifically, for the symbol type of the first special symbol, the small win determination value is defined to be in the range of "300 to 599" for the value of the first win random number counter C1, regardless of the probability state of the special symbol, and for the symbol type of the second special symbol, the small win determination value is defined to be in the range of "550 to 599" for the value of 1 of the first win random number counter C1, regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

In other words, in this embodiment, the small prize is won with about 1/2 probability when the first special pattern lottery is executed, and with about 1/12 probability when the second special pattern lottery is executed. In this embodiment, if the small prize is won in the first special pattern lottery, a small prize game is executed in which the small prize attacker 5650, in which the ball cannot (is difficult to) win during the small prize game, is opened, and if the small prize is won in the second special pattern lottery, a small prize game is executed in which the variable winning device 65, which is opened during the big prize game, is opened. Therefore, even if the first special pattern lottery is set to have a high probability of winning a small prize, it is possible to prevent excessive specific (prize balls) from being given to the player. In addition, the second special symbol lottery is set to have a lower probability of winning a small jackpot than the first special symbol lottery, making it difficult for the player to lose balls in a sure-win state or a potential-win state in which play is carried out by hitting the right hand.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is different from the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) described above in that the winning device (the winning device to be opened) on which the jackpot operation is executed is different, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot ends is different, but otherwise it is the same. For convenience of explanation, the names of the jackpot types used in the seventh embodiment and the jackpot types used in the eighth embodiment are partly different (for example, jackpot A7 and jackpot A8), but the elements that are not explained about the differences are the same. Detailed explanations of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, in this eighth embodiment, if a normal jackpot (jackpot A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. In other words, it is stipulated that a high probability state of a normal symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends. Also, if jackpot C8, which is set in 20% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10000 regardless of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. In other words, it is configured so that a high probability state is set in effect until the next jackpot is won.

As mentioned above, the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is stipulated to have different degrees of advantage for the player, with "jackpot A8," "jackpot B8," and "jackpot C8" stipulated in order of least advantage for the player. In other words, "jackpot C8" is stipulated to be the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

On the other hand, if a special jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (if "jackpot E8" is won), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. In other words, if "jackpot E8" is won, a special jackpot state is set for 100 times (100 special symbol changes) after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, when right-hitting play is performed during the high probability state and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are performed in parallel (overlapping), the aim is to win the most advantageous jackpot type, "jackpot C8," while avoiding the jackpot types, "jackpot A8" and "jackpot D8," which would end the high probability state.

Next, referring to Fig. 205 and Fig. 206, the variable pattern selection table in this eighth embodiment, the 8 table for high probability 202ge, which is referenced during the high probability state, and the 8 table for potential probability 202ge will be explained. Fig. 205 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 8 table for high probability 202ge, and Fig. 206 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 8 table for potential probability 202ge.

In this embodiment, right-hand play is executed when the probability state and potential probability state are set, and a game in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in overlapping fashion is performed. The variation pattern that is set when a jackpot is won is configured to differ according to the type of jackpot selected. Furthermore, it is configured so that different variation patterns can be selected based on the total reserved special symbol number, which is the sum of the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (reserved ball number of special symbol 1) and the reserved ball number of the second special symbol (reserved ball number of special symbol 2).

Specifically, the system is configured so that when the combined number of reserved special charts is large, the selected variable time is shorter when the player wins a jackpot that is favorable to the player than when the combined number of reserved special charts is small, and the system is configured so that when the combined number of reserved special charts is large, the selected variable time is longer when the player wins a jackpot that is unfavorable to the player than when the combined number of reserved special charts is small.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a small jackpot is won in one of the special pattern lotteries, the control content executed for the other special pattern change that is currently in progress is configured to differ depending on the change pattern of the other special pattern change that is currently in progress. Specifically, if the change pattern of the other special pattern change that is currently in progress is 30 seconds or more, a process is executed to discard the special pattern change, and if the change pattern is less than 30 seconds, a process is executed to interrupt the special pattern change.

By configuring it in this way, when the combined number of reserved special symbols is large, it is easier to discard the special symbol variation when a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is set, compared to when the combined number of reserved special symbols is small, and it is harder to discard (easier to interrupt) the special symbol variation when a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play in order to maintain a state in which the combined number of reserved special symbols is large.

As shown in Figure 205, in the 8 table for special chance 202g2, different variation patterns are defined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the hit/miss judgment (the result of the selected type), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols).

More specifically, when the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot A", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0 to 3", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") as the fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "4 to 7", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") as the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, when the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot B", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0 to 3", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "4 to 7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern.

When the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot C", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0 to 3", a super long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "4 to 7", a super short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"),

In addition, when the type of the special pattern is the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the win/loss judgment result is a miss (including a small win), and the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "0 to 3", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, when the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "4 to 6", a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot D", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0 to 3", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "4 to 7", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern.

When the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot E", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0 to 3", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "4 to 7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, when the type of the special pattern is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (including a small win), and the number of reserved special patterns (total number of reserved special patterns) is in the range of "0 to 7", i.e., the entire range, a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as the fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the potential winning 8 table 202g2, different fluctuation patterns are defined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the win/loss judgment (result of the selected type), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols).

More specifically, when the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot A", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0-4", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0-198"), as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "5-7", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0-198"), as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, when the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot B", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0 to 4", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "5 to 7", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern.

When the special symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot C", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0-4", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0-198"), and a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0-198"), when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "5-7".

In addition, when the type of the special pattern is the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the win/loss judgment result is a miss (including a small win), and the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "0 to 6", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and when the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "7", a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and

In addition, when the type of the special pattern is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot D", and the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "0 to 4", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "5 to 7", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), as a fluctuation pattern.

When the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the hit type is "jackpot E", and the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "0-4", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0-198"), and a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0-198"), when the number of reserved special symbols (combined reserved special symbol numbers) is in the range of "5-7".

In addition, when the pattern type of the special pattern is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the win/loss judgment result is a miss (including a small win), and the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "0 to 3", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, when the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "4 to 6", a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 325 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and when the number of reserved special patterns (combined reserved special pattern numbers) is in the range of "7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern is associated with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution condition for executing a specific control (for example, interruption or cancellation) for the special symbol variation being executed is established (for example, when a small win game is executed), the content of the specific control to be executed is configured to be switched according to the content of the special symbol variation being executed. Then, the variable display mode of the special symbol variation being executed (the variable display mode set when the special symbol variation is executed) is configured to be switched to a variable display mode according to the content of the specific control. This makes it possible to vary the switching content of the variable display mode according to the content of the special symbol variation being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, the ease of establishing the switching condition for switching the variable display mode of the special symbol variation being executed to a specific variable display mode (variable display mode for forcibly stopping) is made different according to the set game state. Furthermore, the ease of establishing the switching condition is made different according to the type of the special symbol being executed and the type of the big win being set (the length of the selected variable time is made different). This allows the player to enjoy predicting how the variable display mode will change when the execution condition is met. In addition, in this embodiment, the ease of meeting the execution condition is configured to differ depending on the special symbol type. Specifically, the probability of the special symbol lottery result (winning a small prize) that can meet the execution condition is made different depending on the special symbol type, and the length of the variable time of the special symbol variable set when a small prize is won is made different. This allows the game result to be greatly different depending on which special symbol type executes the variable indicating which lottery result at which timing. In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 205 and 206, a specific variable time is selected in correspondence with each condition, but this is not limited to this, and multiple variable times that can be selected in correspondence with each condition may be specified, and a variable pattern of different variable times may be selected depending on the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1. In addition, in this embodiment, a variable time of 30 seconds is set as a threshold value as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed, but this is not limited to this, and multiple threshold values may be set. In addition, in this embodiment, a change time (e.g., 28 seconds, 30 seconds) that is close to a threshold value set as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed is selected. This allows a change performance of the same performance type to be executed when a change performance corresponding to the selected change pattern is executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. The difference in change time (2 seconds) can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the change performance from the start timing of the special pattern change, or by advancing the end timing of the change performance from the end timing of the special pattern change, and the difference period can be configured to display a still image (e.g., an image displayed at the start of the change performance or an image displayed at the end of the change performance).

Next, referring to FIG. 207, the contents of the small win type selection 8 table 202gf in this eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the small win type selection 8 table 202gf. This small win type selection 8 table 202gf differs from the above-mentioned small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172(a)) in that a small win type is also defined for the first special symbol, the target to be opened in the small win game has been changed, the symbol determination time has been changed, and the control contents for the special symbol variation during execution have been changed, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

To explain in detail the contents stipulated in the small prize type selection 8 table 202gf, the value range of the small prize type counter C5 from "0 to 89" corresponds to "small prize A8", and the range of "90 to 99" corresponds to "small prize B8". Since the range of possible values of the small prize type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of "small prize A8" being selected when a small prize is won is 90% (90/100), and the ratio of "small prize B8" being selected is 10% (10/100).

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650 is opened for 0.1 seconds. In addition, "0.1 seconds" is selected as the pattern determination time of the special pattern, and a process to interrupt the second special pattern (special pattern 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the process to interrupt the second special pattern (special pattern 2) being executed is executed, a process to interrupt the process for measuring the variation time lapse of the second special pattern variation being executed is executed. Specifically, when a small win game is executed, a process to skip the process of updating the value of the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203dj indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is executed while the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag is set to on. Then, the restart condition is established at the opportunity of the end of the small win game (the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag is set to off), and the process of updating the value of the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203dj that was interrupted is resumed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prohibit the remaining time of the second special symbol variation being executed from decreasing while the small win game is being executed (while the interruption condition is met), so that, for example, while the small win game is being executed, it is possible to prohibit the second special symbol variation that has won from being stopped and the winning game (big win game, small win game) being executed in duplicate. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In addition, since the process of measuring the time lapse of the special pattern variation being executed is merely interrupted (skipped), the first special pattern variation that was being executed before the small win game can be resumed after the resumption condition is established. Therefore, the result of the special pattern lottery that has already been executed can be reliably notified to the player. In this embodiment, when the interruption condition is established due to the winning of a small win, the process of interrupting the special pattern variation being executed is executed, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the special pattern variation being executed may be continued, and the stop display of the first special pattern variation may be interrupted when the change time of the special pattern variation has elapsed. In other words, even if the interruption condition is established, the update process of updating the change time of the special pattern variation may be continued, and when the update process is executed until the preset change time has elapsed, it may be determined whether the interruption condition is established, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is established, the stop display of the special pattern variation may not be executed until the resumption condition is established. As a result, it is not necessary to interrupt the update process of updating the change time of the special pattern variation midway, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, if "Small Win A" is selected, the target for opening the small win game will be the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650, and a small win game in which it is difficult to win prize balls during the small win game will be played.

When "small win B" is selected, the small win game is executed with the same operation content as the above-mentioned "small win A". Furthermore, depending on the variation status of the second special symbol being executed, either a process to interrupt the special symbol 2 variation being executed or a process to forcibly stop (discard) it is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, in some cases where a small win is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control executed for the other special symbol variation being executed is configured to be switchable based on the situation (variation situation, setting situation) of the other special symbol variation. Specifically, if the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded), and if it is a variation pattern with a variation time of less than 30 seconds, the control content is configured to be switchable so that the special symbol variation is interrupted. By configuring in this way, depending on the variation status of the special symbol variation being executed, it is determined whether or not to discard the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed, so that the player can pay attention to the timing of winning the small win B8.

In addition, in this embodiment, the content of the variation pattern, i.e., the length of the variation time, is set as the condition for switching the control content for the special pattern variation being executed. Therefore, for example, by simply defining the variation pattern table so that the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result that is unfavorable to the player is longer, it is possible to easily force stop (discard) the special pattern variation corresponding to the lottery result that is unfavorable to the player. Note that the conditions used when determining the control content are not limited to this, and for example, the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation being executed or whether or not the lottery result satisfies a specific condition may be determined, and the result of the control content may be determined based on the determination result. Furthermore, the control content to be executed for the first special pattern variation being executed may be determined based on a combination of the first special pattern variation being executed and the lottery result of the second special pattern that won the small prize.

Next, the contents of the small prize type corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2) as the pattern type in the small prize type selection 8 table 202gf will be explained. The value range of the small prize type counter C5 from "0 to 79" is associated with "small prize C8", the range of "80 to 89" is associated with "small prize D8", and the range of "90 to 99" is associated with "small prize E8". Since the range of possible values of the small prize type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of "small prize C8" being selected when a small prize is won is 80% (80/100), the ratio of "small prize D8" being selected is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of "small prize E8" being selected is 10% (10/100).

When "small win C8" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the big win attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the pattern determination time for the special pattern. In addition, when "small win D8" is selected, the same small win game as the above-mentioned "small win C8" is executed, and further, depending on the fluctuation status of the first special pattern being executed, either a process to interrupt the execution of the special pattern 1 fluctuation or a process to forcibly stop (discard) it is executed. Note that the contents of the control process when interrupting or forcibly stopping the first special pattern fluctuation based on "small win D8" are omitted because the target of the control process executed based on "small win B8" is simply switched from the second special pattern to the first special pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, this embodiment differs from the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment described above in that a special variable flag 203ga has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The special variation flag 203ga is for indicating whether the special pattern variation to be executed is a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more set, and is set to ON when a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set. In this embodiment, when a small win variation that has won a specific small win type is stopped and displayed, it is configured to be switchable between executing a process to interrupt the other special pattern variation or executing a process to discard (forced stop) depending on the variation pattern set for the other special pattern variation being executed. In other words, when a processing condition is established in one special pattern lottery for the other special pattern variation to switch the active variation mode to a variation mode different from the variation mode set when executing the other special pattern variation, the variation mode after switching is configured to be different depending on the active variation mode.

By configuring it in this way, when the above-mentioned processing conditions are met, the type of change that will be made is determined based on the change in the other special symbol, providing the player with an element of surprise.

<Regarding control process of main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 209 to Fig. 215, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the difference from the seventh embodiment described above is that it is configured to be able to win a small prize in the first special symbol lottery, that a process is added to determine whether a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected when a variation pattern is selected, and that a process is added to determine the process contents to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed when the special symbol variation that has won a small prize is stopped and displayed, but otherwise it is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

In addition, in this eighth embodiment, the characteristic processing contents of this eighth embodiment will be explained using illustrations, using various control processes executed for the first special symbol. The same processing contents are also executed in the control process for the corresponding second special symbol, but a detailed explanation using illustrations will be omitted to avoid duplication.

First, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) described above in that if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (see S457 in FIG. 121), then the special symbol 1 miss variation process 8 (S481) is executed, but otherwise it is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 miss variation process 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 1 miss variation process 8 (S481). In this special symbol 1 miss variation process 8, when the jackpot has not been won in the first special symbol lottery (when a miss has been won), a process is executed to determine whether or not a small jackpot has been won. Note that the detailed contents are the same as the special symbol 2 miss variation process described above (see S1059 in FIG. 128), except that the processing target has been switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol.

In special symbol 1 miss variation process 8 (S481), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result (lottery result obtained in processing S457 of the first special symbol big win determination process (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small win (S485).

If it is determined in the process of S485 that a small win has been won (S485: Yes), the small win flag 203i is set to ON (S486), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small win (S487), and then the small win symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S488), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S485 that the current lottery result is not a small win, i.e., a loss (S485: No), the losing first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S485), and this process is terminated.

As explained above, by setting the small win flag 203i to ON when it is determined that a small win has been won in the special pattern 1 miss change process (S481 in FIG. 210), which is executed as one process of the first special pattern change start process (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, the process executed at the timing when the special pattern change (lottery) starts, the process corresponding to the small win can be easily executed based on the setting status of the small win flag 203i at the timing when the change of the first special pattern stops.

The small prize flag 203i used in this embodiment is configured to have a special prize 1 area indicating that a small prize has been won in the first special pattern lottery, and a special prize 2 area indicating that a small prize has been won in the second special pattern lottery. If a small prize has been won in the first special pattern lottery, the flag in the special prize 1 area is set to on, and if a small prize has been won in the second special pattern lottery, the flag in the special prize 2 area is set to on. This makes it easy to remember the state even if a small prize has been won in both the first and second special pattern lotteries.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (S387). This first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (S387) differs from the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) described above in that it adds a discrimination process for setting the special fluctuation flag on after selecting a fluctuation pattern, and adds a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern other than a jackpot win, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the same processes of S551 to S555 as those of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) are executed, and then it is determined whether the currently selected fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S582: Yes), the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), and the same processes of S556 to S559 as those of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) are executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S582: No), the process of S583 is skipped, and the same processes of S556 to S559 as those of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S551 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S551: No), the special chart 1 miss variation pattern selection process is executed (S581), and then the process proceeds to S553. The contents of the special chart 1 miss variation pattern selection process (S581) will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

Now, referring to FIG. 212, the contents of the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) will be explained. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern selection process 8 (S581). In the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern selection process 8 (S581), the same processing contents as the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above are executed, but the target is switched from the second special pattern to the first special pattern.

When the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, if it is determined that the current lottery result for the first special pattern (special pattern 1 lottery result) is not a small win (S591: No), the same processing as S1377 to S1379 of the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special pattern (S597 to S599), and then this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win is a small win in the processing of S591 (S591: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is obtained (S592), and the small win type is selected by referring to the small win type selection 8 table 202gf based on the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 (S593). Next, the same process as S1374 to S1376 of the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern selection process (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed with the processing target changed to the first special symbol (S594 to S596), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 8 (S288) will be explained with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 8 (S288). This first special symbol variation stop process 8 (S288) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) in that the time-saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175), which is executed when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set on (S851; No), i.e., when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a miss variation, has been changed to the special symbol 1 miss stop process 8 (S892); and when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is set on, If the answer is "Yes" (S581), a process is executed to determine whether the second special symbol variation is being performed (S891), and if the second special symbol variation is not being performed, the processes of S853 to S855 are skipped, and a process is executed in which the special variation flag 203ga is added (S893 in FIG. 213) to the process (S870 in FIG. 175) that clears various flags and various counters based on the stop of the jackpot variation (start of the jackpot game), but otherwise it is the same. The same reference numerals are used for the same contents and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 miss stop processing 8 (S892) will be explained with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 1 miss stop processing 8 (S892). In this special symbol 1 miss stop processing 8 (S892), the same processing as the special symbol 2 miss stop processing 7 (see S1584 in FIG. 181) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and the small win processing 8 (S1972) is executed instead of the small win processing (see S1671 in FIG. 181). Since it is otherwise the same, detailed explanations will be omitted.

Here, the small win process 8 (S1972) executed in the special symbol 1 miss stop process 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be explained with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win process 8 (S1972). This small win process 8 (S1972) differs from the small win process of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1671 in FIG. 182) in that the contents of the control process executed according to the type of small win won are different. Specifically, it differs in that when a specific small win type (small win B, D, E) is won, a process (interruption process, forced stop (discard) process) is executed according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation being executed.

When the small win process 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small win type set for this first special pattern change is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small win type is "small win A or small win C" (S1981). If it is determined that it is "small win A" or "small win C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether the current special pattern 2 change (second special pattern change) is in progress (S1684). If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change is in progress (S1684: Yes), the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special pattern change is interrupted (temporarily stopped) is set to on (S1685), and the special pattern 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag is on is set (S1686), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change is not in progress in the process of S1684 (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1981, if it is determined that the type of small win is not "small win A" or "small win C" (S1981: No), then it is determined whether the read type of small win is "small win E8" (S1982), and if it is determined that it is "small win E8" (S1982: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is in a high probability state (high probability state of normal pattern) (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in a high probability state (S1688: Yes), then it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to on (S1689), and if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is not on (S1689: No), that is, if it is determined that the current state is not the final change of the high probability state, the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to on (S1690).

Next, it is determined whether the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, the fluctuation pattern set in the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is not a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more, or the second special symbol fluctuation is not being executed (S1983: No), the above-mentioned S1684 is proceeded to. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S1688 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0, that is, the current state is not in a high probability state (S1688: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1689 that the time-saving end waiting flag 203dm is set to ON, that is, the final fluctuation of the high probability state (S1689: Yes), the processing of S1690 is skipped and the above-mentioned S1684 is proceeded to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1983 that the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983: Yes), the processing is proceeded to S1692. Also, if the process of S1982 determines that the winning combination is not a "small win E8," i.e., that the winning combination is a "small win B8" or a "small win D8" (S1982: No), the process of S1688 to S1690 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1983.

In the processing of S1692 to S1697, the same processing as the small win processing of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1671 in FIG. 182) is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and then the special variation flag 203ga is set to OFF (S1184), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when a small win game is executed (when a special process is executed for a special pattern change being executed), the process content is determined according to the content of the special pattern change being executed. More specifically, at the time when a small win game is executed based on one special pattern lottery (the time when a special pattern indicating a small win is stopped and displayed), the change pattern of the other special pattern change being executed is determined, and if the determination result is a specific change pattern (for example, a change pattern with a change time of 30 seconds or more set), the other special pattern change being executed is discarded, and if it is other than the specific change pattern, the other special pattern change being executed can be interrupted. In other words, when a specific condition for executing a special process for a special pattern change being executed is established, the process content of the special process is determined by referring to the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern being executed, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the content of the special process determined when a specific condition is established may be different depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if a specific condition is met, only "interrupt" is determined as the special process, and when the high probability state is set, "interrupt" or "discard" may be set, as in the eighth embodiment described above. By varying the content of the special process depending on the game state that is set in this way, it is possible to add variety to the playability in each game state.

The content of the special process to be determined may be different depending on the type of special symbol that meets the specific condition. For example, the special process may be configured so that "discard" is more likely to be determined when the specific condition is met with the second special symbol than when the specific condition is met with the first special symbol. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is more difficult to meet (so that a small win is more difficult to win) than the second special symbol lottery, or the condition for determining "discard" when the specific condition is met (in the eighth embodiment, the running variable pattern is 30 seconds or more) may be configured so that the condition for determining "discard" when the specific condition is met is more difficult to meet when the specific condition is met with the first special symbol than when the specific condition is met with the second special symbol (for example, the running variable pattern is 32 seconds or more). This allows the content of the special process to be different depending on which special symbol type meets the specific condition, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when a specific condition for executing a special process for a special pattern change in progress is met, the processing content of the special process is determined by referring to the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern in progress. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the lottery result of the special pattern change in progress is a specific lottery result, the special pattern change in progress may not be "discarded," or the conditions for determining "discard" (in the eighth embodiment, the change pattern in progress is 30 seconds or more) may be different depending on whether the lottery result of the special pattern change in progress is a big win, a small win, or a miss. By configuring in this way, the ease of "discarding" can be varied depending on the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, making it easy to play games that suit the design concept.

Furthermore, in this eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) resulting from a jackpot win, different variation patterns are selected for an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (e.g., a sure-variant jackpot) is executed, and an unfavorable jackpot type in which a jackpot game unfavorable to the player (e.g., a normal jackpot) is executed, and further, the variation pattern selected is configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls for the special symbol.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls with special patterns is large, a variation pattern with a variation time of less than 30 seconds is more likely to be selected as a variation pattern corresponding to an advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls with special patterns is small, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more is more likely to be selected as a variation pattern corresponding to an unfavorable jackpot type.

By configuring it in this way, when there are many reserved balls with special patterns, it is easier for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a guaranteed jackpot) to be executed (and less likely to be discarded due to a small jackpot win) and it is also harder for a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal jackpot) to be executed (and more likely to be discarded due to a small jackpot win) when there are many reserved balls with special patterns. In other words, the proportion of guaranteed jackpots when a jackpot is won can be made to differ depending on the number of reserved balls with special patterns. This makes it possible for players to eagerly save up reserved balls with special patterns in the hope of executing an advantageous jackpot game, and as a result, game operation can be improved.

The eighth embodiment also differs from the seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that a small prize can be won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, even if a big prize is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the big prize can be canceled by winning a small prize in the other lottery, so the proportion of guaranteed big prizes when a big prize is won can be reliably made different depending on the number of reserved balls for the special symbol.

In the above-mentioned eighth embodiment, as a condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of a special process (interruption or cancellation) for one special pattern variation (for example, the first special pattern variation), a condition that is established when a specific small win is won by the other special pattern variation (for example, the second special pattern variation) is shown. However, other triggers for establishing the specific condition may be provided. For example, the specific condition may be established when the ball enters a specific ball entry port, or the specific condition may be established when it is determined that the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not in a normal state (for example, a state in which noise occurs and the power is temporarily cut off). In addition, the specific condition may be established when the game method performed by the player is detected to be an illegal game method (for example, a game method in which a magnetic sensor that detects magnetic force is provided and the magnetic sensor detects magnetic force, or a game method in which an impact detection sensor that detects an impact on the pachinko machine 10 is provided and the impact detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of impact).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a special pattern variation executed in a case where a high probability state of a normal pattern is set (when a probability variable state or a time-saving state is set) is discarded (forced stop), the number of time-saving times (probability variable times) is not added according to the discarded special pattern variation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured to set a potential probability state when the number of special pattern variations reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) in a state where a probability variable state is set, when a special pattern variation executed during the probability variable state is discarded (forced stop), the number of time-saving times (probability variable times) is not added. In a pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, the display mode (for example, the value displayed in the display area HR2 of FIG. 161 (a)) for indicating the number of time-saving times (probability variable times) until the probability variable state ends on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is also configured not to be updated in synchronization with the number of time-saving times. Therefore, it is possible to easily inform the player that the special pattern variation has been discarded without updating the number of time-saving times. In this case, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of time-saving times (number of chance bonus times) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 at the start of the special pattern variation, it is sufficient to execute an effect that restores the display mode (for example, adding if the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed, subtracting if the elapsed number of time-saving times is displayed) based on the fact that the special pattern variation has been discarded.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 in which multiple time-saving end conditions (for example, a first time-saving end condition that is established when the combined number of the first special pattern fluctuation and the second special pattern fluctuation reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the second special pattern fluctuation is executed five times) are set as transition conditions for transitioning from the high probability state to the latent probability state (end conditions for terminating the high probability state of the normal pattern (time-saving end conditions)), and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display only the end condition that is most likely to be established among the multiple time-saving end conditions (for example, "5" corresponding to five second special pattern fluctuations), thereby informing the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to be updated even if the first special pattern fluctuation is executed immediately after the high probability state is set. Then, when the first special symbol variation is executed 95 times after the high probability state is set, and the first special symbol variation is executed again (when the 96th first special symbol variation is executed), the display control is configured to update the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4". In this way, by determining whether or not to update the time-saving count display displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 depending on the type of special symbol that executes the special symbol variation during the high probability state (time-saving), the player can be informed of the period until the high probability state ends in an easy-to-understand manner.

Ninth embodiment
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 216 to Fig. 223. The ninth embodiment is significantly different from the seventh embodiment in that it also provides a reserved memory function for the second special symbol, that it changes the presentation mode of the presentation (presentation during RUSH) executed during the potential state (during RUSH play), and that it changes the variation patterns of the big win type, the small win type, and the normal symbol.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the number of reserved special symbols to indicate the number of reserved special symbols (see dm1a in FIG. 161). In addition, some recent gaming machines display a number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in order to clearly show the number of reserved special symbols to the player. Furthermore, some gaming machines perform a pre-reading process (pre-determination process) on the winning information of the reserved special symbols, and perform a reserve change performance to notify the player of the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) by changing the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol (for example, changing the color or effect of the reserved symbol, or changing the design of the reserved symbol).

However, since the number of reserved symbols that are the target of the reserved change effect is determined according to the number of special reserved balls that have been acquired, it is more difficult to execute the reserved change effect when the number of special reserved balls is small than when the number of special reserved balls is large. In other words, since the effect using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is executed according to the number of acquired special reserved balls, the effect of the look-ahead effect (reserved change effect) that notifies the player of the look-ahead result (pre-determination result) is changed according to the number of acquired special reserved balls. For example, for players who are unable to acquire many special reserved balls, this causes dissatisfaction with not being able to acquire many special reserved balls and dissatisfaction with the reduced effect of the look-ahead effect, which reduces their motivation to play.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a look-ahead effect (icon effect) is executed in which the number of specific patterns (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) is varied, regardless of the number of special reserved balls acquired, depending on the results of a look-ahead process (pre-determination process) executed on the winning information of the reserved special pattern. This makes it possible to execute a look-ahead effect similar to that when the number of special reserved balls acquired is at the upper limit, depending on the look-ahead result, even when the number of special reserved balls acquired is small. Therefore, a look-ahead effect with a high effect can be provided even to players who are unable to acquire many special reserved balls, preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon performance described above is set to the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved special symbol balls that can be reserved (the number of reserved second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state), and the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved special symbol balls that have been acquired are not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (they are displayed in a way that is difficult for the player to distinguish). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that the specific symbols displayed in the icon performance are reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved special symbol balls (the number of reserved second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation of players who are unable to acquire many reserved special symbol balls to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-read result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot for which a potential state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon presentation is configured to be greater than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved special symbol balls that can be reserved (the number of reserved second special symbols that are mainly executed during the potential state). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a surprising presentation to players who have been under the mistaken impression that the specific symbols displayed to the player in the icon presentation are reserved symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of a look-ahead process (pre-determination process) executed on the winning information of the reserved special symbol, the number of times the attacka will be opened in the small win game is determined, and the number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the determination result. The number of times the attacka will be opened in one small win game is configured to differ depending on the type of small win won. Furthermore, as part of the big win game that is executed when a big win is won, the same attacka opening operation as in the small win game is executed.

This configuration allows the player to predict the number of small win games to be played in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as icon effects. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the system is configured to notify the player that the period during which the specific symbols are displayed is a period during which the potential state (RUSH game) will not end. In other words, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of a big win game, the player is notified in advance that the potential state will be set after the end of that big win game. This allows the player to focus on the icon effects each time the number of specific symbols is changed, enhancing the effect of the presentation.

<About the content of the performance in the ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 216 to Fig. 219, the characteristic performance contents among the performance contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. Specifically, the contents of the icon performance that variably displays the specific symbols executed during the potential state (during RUSH play) will be described. This icon performance is a performance that variably displays the number of specific symbols (icons) based on the result of looking ahead to the reserved memory (reserved special symbol 2) of the second special symbol that has already been acquired.

First, referring to FIG. 216(a), the display contents of the ending screen of a jackpot game in which a potential state (RUSH game) is set immediately afterwards will be described. FIG. 216(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during the ending period of a jackpot game before entering RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a potential jackpot is won in a state in which a potential state is not set (a jackpot in which a potential state is set after the end of a jackpot game), the presentation displayed during the ending period is configured to be different depending on whether the first hit that enters RUSH game is the case or the case in which a potential jackpot is won in a state in which a potential state is set.

During the ending period at the first win that enters RUSH play, as shown in FIG. 216(a), a display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and a display area HR70 is formed in the center. Then, a carrot-shaped icon 871 and acquisition number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216(a)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Then, the words "The RUSH will continue as long as the icon is there" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

In this embodiment, when a RUSH game is executed, icons 871 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the number of icons 871 displayed and the display mode are used to suggest to the player the content of the game that will be executed during the RUSH game. The number of icons 871 displayed and the display mode are variably set based on information (lottery information, advance reading information) relating to the second special pattern that is mainly executed during the RUSH game.

As described above, in this embodiment configured to execute the icon effect during RUSH play, the icon effect initial display screen shown in FIG. 216(a) is displayed during the ending period of the jackpot play that triggers entry into RUSH play, and four icons 871 are displayed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern at that time and the results of the advance reading. This allows the presentation mode of the icon effect at the time of entering RUSH play to be the same regardless of the state in which RUSH play is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the presentation mode of the icon effect at the time RUSH play starts.

In this embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon performance, but this is not limited to this. If a specific start condition is met at the start of the icon performance, for example, if the pre-read result for the reserved ball of the second special pattern indicates a jackpot advantageous to the player (a potential jackpot in which the potential state is set again), the number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon performance may be other than four, and in this case, it is preferable to display fewer than four icons 871.

When RUSH play begins, the icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a reserved icon 873 in the display area HR71, and an effect using the reserved icon 873 and a rabbit-like character 811 is executed in the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216(b), in this embodiment, the maximum display number of reserved icons 873 is configured to be the same as the maximum reserved number of the second special pattern that is mainly drawn during RUSH play. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

The hold icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the order of first hold icon 873a, second hold icon 873b, third hold icon 873c, and fourth hold icon 873d from the top of the display area HR, and are used in the performance starting from the first hold icon 873a. Then, when the first hold icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 to be used in the performance, the remaining second hold icon 873b to fourth hold icon 873d are shifted and displayed as the hold icon one position earlier. Also, when a new hold icon is acquired, it is added and displayed in the order following the hold icon already displayed.

In this embodiment, the small win game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of times the second attacker 1650 will be opened, is predicted, and the number of reserved icons is determined based on the result of the prediction. The number of times the second attacker 1650 will be opened in the small win game is varied depending on the type of small win that has been won, and even when a jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker 1650 is opened a predetermined number of times for some of the types of jackpots that have been won.

In other words, for example, even if the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 that have been acquired is two, if the number of times that the second attacker 1650 has been opened is four as a result of the pre-reading (pre-determination) of the two reserved balls of the special chart 2, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be set to four. By configuring it in this way, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be determined regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special chart 2 that have actually been acquired, so that an interesting icon presentation can be executed even if not many reserved balls of the special chart 2 have been acquired.

Next, referring to FIG. 217(a), the content of the icon effects during RUSH play that consume reserved icons will be described. FIG. 217(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a small win game is executed during RUSH play. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when a small win game is executed, a consumption effect in which the character 811 eats the reserved icon 873a is executed, and a prize ball display mode 874 showing the prize balls acquired in the small win game is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217(a), one ball has entered the second attacker 1650, and the prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in a display mode of "+15" indicating that there were 15 prize balls. In addition, the word "Itadakimasu" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect in which the character 811 eats the reserved icon 873a is executed.

In FIG. 217(a), the display screen displayed during the digestion effect is explained using the example of a small win game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened once, so the character 811 picks up one reserved icon 873a. However, if a small win game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice is played, a digestion effect is executed in which the character 811 eats two reserved icons. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, some small win games or some big win games are configured to play a winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened multiple times, and the second attacker 1650 is opened more times in big win games than in small win games.

In other words, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased by executing the effect shown in FIG. 217(a) in which the character 811 eats multiple reserved icons. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the effect that consumes reserved icons (reducing the number of reserved icons) among the icon effects executed during RUSH play.

In this embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in a small win game is configured to be the same as the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in a big win game. Therefore, by understanding the opening operation content of the second attacker 1650 that is executed during a win game, it is possible to prevent the player from determining the type of the current win game (small win game, big win game).

In this embodiment, the number of reserved icons 873 displayed corresponds to the number eaten by the character 811 in one digestion performance, i.e., the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small win game currently being played. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a digestion performance may be executed in which the reserved icons used in the digestion performance remain at the end of the digestion performance, i.e., a digestion performance using a greater number of reserved icons than the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small win game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the number of reserved icons displayed at the start of the digestion performance, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of winning the big win.

The number of reserved icons used in the digestion performance may be varied during the execution period of the digestion performance. This allows the number of reserved icons to be increased at any time, so that even if an icon performance with a low probability of winning is executed, the player can play the game while expecting that the number of reserved icons used in the performance during the digestion performance period will increase during the digestion performance period.

Next, referring to FIG. 217(b), the contents of the acquisition effect, which is an icon effect executed during RUSH play and indicates that multiple reserved icons have been acquired, will be described. FIG. 217(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an acquisition effect, which is an icon effect executed during RUSH play and indicates that multiple reserved icons have been acquired. In this embodiment, an effect is executed in which the character 811 opens a treasure chest 812, similar to the effect executed during RUSH play in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 162(b)). Then, an acquisition effect is executed in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of reserved icons are displayed from within the treasure chest.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), the treasure chest 812 displayed during RUSH play opens, and a carrot-shaped icon 871 and acquired number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217(b)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Then, the words "Got carrot" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds, and an effect is executed to inform the player that the number of pending icons displayed has increased.

As described above, in the icon presentation of this embodiment, the number of reserved icons displayed is controlled so that the number does not reach 0 while the RUSH game continues, and the acquisition presentation can be executed to increase the number of reserved icons at various times. The more icons 871 acquired in one acquisition presentation, the more advantageous the game that will be played for the player is suggested. Also, in this embodiment, the number of reserved icons displayed can be increased at a timing different from the timing of the increase in the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2.

Next, referring to FIG. 218(a), the contents of the continuous performance executed during the icon performance will be explained. FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the continuous performance executed during the icon performance. In this embodiment, the continuous performance is configured to be executable if a predetermined condition is met when the second special pattern starts to change. This continuous performance has a pattern in which it is executed for the change period of one second special pattern change, and a pattern in which it is executed across multiple second special pattern changes, and a performance is executed using all of the displayed reserved icons.

Specifically, in this embodiment, a continuous performance can be executed when four reserved icons (the maximum number) are displayed. When the continuous performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 218(a), the four reserved icons (873a to 873d) displayed in the display area HR71 are displayed in a row in the center of the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed in which the character 811 eats them in order, starting with the first reserved icon 873a. Then, behind the last reserved icon 873d, a V icon 873y is displayed, indicating a jackpot win (a jackpot win of a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player). Furthermore, the words "Eat all the carrots!! You might find treasure inside" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to inform the player of the content of the continuous performance.

In other words, when a continuous performance is performed, it indicates whether all reserved icons will be consumed and a jackpot will be won, or whether all reserved icons will not be consumed and RUSH play will continue. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 218(b), when a continuous performance is being performed and the last reserved icon has not been consumed, a V icon 873z may be displayed among the reserved icons being consumed.

Now, referring to FIG. 218(b), the contents of the performance when the V icon 873z is displayed during the continuous performance will be described. FIG. 218(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the V icon 873z is acquired without consuming all the reserved icons during the continuous performance. As shown in FIG. 218(b), while consuming (eating) the third reserved icon 873c, a performance is executed in which the V icon 873z is found from the third reserved icon 873c. In this case, since the fourth reserved icon 873d has not been consumed, the fourth reserved icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71. When the jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game will be executed while the reserved icons are displayed, so at this point, the player is notified that the potential state (RUSH game) will be executed again after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 219, the content of the effect in which a special icon different from the normal reserved icon is displayed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special icon is displayed during the icon effect. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the number of reserved icons that can be displayed is calculated based on the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened, which is calculated by looking ahead.

The system is configured so that a special icon is displayed when the number of reserved icons that can be displayed is equal to or exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four or more), i.e., when the maximum number of icons that can be displayed is exceeded.The system is configured so that the number of reserved icons that can be displayed is more likely to exceed the predetermined number when the ongoing second special pattern variation or the results of the second special pattern pre-reading include a jackpot that is advantageous to the player.

219, when the number of reserved icons that can be displayed is calculated to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a special icon effect is executed in which a special icon 873x resembling a gorgeous carrot appears from a treasure chest 812 in the winning effect, and the words "Lucky, I got an SP carrot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to inform the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In this embodiment, the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is set to four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern, so that when the number of reserved icons that can be displayed exceeds four, a special icon is displayed to execute an effect that increases the player's expectation of a big win while maintaining the upper limit of the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71. However, without being limited to this, when the number of reserved icons that can be displayed exceeds four (when a special condition is established), the upper limit of the number of reserved icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 may be configured to be greater than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a surprising effect for a player who recognized that the reserved icons indicate the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern by displaying a number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. Furthermore, since it is possible to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot when a number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is displayed, it is possible to execute an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot for the player by using an unexpected effect.

Above, various presentation screens executed during the characteristic presentation (icon presentation) executed in this ninth embodiment have been explained using Figures 216 to 219, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when RUSH play is being executed and the number of reserved special symbols 2 becomes 0, one or more reserved icons may be displayed, and a pseudo-variable presentation using the reserved icons that is not related to the results of the special symbol lottery may be executed, or the reserved icons may be hidden.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved icon can be set to a display mode that resembles a normal carrot (see reserved icon 873a in FIG. 217(a)) and a display mode that resembles a luxurious carrot (see special icon 873x in FIG. 219), but other display modes may be set. For example, a first display mode corresponding to either a small win or a big win, a second display mode corresponding to a big win, and a third display mode corresponding to a specific big win may be set. Also, in order to display a large number of reserved icons at once, a reduction effect may be executed in which a large number of reserved icons are consumed at once.

<Electrical Configuration in the Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 220 to 223. In the ninth embodiment, a portion of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a portion of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a portion of the configuration of the RAM 223 are different from those of the seventh embodiment described above. The rest is the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 220, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd. This jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd differs from the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the seventh embodiment described above in that the target for opening the jackpot action specified for the jackpot type (jackpot A to C) associated with the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends are different, and the number of types of jackpot types associated with the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is increased, but otherwise it is the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, for the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 34" is associated with "jackpot A9" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A9" is the same jackpot type as the "jackpot A7" in the seventh embodiment described above, so a detailed description of the contents will be omitted. Also, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79" is associated with "jackpot B9" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot B9" is the same as the "jackpot B7" in the seventh embodiment described above, except that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends has been changed.

Specifically, if "jackpot B9" is won in the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, and if "jackpot B9" is won in the high probability state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 50. On the other hand, if "jackpot 9" is won in the potential state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, if "jackpot B9" is won in the normal state or in the high probability state, the player will transition to the relatively advantageous high probability state. In contrast, if "jackpot B9" is won in the potential state, the number of time-saving periods is set to 0, so the game state after the jackpot ends will be the most advantageous high probability state. Also, even if the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the number of high probability states is set fewer when "jackpot B9" is won in the high probability state than when "jackpot B9" is won in the normal state, so that a high probability state that is more advantageous to the player is set when "jackpot B9" is won in the high probability state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to transition to the most advantageous game state by transitioning from the normal state, which is the initial game state, to a different game state, so that the player can be motivated to play in order to reach the most advantageous game state.

As shown in FIG. 220, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", "jackpot C9" is associated with the jackpot type. This "jackpot C9" is the same as the "jackpot C7" in the seventh embodiment described above, except that the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which is set after the jackpot game ends, has been changed.

Specifically, when "jackpot C9" is won in the normal state, the probability change state, or the potential probability state, i.e., when "jackpot C9" is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set game state. In other words, when "jackpot C9" is won, the game state most advantageous to the player (potential probability state) is always set after the jackpot game ends, which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Note that when the potential probability state is set, the value of "jackpot B9" and "jackpot C9" are the same.

As explained above, in this embodiment, depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the first special pattern lottery, the rate of transition to the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is configured to differ between when the normal state and the high probability state are set and when the latent state is set, and the rate is 20% during the normal state and the high probability state, and 65% during the latent state, after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, the normal state, in which the transition rate to the potential state is set to 20%, and the probability variable state are both configured to transition to the potential variable state at a rate of 45%, but the expected degree of transition to the potential variable state when transitioning to the probability variable state is different. By configuring in this way, even if the transition rate to the most advantageous game state for the player after the end of a jackpot game (potential state) is set to be the same for multiple game states as the game states set at the time of winning a jackpot, the expected degree of transition to the potential variable state can be made different for each game state set at the time of winning a jackpot.

Next, we will explain the jackpot type that is selected when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 220, in this ninth embodiment, four jackpot types (jackpot D9 to G9) are defined to correspond to the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the opening operation content of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type that is selected.

Specifically, for the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34" and the jackpot type "jackpot D9" is defined as the jackpot type that is the same as the "jackpot D7" of the seventh embodiment described above. The value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "35 to 69" and the jackpot type "jackpot E9" is defined as the jackpot type that is the same as the "jackpot D7" of the seventh embodiment described above. The "jackpot E9" is a jackpot type (8-round jackpot) in which the number of jackpot rounds is 8 and the special symbol is set to a jackpot state after the jackpot ends. Note that if the "jackpot E9" is won in the normal state, the jackpot state, or the potential state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0.

In other words, if "jackpot C9" is won, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the game state that is set. In other words, if "jackpot C9" is won, the most advantageous game state (latent state) for the player will always be set after the jackpot game ends, which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 35 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E9", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot E9" will be determined is 35% (35/100).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "70 to 89" and the "jackpot F9" is associated with this jackpot type. This "jackpot F9" has 9 rounds, and the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds in the first round (R), and the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds from the second round (R) to the ninth round (R). This is a type of jackpot (9-round jackpot) that is set to a special symbol probability state after the jackpot ends. If the "jackpot F9" is won in the normal state, probability state, or potential state, the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0.

As described above, if the "jackpot F9" is won, the same opening operation as the small jackpot game is executed as the first round. In other words, in the pre-reading of the second special pattern, in addition to the jackpot win, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated as one. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the pattern suggesting a small jackpot win and the pattern suggesting a jackpot win in the icon presentation that determines the number of reserved icons to be displayed based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened (the number of times the small jackpot game is opened), thereby enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, in the "jackpot F9", nine rounds of jackpot play are specified so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened is the same as the above-mentioned "jackpot E9". By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the jackpot type selected based on the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened.

In this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small win game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual big win game is executed from the second round (R), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the "big win F9" is won, the 8th round (R) of the big win game may be executed, and the opening operation of opening the second attacker 1650 for 1.5 seconds and the opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 28.5 seconds may be executed in the first round (R). By configuring in this way, the number of rounds of the big win game to be executed can be unified, so that, for example, when the first pattern display device 37 is provided with a notification means (for example, a means for notifying the number of rounds by turning on an LED lamp) for notifying the number of rounds of the big win game being executed, the number of types of round numbers notified by the notification means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of the big win based on the notification content of the notification means.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "90 to 99" and the "jackpot G9" is associated with this jackpot type. This "jackpot G9" has 11 rounds, and the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds in the first to third rounds (R), and the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds in the fourth round (R) to the eleventh round (R). After the jackpot ends, the special symbol is set to a high probability state (11-round high probability jackpot). If the "jackpot G9" is won in the normal state, high probability state, or potential state, the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0.

As described above, when the "Big Win G9" is won, the same opening operation as the small win game is executed as the first to third rounds. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special pattern, in addition to the big win, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated as three times. As a result, in the icon performance in which the number of reserved icons to be displayed is determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened (the number of times the small win game is opened), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the pattern suggesting the small win and the pattern suggesting the big win, thereby enhancing the performance effect. In addition, since the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened three times is calculated as the result of one lottery of the second special pattern, even if the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 is small, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be calculated to be large, and the performance mode of the icon performance can be diversified. In addition, in the "Big Win G9", 11 rounds of big win play are stipulated so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened is the same as the above-mentioned "Big Win E9". This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player from figuring out the type of jackpot selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650.

In this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small win game is executed in the first round (R) to the third round (R), and the actual big win game is executed from the fourth round (R), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the "big win G9" is won, the 8th round (R) of the big win game may be executed, and the opening operation of opening the second attacker 1650 for 1.5 seconds may be executed three times in the first round (R), and then the opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds may be executed. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds of the big win game to be executed can be unified, so that, for example, when the first pattern display device 37 is provided with a notification means (for example, a means for notifying the number of rounds by turning on an LED lamp) for notifying the number of rounds of the big win game being executed, the number of types of the number of rounds notified by the notification means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of the big win based on the notification content of the notification means.

Next, the contents of the small win type selection 9 table 202hf will be explained with reference to FIG. 221(a). FIG. 221(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221(a), the small win type selection 9 table 202hf differs from the small win type selection 7 table 202ff of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment in that the number of types of small wins has been increased, and the small win operation contents (opening operation contents of a small win game) specified for each small win type and the processing contents for the first special pattern change executed when a small win game is executed have been changed, but otherwise they are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

This small prize type selection 9 table 202hf, like the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff described above, is a data table that is referenced when selecting a small prize type after winning a small prize in a special pattern lottery, and is specified to select one of four small prize types, "small prize A9" to "small prize D9", according to the value of the acquired small prize type counter C5.

When a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, the small prize operation content and the processing content for the special pattern change in progress can be made different depending on the type of small prize selected. Note that in this embodiment, regardless of which type of small prize is selected, an interruption process is executed for the special pattern change in progress. This interruption process is a process that temporarily interrupts (for example, until the end of the small prize game) the process of subtracting the change time of the special pattern change in progress. This interruption process is the same as in the seventh embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

To explain in detail the contents stipulated in the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff, the value of the small prize type counter C5 in the range of "0-59" corresponds to "small prize A9", the value of the small prize type counter C5 in the range of "60-79" corresponds to "small prize B9", the value of the small prize type counter C5 in the range of "80-89" corresponds to "small prize C9", and the value of the small prize type counter C5 in the range of "90-99" corresponds to "small prize D9". Since the range of possible values of the small prize type counter C5 is 100 values from "0-99", the ratio of "small prize A9" being selected when a small prize is won is 60% (60/100), the ratio of "small prize B9" being selected is 20% (20/100), the ratio of "small prize C9" being selected is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of "small prize D9" being selected is 10% (10/100).

When "small win A9" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker 650) is opened for 1.5 seconds, when "small win B9" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds, when "small win C9" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds twice, when "small win C9" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds three times.

In other words, in this embodiment, depending on the small win type selected when a small win is won, a small win game that opens the first attacker 650, which is mainly opened during a big win game, and a small win game that opens the second attacker 2650, which is mainly opened during a small win game, are configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that a big win game was executed immediately after the small win game was executed. As described above, in this embodiment, if a big win game is executed while the reserved icon is displayed during a potential state, the icon effect is executed so that the potential state is set again after the big win game ends. Therefore, if a "small win A" is won while the reserved icon is displayed, the player can be made to feel happy or sad that a favorable big win game was executed at the time the first attacker 650 is opened.

When "Small Win B9" to "Small Win D9" are selected, a small win game is executed in which the second attacker 1650 is opened, but the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is different for each type of small win selected. In other words, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened calculated for one special pattern lottery can be different. This makes it possible to greatly deviate the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened from the number of reserved balls in the special pattern 2, and therefore the number of small wins, when calculating the number of reserved icons to be displayed in the icon presentation. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the number of reserved icons determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened without synchronizing it with the number of reserved balls in the special pattern 2.

In this embodiment, the small win game is configured to open either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 depending on the selected small win type, but this is not limited to this. For example, an opening operation may be set to open the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 in sequence in one small win game. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the opening operation performed as one small win game is multiple small win games being played in succession. This makes it possible to make it more difficult to understand the relationship between one special pattern lottery and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be explained with reference to FIG. 221(b). FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg. As shown in FIG. 221(b), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg differs from the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above in that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol selected during the potential state is the same as during the normal state, but is otherwise the same. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in this embodiment, during the high probability state, the ball shot by right-hand play is configured to enter the right electric device 164, as in the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, during the potential probability state, the ball shot by right-hand play is configured to be more difficult to enter the right electric device 164 than in the seventh embodiment described above. In other words, while the seventh embodiment described above has a gameplay feature that makes it easier to increase the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern by making the ball enter the right electric device 164 even during the potential probability state, this ninth embodiment does not have such a gameplay feature, and therefore the same variation pattern as in the normal state is selected.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222(a). FIG. 222(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(a), this ninth embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above in that it has an icon display number selection table 222ha and a continuous performance selection table 222hb, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table that is referenced when selecting the number of reserved icons to be displayed in the icon presentation described above with reference to Figures 216 and 217, and the number of reserved icons to be displayed is determined based on the information regarding the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened, which is calculated based on the winning information command received from the main control unit 110 and stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb, and the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired.

Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be explained with reference to FIG. 223(a). FIG. 223(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the selectable icon display number (reserved icon display number) is defined based on the special pattern 2 reserved number (the count value of the reserved balls of the second special pattern among the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c) and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb.

Specifically, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "1" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "1", and if the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "5 (special)". On the other hand, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "1", the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb cannot be "6" or more, so no corresponding value is set.

In addition, if the reserved number of special charts 2 is "2" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", the icon display number is specified as "1 to 2", if the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", the icon display number is specified as "1 to 4", and if the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "6 or more", the icon display number is specified as "5 (special)".

If the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0-2", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "1-3", if the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3-5", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "2-4", and if the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "6 or more", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "4".

If the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0-2", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "1-4", if the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3-5", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "3-4", and if the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "6 or more", the number of icons to be displayed is set to "4".

Here, when the icon display number "5 (special)" is selected, a state is reached in which an icon display number greater than the upper limit of reserved balls in special chart 2, which is "4", is selected. In this embodiment, since the upper limit of reserved icon display number is "4", a special icon (see special icon 873x in FIG. 219) is displayed to indicate that the selected icon display number has exceeded the upper limit of reserved balls in special chart 2, which is "4".

As explained above, in this embodiment, the greater the difference between the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb, i.e., the more times the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated as a result of a pre-read of one reserved special chart 2, the more likely it is that the special icon will be displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of anticipation, even if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is low.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is large (e.g., 3 or 4), the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 that are the subject of the pre-reading is large, and therefore the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is more likely to be calculated as the pre-reading result for one reserved special chart 2 than the pre-reading result executed when the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is small. However, when the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is large (e.g., 3 or 4), the icon display number is not set to "5 (special)" but is configured to be more likely to be set to "4". And when the icon display number is "4", it is configured to make it easier to execute the continuous performance described below. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special icon from being displayed frequently when the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is large.

In addition, even if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is small (for example, 2), if the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is large as a result of the pre-reading, that is, if a small jackpot C9 or small jackpot D9 (see FIG. 221(a)) is won, or if a big jackpot G9 (see FIG. 220) is won, the number of icon displays that is greater than the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is selected.

On the other hand, even if the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is large, if the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is small as a result of the pre-reading, that is, if the lottery result for the second special pattern is a miss, or if the small prize A9 (see FIG. 221(a)) is won, or if the big prize D9 or big prize E9 (see FIG. 220) is won, the number of icon displays selected is configured to be smaller than the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2.

By configuring it in this way, the number of reserved icons to be displayed for the icon presentation can be determined regardless of the actual number of reserved balls in the special chart 2, making it possible to execute an interesting pre-reading presentation regardless of the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2.

In this embodiment, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to display the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (number of reserved balls for special pattern 2), so that the player is made to think that the reserved icon is a reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and an interesting pre-reading performance can be executed regardless of the actual number of reserved balls for special pattern 2. However, without being limited to this, for example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display the reserved icon used for the icon performance and the reserved pattern indicating the actual number of reserved balls for special pattern 2. In this case, since the player can be made to understand the actual number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 and the number of displayed reserved icons, for example, when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is low and many reserved icons are displayed, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won the jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot type (jackpot F9 or jackpot G9) for which the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is won is calculated, a potential state is set after the jackpot game ends, so all jackpots that can be predicted based on the number of pending icons displayed will be jackpots for which a potential state is set. Therefore, since predictions based on the presentation mode of the icon presentation (pending icon display) are predictions of jackpot wins that are favorable to the player, it is possible to arouse the player's interest more than predictions that also include jackpot wins that are unfavorable to the player, and the excitement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in which the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is not calculated, that is, when a jackpot is won in which the second attacker 1650 is not opened during a jackpot game (jackpot D9, jackpot E9), the probability that a potential state will be set after the jackpot game ends is 50%. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won when the presentation mode of the icon presentation is a presentation mode in which a jackpot win cannot be predicted (for example, when the number of reserved icons displayed is small), the possibility of a potential state being set after the jackpot game ends can be left. In this case, a presentation is performed that teases whether the reserved icons will be completely consumed before the jackpot game is executed, and if at least one reserved icon is displayed when the jackpot game is executed, it is configured to notify that a potential state will be set after the jackpot game ends (RUSH game will continue).

In this way, by using the reserved icons displayed in the icon presentation for various purposes, more diverse presentations can be executed, enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 222, the explanation will continue. The continuous performance selection table 222hb is a data table that is referenced when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous performance described above with reference to FIG. 218, and is referenced when the second special pattern variation is started when the number of reserved icons displayed in the icon performance is four. This continuous performance selection table 222hb specifies whether or not to execute a continuous performance based on the winning information (special pattern 2 winning information) regarding the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

Here, the contents stipulated in the continuous performance selection table 222hb will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the continuous performance selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223(b), the continuous performance selection table 222hb stipulates whether or not to execute based on the winning information of the execution area (winning information used in this second special pattern lottery), the winning information in the reserved area (reserved area), the acquired value of the performance counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and stipulates that the continuous performance can be selected only when the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4, that is, when four reserved icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

Specifically, if the winning information included in the execution area is a jackpot, that is, if the second special symbol variation being executed this time is a jackpot variation, if the jackpot type is "jackpot F9, jackpot G9", the execution of continuous performance A (execution A) is specified, and if the jackpot type is other than "jackpot D9, jackpot E9", the range of the acquired performance counter 223f is specified to be "0 to 89" in which non-execution of continuous performance is associated, and the range of "90 to 99" in which execution of continuous performance B (execution B) is associated. Note that if the execution area contains winning information related to a jackpot win, the jackpot game is executed after the current second special symbol variation, so the execution of continuous performance is specified without considering the winning information stored in the reserved area.

Here, in the continuous performance of the pattern that finally wins the jackpot, a determination is made as to which of the first result of the continuous performance, in which all reserved icons are consumed and the V icon 873y is obtained, and the second result of the V icon 873z is obtained without consuming all reserved icons, will be used as the performance result. More specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot to be executed this time is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot E9 to G9), and if it is determined that it is not a probability variable jackpot (jackpot D9) (in the case of execution B), a first result of consuming all reserved icons is set, and if it is determined that it is a probability variable jackpot, a lottery (result selection lottery) is executed to determine whether to set the first result or the second result, and the type of performance result is set based on the result of the result selection lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the potential state is not set after the end of a jackpot game, even though a jackpot game is executed with reserved icons remaining.

In addition, even if a special jackpot is won (execution A), the first result can be set as the result of the consecutive effects, so that the player can play with anticipation until the end, even if a consecutive effect to get the V icon 873y is executed. If a jackpot game corresponding to a special jackpot is executed after all reserved icons have been consumed, it is preferable to configure the game to execute an effect that displays the reserved icons before the jackpot game ends, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined occurrence condition during the jackpot game. For example, it is preferable to execute an operation effect that has the player operate the frame button 22 during the jackpot game, and to configure the occurrence condition to be established when the result of the operation effect is a predetermined occurrence result.

This configuration allows players who are playing a jackpot to play with enthusiasm in order to quickly understand the game status that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, the method of establishing the occurrence condition is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set an occurrence condition that is established when a predetermined number of balls enter a variable ball entry means (first attacker 650 or second attacker 1650) that opens during a jackpot game, or an occurrence condition that is established when a predetermined number of balls enter a ball entry means other than the variable ball entry means that opens during a jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 223(b), the explanation continues. When the execution area of the special chart 2 winning information includes winning information indicating a small win, and the winning information is "small win B9" to "small win D9", if there is winning information indicating any of the big win types "big win E", "big win F", and "big win G" in the reserve, the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to the execution of continuous performance B (execution B) in the range of "0 to 69", and to correspond to non-execution of continuous performance in the range of "70 to 99". Also, if there is no winning information indicating any of the big win types "big win E", "big win F", and "big win G" in the reserve, the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to non-execution of continuous performance in the range of "0 to 69", and to correspond to execution of continuous performance C (execution C) in the range of "70 to 99". In addition, if the execution area of the special chart 2 winning information contains winning information indicating a small win, and the winning information is "small win A9", it is specified that the continuous performance will not be executed regardless of the winning information stored in the reserved area.

If the execution area of the special chart 2 winning information contains winning information indicating a miss win, the execution of a continuous performance is stipulated in correspondence with the presence of winning information indicating any of the jackpot types "jackpot E", "jackpot F", or "jackpot G" in the reserved area, and non-execution of a continuous performance is stipulated in correspondence with the absence of winning information indicating any of the jackpot types "jackpot E", "jackpot F", or "jackpot G" in the reserved area.

As described above, when selecting whether or not to execute a continuous performance, the lottery result of the second special symbol to be executed this time and the pre-read result of the reserved second special symbol (winning information stored in the reserved area) are referenced, so that a continuous performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot can be executed. Therefore, after knowing that a jackpot will be won when the continuous performance is executed, the player can watch the continuous performance while paying close attention to whether the performance result of the continuous performance will be the first result or the second result, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the continuous performance is executed only when four reserved icons are displayed. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the more the actual number of reserved balls in the special chart 2, the more likely it is that four reserved icons will be displayed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play so that four reserved icons are displayed, thereby increasing the operation of the game. In addition, since there are cases where the maximum number of reserved icons (four) is not displayed even when the maximum number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 has been reached, the player can be motivated to play so that four reserved icons are displayed even when the maximum number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 has been reached, thereby further increasing the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, the continuous performance can be executed only when four reserved icons are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to be able to execute the continuous performance when two or more reserved icons are displayed. In this case, for example, the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous performance can be made based on the actual number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 and the results of the advance reading, and the continuous performance can be executed with a small number of reserved icons only when there is winning information indicating that a jackpot (jackpot E9) that is advantageous to the player is won. This makes it possible to vary the expectation of the continuous performance, i.e., the expectation of winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, depending on the number of reserved icons displayed at the time the continuous performance is executed, and therefore makes the player interested in the timing of the execution of the continuous performance.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous performance based on the actual number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 and the results of the advance reading. For example, when there is winning information indicating that a jackpot (jackpot E9) that is advantageous to the player is won, the system may be configured to execute a continuous performance after forcibly increasing the number of reserved icon displays to the upper limit as a preparatory performance for executing the continuous performance.

When the contents stipulated in the continuous performance selection table 222hb were explained with reference to FIG. 223(b), it was explained that the types of continuous performance are continuous performance A (execution A), continuous performance B (execution B), and continuous performance C (execution C), and that in execution A, a continuous performance in which the V icon 873z is acquired mainly in the middle of the continuous performance (see FIG. 218(b)), in execution B, a performance in which the V icon is acquired mainly at the end of the continuous performance (a performance in which the V icon 873y in FIG. 218(a) is acquired), and in execution C, a performance in which the reserved icons 873a to 873d resembling carrots are not consumed (cannot be eaten) during the continuous performance and the V icon cannot be acquired is executed. However, it is sufficient to execute the performances described above. For example, if the performance of execution B is executed with a low probability in execution A, that is, if the performance result is less favorable than the actual game result, another continuous performance may be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 222(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 174) in that an undisplayed information storage area 223ha, an undisplayed icon count counter 223hb, a displayed icon count counter 223hc, and a continuous performance in progress flag 223hd have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened, calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main control device 110, and in the winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) described below, the extracted number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened is stored (S4486 in FIG. 224). The stored information is then used as a reference when determining the number of icons to display, and the referenced information is then discarded. In addition, for winning information that has already been acquired before the potential state is set, the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened is extracted for all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223hb at the end of the jackpot game, and the result is stored.

By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this way, it is easy to differentiate between the timing when the winning information for the special symbol is received and the timing when the presentation mode is determined.

The undisplayed icon count counter 223hb is a counter that indicates the number of pending icons that have not yet been displayed among the number of pending icons that can currently be displayed, and the value of the counter is decremented when a new pending icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the following effects can be executed to increase or decrease pending icons: a true icon effect that increases or decreases the value of the undisplayed icon count counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc, and a pseudo effect (which ultimately results in the same value) that increases or decreases only the apparent number of pending icons without increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon count counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc.

The displayed icon count counter 223hc is a counter for measuring the number of pending icons currently being displayed, and is incremented when a new pending icon is displayed and decremented when the number of pending icons is decreased. When displaying a new pending icon, the total number of pending icons to be displayed is determined by referring to the value of the undisplayed icon count counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc, and the number to be displayed is determined based on the difference between the determined total number and the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc.

The continuous performance flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that a continuous performance is being executed, and is set to ON while the continuous performance is being executed. While the continuous performance flag 223hd is set to ON, the icon performance is configured not to execute a performance in which the number of reserved icons increases or decreases.

<Regarding control process of the voice lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 224 to FIG. 227, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device among the control contents of the ninth embodiment will be described. The control contents of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment differ from the seventh embodiment described above in that the winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed instead of the winning command process (see S4211 in FIG. 183), the big win end process 9 (see S4954 in FIG. 225) is executed instead of the big win end process, the preparation state setting process 9 (see S4691 in FIG. 226) is executed instead of the preparation state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 185), and the RUSH setting process 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is executed instead of the RUSH setting process (see S8410 in FIG. 192), and are otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be described with reference to FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning command process 9 (S4281). This winning command process 9 (S4281) updates information related to the icon effects executed during RUSH play, and executes a process to determine the number of reserved icons 873 (see FIG. 217) displayed in the icon effects.

When winning command process 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4482). If it is set to ON (S4482: Yes), the winning information (big win information, small win information) included in the received winning command is extracted (S4484). In other words, it is determined whether the currently received winning command is a winning command that will result in a win.

If it is determined in the process of S4484 that there is winning information (S4484: Yes), the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is extracted based on the winning type (big win type, small win type) indicated by the winning information (S4485), and the value corresponding to the extracted number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, the number of icons to be displayed is selected by referring to the icon display number selection table 222ha based on the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4487). After that, the difference between the selected number of icons to be displayed and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), other processes are executed (S4412), and this process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, only the information used for the icon presentation is updated, and no control is performed to vary the number of reserved icons displayed. This allows the timing at which the number of reserved icons displayed changes to differ from the timing at which the winning command is received, making it difficult for the player to understand when and how the number of reserved icons displayed changes. Note that in this embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, only the information used for the icon presentation is updated, and no control is performed to vary the number of reserved icons displayed. However, this is not limited to this, and control may be performed to vary the number of reserved icons displayed, or control may be performed to vary the number of reserved icons displayed when a predetermined lottery is performed and a win is obtained.

In addition, in the process of S4484, if it is determined that there is no winning information (S4484: No), it is next determined whether the continuous performance in progress flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is greater than 0 (S4490). If it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S4490: Yes), the performance mode of the pseudo performance that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S4491), the execution timing of the pseudo performance is set (S4492), the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated according to the pseudo performance mode (S4493), a display command is set to indicate the set performance mode (S4494), and the process proceeds to S4412.

If it is determined in the processing of S4489 that the continuous performance flag 223hd is set to on (S4489: Yes), i.e., continuous performance is currently in progress, or if the value of the undisplayed icon count counter 223hb is 0 (S4404: No), i.e., the number of pending icons cannot be increased, the process proceeds to S4412 without setting up a pseudo performance.

Next, the contents of jackpot end process 9 (S4954) will be explained with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end process 9 (S4954). This jackpot end process 9 (S4954) differs significantly from the jackpot end process described above in that when a RUSH game can be played after the jackpot ends, that is, when a potential win state is set or a high probability win state is set, a process is executed to set information related to the icon presentation based on the winning information that has already been acquired.

When the jackpot end process 9 (S4954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5051: No), it is then determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot with a high probability of winning (S5052). If it is determined that it is a jackpot with a high probability of winning (S5052: Yes), that is, if the high probability state is set by a jackpot executed at a timing other than during RUSH play, all the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5053), the winning information (jackpot information, small winning information) included in the winning information is extracted (S5054), and the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened is calculated based on the extracted winning information (S5055). Then, the calculated total number of times the second attacker has been opened (total number of times it has been opened) is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5056).

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a potential jackpot (S5057), and if it is a potential jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the corresponding potential mode (preparation mode, RUSH mode) (S5058), the number of icons to be displayed is set to 4 (S5059), the value of the displayed icon count counter is set to 4 (S5060), the information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc is deleted from the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5061), a display command is set to indicate the end of the jackpot (S5062), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5057 that it is not a potential jackpot (it is a guaranteed jackpot) (S5057: No), a display command is set to indicate the guaranteed jackpot mode (S5063), and processing proceeds to S5062.

If it is determined in the process of S5051 that the RUSH in progress flag 223fg is set to ON, that is, if it is a jackpot won during RUSH play (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot (S5064). If it is a normal jackpot (S5064: Yes), the RUSH play ends, so various flags and counters related to the RUSH play are reset (set to their initial state) (S5065), a RUSH display command corresponding to the current jackpot is set (S5066), and the process proceeds to S5062. In this case, in the process of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH play is set. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5065 that it is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH play will continue is set.

Next, the contents of preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be explained with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the contents of preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). This preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) differs from the preparation state setting process of the seventh embodiment described above (see S4641 in FIG. 226) in that a process for displaying a pending icon at the timing of transition from the sure-change state to the latent-change state has been added, but is otherwise the same. The same contents will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processes of S8001 to S8004 as those of preparation state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 226) are executed, then a display command to indicate the corresponding latent mode (RUSH mode) is set (S8051), the number of icons to be displayed is set to 4 (S8052), the value of the displayed icon count counter is set to 4 (S8053), the information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc is deleted from the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S8054), and this process is terminated.

In other words, the same process is executed as the process executed at the end of a jackpot when a potential state is set after the end of a jackpot game. This makes it possible to unify the initial display of the icon effects (a state in which four reserved icons are displayed regardless of the number of reserved balls in special chart 2) regardless of the trigger for setting the potential state. Therefore, the control process for changing the presentation mode of the icon effects depending on the trigger for transitioning to the potential state can be unified, thereby reducing the load on the control process.

Next, the contents of RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of RUSH setting process 9 (S8450). In this RUSH setting process 9 (S8450), processing is executed to set the presentation mode of the icon presentation to be executed in response to the second special pattern variation executed during RUSH play.

When the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8651). If it is 4 (S8651: Yes), it refers to the continuous performance selection table 222hb to select a continuous performance (S8652), and it is determined whether to execute a continuous performance (S4453). If it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed (S4453: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the performance mode of the selected continuous performance (S4454), and this process ends. In the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are also updated according to the number of reserved icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous performance. If it is determined that a continuous performance is not to be executed in the process of S4453 (S8653: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S8651, if it is determined that the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is not 4 (S8651: No), it is next determined whether the continuous performance in progress flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8655: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is greater than 0 (S8656). If it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S8656: Yes), the performance mode of the pseudo performance that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S8657), the execution timing of the pseudo performance is set (S8658), the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated according to the pseudo performance mode (S8659), a display command is set to indicate the set performance mode (S8660), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S8655 that the continuous performance flag 223hd is set to on (S8655: Yes), i.e., if a continuous performance is currently in progress, or if the value of the undisplayed icon count counter 223hb is 0, i.e., if the number of pending icons displayed cannot be increased, this processing ends without setting the pseudo performance.

<Modification of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the ninth embodiment described above will be explained. In the icon presentation executed in the ninth embodiment described above, consecutive presentations can be executed based on the results of the look-ahead. The presentation mode of the consecutive presentation is determined when the consecutive presentation is set. Specifically, the type of presentation mode, such as a presentation mode executed to leave reserved icons or a presentation mode executed to consume all reserved icons, is determined in advance as the result of the consecutive presentation, and a presentation corresponding to the type is executed. By configuring in this way, the presentation result of the consecutive presentation and the actual game result do not differ, and the processing load during the consecutive presentation can be reduced, but there is a problem that the presentation pattern of the consecutive presentation cannot be made diverse.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the presentation mode of the continuous performance is changed based on the type of jackpot that was won and the number of remaining reserved icons when the jackpot game that is the target of the continuous performance starts. By configuring it in this way, the presentation mode of the continuous performance can be set separately for, for example, the first half period before the jackpot game starts and the second half period after the jackpot game starts, making it easier to diversify the presentation patterns of the continuous performance.

In addition, in this modified example, the process of increasing the number of reserved icons displayed can be executed after the start of the jackpot game, so even if a presentation mode is set in which all reserved icons are consumed in the first half of the continuous presentation period, if the type of jackpot won is a potential jackpot, the number of reserved icons displayed can be increased during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the presentation mode for the first half of the continuous presentation period, making it easier to diversify the presentation patterns.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the continuous performance is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big win game. This makes it possible to make the player believe that a small win game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened during the big win game.

<Regarding control process of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Here, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to Fig. 228. This modification is different from the ninth embodiment described above in that it executes a jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) that is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, but is otherwise the same. Fig. 228 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802).

When jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902), and then it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4951), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4951: Yes), it is next determined whether the continuous performance in progress flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952). In other words, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot that is eligible for continuous performance.

In the process of S4952, if it is determined that the continuous performance in progress flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952: Yes), the continuous performance in progress flag 223hd is set to OFF (S4953), and it is determined whether the current jackpot is a potential jackpot (a jackpot for which a potential state is set after the jackpot game ends) (S4954). If it is determined to be a potential jackpot (S4954: Yes), the information in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated to correspond to the number of second attackers 1650 opened during the jackpot, i.e., each value is updated to consume the number of displayed reserved icons corresponding to the opening of the second attacker 1650 executed in the current jackpot game (S4955).

After that, a display command corresponding to the updated content is set (S4956), and it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc after the update is 0 (S4957). If it is determined to be 0, that is, if the continuous performance is advanced in accordance with the opening of the second attacker 1650 even though the RUSH continues with a potential jackpot, the number of displayed reserved icons becomes 0 (S4957), an additional performance (mode) for displaying one reserved icon after the continuous performance is executed is set (S4958), and this process is terminated. The additional performance mode set here includes a performance in which carrots fall from the sky during a jackpot game. In addition, although a detailed explanation is omitted, if a jackpot game is being played during a RUSH and a reserved icon is not displayed, that is, if there is a possibility that the RUSH game will end due to the current jackpot game, a pseudo additional performance is executed to determine whether the above-mentioned additional performance is executed or not. This pseudo-addition effect is made up of a first effect that, like the addition effect, makes you feel like something is falling from the sky, and a second effect in which something other than carrots falls from the sky. This allows the player to keep their hopes up until the very end as they play.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4954 that the current jackpot is not a potential jackpot (S4954: No), i.e., if the RUSH game ends with the current jackpot, a presentation mode in which all of the displayed reserved icons are consumed is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4951 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4951: No), the same processes of S4913 to S4916 as those in the jackpot-related process described above (see S4802 in FIG. 68) are executed, and this process ends.

The technical idea used in this modified example, i.e., the technical idea of executing an effect that changes the number of reserved icons displayed when a jackpot game starts, may be used for purposes other than executing it within a continuous effect.

In this modified example, the process of increasing the number of reserved icons displayed can be executed after the start of the jackpot game, so even if a presentation mode is set in which all reserved icons are consumed in the first half of the continuous presentation period, if the type of jackpot won is a potential jackpot, the number of reserved icons displayed can be increased during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the presentation mode for the first half of the continuous presentation period, making it easier to diversify the presentation patterns.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the continuous performance is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big win game. This makes it possible to make the player believe that a small win game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened during the big win game.

As explained above, in the ninth embodiment, a look-ahead effect (icon effect) is executed in which the number of specific patterns (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) is varied, regardless of the number of special reserved balls acquired, depending on the result of the look-ahead process (pre-determination process) executed on the winning information of the reserved special pattern. This makes it possible to execute a look-ahead effect similar to that executed when the number of special reserved balls acquired is at the upper limit, depending on the look-ahead result, even when the number of special reserved balls acquired is small. Therefore, even for players who are unable to acquire many special reserved balls, a look-ahead effect with a high effect can be provided, which prevents the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon performance described above is set to the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved special symbol balls that can be reserved (the number of reserved second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state), and the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved special symbol balls that have been acquired are not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (they are displayed in a way that is difficult for the player to distinguish). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that the specific symbols displayed in the icon performance are reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved special symbol balls (the number of reserved second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state). This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation of players who are unable to acquire many reserved special symbol balls to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-read result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot for which a potential state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon presentation is configured to be greater than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved special symbol balls that can be reserved (the number of reserved second special symbols that are mainly executed during the potential state). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a surprising presentation to players who have been under the mistaken impression that the specific symbols displayed to the player in the icon presentation are reserved symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of a look-ahead process (pre-determination process) executed on the winning information of the reserved special symbol, the number of times the attacka will be opened in the small win game is determined, and the number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the determination result. The number of times the attacka will be opened in one small win game is configured to differ depending on the type of small win won. Furthermore, as part of the big win game that is executed when a big win is won, the same attacka opening operation as in the small win game is executed.

This configuration allows the player to predict the number of small win games to be played in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as icon effects. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the system is configured to notify the player that the period during which the specific symbols are displayed is a period during which the potential state (RUSH game) will not end. In other words, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of a big win game, the player is notified in advance that the potential state will be set after the end of that big win game. This allows the player to focus on the icon effects each time the number of specific symbols is changed, enhancing the effect of the presentation.

In the above-mentioned ninth embodiment, the number of icons that can be displayed (number of reserved icons) is determined in the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when a winning information command indicating winning information of a special pattern is received, and the number of reserved icons displayed at various times is increased or decreased. However, the process for determining the number of icons that can be displayed (number of reserved icons) (displayable icon number determination process) may be configured to be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed, rather than being executed every time the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when a winning information command indicating winning information of a special pattern is received is executed. Specifically, the displayable icon number determination process may be configured to be executed when a predetermined period (for example, a period indicating an elapsed time of 30 seconds or a period until the number of additional winning information commands (winning commands) received reaches three) has elapsed since the previous displayable icon number determination process was executed. This allows the timing of actually receiving the winning information command (winning command) to differ from the timing of determining the number of displayable icons based on the information contained in the command, making it difficult to know which winning information (special reserved memory) the number of reserved icons has been determined for. In this way, by varying the timing of determining the number of displayable icons, it is possible to easily deviate the presentation mode of the presentation that increases or decreases the number of reserved icons displayed within the range of the number of displayable icons from the winning information contained in the received winning information command, making it easier to provide a presentation that is unexpected to the player.

Furthermore, other than the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means that can be operated (frame button 22), the displayable icon number determination process may be configured to be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an operation presentation on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to have the player operate the operation means in a predetermined manner. This makes it easier for a player who operates the operation means correctly in response to the executed operation presentation to execute an icon presentation based on the winning information contained in the received winning information command, thereby encouraging the player to play.

In addition, the system may be configured to detect when a ball has entered the general winning hole 63 or through gate 67 provided on the game board 13, and execute a process to determine the number of icons that can be displayed based on the detection result (at a predetermined probability if the ball enters). By configuring the system in this way, the number of reserved icons that can be displayed is determined by a game unrelated to the special pattern lottery, and therefore the timing when the winning information command (winning command) is actually received and the timing when the number of icons that can be displayed is determined based on the information contained in the command can be made different for the player, making it difficult to understand which winning information (special pattern reserved memory) the number of reserved icons has been determined for.

In this embodiment, the following effects can be executed to increase or decrease the number of pending icons: a true icon effect that increases or decreases the value of the undisplayed icon count counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc; and a pseudo effect that increases or decreases only the apparent number of pending icons without increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon count counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon count counter 223hc (the final value is the same). The performance mode of each effect is set by a control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, the voice lamp control device 113 may determine whether or not to execute a pseudo performance, and when it is determined that a pseudo performance is to be executed, it may set a range of the number of pending icons to be increased or decreased in the pseudo performance and a display command indicating that a pseudo performance is to be executed, and output it to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display command indicating that a pseudo performance is to be executed, it may determine the performance mode based on the information included in the received display command.

By configuring in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 only needs to control the performance mode of the icon performance (true icon performance) set based on the winning information of the special pattern, so the processing load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Also, by executing a pseudo performance that increases or decreases (varies) only the apparent number of reserved icons without increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb or the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, it is possible to diversify the variable pattern of the number of reserved icons in the icon performance. In addition, since the pseudo performance is executed so that the final increase and decrease of the reserved icons match, there is no need to worry about the performance status of the pseudo performance when setting the performance mode of the true icon performance, and the processing load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 229 to FIG. 263. In the tenth embodiment, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed with respect to the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the main control device 110 and the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. In addition, due to the above-mentioned differences, part of the performance content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also different. Note that the same components as those of the seventh embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, we will briefly explain the major differences between this tenth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above. In this tenth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in parallel (in parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. And, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed in a way that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the ease of executing the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to differ depending on the set game state. Specifically, in order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability-changing state) than when a low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state), the lottery right for the second special symbol is configured to be obtained when a ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) accompanied by an electric device 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) executed when a normal symbol is hit. In other words, when playing in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to be executed more easily than the lottery for the second special symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set upon winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to differ greatly depending on the game state that is set, so that the player can be motivated to play in the hope that a game state that is highly advantageous to the player will be set.

Here, for example, when the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous game state to the player, is set among multiple game states, if the lottery for the second special symbol, which is a lottery advantageous to the player, is not executed at all, the motivation of the player playing the normal state, that is, the motivation to play to aim for a more advantageous game state (time-saving state, probability change state) to be set, is reduced, and there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game. In response to this, in the tenth embodiment, when a specific condition is established during the period in which the normal state is set, it is configured so that a predetermined number (maximum 5) of lottery rights for the second special symbol can be acquired. Specifically, it is configured so that when a win is won in the normal symbol lottery executed in the state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric role 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a period during which it is easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery even in the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, so that a player playing in the normal state can execute a game in which they aim to win the special symbol lottery jackpot, and a game in which they aim to win the regular symbol lottery, and this makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights for the stored second special symbol, that is, the number of special symbol 2 reserved. Specifically, as the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-miss variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a miss is executed in the first half of the variable performance, and in the second half of the variable performance, a pseudo-win variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot is executed by restarting the third symbol stopped (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-miss variable performance, and the number of times that the third symbol temporarily stops (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-win variable performance is configured to be variable in response to the number of special symbol 2 reserved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped multiple times until the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that they have won the jackpot after multiple second special symbol drawings.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won with the special symbol 2 reserve used in the first second special symbol lottery among multiple special symbol 2 reserves acquired during normal symbol play, the player can be made to believe that he or she won the jackpot because multiple special symbol 2 reserves were acquired during normal symbol play, which makes it possible for the player to play with more enthusiasm to acquire the special symbol 2 reserve during normal symbol play.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance is configured to execute a variation performance that imitates the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special symbol 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol 2 variation performance from being repeated in a pseudo manner when the reserved special symbol 2 has not been acquired, making it difficult for the player to recognize that a pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variation performance that imitates the special symbol 1 variation performance is executed, the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination that indicates that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so it is possible to execute a variation performance that is unexpected for the player.

<Regarding the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. Fig. 229 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 229, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above (see Fig. 157) in that the configuration of the right side area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 and the configuration of the lower area formed below the variable display unit 80 are different, and the rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that there is no (or is unlikely to be) a difference in the game value obtained by the player whether the player is playing a game in which the ball flows down the left side area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (left-hand play) or a game in which the ball flows down the right side area (right-hand play). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 229, the game board 13 is formed symmetrically with respect to the perpendicular line at the center of the game board 13, and in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, there are arranged a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter and trigger a lottery for a first special symbol, a second ball entrance 640 that is provided below the first ball entrance 64 and can trigger a lottery for a second special symbol when a ball enters, an electric device 640a that is attached to the second ball entrance 640 and opens in a normal winning game that is executed when a winning lottery for a normal symbol is won, and a V winning device 2650 that is provided below the second ball entrance 640 and opens in a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery.

A ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left side area and half of the balls pass through the through gate 67 provided in the left side area. Both the balls that pass through the through gate 67 and the balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area by the nails planted in the game board 13. Here, the balls that flow straight down between the nails enter into the two general ball entrances 63. In this embodiment, it is configured so that about 1/50 of the balls that flow down the left side area enter into one of the two general ball entrances 63, and when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (bonus) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 at a rate of 1 in 15 balls, as in the first embodiment described above, and four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640. The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that when the electric device 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 229), almost no balls enter the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric device 640 is open (shown in black in FIG. 229), one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of about one in two balls that are launched in left-handed play and flow down the left side area, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. The V winning device 2650 is configured so that almost no balls enter the second ball entrance 640 when a jackpot game is not being played, and two balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of about two in three balls during a jackpot game, and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, we will explain the V winning device 2650. This V winning device 2650 is a variable ball entry means that is opened during a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and is configured so that a high probability state of a special symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends by having a ball that entered the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game pass through a specific gate. In addition, depending on the type of jackpot won, the system is configured to be able to execute jackpot games in which the ball that has won into the V winning device 2650 is likely to flow down a specific gate, and jackpot games in which it is difficult to flow down. In this embodiment, a jackpot game in which the ball that has won into the V winning device 2650 is likely to flow down a specific gate, i.e., a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down a specific gate if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a special jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which the ball that has won into the V winning device 2650 is unlikely to flow down a specific gate, i.e., a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to flow down a specific gate even if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if a high probability jackpot game is played, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the jackpot game, the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern will not be set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this embodiment, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is not determined at the time when the jackpot game is played. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the round game (V round game) that is most likely to cause the ball to flow down to a specific gate is played in the round game played in the fifth round of the jackpot game. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until this V round game ends. In this way, by configuring the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can play to win various benefits (prize balls, high probability state of special patterns) in the jackpot game, which can increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when using the above-mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set in advance (for example, at the start of the jackpot game) the presentation mode of the notification effect for notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends (for example, the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period), and the presentation mode of the notification effect must be set during the jackpot game, when control processing related to ball output and control processing related to display are executed closely, resulting in a problem that the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a decision is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to a specific gate, and if the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is played, and the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched only if the ball is not flowing down the specific gate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, and a special jackpot that is advantageous to the player is configured to have a longer ending period than a normal jackpot. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if a special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot game ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is configured to be shorter.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game causes a problem that an unnatural notification presentation is executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. Also, if a special presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode must be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot. If the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation that is executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

This V winning device 2650 is configured in the same manner as the V winning device 2650 of the eighth embodiment described above (see Figures 194 to 196), and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which balls that flow down the right area enter the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the left area described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and therefore regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played or not, the same privilege is awarded whether the player plays a right-handed game or a left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play in any game method according to his or her mood.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 229, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can acquire when playing from the left side and when playing from the right side so that there is no large discrepancy between these amounts. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area may be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 may be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to acquire prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to acquire prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

<Display Content in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIGS. 230(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth control example differ from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above in that the scroll direction of the third symbol (the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol) is changed from vertical to horizontal (right to left), the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is changed from one (see FIG. 11(a)) to five (see FIG. 230(a)), and the notification mode of information related to the game is changed. In addition, some elements are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but are given different symbols for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three rows of symbols (Z1 to Z3) are displayed, one above, one below (see FIG. 230(a)). The third symbols (decorative symbols that change in response to the changing display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are each composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9". In this embodiment, the number of identification information imitating a specific number (for example, identification information imitating the number "4") is configured to be greater than the number of identification information imitating other numbers. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in a reach state, the number of jackpot symbols (identification information imitating a specific number) passing on the pay line can be increased compared to when the other identification information is in a reach state, so that the player can visually predict that there is a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information that resembles a number. In this way, by using characters that correspond to each identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special symbol, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described below is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows, Z1, Z2, and Z3, at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling left and right periodically for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to scroll from right to left as the pattern row changes, while the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left as the pattern row changes. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) that do not indicate the results of the special pattern lottery are also formed between the main patterns. In Figure 230(b), the blank patterns (sub-patterns) are displayed using patterns that resemble triangles.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1-L3 formed in the vertical direction, and two active lines L4, L5 formed in the diagonal direction. When each of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 is displayed in a stopped state, if the third symbol stops on the active line in a jackpot symbol combination (in this control example, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), in this control example, each pay line (L1-L5) is formed to include the pattern display positions of each of the pattern columns Z1-Z3, so that the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern can be difficult to understand until all of the pattern columns V1-V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the variable display of the third pattern executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last pattern column (middle pattern column V2 in this control example) is stopped and displayed.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 230(b). As shown in FIG. 230(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 2) to indicate the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

The small display area Dm2 is an area where identification information (fourth pattern) is displayed to show the lottery status of the normal pattern (whether the lottery is in progress (changing) or not, and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth pattern (fourth pattern of normal pattern) showing the lottery status of the normal pattern (normal pattern) or the fourth pattern (fourth pattern of special pattern 2) showing the lottery status of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol can be notified to the player. Note that, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 230(b)) to indicate the status in which the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is displayed stationarily in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm2 in FIG. 230(b)) to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed stationarily to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 230(b), in this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the selection status of the special symbol is displayed is formed on the upper left and upper right sides of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be made different depending on the presentation mode of the changing presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth pattern display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed, thereby preventing the performance effect from being reduced. In this case, it is preferable to remove the fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure it so that the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

The display content displayed in the secondary display area Ds is substantially the same as in the first control example, so a detailed description will be omitted. However, while the secondary display area Ds is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, in this eighth control example, the display area of the secondary display area Ds is limited to only the small area Ds1, and an in-progress area Ds1a and a waiting area Ds1b are formed within that small area Ds1. The display content of the in-progress area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 in the first control example described above, so a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the standby area Ds1b will be explained. In this embodiment, eight pedestals are displayed in the standby area Ds1b, and during normal play, reserved symbols are displayed to indicate the number of reserved balls with special symbols.

In addition, when the combined number of reserved balls of the first special pattern (reserved balls of special pattern 1) and the reserved balls of the second special pattern (reserved balls of special pattern 2) reaches 8, that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed on the rightmost pedestal, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern reaches the upper limit (8), a special performance (period performance) using the eight reserved patterns stored in the reserved memory may be executed, and while this period performance is being executed, the standby area Ds1b may be configured to display reserved patterns for performance that indicate only the period during which the period performance is executed (reserved patterns that are the subject of the period performance), rather than reserved patterns that indicate the number of reserved balls of the special pattern.

By configuring it in this way, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period performance, a new reserved pattern will not be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so the player can be easily informed of how long the period performance will last.

In the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical, and the same game result is awarded whether the player plays right or left, so it is not displayed. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to allow the player to set a game method in which right-handed play is more advantageous than left-handed play, or a game method in which left-handed play is more advantageous than right-handed play, depending on the set game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a guide display mode to guide the player in the direction in which to shoot the ball (game direction). By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

To explain in more detail, the guidance display area may be configured to display a "right hit" display mode for instructing the player to play right-handed games, and a "left hit" display mode for instructing the player to play left-handed games. The "right hit" display mode may be displayed during a game state in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, such as a probability change state, a time-saving state, and during a jackpot game, and the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) after the end of right-handed games. In addition, when it is detected that right-handed games are being played during a game state in which left-handed games are advantageous to the player, that is, during a normal state, the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds). In addition, the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in each of the above embodiments may be appropriately displayed.

<About the content of the tenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 231 to FIG. 236, characteristic performance contents among various performance contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 231(a), a display screen when a reach is established in a normal state will be described. FIG. 231(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a reach state is reached in a normal state (normal state). In this embodiment, the third symbols to be displayed variably are displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and the reach state is reached when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 230(a)). The effective line on which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win is set as the reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed variably. After the ready state is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to variably display each identification information (third symbol) at a slow speed that allows the player to view it (the speed at which it takes about 0.5 seconds for one main symbol (third symbol resembling a number) to move).

As described above, in this embodiment, one symbol row has 10 main symbols, so when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner, it is configured so that it takes 5 seconds (0.5 x 10) to complete one revolution. The middle symbol row Z2, which is displayed in a slow-moving manner, is displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured so that it can change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231(a), even if the reach state is reached with any third pattern (in FIG. 231(a), the identification information imitating the number "9" (the third pattern imitating a crab)), the slow-speed variable display is executed so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third pattern imitating an octopus) is first visible in the middle pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 230) that is displayed in a variable manner during the reach state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is configured to be variable depending on the change mode of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach state is reached, for example, it is configured to be able to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when the middle pattern row Z2 has completed one revolution or two revolutions after the reach state is reached. Therefore, as in this embodiment, by unifying the identification information of the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible after the reach state is reached, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand at what point in time the change will occur to a different presentation mode (reach mode).

In this embodiment, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is set to the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution or two revolutions after the reach state is reached, but is not limited thereto. For example, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) may be set to the timing at which the identification information (identical information identical to the identification information in the reach stop) that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line after the reach state is reached, or the timing at which the identification information shifted by one from the identification information that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line. In this way, by configuring the middle symbol row Z2 to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the reach stop identification information passing the reach effective line, a relationship can be established for the player between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 stops and displays in a combination that is a jackpot, and the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode). Specifically, if the system is configured so that identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached (identical information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when it passes the reach effective line, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped in a combination that results in a jackpot and the timing at which it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) can overlap for the player, allowing the player to pay close attention to the changing presentation with great anticipation when the identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot (identical information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) approaches the reach effective line.

As described above, in this embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a slow-changing manner so that a specific identification state (a third symbol that resembles the number 1) is first visible regardless of which third symbol is used to reach the reach state. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol combination that is ultimately stopped and displayed is a combination that is shifted by one type from the third symbol combination that results in a jackpot (one frame off reach) (if the final stop display mode is determined in advance), a new problem arises in that the period from when the reach state is reached until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed (until the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed) differs depending on the type of third symbol that results in the reach state.

Specifically, when the "third pattern imitating the number 1" is reached, the middle pattern row Z2 displays the "third pattern imitating the number 1" as a specific pattern in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 5.5 seconds (first lap) or 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle pattern row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode, and when the "third pattern imitating the number 6" is reached, the middle pattern row Z2 displays the "third pattern imitating the number 1" as a specific pattern in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 8 seconds (first lap) or 13 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle pattern row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode.

Therefore, in order to achieve a reach state with different types of third symbols in a fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation time is set, it was necessary to execute a process that calculates backwards from the timing when the third symbol stops and displays to set the timing when the reach state will occur. In other words, there was a problem in that a reach effect was reduced because the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reaching state was changed depending on the type of third symbol that was in the reach state, resulting in an inconsistent reach effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the first pattern to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery when the special pattern lottery is executed, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the determined variation time by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a variation display performance of a performance period that matches the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, and executes the variation display performance of the third pattern in synchronization with the variation display of the first pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an added time command indicating the variation time to be added, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern that is in a reach state based on the length of the variation time included in the added time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the added time. On the other hand, if a fluctuation pattern of a 37-second fluctuation time is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the base time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the added time. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify that the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer than the base time based on the notified content of the added time command. This makes it possible to set the type of third pattern that will be in a reach state simply by checking the content of the added time command.

Next, referring to FIG. 231(b) to FIG. 234, the performance contents related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 231(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 231(b), when the normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric role 640 that is opened in the normal symbol winning game is displayed therein, and a highlight display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to notify the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. In addition, since the situation shown in FIG. 231(b) is during the execution of the normal symbol variation that has won, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is in a display mode that imitates the electric role 640 in the closed state. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict that the normal symbol winning game will be executed soon, which can increase the fun of the game.

Note that in FIG. 231(b) an example is given of a normal symbol variation that has resulted in a win, but the system is configured to form a small display area Dm3 during a portion of a normal symbol variation that has resulted in a loss (for example, a 1/100 probability of a loss variation) and to execute a performance (fake performance) that displays an icon that resembles an electric gadget 640. In this case, a performance mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed stops and is displayed. By configuring in this way, the period during which the player expects a normal symbol winning game to be executed can be extended.

Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal symbol reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination can be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a suggestive performance that suggests that a normal symbol winning game will be played soon can be executed before the normal symbol variation that has been won is executed, that is, from the stage where a normal symbol reservation that has been acquired as a pre-determination result is a winning one. In this case, it is preferable to configure the suggestive performance to be executed in a performance mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive performance shown in FIG. 231 (b). For example, the suggestive performance can be executed in the same performance mode as the performance that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol variation, or the pre-determination result for the acquired special symbol reservation, and the executed suggestive performance can be configured to only inform the player that a situation favorable to the player will soon come.

In this way, the greater the divergence between the timing of the actual execution of a normal winning game and the timing of the suggestive effect, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand the presentation mode of the suggestive effect intended to indicate that a normal winning game will be executed, and by extension, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is a normal winning game, thereby increasing the interest of the game when the suggestive effect is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 232(a), the contents of the presentation when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state will be described. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the presentation displayed when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during normal time (in the normal state). In this embodiment, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed in the low probability state of the normal pattern is designed to be 10 seconds. And, as described above with reference to FIG. 229, in both the case of right-hand play and the case of left-hand play, about 1/2 of the shot balls are configured to pass through the through gate 67. In addition, it is configured to be possible to store up to four lottery rights for normal patterns (normal pattern reservation).

In other words, while playing in the normal state, the normal pattern lottery is continuously executed, and the normal pattern winning is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when a normal pattern winning is won in the normal state, a normal pattern winning game (long opening winning) is executed in which the electric role 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 229, since the electric role 640 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game during a low probability state of a normal pattern that occurs with a low probability.

As shown in FIG. 232(a), when a normal winning game is played in the normal state, the identification information (symbols) are displayed in the small display area Dm2 in a combination (two circles in the figure) that indicates that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a winning one, the comment "Aim for the electric chute" is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating an open electric chute (electric device 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Note that the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapped), so the display of the third symbol change that is executed in response to the special symbol change and the display of the fourth symbol change that is executed in the small display area Dm1 continue to be executed during the normal winning game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds, the special symbol 2 reserved pattern (shown as a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special symbol 2 reserved) of the second special symbol acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is displayed (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b) in priority to the special symbol 1 reserved pattern (shown as a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special symbol 1 reserved) of the first special symbol acquired. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 232(a) shows the state after four or more balls have entered the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and the state after the maximum number of four special symbol 2 reserved has been acquired.

In this embodiment, the system is configured so that the drawing of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the drawing of the first special symbol, so that the drawing of the special symbol for the reserved special symbol 2 acquired later is executed with priority over the reserved special symbol 1 acquired earlier. By configuring it in this way, when a game with a winning normal symbol is executed during the normal state and multiple reserved special symbols 2 are acquired, it becomes possible to execute the drawing of the second special symbol consecutively with priority, so that a period during which the drawing of the second special symbol is executed can be set as an advantageous period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player, and a dedicated presentation can be executed, providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

Next, the performance contents in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to Fig. 232 (b) to Fig. 234. Fig. 232 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in Fig. 232 (b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the comment "Entering the chance zone" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set for the period until all the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the current advantageous period is in progress.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "High probability of getting a special chance" are displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that if a jackpot is won during the chance zone, there is a high probability of obtaining a special chance state. Although detailed explanations will be given later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-change performance is executed to make it appear as if multiple special chance symbol changes have been executed during one special chance symbol change (second special chance symbol change). Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 232(a)) indicating the reserved memory number of special chance symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is hidden, and the reserved number of special chance symbols 1 (in the figure, "2" indicates that the reserved number of special chance symbols 1 is two) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the reserved number of special chance symbols 2 (in the figure, "3" indicates that the reserved number of special chance symbols 2 is three) is displayed in the small display area Ds12.

As shown in FIG. 232(b), the display mode displayed in the small display area Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to see than the display mode displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 232(a)) of the sub-display area Ds, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols during the chance zone. Therefore, when a pseudo-variable performance is executed during the chance zone, it is possible to make the player think that multiple special symbol lotteries (variations) have actually been executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect. In this embodiment, the number of reserved special symbols is displayed using a part of the main display area Dm (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the number of reserved special symbols not to be notified to the player during the chance zone, or to configure the number of reserved special symbols to be notified in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is sufficient to configure the number of reserved special figures to be difficult for the player to distinguish, for example, it is possible to switch from a display mode using numbers that allows the player to easily distinguish the number of reserved special figures to a display mode in which the color changes according to each reserved special figure number. In this configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current reserved special figure number from being easily distinguished, and therefore it is possible to achieve the same effect as this embodiment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate that the second special symbol is currently fluctuating. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlap), so the period during which the normal symbol winning game is executed may overlap with the first special symbol fluctuating period (see FIG. 232(a)) or may not overlap. If the normal symbol winning game is executed overlapping with the first special symbol fluctuating period, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first special symbol fluctuating period being executed ends, and if it does not overlap with the first special symbol fluctuating period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game (during the normal symbol winning game). In other words, the timing of the second special symbol lottery will differ depending on the state of the first special symbol when a normal winning game is executed, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the currently executed special symbol change is the first special symbol change or the second special symbol change.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the second special pattern change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special pattern change is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Next, referring to Fig. 233(a) to Fig. 234, the contents of the pseudo-variation performance (special variation performance) among the variation performances executed during the chance zone will be explained. Fig. 233(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during a special variation performance, Fig. 233(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variation performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired, and Fig. 234 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variation performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reservation is not acquired.

Here, the contents of the special variation presentation (pseudo variation presentation) will be explained. This special variation presentation is a variation presentation in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation presentation that makes the player think that multiple special symbol variations have been performed. First, a reach presentation is performed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation presentation, and at the end of the first half period, as shown in FIG. 233(a), the third symbol is temporarily stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line) in a combination indicating a miss (displayed as "353" in the figure). At this timing, that is, at the end of the first half period of the special variation presentation, the word "unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, and the player is configured to think that the second special symbol lottery performed during the chance zone was a miss. In other words, during the first half of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the reach performance that gives hope for a big win is stopped (provisionally stopped) with a performance result indicating a miss.

After that, in the latter half of the special variation performance, a variation performance (special latter half performance) is executed to restart the temporarily stopped third pattern. This special latter half performance is configured to change its performance mode depending on the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have already been acquired. For example, when the reserved special pattern 2 is secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special pattern variation in the chance zone as shown in FIG. 233 (b), and when the reserved special pattern 2 is not secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the first special pattern variation executed after the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. 234. In other words, in this embodiment, as a special variation performance, the type of special pattern variation executed after the currently executed second special pattern variation ends is determined based on the reserved special pattern number, and the performance mode of the special latter half performance is set in a performance mode corresponding to the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that multiple special pattern variations have been executed during one second special pattern variation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special pattern change in the chance zone (see FIG. 233(b)), the number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the latter half period is configured to be different according to the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have been acquired. Although detailed explanations are omitted, when neither the reserved special pattern 2 nor the reserved special pattern 1 is secured when the special change performance is executed, the temporary stop display of the third pattern shown in FIG. 233(a) is not executed, and one change performance (a change performance in which the third pattern is not temporarily stopped even once) is executed using the entire change period of the second special pattern change. As a result, the above-mentioned special change performance is executed only when the reserved special pattern number is secured, so that it is more likely that multiple special pattern changes have been executed during one second special pattern change.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a performance mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols already acquired. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol is temporarily stopped five or more times, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won the jackpot. As described above, in this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a case in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped and a case in which it is stopped, so it is difficult to accurately determine the number of temporary stops. Therefore, it is possible to mix the number of temporary stop displays and the number of stop displays to make the player think that the temporary stop display has been performed five or more times, or to make the player think that some of the temporary stop displays are stopped displays, and that the number of temporary stop displays has not reached five even though the temporary stop display has actually been performed five or more times, thereby providing the player with the fun of predicting the performance result.

Note that other configurations may be used as the presentation mode of the special variation presentation. For example, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation, or at least a part of the presentation mode of the special variation presentation (e.g., background color, third pattern effect, etc.) may be gradually changed depending on the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Also, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped (e.g., 1st time, 2nd time) may be temporarily displayed at the timing when the temporarily stopped third pattern is redisplayed.

As shown in FIG. 234, if a special variation effect is executed without securing the reserved special symbol 2, the words "Chance Zone Ended" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and a special latter half effect is executed in which the variation display of the third symbol executed in the primary display area Dm becomes a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (a variation display in which the third symbol varies horizontally), so that after the player believes that the chance zone has ended, the result of the special variation effect, i.e., the lottery result of the second special symbol, is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 235, the effects when the probability variable state is set will be explained. FIG. 235(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects when the first special symbol variation is executed when the probability variable state is set, and FIG. 235(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects when the second special symbol variation is executed when the probability variable state is set.

In this embodiment, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. Then, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state is set with a high probability (a high probability jackpot game that can easily cause the ball to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game is always executed). Then, the high probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the high probability state is set, as long as a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery before the specified number of special pattern lotteries (50 times) have been performed (the jackpot probability in the high probability state for special patterns is 1/50), the high probability state can be looped with high probability. This makes it possible for a player playing during the high probability state to play with enthusiasm in the hope of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery as soon as possible.

On the other hand, even if the probability variable state is set, for example, if a probability variable jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, and immediately after the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, in a state in which the probability variable state is set, the first special pattern lottery may be executed if the special pattern 2 reservation has not been acquired and the special pattern 1 reservation has been acquired. In this embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 100% of the time, whereas when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 50% of the time, and the remaining 50% is a normal jackpot game. In other words, even if the probability variable state is set, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the probability variable state may not be looped.

In this way, if a player quickly determines that the jackpot won in the first special symbol lottery during the high probability state is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) for which a normal jackpot game is executed, the player's motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the high probability state, a double reach effect is easily executed, which is a variation effect in which the third symbol (identification information with an odd number) corresponding to the high probability jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state. More specifically, if a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is always executed (see FIG. 235(a)).

This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a reach effect in which only the third pattern (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in a reach state when a normal jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the special jackpot state, and to prevent players from predicting in advance that they will win a normal jackpot during the period in which the special patterns are changing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(a), in this embodiment, when the probability bonus state is set, small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same manner as in the chance zone described above, making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols. Then, the words "Super Chance Mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm as a display mode to inform the player that the probability bonus state is currently in effect.

Here, in the super chance mode, when the double reach shown in FIG. 235(a) (a variable effect in which the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to a sure jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to a normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state) is executed, there is a risk that the player will easily understand that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change, so in this embodiment, the double reach effect shown in FIG. 235(a) can also be executed in the variable effect executed in response to the second special symbol change. In other words, the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot can be executed in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which a sure jackpot game is always executed when a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, even if the double reach effect shown in Figure 235 (a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily distinguish whether the special pattern change being executed is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, an effect is executed in which the type of third symbol that is in a reach state when the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is changed to the third symbol (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) corresponding to a special jackpot, as shown in FIG. 235(b) (promotion effect to a special double reach).

By configuring it in this way, if the currently running special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the player can be notified in advance that a guaranteed jackpot game will be played. Also, even if a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player can be made to play while expecting that it will be upgraded to a guaranteed double reach midway through.

In this embodiment, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the ongoing double reach effect to a sure-win double reach effect, a variable condition is set that is established when the change pattern of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined pattern (one lap has passed). However, without being limited to this, for example, a variable condition may be set that is established when the third symbol corresponding to the reach state (the third symbol that is the combination that results in a jackpot) as the third symbol displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the reach effective line, or a variable condition may be set that is established when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is a specific operation result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 235(a), the blank symbols (shown as triangles in the figure) may be erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed from the left as the upper symbol row Z1, and "1.2.3" is displayed from the left as the lower symbol row Z3, in order to execute a triple reach effect. Even in this configuration, the triple reach effect can increase the number of reaches of the third symbol corresponding to the special jackpot compared to the double reach effect, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of winning the special jackpot in this special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical concept may be applied to the variable presentation executed during the normal state. For example, when a variable condition is established during a normal single reach presentation in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number attached) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in the reach state, the type of third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of third symbol corresponding to a sure-variable jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. This allows the player to play while expecting a more favorable presentation result to be provided until the variable presentation ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 236, the contents of the presentation executed during the jackpot ending period in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 236(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, FIG. 236(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game, FIG. 236(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, and FIG. 236(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is easily set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than in a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is not easily set. Specifically, it is stipulated that the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds in a high probability jackpot, and 15 seconds in a normal jackpot. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a high probability state will be set during the ending period.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, even if a special jackpot game is being played, the special jackpot state is not set unless the ball that entered the V winning device 2650 is caused to flow down to a specific gate. Therefore, if the ball cannot be caused to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, the special jackpot state is not set after the special jackpot game ends, and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, just like in a normal jackpot game.

In this case, if a notification effect indicating that a probability variable state will be set is executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game, the content of the notification effect will differ from the actual game state that will be set, causing dissatisfaction for the player. Furthermore, if the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game (15 seconds), the length of the actual ending period and the length of the presentation period of the notification effect will differ, resulting in a notification effect that feels strange to the player.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. The presentation mode of the notification presentation executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236, when a normal jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period, a presentation mode (see FIG. 236(a)) is executed in which the words "Chance Mode 100 Times" are displayed during the first half period (8 seconds), indicating that a time-saving state will be set, and then, during the second half period (7 seconds), a presentation mode (see FIG. 236(c)) is executed in which the words "Win and Super Chance GET During Chance Mode" are displayed as a game guide mode to indicate that a probability variable state is likely to be set if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state (if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery).

On the other hand, when a sure-win game is being played, the notification effect executed during the sure-win ending period is a presentation mode in which the words "Super Chance Mode 100 Times" are displayed during the first half period (10 seconds) (see FIG. 236(b)), indicating that a sure-win state will be set, and then, during the second half period (7 seconds), a presentation mode in which the words "Be careful not to forget to take your card" are displayed as a warning effect that is not directly related to the game content (see FIG. 236(d)).

In this embodiment, the presentation mode during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. This eliminates the need to execute the process to determine the presentation mode of the notification presentation every time during the jackpot game, when various control processes are executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the control processes executed during the jackpot game.

Here, we will explain the case where, even though a guaranteed jackpot game has been played, the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the jackpot game. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. 236(b), a process is executed to make the word "Super" invisible, and a process is executed to switch the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the normal jackpot ending period (see FIG. 236(c)).

More specifically, the display mode shown in FIG. 236(a) is different between the display layer (display hierarchical layer) on which the word "Super" is displayed and the display layer (display hierarchical layer) on which the word "100 chance modes" is displayed, and the display instruction for the display layer (display hierarchical layer) on which the word "Super" is displayed can be switched based on the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game by simple control processing. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the latter half of the jackpot ending period, which is set to the same length, the presentation mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In this embodiment, the latter half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period of the same length for all jackpot types, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In addition, if there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all of the jackpot types. For example, the first half of the jackpot period for jackpot type A and jackpot type B may be the same length, and the second half of the jackpot period for jackpot type B and jackpot type C may be the same length.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ending period is set to a different length depending on the type of jackpot won, but the invention is not limited to this and the length of the ending period may be set to vary depending on the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, the relationship between the special symbol variation pattern selected in this embodiment and the performance mode to be executed will be explained. FIG. 237(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol, and FIG. 237(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 242, but in this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that combines a basic time and an added time is defined as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. The period that corresponds to the basic time is defined as a common fluctuation pattern, and the period that corresponds to the added time is defined as a specific fluctuation pattern.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third pattern change presentation executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to show the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to vary the period from when the reach state is displayed until the third pattern is stopped and displayed depending on the type of third pattern that will be in the reach state. The third pattern that corresponds to the time set as the added time is set as the third pattern that will be in the reach state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the third pattern change presentation (the third pattern change presentation that is executed in accordance with the basic time) that is executed during the specified period from when the third pattern starts to change.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237(a), in the case of a non-reach variation presentation, since no additional time is set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper pattern row Z1 is displayed stationary when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the third pattern variation presentation (for example, when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later the lower pattern row Z3 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which a reach state does not occur on the active line, and two seconds later the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which the lottery result is a miss. After that, after a one-second display period (determination time), the lottery result of the special pattern selection is displayed as a definite result.

As shown in FIG. 237(b), when a reach variation presentation is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until 5 seconds have elapsed is set as the common variation pattern for 30 seconds. In other words, the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the presentation mode (reach pattern, stopping symbol) according to the added time is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 238, the presentation mode of the ending presentation executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 238(a) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot, FIG. 238(b) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot, and FIG. 238(c) shows the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific gate during a special jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 238, in this embodiment, the ending period (ED period) is different for normal jackpots and special jackpots, with the ED period being set to 15 seconds for normal jackpots and 17 seconds for special jackpots. The ending display mode is then configured to be displayed in a manner that is divided into a first half period and a second half period (see Figure 236).

In this embodiment, the presentation mode for the ending period is set at the start of the jackpot game, and whether or not a V has been won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined at the start of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the result of this determination.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 239 to Fig. 245. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202 and a part of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110, and a part of the ROM 222 and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 239 to Fig. 242. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 239(a). Fig. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in Figure 239 (a), the ROM 202 of this embodiment differs from the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment (see Figure 116) in that a special pattern jackpot random number 10 table 202ja is provided instead of the first win random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection 10 table 202jb is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, a normal win random number 10 table 202jc is provided instead of the second win random number table 202b, and a jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db, and in that the small win random number table 202de has been deleted. Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the tenth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that it has a special win random number counter C1 (update range "0-999") that replaces the first win random number counter C1 and has the same functions except for the update range, and a normal win random number counter C5 (update range "0-299") that replaces the second win random number counter C2 and has the same functions except for the update range. The rest of the configuration is the same, so the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions are omitted. Also, as mentioned above, the names of the various counters have been partially changed, but the basic functions are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof and descriptions of the various counters referenced in the various data tables defined in ROM 202 are omitted.

First, the special pattern jackpot random number 10 table 202ja will be explained with reference to FIG. 240(a). FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern jackpot random number 10 table 202ja. This special pattern jackpot random number 10 table 202ja differs from the above-mentioned first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)) in that it defines the type of the special pattern and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined as a winning depending on the probability state of the special pattern.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which the special symbol lottery is executed, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the range of the special win random number counter C1 value "0 to 4" is specified as the jackpot determination value (the value that is determined as a jackpot in the special symbol lottery), and when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the range of the special win random number counter C1 value "0 to 19" is specified as the jackpot determination value. That is, in this tenth embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set and any type of special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/200, and when the high probability state of the special symbol is set and any type of special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/50. In this embodiment, the value of the special win random number counter C1 that determines a jackpot is set to the same value for each special symbol type, but this is not limited to this. A different special win random number counter C1 value may be set to the jackpot determination value for each special symbol type, or the number of values of the special win random number counter C1 that are the jackpot determination value for each special symbol type may be different.

As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the special win random number counter C1 ("0 to 4") that is determined to be a jackpot when a low probability state of the special symbol is set is configured to be the value of the special win random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot even when a high probability state of the special symbol is set. By configuring in this way, in the first pre-reading process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) or the second pre-reading process (see S1764 in FIG. 136) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, when the value of the first win random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot in a low probability state of the special symbol is obtained, it is possible to predict in advance that the winning information contains information that will win a jackpot, without executing a process that determines (predicts) the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. However, without being limited to this, the contents of the special pattern jackpot random number table 202ja may be specified so that at least some or all of the values of the special jackpot random number counter C1 that are determined to be jackpots in a low probability state of the special pattern are not determined to be jackpots in a high probability state of the special pattern. By configuring it in this way, when the same special jackpot random number counter C1 value is obtained, the judgment result can be made different depending on the game state set when the jackpot judgment using the obtained special jackpot random number counter C1 value is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts of obtaining a specific special jackpot random number counter C1 value.

Next, the contents stipulated in the 10 normal win random number table 202jc will be explained with reference to FIG. 240(b). FIG. 240(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 10 normal win random number table 202jc. As shown in FIG. 240(b), this 10 normal win random number table 202jc stipulates that when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, the normal win is set to a range of "0 to 2" for the acquired normal win random number counter C5, and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the normal win is set to a range of "0 to 149" for the acquired normal win random number counter C5.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in a lottery for normal symbols (1/100) is set to a low probability. This makes it possible to make the probability of winning a normal symbol different between the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, the special state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd will be explained with reference to FIG. 241(a). FIG. 241(a) shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd. This jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special pattern, similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 241(a), the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd in this 10th embodiment specifies a 10 table 202jd1 for special 1 jackpot that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a 10 table 202jd2 for special 2 jackpot that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 241(b), the contents stipulated in the 10 table 202jd1 for special 1 jackpot will be explained. FIG. 241(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 10 table 202jd1 for special 1 jackpot. This 10 table 202jd1 for special 1 jackpot is a data table that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(b), the 10th table 202jd1 for the special pattern 1 jackpot in the 10th embodiment specifies two jackpot types, "jackpot A" to "jackpot B", as the jackpot types for the first special pattern (special pattern 1).

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is set to "0-49" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass) a specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the special jackpot game (non-V), the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(b), when the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 99", a "jackpot B" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a normal jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special win counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in "jackpot B", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "15 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but differ in the ease with which the ball can pass through a specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot play, and are configured so that a jackpot play is executed in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot play with "jackpot A" than with "jackpot B." Therefore, "jackpot A" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot B."

Next, referring to FIG. 241(c), the contents stipulated in the 10 table 202jd2 for special jackpot 2 will be explained. FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 10 table 202jd2 for special jackpot 2. This 10 table 202jd2 for special jackpot 2 is a data table that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the 10th table 202jd2 for special pattern 2 jackpot in this 10th embodiment specifies three jackpot types for the second special pattern (special pattern 2): "jackpot C" to "jackpot E."

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is set to the range of "0 to 29" and the jackpot type "jackpot C" is specified to correspond to the jackpot type. This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 4, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass) a specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the special jackpot game (non-V), the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the special win type counter C2 is set to the range of "30 to 69" and the "jackpot D" is set as the jackpot type. This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow down (pass) a specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 40 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot D." Therefore, if a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 40% (40/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the special win type counter C2 is set to the range of "70 to 99" and "jackpot E" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16, a certain jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the certain jackpot counter 203ja is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow down (pass) a specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the certain jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the certain jackpot counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot E" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

In other words, the three jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game differs, with "jackpot E," which results in the most rounds of game, being the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and "jackpot A" being the least advantageous jackpot type for the player.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game will be played, making it a more advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state set after the jackpot game ends than the first special pattern lottery, which has a 50% chance of playing a guaranteed jackpot game. Also, in terms of the number of rounds played during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery has a higher maximum number that can be won, and the second special pattern lottery has a lower minimum number that can be won. Also, the second special pattern lottery has a higher average number of prize balls that can be won.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, and in other respects, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous. Note that, although this embodiment specifies the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241, this is not limited to this, and various jackpot types may be configured to be set based on the same technical ideas as the jackpot types that can be set in each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

Next, referring to FIG. 242, the contents of the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in this tenth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 242(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb. As shown in FIG. 242(a), the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb defines a normal 10 table 202jb1 that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol variation when the normal state is set, and a special variable/time-saving 10 table 202jb2 that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol variation when the special variable state or time-saving state is set.

First, the normal 10 table 202jb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 242(b). FIG. 242(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal 10 table 202jb1. In the normal 10 table 202jb1, various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, the added time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the added time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the added time is "3.5 seconds", when it is "2", the added time is "4 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "4.5 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "5 seconds", when it is "4", the added time is "5.5 seconds", when it is "5", the added time is "6 seconds", and when it is "6", the added time is "6.5 seconds". ", "7" gives an additional time of "7 seconds", "8" gives an additional time of "7.5 seconds", "9-11" gives an additional time of "8 seconds", "12" gives an additional time of "8.5 seconds", "13" gives an additional time of "9 seconds", "14" gives an additional time of "9.5 seconds", "15" gives an additional time of "10 seconds", "16" gives an additional time of "10.5 seconds", "17" gives an additional time of "11 seconds", "18" gives an additional time of "11.5 seconds", and "19" gives an additional time of "12 seconds".

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the addition time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information contained in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) is set based on the information contained in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible to the player when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third pattern (a third pattern with the number 1 added in this embodiment), a reach performance can be executed with various types of third patterns without varying the period from when the variation performance is executed to when the reach state is reached.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a Super (Reach) with a variation time of 43 to 52 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this Super is decided, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of either 13 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this embodiment, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second increments depending on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and as the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the presentation style of the reach presentation can be changed according to the information (number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, if the number of seconds included in the addition command is between 3 and 12 seconds, a normal reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol row Z2 moves around one revolution and then stops) is executed, whereas if the number of seconds is between 13 and 22 seconds, a super reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol row Z2 moves around two revolutions and then stops) is executed.

By configuring in this manner, for example, in a case where a variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during an initial specified period, and then a variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, it is possible to set the period during which the same performance mode is executed based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time), and set the variable performance after the branching based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an added time). Therefore, for example, even if the overall variable time is the same, different variable performances can be easily set on the audio lamp control device 113 side by simply changing the proportion of the variable time that is accounted for by the basic time and the proportion indicated by the added time.

In this embodiment, the basic time (30 seconds) when a normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when a super reach is executed are the same, and the presentation style of the reach presentation is changed according to the length of the variable time set as the added time. However, without being limited to this, the basic time for a normal reach may be set to 30 seconds, and the basic time for a super reach to 40 seconds, and the added time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" only to determine the type of third pattern.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an added time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when SP is determined, a performance is executed in which the variation performance of the third pattern that has once reached the reach state is switched to another variation performance, so even if the type of the third pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible to the player when the reach state is reached is always configured to be a specific third pattern (a third pattern with the number 1 in this embodiment), the display order of the third pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 can be changed in the middle of the variation to correspond to the third pattern that will finally stop without giving the player a sense of incongruity, so there is no need to set the type of the third pattern that will reach the reach state by changing the added time, as in the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this miss is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 8 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Here, if a miss is determined, a fluctuation performance of the third symbol is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss without entering a reach state. Therefore, there is no need to set the added time.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a variation pattern of a reach-miss with a variation time of 33 to 52 seconds is specified. When this reach-miss is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this embodiment, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second units according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and since the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, a detailed description is omitted. In other words, even when the lottery result is a miss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. In addition, when the lottery result is a miss, it is necessary to set the type of the third pattern to be stopped so that the third pattern to be finally stopped is a combination other than that of a jackpot, so that the voice lamp control device 113 performs a correction process so that the third pattern is set to a third pattern that is shifted by one from the setting content of the third pattern type based on the addition command referenced when a win is obtained. This makes it easy to set a presentation mode in which, when a reach miss presentation is executed, the third symbol is displayed stopped near the third symbol that is a jackpot combination (miss stop display).

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command.

Here, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, as described above with reference to FIG. 232(b) to FIG. 234, the variation performance in the chance zone is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating a basic time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating an additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in the normal state, the performance mode of the special variation performance in which the third symbol varies vertically is set as shown in FIG. 232(b). Then, the performance mode in which the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stop display) is set at the timing when the basic time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 233(a). Then, when an addition command indicating an additional time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special miss), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the variation performance is ended.

On the other hand, if an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (if the variation pattern is a special reach), a variation effect is set in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted, as shown in Figure 233 (b) and Figure 234. Note that the detailed presentation mode of the variation effect in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted will be described later with reference to Figure 244.

Next, referring to FIG. 239(b), the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this tenth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 239(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 239(b), the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this tenth embodiment stores a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db, a normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203dc, a first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203dd, a second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203de, a normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a special chance counter 203ja, a jackpot start flag 203jb, a jackpot in progress flag 203jcc, a special chance setting flag 203jd, a special chance passing counter 203je, a winning number counter 203jf, a remaining ball timer flag 203jg, a remaining ball timer 203jh, a special chance valid flag 203ji, a special chance valid timer 203jj, a number of balls dispensed counter 203jk, and other memory area 203z.

In addition, among the various components of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this tenth embodiment, some components with the same names as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given different reference numerals for ease of explanation, but components with the same names and whose detailed explanations are omitted have the same content even if they have different reference numerals.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winning events is stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 draws for special symbols, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the drawing of the special symbols is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this control example, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored in first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4).

The second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db has four reserved areas, similar to the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da. In this second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db, each counter value obtained based on the initial winning into the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter values is the same as that of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). A normal winning random number counter C5 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the counter C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the order of winning is maintained and data corresponding to the winning is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db. Also, data shifting is only performed for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203dd is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the special pattern (first pattern) (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four. The initial value of this first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203dd is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203dd is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203dd (the number of reserved ball counts N1 for the variable display of the first special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command. The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203dd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203dd is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c1 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the reserved ball number display command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special symbol is executed. The value of this second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, just like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of balls through the through gate 67. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has the same content as the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d used in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability change counter 203ja is a counter for indicating the state in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set, and a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set is set. After the end of a jackpot game, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot that was won is set in this probability change counter 203ja (see S2602 in FIG. 253). When a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. In addition, when the value of the probability change counter 203ja is greater than 0, that is, when a high probability state of a special pattern is set, the counter is decremented by 1 each time a special pattern variation is stopped and displayed (see S622 in FIG. 248).

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability counter 203ja is set, and the value of the probability counter 203ja is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the probability counter 203ja becomes 0, the probability state ends and a transition to a time-saving state occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to continue until the next big win game is executed. In this case, the value of the probability counter 203ja may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the probability variation state, that is, the condition for decrementing the value of the probability variation counter 203ja, is set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability variation counter 203ja based on the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja may be configured to be decremented. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja may be configured to be decremented, or when the ball enters a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the special probability counter 203ja is decremented by one, but it may be configured to decrement the value of the special probability counter 203ja multiple times (for example, by 2) in a lump depending on the type of end condition that has been met, or it may be configured to decrement the value of the special probability counter 203ja so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the special probability counter 203ja. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the special probability state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the special probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the high probability state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the high probability state (jackpot type). This allows the player to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game that was played, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The jackpot start flag 203jb is a flag that indicates whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203jb is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203jb is set on when it is time to end the variable display indicating a jackpot. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203jb is set off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S2403 in FIG. 251).

The jackpot flag 203jc is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. When the jackpot flag 203jc is on, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and when it is off, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203jc is set to on when a jackpot is generated by drawing a special symbol and a jackpot (special game state) starts (see S2403 in FIG. 251). It is also set to off when the jackpot (special game state) ends (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Then, in the special symbol change process 10 (see FIG. 247), this jackpot flag 203jc is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S601 in FIG. 247).

The probability change setting flag 203jd is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state after a big win game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a ball has entered (flowed down) a specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during a big win game. Here, when it is detected that a ball has entered (flowed down) this specific gate (passing through the probability change switch provided in the specific gate), the probability change setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715 in FIG. 254). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203jd is set to OFF at the end of the big win (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Note that this probability change setting flag 203jd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is in an initialized state.

If the special chance setting flag 203jd is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance switch was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance switch was passed, the special chance setting flag 203jd may be set to on and restored. In this case, whether the special chance switch was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203m, which will be described later, is a value greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203jd to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming establishment.

The special chance passing counter 203je is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the special chance switch (flowed down a specific gate) during one round (five rounds of the special chance in this embodiment) during a jackpot game. The sum of the special chance passing counter 203je and the discharge number counter 203jk described later can be used to determine whether all game balls that have entered the specific winning port 2650a of the V winning device 2650 have been discharged. The special chance passing counter 203je is updated by adding one each time a ball passes through the special chance switch (flows down a specific gate). After executing a process to determine whether the number of balls that have entered the V winning device 2650 matches the number of balls discharged, the counter is reset to the initial value "0". The special chance passing counter 203je is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, the counter is set to 0 when initialized.

The winning number counter 203jf is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning port 2650a of the V winning device 2650 in one round of a jackpot game, and is updated by incrementing by one when a winning ball has been detected in the specific winning port 2650a. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is reset to the initial value "0" after determining whether the number of balls that have won in the V winning device 2650 (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) and the number of balls that have been dispensed (the total value of the dispense number counter 203jk and the special chance passing counter 203je) match. The value of this winning number counter 203jf is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203jg is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball discharge period after one round has ended and the specific winning port 2650a has closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to on, it means that it is the ball discharge period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning port 2650a was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203jh is a counter for determining whether the time required for the winning balls in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged has elapsed when a preset round ends and the specific winning port 2650a of the V winning device 2650 is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning balls in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203jh. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203jh (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the V winning device 2650 and the number of balls discharged match. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are stuck in the V winning device 2650.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203jd may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability state from being improperly granted.

The high probability activation flag 203ji is a flag for determining whether or not a game ball is to be considered valid when it passes through the high probability activation switch (enters the V area) after the distribution member has switched to a configuration in which it is not possible to distribute the ball to a specific gate. When this high probability activation flag 203ji is set to on, it indicates that it is normal for the game ball to pass through the high probability activation switch.

The special chance valid timer 203jj is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203ji described above is set to ON. This special chance valid timer 203jj makes it possible to determine the period required for a game ball to pass through the special chance switch normally after the V role is switched to the non-V side arrangement. In this embodiment, the time required for a game ball that has reached the V role to pass through the special chance switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the special chance valid timer 203jj is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the game ball passes through the special chance switch after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as illegally throwing a game ball into the V area and passing it through the probability change switch, or pushing the game ball up from below the probability change switch with a piano wire or the like and causing the magnetic sensor to mistakenly detect that the ball has passed through by using radio waves or the like.

The dispensed ball counter 203jk is a counter for counting the number of game balls dispensed from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This dispensed ball counter 203jk is reset to its initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dispensed balls.

Next, referring to FIG. 243 to FIG. 245, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 243(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above is different in that a normal special chart 2 performance selection table 222ja and a special performance selection table 222jb are added to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and the operation scenario table 222b are changed to correspond to the present embodiment. Note that the detailed description of the changes in the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and the operation scenario table 222b will be omitted, but various values associated with the changes in the main control device 110 have been changed.

First, the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222ja will be explained with reference to FIG. 244. FIG. 244 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222ja. This normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222ja is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the third symbol when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are specified in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, a common miss reach effect is executed in correspondence with the base time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 233(a)), and then a pseudo variation effect (see FIG. 233(b) to 234) is executed during the added time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected by referring to the normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222ja.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 79" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3 effect" and a range of "80 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 89" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 1 effect" and a range of "90 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 4 effect."

In addition, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, a "special end effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 1 to 4, and a "pseudo none effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 0.

If the lottery result is a miss, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 3 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 2 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 1 effect", and if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, "no pseudo effect" is specified.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when setting the presentation mode of the pseudo-variable presentation of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the reserved number of special symbols 2 and the reserved number of special symbols 1 is determined, and the pseudo-variable presentation is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to think that the pseudo-variable presentation executed during one special symbol variation period is a variation presentation corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Furthermore, since the number of pseudo fluctuations (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) executed in the pseudo fluctuation performance is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special symbols 2 already acquired, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state have been used. Therefore, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a jackpot is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that he or she has won a jackpot as a result of acquiring many reserved special symbols 2 during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state. Also, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a miss is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 have been used up, and then a fluctuation performance using the reserved special symbols 2 is executed (as the chance zone continues), so it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

In addition, this embodiment has pseudo-variation effects (special pseudo 2 effect, pseudo 4 effect) that are set only when a jackpot is won, so players can be interested in the number of pseudo-variations executed in the pseudo-variation effects and the number of reserved special charts 2.

Next, the contents of the special chance effect selection table 222jb will be explained with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chance effect selection table 222jb. This special chance effect selection table 222jb is a data table that is referenced when setting the special effect when a variation pattern with a base time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the special chance state.

As shown in FIG. 245, different presentation modes are defined according to the type of special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the presentation counter 223f. Specifically, if the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a guaranteed jackpot, then a "guaranteed single reach" is defined for a range of "0-49" for the presentation counter 223f value, and a "double reach" is defined for a range of "50-99." If the jackpot is a regular jackpot, then a "double reach" is defined, and if it is a miss, then a "non-reach" is defined.

In addition, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a jackpot, a "special double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 49" on the performance counter 223f, and a "double reach" is set in the range of "50 to 99". If the result is a miss, a "double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 4" on the performance counter 223f, a "double reach" is set in the range of "5 to 10", and a "non-reach" is set in the range of "11 to 99".

By configuring it in this way, whether the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variable state or the second special symbol lottery is executed, a "double reach" (a reach effect in which two or more third symbols, including the third symbol corresponding to a normal win, are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 235(a)) will be executed, making it difficult for the player to tell which third symbol change effect is being executed corresponding to which special symbol lottery when a "double reach" is executed.

When "special double reach" is set, the presentation mode of "double reach" is set first, and then a reach presentation is executed in which the presentation mode changes to "probable double reach" as shown in FIG. 235(b). Therefore, even if "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, the player can play the game while expecting it to be upgraded to "probable double reach" midway through. Note that in this "special double reach", the timing at which the presentation mode of the reach presentation changes is when the middle symbol row Z2 has completed one or two revolutions, but this is not limited to this, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 22.

Next, referring to FIG. 246, the flow of the game in this tenth embodiment will be briefly explained. FIG. 246 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the game in this tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 246, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to set three game states as game states: normal state, special probability state, and time-saving state. In the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and in the special probability state and time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery.

If the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state results in a jackpot (jackpot probability 1/200), then there is a 1/2 chance that a normal jackpot game or a special jackpot game will be played, and if the ball flows down to a specific gate during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a special jackpot state, and if the ball does not flow down to the specific gate, the game will transition to a time-saving state.

The probability variable state is configured to continue until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed or a jackpot is won, and if 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed without a jackpot being won during the probability variable state, the state transitions to a time-saving state. This time-saving state is configured to continue from the end of a jackpot game until 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed; for example, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the number of time-saving times will be 100, and if the probability variable state transitions to the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times will be 50.

<Regarding control process of main control device in tenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 247 to FIG. 255. In the tenth embodiment, as described above, in a state in which both the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. During the jackpot game, a ball is caused to flow down to a specific gate arranged in the V winning device 2650, so that a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. This differs from each of the above-mentioned embodiments in that, as an end condition for ending the probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, an end condition is set when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in addition to the end condition that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

And, in order to configure a pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned differences, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are configured to execute special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247), normal symbol variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249), through gate passing process (see S157 in FIG. 250), and big win control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251), which will be described later. The other control contents are the same as any of the control process contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 247, the special pattern change process 10 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process 10 (S154). This special pattern change process 10 (S154) is executed during timer interrupt processing, and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37, the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process 10 (S154), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is currently in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (S601). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203jc is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol is currently in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of S601, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is not in progress) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S602: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (the number of reserved variable display times N2 based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is decremented by 1 (S605), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de changed by the calculation is set (S606). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 corresponding to the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved ball number counters 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S606, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted (S607). In the process of S607, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and then the process proceeds to S608.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203de is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203dd (the number of reserved variable display times N1 based on the lottery of the first special pattern) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S609).

In the process of S609, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is 0 (S609: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S609: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 603dd is decremented by 1 (S610), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd changed by the calculation is set (S611). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203dd from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c1, which corresponds to the second special pattern, among the special pattern reserved ball count counters 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S611, the data stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted by the same method as the process of S607 (S612), and the process proceeds to the process of S608. In the process of S608 executed after the process of S607 or S612, a special pattern change start process for starting the change display in the first pattern display device 37 is executed (S608), and this process ends. In this special pattern change start process, a process for determining the lottery result of the special pattern is executed similarly to the special pattern big win determination process (see S306 in FIG. 41) executed in the special pattern change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above, and a process for selecting the change pattern of the special pattern change is executed similarly to the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 41).

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S602: Yes), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S614). In the process of S614, the value of the change time counter for measuring the change time of the special pattern is updated, and the display of the first pattern display device 81 is updated corresponding to the value of the change time counter after the update. In this change time counter, a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern change start process (S608) is set at the start timing of the special pattern change, and thereafter, it is updated (decremented) each time the process of S614 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S613 that the change time has elapsed (S613: Yes), that is, if the value of the change time counter updated in the process of S614 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S615). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern change start process (S608). When this special symbol variation start process (S608) is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been won is determined based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if a special symbol jackpot has been won, one of the jackpots A to E is determined based on the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, in the case of jackpot A, the blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37, in the case of jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, in the case of jackpot C, the green LED is turned on, and in the case of jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, in the case of a miss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that the LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of S615 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process is a special symbol jackpot (S616). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S616: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to ON (S617), the time reduction counter 203h and the probability change counter 203ja are cleared (set to 0) (S618), and the process proceeds to S619. When the jackpot start flag is set to ON by the process of S617, if the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process branches to S2401: Yes and an opening command is set (S2402). As a result, the jackpot performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S616, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special symbol (S616: No), the processes of S617 and S618 are skipped, and the update process is executed (S620), and then the process proceeds to S619.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process described below executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it obtains the game status contained in the status command. This allows the status grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to match the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 248, the contents of the update process (S620 in FIG. 247) executed in the special pattern change process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247) will be explained. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S620). This update process (S620) is a process that is executed when the change time of the special pattern change has elapsed (when the change stops), and processes are executed to update the remaining period of the period during which the high probability change state is set to continue and to update the remaining period of the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process (S620) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the special chance counter 203ja is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is one with a high probability of a special symbol (S621). If it is determined that the value of the special chance counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the value of the special chance counter 203ja is decremented by 1 (updated) (S622). Next, it is determined whether the updated value of the special chance counter 203ja is 0 (S623). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S623: Yes), a time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. Also, if it is determined in the process of S621 that the value of the probability change counter 203ja is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S621; No), the current state is not one with a high probability of a special symbol, so the process skips the above-mentioned processes of S622 to S624 for updating the value of the probability change counter 203ja and moves to the process of S625.

In addition, in the process of S623, if the value of the special chance counter 203ja is not 0, that is, if the value of the special chance counter 203ja is greater than 0 and the special chance state (high probability state of special symbols) continues, the process of S624 is skipped and the process proceeds to S625.

In the process of S625, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, i.e., if the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S625: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S626), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the decrement is 0 (S627). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 in the process of S627, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S628), and the value of the probability change counter 203ja, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the current game state are set (S629), and this process ends. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S625 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S625: No), or if it is determined in the process of S627 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S627: No), the process proceeds directly to S629.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol change process 10 (S166) will be described with reference to FIG. 249. This normal symbol change process 10 (S166) executes various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (processing to execute the normal symbol change, processing to set the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, processing to update the normal symbol change being executed, processing to stop the normal symbol change, processing to determine the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win), and differs from the normal symbol change process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) in that the contents of the process to select the change time of the normal symbol and the process to determine the game content of the normal symbol winning game have been partially changed, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

When normal symbol change process 10 (S166) is executed, first, the same processes of S1101 to S1113 as those of the normal symbol change process described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed. After that, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is referenced to determine whether the current game state is in time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbol) (S1161), and if it is determined that it is in time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbol) (S1161: Yes), the normal symbol change time is set to 3 seconds (S1162), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbol) in the process of S1161 (S1161: No), the normal symbol change time is set to 10 seconds (S1163), and this process is terminated.

In addition, the process of S1115 to S1118, which is the same as the normal symbol variation process described above (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed, and it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S1118). If it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S1118: Yes), the game content of the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric device 640 for 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) (S1165), the process of S1121 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) in the process of S1118 (S1118: No), the game content of the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric device 640 for 5 seconds x 1 time (opening operation) (S1164), the process of S1121 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol is lower in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 240(b)), and the normal symbol variation time is set to be longer, but the period during which the electric device 640 is opened in the normal symbol winning game that is executed when a winning is won is longer. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 when a normal symbol winning is won with a low probability in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). In addition, since it is possible to easily obtain the maximum number (4) of special symbol 2 reservations during one normal symbol winning game, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery multiple times in the chance zone (see FIG. 233(b)), and the fun of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (see S157) will be described with reference to FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S157). This through gate passing process (see S157) differs from the through gate passing process of the first embodiment described above (see S107 in FIG. 49) in that a process has been added to obtain the lottery result (the win/loss judgment result) in advance using the obtained value of the normal win random number counter C5 before the actual win/loss judgment is executed (before the win/loss judgment (see S1111) is executed in the normal pattern variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249)), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the through gate passing process (see S157) is executed, first, the processes S1201 to S1205 are executed, which are the same as the through gate passing process of the first embodiment described above (see S107 in FIG. 49), and then the lottery result is obtained in advance based on the normal win random number 10 table 202jc (S1211), a normal winning information command including the normal win determination result (the advance determination result obtained in the process of S1211) is set (S1212), and this process is terminated.

The winning information command for the normal symbol set in the process of S1212 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the result of the advance determination of the special symbol set in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right for the normal symbol stored in reserve, and to execute a performance based on the advance determination result.

Specifically, in a state where the chance zone is set, that is, in a state where the second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the execution of a normal symbol winning game during the normal state, if the received normal symbol winning information command contains information indicating a winning of the normal symbol, it is possible to execute an effect that continues the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed. In this case, even if all the second special symbol lotteries are completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal symbol winning game is executed, it is preferable to configure the variable effect executed in response to the first special symbol lottery to be set to a performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 232(b)), rather than a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 231(b)). By configuring in this way, when multiple normal symbol winning games are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the chance zone does not end despite the second special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player can understand that the next regular winning game will be executed soon, so the player can be interested in the number of second special symbol lotteries executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this embodiment, a pseudo-variable effect is executed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped multiple times as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone is in an extended period.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074) will be explained with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074). This jackpot control process 10 (S1074) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110, and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 2650a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 10 (S1074), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203jb is on or not (S2401). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401: Yes), the opening command for the jackpot is set (S2402), the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203jc is set to on (S2403), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is off in the process of S2401 (S2401: No), it is next determined whether or not the special pattern jackpot is currently in progress (i.e., whether the jackpot in progress flag 203jc is on) (S2404). If it is determined that the jackpot is not currently in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203jc is off) in the process of S2404 (S2404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2404 that a jackpot is currently occurring (the jackpot flag 203jc is on) (S2404: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S2405).

If it is determined in the process of S2405 that it is time to start a new round (S2405: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 2650a according to the number of rounds (S2406), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2405: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S2407). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S2407: Yes), an ending command is set (S2408) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, an ending performance (see FIG. 236) indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2407 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S2407: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2409 that the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S2410), and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 253. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2409 that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2409: No), a winning process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning port 2650a is executed (S2411), an abnormality process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 2650a was discharged normally is executed (S2412), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254 and FIG. 255.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2406) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S2406). This jackpot operation setting process (S2406) is executed during the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 2650a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252) starts, it is first determined whether it is time to start the 5th round (S2501). If it is determined in the process of S2501 that it is time to start the 5th round (S2501: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V role (flow path solenoid (high probability solenoid)) 65k is set (S2502), and the opening pattern of the specific winning port 2650a corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S2503).

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this embodiment, among the round games executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (the fifth round) is made different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (a sure-win jackpot), a round game that operates the V-type device to make it easier for the ball to flow down to a specific gate is executed as the fifth round of the round game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to a specific gate only during a specific period of time during a jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, so that the player can play the game during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In this embodiment, when the fifth round of a jackpot game with a high probability of winning is executed, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the characters "Aim for V" as a notification mode to inform the player that this is a chance period for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of a specific period of the jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time when it is easy to make the ball flow down to a specific gate. Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific gate, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the characters "VGET" as a notification mode to inform the player that the ball has flowed down the specific gate. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the fact that the conditions for setting a high probability of winning after the jackpot game ends have been met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be changed depending on whether a condition is met. For example, the color of the text "Aim for V" may be changed based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which it is easy to make the ball flow down to a specific gate, or the remaining time, or the size of the display area may be changed, or the text may be changed to something more emphatic (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). This makes it possible to prevent situations in which the player does not fire the ball in a situation in which it is easy to make the ball flow down to a specific gate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation pattern of the V-type device for switching the flow path of the balls that have won into the V-winning device 2650 can be changed to set periods during which the balls are likely to flow down to a specific gate and periods during which they are unlikely to flow down to a specific gate. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it is also possible to configure the V-type device to operate with a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and vary the timing at which the specific winning port 2650a opens depending on the type of jackpot, thereby making it possible to set periods during which the balls are likely to flow down to a specific gate and periods during which they are unlikely to flow down to a specific gate. This allows the operation pattern of the V-type device to be standardized, making it less likely for the V-type device to break down.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the current round is not the fifth round (S2501: No), the processes of S2502 and S2503 are skipped, the normal opening of the specific winning port 2650a is set (S2504), and the process proceeds to S2505. In the process of S2505, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S2505), and the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to update the display content of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252), the specific winning port 2650a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow path 2665e2 can be set to pass through in the fifth round. As a result, in jackpots A, C to E, the player can simply shoot the ball in the fifth round, and the ball will almost certainly pass through the specific gate (probability change switch 2665e3), so a probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot ends.

Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S2410) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S2410). This jackpot end process (S2410) is executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S2410), first it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203jd is on (S2601). If it is determined in the process of S2601 that the special chance setting flag 203jd is on (S2601: Yes), this means that the ball passed a specific yard (special chance setting switch 2650e3) during the jackpot, so the value of the special chance counter 203ja is set to 50 (S2602) and processing proceeds to S2603. On the other hand, if the special chance setting flag 203jd is off in the process of S2601 (S2601: No), processing of S2602 is skipped and processing proceeds to S2603.

In the process of S2603, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2603), and then a state command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203ja (S2604). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it updates the slave state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203jc and the probability change setting flag 203jd are set to OFF (S2605), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 253), the game state after the jackpot end can be set accurately depending on whether or not the ball passed through a specific gate (high probability switch 2665e3) during the jackpot game.

Next, the details of the winning process (S2411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S2411). This winning process (S2411) is executed within the big win control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for carrying out control in response to a win at a specific winning port 2650a.

In this winning process (S2411), first, it is determined whether the current time is the valid round period (S2701). Here, the valid round period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning port 2650a is opened until the end of the interval period. In the process of S2701, if the current time is not the valid round period (S2701: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current time is the valid period of the round (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning entry into the specific winning opening 2650a has been detected (S2702), and if a winning entry into the specific winning opening 2650a has been detected (S2702: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203jf is updated by adding 1 (S2703), a winning command indicating that a winning entry into the specific winning opening 2650a has been detected is set (S2704), and the process proceeds to S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2702 that a winning entry into the specific winning opening 2650a has not been detected (S2702: No), the processes of S2703 and S2704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2705.

In the process of S2705, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705), and if the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. On the other hand, in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 9 or less (S2705: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2706), and if the round time has elapsed (S2706: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. In the process of S2706, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round of play for the current jackpot. In this embodiment, the end conditions for the round game are met by the same round time elapse and number of winnings regardless of the type of jackpot or number of rounds, but this is not limited to the above, and the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the type of jackpot, or the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the number of rounds played.

In the process of S2707, the specific winning port 2650a is set to be closed (S2707), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning port 2650a has been set to be closed is set (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific winning port 2650a is due to the end of 5 rounds (S2709), and if it is determined that the current closing is due to the end of 5 rounds (S2709: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 2665k is set to off (S2710), and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the current closing of the specific winning port 2650a is due to the end of a round other than 5 rounds (S2709: No), since the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 2665k is not set to on, the process of S2710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2712.

In the process of S2711, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg, the special chance active flag 203ji, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712. Also, if the value of the winning number counter is determined to be 9 or less in the process of S2705 (S2705: No), and if it is determined in the process of S2706 that the round time has not elapsed (S2706: No), the processes of S2707 to S2711 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2712.

In the process of S2712, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2712), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2712: No), the process proceeds to S2713. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2712 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2712: Yes), it is then determined whether the special chance active flag 203ji is on (S2716). In the process of S2716, if the special chance active flag 203ji is off (S2716: No), the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special chance effective flag 203ji is on (S2716: No), 1 is added to the value of the special chance effective timer 203jj (S2717), and then it is determined whether the value of the special chance effective timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2718). If the value of the special chance effective timer 203jj is not the upper limit value (S2718: No), the process proceeds to S2713, where the special chance effective switch 2665e3 is monitored and a process for updating the special chance setting flag 203jd is executed. As a result, if the special chance effective timer 203jj is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the special chance effective switch 2665e3, and the special chance effective state can be set taking into account the time for the ball to be cleared. Also, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the special chance effective state from being improperly granted by passing a ball through the special chance effective switch 2665e3.

On the other hand, if the value of the special chance effective timer 203jj is the upper limit (S2718: Yes), the special chance effective flag 203ji and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2719), the value of the special chance effective timer 203jj is reset (S2720), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the special chance switch 2665e3 (S2713), and if the ball has not passed through the special chance switch 2665e3 (S2713: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the special chance switch 2665e3 (S2713: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance passage counter 203je (S2714), the special chance setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715), and this process ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S2412) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S2412). This abnormality processing (S2412) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 2650a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality processing (S2412), first, it is determined whether the current time is the valid period for the round (S2801), and if it is not the valid period for the round (S2801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the valid period for the round (S2801: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (see FIG. 196) (S2802).

If it is determined in the process of S2802 that the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203jk is incremented by 1 (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2802 that the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: No), the process skips S2803 and proceeds to S2804.

In the process of S2804, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is on (S2804). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is off (S2804: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is on (S2804: Yes), since it is the ball removal period, the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is updated by adding 1 (S2805). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is not the upper limit value (S2806: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit (S2806: Yes), it then determines whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the value of the special chance passing counter 203je and the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203jk) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203jf) (S2807).

If it is determined in the process of S2807 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S2807: No), an error command is set (S2808) and the process proceeds to S2809. When the error command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, the text "Number of winning balls does not match" is displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior such as illegally putting a ball into the special discharge flow path 2650e2 and passing it through the special variable switch 2650e3 while the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2807 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S2807: Yes), the process of S2808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2809. In the process of S2809, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to OFF (S2809), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is reset (S2810). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203jf, the dispensed number counter 203jk, and the special chance passing counter 203je are each reset (S2811), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 255), it is possible to detect and notify early on of the occurrence of a malfunction in which a ball that has entered a specific winning port 2650a is not discharged normally due to a ball becoming clogged inside the V winning device 2650, etc.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 256 to Fig. 263. The tenth embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment described above in that the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in Fig. 183) is replaced by the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in Fig. 256), and the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in Fig. 187) is replaced by the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in Fig. 261), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination process 10 (see S4193) will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 10 (see S4193). When this command determination process 10 (see S4193) is executed, the same processes of S4231 to S4208 as those of command determination process 7 of the seventh embodiment described above (see S4192 in FIG. 183) are executed.

Then, in the process of S4208, if it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (S4208: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c (first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c1, second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c2) and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223ja (S4291), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S4208: No), it is then determined whether a winning command (winning information command) has been received (S4210), and if it is determined that a winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), winning command process 10 is executed (S4292) and this process is terminated. The details of winning command process 10 (S4292) will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

If it is determined in the process of S4210 that a winning command (winning information command) has not been received (S4210: No), it is then determined whether a stop command has been received (S4293). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S4293: Yes), the stop display of the third pattern is set (S4294), and this process ends. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S4293: No), it is then determined whether a normal map-related command has been received (S4216). If it is determined that a normal map-related command has been received (S4216: Yes), normal map-related process 10 is executed (S4295), and then this process ends. A detailed explanation of normal map-related process 10 (S4295) will be described later with reference to FIG. 258.

If it is determined in the processing of S4216 that a normal map-related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S4296). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4296: Yes), jackpot-related process 10 is executed (S4297), and then this processing ends. A detailed explanation of jackpot-related process 10 (S4297) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4296: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 257, the contents of winning command process 10 (see S4292) executed in command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning command process 10 (S4292). This winning command process 10 (S4292) is a process executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from main control device 110 when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a regular symbol winning information command is set when the right to draw a regular symbol is acquired, or a V winning command is received when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (high probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process 10 (S4292) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information memory area) 223b (S4401), and it is determined whether the currently received command is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4441). If it is determined that it is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4441: Yes), it is determined whether the received command contains winning information (winning information for a normal symbol) (S4442). If it is determined that there is winning information (S4442: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state for a normal symbol (S4443).

If it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state for normal symbols, that is, the normal state (S4443: No), the player has acquired the right to draw a normal symbol lottery that will win a normal symbol during the normal state, and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, so a display command is set to suggest that the electric chute will be opened for a long time (S4444), and the process proceeds to S4445. When a display command is set in the process of S4444, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control content as the various display commands set in the control process of the other sound lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect (for example, an effect that teases whether or not a small display area Dm3 will be formed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed, suggesting that a normal symbol hit game will be played during the normal state and the electric role 640 will be opened for a long time (open for 5 seconds).

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestive effects are executed only when the player acquires the right to draw a normal symbol lottery that will result in a normal symbol win during normal mode. However, without being limited to this, it is also preferable to execute the above-mentioned suggestive effects when it is determined that the normal symbol winning information command contains winning information indicating a specific miss win. This makes it possible to set whether a normal symbol winning game will be executed when the suggestive effects are executed, or not, allowing the player to play while predicting the game content to be executed in the future.

In addition, in this embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed when the player acquires the right to draw a normal symbol lottery that will win a normal symbol during the normal state. In addition to this configuration, a pre-game state process may be executed to determine whether the game state is normal or not at the time when the game actually plays a normal symbol win, that is, the time when the game corresponding to the normal symbol winning information command that indicates a normal symbol win is executed (the time when the game plays a normal symbol win), based on the pre-determination result of the special symbol lottery being executed or the special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and if it is determined to be normal, the suggestive effect described above is executed. This makes it possible to more accurately indicate that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 257 for further explanation, if the process of S4441 determines that a winning information command for normal maps has not been received (S4441: No), if the process of S4442 determines that there is no winning information (S4442: No), or if the process of S4443 determines that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4443: Yes), the process also moves to S4445.

In the process of S4445, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2791) that is set when the ball flows down to the sure win switch (specific gate) during the winning process (see S2411 in FIG. 254)) (S4445), and if it is a V winning command (S4445: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to on (S4446), other processes are executed (S4412), and this process ends. Also, in the process of S4445, if it is determined that a V winning command has not been received (S4445: No), S4446 is skipped and S4412 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 258, the contents of the normal symbol related process 10 (S4295) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol related process 10 (S4295). This normal symbol related process 10 (S4295) is a process executed when a normal symbol variation pattern command indicating that a normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a normal symbol win start command indicating that a normal symbol win game has started, or a normal symbol win end command indicating that a normal symbol win game has ended is received.

When the normal map related process 10 (S4295) is executed, first, it is determined whether a normal map variation pattern command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4701: Yes), a display normal map variation start command is set (S4702), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the normal pattern is in a high probability state (S4781). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4781: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4781: No), it is determined whether the normal map variation pattern command received this time is a normal map variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has won the normal map (S4782), and if it is determined that the normal map has not won (S4782: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a normal winning has been won (S4782: Yes), since this is a normal winning variation that results in a long opening winning, a display command indicating that a long opening is waiting is set (S4783), and this process ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4783, the display mode shown in FIG. 231(b) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set soon.

In this embodiment, a process is used to display the display mode shown in FIG. 231(b) (the display mode that forms the small display area Dm3) based on whether or not the normal pattern variation is a winning variation. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to display the display mode shown in FIG. 231(b) (the display mode that forms the small display area Dm3) for a specific normal pattern miss variation (for example, a part of a normal pattern miss variation in which the same variation time as a normal pattern winning variation is set).

The size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied depending on the content of the variation effect (third pattern variation effect) corresponding to the currently executed special pattern variation. For example, when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is being executed in the third pattern variation effect, the display content may be varied so that the display area of the small display area Dm3 is smaller than when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is not being executed. In this way, by variably controlling the display content by providing a relationship between the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by being provided with too much game information, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 258, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the normal pattern variation command has not been received (S4701: No), then it is determined whether a normal pattern win start command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that a normal pattern win start command has been received (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4784). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4784: No), a display command indicating that a long opening is in progress is set (S4785), and this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4785, the display mode shown in FIG. 232(a) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that a long opening win is being executed. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4784 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4784: Yes), the process of S4785 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In the process of S4703, if it is determined that a normal winning start command has not been received (S4703: No), it is determined whether a normal winning end command has been received (S4709). If it is determined that it has been received (S4709: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4786). If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4786: No), it is then determined whether the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 223ja is 1 or greater (S4787). If it is determined that it is 1 or greater (S4787: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in progress flag 223jb is set on (S4788). If it is determined that it is not set on (S4788: No), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S4789), the special effect in progress flag 223jb is set off (S4790), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the process of steps S4786 to S4788 determines that the determination result is other than the above-mentioned determination results, the process ends.

Next, the contents of jackpot related process 10 (S4297) will be explained with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related process 10 (S4297). In jackpot related process 10 (S4297), processing is performed to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute a presentation display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). The jackpot start command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4981), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4981: Yes), an ending display mode is set indicating that a chance mode has been entered (a time-saving state is set) (S4982), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4981: No), that is, if it is determined to be a special jackpot, an ending display mode is set indicating that a super chance mode has been entered (a special jackpot state is set) (S4983), and this process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 241, different lengths of ending periods are set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game starts. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information indicating the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information indicating the number of rounds being played) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls won into the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, so the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this embodiment, the process for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol when it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, or may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game period when there is little control processing.

If it is determined in the process of S4901 that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4913). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4914), and it is determined whether the current round number is 5 rounds (V rounds) (S4984). If it is determined that the current round number is 5 rounds (V rounds) (S4984: Yes), a display command informing of a V win is set (S4985), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4984 that the current round number is not 5 rounds (V rounds), that is, a round play other than the 5th round will start (S4984: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round count command has not been received (S4913: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S4986), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4986: Yes), ending process 10 is executed (S4987), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4986 that the ending command has not been received (S4986: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S4915), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4915: Yes), jackpot end process is executed (S4916), and then this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4915 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing of Ending Process 10 (S4987) will be explained with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing the contents of Ending Process 10 (S4987). This Ending Process 10 (S4987) is a process that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 10 described above (see S4297 in FIG. 259), and executes a process for finally determining the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When Ending Process 10 (S4987) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4991: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to OFF (S4992), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4995), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4991 that the V winning flag 223jc is not set to ON (S4991: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a special jackpot (S4993), and if it is determined that it is not a special jackpot (it is a normal jackpot) (S4993: No), the process proceeds directly to S4995.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4993 that it is a guaranteed jackpot (S4993: Yes), a display switch command is set to switch the display mode for the latter half (7 seconds) of the ending period (S4994), and the process proceeds to S4995.

When a display switching command is set in the processing of S4994, a notification is sent to the display control device 114, and processing is executed to switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending period, which was previously set in response to the setting of a high probability state (see FIG. 236(d)), to a display mode corresponding to the setting of a time-saving state (see FIG. 236(c)). In this embodiment, the display period for the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183). This variable display setting process 10 (S4183) differs from the variable display setting process 7 of the seventh embodiment described above (see S4153 in FIG. 187) in that it executes the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S5251) instead of the performance mode setting process (S5232), and executes the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (S5252) instead of the variable display setting process 7 for special chart 2 (S5237). It also differs in that the process of decrementing the value of the fluctuation count counter (S5231, S5235 in FIG. 187) has been deleted. Other processes are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 10S (S5251) will be explained with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 10S (S5251). This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 10S (S5251) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a variable state based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S8251). If it is determined that the game is not in a guaranteed bonus state (it is in a normal state or time-saving state) (S8251: No), the game determines the performance mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (for example, a performance mode that stops without reaching the target after the third pattern fluctuation has started, or a performance mode from the start of the third pattern fluctuation until the target state has been reached and 5 seconds have passed), that is, a performance mode corresponding to a period during which a common performance mode can be executed regardless of the stopped pattern of the third pattern (S8252), and then determines the performance mode corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (for example, a performance mode corresponding to the period from the time the target state has been reached until the third pattern is stopped and displayed 5 seconds later), that is, a performance mode for a period that is variable in accordance with the stopped pattern of the third pattern (S8253), and then proceeds to the processing of S8257 described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8251 that the game is in a high probability state (S8251: Yes), the game time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the game pattern command is extracted (S8254), and it is determined whether the basic game time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S8255). Here, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242(c), when the first special symbol lottery is executed in a high probability state, a game pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is always selected in the event of a jackpot win, and a game pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected in approximately 90% of the cases in which a jackpot win occurs.

If it is determined in the process of S8255 that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8255: Yes), the performance mode (performance content) is determined based on the special bonus performance selection table 222jb (S8256), a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S8257), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8255: No), the processes of S8252 and S8253 described above are executed, and then S8257 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 10 (S5252) will be explained with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 10 (S5252). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed, first it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S8261), and if it is determined to be normal (S8261: Yes), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S8262), then the special presentation in progress flag 223jb is set to on (S8263), the presentation mode is determined based on the normal special chart 2 presentation selection table 222ja (S8264), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S8265), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8261 that the game is not in a normal state (S8261: No), it is next determined whether the current game state is in a high probability state (S8266). If it is determined that the game is not in a high probability state (S8266: No), the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, a presentation mode that stops without reaching the target after the third pattern variation has started, or a presentation mode from the start of the third pattern variation until the target state has been reached and 5 seconds have passed), that is, a presentation mode corresponding to a period in which a common presentation mode can be executed regardless of the stopped pattern of the third pattern, is determined (S8267), and then the presentation mode corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command (for example, a presentation mode corresponding to the period from the time the target state has been reached until the third pattern is stopped and displayed after 5 seconds have passed), that is, a presentation mode for a period that is variable in accordance with the stopped pattern of the third pattern, is determined (S8268), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S8265, and then this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S8266, if it is determined that the game is in a high probability state (S8266: Yes), the game time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the game pattern command is extracted (S8269), and it is determined whether the basic game time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S8270). Here, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242(c), when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a high probability state, a game pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected with a probability of approximately 25% when a jackpot is won, and with a probability of approximately 4% when a miss is won.

If it is determined in the process of S8270 that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8270: Yes), the performance mode (performance content) is determined based on the special bonus performance selection table 222jb (S8271), a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S8265), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8270: No), the processes of S8267 and S8268 described above are executed, and then S8265 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the tenth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in overlap (parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. The lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed in a way that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the ease of executing the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to vary depending on the set game state. Specifically, in order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability-changing state) than when a low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state), the lottery right for the second special symbol is configured to be obtained when a ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) accompanied by an electric device 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) executed when a normal symbol is hit. In other words, when playing in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to be executed more easily than the lottery for the second special symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set upon winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to differ greatly depending on the game state that is set, so that the player can be motivated to play in the hope that a game state that is highly advantageous to the player will be set.

In addition, if a normal symbol lottery, which is executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, is won, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric device 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a period during which it is easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery even in the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, so that a player playing in the normal state can execute a game aiming to win the special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win the normal symbol lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early on.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights for the stored second special symbol, that is, the number of special symbol 2 reserved. Specifically, as the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-miss variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a miss is executed in the first half of the variable performance, and in the second half of the variable performance, a pseudo-win variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot is executed by restarting the third symbol stopped (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-miss variable performance, and the number of times that the third symbol temporarily stops (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-win variable performance is configured to be variable in response to the number of special symbol 2 reserved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped multiple times until the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that they have won the jackpot after multiple second special symbol drawings.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won with the special symbol 2 reserve used in the first second special symbol lottery among multiple special symbol 2 reserves acquired during normal symbol play, the player can be made to believe that the jackpot was won because multiple special symbol 2 reserves were acquired during normal symbol play, which makes it possible for the player to play with more enthusiasm to acquire the special symbol 2 reserve during normal symbol play.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance is configured to execute a variation performance that imitates the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special symbol 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol 2 variation performance from being repeated in a pseudo manner when the reserved special symbol 2 has not been acquired, making it difficult for the player to recognize that a pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variation performance that imitates the special symbol 1 variation performance is executed, the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination that indicates that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so it is possible to execute a variation performance that is unexpected for the player.

In this embodiment, when a special jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a decision is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to a specific gate, and if the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is played, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, and a special jackpot that is advantageous to the player is configured to have a longer ending period than a normal jackpot. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if a special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot game ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is configured to be shorter.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game causes a problem that an unnatural notification presentation is executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. Also, if a special presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode must be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot. If the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation that is executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

This V winning device 2650 is configured in the same manner as the V winning device 2650 of the eighth embodiment described above (see Figures 194 to 196), and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which balls that flow down the right area enter the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the left area described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and therefore regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played or not, the same privilege is awarded whether the player plays a right-handed game or a left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play in any game method according to his or her mood.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited thereto. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can acquire when playing from the left side and when playing from the right side so that there is no large discrepancy between these amounts. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area may be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 may be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to acquire prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to acquire prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

In the above embodiments, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated (i.e., when it increases or decreases), but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This reduces the number of times the main control device 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, the balls are reserved for a maximum of four entries into the special ball entrance 64 and a maximum of one passage through the through gate 67, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on the entry into the special ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern is moved vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern to indicate the lottery result of the normal pattern may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. Furthermore, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. However, the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 may be executed in the normal state, and a right-hand hit game that targets the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. Also, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the configuration is such that a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or whether a jackpot game is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute a right-hand hit game when a time-saving state is set or during a jackpot game, and execute a left-hand hit game only during a normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand whether or not the state is favorable to the player depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand hit game, left-hand hit game).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means that can be operated by the player is a frame button 22 that is pressed by the player to determine that the operation means has been operated, but other configurations may also be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor-type operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player contacting or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment described above, a group of switching buttons 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) may be provided for selecting the end conditions of the game per reel, and some or all of the operation control of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be configured to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-mentioned embodiments and control examples may be configured by combining all or part of them. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during the execution of the standby state performance can be linked more accurately to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passing number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment (see S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220 in FIG. 87). Then, during the execution of the standby state performance, the state of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value each time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated. This allows the state of the chance meter CM to be in accordance with the actual situation of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can be used in the other embodiments in a similar manner.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Feature A group> (Differentiating the timing of updating the number of time-saving times from the timing of determining the end of the time-saving period)
a game state setting means for setting a game state among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means having an update means for updating first information related to the determination by the determination means, and an end determination means for determining whether the first information updated by the update means satisfies an end condition, the game state setting means setting the second game state when the end determination means determines that the end condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, and the game state setting means is configured to update the first information by the update means at a timing different from an end determination timing at which the end determination means determines whether the end condition is satisfied.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result displayed after a predetermined variable period is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set multiple game states, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting hole is set until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, JP 2001-033569 A). In such a gaming machine, the player can play while hoping that the first game state will be set, and the player's motivation to play can be increased. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state, which are executed based on the number of lotteries reaching the specific number, are configured to be executed at the timing when the lottery result is displayed, and the advantageous state that has been set is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above gaming machine, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lottery draws during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state when the number of lottery draws reaches a specific number are configured to be executed when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, which creates a problem that the amount of processing executed at a specific timing (the timing of the lottery result being stopped and displayed) increases. The objective of the above gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing.

In recent years, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured to allow overlapping games for executing bonus games (overlapping games), and to suspend the subtraction of a variable period for indicating the lottery result of one game depending on the result of the other game (for example, JP 2015-12907 A). In such games, multiple games can be executed in overlapping fashion, making it possible to efficiently play a game aimed at executing a bonus game. Furthermore, because one game can be temporarily suspended depending on the result of the other game, it is possible to prevent multiple games being executed in overlapping fashion from overlapping bonus games, resulting in the execution of bonus games that are difficult for players to understand.

However, when a configuration capable of setting the above-mentioned advantageous state is used for a gaming machine capable of executing overlapping games, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lottery draws during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state, which are executed based on the number of lottery draws reaching a specific number, are executed at the timing when the lottery result is frozen and displayed. For example, when the subtraction of the variable time for indicating the lottery result in one game is suspended based on the granting of a bonus game by the other game, and the advantageous state is set by the granted bonus game, the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery draws is executed when the subtraction of the suspended variable time is resumed and the lottery result is frozen and displayed. In other words, the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery draws during the advantageous state is executed based on the freeze-display of the lottery result executed in a state other than the advantageous state, so there is a problem that the player cannot play the game during the advantageous state in a favorable manner. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by allowing the player to play the game during the advantageous state in a favorable manner.

According to the gaming machine A1, the update of the first information by the update means and the determination of the end by the end determination means can be executed at different times. Therefore, when the end condition is satisfied by updating the first information, the amount of processing executed at the same time can be reduced, and there is an effect of reducing the processing load.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that in gaming machine A1, the update timing is the timing at which the determination is made by the determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 has the effect of being able to reliably update the first information corresponding to the content of the determination, since the timing of updating the first information related to the determination of the determination means is set to the timing of the determination being made by the determination means. Also, since the first information can be updated by the update means when the determination is made by the determination means, it is possible to make the player interested in both the determination of the determination means and the game state that is set, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the first information is updated by the update means when a determination is made by the determination means, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of update processing and reduce the processing load.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A1 or A2, the end determination timing occurs after the identification information is displayed in a static state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 executes the determination of the end condition during the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the game state from changing while the player is gazing at the dynamic display of the identification information to understand the determination result of the determination means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In the gaming machine A3, the discrimination means executes a discrimination corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the end discrimination timing is a period between when the identification information is stopped and when the discrimination means next executes the discrimination. Gaming machine A4.

Gaming machine A4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A1. That is, even if the update means updates the first information to the first information that may satisfy the end condition, it is possible to prevent the determination means from making a determination before the second gaming state is set. Therefore, even if the timing of updating the first information and the timing of the end determination are made different, there is an effect that the determination made by the determination means can be made appropriately.

A gaming machine A5 is any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, characterized in that the first information is updated by the update means based on the number of times the determination is performed by the determination means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A4, gaming machine A5 updates the first information each time the discrimination means executes discrimination, making it easier for the player to understand the update status of the first information. This has the effect of preventing the first gaming state from suddenly transitioning to the second gaming state, confusing the player.

In the gaming machine A5, the update means updates the first information between the time when the determination is made by the determination means and the time when a dynamic display is made to show the result of the determination. A gaming machine A6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 has the effect of reducing the processing load because the first information is not updated during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

A gaming machine A7 is characterized in that it has, among the gaming machines A1 to A6, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display when an interruption condition is met while the identification information is being dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a resumption means for resuming the dynamic display interrupted by the interruption means when a resumption condition is met, and an information variable means for varying the first information updated by the update means when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means.

Gaming machine A7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, when the dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing means. Therefore, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can enjoy not only the determination result of the determining means, but also the presence or absence of an interruption, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine A8 is characterized in that in gaming machine A7, the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

Gaming machine A8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A7. That is, during the dynamic display of identification information, the player can play the game while expecting the dynamic display to be interrupted by the interruption means, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine A9 is characterized in that in gaming machine A7 or A8, the bonus game execution means is capable of executing the bonus game even when a second condition different from a first condition that can be established based on the result of the determination executed by the determination means is established, and the interruption condition is established based on the establishment of the second condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A7 and A8, gaming machine A9 can establish an interruption condition when a second condition is established that allows the bonus game to be played without using a discrimination means, so that a game other than the discrimination means can be offered to the player, and there is an effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine A10 is characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, and the second condition is met when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A9, gaming machine A10 can also provide a game of having a gaming ball enter a ball entry means as a game separate from the determination by the determination means, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine A10, which has a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first state, and a variable control means that can execute a variable operation to change the variable member to the first state for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of an execution condition, and the variable control means is characterized in that the variable operation is easier to execute when the first gaming state is set than when the second gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A10, gaming machine A11 has the effect of making the player more eager to play in order to make the second condition occur, since the duration of the first gaming state, in which the second condition is more likely to occur than in the second gaming state, can be varied based on the establishment of the second condition.

<Feature B Group> (The ratio of winning balls to the bonus is changed depending on the set conditions)
A gaming machine having a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter than the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of an execution condition, a specific area through which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus based on a gaming ball entering the specific area, characterized in that the gaming machine B1 has a setting information discrimination means that can determine setting information when the variable ball entry means is variably controlled by the variable control means, and a switching means that can switch between a first state in which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can easily pass through the specific area and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to pass through than the first state, depending on the setting information determined by the setting information discrimination means.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result displayed after a predetermined variable period is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a variable ball entry means in which a variable member that can be changed to a first state that allows the game ball to enter and a second state that restricts the game ball is attached to the starting hole as the starting hole, and is configured to be able to set an advantageous state in which the variable ball entry means is more likely to change to the first state, and an unfavorable state in which it is more difficult to change to the first state than the first game state (for example, JP 2001-033569 A). In such gaming machines, the ease of a gaming ball entering the variable ball entry means is varied to make the player eager to play while hoping that an advantageous state will be set. However, even if an unfavorable state is set, a lottery is executed if the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means, so there is a risk that the player will play by timing the variable ball entry means to the first state in the unfavorable state, which reduces the player's motivation to play in order to set an advantageous state. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's motivation to play by making it difficult to execute a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the variable ball entry means when an unfavorable state is set.

The gaming machine B1 can switch between the first state and the second state according to the setting information, so that the player can be interested in the setting information at the time when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine B2 has an operation control means for controlling the switching means in the gaming machine B1, and the switching means is capable of switching between a plurality of flow paths, including a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, so that a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means flows down one of the plurality of flow paths, and the operation control means starts to control the operation of the switching means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and the gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path by the switching means can pass through the specific area.

Gaming machine B2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B1. That is, the switching means is operatively controlled by the operation control means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass through the specific area when it flows down the first flow path by the switching means. This makes it possible to link the variable control for making it easier for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means with the operation control of the switching means, thereby providing the effect of properly controlling whether or not a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the specific area.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that in gaming machine B2, gaming balls that flow down the second flow path by the switching means are less likely to pass through the specific area than gaming balls that flow down the first flow path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B2, gaming machine B3 can make it more difficult for gaming balls that have flowed down the second flow path to pass through the specific area than gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path, so there is an effect that the passing rate of gaming balls that have entered the variable ball entry means into the specific area can be set simply by controlling the operation of the switching means with the operation control means.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B2 or B3, it has a normal area through which gaming balls that enter the variable ball entry means can pass, the normal area is formed so that gaming balls that enter the variable ball entry means but do not pass through the specific area can pass through, and the bonus granting means does not grant the bonus when a gaming ball passes through the normal area.

Gaming machine B4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B2 or B3. That is, if a gaming ball that enters the variable ball entry means passes through the normal area, no bonus is awarded. Therefore, even if an excessive number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means, it has the effect of preventing excessive bonuses from being awarded to the player. Also, by providing a normal area within the variable ball entry means, it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being awarded to the player without having to provide a mechanism outside the variable ball entry means to prevent gaming balls from entering the variable ball entry means, so there is the effect of making it easier to use the area outside the variable ball entry means for other purposes.

Any of gaming machines B2 to B4 has a distribution means capable of distributing gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path to a third flow path different from the second flow path and a fourth flow path different from the second and third flow paths, and the gaming machine has at least a first specific area into which gaming balls distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means can enter, and a second specific area different from the first specific area into which gaming balls distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means can enter, and the bonus granting means is characterized in that the bonus granted differs between when the gaming ball enters the first specific area and when the gaming ball enters the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the gaming ball that flows down to the first flow path by the switching means is distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, it passes through the first specific area, and when it is distributed to the fourth flow path, it passes through the second specific flow path. As a result, when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means, the ease with which the bonus is granted by the bonus granting means can be varied according to the establishment status of the set condition, and further, the content of the bonus granted by the distribution means can be made different. Therefore, since whether or not a bonus is granted and the content of the bonus granted are determined in stages, there is an effect that the period during which the player can enjoy the game can be extended compared to the case where the presence or absence of a bonus and the content of the bonus are determined at once. In addition, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function that notifies information indicating the flow status of the gaming ball in the variable ball entry means. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to understand the flow status of the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, it is a good idea to use a function that notifies information indicating that a set condition has been met. This allows the player to understand before the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means that a situation is likely to result in some kind of privilege being awarded by having the gaming ball enter the variable ball entry means, so that the player can play with anticipation.

Gaming machine B6 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, and has a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the switching means is characterized in that it is easier to switch to the first game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means than when the second game state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B5, gaming machine B6 can vary the ease of switching to the first state depending on the set game state, which has the effect of making the player interested in the currently set game state and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine B7 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means is capable of variably controlling the variable ball entry means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the ball than the first variable pattern, and the switching means is capable of switching to at least the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means with the first variable pattern.

Gaming machine B7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines B1 to B5. That is, the variable control means can make it more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means when the second variable pattern is set than when the first variable pattern is variable controlled. And the switching means can switch to the first state when the first variable pattern is variable controlled. This has the effect of preventing a situation in which a large number of gaming balls are generated that cannot pass through a specific area, and preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine B8 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines B1 to B7, the bonus granting means executes a specific game based on a gaming ball entering the specific area, and the gaming machine has a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result of the specific game executed by the bonus granting means is a predetermined result.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B7, gaming machine B8 has the effect of motivating the player to play a game to pass the gaming ball through the specific area, since a bonus game is executed if the result of the specific game executed when the gaming ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result.

<Feature C Group> (In a gaming machine capable of executing multiple games in an overlapping manner, the mode of presentation for one game is set according to the variable time of the other game)
a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means; a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on selection information; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed as specific identification information indicating a specific determination result, wherein the gaming machine C1 further comprises a specific game execution means for executing a specific game during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect related to the specific game, and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means based on information corresponding to at least the selection information.

In recent years, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko machines that are configured so that games for executing bonus games can be played in overlapping order (overlapping play possible) and that display effects to show the game results for each overlapping game (for example, JP 2011-45518 A). In such games, when multiple games are played in overlapping order, each game can be easily understood by looking at the display of each overlapping game. However, since the display mode of the display is determined only based on the content of the corresponding game and it is not possible to execute effects related to the multiple overlapping games, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the entire overlapping games from the display of the currently executed effects, and the effect of the effects is reduced. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the effect of the effects and allows players to play with enthusiasm by executing effects that make it easy to understand the content of the multiple overlapping games.

According to the gaming machine C1, since the presentation mode of the specific presentation can be determined based on the selection information, it is possible to execute a presentation that associates the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed in an overlapping manner with the specific game, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, since the presentation mode of the specific presentation can be determined based on the selection information, it has the effect of encouraging the player to play multiple games in an overlapping manner in order to see various presentation modes.

A gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 has a remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 sets the presentation mode of the specific presentation based on the remaining period of the identification information, so that the presentation mode of the specific presentation can be varied according to the determination timing of the determination means and the execution timing of the specific game. This has the effect of encouraging players to play at various times in order to overlap multiple games in order to see various presentation modes.

Gaming machine C3 has an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display when an interruption condition is established while the identification information is being dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a resumption means for resuming the dynamic display interrupted by the interruption means based on the end of the bonus game, and the interruption condition is established when the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means becomes a predetermined game result.

Gaming machine C3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C2. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, not only in the performance executed, but also in the actual game, the determination by the determination means can be related to the specific game, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine C3 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game is executed that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when a specific period of time has elapsed since the second gaming state was set, the resuming means resumes the suspended dynamic display as a dynamic display in the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set after the bonus game ends, the specific period is variable according to the remaining period of the identification information resumed by the resuming means, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is suspended by the interrupting means.

Gaming machine C4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C3. That is, the length of the specific period during which the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed is set is variable according to the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interruption means. The presentation mode of the specific effect is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, the advantageous degree of the game to be executed later can be grasped according to the presentation mode of the specific effect, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it has a remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and an advantageous condition determination means for determining whether the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means satisfies an advantageous condition, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determination means.

Gaming machine C5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines C1 to C4. That is, the advantageous condition determination means determines whether the remaining time satisfies the advantageous condition, and the presentation mode of the specific presentation is set based on the determination result, so that the effect is that the player can be easily informed whether the specific presentation being executed is advantageous to the player.

Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that in gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determination means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C5, gaming machine C6 has the effect of motivating the player to play a specific game based on the specific presentation that is executed, because it is determined that the advantageous condition is met when the remaining period of the identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the first period.

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a gaming machine C6 has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring acquired information when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means, and a storage means for storing the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, the discrimination means executes a discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the discrimination condition is established, and has a pre-discrimination means for pre-discriminating the acquired information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the acquired information is executed by the discrimination means, the pre-discrimination means pre-discriminates a dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating at least the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the acquired information, and the advantageous condition discrimination means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period determined by the pre-discrimination means.

Gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines C4 and C5. That is, acquired information determined by the determination means is stored in a storage means up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage means is determined in advance. Then, if it is determined that the remaining period of the dynamic display being executed is longer than the pre-determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is met. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game while predicting the timing of interruption of the dynamic display that will be advantageous to the player based on the specific presentation being executed, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determination means determines whether the advantageous condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the advance determination means corresponding to the acquired information to be determined next by the determination means among the acquired information stored in the storage means. Gaming machine C7.

Gaming machine C7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C6. That is, an advantageous condition is established when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information for which the discrimination means will next discriminate, so that the player can discriminate whether to interrupt the dynamic display currently being executed or to interrupt the dynamic display to be executed next, based on the specific performance to be executed. This has the effect of allowing the player to select a game, and increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state as the specific period when a period has elapsed during which the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means has been stopped and displayed a specific number of times, which is set to at least two times, while the first gaming state is set, and the gaming machine C8 is characterized in that it has a period calculation means capable of calculating the specific period, the period calculation means calculates the specific period by adding up the dynamic display periods during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means up to the specific number of times, and has a period mode display means capable of displaying a period mode to indicate the specific period calculated by the period calculation means.

Gaming machine C8 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, the length of the specific period can be understood by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means, while the game status in the second game state can be understood based on the presentation mode of the specific presentation. This has the effect of allowing the player to focus on the various presentations being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<Feature D group> (The end condition of the winning game is varied depending on the operation of the operation means)
A gaming machine D1 having a variable ball entry means capable of changing a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the game machine and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the game machine than the first state, and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time when a first condition is satisfied, the gaming machine D1 having an end means for terminating the specific game executed by the specific game execution means when one of a plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the end conditions including a first end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means and a second end condition that is satisfied when the period in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state has elapsed the predetermined period, and an operation means for executing a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation, the first end condition being more likely to be satisfied when the first operation is executed by the operation means than when the second operation is executed.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result displayed after a specified variable period is a success, a bonus game is executed in which the gaming ball can be made to enter an attacker (specific winning hole), and multiple conditions for ending the bonus game are set (for example, JP 2011-45518 A). In such gaming machines, a time end condition for ending the bonus game based on the time elapsed since the bonus game was executed and a winning end condition for ending the bonus game based on the number of gaming balls that enter the attacker during the bonus game are generally set, and control is executed to end the bonus game when either end condition is met.

However, because the same game is played every time during bonus play, even if multiple end conditions are set, basically only one of the end conditions will be met more easily. In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the attacker during bonus play, the winning end condition will be met more easily before the time end condition is met, and in a gaming machine that is configured to make it harder for the game ball to enter the attacker during bonus play, the time end condition will be met more easily before the winning end condition is met.

As described above, even if multiple end conditions for bonus play are set, if most of the end conditions that can be met are specific end conditions, the advantage of setting multiple end conditions, that is, the effect of making it difficult to understand which end condition will end the bonus play and making the player interested in playing during the bonus play, becomes difficult to achieve. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can motivate players to play during bonus play by preventing the end conditions that are met from being biased toward specific end conditions among the multiple end conditions for ending the bonus play.

With gaming machine D1, it is possible to vary the end conditions for ending a specific game being played depending on the operation content performed by the operating means, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play the game with enthusiasm.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, it has a selection effect execution means capable of executing a selection effect for allowing the player to select whether to cause the operation means to execute the first operation or the second operation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can select the end conditions based on the selection effect executed by the selection effect execution means, which has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it has a performance mode setting means capable of setting the performance mode of the selection performance executed by the selection performance execution means in the gaming machine D2, and the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode differently when the bonus granted after the end of the specific game is different between when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D2, gaming machine D3 provides the following effect. That is, the presentation mode of the selection presentation can be changed depending on the bonus granted after the end of a specific game, so that the player will pay attention to the selection presentation that is executed. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine D3, which has a discrimination means for making a discrimination when a second condition different from the first condition is established, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is displayed as a specific identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result, and a period discrimination means for discriminating the period until the bonus game execution means is executed based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode of the selection presentation based on the timing at which the specific game is executed and the discrimination result of the period discrimination means.

Gaming machine D4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine D3. That is, the presentation mode of the selection effect is set based on the timing of execution of the specific game and the timing of execution of the bonus game, so that the player can play the game while predicting, based on the selection effect that is executed, which end condition for the specific game being executed would shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the bonus game. This has the effect of increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

A gaming machine D4 has a second variable ball entry means that can change between a third state in which a game ball can enter and a fourth state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the third state, and the bonus game execution means changes the second variable ball entry means between the third state and the fourth state in a predetermined variable pattern for a predetermined period as the bonus game, and has a type setting means that sets one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type in which the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state for a longer period during the bonus game than the first bonus type as the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and the presentation mode setting means differs in presentation mode between the first bonus type and the second bonus type based on the start timing of the specific game. A gaming machine D5.

Gaming machine D5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D4. That is, if a bonus game can be executed at the end timing of a specific game, the presentation mode of the selection effect is set according to the type of the bonus game, so that the player can play the game while predicting which end condition for the specific game being executed would be best to achieve in order to end the specific game in an advantageous situation for the player, based on the selection effect that is executed. This has the effect of increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

Gaming machine D5 has a situation determination means for determining whether the timing of the end of the specific game is a first situation in which the dynamic display means is executing the dynamic display of the identification information, or a second situation in which the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means, and the presentation mode setting means changes the presentation mode between the first situation and the second situation. Gaming machine D6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, gaming machine D6 can vary the presentation mode of the selection effect depending on whether the timing at which the specific game can be ended is during dynamic display of the identification information or during execution of a bonus game, so that the player can play the game while predicting, based on the selection effect being executed, which of the end conditions should be met for the specific game being executed in order to end the specific game in a situation that is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

A gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D6, when the situation determination means determines that the first situation is present, the gaming machine D7 has a remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period of the dynamic display at the end timing of the specific game, and when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is equal to or greater than a predetermined period, the gaming machine D7 sets a different presentation mode from that when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D6, gaming machine D7 sets different presentation modes for the selection presentation depending on the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing when the specific game can be ended, so that the player can play the game while predicting, based on the selection presentation that is executed, which of the end conditions for the specific game being played should be established to shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the bonus game. This has the effect of increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

Gaming machine D8 is characterized in that it is any one of gaming machines D4 to D7, and has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is established, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display when the specific game is started while the identification information is being dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a resumption means for resuming the dynamic display interrupted by the interruption means when the specific game is completed.

Gaming machine D8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines D4 to D7. That is, while a specific game is being played, the dynamic display can be interrupted, and the length of the interruption period of the dynamic display can be varied by varying the end condition for ending the specific game. This has the effect of encouraging the player to play the game.

Gaming machine D9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D8, there is a specific area through which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game execution means is capable of executing the bonus game even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D8, gaming machine D9 can also execute a bonus game when a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through a specific area, providing the player with the fun of choosing whether to play a game to achieve the second end condition for the specific game or to achieve the first end condition, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine D10 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game is executed that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as gaming states in gaming machine D8 or D9, and the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times while the second gaming state is set.

Gaming machine D10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines D8 or D9. That is, since the second gaming state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, interrupting the dynamic display during the second gaming state is effective in extending the duration of the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of choosing whether to play a game to satisfy the second end condition for a specific game or to satisfy the first end condition, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature E Group> (Display of the target location for winning games)
A gaming machine E1 having a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the game and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the game than the first state, a discrimination means that performs discrimination when a discrimination condition is met, a dynamic display means that dynamically displays identification information to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is displayed as specific identification information that indicates that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and characterized in that it has a display control means that, when the bonus game is executed, displays an image showing the variable ball entry means on the display means.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game has been won or not. If the lottery result displayed after a specified variable period is a winning result, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed by opening a ball entry means into which the gaming ball is normally difficult to enter. There are also gaming machines in which the position of the starting hole is different from the position of the ball entry means that is opened during the bonus game (for example, JP 2011-45518 A). In such a game, the position from which the gaming ball is shot is changed depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting hole or the bonus game, and therefore a game that the player will never tire of can be provided.

However, if a bonus game is played and the player continues to play the game aiming at the starting hole, the ball cannot be put into the ball entry means during the bonus game, and there is a risk that the player will incur a loss.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, several devices (devices that change from a difficult state for the ball to an easy state depending on the game content) are densely arranged within a limited game area. With such gaming machines, it is difficult for the player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and there is a problem that the player may play inappropriately and incur losses. The objective of this invention is to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game in the above gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E1, a display image showing the variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means by the display control means, so that the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner of where to aim the game ball when a bonus game is executed. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine E2 is characterized in that in gaming machine E1, the display control means causes the display means to display the display image at least during the period from when the specific identification information is displayed in a stopped state until the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 displays a display image before the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that if the player shoots the game ball after seeing the display image, the game ball can be made to enter the variable ball entry means. This has the effect of providing a game that is easier for the player to understand.

Gaming machine E3, which is characterized in that it has a bonus game type selection means for selecting one bonus game type from a plurality of bonus game types as the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means in gaming machine E1 or E2, and a display mode setting means for setting the display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and the display mode setting means is capable of setting different display modes depending on the bonus game type selected by the bonus game type selection means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 and E2, gaming machine E3 can vary the display mode of the display image based on the type of big win, making it possible to execute bonus games in an easy-to-understand manner and suggest to the player the content of the bonus games. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that in gaming machine E3, the bonus game execution means is capable of executing the bonus game of different value depending on the bonus game type selected by the bonus game type selection means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E3, gaming machine E4 executes bonus games with different values depending on the type of bonus game, so that the player can pay attention to the display state of the display image displayed on the display means. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E4, it has ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a gaming ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the display mode setting means variably sets the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means by the display control means based on the detection of the ball entry by the ball entry detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, gaming machine E5 can change the display mode of the display image when a gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means using the ball entry detection means, so that the player can be informed of the progress of the bonus game in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine E6 is any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, which has an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation determination means that can determine the operation content performed on the operation means, and the display mode setting means variably sets the display mode based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, gaming machine E6 allows the player to change the display mode of the display image by operating the operating means. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that in gaming machine E6, the display mode setting means is capable of setting a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine E6, gaming machine E7 can enlarge or reduce the display image based on an operation on the operating means. This allows a player who does not need the display image to be displayed when a bonus game is being played to display the display image in a smaller size, making it possible to use the display area formed on the display means for a different display effect. This has the effect of allowing a display that is suitable for the player to be executed.

Gaming machine E8 is characterized in that in gaming machine E6 or E7, the display mode setting means is capable of setting a rotational display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E6 and E7, gaming machine E8 has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means, since the display image can be rotated based on the operation of the operating means.

<Feature F group> (Time-saving end timing is switched according to conditions)
a switching means for switching the execution timing of the end condition discrimination means based on the establishment of a switching condition; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period of time; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information indicating a specific discrimination result; a game state setting means for setting any one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; an update means for updating specific information; and an end discrimination means for discriminating whether the specific information updated by the update means satisfies an end condition, and the second game state can be set when the end discrimination means discriminates that the end condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, the gaming machine F1 being characterized in that it has a switching means for switching the execution timing of the end condition discrimination means based on the establishment of a switching condition.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result displayed after a predetermined variable period is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set multiple game states, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting hole is set until the number of lotteries reaches a specific number (for example, JP 2001-033569 A). In such a gaming machine, the player can play while hoping that the first game state will be set, and the player's motivation to play can be increased. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state, which are executed based on the number of lotteries reaching the specific number, are configured to be executed at the timing when the lottery result is displayed, and the advantageous state that has been set is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above gaming machine, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lottery draws during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state when the number of lottery draws reaches a specific number are configured to be executed when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, which creates a problem that the amount of processing executed at a specific timing (the timing of the lottery result being stopped and displayed) increases. The objective of the above gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing.

In recent years, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured to allow overlapping games for executing bonus games (overlapping games), and to suspend the subtraction of a variable period for indicating the lottery result of one game depending on the result of the other game (for example, JP 2015-12907 A). In such games, multiple games can be executed in overlapping fashion, making it possible to efficiently play a game aimed at executing a bonus game. Furthermore, because one game can be temporarily suspended depending on the result of the other game, it is possible to prevent multiple games being executed in overlapping fashion from overlapping bonus games, resulting in the execution of bonus games that are difficult for players to understand.

However, when a configuration capable of setting the above-mentioned advantageous state is used for a gaming machine capable of executing overlapping games, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lottery draws during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state, which are executed based on the number of lottery draws reaching a specific number, are executed at the timing when the lottery result is frozen and displayed. For example, when the subtraction of the variable time for indicating the lottery result in one game is suspended based on the granting of a bonus game by the other game, and the advantageous state is set by the granted bonus game, the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery draws is executed when the subtraction of the suspended variable time is resumed and the lottery result is frozen and displayed. In other words, the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery draws during the advantageous state is executed based on the freeze-display of the lottery result executed in a state other than the advantageous state, so there is a problem that the player cannot play the game during the advantageous state in a favorable manner. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by allowing the player to play the game during the advantageous state in a favorable manner.

According to the gaming machine F1, the execution timing of the end condition determination means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, making it difficult for the player to know when the first gaming state will end. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine F2, characterized in that in the gaming machine F1, the update means is capable of updating, as the predetermined information, at least first information based on the number of times the determination has been performed by the determination means, and the switching condition can be established when the first information updated by the update means satisfies the termination condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 is configured so that the switching condition can be established when the number of times the discrimination means has made a decision meets the end condition, so that the player who has made the decision of the discrimination means the number of times that meets the end condition can play the game while feeling anxious about whether the first game state will end. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine F3 has a second determination means for performing a second determination when a second determination condition is established in a gaming machine F2, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a second identification information for indicating the result of the second determination by the second determination means for a predetermined period of time, and a second bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means is statically displayed as a second specific identification information for indicating a specific second determination result, and the switching condition can be established when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F2, gaming machine F3 is configured so that the switching condition can be established based on a second determination made by a second determination means different from the determination means, so that if the determination means continues to make a determination until the end condition is met, it is difficult for the player to tell whether the switching condition is established or not. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means delays the execution timing of the end condition determination means for a specific period, and the determination means executes a determination corresponding to the first gaming state as the determination executed during the specific period.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, gaming machine F4 can execute the determination of the determination means executed during the specific period in which the switching means delays the execution timing of the termination condition determination means as a determination during the first gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

A gaming machine F5, which is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, has a gaming state display means capable of displaying on a display means a display mode for indicating the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state display means being capable of displaying a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode as display modes for indicating that the first gaming state is set, and the second display mode is displayed when the execution timing of the termination condition determination means is switched by the switching means.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F5 is configured to be able to display a second display mode that is displayed when the execution timing of the termination condition determination means is switched by the switching means as a display mode indicating that the first gaming state is set, thereby providing the effect of being able to inform the player of the current gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature G group> (The navigation display of the target device of the winning game is changed according to the progress of the game)
A gaming machine having a first variable ball entry means capable of changing a state between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first state, and a first bonus game execution means capable of executing a first bonus game by changing the first variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when a first execution condition is established, the present invention further comprises a second variable ball entry means capable of changing a state between a third state in which a game ball can enter and a fourth state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the third state, and a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game by changing the first variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when a first execution condition is established. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having a second bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game in which the second variable ball entry means is changed from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period of time when the result of the first bonus game is a predetermined game result, and display control means for causing a display means to display a first display image indicating the first variable ball entry means when the first bonus game is executed, and for causing the display means to display a second display image indicating the second variable ball entry means when the second bonus game is executed.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game has been won or not. If the lottery result displayed after a specified variable period is a winning result, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed by opening a ball entry means into which the gaming ball is normally difficult to enter. There are also gaming machines in which the position of the starting hole is different from the position of the ball entry means that is opened during the bonus game (for example, JP 2011-45518 A). In such a game, the position from which the gaming ball is shot is changed depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting hole or the bonus game, and therefore a game that the player will never tire of can be provided.

However, if a bonus game is played and the player continues to play the game aiming at the starting hole, the ball cannot be put into the ball entry means during the bonus game, and there is a risk that the player will incur a loss.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, several devices (devices that change from a difficult state for the ball to an easy state depending on the game content) are densely arranged within a limited game area. With such gaming machines, it is difficult for the player to understand which device the game ball should be shot at, and there is a problem that the player may play inappropriately and incur losses. The objective of this invention is to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game in the above gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, a display image showing the variable ball entry means corresponding to the bonus game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means, so that the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner of where to aim the game ball when the bonus game is executed. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine G2, characterized in that in the gaming machine G1, the display control means causes the display means to display the first display image during the period from when the first execution condition is met until the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 has the advantage that a display image is displayed before the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that if the gaming ball is released after viewing the display image, the gaming ball can be made to enter the first variable ball entry means. This has the effect of providing a game that is easier for the player to understand.

A gaming machine G3 characterized in that in the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a portion of the second display image when the first bonus game is being executed by the first bonus game execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G2, gaming machine G3 displays at least a portion of the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second bonus game that may be executed next during the execution of the first bonus game. This has the effect of allowing the player to grasp in advance the game method after the first bonus game ends, and providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine G4 is characterized in that in gaming machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a portion of the first display image when the second bonus game is being executed by the second bonus game execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G2 and G3, gaming machine G4 displays at least a portion of the first display image showing the first variable ball entry means corresponding to the first bonus game that has already been executed while the second bonus game is being executed. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the content of the bonus game that has been executed in the past, and providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine G5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines G1 to G4, the display control means sequentially displays the first display image and the second image before the first bonus game is executed based on the first execution condition being met.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, gaming machine G5 can inform the player of the sequence of multiple bonus games that may be executed in the future when the first execution condition is met, allowing the player to understand the sequence of game methods in advance. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

<Feature H Group> (Perform games that are likely to result in a reserved number that allows advantageous play to be performed and games that are unlikely to result in a reserved number that allows advantageous play to be performed)
a determination means for determining whether or not a particular game has been executed based on the determination result of the determination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, identification information indicating a determination result of the determination means; and a specific game execution means for executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed as specific identification information indicating a specific determination result.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). In addition, some gaming machines have been configured to reserve and store up to a predetermined number of lottery rights for executing a lottery to determine whether the game will be a success or failure when a gaming ball enters the starting hole. However, in the above gaming machines, a game with the same degree of advantage is executed regardless of the number of lottery rights reserved and stored, which is problematic in that the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, the objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine H1, the ease of executing advantageous games can be varied depending on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. This has the effect of making the player more interested in the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the gaming machine H1 is capable of executing a first game in which the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is more likely to satisfy the specified condition, and a second game in which the number of pieces of information is less likely to satisfy the specified condition than the first game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 makes it easier for the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means to satisfy the predetermined condition in the first game than in the second game. This has the effect of making the player play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In gaming machine H2, the predetermined condition can be met when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is a specific number less than the predetermined number, and gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the first game makes it easier to reduce the number of pieces of information than the second game when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is greater than the specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H2, gaming machine H3 makes it easier to reduce the number of pieces of information when the first game is executed when the number of pieces of information is greater than the specific number than when the second game is executed, making it easier to make the number of pieces of information reach the specific number. This has the effect of making a player who is playing a game with the number of pieces of information greater than the specific number play the game while hoping that the first game will be executed.

Gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H2 or H3, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of pieces of information than the second game when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is less than the specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines H2 and H3, gaming machine H4 makes it easier to increase the number of pieces of information when the first game is executed when the number of pieces of information is less than the specific number than when the second game is executed, making it easier to make the number of pieces of information reach the specific number. This has the effect of making a player who is playing with the number of pieces of information less than the specific number play the game while hoping that the first game will be executed.

Any of gaming machines H2 to H4 has a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information before a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information has elapsed when a first condition is met while the identification information is being dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the first game is characterized in that the dynamic display of the identification information can be forcibly stopped by the forced stop means, and the second game is characterized in that the dynamic display of the identification information is more difficult to forcibly stop by the forced stop means than the first game.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines H2 to H4, gaming machine H5 can forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information currently being executed by the forced stop means. This makes it possible to end the dynamic display of the identification information without waiting for the dynamic display of the identification information currently being executed for a predetermined period of time. This has the effect of making it easier for the discrimination means to execute the next discrimination, improving gaming efficiency and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H5, it has a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination different from the discrimination condition when a second discrimination condition different from the discrimination condition is established, and the first condition can be established at least when the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H4, gaming machine H6 can make it easier for the first condition to be satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the novel gameplay of executing the second determination by the second determination means to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means can be provided, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature I group> (Provide a variable display in which the number of time-saving times is updated during the time-saving period and a variable display in which the number of time-saving times is not updated)
A gaming machine I1 having a discrimination means which performs a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established, a dynamic display means which is capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, a specific game execution means which is capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed as specific identification information indicating the specific discrimination result, and a game state setting means which is capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, characterized in that the gaming machine I1 has an update means which is capable of updating the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed in a state in which the second game state is set, and a restriction means which restricts the updating of the first information by the update means.

In the past, when a gaming ball entered a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery was held to see whether the game would be a success or failure, and if the lottery result was a success, a bonus game that was advantageous to the player was executed. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is more likely to be executed after the bonus game is executed is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, in the above gaming machines, when the number of lotteries executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, the time-saving game ends, so that the player can easily predict the remaining time of the time-saving game, which reduces their motivation to play. Therefore, the objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the player in the above gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed while the second gaming state is set, if the first condition is met, the limiting means can limit the update of the first information. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine I2 is characterized in that in gaming machine I1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when a termination condition based on the first information is satisfied while the second gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, gaming machine I2 makes it difficult to end the second gaming state by restricting the update of the first information using the restriction means. This makes it difficult for the player to know when the condition for ending the second gaming state is met, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that in gaming machine I2, the discrimination means executes a discrimination that is more advantageous to the player when the discrimination is executed in a state in which the second gaming state is set than when the discrimination is executed in a state in which the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I2, gaming machine I3 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game because the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, allowing the player to play the game while hoping that the number of dynamic displays executed during the period in which the second gaming state is set will increase.

Gaming machine I4 is characterized in that in gaming machine I3, the update means is capable of updating the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed when the second gaming state is set as the first information.

According to gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine I3, the update means updates the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed as the first information, so that the second gaming state ends based on the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated even though the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed in accordance with the established condition, which has the effect of providing the player with an element of surprise.

A gaming machine I5, which is any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, has a compulsory stop means for compulsorily stopping the dynamic display of the identification information before a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information has elapsed when a special condition is established while the identification information is being dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the first condition can be established when the dynamic display of the identification information is compulsorily stopped by the compulsory stop means.

According to gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means, the first condition is established and the limiting means limits the updating of the first information by the update means. This has the effect of preventing the first information from being updated by the dynamic display of the identification information that could not be dynamically displayed normally, and thus preventing the second gaming state from ending without the identification information being dynamically displayed normally when the second gaming state is set, causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that in gaming machine I5, the forced stop means performs forced stop when identification information indicates that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, regardless of the discrimination result of the discrimination means corresponding to the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I5, gaming machine I6 prevents a specific game from being executed when the identification information is forcibly stopped. This has the effect of preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the second gaming state is set and the second gaming state ends without being able to dynamically display the identification information normally.

Gaming machine I7 is characterized in that it has a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination different from the discrimination condition when a second discrimination condition different from the discrimination condition is established in gaming machine I6, the specific game execution means executes the specific game even when the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result, and the special condition can be established at least when the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result.

According to gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of gaming machine I6, when the second determination result of the second determination means for which a specific game can be executed is a predetermined second determination result, a special condition is established, and the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the forced stop means. This has the effect that when the second determination is executed by the second determination means to execute a specific game, even if the predetermined second determination result occurs before the result of the specific second determination, the dynamic display of the specific identification information is forcibly stopped and the first information can be prevented from being updated.

Gaming machine I7 has a game type determination means for determining one specific game type from among a plurality of specific game types including a first specific game type and a second specific game type that allows a specific game to be executed that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type, as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, and the game type determination means is characterized in that it is easier to determine the second specific game type when the second discrimination means results in the specific second discrimination result than when the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I7, gaming machine I8 can encourage the player to proactively perform the second judgment because the second judgment means is more likely to produce a judgment result that is favorable to the player than the judgment means. This has the effect of further enhancing the restriction effect of the restriction means.

Gaming machine I9 is characterized in that in gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination means is easier to execute the second determination when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines I7 and I8, gaming machine I9 makes it easier for the second determination means to execute the second determination when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set, and therefore makes it possible to have the player proactively execute the second determination when the second gaming state is set. This has the effect of further enhancing the limiting effect of the limiting means.

<Feature J group> (When a condition for stopping the display of a variable in progress is met, the stop control content is switched based on the content of the display of the variable in progress)
A gaming machine J1 having a discrimination means which performs a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established, a dynamic display means which is capable of dynamically displaying identification information which indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a specific game execution means which is capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed as specific identification information which indicates the specific discrimination result, characterized in that the gaming machine J1 also has a dynamic display mode determination means which determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a specific control means which is capable of executing specific control to switch the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode in accordance with a condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means when a switching condition is established while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, gaming machines capable of simultaneously varying multiple special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) have been proposed (for example, JP 2015-12907 A). In addition, among gaming machines having the above-mentioned configuration, there are some that forcibly discard the results of the other lottery when a winning lottery is won in one lottery. In this case, the results of the other lottery are forcibly discarded regardless of the contents of the results of the other lottery, which may be disadvantageous to the player in some cases and cause the player to feel distrustful. Therefore, the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the player in the above-mentioned gaming machine. The above-mentioned conventional problems are described as problems with gaming machines that simultaneously (in parallel) draw (change) the first special symbol and draw (change) the second special symbol (so-called simultaneous variation machines). However, the problems solved by the technical ideas of this feature group are not limited to simultaneous variation machines, and may of course be applied to gaming machines other than simultaneous variation machines (for example, gaming machines that draw (change) the first special symbol and draw (change) the second special symbol depending on the order of winning).

According to the gaming machine J1, when a switching condition is met while the identification information is being dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode can be switched to a specific dynamic display mode according to the condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. This makes it possible to switch the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode that corresponds to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. This has the effect of preventing the player from feeling distrustful when switching the dynamic display mode, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine J2, in which the specific control means in executing the specific control switches to one of the multiple specific dynamic display modes depending on the condition satisfied by the dynamic display means of the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, gaming machine J2 can vary the specific dynamic display mode depending on the conditions satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information when specific control is executed. This allows specific control corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information to be determined, and therefore prevents a game that is difficult for the player to understand from being executed when specific control is executed on the dynamic display of the identification information. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it has a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination different from the discrimination condition when a second discrimination condition different from the discrimination condition is established in the gaming machine J1 or J2, and the switching condition can be established when the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines J1 and J2, gaming machine J3 has the following advantages: when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined second determination result, a switching condition is met and specific control is executed. Thus, the control content of the specific control is associated with both the determination result by the determination means and the result of the second determination by the second determination means, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine J4 is characterized in that in gaming machine J3, the specific game execution means is capable of executing the specific game even when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result.

According to the gaming machine J4, the specific game can be executed based on the second determination by the second determination means, so that the player can be motivated to perform both the determination by the determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. This has the effect of increasing the frequency with which the specific control is executed.

Gaming machine J5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determination means determines at least the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is more likely to be met when the dynamic display period is long than when it is short.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines J1 to J4, gaming machine J5 has the effect of making it easier for the switching condition to be satisfied when the dynamic display period is longer, thereby making it possible to interest the player in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Any of the gaming machines J1 to J5 has a remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the switching condition is characterized in that its ease of being met varies depending on the length of the remaining dynamic display period determined by the remaining period determination means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, gaming machine J6 can vary the ease with which the switching condition is met depending on the length of the residual dynamic display period, which has the effect of making the player interested in the length of the residual dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Feature K group> (The number of specific patterns displayed based on the pre-reading result is increased or decreased without synchronizing with the reserved number)
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result; and a pre-discrimination means for executing a pre-discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means is executed; a specific pattern display means for displaying a specific number of specific patterns on the display means based on the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means; and a pattern number variable display means for variably displaying the number of the specific patterns displayed by the specific pattern display means regardless of the number of the information.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Also, a gaming machine has been proposed that is configured to reserve and store up to a predetermined number of lottery rights for executing a lottery to determine whether the game will be a success or failure when a gaming ball enters the starting hole, and displays the number of reserved and stored lottery rights with a pattern, and changes the display mode of the pattern based on a pre-determined lottery result that corresponds to the reserved and stored lottery right (for example, JP 2013-223613 A). Incidentally, in the gaming machine described above, the result of the pre-determined determination can be suggested to the player using the displayed pattern, but when the number of reserved and stored lottery rights is small, the number of displayed patterns also decreases, which reduces the presentation effect and makes the game monotonous. Therefore, the objective is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the number of specific symbols displayed based on the results of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means can be varied regardless of the amount of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the amount of information stored in the storage means is small, the number of specific symbols displayed can be varied, which has the effect of making the player interested in the presentation that suggests the results of the pre-determination.

A gaming machine K2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine K1, the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbols up to the upper limit of the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine K1, gaming machine K2 makes it possible for the player to believe that the specific symbol indicates the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, since the maximum number of specific symbols to be displayed is the maximum number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

In either gaming machine K1 or K2, the symbol number changing means changes the number of the specific symbols displayed within a range of 1 or more as the number of the specific symbols when the number of the information stored in the storage means is 1 or more. Gaming machine K3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines K1 and K2, gaming machine K3 can continuously display a specific symbol while information is stored in the storage means, making the player believe that the specific symbol indicates the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means.

A gaming machine K4 is characterized in that, among any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, it has a gaming state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state when a termination condition is met with at least the second gaming state being set, and the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol on the display means while the second gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the gaming machine K4 sets a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player while the specific symbol is displayed on the display means, and can notify the player whether the second gaming state will end each time the number of specific symbols displayed changes. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine K5 is characterized in that in gaming machine K4, the symbol number changing means is capable of changing the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means by 2 or more.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K4, gaming machine K5 can greatly change the number of specific symbols displayed at once, providing players with a surprising presentation and enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine K5, characterized in that the symbol number varying means is more likely to vary to increase the number of the specific symbols displayed when the information stored in the storage means contains the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result as a result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means than when the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is not contained. A gaming machine K6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K5, gaming machine K6 has the effect of making it easier to increase the number of specific symbols displayed if it is determined in advance that information corresponding to a specific determination result is included, thereby making it possible to interest the player in the changing state of the specific symbols and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine K6, the symbol number changing means is characterized in that the number of the specific symbols displayed at one time is more likely to be increased when the information stored in the storage means contains the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result as a result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means than when the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is not contained. A gaming machine K7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K6, gaming machine K7 has the effect of making the player interested in how the number of specific symbols increases at once, increasing the possibility that information corresponding to a specific discrimination result is included, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine K8 is characterized in that the symbol number changing means in the gaming machine K7 is capable of executing a preparatory variable display that reduces the number of the specific symbols displayed before increasing the number of the specific symbols displayed to a specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K7, gaming machine K8 can reduce the number of specific symbols displayed by the preparation variable display, so that an increase variable display of the specific number can be executed regardless of the current number of specific symbols displayed. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom of presentation by varying the number of specific symbols displayed by the symbol number variable means.

<Feature L Group> (By varying the winning rate of the electric chute on the upstream side, the winning rate of the ball in the starting hole on the downstream side can be changed)
a first determination means for performing a first determination when a first determination condition is established, a second determination means for performing a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is established, and a specific game execution means for executing a corresponding specific game when a result of the first determination by the first determination means is a specific first determination result or when a result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, the gaming machine has a first flow path through which a gaming ball can flow down, and a ball that flows down the first flow path can enter the ball, and when the ball enters the ball, a ball that flows down the first flow path can enter the ball, and ... A gaming machine L1 comprising a first ball entry means in which the first discrimination condition can be satisfied, a variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter than the first state, a variable control means capable of variably controlling the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern when an execution condition is satisfied, and a second ball entry means in which a gaming ball can enter and in which the second discrimination condition can be satisfied when the gaming ball enters, wherein the second ball entry means is provided at a position in which a gaming ball that has not been able to enter the first ball entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the first flow path can enter the first ball entry means.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time after the bonus game is executed, making it easier to execute the lottery (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). In addition, there is a gaming machine that is provided with multiple start holes, and a variable member that makes it easier to insert a game ball during the time-saving game is provided in one of the start holes, making it easier to execute the lottery during the time-saving game. However, in the above gaming machine, when a game ball is shot toward a start hole provided with a variable member, the game ball that does not enter the start hole is wasted, and the motivation to play is reduced. Therefore, the objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the player in the above gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine L1, depending on the length of time during which the variable control means changes the variable means to the first state, it is possible to switch between a state in which it is easy to make a first judgment based on the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path and a state in which it is easy to make a second judgment. This has the effect of providing the player with the enjoyment of predicting which judgment will be made when the gaming ball flows down the first flow path, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine L2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine L1, the variable pattern of the variable means variably controlled by the variable control means is provided with a variable pattern determination means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the variable means is in the second state for a longer period than the first variable pattern.

In gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means according to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means, so that it is possible to switch between a state in which it is easy to make a first judgment based on the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path and a state in which it is easy to make a second judgment based on the variable status of the variable means. This has the effect of making the player interested in the variable status of the variable means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine L3, which has a determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is met in the gaming machine L2, and the variable control means variably controls the variable means when the result of the determination by the discrimination means is a specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L2, gaming machine L3 has the effect of increasing the interest of the player in the game because the variable means is variably controlled based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, making the player interested in the judgment content of the judgment means.

Gaming machine L4 has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means in a gaming machine L3, and a dynamic display period determination means capable of determining one dynamic display period from among a plurality of dynamic display periods of different lengths as the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display period determination means determining the dynamic display period based on the determination result of the determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L3, gaming machine L4 can vary the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determination means is statically displayed, and therefore can provide the player with a period during which variable control by the variable control means is not performed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine L5 is any one of gaming machines L1 to L4, characterized in that the second discrimination means executes a judgment that is more advantageous to the player than the first discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L1 to L4, gaming machine L5 has the effect of making the player interested in the behavior of the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path while hoping that the gaming ball will reach the second ball entry means, since the second discrimination means executes a judgment that is more favorable to the player than the first discrimination means.

Gaming machine L5 has a detection means capable of detecting gaming balls flowing down the first flow path, and a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the detection result by the detection means, and the detection means is composed of at least a first detection means capable of detecting gaming balls that have flowed into the first flow path, and a second detection means capable of detecting gaming balls that have not entered the first ball entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the first flow path, and the performance executed by the performance execution means is for indicating to the player the expected probability that the balls flowing down the first flow path will reach the second ball entry means. Gaming machine L6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L5, gaming machine L6 can inform the player of the flow status of the gaming balls flowing down the first flow path in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<Characteristics AA Group>
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine AA1, the presentation mode executed during the period when the second identification information is dynamically displayed varies depending on the number of pieces of second information stored, so that it is possible to execute a presentation that corresponds to the number of times that the second identification information can be dynamically displayed thereafter. Even if the second identification information for indicating a specific second judgment result is not displayed, the player's interest in the game thereafter can be maintained, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine AA2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed in priority to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode execution means executes the presentation mode when a specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to gaming machine AA2, the specific second dynamic display mode is executed, which has the effect of making the player motivated to store the second information, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine AA3, in which the presentation mode is set for a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is executed consecutively after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of stored second information ends, in the gaming machine AA1 or AA2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AA1 and AA2, gaming machine AA3 has the effect of increasing interest by making the multiple second dynamic display modes appear as a single dynamic display, since the presentation mode is configured to be executable across the dynamic display period of the second identification information that is executed multiple times in succession.

A gaming machine AA4, which is any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA3, has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, and the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AA1 to AA3, gaming machine AA4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information because a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be more easily obtained.

<Features AB group> (Performance can be changed depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 during the execution of the variable pattern)
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the gaming machine AB1 further comprising: a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information; and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, the presentation mode selection means selecting the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is a presentation to show the result of a lottery held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the presentation mode that has been determined (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information, so that not only the result of the first discrimination but also information regarding the possibility of executing the second discrimination can be determined from the presentation mode, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine AB2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AB1, gaming machine AB2 has the effect of being able to execute a variety of presentation modes, since the presentation mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of second information stored during that execution.

Gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode is one in which a presentation related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information that is executed thereafter is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 and AB2, gaming machine AB3 has the effect that, when second information is stored, dynamic display of second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the presentation mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information starts, so that the player can be made aware at an early stage that the dynamic display of the second identification information, which is executed with priority, is about to start.

A gaming machine AB4, which is any one of gaming machines AB1 to AB3, has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, and the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 to AB3, gaming machine AB4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information, since a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be easily obtained.

<Characteristic AC group> (Uses special chart 1 change performance as a pseudo performance of special chart 2 change)
a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; a second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the first determination being executed; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the second determination being executed, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of a presentation pattern including at least a specific presentation pattern that is likely to be executed during a presentation period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the first effect can be executed as an effect for indicating the result of the second determination, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AC2, in which the second effect execution means in the gaming machine AC1 is capable of executing the second effect in an effect mode that includes at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, the gaming machine AC2 can execute a second presentation using a display mode that shows the result of the first judgment, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second performance execution means executes a second performance mode for indicating the result of the second discrimination within one performance indicating the result of the second discrimination, and the performance mode. A gaming machine AC3.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC2, the gaming machine AC3 has the effect of being able to produce more unexpected effects.

<Feature AD group> (Double display including probability change even for normal hits)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of first discrimination symbols on a display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of second discrimination symbols on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a second discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and a bonus awarding means capable of awarding a bonus advantageous to a player when the first discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific first discrimination result or when the second discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific second discrimination result, The gaming machine AD1 is configured such that a first benefit can be awarded as the benefit when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination is stopped and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit can be awarded when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine has a determination means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a multiple reach display mode in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining identification patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either of the first specific combination and the second specific combination, and then displays the first identification patterns in the specific combination.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot using a combination of multiple symbols, and then awarding different prizes depending on the type of symbol displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, some of the symbols that make up a combination that does not award a lower bonus than the bonus desired by the player are displayed statically, which causes the player to lose interest in the game before the result is announced.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players.

According to gaming machine AD1, when identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed after passing through multiple reach display modes, so that it is possible to prolong the expectation that both the combination corresponding to the first special benefit and the combination corresponding to the second special benefit will be displayed, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AD1, the determination means determines the first benefit when the specific first judgment result occurs during the specific period.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AD1, gaming machine AD2 has the effect of making it easier to have expectations that the second benefit will be awarded even if the first judgment is made during the specific period, since a specific combination is displayed through a multiple reach display mode, even during the specific period when the first benefit is determined by the determination means.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second benefit when the specific second discrimination result is obtained during the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a special multiple reach display mode in which one second discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining discrimination patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any one of two or more different second specific combinations, and then displays the second discrimination patterns in the specific combination. A gaming machine AD3 characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD2, gaming machine AD3 has the effect of allowing a player to recognize early on that a second benefit advantageous to the player will be granted without fail if a specific second judgment result is obtained during the specific period.

<Feature AE group> (Break ED control when hitting a certain probability)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a setting means for setting a favorable game state that is more favorable to the player than a normal game state as a game state that is set after the execution of the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area until an end condition is established; and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode that can suggest the game state that will be set after the execution of the bonus game when the bonus game ends, wherein the suggestion mode is configured by combining a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the favorable game state are configured in the same period.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game is decided by a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and different winning games are played depending on the type of winning game. During a specific type of winning game, a variable ball entry area that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter is changed to a state where the ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the area, the game state after the winning game becomes a game state favorable to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, even when a specific type of winning game is executed, there are cases where the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry area, which causes an increase in the control load in the notification control.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can reduce the control load.

According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestive mode to the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation of the period for displaying the suggestive mode, while setting the mode suggested by the ball entry state in a specific area, which has the effect of facilitating the notification control of the suggestive mode at the end of the bonus game and reducing the control load.

The gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that it has a suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode to be executed by the suggestion mode execution means in response to the type of bonus game to be executed when the bonus game is executed in the gaming machine AE1, and a switching means capable of switching the second suggestion mode, which is set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the specific bonus game, to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE1, gaming machine AE2 has the effect of suppressing the control load and executing the correct suggestion, because even if the suggestion mode is set at the start of bonus play to suppress the concentration of control load at the end of the bonus play, the suggestion mode can be switched to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal play state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode.

<Feature AF group> (Setting different lengths of ED period depending on the type of jackpot)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; and a period setting means for setting a period of a length corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed as a period for indicating the end of the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the bonus game.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine AF1 can set different periods depending on the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF1, it is provided with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF1, gaming machine AF2 can execute specific effects at different periods set according to the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AF3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a period switching means that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during the execution of the bonus game in the gaming machine AF1 or AF2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 and AF2, gaming machine AF3 can also vary the length of the period when a variable condition is met during bonus play, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

<Feature AG group> (ED period varies depending on whether or not V is won)
a specific area through which a game ball can pass while the bonus game is being executed; a game state setting means for setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player while the bonus game is being executed, based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed; and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period to indicate the end of the bonus game while a predetermined end condition is met while the bonus game is being executed, wherein the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period of different lengths depending on whether the game ball has passed through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed or not.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine AG1, it is possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether or not the gaming ball has passed through a specific area during bonus play, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AG1 has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance during the specific period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AG1, gaming machine AG2 can execute specific effects within a specific period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the specific presentation in gaming machine AG2 includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passing status of the gaming ball into the specific area during the bonus game.

With gaming machine AG3, the specific effects include a notification mode, which has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. Also, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is awarded.

Among the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning game. Some of these gaming machines allow the player to execute multiple games with different degrees of advantage, and aim to increase the player's interest in the games by allowing the player to play a variety of games with the aim of winning a winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-038007 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvement.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on establishment of a first discrimination condition, second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result, second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination means becoming a predetermined second discrimination result, first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination based on the first discrimination being executed, and second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination based on the second discrimination being executed, and the second effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the second effect of a presentation pattern including at least a specific presentation pattern that is likely to be executed during a presentation period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is established.
A gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, in which the second performance execution means is capable of executing the second performance in a performance mode that includes at least a display mode indicating the result of the first determination as a performance mode of the first performance.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, wherein the second presentation execution means executes a second presentation mode for indicating the judgment result of the second discrimination within the second presentation of 1 indicating the judgment result of the second discrimination, and the presentation mode.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine includes first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result, second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination means becoming a predetermined second discrimination result, first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination based on the first discrimination being executed, and second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination based on the second discrimination being executed, and the second effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the second effect of a presentation pattern including at least a specific presentation pattern that is likely to be executed during a presentation period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is established.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the second performance execution means is capable of executing the second performance in a performance mode that includes at least a display mode indicating the result of the first determination as a performance mode of the first performance.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, the second presentation execution means executes a second presentation mode for indicating the judgment result of the second discrimination within the second presentation of 1 indicating the judgment result of the second discrimination, and the presentation mode.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area;
A first ball entry means through which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball;
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether a game has been completed based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
a means for generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result;
A second ball entry means, which is different from the first ball entry means, and which allows the game balls launched by the launching means to enter the ball entry means;
a displacement means capable of displacing between a first position where it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first position;
a displacement control means capable of at least executing a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the first position to the second position;
the displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control;
The gaming machine includes:
When a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be capable of generating at least a first mode based on the judgment being executed by the judgment means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

Images